Mercurial > repo

comparison share/mtg/rules.txt @ 11957:92fcdaf0aa62 draft

Find changesets by keywords (author, files, the commit message), revision number or hash, or revset expression.
<wib_jonas> ` set -e; cd share/mtg; tr -d \\\\r <MagicCompRules_20191004.txt > rules.txt
author HackEso <hackeso@esolangs.org>
date Tue, 01 Oct 2019 08:34:16 +0000
parents 1f965298f0fe
children
comparison
equal deleted inserted replaced
11956:1f965298f0fe 11957:92fcdaf0aa62
1 Magic: The Gatheing Compehensive Rules 1 Magic: The Gathering Comprehensive Rules
2 2
3 These ules ae effective as of Octobe 4, 2019. 3 These rules are effective as of October 4, 2019.
4 4
5 Intoduction 5 Introduction
6 6
7 This document is the ultimate authoity fo Magic: The Gatheing® competitive game play. It consists of a seies of numbeed ules followed by a glossay. Many of the numbeed ules ae divided into subules, and each sepaate ule and subule of the game has its own numbe. (Note that subules skip the lettes “l” and “o” due to potential confusion with the numbes “1” and “0”; subule 704.5k is followed by 704.5m, then 704.5n, then 704.5p, fo example.) 7 This document is the ultimate authority for Magic: The Gathering® competitive game play. It consists of a series of numbered rules followed by a glossary. Many of the numbered rules are divided into subrules, and each separate rule and subrule of the game has its own number. (Note that subrules skip the letters “l” and “o” due to potential confusion with the numbers “1” and “0”; subrule 704.5k is followed by 704.5m, then 704.5n, then 704.5p, for example.)
8 8
9 Changes may have been made to this document since its publication. You can download the most ecent vesion fom the Magic ules website at Magic.Wizads.com/Rules. If you have questions, you can get the answes fom us at Suppot.Wizads.com. 9 Changes may have been made to this document since its publication. You can download the most recent version from the Magic rules website at Magic.Wizards.com/Rules. If you have questions, you can get the answers from us at Support.Wizards.com.
10 10
11 Contents 11 Contents
12 12
13 1. Game Concepts 13 1. Game Concepts
14 100. Geneal 14 100. General
15 101. The Magic Golden Rules 15 101. The Magic Golden Rules
16 102. Playes 16 102. Players
17 103. Stating the Game 17 103. Starting the Game
18 104. Ending the Game 18 104. Ending the Game
19 105. Colos 19 105. Colors
20 106. Mana 20 106. Mana
21 107. Numbes and Symbols 21 107. Numbers and Symbols
22 108. Cads 22 108. Cards
23 109. Objects 23 109. Objects
24 110. Pemanents 24 110. Permanents
25 111. Tokens 25 111. Tokens
26 112. Spells 26 112. Spells
27 113. Abilities 27 113. Abilities
28 114. Emblems 28 114. Emblems
29 115. Tagets 29 115. Targets
30 116. Special Actions 30 116. Special Actions
31 117. Timing and Pioity 31 117. Timing and Priority
32 118. Costs 32 118. Costs
33 119. Life 33 119. Life
34 120. Damage 34 120. Damage
35 121. Dawing a Cad 35 121. Drawing a Card
36 122. Countes 36 122. Counters
37 37
38 2. Pats of a Cad 38 2. Parts of a Card
39 200. Geneal 39 200. General
40 201. Name 40 201. Name
41 202. Mana Cost and Colo 41 202. Mana Cost and Color
42 203. Illustation 42 203. Illustration
43 204. Colo Indicato 43 204. Color Indicator
44 205. Type Line 44 205. Type Line
45 206. Expansion Symbol 45 206. Expansion Symbol
46 207. Text Box 46 207. Text Box
47 208. Powe/Toughness 47 208. Power/Toughness
48 209. Loyalty 48 209. Loyalty
49 210. Hand Modifie 49 210. Hand Modifier
50 211. Life Modifie 50 211. Life Modifier
51 212. Infomation Below the Text Box 51 212. Information Below the Text Box
52 52
53 3. Cad Types 53 3. Card Types
54 300. Geneal 54 300. General
55 301. Atifacts 55 301. Artifacts
56 302. Ceatues 56 302. Creatures
57 303. Enchantments 57 303. Enchantments
58 304. Instants 58 304. Instants
59 305. Lands 59 305. Lands
60 306. Planeswalkes 60 306. Planeswalkers
61 307. Soceies 61 307. Sorceries
62 308. Tibals 62 308. Tribals
63 309. Planes 63 309. Planes
64 310. Phenomena 64 310. Phenomena
65 311. Vanguads 65 311. Vanguards
66 312. Schemes 66 312. Schemes
67 313. Conspiacies 67 313. Conspiracies
68 68
69 4. Zones 69 4. Zones
70 400. Geneal 70 400. General
71 401. Libay 71 401. Library
72 402. Hand 72 402. Hand
73 403. Battlefield 73 403. Battlefield
74 404. Gaveyad 74 404. Graveyard
75 405. Stack 75 405. Stack
76 406. Exile 76 406. Exile
77 407. Ante 77 407. Ante
78 408. Command 78 408. Command
79 79
80 5. Tun Stuctue 80 5. Turn Structure
81 500. Geneal 81 500. General
82 501. Beginning Phase 82 501. Beginning Phase
83 502. Untap Step 83 502. Untap Step
84 503. Upkeep Step 84 503. Upkeep Step
85 504. Daw Step 85 504. Draw Step
86 505. Main Phase 86 505. Main Phase
87 506. Combat Phase 87 506. Combat Phase
88 507. Beginning of Combat Step 88 507. Beginning of Combat Step
89 508. Declae Attackes Step 89 508. Declare Attackers Step
90 509. Declae Blockes Step 90 509. Declare Blockers Step
91 510. Combat Damage Step 91 510. Combat Damage Step
92 511. End of Combat Step 92 511. End of Combat Step
93 512. Ending Phase 93 512. Ending Phase
94 513. End Step 94 513. End Step
95 514. Cleanup Step 95 514. Cleanup Step
96 96
97 6. Spells, Abilities, and Effects 97 6. Spells, Abilities, and Effects
98 600. Geneal 98 600. General
99 601. Casting Spells 99 601. Casting Spells
100 602. Activating Activated Abilities 100 602. Activating Activated Abilities
101 603. Handling Tiggeed Abilities 101 603. Handling Triggered Abilities
102 604. Handling Static Abilities 102 604. Handling Static Abilities
103 605. Mana Abilities 103 605. Mana Abilities
104 606. Loyalty Abilities 104 606. Loyalty Abilities
105 607. Linked Abilities 105 607. Linked Abilities
106 608. Resolving Spells and Abilities 106 608. Resolving Spells and Abilities
107 609. Effects 107 609. Effects
108 610. One-Shot Effects 108 610. One-Shot Effects
109 611. Continuous Effects 109 611. Continuous Effects
110 612. Text-Changing Effects 110 612. Text-Changing Effects
111 613. Inteaction of Continuous Effects 111 613. Interaction of Continuous Effects
112 614. Replacement Effects 112 614. Replacement Effects
113 615. Pevention Effects 113 615. Prevention Effects
114 616. Inteaction of Replacement and/o Pevention Effects 114 616. Interaction of Replacement and/or Prevention Effects
115 115
116 7. Additional Rules 116 7. Additional Rules
117 700. Geneal 117 700. General
118 701. Keywod Actions 118 701. Keyword Actions
119 702. Keywod Abilities 119 702. Keyword Abilities
120 703. Tun-Based Actions 120 703. Turn-Based Actions
121 704. State-Based Actions 121 704. State-Based Actions
122 705. Flipping a Coin 122 705. Flipping a Coin
123 706. Copying Objects 123 706. Copying Objects
124 707. Face-Down Spells and Pemanents 124 707. Face-Down Spells and Permanents
125 708. Split Cads 125 708. Split Cards
126 709. Flip Cads 126 709. Flip Cards
127 710. Levele Cads 127 710. Leveler Cards
128 711. Double-Faced Cads 128 711. Double-Faced Cards
129 712. Meld Cads 129 712. Meld Cards
130 713. Checklist Cads 130 713. Checklist Cards
131 714. Saga Cads 131 714. Saga Cards
132 715. Adventue Cads 132 715. Adventurer Cards
133 716. Contolling Anothe Playe 133 716. Controlling Another Player
134 717. Ending Tuns and Phases 134 717. Ending Turns and Phases
135 718. The Monach 135 718. The Monarch
136 719. Restating the Game 136 719. Restarting the Game
137 720. Subgames 137 720. Subgames
138 721. Taking Shotcuts 138 721. Taking Shortcuts
139 722. Handling Illegal Actions 139 722. Handling Illegal Actions
140 140
141 8. Multiplaye Rules 141 8. Multiplayer Rules
142 800. Geneal 142 800. General
143 801. Limited Range of Influence Option 143 801. Limited Range of Influence Option
144 802. Attack Multiple Playes Option 144 802. Attack Multiple Players Option
145 803. Attack Left and Attack Right Options 145 803. Attack Left and Attack Right Options
146 804. Deploy Ceatues Option 146 804. Deploy Creatures Option
147 805. Shaed Team Tuns Option 147 805. Shared Team Turns Option
148 806. Fee-fo-All Vaiant 148 806. Free-for-All Variant
149 807. Gand Melee Vaiant 149 807. Grand Melee Variant
150 808. Team vs. Team Vaiant 150 808. Team vs. Team Variant
151 809. Empeo Vaiant 151 809. Emperor Variant
152 810. Two-Headed Giant Vaiant 152 810. Two-Headed Giant Variant
153 811. Altenating Teams Vaiant 153 811. Alternating Teams Variant
154 154
155 9. Casual Vaiants 155 9. Casual Variants
156 900. Geneal 156 900. General
157 901. Planechase 157 901. Planechase
158 902. Vanguad 158 902. Vanguard
159 903. Commande 159 903. Commander
160 904. Achenemy 160 904. Archenemy
161 905. Conspiacy Daft 161 905. Conspiracy Draft
162 162
163 Glossay 163 Glossary
164 164
165 Cedits 165 Credits
166 166
167 1. Game Concepts 167 1. Game Concepts
168 168
169 100. Geneal 169 100. General
170 170
171 100.1. These Magic ules apply to any Magic game with two o moe playes, including two-playe games and multiplaye games. 171 100.1. These Magic rules apply to any Magic game with two or more players, including two-player games and multiplayer games.
172 172
173 100.1a A two-playe game is a game that begins with only two playes. 173 100.1a A two-player game is a game that begins with only two players.
174 174
175 100.1b A multiplaye game is a game that begins with moe than two playes. See section 8, “Multiplaye Rules.” 175 100.1b A multiplayer game is a game that begins with more than two players. See section 8, “Multiplayer Rules.”
176 176
177 100.2. To play, each playe needs thei own deck of taditional Magic cads, small items to epesent any tokens and countes, and some way to clealy tack life totals. 177 100.2. To play, each player needs their own deck of traditional Magic cards, small items to represent any tokens and counters, and some way to clearly track life totals.
178 178
179 100.2a In constucted play (a way of playing in which each playe ceates thei own deck ahead of time), each deck must contain at least sixty cads. A constucted deck may contain any numbe of basic land cads and no moe than fou of any cad with a paticula English name othe than basic land cads. 179 100.2a In constructed play (a way of playing in which each player creates their own deck ahead of time), each deck must contain at least sixty cards. A constructed deck may contain any number of basic land cards and no more than four of any card with a particular English name other than basic land cards.
180 180
181 100.2b In limited play (a way of playing in which each playe gets the same quantity of unopened Magic poduct such as booste packs and ceates thei own deck using only this poduct and basic land cads), each deck must contain at least foty cads. A limited deck may contain as many duplicates of a cad as ae included with the poduct. 181 100.2b In limited play (a way of playing in which each player gets the same quantity of unopened Magic product such as booster packs and creates their own deck using only this product and basic land cards), each deck must contain at least forty cards. A limited deck may contain as many duplicates of a card as are included with the product.
182 182
183 100.3. Some casual vaiants equie additional items, such as specially designated cads, nontaditional Magic cads, and dice. See section 9, “Casual Vaiants.” 183 100.3. Some casual variants require additional items, such as specially designated cards, nontraditional Magic cards, and dice. See section 9, “Casual Variants.”
184 184
185 100.4. Each playe may also have a sideboad, which is a goup of additional cads the playe may use to modify thei deck between games of a match. 185 100.4. Each player may also have a sideboard, which is a group of additional cards the player may use to modify their deck between games of a match.
186 186
187 100.4a In constucted play, a sideboad may contain no moe than fifteen cads. The fou-cad limit (see ule 100.2a) applies to the combined deck and sideboad. 187 100.4a In constructed play, a sideboard may contain no more than fifteen cards. The four-card limit (see rule 100.2a) applies to the combined deck and sideboard.
188 188
189 100.4b In limited play involving individual playes, all cads in a playe’s cad pool not included in thei deck ae in that playe’s sideboad. 189 100.4b In limited play involving individual players, all cards in a player’s card pool not included in their deck are in that player’s sideboard.
190 190
191 100.4c In limited play involving the Two-Headed Giant multiplaye vaiant, all cads in a team’s cad pool but not in eithe playe’s deck ae in that team’s sideboad. 191 100.4c In limited play involving the Two-Headed Giant multiplayer variant, all cards in a team’s card pool but not in either player’s deck are in that team’s sideboard.
192 192
193 100.4d In limited play involving othe multiplaye team vaiants, each cad in a team’s cad pool but not in any playe’s deck is assigned to the sideboad of one of those playes. Each playe has thei own sideboad; cads may not be tansfeed between playes. 193 100.4d In limited play involving other multiplayer team variants, each card in a team’s card pool but not in any player’s deck is assigned to the sideboard of one of those players. Each player has their own sideboard; cards may not be transferred between players.
194 194
195 100.5. Thee is no maximum deck size. 195 100.5. There is no maximum deck size.
196 196
197 100.6. Most Magic tounaments (oganized play activities whee playes compete against othe playes to win pizes) have additional ules coveed in the Magic: The Gatheing Tounament Rules (found at WPN.Wizads.com/en/esouces/ules-documents). These ules may limit the use of some cads, including baing all cads fom some olde sets. 197 100.6. Most Magic tournaments (organized play activities where players compete against other players to win prizes) have additional rules covered in the Magic: The Gathering Tournament Rules (found at WPN.Wizards.com/en/resources/rules-documents). These rules may limit the use of some cards, including barring all cards from some older sets.
198 198
199 100.6a Tounaments usually consist of a seies of matches. A two-playe match usually involves playing until one playe has won two games. A multiplaye match usually consists of only one game. 199 100.6a Tournaments usually consist of a series of matches. A two-player match usually involves playing until one player has won two games. A multiplayer match usually consists of only one game.
200 200
201 100.6b Playes can use the Magic Stoe & Event Locato at Wizads.com/Locato to find tounaments in thei aea. 201 100.6b Players can use the Magic Store & Event Locator at Wizards.com/Locator to find tournaments in their area.
202 202
203 100.7. Cetain pomotional cads and cads in the Unglued, Unhinged, and Unstable sets ae pinted with a silve bode. These cads ae intended fo casual play and may have featues and text that aen’t coveed by these ules. 203 100.7. Certain promotional cards and cards in the Unglued, Unhinged, and Unstable sets are printed with a silver border. These cards are intended for casual play and may have features and text that aren’t covered by these rules.
204 204
205 101. The Magic Golden Rules 205 101. The Magic Golden Rules
206 206
207 101.1. Wheneve a cad’s text diectly contadicts these ules, the cad takes pecedence. The cad oveides only the ule that applies to that specific situation. The only exception is that a playe can concede the game at any time (see ule 104.3a). 207 101.1. Whenever a card’s text directly contradicts these rules, the card takes precedence. The card overrides only the rule that applies to that specific situation. The only exception is that a player can concede the game at any time (see rule 104.3a).
208 208
209 101.2. When a ule o effect allows o diects something to happen, and anothe effect states that it can’t happen, the “can’t” effect takes pecedence. 209 101.2. When a rule or effect allows or directs something to happen, and another effect states that it can’t happen, the “can’t” effect takes precedence.
210 Example: If one effect eads “You may play an additional land this tun” and anothe eads “You can’t play lands this tun,” the effect that pecludes you fom playing lands wins. 210 Example: If one effect reads “You may play an additional land this turn” and another reads “You can’t play lands this turn,” the effect that precludes you from playing lands wins.
211 211
212 101.2a Adding abilities to objects and emoving abilities fom objects don’t fall unde this ule. (See ule 113.10.) 212 101.2a Adding abilities to objects and removing abilities from objects don’t fall under this rule. (See rule 113.10.)
213 213
214 101.3. Any pat of an instuction that’s impossible to pefom is ignoed. (In many cases the cad will specify consequences fo this; if it doesn’t, thee’s no effect.) 214 101.3. Any part of an instruction that’s impossible to perform is ignored. (In many cases the card will specify consequences for this; if it doesn’t, there’s no effect.)
215 215
216 101.4. If multiple playes would make choices and/o take actions at the same time, the active playe (the playe whose tun it is) makes any choices equied, then the next playe in tun ode (usually the playe seated to the active playe’s left) makes any choices equied, followed by the emaining nonactive playes in tun ode. Then the actions happen simultaneously. This ule is often efeed to as the “Active Playe, Nonactive Playe (APNAP) ode” ule. 216 101.4. If multiple players would make choices and/or take actions at the same time, the active player (the player whose turn it is) makes any choices required, then the next player in turn order (usually the player seated to the active player’s left) makes any choices required, followed by the remaining nonactive players in turn order. Then the actions happen simultaneously. This rule is often referred to as the “Active Player, Nonactive Player (APNAP) order” rule.
217 Example: A cad eads “Each playe sacifices a ceatue.” Fist, the active playe chooses a ceatue they contol. Then each of the nonactive playes, in tun ode, chooses a ceatue they contol. Then all ceatues chosen this way ae sacificed simultaneously. 217 Example: A card reads “Each player sacrifices a creature.” First, the active player chooses a creature they control. Then each of the nonactive players, in turn order, chooses a creature they control. Then all creatures chosen this way are sacrificed simultaneously.
218 218
219 101.4a If an effect has each playe choose a cad in a hidden zone, such as thei hand o libay, those cads may emain face down as they’e chosen. Howeve, each playe must clealy indicate which face-down cad they ae choosing. 219 101.4a If an effect has each player choose a card in a hidden zone, such as their hand or library, those cards may remain face down as they’re chosen. However, each player must clearly indicate which face-down card they are choosing.
220 220
221 101.4b A playe knows the choices made by the pevious playes when making thei choice, except as specified in 101.4a. 221 101.4b A player knows the choices made by the previous players when making their choice, except as specified in 101.4a.
222 222
223 101.4c If a playe would make moe than one choice at the same time, the playe makes the choices in the ode specified. If no ode is specified, the playe chooses the ode. 223 101.4c If a player would make more than one choice at the same time, the player makes the choices in the order specified. If no order is specified, the player chooses the order.
224 224
225 101.4d If a choice made by a nonactive playe causes the active playe, o a diffeent nonactive playe ealie in the tun ode, to have to make a choice, APNAP ode is estated fo all outstanding choices. 225 101.4d If a choice made by a nonactive player causes the active player, or a different nonactive player earlier in the turn order, to have to make a choice, APNAP order is restarted for all outstanding choices.
226 226
227 102. Playes 227 102. Players
228 228
229 102.1. A playe is one of the people in the game. The active playe is the playe whose tun it is. The othe playes ae nonactive playes. 229 102.1. A player is one of the people in the game. The active player is the player whose turn it is. The other players are nonactive players.
230 230
231 102.2. In a two-playe game, a playe’s opponent is the othe playe. 231 102.2. In a two-player game, a player’s opponent is the other player.
232 232
233 102.3. In a multiplaye game between teams, a playe’s teammates ae the othe playes on thei team, and the playe’s opponents ae all playes not on thei team. 233 102.3. In a multiplayer game between teams, a player’s teammates are the other players on their team, and the player’s opponents are all players not on their team.
234 234
235 102.4. A spell o ability may use the tem “you team” as shothand fo “you and/o you teammates.” In a game that isn’t a multiplaye game between teams, “you team” means the same thing as “you.” 235 102.4. A spell or ability may use the term “your team” as shorthand for “you and/or your teammates.” In a game that isn’t a multiplayer game between teams, “your team” means the same thing as “you.”
236 236
237 103. Stating the Game 237 103. Starting the Game
238 238
239 103.1. At the stat of a game, each playe shuffles thei deck so that the cads ae in a andom ode. Each playe may then shuffle o cut thei opponents’ decks. The playes’ decks become thei libaies. 239 103.1. At the start of a game, each player shuffles their deck so that the cards are in a random order. Each player may then shuffle or cut their opponents’ decks. The players’ decks become their libraries.
240 240
241 103.1a If a playe is using a sideboad (see ule 100.4) o cads being epesented by checklist cads (see ule 713), those cads ae set aside befoe shuffling. 241 103.1a If a player is using a sideboard (see rule 100.4) or cards being represented by checklist cards (see rule 713), those cards are set aside before shuffling.
242 242
243 103.1b In a Commande game, each playe puts thei commande fom thei deck face up into the command zone befoe shuffling. See ule 903.6. 243 103.1b In a Commander game, each player puts their commander from their deck face up into the command zone before shuffling. See rule 903.6.
244 244
245 103.1c In a Conspiacy Daft game, each playe puts any numbe of conspiacy cads fom thei sideboad into the command zone befoe shuffling. See ule 905.4. 245 103.1c In a Conspiracy Draft game, each player puts any number of conspiracy cards from their sideboard into the command zone before shuffling. See rule 905.4.
246 246
247 103.2. Afte the decks have been shuffled, the playes detemine which one of them will choose who takes the fist tun. In the fist game of a match (including a single-game match), the playes may use any mutually ageeable method (flipping a coin, olling dice, etc.) to do so. In a match of seveal games, the lose of the pevious game chooses who takes the fist tun. If the pevious game was a daw, the playe who made the choice in that game makes the choice in this game. The playe chosen to take the fist tun is the stating playe. The game’s default tun ode begins with the stating playe and poceeds clockwise. 247 103.2. After the decks have been shuffled, the players determine which one of them will choose who takes the first turn. In the first game of a match (including a single-game match), the players may use any mutually agreeable method (flipping a coin, rolling dice, etc.) to do so. In a match of several games, the loser of the previous game chooses who takes the first turn. If the previous game was a draw, the player who made the choice in that game makes the choice in this game. The player chosen to take the first turn is the starting player. The game’s default turn order begins with the starting player and proceeds clockwise.
248 248
249 103.2a In a game using the shaed team tuns option, thee is a stating team athe than a stating playe. 249 103.2a In a game using the shared team turns option, there is a starting team rather than a starting player.
250 250
251 103.2b In an Achenemy game, these methods aen’t used to detemine who takes the fist tun. Rathe, the achenemy takes the fist tun. 251 103.2b In an Archenemy game, these methods aren’t used to determine who takes the first turn. Rather, the archenemy takes the first turn.
252 252
253 103.2c One cad (Powe Play) states that its contolle is the stating playe. This effect supesedes these methods. 253 103.2c One card (Power Play) states that its controller is the starting player. This effect supersedes these methods.
254 254
255 103.3. Each playe begins the game with a stating life total of 20. Some vaiant games have diffeent stating life totals. 255 103.3. Each player begins the game with a starting life total of 20. Some variant games have different starting life totals.
256 256
257 103.3a In a Two-Headed Giant game, each team’s stating life total is 30. 257 103.3a In a Two-Headed Giant game, each team’s starting life total is 30.
258 258
259 103.3b In a Vanguad game, each playe’s stating life total is 20 plus o minus the life modifie of thei vanguad cad. 259 103.3b In a Vanguard game, each player’s starting life total is 20 plus or minus the life modifier of their vanguard card.
260 260
261 103.3c In a Commande game, each playe’s stating life total is 40. 261 103.3c In a Commander game, each player’s starting life total is 40.
262 262
263 103.3d In a two-playe Bawl game, each playe’s stating life total is 25. In a multiplaye Bawl game, each playe’s stating life total is 30. 263 103.3d In a two-player Brawl game, each player’s starting life total is 25. In a multiplayer Brawl game, each player’s starting life total is 30.
264 264
265 103.3e In an Achenemy game, the achenemy’s stating life total is 40. 265 103.3e In an Archenemy game, the archenemy’s starting life total is 40.
266 266
267 103.4. Each playe daws a numbe of cads equal to thei stating hand size, which is nomally seven. (Some effects can modify a playe’s stating hand size.) A playe who is dissatisfied with thei initial hand may take a mulligan. Fist, the stating playe declaes whethe they will take a mulligan. Then each othe playe in tun ode does the same. Once each playe has made a declaation, all playes who decided to take mulligans do so at the same time. To take a mulligan, a playe shuffles the cads in thei hand back into thei libay, daws a new hand of cads equal to thei stating hand size, then puts a numbe of those cads equal to the numbe of times that playe has taken a mulligan on the bottom of thei libay in any ode. Once a playe chooses not to take a mulligan, the emaining cads become that playe’s opening hand, and that playe may not take any futhe mulligans. This pocess is then epeated until no playe takes a mulligan. A playe can take mulligans until thei opening hand would be zeo cads, afte which they may not take futhe mulligans. 267 103.4. Each player draws a number of cards equal to their starting hand size, which is normally seven. (Some effects can modify a player’s starting hand size.) A player who is dissatisfied with their initial hand may take a mulligan. First, the starting player declares whether they will take a mulligan. Then each other player in turn order does the same. Once each player has made a declaration, all players who decided to take mulligans do so at the same time. To take a mulligan, a player shuffles the cards in their hand back into their library, draws a new hand of cards equal to their starting hand size, then puts a number of those cards equal to the number of times that player has taken a mulligan on the bottom of their library in any order. Once a player chooses not to take a mulligan, the remaining cards become that player’s opening hand, and that player may not take any further mulligans. This process is then repeated until no player takes a mulligan. A player can take mulligans until their opening hand would be zero cards, after which they may not take further mulligans.
268 268
269 103.4a In a Vanguad game, each playe’s stating hand size is seven plus o minus the hand modifie of thei vanguad cad. 269 103.4a In a Vanguard game, each player’s starting hand size is seven plus or minus the hand modifier of their vanguard card.
270 270
271 103.4b If an effect allows a playe to pefom an action “any time [that playe] could mulligan,” the playe may pefom that action at a time they would declae whethe they will take a mulligan. This need not be in the fist ound of mulligans. Othe playes may have aleady made thei mulligan declaations by the time the playe has the option to pefom this action. If the playe pefoms the action, they then declae whethe they will take a mulligan. 271 103.4b If an effect allows a player to perform an action “any time [that player] could mulligan,” the player may perform that action at a time they would declare whether they will take a mulligan. This need not be in the first round of mulligans. Other players may have already made their mulligan declarations by the time the player has the option to perform this action. If the player performs the action, they then declare whether they will take a mulligan.
272 272
273 103.4c In a multiplaye game and in any Bawl game, the fist mulligan a playe takes doesn’t count towad the numbe of cads that playe will put on the bottom of thei libay o the numbe of mulligans that playe may take. Subsequent mulligans ae counted towad these numbes as nomal. 273 103.4c In a multiplayer game and in any Brawl game, the first mulligan a player takes doesn’t count toward the number of cards that player will put on the bottom of their library or the number of mulligans that player may take. Subsequent mulligans are counted toward these numbers as normal.
274 274
275 103.4d In a multiplaye game using the shaed team tuns option, fist each playe on the stating team declaes whethe that playe will take a mulligan, then the playes on each othe team in tun ode do the same. Teammates may consult while making thei decisions. Then all mulligans ae taken at the same time. A playe may take a mulligan even afte a teammate has decided to keep thei opening hand. 275 103.4d In a multiplayer game using the shared team turns option, first each player on the starting team declares whether that player will take a mulligan, then the players on each other team in turn order do the same. Teammates may consult while making their decisions. Then all mulligans are taken at the same time. A player may take a mulligan even after a teammate has decided to keep their opening hand.
276 276
277 103.5. Some cads allow a playe to take actions with them fom thei opening hand. Once the mulligan pocess (see ule 103.4) is complete, the stating playe may take any such actions in any ode. Then each othe playe in tun ode may do the same. 277 103.5. Some cards allow a player to take actions with them from their opening hand. Once the mulligan process (see rule 103.4) is complete, the starting player may take any such actions in any order. Then each other player in turn order may do the same.
278 278
279 103.5a If a cad allows a playe to begin the game with that cad on the battlefield, the playe taking this action puts that cad onto the battlefield. 279 103.5a If a card allows a player to begin the game with that card on the battlefield, the player taking this action puts that card onto the battlefield.
280 280
281 103.5b If a cad allows a playe to eveal it fom thei opening hand, the playe taking this action does so. The cad emains evealed until the fist tun begins. Each cad may be evealed this way only once. 281 103.5b If a card allows a player to reveal it from their opening hand, the player taking this action does so. The card remains revealed until the first turn begins. Each card may be revealed this way only once.
282 282
283 103.5c In a multiplaye game using the shaed team tuns option, fist each playe on the stating team, in whateve ode that team likes, may take such actions. Teammates may consult while making thei decisions. Then each playe on each othe team in tun ode does the same. 283 103.5c In a multiplayer game using the shared team turns option, first each player on the starting team, in whatever order that team likes, may take such actions. Teammates may consult while making their decisions. Then each player on each other team in turn order does the same.
284 284
285 103.6. In a Planechase game, the stating playe moves the top cad of thei plana deck off that plana deck and tuns it face up. If it’s a phenomenon cad, the playe puts that cad on the bottom of thei plana deck and epeats this pocess until a plane cad is tuned face up. The face-up plane cad becomes the stating plane. (See ule 901, “Planechase.”) 285 103.6. In a Planechase game, the starting player moves the top card of their planar deck off that planar deck and turns it face up. If it’s a phenomenon card, the player puts that card on the bottom of their planar deck and repeats this process until a plane card is turned face up. The face-up plane card becomes the starting plane. (See rule 901, “Planechase.”)
286 286
287 103.7. The stating playe takes thei fist tun. 287 103.7. The starting player takes their first turn.
288 288
289 103.7a In a two-playe game, the playe who plays fist skips the daw step (see ule 504, “Daw Step”) of thei fist tun. 289 103.7a In a two-player game, the player who plays first skips the draw step (see rule 504, “Draw Step”) of their first turn.
290 290
291 103.7b In a Two-Headed Giant game, the team who plays fist skips the daw step of thei fist tun. 291 103.7b In a Two-Headed Giant game, the team who plays first skips the draw step of their first turn.
292 292
293 103.7c In all othe multiplaye games, no playe skips the daw step of thei fist tun. 293 103.7c In all other multiplayer games, no player skips the draw step of their first turn.
294 294
295 104. Ending the Game 295 104. Ending the Game
296 296
297 104.1. A game ends immediately when a playe wins, when the game is a daw, o when the game is estated. 297 104.1. A game ends immediately when a player wins, when the game is a draw, or when the game is restarted.
298 298
299 104.2. Thee ae seveal ways to win the game. 299 104.2. There are several ways to win the game.
300 300
301 104.2a A playe still in the game wins the game if that playe’s opponents have all left the game. This happens immediately and oveides all effects that would peclude that playe fom winning the game. 301 104.2a A player still in the game wins the game if that player’s opponents have all left the game. This happens immediately and overrides all effects that would preclude that player from winning the game.
302 302
303 104.2b An effect may state that a playe wins the game. 303 104.2b An effect may state that a player wins the game.
304 304
305 104.2c In a multiplaye game between teams, a team with at least one playe still in the game wins the game if all othe teams have left the game. Each playe on the winning team wins the game, even if one o moe of those playes had peviously lost that game. 305 104.2c In a multiplayer game between teams, a team with at least one player still in the game wins the game if all other teams have left the game. Each player on the winning team wins the game, even if one or more of those players had previously lost that game.
306 306
307 104.2d In an Empeo game, a team wins the game if its empeo wins the game. (See ule 809.5.) 307 104.2d In an Emperor game, a team wins the game if its emperor wins the game. (See rule 809.5.)
308 308
309 104.3. Thee ae seveal ways to lose the game. 309 104.3. There are several ways to lose the game.
310 310
311 104.3a A playe can concede the game at any time. A playe who concedes leaves the game immediately. That playe loses the game. 311 104.3a A player can concede the game at any time. A player who concedes leaves the game immediately. That player loses the game.
312 312
313 104.3b If a playe’s life total is 0 o less, that playe loses the game the next time a playe would eceive pioity. (This is a state-based action. See ule 704.) 313 104.3b If a player’s life total is 0 or less, that player loses the game the next time a player would receive priority. (This is a state-based action. See rule 704.)
314 314
315 104.3c If a playe is equied to daw moe cads than ae left in thei libay, they daw the emaining cads and then lose the game the next time a playe would eceive pioity. (This is a state-based action. See ule 704.) 315 104.3c If a player is required to draw more cards than are left in their library, they draw the remaining cards and then lose the game the next time a player would receive priority. (This is a state-based action. See rule 704.)
316 316
317 104.3d If a playe has ten o moe poison countes, that playe loses the game the next time a playe would eceive pioity. (This is a state-based action. See ule 704.) 317 104.3d If a player has ten or more poison counters, that player loses the game the next time a player would receive priority. (This is a state-based action. See rule 704.)
318 318
319 104.3e An effect may state that a playe loses the game. 319 104.3e An effect may state that a player loses the game.
320 320
321 104.3f If a playe would both win and lose the game simultaneously, that playe loses the game. 321 104.3f If a player would both win and lose the game simultaneously, that player loses the game.
322 322
323 104.3g In a multiplaye game between teams, a team loses the game if all playes on that team have lost the game. 323 104.3g In a multiplayer game between teams, a team loses the game if all players on that team have lost the game.
324 324
325 104.3h In a multiplaye game using the limited ange of influence option (see ule 801), an effect that states that a playe wins the game instead causes all of that playe’s opponents within the playe’s ange of influence to lose the game. This may not cause the game to end. 325 104.3h In a multiplayer game using the limited range of influence option (see rule 801), an effect that states that a player wins the game instead causes all of that player’s opponents within the player’s range of influence to lose the game. This may not cause the game to end.
326 326
327 104.3i In an Empeo game, a team loses the game if its empeo loses the game. (See ule 809.5.) 327 104.3i In an Emperor game, a team loses the game if its emperor loses the game. (See rule 809.5.)
328 328
329 104.3j In a Commande game, a playe that’s been dealt 21 o moe combat damage by the same commande ove the couse of the game loses the game. (This is a state-based action. See ule 704. See also ule 903.10.) 329 104.3j In a Commander game, a player that’s been dealt 21 or more combat damage by the same commander over the course of the game loses the game. (This is a state-based action. See rule 704. See also rule 903.10.)
330 330
331 104.3k In a tounament, a playe may lose the game as a esult of a penalty given by a judge. See ule 100.6. 331 104.3k In a tournament, a player may lose the game as a result of a penalty given by a judge. See rule 100.6.
332 332
333 104.4. Thee ae seveal ways fo the game to be a daw. 333 104.4. There are several ways for the game to be a draw.
334 334
335 104.4a If all the playes emaining in a game lose simultaneously, the game is a daw. 335 104.4a If all the players remaining in a game lose simultaneously, the game is a draw.
336 336
337 104.4b If a game that’s not using the limited ange of influence option (including a two-playe game) somehow entes a “loop” of mandatoy actions, epeating a sequence of events with no way to stop, the game is a daw. Loops that contain an optional action don’t esult in a daw. 337 104.4b If a game that’s not using the limited range of influence option (including a two-player game) somehow enters a “loop” of mandatory actions, repeating a sequence of events with no way to stop, the game is a draw. Loops that contain an optional action don’t result in a draw.
338 338
339 104.4c An effect may state that the game is a daw. 339 104.4c An effect may state that the game is a draw.
340 340
341 104.4d In a multiplaye game between teams, the game is a daw if all emaining teams lose simultaneously. 341 104.4d In a multiplayer game between teams, the game is a draw if all remaining teams lose simultaneously.
342 342
343 104.4e In a multiplaye game using the limited ange of influence option, the effect of a spell o ability that states that the game is a daw causes the game to be a daw fo that spell o ability’s contolle and all playes within thei ange of influence. Only those playes leave the game; the game continues fo all othe playes. 343 104.4e In a multiplayer game using the limited range of influence option, the effect of a spell or ability that states that the game is a draw causes the game to be a draw for that spell or ability’s controller and all players within their range of influence. Only those players leave the game; the game continues for all other players.
344 344
345 104.4f In a multiplaye game using the limited ange of influence option, if the game somehow entes a “loop” of mandatoy actions, epeating a sequence of events with no way to stop, the game is a daw fo each playe who contols an object that’s involved in that loop, as well as fo each playe within the ange of influence of any of those playes. Only those playes leave the game; the game continues fo all othe playes. 345 104.4f In a multiplayer game using the limited range of influence option, if the game somehow enters a “loop” of mandatory actions, repeating a sequence of events with no way to stop, the game is a draw for each player who controls an object that’s involved in that loop, as well as for each player within the range of influence of any of those players. Only those players leave the game; the game continues for all other players.
346 346
347 104.4g In a multiplaye game between teams, the game is a daw fo a team if the game is a daw fo all emaining playes on that team. 347 104.4g In a multiplayer game between teams, the game is a draw for a team if the game is a draw for all remaining players on that team.
348 348
349 104.4h In the Empeo vaiant, the game is a daw fo a team if the game is a daw fo its empeo. (See ule 809.5.) 349 104.4h In the Emperor variant, the game is a draw for a team if the game is a draw for its emperor. (See rule 809.5.)
350 350
351 104.4i In a tounament, all playes in the game may agee to an intentional daw. See ule 100.6. 351 104.4i In a tournament, all players in the game may agree to an intentional draw. See rule 100.6.
352 352
353 104.5. If a playe loses the game, that playe leaves the game. If the game is a daw fo a playe, that playe leaves the game. The multiplaye ules handle what happens when a playe leaves the game; see ule 800.4. 353 104.5. If a player loses the game, that player leaves the game. If the game is a draw for a player, that player leaves the game. The multiplayer rules handle what happens when a player leaves the game; see rule 800.4.
354 354
355 104.6. One cad (Kan Libeated) estats the game. All playes still in the game when it estats then immediately begin a new game. See ule 719, “Restating the Game.” 355 104.6. One card (Karn Liberated) restarts the game. All players still in the game when it restarts then immediately begin a new game. See rule 719, “Restarting the Game.”
356 356
357 105. Colos 357 105. Colors
358 358
359 105.1. Thee ae five colos in the Magic game: white, blue, black, ed, and geen. 359 105.1. There are five colors in the Magic game: white, blue, black, red, and green.
360 360
361 105.2. An object can be one o moe of the five colos, o it can be no colo at all. An object is the colo o colos of the mana symbols in its mana cost, egadless of the colo of its fame. An object’s colo o colos may also be defined by a colo indicato o a chaacteistic-defining ability. See ule 202.2. 361 105.2. An object can be one or more of the five colors, or it can be no color at all. An object is the color or colors of the mana symbols in its mana cost, regardless of the color of its frame. An object’s color or colors may also be defined by a color indicator or a characteristic-defining ability. See rule 202.2.
362 362
363 105.2a A monocoloed object is exactly one of the five colos. 363 105.2a A monocolored object is exactly one of the five colors.
364 364
365 105.2b A multicoloed object is two o moe of the five colos. 365 105.2b A multicolored object is two or more of the five colors.
366 366
367 105.2c A cololess object has no colo. 367 105.2c A colorless object has no color.
368 368
369 105.3. Effects may change an object’s colo o give a colo to a cololess object. If an effect gives an object a new colo, the new colo eplaces all pevious colos the object had (unless the effect said the object became that colo “in addition” to its othe colos). Effects may also make a coloed object become cololess. 369 105.3. Effects may change an object’s color or give a color to a colorless object. If an effect gives an object a new color, the new color replaces all previous colors the object had (unless the effect said the object became that color “in addition” to its other colors). Effects may also make a colored object become colorless.
370 370
371 105.4. If a playe is asked to choose a colo, they must choose one of the five colos. “Multicoloed” is not a colo. Neithe is “cololess.” 371 105.4. If a player is asked to choose a color, they must choose one of the five colors. “Multicolored” is not a color. Neither is “colorless.”
372 372
373 105.5. If an effect efes to a colo pai, it means exactly two of the five colos. Thee ae ten colo pais: white and blue, white and black, blue and black, blue and ed, black and ed, black and geen, ed and geen, ed and white, geen and white, and geen and blue. 373 105.5. If an effect refers to a color pair, it means exactly two of the five colors. There are ten color pairs: white and blue, white and black, blue and black, blue and red, black and red, black and green, red and green, red and white, green and white, and green and blue.
374 374
375 106. Mana 375 106. Mana
376 376
377 106.1. Mana is the pimay esouce in the game. Playes spend mana to pay costs, usually when casting spells and activating abilities. 377 106.1. Mana is the primary resource in the game. Players spend mana to pay costs, usually when casting spells and activating abilities.
378 378
379 106.1a Thee ae five colos of mana: white, blue, black, ed, and geen. 379 106.1a There are five colors of mana: white, blue, black, red, and green.
380 380
381 106.1b Thee ae six types of mana: white, blue, black, ed, geen, and cololess. 381 106.1b There are six types of mana: white, blue, black, red, green, and colorless.
382 382
383 106.2. Mana is epesented by mana symbols (see ule 107.4). Mana symbols also epesent mana costs (see ule 202). 383 106.2. Mana is represented by mana symbols (see rule 107.4). Mana symbols also represent mana costs (see rule 202).
384 384
385 106.3. Mana is poduced by the effects of mana abilities (see ule 605). It may also be poduced by the effects of spells, as well as by the effects of abilities that aen’t mana abilities. A spell o ability that poduces mana instucts a playe to add that mana. 385 106.3. Mana is produced by the effects of mana abilities (see rule 605). It may also be produced by the effects of spells, as well as by the effects of abilities that aren’t mana abilities. A spell or ability that produces mana instructs a player to add that mana.
386 386
387 106.4. When an effect instucts a playe to add mana, that mana goes into a playe’s mana pool. Fom thee, it can be used to pay costs immediately, o it can stay in the playe’s mana pool as unspent mana. Each playe’s mana pool empties at the end of each step and phase, and the playe is said to lose this mana. Cads with abilities that poduce mana o efe to unspent mana have eceived eata in the Oacle™ cad efeence to no longe explicitly efe to the mana pool. 387 106.4. When an effect instructs a player to add mana, that mana goes into a player’s mana pool. From there, it can be used to pay costs immediately, or it can stay in the player’s mana pool as unspent mana. Each player’s mana pool empties at the end of each step and phase, and the player is said to lose this mana. Cards with abilities that produce mana or refer to unspent mana have received errata in the Oracle™ card reference to no longer explicitly refer to the mana pool.
388 388
389 106.4a If any mana emains in a playe’s mana pool afte mana is spent to pay a cost, that playe announces what mana is still thee. 389 106.4a If any mana remains in a player’s mana pool after mana is spent to pay a cost, that player announces what mana is still there.
390 390
391 106.4b If a playe passes pioity (see ule 117) while thee is mana in thei mana pool, that playe announces what mana is thee. 391 106.4b If a player passes priority (see rule 117) while there is mana in their mana pool, that player announces what mana is there.
392 392
393 106.5. If an ability would poduce one o moe mana of an undefined type, it poduces no mana instead. 393 106.5. If an ability would produce one or more mana of an undefined type, it produces no mana instead.
394 Example: Meteo Cate has the ability “{T}: Choose a colo of a pemanent you contol. Add one mana of that colo.” If you contol no coloed pemanents, activating Meteo Cate’s mana ability poduces no mana. 394 Example: Meteor Crater has the ability “{T}: Choose a color of a permanent you control. Add one mana of that color.” If you control no colored permanents, activating Meteor Crater’s mana ability produces no mana.
395 395
396 106.6. Some spells o abilities that poduce mana estict how that mana can be spent, have an additional effect that affects the spell o ability that mana is spent on, o ceate a delayed tiggeed ability (see ule 603.7a) that tigges when that mana is spent. This doesn’t affect the mana’s type. 396 106.6. Some spells or abilities that produce mana restrict how that mana can be spent, have an additional effect that affects the spell or ability that mana is spent on, or create a delayed triggered ability (see rule 603.7a) that triggers when that mana is spent. This doesn’t affect the mana’s type.
397 Example: A playe’s mana pool contains {R}{G} which can be spent only to cast ceatue spells. That playe activates Doubling Cube’s ability, which eads “{3}, {T}: Double the amount of each type of unspent mana you have.” The playe’s mana pool now has {R}{R}{G}{G} in it, {R}{G} of which can be spent on anything. 397 Example: A player’s mana pool contains {R}{G} which can be spent only to cast creature spells. That player activates Doubling Cube’s ability, which reads “{3}, {T}: Double the amount of each type of unspent mana you have.” The player’s mana pool now has {R}{R}{G}{G} in it, {R}{G} of which can be spent on anything.
398 398
399 106.6a Some eplacement effects incease the amount of mana poduced by a spell o ability. In these cases, any estictions o additional effects ceated by the spell o ability will apply to all mana poduced. If the spell o ability ceates a delayed tiggeed ability that tigges when the mana is spent, a sepaate delayed tiggeed ability is ceated fo each mana poduced. If the spell o ability ceates a continuous effect o eplacement effect if the mana is spent, a sepaate effect is ceated once fo each mana poduced. 399 106.6a Some replacement effects increase the amount of mana produced by a spell or ability. In these cases, any restrictions or additional effects created by the spell or ability will apply to all mana produced. If the spell or ability creates a delayed triggered ability that triggers when the mana is spent, a separate delayed triggered ability is created for each mana produced. If the spell or ability creates a continuous effect or replacement effect if the mana is spent, a separate effect is created once for each mana produced.
400 400
401 106.7. Some abilities poduce mana based on the type of mana anothe pemanent o pemanents “could poduce.” The type of mana a pemanent could poduce at any time includes any type of mana that an ability of that pemanent would poduce if the ability wee to esolve at that time, taking into account any applicable eplacement effects in any possible ode. Ignoe whethe any costs of the ability could o could not be paid. If that pemanent wouldn’t poduce any mana unde these conditions, o no type of mana can be defined this way, thee’s no type of mana it could poduce. 401 106.7. Some abilities produce mana based on the type of mana another permanent or permanents “could produce.” The type of mana a permanent could produce at any time includes any type of mana that an ability of that permanent would produce if the ability were to resolve at that time, taking into account any applicable replacement effects in any possible order. Ignore whether any costs of the ability could or could not be paid. If that permanent wouldn’t produce any mana under these conditions, or no type of mana can be defined this way, there’s no type of mana it could produce.
402 Example: Exotic Ochad has the ability “{T}: Add one mana of any colo that a land an opponent contols could poduce.” If you opponent contols no lands, activating Exotic Ochad’s mana ability will poduce no mana. The same is tue if you and you opponent each contol no lands othe than Exotic Ochads. Howeve, if you contol a Foest and an Exotic Ochad, and you opponent contols an Exotic Ochad, then each Exotic Ochad could poduce {G}. 402 Example: Exotic Orchard has the ability “{T}: Add one mana of any color that a land an opponent controls could produce.” If your opponent controls no lands, activating Exotic Orchard’s mana ability will produce no mana. The same is true if you and your opponent each control no lands other than Exotic Orchards. However, if you control a Forest and an Exotic Orchard, and your opponent controls an Exotic Orchard, then each Exotic Orchard could produce {G}.
403 403
404 106.8. If an effect would add mana epesented by a hybid mana symbol to a playe’s mana pool, that playe chooses one half of that symbol. If a coloed half is chosen, one mana of that colo is added to that playe’s mana pool. If a geneic half is chosen, an amount of cololess mana epesented by that half’s numbe is added to that playe’s mana pool. 404 106.8. If an effect would add mana represented by a hybrid mana symbol to a player’s mana pool, that player chooses one half of that symbol. If a colored half is chosen, one mana of that color is added to that player’s mana pool. If a generic half is chosen, an amount of colorless mana represented by that half’s number is added to that player’s mana pool.
405 405
406 106.9. If an effect would add mana epesented by a Phyexian mana symbol to a playe’s mana pool, one mana of the colo of that symbol is added to that playe’s mana pool. 406 106.9. If an effect would add mana represented by a Phyrexian mana symbol to a player’s mana pool, one mana of the color of that symbol is added to that player’s mana pool.
407 407
408 106.10. If an effect would add mana epesented by a geneic mana symbol to a playe’s mana pool, that much cololess mana is added to that playe’s mana pool. 408 106.10. If an effect would add mana represented by a generic mana symbol to a player’s mana pool, that much colorless mana is added to that player’s mana pool.
409 409
410 106.11. If an effect would add mana epesented by one o moe snow mana symbols to a playe’s mana pool, that much cololess mana is added to that playe’s mana pool. 410 106.11. If an effect would add mana represented by one or more snow mana symbols to a player’s mana pool, that much colorless mana is added to that player’s mana pool.
411 411
412 106.12. To “tap [a pemanent] fo mana” is to activate a mana ability of that pemanent that includes the {T} symbol in its activation cost. See ule 605, “Mana Abilities.” 412 106.12. To “tap [a permanent] for mana” is to activate a mana ability of that permanent that includes the {T} symbol in its activation cost. See rule 605, “Mana Abilities.”
413 413
414 106.12a An ability that tigges wheneve a pemanent “is tapped fo mana” o is tapped fo mana of a specified type tigges wheneve such a mana ability esolves and poduces mana o the specified type of mana. 414 106.12a An ability that triggers whenever a permanent “is tapped for mana” or is tapped for mana of a specified type triggers whenever such a mana ability resolves and produces mana or the specified type of mana.
415 415
416 106.12b A eplacement effect that applies if a pemanent “is tapped fo mana” o tapped fo mana of a specific type and/o amount modifies the mana poduction event while such an ability is esolving and poducing mana o the specified type and/o amount of mana. 416 106.12b A replacement effect that applies if a permanent “is tapped for mana” or tapped for mana of a specific type and/or amount modifies the mana production event while such an ability is resolving and producing mana or the specified type and/or amount of mana.
417 417
418 106.13. One cad (Dain Powe) causes one playe to lose unspent mana and anothe to add “the mana lost this way.” (Note that these may be the same playe.) This empties the fome playe’s mana pool and causes the mana emptied this way to be put into the latte playe’s mana pool. Which pemanents, spells, and/o abilities poduced that mana ae unchanged, as ae any estictions o additional effects associated with any of that mana. 418 106.13. One card (Drain Power) causes one player to lose unspent mana and another to add “the mana lost this way.” (Note that these may be the same player.) This empties the former player’s mana pool and causes the mana emptied this way to be put into the latter player’s mana pool. Which permanents, spells, and/or abilities produced that mana are unchanged, as are any restrictions or additional effects associated with any of that mana.
419 419
420 107. Numbes and Symbols 420 107. Numbers and Symbols
421 421
422 107.1. The only numbes the Magic game uses ae integes. 422 107.1. The only numbers the Magic game uses are integers.
423 423
424 107.1a You can’t choose a factional numbe, deal factional damage, gain factional life, and so on. If a spell o ability could geneate a factional numbe, the spell o ability will tell you whethe to ound up o down. 424 107.1a You can’t choose a fractional number, deal fractional damage, gain fractional life, and so on. If a spell or ability could generate a fractional number, the spell or ability will tell you whether to round up or down.
425 425
426 107.1b Most of the time, the Magic game uses only positive numbes and zeo. You can’t choose a negative numbe, deal negative damage, gain negative life, and so on. Howeve, it’s possible fo a game value, such as a ceatue’s powe, to be less than zeo. If a calculation o compaison needs to use a negative value, it does so. If a calculation that would detemine the esult of an effect yields a negative numbe, zeo is used instead, unless that effect doubles o sets to a specific value a playe’s life total o a ceatue’s powe and/o toughness. 426 107.1b Most of the time, the Magic game uses only positive numbers and zero. You can’t choose a negative number, deal negative damage, gain negative life, and so on. However, it’s possible for a game value, such as a creature’s power, to be less than zero. If a calculation or comparison needs to use a negative value, it does so. If a calculation that would determine the result of an effect yields a negative number, zero is used instead, unless that effect doubles or sets to a specific value a player’s life total or a creature’s power and/or toughness.
427 Example: If a 3/4 ceatue gets -5/-0, it’s a -2/4 ceatue. It doesn’t assign damage in combat. Its total powe and toughness is 2. Giving it +3/+0 would aise its powe to 1. 427 Example: If a 3/4 creature gets -5/-0, it’s a -2/4 creature. It doesn’t assign damage in combat. Its total power and toughness is 2. Giving it +3/+0 would raise its power to 1.
428 Example: Viidian Joine is a 1/2 ceatue with the ability “{T}: Add an amount of {G} equal to Viidian Joine’s powe.” An effect gives it -2/-0, then its ability is activated. The ability adds no mana to you mana pool. 428 Example: Viridian Joiner is a 1/2 creature with the ability “{T}: Add an amount of {G} equal to Viridian Joiner’s power.” An effect gives it -2/-0, then its ability is activated. The ability adds no mana to your mana pool.
429 Example: Chameleon Colossus is a 4/4 ceatue with the ability “{2}{G}{G}: Chameleon Colossus gets +X/+X until end of tun, whee X is its powe.” An effect gives it -6/-0, then its ability is activated. It emains a -2/4 ceatue. It doesn’t become -4/2. 429 Example: Chameleon Colossus is a 4/4 creature with the ability “{2}{G}{G}: Chameleon Colossus gets +X/+X until end of turn, where X is its power.” An effect gives it -6/-0, then its ability is activated. It remains a -2/4 creature. It doesn’t become -4/2.
430 430
431 107.1c If a ule o ability instucts a playe to choose “any numbe,” that playe may choose any positive numbe o zeo. 431 107.1c If a rule or ability instructs a player to choose “any number,” that player may choose any positive number or zero.
432 432
433 107.2. If anything needs to use a numbe that can’t be detemined, eithe as a esult o in a calculation, it uses 0 instead. 433 107.2. If anything needs to use a number that can’t be determined, either as a result or in a calculation, it uses 0 instead.
434 434
435 107.3. Many objects use the lette X as a placeholde fo a numbe that needs to be detemined. Some objects have abilities that define the value of X; the est let thei contolle choose the value of X. 435 107.3. Many objects use the letter X as a placeholder for a number that needs to be determined. Some objects have abilities that define the value of X; the rest let their controller choose the value of X.
436 436
437 107.3a If a spell o activated ability has a mana cost, altenative cost, additional cost, and/o activation cost with an {X}, [-X], o X in it, and the value of X isn’t defined by the text of that spell o ability, the contolle of that spell o ability chooses and announces the value of X as pat of casting the spell o activating the ability. (See ule 601, “Casting Spells.”) While a spell is on the stack, any X in its mana cost o in any altenative cost o additional cost it has equals the announced value. While an activated ability is on the stack, any X in its activation cost equals the announced value. 437 107.3a If a spell or activated ability has a mana cost, alternative cost, additional cost, and/or activation cost with an {X}, [-X], or X in it, and the value of X isn’t defined by the text of that spell or ability, the controller of that spell or ability chooses and announces the value of X as part of casting the spell or activating the ability. (See rule 601, “Casting Spells.”) While a spell is on the stack, any X in its mana cost or in any alternative cost or additional cost it has equals the announced value. While an activated ability is on the stack, any X in its activation cost equals the announced value.
438 438
439 107.3b If a playe is casting a spell that has an {X} in its mana cost, the value of X isn’t defined by the text of that spell, and an effect lets that playe cast that spell while paying neithe its mana cost no an altenative cost that includes X, then the only legal choice fo X is 0. This doesn’t apply to effects that only educe a cost, even if they educe it to zeo. See ule 601, “Casting Spells.” 439 107.3b If a player is casting a spell that has an {X} in its mana cost, the value of X isn’t defined by the text of that spell, and an effect lets that player cast that spell while paying neither its mana cost nor an alternative cost that includes X, then the only legal choice for X is 0. This doesn’t apply to effects that only reduce a cost, even if they reduce it to zero. See rule 601, “Casting Spells.”
440 440
441 107.3c If a spell o activated ability has an {X}, [-X], o X in its cost and/o its text, and the value of X is defined by the text of that spell o ability, then that’s the value of X while that spell o ability is on the stack. The contolle of that spell o ability doesn’t get to choose the value. Note that the value of X may change while that spell o ability is on the stack. 441 107.3c If a spell or activated ability has an {X}, [-X], or X in its cost and/or its text, and the value of X is defined by the text of that spell or ability, then that’s the value of X while that spell or ability is on the stack. The controller of that spell or ability doesn’t get to choose the value. Note that the value of X may change while that spell or ability is on the stack.
442 442
443 107.3d If a cost associated with a special action, such as a suspend cost o a moph cost, has an {X} o an X in it, the value of X is chosen by the playe taking the special action immediately befoe they pay that cost. 443 107.3d If a cost associated with a special action, such as a suspend cost or a morph cost, has an {X} or an X in it, the value of X is chosen by the player taking the special action immediately before they pay that cost.
444 444
445 107.3e Sometimes X appeas in the text of a spell o ability but not in a mana cost, altenative cost, additional cost, o activation cost. If the value of X isn’t defined, the contolle of the spell o ability chooses the value of X at the appopiate time (eithe as it’s put on the stack o as it esolves). 445 107.3e Sometimes X appears in the text of a spell or ability but not in a mana cost, alternative cost, additional cost, or activation cost. If the value of X isn’t defined, the controller of the spell or ability chooses the value of X at the appropriate time (either as it’s put on the stack or as it resolves).
446 446
447 107.3f If a cad in any zone othe than the stack has an {X} in its mana cost, the value of {X} is teated as 0, even if the value of X is defined somewhee within its text. 447 107.3f If a card in any zone other than the stack has an {X} in its mana cost, the value of {X} is treated as 0, even if the value of X is defined somewhere within its text.
448 448
449 107.3g If an effect instucts a playe to pay an object’s mana cost that includes {X}, the value of X is teated as 0 unless the object is a spell on the stack. In that case, the value of X is the value chosen o detemined fo it as the spell was cast. 449 107.3g If an effect instructs a player to pay an object’s mana cost that includes {X}, the value of X is treated as 0 unless the object is a spell on the stack. In that case, the value of X is the value chosen or determined for it as the spell was cast.
450 450
451 107.3h Nomally, all instances of X on an object have the same value at any given time. 451 107.3h Normally, all instances of X on an object have the same value at any given time.
452 452
453 107.3i If an object gains an ability, the value of X within that ability is the value defined by that ability, o 0 if that ability doesn’t define a value of X. This is an exception to ule 107.3h. This may occu with ability-adding effects, text-changing effects, o copy effects. 453 107.3i If an object gains an ability, the value of X within that ability is the value defined by that ability, or 0 if that ability doesn’t define a value of X. This is an exception to rule 107.3h. This may occur with ability-adding effects, text-changing effects, or copy effects.
454 454
455 107.3j If an object’s activated ability has an {X}, [-X], o X in its activation cost, the value of X fo that ability is independent of any othe values of X chosen fo that object o fo othe instances of abilities of that object. This is an exception to ule 107.3h. 455 107.3j If an object’s activated ability has an {X}, [-X], or X in its activation cost, the value of X for that ability is independent of any other values of X chosen for that object or for other instances of abilities of that object. This is an exception to rule 107.3h.
456 456
457 107.3k If an object’s entes-the-battlefield tiggeed ability o eplacement effect efes to X, and the spell that became that object as it esolved had a value of X chosen fo any of its costs, the value of X fo that ability is the same as the value of X fo that spell, although the value of X fo that pemanent is 0. This is an exception to ule 107.3h. 457 107.3k If an object’s enters-the-battlefield triggered ability or replacement effect refers to X, and the spell that became that object as it resolved had a value of X chosen for any of its costs, the value of X for that ability is the same as the value of X for that spell, although the value of X for that permanent is 0. This is an exception to rule 107.3h.
458 458
459 107.3m Some objects use the lette Y in addition to the lette X. Y follows the same ules as X. 459 107.3m Some objects use the letter Y in addition to the letter X. Y follows the same rules as X.
460 460
461 107.4. The mana symbols ae {W}, {U}, {B}, {R}, {G}, and {C}; the numeical symbols {0}, {1}, {2}, {3}, {4}, and so on; the vaiable symbol {X}; the hybid symbols {W/U}, {W/B}, {U/B}, {U/R}, {B/R}, {B/G}, {R/G}, {R/W}, {G/W}, and {G/U}; the monocoloed hybid symbols {2/W}, {2/U}, {2/B}, {2/R}, and {2/G}; the Phyexian mana symbols {W/P}, {U/P}, {B/P}, {R/P}, and {G/P}; and the snow symbol {S}. 461 107.4. The mana symbols are {W}, {U}, {B}, {R}, {G}, and {C}; the numerical symbols {0}, {1}, {2}, {3}, {4}, and so on; the variable symbol {X}; the hybrid symbols {W/U}, {W/B}, {U/B}, {U/R}, {B/R}, {B/G}, {R/G}, {R/W}, {G/W}, and {G/U}; the monocolored hybrid symbols {2/W}, {2/U}, {2/B}, {2/R}, and {2/G}; the Phyrexian mana symbols {W/P}, {U/P}, {B/P}, {R/P}, and {G/P}; and the snow symbol {S}.
462 462
463 107.4a Thee ae five pimay coloed mana symbols: {W} is white, {U} blue, {B} black, {R} ed, and {G} geen. These symbols ae used to epesent coloed mana, and also to epesent coloed mana in costs. Coloed mana in costs can be paid only with the appopiate colo of mana. See ule 202, “Mana Cost and Colo.” 463 107.4a There are five primary colored mana symbols: {W} is white, {U} blue, {B} black, {R} red, and {G} green. These symbols are used to represent colored mana, and also to represent colored mana in costs. Colored mana in costs can be paid only with the appropriate color of mana. See rule 202, “Mana Cost and Color.”
464 464
465 107.4b Numeical symbols (such as {1}) and vaiable symbols (such as {X}) epesent geneic mana in costs. Geneic mana in costs can be paid with any type of mana. Fo moe infomation about {X}, see ule 107.3. 465 107.4b Numerical symbols (such as {1}) and variable symbols (such as {X}) represent generic mana in costs. Generic mana in costs can be paid with any type of mana. For more information about {X}, see rule 107.3.
466 466
467 107.4c The cololess mana symbol {C} is used to epesent one cololess mana, and also to epesent a cost that can be paid only with one cololess mana. 467 107.4c The colorless mana symbol {C} is used to represent one colorless mana, and also to represent a cost that can be paid only with one colorless mana.
468 468
469 107.4d The symbol {0} epesents zeo mana and is used as a placeholde fo a cost that can be paid with no esouces. (See ule 118.5.) 469 107.4d The symbol {0} represents zero mana and is used as a placeholder for a cost that can be paid with no resources. (See rule 118.5.)
470 470
471 107.4e Hybid mana symbols ae also coloed mana symbols. Each one epesents a cost that can be paid in one of two ways, as epesented by the two halves of the symbol. A hybid symbol such as {W/U} can be paid with eithe white o blue mana, and a monocoloed hybid symbol such as {2/B} can be paid with eithe one black mana o two mana of any type. A hybid mana symbol is all of its component colos. 471 107.4e Hybrid mana symbols are also colored mana symbols. Each one represents a cost that can be paid in one of two ways, as represented by the two halves of the symbol. A hybrid symbol such as {W/U} can be paid with either white or blue mana, and a monocolored hybrid symbol such as {2/B} can be paid with either one black mana or two mana of any type. A hybrid mana symbol is all of its component colors.
472 Example: {G/W}{G/W} can be paid by spending {G}{G}, {G}{W}, o {W}{W}. 472 Example: {G/W}{G/W} can be paid by spending {G}{G}, {G}{W}, or {W}{W}.
473 473
474 107.4f Phyexian mana symbols ae coloed mana symbols: {W/P} is white, {U/P} is blue, {B/P} is black, {R/P} is ed, and {G/P} is geen. A Phyexian mana symbol epesents a cost that can be paid eithe with one mana of its colo o by paying 2 life. 474 107.4f Phyrexian mana symbols are colored mana symbols: {W/P} is white, {U/P} is blue, {B/P} is black, {R/P} is red, and {G/P} is green. A Phyrexian mana symbol represents a cost that can be paid either with one mana of its color or by paying 2 life.
475 Example: {W/P}{W/P} can be paid by spending {W}{W}, by spending {W} and paying 2 life, o by paying 4 life. 475 Example: {W/P}{W/P} can be paid by spending {W}{W}, by spending {W} and paying 2 life, or by paying 4 life.
476 476
477 107.4g In ules text, the Phyexian symbol {P} with no coloed backgound means any of the five Phyexian mana symbols. 477 107.4g In rules text, the Phyrexian symbol {P} with no colored background means any of the five Phyrexian mana symbols.
478 478
479 107.4h The snow mana symbol {S} epesents one mana in a cost. This mana can be paid with one mana of any type poduced by a snow pemanent (see ule 205.4g). Effects that educe the amount of geneic mana you pay don’t affect {S} costs. Snow is neithe a colo no a type of mana. 479 107.4h The snow mana symbol {S} represents one mana in a cost. This mana can be paid with one mana of any type produced by a snow permanent (see rule 205.4g). Effects that reduce the amount of generic mana you pay don’t affect {S} costs. Snow is neither a color nor a type of mana.
480 480
481 107.5. The tap symbol is {T}. The tap symbol in an activation cost means “Tap this pemanent.” A pemanent that’s aleady tapped can’t be tapped again to pay the cost. A ceatue’s activated ability with the tap symbol in its activation cost can’t be activated unless the ceatue has been unde its contolle’s contol continuously since thei most ecent tun began. See ule 302.6. 481 107.5. The tap symbol is {T}. The tap symbol in an activation cost means “Tap this permanent.” A permanent that’s already tapped can’t be tapped again to pay the cost. A creature’s activated ability with the tap symbol in its activation cost can’t be activated unless the creature has been under its controller’s control continuously since their most recent turn began. See rule 302.6.
482 482
483 107.6. The untap symbol is {Q}. The untap symbol in an activation cost means “Untap this pemanent.” A pemanent that’s aleady untapped can’t be untapped again to pay the cost. A ceatue’s activated ability with the untap symbol in its activation cost can’t be activated unless the ceatue has been unde its contolle’s contol continuously since thei most ecent tun began. See ule 302.6. 483 107.6. The untap symbol is {Q}. The untap symbol in an activation cost means “Untap this permanent.” A permanent that’s already untapped can’t be untapped again to pay the cost. A creature’s activated ability with the untap symbol in its activation cost can’t be activated unless the creature has been under its controller’s control continuously since their most recent turn began. See rule 302.6.
484 484
485 107.7. Each activated ability of a planeswalke has a loyalty symbol in its cost. Positive loyalty symbols point upwad and featue a plus sign followed by a numbe. Negative loyalty symbols point downwad and featue a minus sign followed by a numbe o an X. Neutal loyalty symbols don’t point in eithe diection and featue a 0. [+N] means “Put N loyalty countes on this pemanent,” [-N] means “Remove N loyalty countes fom this pemanent,” and [0] means “Put zeo loyalty countes on this pemanent.” 485 107.7. Each activated ability of a planeswalker has a loyalty symbol in its cost. Positive loyalty symbols point upward and feature a plus sign followed by a number. Negative loyalty symbols point downward and feature a minus sign followed by a number or an X. Neutral loyalty symbols don’t point in either direction and feature a 0. [+N] means “Put N loyalty counters on this permanent,” [-N] means “Remove N loyalty counters from this permanent,” and [0] means “Put zero loyalty counters on this permanent.”
486 486
487 107.8. The text box of a levele cad contains two level symbols, each of which is a keywod ability that epesents a static ability. The level symbol includes eithe a ange of numbes, indicated hee as “N1-N2,” o a single numbe followed by a plus sign, indicated hee as “N3+.” Any abilities pinted within the same text box stiation as a level symbol ae pat of its static ability. The same is tue of the powe/toughness box pinted within that stiation, indicated hee as “[P/T].” See ule 710, “Levele Cads.” 487 107.8. The text box of a leveler card contains two level symbols, each of which is a keyword ability that represents a static ability. The level symbol includes either a range of numbers, indicated here as “N1-N2,” or a single number followed by a plus sign, indicated here as “N3+.” Any abilities printed within the same text box striation as a level symbol are part of its static ability. The same is true of the power/toughness box printed within that striation, indicated here as “[P/T].” See rule 710, “Leveler Cards.”
488 488
489 107.8a “{LEVEL N1-N2} [Abilities] [P/T]” means “As long as this ceatue has at least N1 level countes on it, but no moe than N2 level countes on it, it has base powe and toughness [P/T] and has [abilities].” 489 107.8a “{LEVEL N1-N2} [Abilities] [P/T]” means “As long as this creature has at least N1 level counters on it, but no more than N2 level counters on it, it has base power and toughness [P/T] and has [abilities].”
490 490
491 107.8b “{LEVEL N3+} [Abilities] [P/T]” means “As long as this ceatue has N3 o moe level countes on it, it has base powe and toughness [P/T] and has [abilities].” 491 107.8b “{LEVEL N3+} [Abilities] [P/T]” means “As long as this creature has N3 or more level counters on it, it has base power and toughness [P/T] and has [abilities].”
492 492
493 107.9. A tombstone icon appeas to the left of the name of many Odyssey™ block cads with abilities that ae elevant in a playe’s gaveyad. The pupose of the icon is to make those cads stand out when they’e in a gaveyad. This icon has no effect on game play. 493 107.9. A tombstone icon appears to the left of the name of many Odyssey™ block cards with abilities that are relevant in a player’s graveyard. The purpose of the icon is to make those cards stand out when they’re in a graveyard. This icon has no effect on game play.
494 494
495 107.10. A type icon appeas in the uppe left cone of each cad fom the Futue Sight® set pinted with an altenate “timeshifted” fame. If the cad has a single cad type, this icon indicates what it is: claw maks fo ceatue, a flame fo socey, a lightning bolt fo instant, a sunise fo enchantment, a chalice fo atifact, and a pai of mountain peaks fo land. If the cad has multiple cad types, that’s indicated by a black and white coss. This icon has no effect on game play. 495 107.10. A type icon appears in the upper left corner of each card from the Future Sight® set printed with an alternate “timeshifted” frame. If the card has a single card type, this icon indicates what it is: claw marks for creature, a flame for sorcery, a lightning bolt for instant, a sunrise for enchantment, a chalice for artifact, and a pair of mountain peaks for land. If the card has multiple card types, that’s indicated by a black and white cross. This icon has no effect on game play.
496 496
497 107.11. The Planeswalke symbol is {PW}. It appeas on one face of the plana die used in the Planechase casual vaiant. See ule 901, “Planechase.” 497 107.11. The Planeswalker symbol is {PW}. It appears on one face of the planar die used in the Planechase casual variant. See rule 901, “Planechase.”
498 498
499 107.12. The chaos symbol is {CHAOS}. It appeas on one face of the plana die used in the Planechase casual vaiant, as well as in abilities that efe to the esults of olling the plana die. See ule 901, “Planechase.” 499 107.12. The chaos symbol is {CHAOS}. It appears on one face of the planar die used in the Planechase casual variant, as well as in abilities that refer to the results of rolling the planar die. See rule 901, “Planechase.”
500 500
501 107.13. A colo indicato is a cicula symbol that appeas to the left of the type line on some cads. The colo of the symbol defines the cad’s colo o colos. See ule 202, “Mana Cost and Colo.” 501 107.13. A color indicator is a circular symbol that appears to the left of the type line on some cards. The color of the symbol defines the card’s color or colors. See rule 202, “Mana Cost and Color.”
502 502
503 107.14. The enegy symbol is {E}. It epesents one enegy counte. To pay {E}, a playe emoves one enegy counte fom themselves. 503 107.14. The energy symbol is {E}. It represents one energy counter. To pay {E}, a player removes one energy counter from themselves.
504 504
505 107.15. The text box of a Saga cad contains chapte symbols, each of which is a keywod ability that epesents a tiggeed ability. A chapte symbol includes a Roman numeal, indicated hee as “N”. The text pinted in the text box stiation to the ight of a chapte symbol is the effect of the tiggeed ability it epesents. See ule 714, “Saga Cads.” 505 107.15. The text box of a Saga card contains chapter symbols, each of which is a keyword ability that represents a triggered ability. A chapter symbol includes a Roman numeral, indicated here as “rN”. The text printed in the text box striation to the right of a chapter symbol is the effect of the triggered ability it represents. See rule 714, “Saga Cards.”
506 506
507 107.15a “{N}—[Effect]” means “When one o moe loe countes ae put onto this Saga, if the numbe of loe countes on it was less than N and became at least N, [effect].” 507 107.15a “{rN}—[Effect]” means “When one or more lore counters are put onto this Saga, if the number of lore counters on it was less than N and became at least N, [effect].”
508 508
509 107.15b “{N1}, {N2}—[Effect]” is the same as “{N1}—[Effect]” and “{N2}—[Effect].” 509 107.15b “{rN1}, {rN2}—[Effect]” is the same as “{rN1}—[Effect]” and “{rN2}—[Effect].”
510 510
511 108. Cads 511 108. Cards
512 512
513 108.1. Use the Oacle cad efeence when detemining a cad’s woding. A cad’s Oacle text can be found using the Gathee cad database at Gathee.Wizads.com. 513 108.1. Use the Oracle card reference when determining a card’s wording. A card’s Oracle text can be found using the Gatherer card database at Gatherer.Wizards.com.
514 514
515 108.2. When a ule o text on a cad efes to a “cad,” it means only a Magic cad o an object epesented by a Magic cad. 515 108.2. When a rule or text on a card refers to a “card,” it means only a Magic card or an object represented by a Magic card.
516 516
517 108.2a Most Magic games use only taditional Magic cads, which measue appoximately 2.5 inches (6.3 cm) by 3.5 inches (8.8 cm). Cetain fomats also use nontaditional Magic cads, ovesized cads that may have diffeent backs. 517 108.2a Most Magic games use only traditional Magic cards, which measure approximately 2.5 inches (6.3 cm) by 3.5 inches (8.8 cm). Certain formats also use nontraditional Magic cards, oversized cards that may have different backs.
518 518
519 108.2b Tokens aen’t consideed cads—even a cad-sized game supplement that epesents a token isn’t consideed a cad fo ules puposes. 519 108.2b Tokens aren’t considered cards—even a card-sized game supplement that represents a token isn’t considered a card for rules purposes.
520 520
521 108.3. The owne of a cad in the game is the playe who stated the game with it in thei deck. If a cad is bought into the game fom outside the game athe than stating in a playe’s deck, its owne is the playe who bought it into the game. If a cad stats the game in the command zone, its owne is the playe who put it into the command zone to stat the game. Legal owneship of a cad in the game is ielevant to the game ules except fo the ules fo ante. (See ule 407.) 521 108.3. The owner of a card in the game is the player who started the game with it in their deck. If a card is brought into the game from outside the game rather than starting in a player’s deck, its owner is the player who brought it into the game. If a card starts the game in the command zone, its owner is the player who put it into the command zone to start the game. Legal ownership of a card in the game is irrelevant to the game rules except for the rules for ante. (See rule 407.)
522 522
523 108.3a In a Planechase game using the single plana deck option, the plana contolle is consideed to be the owne of all cads in the plana deck. See ule 901.6. 523 108.3a In a Planechase game using the single planar deck option, the planar controller is considered to be the owner of all cards in the planar deck. See rule 901.6.
524 524
525 108.3b Some spells and abilities allow a playe to take cads they own fom outside the game and bing them into the game. (See ule 400.10b.) If a cad outside that game is involved in a Magic game, its owne is detemined as descibed in ule 108.3. If a cad outside that game is in the sideboad of a Magic game (see ule 100.4), its owne is consideed to be the playe who stated the game with it in thei sideboad. In all othe cases, the owne of a cad outside the game is its legal owne. 525 108.3b Some spells and abilities allow a player to take cards they own from outside the game and bring them into the game. (See rule 400.10b.) If a card outside that game is involved in a Magic game, its owner is determined as described in rule 108.3. If a card outside that game is in the sideboard of a Magic game (see rule 100.4), its owner is considered to be the player who started the game with it in their sideboard. In all other cases, the owner of a card outside the game is its legal owner.
526 526
527 108.4. A cad doesn’t have a contolle unless that cad epesents a pemanent o spell; in those cases, its contolle is detemined by the ules fo pemanents o spells. See ules 110.2 and 112.2. 527 108.4. A card doesn’t have a controller unless that card represents a permanent or spell; in those cases, its controller is determined by the rules for permanents or spells. See rules 110.2 and 112.2.
528 528
529 108.4a If anything asks fo the contolle of a cad that doesn’t have one (because it’s not a pemanent o spell), use its owne instead. 529 108.4a If anything asks for the controller of a card that doesn’t have one (because it’s not a permanent or spell), use its owner instead.
530 530
531 108.5. Nontaditional Magic cads can’t stat the game in any zone othe than the command zone (see ule 408). If an effect would bing a nontaditional Magic cad into the game fom outside the game, it doesn’t; that cad emains outside the game. 531 108.5. Nontraditional Magic cards can’t start the game in any zone other than the command zone (see rule 408). If an effect would bring a nontraditional Magic card into the game from outside the game, it doesn’t; that card remains outside the game.
532 532
533 108.6. Fo moe infomation about cads, see section 2, “Pats of a Cad.” 533 108.6. For more information about cards, see section 2, “Parts of a Card.”
534 534
535 109. Objects 535 109. Objects
536 536
537 109.1. An object is an ability on the stack, a cad, a copy of a cad, a token, a spell, a pemanent, o an emblem. 537 109.1. An object is an ability on the stack, a card, a copy of a card, a token, a spell, a permanent, or an emblem.
538 538
539 109.2. If a spell o ability uses a desciption of an object that includes a cad type o subtype, but doesn’t include the wod “cad,” “spell,” “souce,” o “scheme,” it means a pemanent of that cad type o subtype on the battlefield. 539 109.2. If a spell or ability uses a description of an object that includes a card type or subtype, but doesn’t include the word “card,” “spell,” “source,” or “scheme,” it means a permanent of that card type or subtype on the battlefield.
540 540
541 109.2a If a spell o ability uses a desciption of an object that includes the wod “cad” and the name of a zone, it means a cad matching that desciption in the stated zone. 541 109.2a If a spell or ability uses a description of an object that includes the word “card” and the name of a zone, it means a card matching that description in the stated zone.
542 542
543 109.2b If a spell o ability uses a desciption of an object that includes the wod “spell,” it means a spell matching that desciption on the stack. 543 109.2b If a spell or ability uses a description of an object that includes the word “spell,” it means a spell matching that description on the stack.
544 544
545 109.2c If a spell o ability uses a desciption of an object that includes the wod “souce,” it means a souce matching that desciption—eithe a souce of an ability o a souce of damage—in any zone. See ule 609.7. 545 109.2c If a spell or ability uses a description of an object that includes the word “source,” it means a source matching that description—either a source of an ability or a source of damage—in any zone. See rule 609.7.
546 546
547 109.2d If an ability of a scheme cad includes the text “this scheme,” it means the scheme cad in the command zone on which that ability is pinted. 547 109.2d If an ability of a scheme card includes the text “this scheme,” it means the scheme card in the command zone on which that ability is printed.
548 548
549 109.3. An object’s chaacteistics ae name, mana cost, colo, colo indicato, cad type, subtype, supetype, ules text, abilities, powe, toughness, loyalty, hand modifie, and life modifie. Objects can have some o all of these chaacteistics. Any othe infomation about an object isn’t a chaacteistic. Fo example, chaacteistics don’t include whethe a pemanent is tapped, a spell’s taget, an object’s owne o contolle, what an Aua enchants, and so on. 549 109.3. An object’s characteristics are name, mana cost, color, color indicator, card type, subtype, supertype, rules text, abilities, power, toughness, loyalty, hand modifier, and life modifier. Objects can have some or all of these characteristics. Any other information about an object isn’t a characteristic. For example, characteristics don’t include whether a permanent is tapped, a spell’s target, an object’s owner or controller, what an Aura enchants, and so on.
550 550
551 109.4. Only objects on the stack o on the battlefield have a contolle. Objects that ae neithe on the stack no on the battlefield aen’t contolled by any playe. See ule 108.4. Thee ae five exceptions to this ule: 551 109.4. Only objects on the stack or on the battlefield have a controller. Objects that are neither on the stack nor on the battlefield aren’t controlled by any player. See rule 108.4. There are five exceptions to this rule:
552 552
553 109.4a An emblem is contolled by the playe that puts it into the command zone. See ule 114, “Emblems.” 553 109.4a An emblem is controlled by the player that puts it into the command zone. See rule 114, “Emblems.”
554 554
555 109.4b In a Planechase game, a face-up plane o phenomenon cad is contolled by the playe designated as the plana contolle. This is usually the active playe. See ule 901.6. 555 109.4b In a Planechase game, a face-up plane or phenomenon card is controlled by the player designated as the planar controller. This is usually the active player. See rule 901.6.
556 556
557 109.4c In a Vanguad game, each vanguad cad is contolled by its owne. See ule 902.6. 557 109.4c In a Vanguard game, each vanguard card is controlled by its owner. See rule 902.6.
558 558
559 109.4d In an Achenemy game, each scheme cad is contolled by its owne. See ule 904.7. 559 109.4d In an Archenemy game, each scheme card is controlled by its owner. See rule 904.7.
560 560
561 109.4e In a Conspiacy Daft game, each conspiacy cad is contolled by its owne. See ule 905.5. 561 109.4e In a Conspiracy Draft game, each conspiracy card is controlled by its owner. See rule 905.5.
562 562
563 109.5. The wods “you” and “you” on an object efe to the object’s contolle, its would-be contolle (if a playe is attempting to play, cast, o activate it), o its owne (if it has no contolle). Fo a static ability, this is the cuent contolle of the object it’s on. Fo an activated ability, this is the playe who activated the ability. Fo a tiggeed ability, this is the contolle of the object when the ability tiggeed, unless it’s a delayed tiggeed ability. To detemine the contolle of a delayed tiggeed ability, see ules 603.7d–f. 563 109.5. The words “you” and “your” on an object refer to the object’s controller, its would-be controller (if a player is attempting to play, cast, or activate it), or its owner (if it has no controller). For a static ability, this is the current controller of the object it’s on. For an activated ability, this is the player who activated the ability. For a triggered ability, this is the controller of the object when the ability triggered, unless it’s a delayed triggered ability. To determine the controller of a delayed triggered ability, see rules 603.7d–f.
564 564
565 110. Pemanents 565 110. Permanents
566 566
567 110.1. A pemanent is a cad o token on the battlefield. A pemanent emains on the battlefield indefinitely. A cad o token becomes a pemanent as it entes the battlefield and it stops being a pemanent as it’s moved to anothe zone by an effect o ule. 567 110.1. A permanent is a card or token on the battlefield. A permanent remains on the battlefield indefinitely. A card or token becomes a permanent as it enters the battlefield and it stops being a permanent as it’s moved to another zone by an effect or rule.
568 568
569 110.2. A pemanent’s owne is the same as the owne of the cad that epesents it (unless it’s a token; see ule 111.2). A pemanent’s contolle is, by default, the playe unde whose contol it enteed the battlefield. Evey pemanent has a contolle. 569 110.2. A permanent’s owner is the same as the owner of the card that represents it (unless it’s a token; see rule 111.2). A permanent’s controller is, by default, the player under whose control it entered the battlefield. Every permanent has a controller.
570 570
571 110.2a If an effect instucts a playe to put an object onto the battlefield, that object entes the battlefield unde that playe’s contol unless the effect states othewise. 571 110.2a If an effect instructs a player to put an object onto the battlefield, that object enters the battlefield under that player’s control unless the effect states otherwise.
572 572
573 110.2b If an effect causes a playe to gain contol of anothe playe’s pemanent spell, the fist playe contols the pemanent that spell becomes, but the pemanent’s contolle by default is the playe who put that spell onto the stack. (This distinction is elevant in multiplaye games; see ule 800.4c.) 573 110.2b If an effect causes a player to gain control of another player’s permanent spell, the first player controls the permanent that spell becomes, but the permanent’s controller by default is the player who put that spell onto the stack. (This distinction is relevant in multiplayer games; see rule 800.4c.)
574 574
575 110.3. A nontoken pemanent’s chaacteistics ae the same as those pinted on its cad, as modified by any continuous effects. See ule 613, “Inteaction of Continuous Effects.” 575 110.3. A nontoken permanent’s characteristics are the same as those printed on its card, as modified by any continuous effects. See rule 613, “Interaction of Continuous Effects.”
576 576
577 110.4. Thee ae five pemanent types: atifact, ceatue, enchantment, land, and planeswalke. Instant and socey cads can’t ente the battlefield and thus can’t be pemanents. Some tibal cads can ente the battlefield and some can’t, depending on thei othe cad types. See section 3, “Cad Types.” 577 110.4. There are five permanent types: artifact, creature, enchantment, land, and planeswalker. Instant and sorcery cards can’t enter the battlefield and thus can’t be permanents. Some tribal cards can enter the battlefield and some can’t, depending on their other card types. See section 3, “Card Types.”
578 578
579 110.4a The tem “pemanent cad” is used to efe to a cad that could be put onto the battlefield. Specifically, it means an atifact, ceatue, enchantment, land, o planeswalke cad. 579 110.4a The term “permanent card” is used to refer to a card that could be put onto the battlefield. Specifically, it means an artifact, creature, enchantment, land, or planeswalker card.
580 580
581 110.4b The tem “pemanent spell” is used to efe to a spell that will ente the battlefield as a pemanent as pat of its esolution. Specifically, it means an atifact, ceatue, enchantment, o planeswalke spell. 581 110.4b The term “permanent spell” is used to refer to a spell that will enter the battlefield as a permanent as part of its resolution. Specifically, it means an artifact, creature, enchantment, or planeswalker spell.
582 582
583 110.4c If a pemanent somehow loses all its pemanent types, it emains on the battlefield. It’s still a pemanent. 583 110.4c If a permanent somehow loses all its permanent types, it remains on the battlefield. It’s still a permanent.
584 584
585 110.5. A pemanent’s status is its physical state. Thee ae fou status categoies, each of which has two possible values: tapped/untapped, flipped/unflipped, face up/face down, and phased in/phased out. Each pemanent always has one of these values fo each of these categoies. 585 110.5. A permanent’s status is its physical state. There are four status categories, each of which has two possible values: tapped/untapped, flipped/unflipped, face up/face down, and phased in/phased out. Each permanent always has one of these values for each of these categories.
586 586
587 110.5a Status is not a chaacteistic, though it may affect a pemanent’s chaacteistics. 587 110.5a Status is not a characteristic, though it may affect a permanent’s characteristics.
588 588
589 110.5b Pemanents ente the battlefield untapped, unflipped, face up, and phased in unless a spell o ability says othewise. 589 110.5b Permanents enter the battlefield untapped, unflipped, face up, and phased in unless a spell or ability says otherwise.
590 590
591 110.5c A pemanent etains its status until a spell, ability, o tun-based action changes it, even if that status is not elevant to it. 591 110.5c A permanent retains its status until a spell, ability, or turn-based action changes it, even if that status is not relevant to it.
592 Example: Dimi Doppelgange says “{1}{U}{B}: Exile taget ceatue cad fom a gaveyad. Dimi Doppelgange becomes a copy of that cad and gains this ability.” It becomes a copy of Jushi Appentice, a flip cad. Though use of Jushi Appentice’s ability, this ceatue flips, making it a copy of Tomoya the Reveale with the Dimi Doppelgange ability. If this pemanent then becomes a copy of Runeclaw Bea, it will etain its flipped status even though that has no elevance to Runeclaw Bea. If its copy ability is activated again, this time tageting a Nezumi Shotfang cad (anothe flip cad), this pemanent’s flipped status means it will have the chaacteistics of Stabwhiske the Odious (the flipped vesion of Nezumi Shotfang) with the Dimi Doppelgange ability. 592 Example: Dimir Doppelganger says “{1}{U}{B}: Exile target creature card from a graveyard. Dimir Doppelganger becomes a copy of that card and gains this ability.” It becomes a copy of Jushi Apprentice, a flip card. Through use of Jushi Apprentice’s ability, this creature flips, making it a copy of Tomoya the Revealer with the Dimir Doppelganger ability. If this permanent then becomes a copy of Runeclaw Bear, it will retain its flipped status even though that has no relevance to Runeclaw Bear. If its copy ability is activated again, this time targeting a Nezumi Shortfang card (another flip card), this permanent’s flipped status means it will have the characteristics of Stabwhisker the Odious (the flipped version of Nezumi Shortfang) with the Dimir Doppelganger ability.
593 593
594 110.5d Only pemanents have status. Cads not on the battlefield do not. Although an exiled cad may be face down, this has no coelation to the face-down status of a pemanent. Similaly, cads not on the battlefield ae neithe tapped no untapped, egadless of thei physical state. 594 110.5d Only permanents have status. Cards not on the battlefield do not. Although an exiled card may be face down, this has no correlation to the face-down status of a permanent. Similarly, cards not on the battlefield are neither tapped nor untapped, regardless of their physical state.
595 595
596 111. Tokens 596 111. Tokens
597 597
598 111.1. Some effects put tokens onto the battlefield. A token is a make used to epesent any pemanent that isn’t epesented by a cad. 598 111.1. Some effects put tokens onto the battlefield. A token is a marker used to represent any permanent that isn’t represented by a card.
599 599
600 111.2. The playe who ceates a token is its owne. The token entes the battlefield unde that playe’s contol. 600 111.2. The player who creates a token is its owner. The token enters the battlefield under that player’s control.
601 601
602 111.3. The spell o ability that ceates a token may define the values of any numbe of chaacteistics fo the token. This becomes the token’s “text.” The chaacteistic values defined this way ae functionally equivalent to the chaacteistic values that ae pinted on a cad; fo example, they define the token’s copiable values. A token doesn’t have any chaacteistics not defined by the spell o ability that ceated it. 602 111.3. The spell or ability that creates a token may define the values of any number of characteristics for the token. This becomes the token’s “text.” The characteristic values defined this way are functionally equivalent to the characteristic values that are printed on a card; for example, they define the token’s copiable values. A token doesn’t have any characteristics not defined by the spell or ability that created it.
603 Example: Jade Mage has the ability “{2}{G}: Ceate a 1/1 geen Sapoling ceatue token.” The esulting token has no mana cost, supetypes, ules text, o abilities. 603 Example: Jade Mage has the ability “{2}{G}: Create a 1/1 green Saproling creature token.” The resulting token has no mana cost, supertypes, rules text, or abilities.
604 604
605 111.4. A spell o ability that ceates a token sets both its name and its subtype(s). If the spell o ability doesn’t specify the name of the token, its name is the same as its subtype(s). A “Goblin Scout ceatue token,” fo example, is named “Goblin Scout” and has the ceatue subtypes Goblin and Scout. Once a token is on the battlefield, changing its name doesn’t change its subtype, and vice vesa. 605 111.4. A spell or ability that creates a token sets both its name and its subtype(s). If the spell or ability doesn’t specify the name of the token, its name is the same as its subtype(s). A “Goblin Scout creature token,” for example, is named “Goblin Scout” and has the creature subtypes Goblin and Scout. Once a token is on the battlefield, changing its name doesn’t change its subtype, and vice versa.
606 606
607 111.5. If a spell o ability would ceate a token, but a ule o effect states that a pemanent with one o moe of that token’s chaacteistics can’t ente the battlefield, the token is not ceated. 607 111.5. If a spell or ability would create a token, but a rule or effect states that a permanent with one or more of that token’s characteristics can’t enter the battlefield, the token is not created.
608 608
609 111.6. A token is subject to anything that affects pemanents in geneal o that affects the token’s cad type o subtype. A token isn’t a cad (even if epesented by a cad that has a Magic back o that came fom a Magic booste pack). 609 111.6. A token is subject to anything that affects permanents in general or that affects the token’s card type or subtype. A token isn’t a card (even if represented by a card that has a Magic back or that came from a Magic booster pack).
610 610
611 111.7. A token that’s in a zone othe than the battlefield ceases to exist. This is a state-based action; see ule 704. (Note that if a token changes zones, applicable tiggeed abilities will tigge befoe the token ceases to exist.) 611 111.7. A token that’s in a zone other than the battlefield ceases to exist. This is a state-based action; see rule 704. (Note that if a token changes zones, applicable triggered abilities will trigger before the token ceases to exist.)
612 612
613 111.8. A token that has left the battlefield can’t move to anothe zone o come back onto the battlefield. If such a token would change zones, it emains in its cuent zone instead. It ceases to exist the next time state-based actions ae checked; see ule 704. 613 111.8. A token that has left the battlefield can’t move to another zone or come back onto the battlefield. If such a token would change zones, it remains in its current zone instead. It ceases to exist the next time state-based actions are checked; see rule 704.
614 614
615 111.9. Some effects instuct a playe to ceate a legenday token. These may be witten “ceate [name], a . . .” and list chaacteistics fo the token. This is the same as an instuction to ceate a token with the listed chaacteistics that has the given name. 615 111.9. Some effects instruct a player to create a legendary token. These may be written “create [name], a . . .” and list characteristics for the token. This is the same as an instruction to create a token with the listed characteristics that has the given name.
616 616
617 111.10. Some effects instuct a playe to ceate a pedefined token. These effects use the definition below to detemine the chaacteistics the token is ceated with. The effect that ceates a pedefined token may also modify o add to the pedefined chaacteistics. 617 111.10. Some effects instruct a player to create a predefined token. These effects use the definition below to determine the characteristics the token is created with. The effect that creates a predefined token may also modify or add to the predefined characteristics.
618 618
619 111.10a A Teasue token is a cololess Teasue atifact token with “{T}, Sacifice this atifact: Add one mana of any colo.” 619 111.10a A Treasure token is a colorless Treasure artifact token with “{T}, Sacrifice this artifact: Add one mana of any color.”
620 620
621 111.10b A Food token is a cololess Food atifact token with “{2}, {T}, Sacifice this atifact: You gain 3 life.” 621 111.10b A Food token is a colorless Food artifact token with “{2}, {T}, Sacrifice this artifact: You gain 3 life.”
622 622
623 623
624 112. Spells 624 112. Spells
625 625
626 112.1. A spell is a cad on the stack. As the fist step of being cast (see ule 601, “Casting Spells”), the cad becomes a spell and is moved to the top of the stack fom the zone it was in, which is usually its owne’s hand. (See ule 405, “Stack.”) A spell emains on the stack as a spell until it esolves (see ule 608, “Resolving Spells and Abilities”), is counteed (see ule 701.5), o othewise leaves the stack. Fo moe infomation, see section 6, “Spells, Abilities, and Effects.” 626 112.1. A spell is a card on the stack. As the first step of being cast (see rule 601, “Casting Spells”), the card becomes a spell and is moved to the top of the stack from the zone it was in, which is usually its owner’s hand. (See rule 405, “Stack.”) A spell remains on the stack as a spell until it resolves (see rule 608, “Resolving Spells and Abilities”), is countered (see rule 701.5), or otherwise leaves the stack. For more information, see section 6, “Spells, Abilities, and Effects.”
627 627
628 112.1a A copy of a spell is also a spell, even if it has no cad associated with it. See ule 706.10. 628 112.1a A copy of a spell is also a spell, even if it has no card associated with it. See rule 706.10.
629 629
630 112.1b Some effects allow a playe to cast a copy of a cad; if the playe does, that copy is a spell as well. See ule 706.12. 630 112.1b Some effects allow a player to cast a copy of a card; if the player does, that copy is a spell as well. See rule 706.12.
631 631
632 112.2. A spell’s owne is the same as the owne of the cad that epesents it, unless it’s a copy. In that case, the owne of the spell is the playe unde whose contol it was put on the stack. A spell’s contolle is, by default, the playe who put it on the stack. Evey spell has a contolle. 632 112.2. A spell’s owner is the same as the owner of the card that represents it, unless it’s a copy. In that case, the owner of the spell is the player under whose control it was put on the stack. A spell’s controller is, by default, the player who put it on the stack. Every spell has a controller.
633 633
634 112.3. A noncopy spell’s chaacteistics ae the same as those pinted on its cad, as modified by any continuous effects. See ule 613, “Inteaction of Continuous Effects.” 634 112.3. A noncopy spell’s characteristics are the same as those printed on its card, as modified by any continuous effects. See rule 613, “Interaction of Continuous Effects.”
635 635
636 112.4. If an effect changes any chaacteistics of a pemanent spell, the effect continues to apply to the pemanent when the spell esolves. See ule 400.7. 636 112.4. If an effect changes any characteristics of a permanent spell, the effect continues to apply to the permanent when the spell resolves. See rule 400.7.
637 Example: If an effect changes a black ceatue spell to white, the ceatue is white when it entes the battlefield and emains white fo the duation of the effect changing its colo. 637 Example: If an effect changes a black creature spell to white, the creature is white when it enters the battlefield and remains white for the duration of the effect changing its color.
638 638
639 113. Abilities 639 113. Abilities
640 640
641 113.1. An ability can be one of thee things: 641 113.1. An ability can be one of three things:
642 642
643 113.1a An ability can be a chaacteistic an object has that lets it affect the game. An object’s abilities ae defined by its ules text o by the effect that ceated it. Abilities can also be ganted to objects by ules o effects. (Effects that gant abilities usually use the wods “has,” “have,” “gains,” o “gain.”) Abilities geneate effects. (See ule 609, “Effects.”) 643 113.1a An ability can be a characteristic an object has that lets it affect the game. An object’s abilities are defined by its rules text or by the effect that created it. Abilities can also be granted to objects by rules or effects. (Effects that grant abilities usually use the words “has,” “have,” “gains,” or “gain.”) Abilities generate effects. (See rule 609, “Effects.”)
644 644
645 113.1b An ability can be something that a playe has that changes how the game affects the playe. A playe nomally has no abilities unless ganted to that playe by effects. 645 113.1b An ability can be something that a player has that changes how the game affects the player. A player normally has no abilities unless granted to that player by effects.
646 646
647 113.1c An ability can be an activated o tiggeed ability on the stack. This kind of ability is an object. (See section 6, “Spells, Abilities, and Effects.”) 647 113.1c An ability can be an activated or triggered ability on the stack. This kind of ability is an object. (See section 6, “Spells, Abilities, and Effects.”)
648 648
649 113.2. Abilities can affect the objects they’e on. They can also affect othe objects and/o playes. 649 113.2. Abilities can affect the objects they’re on. They can also affect other objects and/or players.
650 650
651 113.2a Abilities can be beneficial o detimental. 651 113.2a Abilities can be beneficial or detrimental.
652 Example: “[This ceatue] can’t block” is an ability. 652 Example: “[This creature] can’t block” is an ability.
653 653
654 113.2b An additional cost o altenative cost to cast a cad is an ability of the cad. 654 113.2b An additional cost or alternative cost to cast a card is an ability of the card.
655 655
656 113.2c An object may have multiple abilities. If the object is epesented by a cad, then aside fom cetain defined abilities that may be stung togethe on a single line (see ule 702, “Keywod Abilities”), each paagaph beak in a cad’s text maks a sepaate ability. If the object is not epesented by a cad, the effect that ceated it may have given it multiple abilities. An object may also be ganted additional abilities by a spell o ability. If an object has multiple instances of the same ability, each instance functions independently. This may o may not poduce moe effects than a single instance; efe to the specific ability fo moe infomation. 656 113.2c An object may have multiple abilities. If the object is represented by a card, then aside from certain defined abilities that may be strung together on a single line (see rule 702, “Keyword Abilities”), each paragraph break in a card’s text marks a separate ability. If the object is not represented by a card, the effect that created it may have given it multiple abilities. An object may also be granted additional abilities by a spell or ability. If an object has multiple instances of the same ability, each instance functions independently. This may or may not produce more effects than a single instance; refer to the specific ability for more information.
657 657
658 113.2d Abilities can geneate one-shot effects o continuous effects. Some continuous effects ae eplacement effects o pevention effects. See ule 609, “Effects.” 658 113.2d Abilities can generate one-shot effects or continuous effects. Some continuous effects are replacement effects or prevention effects. See rule 609, “Effects.”
659 659
660 113.3. Thee ae fou geneal categoies of abilities: 660 113.3. There are four general categories of abilities:
661 661
662 113.3a Spell abilities ae abilities that ae followed as instuctions while an instant o socey spell is esolving. Any text on an instant o socey spell is a spell ability unless it’s an activated ability, a tiggeed ability, o a static ability that fits the citeia descibed in ule 113.6. 662 113.3a Spell abilities are abilities that are followed as instructions while an instant or sorcery spell is resolving. Any text on an instant or sorcery spell is a spell ability unless it’s an activated ability, a triggered ability, or a static ability that fits the criteria described in rule 113.6.
663 663
664 113.3b Activated abilities have a cost and an effect. They ae witten as “[Cost]: [Effect.] [Activation instuctions (if any).]” A playe may activate such an ability wheneve they have pioity. Doing so puts it on the stack, whee it emains until it’s counteed, it esolves, o it othewise leaves the stack. See ule 602, “Activating Activated Abilities.” 664 113.3b Activated abilities have a cost and an effect. They are written as “[Cost]: [Effect.] [Activation instructions (if any).]” A player may activate such an ability whenever they have priority. Doing so puts it on the stack, where it remains until it’s countered, it resolves, or it otherwise leaves the stack. See rule 602, “Activating Activated Abilities.”
665 665
666 113.3c Tiggeed abilities have a tigge condition and an effect. They ae witten as “[Tigge condition], [effect],” and include (and usually begin with) the wod “when,” “wheneve,” o “at.” Wheneve the tigge event occus, the ability is put on the stack the next time a playe would eceive pioity and stays thee until it’s counteed, it esolves, o it othewise leaves the stack. See ule 603, “Handling Tiggeed Abilities.” 666 113.3c Triggered abilities have a trigger condition and an effect. They are written as “[Trigger condition], [effect],” and include (and usually begin with) the word “when,” “whenever,” or “at.” Whenever the trigger event occurs, the ability is put on the stack the next time a player would receive priority and stays there until it’s countered, it resolves, or it otherwise leaves the stack. See rule 603, “Handling Triggered Abilities.”
667 667
668 113.3d Static abilities ae witten as statements. They’e simply tue. Static abilities ceate continuous effects which ae active while the pemanent with the ability is on the battlefield and has the ability, o while the object with the ability is in the appopiate zone. See ule 604, “Handling Static Abilities.” 668 113.3d Static abilities are written as statements. They’re simply true. Static abilities create continuous effects which are active while the permanent with the ability is on the battlefield and has the ability, or while the object with the ability is in the appropriate zone. See rule 604, “Handling Static Abilities.”
669 669
670 113.4. Some activated abilities and some tiggeed abilities ae mana abilities. Mana abilities follow special ules: They don’t use the stack, and, unde cetain cicumstances, a playe can activate mana abilities even if they don’t have pioity. See ule 605, “Mana Abilities.” 670 113.4. Some activated abilities and some triggered abilities are mana abilities. Mana abilities follow special rules: They don’t use the stack, and, under certain circumstances, a player can activate mana abilities even if they don’t have priority. See rule 605, “Mana Abilities.”
671 671
672 113.5. Some activated abilities ae loyalty abilities. Loyalty abilities follow special ules: A playe may activate a loyalty ability of a pemanent they contol any time they have pioity and the stack is empty duing a main phase of thei tun, but only if no playe has peviously activated a loyalty ability of that pemanent that tun. See ule 606, “Loyalty Abilities.” 672 113.5. Some activated abilities are loyalty abilities. Loyalty abilities follow special rules: A player may activate a loyalty ability of a permanent they control any time they have priority and the stack is empty during a main phase of their turn, but only if no player has previously activated a loyalty ability of that permanent that turn. See rule 606, “Loyalty Abilities.”
673 673
674 113.6. Abilities of an instant o socey spell usually function only while that object is on the stack. Abilities of all othe objects usually function only while that object is on the battlefield. The exceptions ae as follows: 674 113.6. Abilities of an instant or sorcery spell usually function only while that object is on the stack. Abilities of all other objects usually function only while that object is on the battlefield. The exceptions are as follows:
675 675
676 113.6a Chaacteistic-defining abilities function eveywhee, even outside the game. (See ule 604.3.) 676 113.6a Characteristic-defining abilities function everywhere, even outside the game. (See rule 604.3.)
677 677
678 113.6b An ability that states which zones it functions in functions only fom those zones. 678 113.6b An ability that states which zones it functions in functions only from those zones.
679 679
680 113.6c An object’s ability that allows a playe to pay an altenative cost athe than its mana cost o othewise modifies what that paticula object costs to cast functions on the stack. 680 113.6c An object’s ability that allows a player to pay an alternative cost rather than its mana cost or otherwise modifies what that particular object costs to cast functions on the stack.
681 681
682 113.6d An object’s ability that esticts o modifies how that paticula object can be played o cast functions in any zone fom which it could be played o cast and also on the stack. An object’s ability that gants it anothe ability that esticts o modifies how that paticula object can be played o cast functions only on the stack. 682 113.6d An object’s ability that restricts or modifies how that particular object can be played or cast functions in any zone from which it could be played or cast and also on the stack. An object’s ability that grants it another ability that restricts or modifies how that particular object can be played or cast functions only on the stack.
683 683
684 113.6e An object’s ability that esticts o modifies what zones that paticula object can be played o cast fom functions eveywhee, even outside the game. 684 113.6e An object’s ability that restricts or modifies what zones that particular object can be played or cast from functions everywhere, even outside the game.
685 685
686 113.6f An object’s ability that states it can’t be counteed functions on the stack. 686 113.6f An object’s ability that states it can’t be countered functions on the stack.
687 687
688 113.6g An object’s ability that modifies how that paticula object entes the battlefield functions as that object is enteing the battlefield. See ule 614.12. 688 113.6g An object’s ability that modifies how that particular object enters the battlefield functions as that object is entering the battlefield. See rule 614.12.
689 689
690 113.6h An object’s ability that states countes can’t be put on that object functions as that object is enteing the battlefield in addition to functioning while that object is on the battlefield. 690 113.6h An object’s ability that states counters can’t be put on that object functions as that object is entering the battlefield in addition to functioning while that object is on the battlefield.
691 691
692 113.6i An object’s activated ability that has a cost that can’t be paid while the object is on the battlefield functions fom any zone in which its cost can be paid. 692 113.6i An object’s activated ability that has a cost that can’t be paid while the object is on the battlefield functions from any zone in which its cost can be paid.
693 693
694 113.6j A tigge condition that can’t tigge fom the battlefield functions in all zones it can tigge fom. Othe tigge conditions of the same tiggeed ability may function in diffeent zones. 694 113.6j A trigger condition that can’t trigger from the battlefield functions in all zones it can trigger from. Other trigger conditions of the same triggered ability may function in different zones.
695 Example: Absolve Thull has the ability “When Absolve Thull entes the battlefield o the ceatue it haunts dies, destoy taget enchantment.” The fist tigge condition functions fom the battlefield and the second tigge condition functions fom the exile zone. (See ule 702.54, “Haunt.”) 695 Example: Absolver Thrull has the ability “When Absolver Thrull enters the battlefield or the creature it haunts dies, destroy target enchantment.” The first trigger condition functions from the battlefield and the second trigger condition functions from the exile zone. (See rule 702.54, “Haunt.”)
696 696
697 113.6k An ability whose cost o effect specifies that it moves the object it’s on out of a paticula zone functions only in that zone, unless its tigge condition o a pevious pat of its cost o effect specifies that the object is put into that zone o, if the object is an Aua, that the object it enchants leaves the battlefield. The same is tue if the effect of that ability ceates a delayed tiggeed ability whose effect moves the object out of a paticula zone. 697 113.6k An ability whose cost or effect specifies that it moves the object it’s on out of a particular zone functions only in that zone, unless its trigger condition or a previous part of its cost or effect specifies that the object is put into that zone or, if the object is an Aura, that the object it enchants leaves the battlefield. The same is true if the effect of that ability creates a delayed triggered ability whose effect moves the object out of a particular zone.
698 Example: Reassembling Skeleton says “{1}{B}: Retun Reassembling Skeleton fom you gaveyad to the battlefield tapped.” A playe may activate this ability only if Reassembling Skeleton is in thei gaveyad. 698 Example: Reassembling Skeleton says “{1}{B}: Return Reassembling Skeleton from your graveyard to the battlefield tapped.” A player may activate this ability only if Reassembling Skeleton is in their graveyard.
699 699
700 113.6m An ability that modifies the ules fo deck constuction functions befoe the game begins. Such an ability modifies not just the Compehensive Rules, but also the Magic: The Gatheing Tounament Rules and any othe documents that set the deck constuction ules fo a specific fomat. Howeve, such an ability can’t affect the fomat legality of a cad, including whethe it’s banned o esticted. The cuent Magic: The Gatheing Tounament Rules can be found at WPN.Wizads.com/en/esouces/ules-documents. 700 113.6m An ability that modifies the rules for deck construction functions before the game begins. Such an ability modifies not just the Comprehensive Rules, but also the Magic: The Gathering Tournament Rules and any other documents that set the deck construction rules for a specific format. However, such an ability can’t affect the format legality of a card, including whether it’s banned or restricted. The current Magic: The Gathering Tournament Rules can be found at WPN.Wizards.com/en/resources/rules-documents.
701 701
702 113.6n Abilities of emblems, plane cads, vanguad cads, scheme cads, and conspiacy cads function in the command zone. See ule 114, “Emblems”; ule 901, “Planechase”; ule 902, “Vanguad”; ule 904, “Achenemy”; and ule 905, “Conspiacy Daft.” 702 113.6n Abilities of emblems, plane cards, vanguard cards, scheme cards, and conspiracy cards function in the command zone. See rule 114, “Emblems”; rule 901, “Planechase”; rule 902, “Vanguard”; rule 904, “Archenemy”; and rule 905, “Conspiracy Draft.”
703 703
704 113.7. The souce of an ability is the object that geneated it. The souce of an activated ability on the stack is the object whose ability was activated. The souce of a tiggeed ability (othe than a delayed tiggeed ability) on the stack, o one that has tiggeed and is waiting to be put on the stack, is the object whose ability tiggeed. To detemine the souce of a delayed tiggeed ability, see ules 603.7d–f. 704 113.7. The source of an ability is the object that generated it. The source of an activated ability on the stack is the object whose ability was activated. The source of a triggered ability (other than a delayed triggered ability) on the stack, or one that has triggered and is waiting to be put on the stack, is the object whose ability triggered. To determine the source of a delayed triggered ability, see rules 603.7d–f.
705 705
706 113.7a Once activated o tiggeed, an ability exists on the stack independently of its souce. Destuction o emoval of the souce afte that time won’t affect the ability. Note that some abilities cause a souce to do something (fo example, “Podigal Pyomance deals 1 damage to any taget”) athe than the ability doing anything diectly. In these cases, any activated o tiggeed ability that efeences infomation about the souce fo use while announcing an activated ability o putting a tiggeed ability on the stack checks that infomation when the ability is put onto the stack. Othewise, it will check that infomation when it esolves. In both instances, if the souce is no longe in the zone it’s expected to be in at that time, its last known infomation is used. The souce can still pefom the action even though it no longe exists. 706 113.7a Once activated or triggered, an ability exists on the stack independently of its source. Destruction or removal of the source after that time won’t affect the ability. Note that some abilities cause a source to do something (for example, “Prodigal Pyromancer deals 1 damage to any target”) rather than the ability doing anything directly. In these cases, any activated or triggered ability that references information about the source for use while announcing an activated ability or putting a triggered ability on the stack checks that information when the ability is put onto the stack. Otherwise, it will check that information when it resolves. In both instances, if the source is no longer in the zone it’s expected to be in at that time, its last known information is used. The source can still perform the action even though it no longer exists.
707 707
708 113.8. The contolle of an activated ability on the stack is the playe who activated it. The contolle of a tiggeed ability on the stack (othe than a delayed tiggeed ability) is the playe who contolled the ability’s souce when it tiggeed, o, if it had no contolle, the playe who owned the ability’s souce when it tiggeed. To detemine the contolle of a delayed tiggeed ability, see ules 603.7d–f. 708 113.8. The controller of an activated ability on the stack is the player who activated it. The controller of a triggered ability on the stack (other than a delayed triggered ability) is the player who controlled the ability’s source when it triggered, or, if it had no controller, the player who owned the ability’s source when it triggered. To determine the controller of a delayed triggered ability, see rules 603.7d–f.
709 709
710 113.9. Activated and tiggeed abilities on the stack aen’t spells, and theefoe can’t be counteed by anything that countes only spells. Activated and tiggeed abilities on the stack can be counteed by effects that specifically counte abilities. Static abilities don’t use the stack and thus can’t be counteed at all. 710 113.9. Activated and triggered abilities on the stack aren’t spells, and therefore can’t be countered by anything that counters only spells. Activated and triggered abilities on the stack can be countered by effects that specifically counter abilities. Static abilities don’t use the stack and thus can’t be countered at all.
711 711
712 113.10. Effects can add o emove abilities of objects. An effect that adds an ability will state that the object “gains” o “has” that ability, o simila. An effect that emoves an ability will state that the object “loses” that ability. 712 113.10. Effects can add or remove abilities of objects. An effect that adds an ability will state that the object “gains” or “has” that ability, or similar. An effect that removes an ability will state that the object “loses” that ability.
713 713
714 113.10a An effect that adds an activated ability may include activation instuctions fo that ability. These instuctions become pat of the ability that’s added to the object. 714 113.10a An effect that adds an activated ability may include activation instructions for that ability. These instructions become part of the ability that’s added to the object.
715 715
716 113.10b Effects that emove an ability emove all instances of it. 716 113.10b Effects that remove an ability remove all instances of it.
717 717
718 113.10c If two o moe effects add and emove the same ability, in geneal the most ecent one pevails. See ule 613 fo moe infomation about the inteaction of continuous effects. 718 113.10c If two or more effects add and remove the same ability, in general the most recent one prevails. See rule 613 for more information about the interaction of continuous effects.
719 719
720 113.11. Effects can stop an object fom having a specified ability. These effects say that the object “can’t have” that ability. If the object has that ability, it loses it. It’s also impossible fo an effect to add that ability to the object. If a esolving spell o ability ceates a continuous effect that would add the specified ability to such an object, that pat of that continuous effect does not apply; howeve, othe pats of that continuous effect will still apply, and that esolving spell o ability can still ceate othe continuous effects. Continuous effects ceated by static abilities that would add the specified ability won’t apply to that object. 720 113.11. Effects can stop an object from having a specified ability. These effects say that the object “can’t have” that ability. If the object has that ability, it loses it. It’s also impossible for an effect to add that ability to the object. If a resolving spell or ability creates a continuous effect that would add the specified ability to such an object, that part of that continuous effect does not apply; however, other parts of that continuous effect will still apply, and that resolving spell or ability can still create other continuous effects. Continuous effects created by static abilities that would add the specified ability won’t apply to that object.
721 721
722 113.12. An effect that sets an object’s chaacteistic, o simply states a quality of that object, is diffeent fom an ability ganted by an effect. When an object “gains” o “has” an ability, that ability can be emoved by anothe effect. If an effect defines a chaacteistic of the object (“[pemanent] is [chaacteistic value]”), it’s not ganting an ability. (See ule 604.3.) Similaly, if an effect states a quality of that object (“[ceatue] can’t be blocked,” fo example), it’s neithe ganting an ability no setting a chaacteistic. 722 113.12. An effect that sets an object’s characteristic, or simply states a quality of that object, is different from an ability granted by an effect. When an object “gains” or “has” an ability, that ability can be removed by another effect. If an effect defines a characteristic of the object (“[permanent] is [characteristic value]”), it’s not granting an ability. (See rule 604.3.) Similarly, if an effect states a quality of that object (“[creature] can’t be blocked,” for example), it’s neither granting an ability nor setting a characteristic.
723 Example: Muaganda Petoglyphs eads, “Ceatues with no abilities get +2/+2.” A Runeclaw Bea (a ceatue with no abilities) enchanted by an Aua that says “Enchanted ceatue has flying” would not get +2/+2. A Runeclaw Bea enchanted by an Aua that says “Enchanted ceatue is ed” o “Enchanted ceatue can’t be blocked” would get +2/+2. 723 Example: Muraganda Petroglyphs reads, “Creatures with no abilities get +2/+2.” A Runeclaw Bear (a creature with no abilities) enchanted by an Aura that says “Enchanted creature has flying” would not get +2/+2. A Runeclaw Bear enchanted by an Aura that says “Enchanted creature is red” or “Enchanted creature can’t be blocked” would get +2/+2.
724 724
725 114. Emblems 725 114. Emblems
726 726
727 114.1. Some effects put emblems into the command zone. An emblem is a make used to epesent an object that has one o moe abilities, but no othe chaacteistics. 727 114.1. Some effects put emblems into the command zone. An emblem is a marker used to represent an object that has one or more abilities, but no other characteristics.
728 728
729 114.2. An effect that ceates an emblem is witten “[Playe] gets an emblem with [ability].” This means that [playe] puts an emblem with [ability] into the command zone. The emblem is both owned and contolled by that playe. 729 114.2. An effect that creates an emblem is written “[Player] gets an emblem with [ability].” This means that [player] puts an emblem with [ability] into the command zone. The emblem is both owned and controlled by that player.
730 730
731 114.3. An emblem has no chaacteistics othe than the abilities defined by the effect that ceated it. In paticula, an emblem has no name, no types, no mana cost, and no colo. 731 114.3. An emblem has no characteristics other than the abilities defined by the effect that created it. In particular, an emblem has no name, no types, no mana cost, and no color.
732 732
733 114.4. Abilities of emblems function in the command zone. 733 114.4. Abilities of emblems function in the command zone.
734 734
735 114.5. An emblem is neithe a cad no a pemanent. Emblem isn’t a cad type. 735 114.5. An emblem is neither a card nor a permanent. Emblem isn’t a card type.
736 736
737 115. Tagets 737 115. Targets
738 738
739 115.1. Some spells and abilities equie thei contolle to choose one o moe tagets fo them. The tagets ae object(s) and/o playe(s) the spell o ability will affect. These tagets ae declaed as pat of the pocess of putting the spell o ability on the stack. The tagets can’t be changed except by anothe spell o ability that explicitly says it can do so. 739 115.1. Some spells and abilities require their controller to choose one or more targets for them. The targets are object(s) and/or player(s) the spell or ability will affect. These targets are declared as part of the process of putting the spell or ability on the stack. The targets can’t be changed except by another spell or ability that explicitly says it can do so.
740 740
741 115.1a An instant o socey spell is tageted if its spell ability identifies something it will affect by using the phase “taget [something],” whee the “something” is a phase that descibes an object and/o playe. The taget(s) ae chosen as the spell is cast; see ule 601.2c. (If an activated o tiggeed ability of an instant o socey uses the wod taget, that ability is tageted, but the spell is not.) 741 115.1a An instant or sorcery spell is targeted if its spell ability identifies something it will affect by using the phrase “target [something],” where the “something” is a phrase that describes an object and/or player. The target(s) are chosen as the spell is cast; see rule 601.2c. (If an activated or triggered ability of an instant or sorcery uses the word target, that ability is targeted, but the spell is not.)
742 Example: A socey cad has the ability “When you cycle this cad, taget ceatue gets -1/-1 until end of tun.” This tiggeed ability is tageted, but that doesn’t make the cad it’s on tageted. 742 Example: A sorcery card has the ability “When you cycle this card, target creature gets -1/-1 until end of turn.” This triggered ability is targeted, but that doesn’t make the card it’s on targeted.
743 743
744 115.1b Aua spells ae always tageted. These ae the only pemanent spells with tagets. An Aua’s taget is specified by its enchant keywod ability (see ule 702.5, “Enchant”). The taget(s) ae chosen as the spell is cast; see ule 601.2c. An Aua pemanent doesn’t taget anything; only the spell is tageted. (An activated o tiggeed ability of an Aua pemanent can also be tageted.) 744 115.1b Aura spells are always targeted. These are the only permanent spells with targets. An Aura’s target is specified by its enchant keyword ability (see rule 702.5, “Enchant”). The target(s) are chosen as the spell is cast; see rule 601.2c. An Aura permanent doesn’t target anything; only the spell is targeted. (An activated or triggered ability of an Aura permanent can also be targeted.)
745 745
746 115.1c An activated ability is tageted if it identifies something it will affect by using the phase “taget [something],” whee the “something” is a phase that descibes an object and/o playe. The taget(s) ae chosen as the ability is activated; see ule 602.2b. 746 115.1c An activated ability is targeted if it identifies something it will affect by using the phrase “target [something],” where the “something” is a phrase that describes an object and/or player. The target(s) are chosen as the ability is activated; see rule 602.2b.
747 747
748 115.1d A tiggeed ability is tageted if it identifies something it will affect by using the phase “taget [something],” whee the “something” is a phase that descibes an object and/o playe. The taget(s) ae chosen as the ability is put on the stack; see ule 603.3d. 748 115.1d A triggered ability is targeted if it identifies something it will affect by using the phrase “target [something],” where the “something” is a phrase that describes an object and/or player. The target(s) are chosen as the ability is put on the stack; see rule 603.3d.
749 749
750 115.1e Some keywod abilities, such as equip and povoke, epesent tageted activated o tiggeed abilities. In those cases, the phase “taget [something]” appeas in the ule fo that keywod ability athe than in the ability itself. (The keywod’s eminde text will often contain the wod “taget.”) See ule 702, “Keywod Abilities.” 750 115.1e Some keyword abilities, such as equip and provoke, represent targeted activated or triggered abilities. In those cases, the phrase “target [something]” appears in the rule for that keyword ability rather than in the ability itself. (The keyword’s reminder text will often contain the word “target.”) See rule 702, “Keyword Abilities.”
751 751
752 115.2. Only pemanents ae legal tagets fo spells and abilities, unless a spell o ability (a) specifies that it can taget an object in anothe zone o a playe, o (b) tagets an object that can’t exist on the battlefield, such as a spell o ability. See also ule 115.4. 752 115.2. Only permanents are legal targets for spells and abilities, unless a spell or ability (a) specifies that it can target an object in another zone or a player, or (b) targets an object that can’t exist on the battlefield, such as a spell or ability. See also rule 115.4.
753 753
754 115.3. The same taget can’t be chosen multiple times fo any one instance of the wod “taget” on a spell o ability. If the spell o ability uses the wod “taget” in multiple places, the same object o playe can be chosen once fo each instance of the wod “taget” (as long as it fits the tageting citeia). This ule applies both when choosing tagets fo a spell o ability and when changing tagets o choosing new tagets fo a spell o ability (see ule 115.7). 754 115.3. The same target can’t be chosen multiple times for any one instance of the word “target” on a spell or ability. If the spell or ability uses the word “target” in multiple places, the same object or player can be chosen once for each instance of the word “target” (as long as it fits the targeting criteria). This rule applies both when choosing targets for a spell or ability and when changing targets or choosing new targets for a spell or ability (see rule 115.7).
755 755
756 115.4. Some spells and abilities that efe to damage equie “any taget,” “anothe taget,” “two tagets,” o simila athe than “taget [something].” These tagets may be ceatues, playes, o planeswalkes. Othe game objects, such as nonceatue atifacts o spells, can’t be chosen. 756 115.4. Some spells and abilities that refer to damage require “any target,” “another target,” “two targets,” or similar rather than “target [something].” These targets may be creatures, players, or planeswalkers. Other game objects, such as noncreature artifacts or spells, can’t be chosen.
757 757
758 115.5. A spell o ability on the stack is an illegal taget fo itself. 758 115.5. A spell or ability on the stack is an illegal target for itself.
759 759
760 115.6. A spell o ability that equies tagets may allow zeo tagets to be chosen. Such a spell o ability is still said to equie tagets, but that spell o ability is tageted only if one o moe tagets have been chosen fo it. 760 115.6. A spell or ability that requires targets may allow zero targets to be chosen. Such a spell or ability is still said to require targets, but that spell or ability is targeted only if one or more targets have been chosen for it.
761 761
762 115.7. Some effects allow a playe to change the taget(s) of a spell o ability, and othe effects allow a playe to choose new tagets fo a spell o ability. 762 115.7. Some effects allow a player to change the target(s) of a spell or ability, and other effects allow a player to choose new targets for a spell or ability.
763 763
764 115.7a If an effect allows a playe to “change the taget(s)” of a spell o ability, each taget can be changed only to anothe legal taget. If a taget can’t be changed to anothe legal taget, the oiginal taget is unchanged, even if the oiginal taget is itself illegal by then. If all the tagets aen’t changed to othe legal tagets, none of them ae changed. 764 115.7a If an effect allows a player to “change the target(s)” of a spell or ability, each target can be changed only to another legal target. If a target can’t be changed to another legal target, the original target is unchanged, even if the original target is itself illegal by then. If all the targets aren’t changed to other legal targets, none of them are changed.
765 765
766 115.7b If an effect allows a playe to “change a taget” of a spell o ability, the pocess descibed in ule 115.7a is followed, except that only one of those tagets may be changed (athe than all of them o none of them). 766 115.7b If an effect allows a player to “change a target” of a spell or ability, the process described in rule 115.7a is followed, except that only one of those targets may be changed (rather than all of them or none of them).
767 767
768 115.7c If an effect allows a playe to “change any tagets” of a spell o ability, the pocess descibed in ule 115.7a is followed, except that any numbe of those tagets may be changed (athe than all of them o none of them). 768 115.7c If an effect allows a player to “change any targets” of a spell or ability, the process described in rule 115.7a is followed, except that any number of those targets may be changed (rather than all of them or none of them).
769 769
770 115.7d If an effect allows a playe to “choose new tagets” fo a spell o ability, the playe may leave any numbe of the tagets unchanged, even if those tagets would be illegal. If the playe chooses to change some o all of the tagets, the new tagets must be legal and must not cause any unchanged tagets to become illegal. 770 115.7d If an effect allows a player to “choose new targets” for a spell or ability, the player may leave any number of the targets unchanged, even if those targets would be illegal. If the player chooses to change some or all of the targets, the new targets must be legal and must not cause any unchanged targets to become illegal.
771 771
772 115.7e When changing tagets o choosing new tagets fo a spell o ability, only the final set of tagets is evaluated to detemine whethe the change is legal. 772 115.7e When changing targets or choosing new targets for a spell or ability, only the final set of targets is evaluated to determine whether the change is legal.
773 Example: Ac Tail is a socey that eads “Ac Tail deals 2 damage to any taget and 1 damage to anothe taget.” The cuent tagets of Ac Tail ae Runeclaw Bea and Llanowa Elves, in that ode. You cast Rediect, an instant that eads “You may choose new tagets fo taget spell,” tageting Ac Tail. You can change the fist taget to Llanowa Elves and change the second taget to Runeclaw Bea. 773 Example: Arc Trail is a sorcery that reads “Arc Trail deals 2 damage to any target and 1 damage to another target.” The current targets of Arc Trail are Runeclaw Bear and Llanowar Elves, in that order. You cast Redirect, an instant that reads “You may choose new targets for target spell,” targeting Arc Trail. You can change the first target to Llanowar Elves and change the second target to Runeclaw Bear.
774 774
775 115.7f A spell o ability may “divide” o “distibute” an effect (such as damage o countes) among one o moe tagets. When changing tagets o choosing new tagets fo that spell o ability, the oiginal division can’t be changed. 775 115.7f A spell or ability may “divide” or “distribute” an effect (such as damage or counters) among one or more targets. When changing targets or choosing new targets for that spell or ability, the original division can’t be changed.
776 776
777 115.8. Modal spells and abilities may have diffeent tageting equiements fo each mode. An effect that allows a playe to change the taget(s) of a modal spell o ability, o to choose new tagets fo a modal spell o ability, doesn’t allow that playe to change its mode. (See ule 700.2.) 777 115.8. Modal spells and abilities may have different targeting requirements for each mode. An effect that allows a player to change the target(s) of a modal spell or ability, or to choose new targets for a modal spell or ability, doesn’t allow that player to change its mode. (See rule 700.2.)
778 778
779 115.9. Some objects check what anothe spell o ability is tageting. Depending on the woding, these may check the cuent state of the tagets, the state of the tagets at the time they wee selected, o both. 779 115.9. Some objects check what another spell or ability is targeting. Depending on the wording, these may check the current state of the targets, the state of the targets at the time they were selected, or both.
780 780
781 115.9a An object that looks fo a “[spell o ability] with a single taget” checks the numbe of times any object o playe was chosen as the taget of that spell o ability when it was put on the stack, not the numbe of its tagets that ae cuently legal. If the same object o playe became a taget moe than once, each of those instances is counted sepaately. 781 115.9a An object that looks for a “[spell or ability] with a single target” checks the number of times any object or player was chosen as the target of that spell or ability when it was put on the stack, not the number of its targets that are currently legal. If the same object or player became a target more than once, each of those instances is counted separately.
782 782
783 115.9b An object that looks fo a “[spell o ability] that tagets [something]” checks the cuent state of that spell o ability’s tagets. If an object it tagets is still in the zone it’s expected to be in o a playe it tagets is still in the game, that taget’s cuent infomation is used, even if it’s not cuently legal fo that spell o ability. If an object it tagets is no longe in the zone it’s expected to be in o a playe it tagets is no longe in the game, that taget is ignoed; its last known infomation is not used. 783 115.9b An object that looks for a “[spell or ability] that targets [something]” checks the current state of that spell or ability’s targets. If an object it targets is still in the zone it’s expected to be in or a player it targets is still in the game, that target’s current information is used, even if it’s not currently legal for that spell or ability. If an object it targets is no longer in the zone it’s expected to be in or a player it targets is no longer in the game, that target is ignored; its last known information is not used.
784 784
785 115.9c An object that looks fo a “[spell o ability] that tagets only [something]” checks the numbe of diffeent objects o playes that wee chosen as tagets of that spell o ability when it was put on the stack (as modified by effects that changed those tagets), not the numbe of those objects o playes that ae cuently legal tagets. If that numbe is one (even if the spell o ability tagets that object o playe multiple times), the cuent state of that spell o ability’s taget is checked as descibed in ule 115.9b. 785 115.9c An object that looks for a “[spell or ability] that targets only [something]” checks the number of different objects or players that were chosen as targets of that spell or ability when it was put on the stack (as modified by effects that changed those targets), not the number of those objects or players that are currently legal targets. If that number is one (even if the spell or ability targets that object or player multiple times), the current state of that spell or ability’s target is checked as described in rule 115.9b.
786 786
787 115.10. Spells and abilities can affect objects and playes they don’t taget. In geneal, those objects and playes aen’t chosen until the spell o ability esolves. See ule 608, “Resolving Spells and Abilities.” 787 115.10. Spells and abilities can affect objects and players they don’t target. In general, those objects and players aren’t chosen until the spell or ability resolves. See rule 608, “Resolving Spells and Abilities.”
788 788
789 115.10a Just because an object o playe is being affected by a spell o ability doesn’t make that object o playe a taget of that spell o ability. Unless that object o playe is identified by the wod “taget” in the text of that spell o ability, o the ule fo that keywod ability, it’s not a taget. 789 115.10a Just because an object or player is being affected by a spell or ability doesn’t make that object or player a target of that spell or ability. Unless that object or player is identified by the word “target” in the text of that spell or ability, or the rule for that keyword ability, it’s not a target.
790 790
791 115.10b In paticula, the wod “you” in an object’s text doesn’t indicate a taget. 791 115.10b In particular, the word “you” in an object’s text doesn’t indicate a target.
792 792
793 116. Special Actions 793 116. Special Actions
794 794
795 116.1. Special actions ae actions a playe may take when they have pioity that don’t use the stack. These ae not to be confused with tun-based actions and state-based actions, which the game geneates automatically. (See ule 703, “Tun-Based Actions,” and ule 704, “State-Based Actions.”) 795 116.1. Special actions are actions a player may take when they have priority that don’t use the stack. These are not to be confused with turn-based actions and state-based actions, which the game generates automatically. (See rule 703, “Turn-Based Actions,” and rule 704, “State-Based Actions.”)
796 796
797 116.2. Thee ae eight special actions: 797 116.2. There are eight special actions:
798 798
799 116.2a Playing a land is a special action. To play a land, a playe puts that land onto the battlefield fom the zone it was in (usually that playe’s hand). By default, a playe can take this action only once duing each of thei tuns. A playe can take this action any time they have pioity and the stack is empty duing a main phase of thei tun. See ule 305, “Lands.” 799 116.2a Playing a land is a special action. To play a land, a player puts that land onto the battlefield from the zone it was in (usually that player’s hand). By default, a player can take this action only once during each of their turns. A player can take this action any time they have priority and the stack is empty during a main phase of their turn. See rule 305, “Lands.”
800 800
801 116.2b Tuning a face-down ceatue face up is a special action. A playe can take this action any time they have pioity. See ule 707, “Face-Down Spells and Pemanents.” 801 116.2b Turning a face-down creature face up is a special action. A player can take this action any time they have priority. See rule 707, “Face-Down Spells and Permanents.”
802 802
803 116.2c Some effects allow a playe to take an action at a late time, usually to end a continuous effect o to stop a delayed tiggeed ability fom tiggeing. Doing so is a special action. A playe can take such an action any time they have pioity, unless that effect specifies anothe timing estiction, fo as long as the effect allows it. 803 116.2c Some effects allow a player to take an action at a later time, usually to end a continuous effect or to stop a delayed triggered ability from triggering. Doing so is a special action. A player can take such an action any time they have priority, unless that effect specifies another timing restriction, for as long as the effect allows it.
804 804
805 116.2d Some effects fom static abilities allow a playe to take an action to ignoe the effect fom that ability fo a duation. Doing so is a special action. A playe can take such an action any time they have pioity. 805 116.2d Some effects from static abilities allow a player to take an action to ignore the effect from that ability for a duration. Doing so is a special action. A player can take such an action any time they have priority.
806 806
807 116.2e One cad (Cicling Vultues) has the ability “You may discad Cicling Vultues any time you could cast an instant.” Doing so is a special action. A playe can take such an action any time they have pioity. 807 116.2e One card (Circling Vultures) has the ability “You may discard Circling Vultures any time you could cast an instant.” Doing so is a special action. A player can take such an action any time they have priority.
808 808
809 116.2f A playe who has a cad with suspend in thei hand may exile that cad. This is a special action. A playe can take this action any time they have pioity, but only if they could begin to cast that cad by putting it onto the stack. See ule 702.61, “Suspend.” 809 116.2f A player who has a card with suspend in their hand may exile that card. This is a special action. A player can take this action any time they have priority, but only if they could begin to cast that card by putting it onto the stack. See rule 702.61, “Suspend.”
810 810
811 116.2g In a Planechase game, olling the plana die is a special action. A playe can take this action any time they have pioity and the stack is empty duing a main phase of thei tun. Taking this action costs a playe an amount of mana equal to the numbe of times they have peviously taken this action on that tun. Note that this numbe won’t be equal to the numbe of times the playe has olled the plana die that tun if an effect has caused the playe to oll the plana die that tun. See ule 901, “Planechase.” 811 116.2g In a Planechase game, rolling the planar die is a special action. A player can take this action any time they have priority and the stack is empty during a main phase of their turn. Taking this action costs a player an amount of mana equal to the number of times they have previously taken this action on that turn. Note that this number won’t be equal to the number of times the player has rolled the planar die that turn if an effect has caused the player to roll the planar die that turn. See rule 901, “Planechase.”
812 812
813 116.2h In a Conspiacy Daft game, tuning a face-down conspiacy cad in the command zone face up is a special action. A playe can take this action any time they have pioity. See ule 905.4a. 813 116.2h In a Conspiracy Draft game, turning a face-down conspiracy card in the command zone face up is a special action. A player can take this action any time they have priority. See rule 905.4a.
814 814
815 116.3. If a playe takes a special action, that playe eceives pioity aftewad. 815 116.3. If a player takes a special action, that player receives priority afterward.
816 816
817 117. Timing and Pioity 817 117. Timing and Priority
818 818
819 117.1. Unless a spell o ability is instucting a playe to take an action, which playe can take actions at any given time is detemined by a system of pioity. The playe with pioity may cast spells, activate abilities, and take special actions. 819 117.1. Unless a spell or ability is instructing a player to take an action, which player can take actions at any given time is determined by a system of priority. The player with priority may cast spells, activate abilities, and take special actions.
820 820
821 117.1a A playe may cast an instant spell any time they have pioity. A playe may cast a noninstant spell duing thei main phase any time they have pioity and the stack is empty. 821 117.1a A player may cast an instant spell any time they have priority. A player may cast a noninstant spell during their main phase any time they have priority and the stack is empty.
822 822
823 117.1b A playe may activate an activated ability any time they have pioity. 823 117.1b A player may activate an activated ability any time they have priority.
824 824
825 117.1c A playe may take some special actions any time they have pioity. A playe may take othe special actions duing thei main phase any time they have pioity and the stack is empty. See ule 116, “Special Actions.” 825 117.1c A player may take some special actions any time they have priority. A player may take other special actions during their main phase any time they have priority and the stack is empty. See rule 116, “Special Actions.”
826 826
827 117.1d A playe may activate a mana ability wheneve they have pioity, wheneve they ae casting a spell o activating an ability that equies a mana payment, o wheneve a ule o effect asks fo a mana payment (even in the middle of casting o esolving a spell o activating o esolving an ability). 827 117.1d A player may activate a mana ability whenever they have priority, whenever they are casting a spell or activating an ability that requires a mana payment, or whenever a rule or effect asks for a mana payment (even in the middle of casting or resolving a spell or activating or resolving an ability).
828 828
829 117.2. Othe kinds of abilities and actions ae automatically geneated o pefomed by the game ules, o ae pefomed by playes without eceiving pioity. 829 117.2. Other kinds of abilities and actions are automatically generated or performed by the game rules, or are performed by players without receiving priority.
830 830
831 117.2a Tiggeed abilities can tigge at any time, including while a spell is being cast, an ability is being activated, o a spell o ability is esolving. (See ule 603, “Handling Tiggeed Abilities.”) Howeve, nothing actually happens at the time an ability tigges. Each time a playe would eceive pioity, each ability that has tiggeed but hasn’t yet been put on the stack is put on the stack. See ule 117.5. 831 117.2a Triggered abilities can trigger at any time, including while a spell is being cast, an ability is being activated, or a spell or ability is resolving. (See rule 603, “Handling Triggered Abilities.”) However, nothing actually happens at the time an ability triggers. Each time a player would receive priority, each ability that has triggered but hasn’t yet been put on the stack is put on the stack. See rule 117.5.
832 832
833 117.2b Static abilities continuously affect the game. Pioity doesn’t apply to them. (See ule 604, “Handling Static Abilities,” and ule 611, “Continuous Effects.”) 833 117.2b Static abilities continuously affect the game. Priority doesn’t apply to them. (See rule 604, “Handling Static Abilities,” and rule 611, “Continuous Effects.”)
834 834
835 117.2c Tun-based actions happen automatically when cetain steps o phases begin. They’e dealt with befoe a playe would eceive pioity. See ule 117.3a. Tun-based actions also happen automatically when each step and phase ends; no playe eceives pioity aftewad. See ule 703, “Tun-Based Actions.” 835 117.2c Turn-based actions happen automatically when certain steps or phases begin. They’re dealt with before a player would receive priority. See rule 117.3a. Turn-based actions also happen automatically when each step and phase ends; no player receives priority afterward. See rule 703, “Turn-Based Actions.”
836 836
837 117.2d State-based actions happen automatically when cetain conditions ae met. See ule 704. They’e dealt with befoe a playe would eceive pioity. See ule 117.5. 837 117.2d State-based actions happen automatically when certain conditions are met. See rule 704. They’re dealt with before a player would receive priority. See rule 117.5.
838 838
839 117.2e Resolving spells and abilities may instuct playes to make choices o take actions, o may allow playes to activate mana abilities. Even if a playe is doing so, no playe has pioity while a spell o ability is esolving. See ule 608, “Resolving Spells and Abilities.” 839 117.2e Resolving spells and abilities may instruct players to make choices or take actions, or may allow players to activate mana abilities. Even if a player is doing so, no player has priority while a spell or ability is resolving. See rule 608, “Resolving Spells and Abilities.”
840 840
841 117.3. Which playe has pioity is detemined by the following ules: 841 117.3. Which player has priority is determined by the following rules:
842 842
843 117.3a The active playe eceives pioity at the beginning of most steps and phases, afte any tun-based actions (such as dawing a cad duing the daw step; see ule 703) have been dealt with and abilities that tigge at the beginning of that phase o step have been put on the stack. No playe eceives pioity duing the untap step. Playes usually don’t get pioity duing the cleanup step (see ule 514.3). 843 117.3a The active player receives priority at the beginning of most steps and phases, after any turn-based actions (such as drawing a card during the draw step; see rule 703) have been dealt with and abilities that trigger at the beginning of that phase or step have been put on the stack. No player receives priority during the untap step. Players usually don’t get priority during the cleanup step (see rule 514.3).
844 844
845 117.3b The active playe eceives pioity afte a spell o ability (othe than a mana ability) esolves. 845 117.3b The active player receives priority after a spell or ability (other than a mana ability) resolves.
846 846
847 117.3c If a playe has pioity when they cast a spell, activate an ability, o take a special action, that playe eceives pioity aftewad. 847 117.3c If a player has priority when they cast a spell, activate an ability, or take a special action, that player receives priority afterward.
848 848
849 117.3d If a playe has pioity and chooses not to take any actions, that playe passes. If any mana is in that playe’s mana pool, they announce what mana is thee. Then the next playe in tun ode eceives pioity. 849 117.3d If a player has priority and chooses not to take any actions, that player passes. If any mana is in that player’s mana pool, they announce what mana is there. Then the next player in turn order receives priority.
850 850
851 117.4. If all playes pass in succession (that is, if all playes pass without taking any actions in between passing), the spell o ability on top of the stack esolves o, if the stack is empty, the phase o step ends. 851 117.4. If all players pass in succession (that is, if all players pass without taking any actions in between passing), the spell or ability on top of the stack resolves or, if the stack is empty, the phase or step ends.
852 852
853 117.5. Each time a playe would get pioity, the game fist pefoms all applicable state-based actions as a single event (see ule 704, “State-Based Actions”), then epeats this pocess until no state-based actions ae pefomed. Then tiggeed abilities ae put on the stack (see ule 603, “Handling Tiggeed Abilities”). These steps epeat in ode until no futhe state-based actions ae pefomed and no abilities tigge. Then the playe who would have eceived pioity does so. 853 117.5. Each time a player would get priority, the game first performs all applicable state-based actions as a single event (see rule 704, “State-Based Actions”), then repeats this process until no state-based actions are performed. Then triggered abilities are put on the stack (see rule 603, “Handling Triggered Abilities”). These steps repeat in order until no further state-based actions are performed and no abilities trigger. Then the player who would have received priority does so.
854 854
855 117.6. In a multiplaye game using the shaed team tuns option, teams athe than individual playes have pioity. See ule 805, “Shaed Team Tuns Option.” 855 117.6. In a multiplayer game using the shared team turns option, teams rather than individual players have priority. See rule 805, “Shared Team Turns Option.”
856 856
857 117.7. If a playe with pioity casts a spell o activates an activated ability while anothe spell o ability is aleady on the stack, the new spell o ability has been cast o activated “in esponse to” the ealie spell o ability. The new spell o ability will esolve fist. See ule 608, “Resolving Spells and Abilities.” 857 117.7. If a player with priority casts a spell or activates an activated ability while another spell or ability is already on the stack, the new spell or ability has been cast or activated “in response to” the earlier spell or ability. The new spell or ability will resolve first. See rule 608, “Resolving Spells and Abilities.”
858 858
859 118. Costs 859 118. Costs
860 860
861 118.1. A cost is an action o payment necessay to take anothe action o to stop anothe action fom taking place. To pay a cost, a playe caies out the instuctions specified by the spell, ability, o effect that contains that cost. 861 118.1. A cost is an action or payment necessary to take another action or to stop another action from taking place. To pay a cost, a player carries out the instructions specified by the spell, ability, or effect that contains that cost.
862 862
863 118.2. If a cost includes a mana payment, the playe paying the cost has a chance to activate mana abilities. Paying the cost to cast a spell o activate an activated ability follows the steps in ules 601.2f–h. 863 118.2. If a cost includes a mana payment, the player paying the cost has a chance to activate mana abilities. Paying the cost to cast a spell or activate an activated ability follows the steps in rules 601.2f–h.
864 864
865 118.3. A playe can’t pay a cost without having the necessay esouces to pay it fully. Fo example, a playe with only 1 life can’t pay a cost of 2 life, and a pemanent that’s aleady tapped can’t be tapped to pay a cost. See ule 202, “Mana Cost and Colo,” and ule 602, “Activating Activated Abilities.” 865 118.3. A player can’t pay a cost without having the necessary resources to pay it fully. For example, a player with only 1 life can’t pay a cost of 2 life, and a permanent that’s already tapped can’t be tapped to pay a cost. See rule 202, “Mana Cost and Color,” and rule 602, “Activating Activated Abilities.”
866 866
867 118.3a Paying mana is done by emoving the indicated mana fom a playe’s mana pool. (Playes can always pay 0 mana.) If excess mana emains in that playe’s mana pool afte making that payment, the playe announces what mana is still thee. 867 118.3a Paying mana is done by removing the indicated mana from a player’s mana pool. (Players can always pay 0 mana.) If excess mana remains in that player’s mana pool after making that payment, the player announces what mana is still there.
868 868
869 118.3b Paying life is done by subtacting the indicated amount of life fom a playe’s life total. (Playes can always pay 0 life.) 869 118.3b Paying life is done by subtracting the indicated amount of life from a player’s life total. (Players can always pay 0 life.)
870 870
871 118.3c Activating mana abilities is not mandatoy, even if paying a cost is. 871 118.3c Activating mana abilities is not mandatory, even if paying a cost is.
872 Example: A playe contols Lodestone Golem, which says “Nonatifact spells cost {1} moe to cast.” Anothe playe emoves the last time counte fom a suspended socey cad. That playe must cast that spell if able, but doing so costs {1}. The playe is foced to pay that cost if enough mana is in thei mana pool, but the playe isn’t foced to activate a mana ability to poduce that mana. If they don’t, the cad simply emains exiled. 872 Example: A player controls Lodestone Golem, which says “Nonartifact spells cost {1} more to cast.” Another player removes the last time counter from a suspended sorcery card. That player must cast that spell if able, but doing so costs {1}. The player is forced to pay that cost if enough mana is in their mana pool, but the player isn’t forced to activate a mana ability to produce that mana. If they don’t, the card simply remains exiled.
873 873
874 118.4. Some costs include an {X} o an X. See ule 107.3. 874 118.4. Some costs include an {X} or an X. See rule 107.3.
875 875
876 118.5. Some costs ae epesented by {0}, o ae educed to {0}. The action necessay fo a playe to pay such a cost is the playe’s acknowledgment that they ae paying it. Even though such a cost equies no esouces, it’s not automatically paid. 876 118.5. Some costs are represented by {0}, or are reduced to {0}. The action necessary for a player to pay such a cost is the player’s acknowledgment that they are paying it. Even though such a cost requires no resources, it’s not automatically paid.
877 877
878 118.5a A spell whose mana cost is {0} must still be cast the same way as one with a cost geate than zeo; it won’t cast itself automatically. The same is tue fo an activated ability whose cost is {0}. 878 118.5a A spell whose mana cost is {0} must still be cast the same way as one with a cost greater than zero; it won’t cast itself automatically. The same is true for an activated ability whose cost is {0}.
879 879
880 118.6. Some objects have no mana cost. This epesents an unpayable cost. An ability can also have an unpayable cost if its cost is based on the mana cost of an object with no mana cost. Attempting to cast a spell o activate an ability that has an unpayable cost is a legal action. Howeve, attempting to pay an unpayable cost is an illegal action. 880 118.6. Some objects have no mana cost. This represents an unpayable cost. An ability can also have an unpayable cost if its cost is based on the mana cost of an object with no mana cost. Attempting to cast a spell or activate an ability that has an unpayable cost is a legal action. However, attempting to pay an unpayable cost is an illegal action.
881 881
882 118.6a If an unpayable cost is inceased by an effect o an additional cost is imposed, the cost is still unpayable. If an altenative cost is applied to an unpayable cost, including an effect that allows a playe to cast a spell without paying its mana cost, the altenative cost may be paid. 882 118.6a If an unpayable cost is increased by an effect or an additional cost is imposed, the cost is still unpayable. If an alternative cost is applied to an unpayable cost, including an effect that allows a player to cast a spell without paying its mana cost, the alternative cost may be paid.
883 883
884 118.7. What a playe actually needs to do to pay a cost may be changed o educed by effects. If the mana component of a cost is educed to nothing by cost eduction effects, it’s consideed to be {0}. Paying a cost changed o educed by an effect counts as paying the oiginal cost. 884 118.7. What a player actually needs to do to pay a cost may be changed or reduced by effects. If the mana component of a cost is reduced to nothing by cost reduction effects, it’s considered to be {0}. Paying a cost changed or reduced by an effect counts as paying the original cost.
885 885
886 118.7a Effects that educe a cost by an amount of geneic mana affect only the geneic mana component of that cost. They can’t affect the coloed o cololess mana components of that cost. 886 118.7a Effects that reduce a cost by an amount of generic mana affect only the generic mana component of that cost. They can’t affect the colored or colorless mana components of that cost.
887 887
888 118.7b If a cost is educed by an amount of coloed o cololess mana, but the cost doesn’t equie mana of that type, the cost is educed by that amount of geneic mana. 888 118.7b If a cost is reduced by an amount of colored or colorless mana, but the cost doesn’t require mana of that type, the cost is reduced by that amount of generic mana.
889 889
890 118.7c If a cost is educed by an amount of coloed mana that exceeds its mana component of that colo, the cost’s mana component of that colo is educed to nothing and the cost’s geneic mana component is educed by the diffeence. 890 118.7c If a cost is reduced by an amount of colored mana that exceeds its mana component of that color, the cost’s mana component of that color is reduced to nothing and the cost’s generic mana component is reduced by the difference.
891 891
892 118.7d If a cost is educed by an amount of cololess mana that exceeds its cololess mana component, the cost’s cololess mana component is educed to nothing and the cost’s geneic mana component is educed by the diffeence. 892 118.7d If a cost is reduced by an amount of colorless mana that exceeds its colorless mana component, the cost’s colorless mana component is reduced to nothing and the cost’s generic mana component is reduced by the difference.
893 893
894 118.7e If a cost is educed by an amount of mana epesented by a hybid mana symbol, the playe paying that cost chooses one half of that symbol at the time the cost eduction is applied (see ule 601.2f). If a coloed half is chosen, the cost is educed by one mana of that colo. If a geneic half is chosen, the cost is educed by an amount of geneic mana equal to that half’s numbe. 894 118.7e If a cost is reduced by an amount of mana represented by a hybrid mana symbol, the player paying that cost chooses one half of that symbol at the time the cost reduction is applied (see rule 601.2f). If a colored half is chosen, the cost is reduced by one mana of that color. If a generic half is chosen, the cost is reduced by an amount of generic mana equal to that half’s number.
895 895
896 118.7f If a cost is educed by an amount of mana epesented by a Phyexian mana symbol, the cost is educed by one mana of that symbol’s colo. 896 118.7f If a cost is reduced by an amount of mana represented by a Phyrexian mana symbol, the cost is reduced by one mana of that symbol’s color.
897 897
898 118.7g If a cost is educed by an amount of mana epesented by one o moe snow mana symbols, the cost is educed by that much geneic mana. 898 118.7g If a cost is reduced by an amount of mana represented by one or more snow mana symbols, the cost is reduced by that much generic mana.
899 899
900 118.8. Some spells and abilities have additional costs. An additional cost is a cost listed in a spell’s ules text, o applied to a spell o ability fom anothe effect, that its contolle must pay at the same time they pay the spell’s mana cost o the ability’s activation cost. Note that some additional costs ae listed in keywods; see ule 702. 900 118.8. Some spells and abilities have additional costs. An additional cost is a cost listed in a spell’s rules text, or applied to a spell or ability from another effect, that its controller must pay at the same time they pay the spell’s mana cost or the ability’s activation cost. Note that some additional costs are listed in keywords; see rule 702.
901 901
902 118.8a Any numbe of additional costs may be applied to a spell as it’s being cast o to an ability as it’s being activated. The contolle of the spell o ability announces thei intentions to pay any o all of those costs as descibed in ule 601.2b. 902 118.8a Any number of additional costs may be applied to a spell as it’s being cast or to an ability as it’s being activated. The controller of the spell or ability announces their intentions to pay any or all of those costs as described in rule 601.2b.
903 903
904 118.8b Some additional costs ae optional. 904 118.8b Some additional costs are optional.
905 905
906 118.8c If an effect instucts a playe to cast a spell “if able,” and that spell has a mandatoy additional cost that includes actions involving cads with a stated quality in a hidden zone, the playe isn’t equied to cast that spell, even if those cads ae pesent in that zone. 906 118.8c If an effect instructs a player to cast a spell “if able,” and that spell has a mandatory additional cost that includes actions involving cards with a stated quality in a hidden zone, the player isn’t required to cast that spell, even if those cards are present in that zone.
907 907
908 118.8d Additional costs don’t change a spell’s mana cost, only what its contolle has to pay to cast it. Spells and abilities that ask fo that spell’s mana cost still see the oiginal value. 908 118.8d Additional costs don’t change a spell’s mana cost, only what its controller has to pay to cast it. Spells and abilities that ask for that spell’s mana cost still see the original value.
909 909
910 118.9. Some spells have altenative costs. An altenative cost is a cost listed in a spell’s text, o applied to it fom anothe effect, that its contolle may pay athe than paying the spell’s mana cost. Altenative costs ae usually phased, “You may [action] athe than pay [this object’s] mana cost,” o “You may cast [this object] without paying its mana cost.” Note that some altenative costs ae listed in keywods; see ule 702. 910 118.9. Some spells have alternative costs. An alternative cost is a cost listed in a spell’s text, or applied to it from another effect, that its controller may pay rather than paying the spell’s mana cost. Alternative costs are usually phrased, “You may [action] rather than pay [this object’s] mana cost,” or “You may cast [this object] without paying its mana cost.” Note that some alternative costs are listed in keywords; see rule 702.
911 911
912 118.9a Only one altenative cost can be applied to any one spell as it’s being cast. The contolle of the spell announces thei intentions to pay that cost as descibed in ule 601.2b. 912 118.9a Only one alternative cost can be applied to any one spell as it’s being cast. The controller of the spell announces their intentions to pay that cost as described in rule 601.2b.
913 913
914 118.9b Altenative costs ae geneally optional. An effect that allows you to cast a spell may equie a cetain altenative cost to be paid. 914 118.9b Alternative costs are generally optional. An effect that allows you to cast a spell may require a certain alternative cost to be paid.
915 915
916 118.9c An altenative cost doesn’t change a spell’s mana cost, only what its contolle has to pay to cast it. Spells and abilities that ask fo that spell’s mana cost still see the oiginal value. 916 118.9c An alternative cost doesn’t change a spell’s mana cost, only what its controller has to pay to cast it. Spells and abilities that ask for that spell’s mana cost still see the original value.
917 917
918 118.9d If an altenative cost is being paid to cast a spell, any additional costs, cost inceases, and cost eductions that affect that spell ae applied to that altenative cost. (See ule 601.2f.) 918 118.9d If an alternative cost is being paid to cast a spell, any additional costs, cost increases, and cost reductions that affect that spell are applied to that alternative cost. (See rule 601.2f.)
919 919
920 118.10. Each payment of a cost applies to only one spell, ability, o effect. Fo example, a playe can’t sacifice just one ceatue to activate the activated abilities of two pemanents that each equie sacificing a ceatue as a cost. Also, the esolution of a spell o ability doesn’t pay anothe spell o ability’s cost, even if pat of its effect is doing the same thing the othe cost asks fo. 920 118.10. Each payment of a cost applies to only one spell, ability, or effect. For example, a player can’t sacrifice just one creature to activate the activated abilities of two permanents that each require sacrificing a creature as a cost. Also, the resolution of a spell or ability doesn’t pay another spell or ability’s cost, even if part of its effect is doing the same thing the other cost asks for.
921 921
922 118.11. The actions pefomed when paying a cost may be modified by effects. Even if they ae, meaning the actions that ae pefomed don’t match the actions that ae called fo, the cost has still been paid. 922 118.11. The actions performed when paying a cost may be modified by effects. Even if they are, meaning the actions that are performed don’t match the actions that are called for, the cost has still been paid.
923 Example: A playe contols Psychic Votex, an enchantment with a cumulative upkeep cost of “Daw a cad,” and Obstinate Familia, a ceatue that says “If you would daw a cad, you may skip that daw instead.” The playe may decide to pay Psychic Votex’s cumulative upkeep cost and then daw no cads instead of dawing the appopiate amount. The cumulative upkeep cost has still been paid. 923 Example: A player controls Psychic Vortex, an enchantment with a cumulative upkeep cost of “Draw a card,” and Obstinate Familiar, a creature that says “If you would draw a card, you may skip that draw instead.” The player may decide to pay Psychic Vortex’s cumulative upkeep cost and then draw no cards instead of drawing the appropriate amount. The cumulative upkeep cost has still been paid.
924 924
925 118.12. Some spells, activated abilities, and tiggeed abilities ead, “[Do something]. If [a playe] [does, doesn’t, o can’t], [effect].” o “[A playe] may [do something]. If [that playe] [does, doesn’t, o can’t], [effect].” The action [do something] is a cost, paid when the spell o ability esolves. The “If [a playe] [does, doesn’t, o can’t]” clause checks whethe the playe chose to pay an optional cost o stated to pay a mandatoy cost, egadless of what events actually occued. 925 118.12. Some spells, activated abilities, and triggered abilities read, “[Do something]. If [a player] [does, doesn’t, or can’t], [effect].” or “[A player] may [do something]. If [that player] [does, doesn’t, or can’t], [effect].” The action [do something] is a cost, paid when the spell or ability resolves. The “If [a player] [does, doesn’t, or can’t]” clause checks whether the player chose to pay an optional cost or started to pay a mandatory cost, regardless of what events actually occurred.
926 Example: You contol Standstill, an enchantment that says “When a playe casts a spell, sacifice Standstill. If you do, each of that playe’s opponents daws thee cads.” A spell is cast, causing Standstill’s ability to tigge. Then an ability is activated that exiles Standstill. When Standstill’s ability esolves, you’e unable to pay the “sacifice Standstill” cost. No playe will daw cads. 926 Example: You control Standstill, an enchantment that says “When a player casts a spell, sacrifice Standstill. If you do, each of that player’s opponents draws three cards.” A spell is cast, causing Standstill’s ability to trigger. Then an ability is activated that exiles Standstill. When Standstill’s ability resolves, you’re unable to pay the “sacrifice Standstill” cost. No player will draw cards.
927 Example: You opponent has cast Gathe Specimens, a spell that says “If a ceatue would ente the battlefield unde an opponent’s contol this tun, it entes the battlefield unde you contol instead.” You contol a face-down Demoplasm, a ceatue with moph that says “When Demoplasm is tuned face up, you may put a ceatue cad with moph fom you hand onto the battlefield face up. If you do, etun Demoplasm to its owne’s hand.” You tun Demoplasm face up, and you choose to put a ceatue cad with moph fom you hand onto the battlefield. Due to Gathe Specimens, it entes the battlefield unde you opponent’s contol instead of yous. Howeve, since you chose to pay the cost, Demoplasm is still etuned to its owne’s hand. 927 Example: Your opponent has cast Gather Specimens, a spell that says “If a creature would enter the battlefield under an opponent’s control this turn, it enters the battlefield under your control instead.” You control a face-down Dermoplasm, a creature with morph that says “When Dermoplasm is turned face up, you may put a creature card with morph from your hand onto the battlefield face up. If you do, return Dermoplasm to its owner’s hand.” You turn Dermoplasm face up, and you choose to put a creature card with morph from your hand onto the battlefield. Due to Gather Specimens, it enters the battlefield under your opponent’s control instead of yours. However, since you chose to pay the cost, Dermoplasm is still returned to its owner’s hand.
928 928
929 118.12a Some spells, activated abilities, and tiggeed abilities ead, “[Do something] unless [a playe does something else].” This means the same thing as “[A playe may do something else]. If [that playe doesn’t], [do something].” 929 118.12a Some spells, activated abilities, and triggered abilities read, “[Do something] unless [a player does something else].” This means the same thing as “[A player may do something else]. If [that player doesn’t], [do something].”
930 930
931 118.12b Some effects offe a playe a choice to seach a zone and take additional actions with the cads found in that zone, followed by an “If [a playe] does” clause. This clause checks whethe the playe chose to seach, not whethe the playe took any of the additional actions. 931 118.12b Some effects offer a player a choice to search a zone and take additional actions with the cards found in that zone, followed by an “If [a player] does” clause. This clause checks whether the player chose to search, not whether the player took any of the additional actions.
932 932
933 118.13. Some costs contain mana symbols that can be paid in multiple ways. These include hybid mana symbols and Phyexian mana symbols. 933 118.13. Some costs contain mana symbols that can be paid in multiple ways. These include hybrid mana symbols and Phyrexian mana symbols.
934 934
935 118.13a If the mana cost of a spell o the activation cost of an activated ability contains a mana symbol that can be paid in multiple ways, the choice of how to pay fo that symbol is made as its contolle poposes that spell o ability (see ule 601.2b). 935 118.13a If the mana cost of a spell or the activation cost of an activated ability contains a mana symbol that can be paid in multiple ways, the choice of how to pay for that symbol is made as its controller proposes that spell or ability (see rule 601.2b).
936 936
937 118.13b If a cost paid duing the esolution of a spell o ability contains a mana symbol that can be paid in multiple ways, the playe paying that cost chooses how to pay fo that symbol immediately befoe they pay that cost. 937 118.13b If a cost paid during the resolution of a spell or ability contains a mana symbol that can be paid in multiple ways, the player paying that cost chooses how to pay for that symbol immediately before they pay that cost.
938 938
939 118.13c If the cost associated with a special action contains a mana symbol that can be paid in multiple ways, the playe taking the special action chooses how to pay fo that symbol immediately befoe they pay that cost. 939 118.13c If the cost associated with a special action contains a mana symbol that can be paid in multiple ways, the player taking the special action chooses how to pay for that symbol immediately before they pay that cost.
940 940
941 119. Life 941 119. Life
942 942
943 119.1. Each playe begins the game with a stating life total of 20. Some vaiant games have diffeent stating life totals. 943 119.1. Each player begins the game with a starting life total of 20. Some variant games have different starting life totals.
944 944
945 119.1a In a Two-Headed Giant game, each team’s stating life total is 30. See ule 810, “Two-Headed Giant Vaiant.” 945 119.1a In a Two-Headed Giant game, each team’s starting life total is 30. See rule 810, “Two-Headed Giant Variant.”
946 946
947 119.1b In a Vanguad game, each playe’s stating life total is 20 plus o minus the life modifie of thei vanguad cad. See ule 902, “Vanguad.” 947 119.1b In a Vanguard game, each player’s starting life total is 20 plus or minus the life modifier of their vanguard card. See rule 902, “Vanguard.”
948 948
949 119.1c In a Commande game, each playe’s stating life total is 40. See ule 903, “Commande.” 949 119.1c In a Commander game, each player’s starting life total is 40. See rule 903, “Commander.”
950 950
951 119.1d. In a two-playe Bawl game, each playe’s stating life total is 25. In a multiplaye Bawl game, each playe’s stating life total is 30. See ule 903.11, “Bawl Option.” 951 119.1d. In a two-player Brawl game, each player’s starting life total is 25. In a multiplayer Brawl game, each player’s starting life total is 30. See rule 903.11, “Brawl Option.”
952 952
953 119.1e In an Achenemy game, the achenemy’s stating life total is 40. See ule 904, “Achenemy.” 953 119.1e In an Archenemy game, the archenemy’s starting life total is 40. See rule 904, “Archenemy.”
954 954
955 119.2. Damage dealt to a playe nomally causes that playe to lose that much life. See ule 120.3. 955 119.2. Damage dealt to a player normally causes that player to lose that much life. See rule 120.3.
956 956
957 119.3. If an effect causes a playe to gain life o lose life, that playe’s life total is adjusted accodingly. 957 119.3. If an effect causes a player to gain life or lose life, that player’s life total is adjusted accordingly.
958 958
959 119.4. If a cost o effect allows a playe to pay an amount of life geate than 0, the playe may do so only if thei life total is geate than o equal to the amount of the payment. If a playe pays life, the payment is subtacted fom thei life total; in othe wods, the playe loses that much life. (Playes can always pay 0 life.) 959 119.4. If a cost or effect allows a player to pay an amount of life greater than 0, the player may do so only if their life total is greater than or equal to the amount of the payment. If a player pays life, the payment is subtracted from their life total; in other words, the player loses that much life. (Players can always pay 0 life.)
960 960
961 119.4a If a cost o effect allows a playe to pay an amount of life geate than 0 in a Two-Headed Giant game, the playe may do so only if thei team’s life total is geate than o equal to the total amount of life both team membes ae paying fo that cost o effect. If a playe pays life, the payment is subtacted fom thei team’s life total. (Playes can always pay 0 life.) 961 119.4a If a cost or effect allows a player to pay an amount of life greater than 0 in a Two-Headed Giant game, the player may do so only if their team’s life total is greater than or equal to the total amount of life both team members are paying for that cost or effect. If a player pays life, the payment is subtracted from their team’s life total. (Players can always pay 0 life.)
962 962
963 119.5. If an effect sets a playe’s life total to a specific numbe, the playe gains o loses the necessay amount of life to end up with the new total. 963 119.5. If an effect sets a player’s life total to a specific number, the player gains or loses the necessary amount of life to end up with the new total.
964 964
965 119.6. If a playe has 0 o less life, that playe loses the game as a state-based action. See ule 704. 965 119.6. If a player has 0 or less life, that player loses the game as a state-based action. See rule 704.
966 966
967 119.7. If an effect says that a playe can’t gain life, that playe can’t make an exchange such that the playe’s life total would become highe; in that case, the exchange won’t happen. Similaly, if an effect edistibutes life totals, a playe can’t eceive a new life total such that the playe’s life total would become highe. In addition, a cost that involves having that playe gain life can’t be paid, and a eplacement effect that would eplace a life gain event affecting that playe won’t do anything. 967 119.7. If an effect says that a player can’t gain life, that player can’t make an exchange such that the player’s life total would become higher; in that case, the exchange won’t happen. Similarly, if an effect redistributes life totals, a player can’t receive a new life total such that the player’s life total would become higher. In addition, a cost that involves having that player gain life can’t be paid, and a replacement effect that would replace a life gain event affecting that player won’t do anything.
968 968
969 119.8. If an effect says that a playe can’t lose life, that playe can’t make an exchange such that the playe’s life total would become lowe; in that case, the exchange won’t happen. Similaly, if an effect edistibutes life totals, a playe can’t eceive a new life total such that the playe’s life total would become lowe. In addition, a cost that involves having that playe pay life can’t be paid. 969 119.8. If an effect says that a player can’t lose life, that player can’t make an exchange such that the player’s life total would become lower; in that case, the exchange won’t happen. Similarly, if an effect redistributes life totals, a player can’t receive a new life total such that the player’s life total would become lower. In addition, a cost that involves having that player pay life can’t be paid.
970 970
971 119.9. Some tiggeed abilities ae witten, “Wheneve [a playe] gains life, . . . .” Such abilities ae teated as though they ae witten, “Wheneve a souce causes [a playe] to gain life, . . . .” If a playe gains 0 life, no life gain event has occued, and these abilities won’t tigge. 971 119.9. Some triggered abilities are written, “Whenever [a player] gains life, . . . .” Such abilities are treated as though they are written, “Whenever a source causes [a player] to gain life, . . . .” If a player gains 0 life, no life gain event has occurred, and these abilities won’t trigger.
972 972
973 119.10. Some eplacement effects ae witten, “If [a playe] would gain life, . . . .” Such abilities ae teated as though they ae witten, “If a souce would cause [a playe] to gain life, . . . .” If a playe gains 0 life, no life gain event would occu, and these effects won’t apply. 973 119.10. Some replacement effects are written, “If [a player] would gain life, . . . .” Such abilities are treated as though they are written, “If a source would cause [a player] to gain life, . . . .” If a player gains 0 life, no life gain event would occur, and these effects won’t apply.
974 974
975 120. Damage 975 120. Damage
976 976
977 120.1. Objects can deal damage to ceatues, planeswalkes, and playes. This is geneally detimental to the object o playe that eceives that damage. An object that deals damage is the souce of that damage. 977 120.1. Objects can deal damage to creatures, planeswalkers, and players. This is generally detrimental to the object or player that receives that damage. An object that deals damage is the source of that damage.
978 978
979 120.1a Damage can’t be dealt to an object that’s neithe a ceatue no a planeswalke. 979 120.1a Damage can’t be dealt to an object that’s neither a creature nor a planeswalker.
980 980
981 120.2. Any object can deal damage. 981 120.2. Any object can deal damage.
982 982
983 120.2a Damage may be dealt as a esult of combat. Each attacking and blocking ceatue deals combat damage equal to its powe duing the combat damage step. 983 120.2a Damage may be dealt as a result of combat. Each attacking and blocking creature deals combat damage equal to its power during the combat damage step.
984 984
985 120.2b Damage may be dealt as an effect of a spell o ability. The spell o ability will specify which object deals that damage. 985 120.2b Damage may be dealt as an effect of a spell or ability. The spell or ability will specify which object deals that damage.
986 986
987 120.3. Damage may have one o moe of the following esults, depending on whethe the ecipient of the damage is a playe o pemanent, the chaacteistics of the damage’s souce, and the chaacteistics of the damage’s ecipient (if it’s a pemanent). 987 120.3. Damage may have one or more of the following results, depending on whether the recipient of the damage is a player or permanent, the characteristics of the damage’s source, and the characteristics of the damage’s recipient (if it’s a permanent).
988 988
989 120.3a Damage dealt to a playe by a souce without infect causes that playe to lose that much life. 989 120.3a Damage dealt to a player by a source without infect causes that player to lose that much life.
990 990
991 120.3b Damage dealt to a playe by a souce with infect causes that souce’s contolle to give the playe that many poison countes. 991 120.3b Damage dealt to a player by a source with infect causes that source’s controller to give the player that many poison counters.
992 992
993 120.3c Damage dealt to a planeswalke causes that many loyalty countes to be emoved fom that planeswalke. 993 120.3c Damage dealt to a planeswalker causes that many loyalty counters to be removed from that planeswalker.
994 994
995 120.3d Damage dealt to a ceatue by a souce with withe and/o infect causes that souce’s contolle to put that many -1/-1 countes on that ceatue. 995 120.3d Damage dealt to a creature by a source with wither and/or infect causes that source’s controller to put that many -1/-1 counters on that creature.
996 996
997 120.3e Damage dealt to a ceatue by a souce with neithe withe no infect causes that much damage to be maked on that ceatue. 997 120.3e Damage dealt to a creature by a source with neither wither nor infect causes that much damage to be marked on that creature.
998 998
999 120.3f Damage dealt by a souce with lifelink causes that souce’s contolle to gain that much life, in addition to the damage’s othe esults. 999 120.3f Damage dealt by a source with lifelink causes that source’s controller to gain that much life, in addition to the damage’s other results.
1000 1000
1001 120.4. Damage is pocessed in a thee-pat sequence. 1001 120.4. Damage is processed in a three-part sequence.
1002 1002
1003 120.4a Fist, damage is dealt, as modified by eplacement and pevention effects that inteact with damage. (See ule 614, “Replacement Effects,” and ule 615, “Pevention Effects.”) Abilities that tigge when damage is dealt tigge now and wait to be put on the stack. 1003 120.4a First, damage is dealt, as modified by replacement and prevention effects that interact with damage. (See rule 614, “Replacement Effects,” and rule 615, “Prevention Effects.”) Abilities that trigger when damage is dealt trigger now and wait to be put on the stack.
1004 1004
1005 120.4b Next, damage that’s been dealt is pocessed into its esults, as modified by eplacement effects that inteact with those esults (such as life loss o countes). 1005 120.4b Next, damage that’s been dealt is processed into its results, as modified by replacement effects that interact with those results (such as life loss or counters).
1006 1006
1007 120.4c Finally, the damage event occus. 1007 120.4c Finally, the damage event occurs.
1008 Example: A playe who contols Boon Reflection, an enchantment that says “If you would gain life, you gain twice that much life instead,” attacks with a 3/3 ceatue with withe and lifelink. It’s blocked by a 2/2 ceatue, and the defending playe casts a spell that pevents the next 2 damage that would be dealt to the blocking ceatue. The damage event stats out as [3 damage is dealt to the 2/2 ceatue, 2 damage is dealt to the 3/3 ceatue]. The pevention effect is applied, so the damage event becomes [1 damage is dealt to the 2/2 ceatue, 2 damage is dealt to the 3/3 ceatue]. That’s pocessed into its esults, so the damage event is now [one -1/-1 counte is put on the 2/2 ceatue, the active playe gains 1 life, 2 damage is maked on the 3/3 ceatue]. Boon Reflection’s effect is applied, so the damage event becomes [one -1/-1 counte is put on the 2/2 ceatue, the active playe gains 2 life, 2 damage is maked on the 3/3 ceatue]. Then the damage event occus. 1008 Example: A player who controls Boon Reflection, an enchantment that says “If you would gain life, you gain twice that much life instead,” attacks with a 3/3 creature with wither and lifelink. It’s blocked by a 2/2 creature, and the defending player casts a spell that prevents the next 2 damage that would be dealt to the blocking creature. The damage event starts out as [3 damage is dealt to the 2/2 creature, 2 damage is dealt to the 3/3 creature]. The prevention effect is applied, so the damage event becomes [1 damage is dealt to the 2/2 creature, 2 damage is dealt to the 3/3 creature]. That’s processed into its results, so the damage event is now [one -1/-1 counter is put on the 2/2 creature, the active player gains 1 life, 2 damage is marked on the 3/3 creature]. Boon Reflection’s effect is applied, so the damage event becomes [one -1/-1 counter is put on the 2/2 creature, the active player gains 2 life, 2 damage is marked on the 3/3 creature]. Then the damage event occurs.
1009 Example: The defending playe contols a ceatue and Woship, an enchantment that says “If you contol a ceatue, damage that would educe you life total to less than 1 educes it to 1 instead.” That playe is at 2 life, and is being attacked by two unblocked 5/5 ceatues. The playe casts Awe Stike, which says “The next time taget ceatue would deal damage this tun, pevent that damage. You gain life equal to the damage pevented this way,” tageting one of the attackes. The damage event stats out as [10 damage is dealt to the defending playe]. Awe Stike’s effect is applied, so the damage event becomes [5 damage is dealt to the defending playe, the defending playe gains 5 life]. That’s pocessed into its esults, so the damage event is now [the defending playe loses 5 life, the defending playe gains 5 life]. Woship’s effect sees that the damage event would not educe the playe’s life total to less than 1, so Woship’s effect is not applied. Then the damage event occus. 1009 Example: The defending player controls a creature and Worship, an enchantment that says “If you control a creature, damage that would reduce your life total to less than 1 reduces it to 1 instead.” That player is at 2 life, and is being attacked by two unblocked 5/5 creatures. The player casts Awe Strike, which says “The next time target creature would deal damage this turn, prevent that damage. You gain life equal to the damage prevented this way,” targeting one of the attackers. The damage event starts out as [10 damage is dealt to the defending player]. Awe Strike’s effect is applied, so the damage event becomes [5 damage is dealt to the defending player, the defending player gains 5 life]. That’s processed into its results, so the damage event is now [the defending player loses 5 life, the defending player gains 5 life]. Worship’s effect sees that the damage event would not reduce the player’s life total to less than 1, so Worship’s effect is not applied. Then the damage event occurs.
1010 1010
1011 120.5. Damage dealt to a ceatue o planeswalke doesn’t destoy it. Likewise, the souce of that damage doesn’t destoy it. Rathe, state-based actions may destoy a ceatue o planeswalke, o othewise put it into its owne’s gaveyad, due to the esults of the damage dealt to that pemanent. See ule 704. 1011 120.5. Damage dealt to a creature or planeswalker doesn’t destroy it. Likewise, the source of that damage doesn’t destroy it. Rather, state-based actions may destroy a creature or planeswalker, or otherwise put it into its owner’s graveyard, due to the results of the damage dealt to that permanent. See rule 704.
1012 Example: A playe casts Lightning Bolt, an instant that says “Lightning Bolt deals 3 damage to any taget,” tageting a 2/2 ceatue. Afte Lightning Bolt deals 3 damage to that ceatue, the ceatue is destoyed as a state-based action. Neithe Lightning Bolt no the damage dealt by Lightning Bolt destoyed that ceatue. 1012 Example: A player casts Lightning Bolt, an instant that says “Lightning Bolt deals 3 damage to any target,” targeting a 2/2 creature. After Lightning Bolt deals 3 damage to that creature, the creature is destroyed as a state-based action. Neither Lightning Bolt nor the damage dealt by Lightning Bolt destroyed that creature.
1013 1013
1014 120.6. Damage maked on a ceatue emains until the cleanup step, even if that pemanent stops being a ceatue. If the total damage maked on a ceatue is geate than o equal to its toughness, that ceatue has been dealt lethal damage and is destoyed as a state-based action (see ule 704). All damage maked on a pemanent is emoved when it egeneates (see ule 701.14, “Regeneate”) and duing the cleanup step (see ule 514.2). 1014 120.6. Damage marked on a creature remains until the cleanup step, even if that permanent stops being a creature. If the total damage marked on a creature is greater than or equal to its toughness, that creature has been dealt lethal damage and is destroyed as a state-based action (see rule 704). All damage marked on a permanent is removed when it regenerates (see rule 701.14, “Regenerate”) and during the cleanup step (see rule 514.2).
1015 1015
1016 120.7. The souce of damage is the object that dealt it. If an effect equies a playe to choose a souce of damage, they may choose a pemanent; a spell on the stack (including a pemanent spell); any object efeed to by an object on the stack, by a pevention o eplacement effect that’s waiting to apply, o by a delayed tiggeed ability that’s waiting to tigge (even if that object is no longe in the zone it used to be in); o a face-up object in the command zone. A souce doesn’t need to be capable of dealing damage to be a legal choice. See ule 609.7, “Souces of Damage.” 1016 120.7. The source of damage is the object that dealt it. If an effect requires a player to choose a source of damage, they may choose a permanent; a spell on the stack (including a permanent spell); any object referred to by an object on the stack, by a prevention or replacement effect that’s waiting to apply, or by a delayed triggered ability that’s waiting to trigger (even if that object is no longer in the zone it used to be in); or a face-up object in the command zone. A source doesn’t need to be capable of dealing damage to be a legal choice. See rule 609.7, “Sources of Damage.”
1017 1017
1018 120.8. If a souce would deal 0 damage, it does not deal damage at all. That means abilities that tigge on damage being dealt won’t tigge. It also means that eplacement effects that would incease the damage dealt by that souce, o would have that souce deal that damage to a diffeent object o playe, have no event to eplace, so they have no effect. 1018 120.8. If a source would deal 0 damage, it does not deal damage at all. That means abilities that trigger on damage being dealt won’t trigger. It also means that replacement effects that would increase the damage dealt by that source, or would have that source deal that damage to a different object or player, have no event to replace, so they have no effect.
1019 1019
1020 121. Dawing a Cad 1020 121. Drawing a Card
1021 1021
1022 121.1. A playe daws a cad by putting the top cad of thei libay into thei hand. This is done as a tun-based action duing each playe’s daw step. It may also be done as pat of a cost o effect of a spell o ability. 1022 121.1. A player draws a card by putting the top card of their library into their hand. This is done as a turn-based action during each player’s draw step. It may also be done as part of a cost or effect of a spell or ability.
1023 1023
1024 121.2. Cads may only be dawn one at a time. If a playe is instucted to daw multiple cads, that playe pefoms that many individual cad daws. 1024 121.2. Cards may only be drawn one at a time. If a player is instructed to draw multiple cards, that player performs that many individual card draws.
1025 1025
1026 121.2a An instuction to daw multiple cads can be modified by eplacement effects that efe to the numbe of cads dawn. This modification occus befoe consideing any of the individual cad daws. See ule 616.1f. 1026 121.2a An instruction to draw multiple cards can be modified by replacement effects that refer to the number of cards drawn. This modification occurs before considering any of the individual card draws. See rule 616.1f.
1027 1027
1028 121.2b Some effects say that a playe can’t daw moe than one cad each tun. Such an effect applies to individual cad daws. Instuctions to daw multiple cads may still be patially caied out. Howeve, if an effect offes the playe a choice to daw multiple cads, the affected playe can’t choose to do so. Similaly, the playe can’t pay a cost that includes dawing multiple cads. 1028 121.2b Some effects say that a player can’t draw more than one card each turn. Such an effect applies to individual card draws. Instructions to draw multiple cards may still be partially carried out. However, if an effect offers the player a choice to draw multiple cards, the affected player can’t choose to do so. Similarly, the player can’t pay a cost that includes drawing multiple cards.
1029 1029
1030 121.2c If an effect instucts moe than one playe to daw cads, the active playe pefoms all of thei daws fist, then each othe playe in tun ode does the same. 1030 121.2c If an effect instructs more than one player to draw cards, the active player performs all of their draws first, then each other player in turn order does the same.
1031 1031
1032 121.2d If a ule o effect instucts moe than one playe to daw cads in a game that’s using the shaed team tuns option (such as a Two-Headed Giant game), fist each playe on the active team, in whateve ode that team likes, pefoms thei daws, then each playe on each nonactive team in tun ode does the same. 1032 121.2d If a rule or effect instructs more than one player to draw cards in a game that’s using the shared team turns option (such as a Two-Headed Giant game), first each player on the active team, in whatever order that team likes, performs their draws, then each player on each nonactive team in turn order does the same.
1033 1033
1034 121.3. If thee ae no cads in a playe’s libay and an effect offes that playe the choice to daw a cad, that playe can choose to do so. Howeve, if an effect says that a playe can’t daw cads and anothe effect offes that playe the choice to daw a cad, that playe can’t choose to do so. 1034 121.3. If there are no cards in a player’s library and an effect offers that player the choice to draw a card, that player can choose to do so. However, if an effect says that a player can’t draw cards and another effect offers that player the choice to draw a card, that player can’t choose to do so.
1035 1035
1036 121.3a The same pinciples apply if the playe who’s making the choice is not the playe who would daw the cad. If the latte playe has no cads in thei libay, the choice can be taken. If an effect says that the latte playe can’t daw a cad, the choice can’t be taken. 1036 121.3a The same principles apply if the player who’s making the choice is not the player who would draw the card. If the latter player has no cards in their library, the choice can be taken. If an effect says that the latter player can’t draw a card, the choice can’t be taken.
1037 1037
1038 121.4. A playe who attempts to daw a cad fom a libay with no cads in it loses the game the next time a playe would eceive pioity. (This is a state-based action. See ule 704.) 1038 121.4. A player who attempts to draw a card from a library with no cards in it loses the game the next time a player would receive priority. (This is a state-based action. See rule 704.)
1039 1039
1040 121.5. If an effect moves cads fom a playe’s libay to that playe’s hand without using the wod “daw,” the playe has not dawn those cads. This makes a diffeence fo abilities that tigge on dawing cads and effects that eplace cad daws, as well as if the playe’s libay is empty. 1040 121.5. If an effect moves cards from a player’s library to that player’s hand without using the word “draw,” the player has not drawn those cards. This makes a difference for abilities that trigger on drawing cards and effects that replace card draws, as well as if the player’s library is empty.
1041 1041
1042 121.6. Some effects eplace cad daws. 1042 121.6. Some effects replace card draws.
1043 1043
1044 121.6a An effect that eplaces a cad daw is applied even if no cads could be dawn because thee ae no cads in the affected playe’s libay. 1044 121.6a An effect that replaces a card draw is applied even if no cards could be drawn because there are no cards in the affected player’s library.
1045 1045
1046 121.6b If an effect eplaces a daw within a sequence of cad daws, the eplacement effect is completed befoe esuming the sequence. 1046 121.6b If an effect replaces a draw within a sequence of card draws, the replacement effect is completed before resuming the sequence.
1047 1047
1048 121.6c Some effects pefom additional actions on a cad afte it’s dawn. If the daw is eplaced, the additional action is not pefomed on any cads that ae dawn as a esult of that eplacement effect o any subsequent eplacement effects. 1048 121.6c Some effects perform additional actions on a card after it’s drawn. If the draw is replaced, the additional action is not performed on any cards that are drawn as a result of that replacement effect or any subsequent replacement effects.
1049 1049
1050 121.7. Some eplacement effects and pevention effects esult in one o moe cad daws. In such a case, if thee ae any pats of the oiginal event that haven’t been eplaced, those pats occu fist, then the cad daws happen one at a time. 1050 121.7. Some replacement effects and prevention effects result in one or more card draws. In such a case, if there are any parts of the original event that haven’t been replaced, those parts occur first, then the card draws happen one at a time.
1051 1051
1052 121.8. If a spell o ability causes a cad to be dawn while anothe spell is being cast, the dawn cad is kept face down until that spell becomes cast (see ule 601.2i). While face down, it’s consideed to have no chaacteistics. The same is tue with elation to anothe ability being activated. If an effect allows o instucts a playe to eveal the cad as it’s being dawn, it’s evealed afte the spell becomes cast o the ability becomes activated. 1052 121.8. If a spell or ability causes a card to be drawn while another spell is being cast, the drawn card is kept face down until that spell becomes cast (see rule 601.2i). While face down, it’s considered to have no characteristics. The same is true with relation to another ability being activated. If an effect allows or instructs a player to reveal the card as it’s being drawn, it’s revealed after the spell becomes cast or the ability becomes activated.
1053 1053
1054 121.9. If an effect gives a playe the option to eveal a cad as they daw it, that playe may look at that cad as they daw it befoe choosing whethe to eveal it. 1054 121.9. If an effect gives a player the option to reveal a card as they draw it, that player may look at that card as they draw it before choosing whether to reveal it.
1055 1055
1056 122. Countes 1056 122. Counters
1057 1057
1058 122.1. A counte is a make placed on an object o playe that modifies its chaacteistics and/o inteacts with a ule, ability, o effect. Countes ae not objects and have no chaacteistics. Notably, a counte is not a token, and a token is not a counte. Countes with the same name o desciption ae intechangeable. 1058 122.1. A counter is a marker placed on an object or player that modifies its characteristics and/or interacts with a rule, ability, or effect. Counters are not objects and have no characteristics. Notably, a counter is not a token, and a token is not a counter. Counters with the same name or description are interchangeable.
1059 1059
1060 122.1a A +X/+Y counte on a ceatue o on a ceatue cad in a zone othe than the battlefield, whee X and Y ae numbes, adds X to that object’s powe and Y to that object’s toughness. Similaly, -X/-Y countes subtact fom powe and toughness. See ule 613.3. 1060 122.1a A +X/+Y counter on a creature or on a creature card in a zone other than the battlefield, where X and Y are numbers, adds X to that object’s power and Y to that object’s toughness. Similarly, -X/-Y counters subtract from power and toughness. See rule 613.3.
1061 1061
1062 122.1b The numbe of loyalty countes on a planeswalke on the battlefield indicates how much loyalty it has. A planeswalke with 0 loyalty is put into its owne’s gaveyad as a state-based action. See ule 704. 1062 122.1b The number of loyalty counters on a planeswalker on the battlefield indicates how much loyalty it has. A planeswalker with 0 loyalty is put into its owner’s graveyard as a state-based action. See rule 704.
1063 1063
1064 122.1c If a playe has ten o moe poison countes, that playe loses the game as a state-based action. See ule 704. A playe is “poisoned” if they have one o moe poison countes. (See ule 810 fo additional ules fo Two-Headed Giant games.) 1064 122.1c If a player has ten or more poison counters, that player loses the game as a state-based action. See rule 704. A player is “poisoned” if they have one or more poison counters. (See rule 810 for additional rules for Two-Headed Giant games.)
1065 1065
1066 122.2. Countes on an object ae not etained if that object moves fom one zone to anothe. The countes ae not “emoved”; they simply cease to exist. See ule 400.7. 1066 122.2. Counters on an object are not retained if that object moves from one zone to another. The counters are not “removed”; they simply cease to exist. See rule 400.7.
1067 1067
1068 122.3. If a pemanent has both a +1/+1 counte and a -1/-1 counte on it, N +1/+1 and N -1/-1 countes ae emoved fom it as a state-based action, whee N is the smalle of the numbe of +1/+1 and -1/-1 countes on it. See ule 704. 1068 122.3. If a permanent has both a +1/+1 counter and a -1/-1 counter on it, N +1/+1 and N -1/-1 counters are removed from it as a state-based action, where N is the smaller of the number of +1/+1 and -1/-1 counters on it. See rule 704.
1069 1069
1070 122.4. If a pemanent with an ability that says it can’t have moe than N countes of a cetain kind on it has moe than N countes of that kind on it, all but N of those countes ae emoved fom it as a state-based action. See ule 704. 1070 122.4. If a permanent with an ability that says it can’t have more than N counters of a certain kind on it has more than N counters of that kind on it, all but N of those counters are removed from it as a state-based action. See rule 704.
1071 1071
1072 122.5. If an effect says to “move” a counte, it means to emove that counte fom the object it’s cuently on and put it onto a second object. If eithe of these actions isn’t possible, it’s not possible to move a counte, and no counte is emoved fom o put onto anything. This may occu if the fist and second objects ae the same object; if the fist object doesn’t have the appopiate kind of counte on it; if the second object can’t have countes put onto it; o if eithe object is no longe in the coect zone. 1072 122.5. If an effect says to “move” a counter, it means to remove that counter from the object it’s currently on and put it onto a second object. If either of these actions isn’t possible, it’s not possible to move a counter, and no counter is removed from or put onto anything. This may occur if the first and second objects are the same object; if the first object doesn’t have the appropriate kind of counter on it; if the second object can’t have counters put onto it; or if either object is no longer in the correct zone.
1073 1073
1074 122.6. Some spells and abilities efe to countes being put on an object. This efes to putting countes on that object while it’s on the battlefield and also to an object that’s given countes as it entes the battlefield. 1074 122.6. Some spells and abilities refer to counters being put on an object. This refers to putting counters on that object while it’s on the battlefield and also to an object that’s given counters as it enters the battlefield.
1075 1075
1076 122.6a If an object entes the battlefield with countes on it, the effect causing the object to be given countes may specify which playe puts those countes on it. If the effect doesn’t specify a playe, the object’s contolle puts those countes on it. 1076 122.6a If an object enters the battlefield with counters on it, the effect causing the object to be given counters may specify which player puts those counters on it. If the effect doesn’t specify a player, the object’s controller puts those counters on it.
1077 1077
1078 122.7. An ability that tigges “When/Wheneve the Nth [kind] counte” is put on an object tigges when one o moe countes of the appopiate kind ae put on the object such that the object had fewe than N countes on it befoe the countes wee put on it and N o moe countes on it afte. 1078 122.7. An ability that triggers “When/Whenever the Nth [kind] counter” is put on an object triggers when one or more counters of the appropriate kind are put on the object such that the object had fewer than N counters on it before the counters were put on it and N or more counters on it after.
1079 1079
1080 1080
1081 2. Pats of a Cad 1081 2. Parts of a Card
1082 1082
1083 200. Geneal 1083 200. General
1084 1084
1085 200.1. The pats of a cad ae name, mana cost, illustation, colo indicato, type line, expansion symbol, text box, powe and toughness, loyalty, hand modifie, life modifie, illustation cedit, legal text, and collecto numbe. Some cads may have moe than one of any o all of these pats. 1085 200.1. The parts of a card are name, mana cost, illustration, color indicator, type line, expansion symbol, text box, power and toughness, loyalty, hand modifier, life modifier, illustration credit, legal text, and collector number. Some cards may have more than one of any or all of these parts.
1086 1086
1087 200.2. Some pats of a cad ae also chaacteistics of the object that has them. See ule 109.3. 1087 200.2. Some parts of a card are also characteristics of the object that has them. See rule 109.3.
1088 1088
1089 200.3. Some objects that aen’t cads (tokens, copies of cads, and copies of spells) have some of the pats of a cad, but only the ones that ae also chaacteistics. See ule 111 and ule 706. 1089 200.3. Some objects that aren’t cards (tokens, copies of cards, and copies of spells) have some of the parts of a card, but only the ones that are also characteristics. See rule 111 and rule 706.
1090 1090
1091 201. Name 1091 201. Name
1092 1092
1093 201.1. The name of a cad is pinted on its uppe left cone. 1093 201.1. The name of a card is printed on its upper left corner.
1094 1094
1095 201.2. A cad’s name is always consideed to be the English vesion of its name, egadless of pinted language. 1095 201.2. A card’s name is always considered to be the English version of its name, regardless of printed language.
1096 1096
1097 201.2a Two objects have the same name if thei names ae identical. 1097 201.2a Two objects have the same name if their names are identical.
1098 1098
1099 201.2b If an object has moe than one name, it has the same name as anothe object if thee ae one o moe names that both objects have in common. 1099 201.2b If an object has more than one name, it has the same name as another object if there are one or more names that both objects have in common.
1100 1100
1101 201.2c Two o moe objects have diffeent names if thee ae no names that both objects have in common. 1101 201.2c Two or more objects have different names if there are no names that both objects have in common.
1102 1102
1103 201.3. If an effect instucts a playe to choose a cad name, the playe must choose the name of a cad in the Oacle cad efeence. (See ule 108.1.) A playe may not choose the name of a token unless it’s also the name of a cad. 1103 201.3. If an effect instructs a player to choose a card name, the player must choose the name of a card in the Oracle card reference. (See rule 108.1.) A player may not choose the name of a token unless it’s also the name of a card.
1104 1104
1105 201.3a If a playe is instucted to choose a cad name with cetain chaacteistics, the playe must choose the name of a cad whose Oacle text matches those chaacteistics. (See ule 108.1.) 1105 201.3a If a player is instructed to choose a card name with certain characteristics, the player must choose the name of a card whose Oracle text matches those characteristics. (See rule 108.1.)
1106 Example: Dispossess eads, in pat, “Choose an atifact cad name.” The playe can choose the name of any atifact cad, even one that’s not legal in the fomat of the cuent game. The playe can’t choose Island, even if an Island on the battlefield has been tuned into atifact by some effect. 1106 Example: Dispossess reads, in part, “Choose an artifact card name.” The player can choose the name of any artifact card, even one that’s not legal in the format of the current game. The player can’t choose Island, even if an Island on the battlefield has been turned into artifact by some effect.
1107 1107
1108 201.3b If a playe wants to choose the name of a split cad, the playe must choose the name of one of its halves, but not both. (See ule 708.) If a playe is instucted to choose a cad name with cetain chaacteistics, use only that half’s chaacteistics to detemine if this name can be chosen. 1108 201.3b If a player wants to choose the name of a split card, the player must choose the name of one of its halves, but not both. (See rule 708.) If a player is instructed to choose a card name with certain characteristics, use only that half’s characteristics to determine if this name can be chosen.
1109 1109
1110 201.3c If a playe wants to choose a flip cad’s altenative name, the playe may do so. (See ule 709.) If a playe is instucted to choose a cad name with cetain chaacteistics, use the cad’s chaacteistics as modified by its altenative chaacteistics to detemine if this name can be chosen. 1110 201.3c If a player wants to choose a flip card’s alternative name, the player may do so. (See rule 709.) If a player is instructed to choose a card name with certain characteristics, use the card’s characteristics as modified by its alternative characteristics to determine if this name can be chosen.
1111 1111
1112 201.3d If a playe wants to choose the name of the back face of a double-faced cad, the playe may do so. (See ule 711.) If a playe is instucted to choose a cad name with cetain chaacteistics, use only the chaacteistics of the back face to detemine if this name can be chosen. 1112 201.3d If a player wants to choose the name of the back face of a double-faced card, the player may do so. (See rule 711.) If a player is instructed to choose a card name with certain characteristics, use only the characteristics of the back face to determine if this name can be chosen.
1113 1113
1114 201.3e If a playe wants to choose the name of the combined back face of a meld pai, the playe may do so. (See ule 712.) If a playe is instucted to choose a cad name with cetain chaacteistics, use only the chaacteistics of the combined back face to detemine if this name can be chosen. 1114 201.3e If a player wants to choose the name of the combined back face of a meld pair, the player may do so. (See rule 712.) If a player is instructed to choose a card name with certain characteristics, use only the characteristics of the combined back face to determine if this name can be chosen.
1115 1115
1116 201.3f If a playe wants to choose an adventue cad’s altenative name, the playe may do so. (See ule 715.) If a playe is instucted to choose a cad name with cetain chaacteistics, use the cad’s chaacteistics as modified by its altenative chaacteistics to detemine if this name can be chosen. 1116 201.3f If a player wants to choose an adventurer card’s alternative name, the player may do so. (See rule 715.) If a player is instructed to choose a card name with certain characteristics, use the card’s characteristics as modified by its alternative characteristics to determine if this name can be chosen.
1117 1117
1118 201.4. Text that efes to the object it’s on by name means just that paticula object and not any othe objects with that name, egadless of any name changes caused by game effects. 1118 201.4. Text that refers to the object it’s on by name means just that particular object and not any other objects with that name, regardless of any name changes caused by game effects.
1119 1119
1120 201.4a If an ability’s effect gants anothe ability to an object, and that second ability efes to that fist ability’s souce by name, the name efes only to the specific object that is that fist ability’s souce, not to any othe object with the same name. This is also tue if the second ability is copied onto a new object. 1120 201.4a If an ability’s effect grants another ability to an object, and that second ability refers to that first ability’s source by name, the name refers only to the specific object that is that first ability’s source, not to any other object with the same name. This is also true if the second ability is copied onto a new object.
1121 Example: Gutte Gime has an ability that eads “Wheneve a nontoken ceatue you contol dies, put a slime counte on Gutte Gime, then ceate a geen Ooze ceatue token with ‘This ceatue’s powe and toughness ae each equal to the numbe of slime countes on Gutte Gime.’” The ability ganted to the token only looks at the Gutte Gime that ceated the token, not at any othe Gutte Gime on the battlefield. A copy of that token would also have an ability that efeed only to the Gutte Gime that ceated the oiginal token. 1121 Example: Gutter Grime has an ability that reads “Whenever a nontoken creature you control dies, put a slime counter on Gutter Grime, then create a green Ooze creature token with ‘This creature’s power and toughness are each equal to the number of slime counters on Gutter Grime.’” The ability granted to the token only looks at the Gutter Grime that created the token, not at any other Gutter Grime on the battlefield. A copy of that token would also have an ability that referred only to the Gutter Grime that created the original token.
1122 1122
1123 201.4b If an ability of an object efes to that object by name, and an object with a diffeent name gains that ability, each instance of the fist name in the gained ability that efes to the fist object by name should be teated as the second name. 1123 201.4b If an ability of an object refers to that object by name, and an object with a different name gains that ability, each instance of the first name in the gained ability that refers to the first object by name should be treated as the second name.
1124 Example: Quicksilve Elemental says, in pat, “{U}: Quicksilve Elemental gains all activated abilities of taget ceatue until end of tun.” If it gains an ability that says “{G}: Regeneate Cudgel Toll,” activating that ability will egeneate Quicksilve Elemental, not the Cudgel Toll it gained the ability fom. 1124 Example: Quicksilver Elemental says, in part, “{U}: Quicksilver Elemental gains all activated abilities of target creature until end of turn.” If it gains an ability that says “{G}: Regenerate Cudgel Troll,” activating that ability will regenerate Quicksilver Elemental, not the Cudgel Troll it gained the ability from.
1125 Example: Glacial Ray is an instant with splice onto Acane that says “Glacial Ray deals 2 damage to any taget.” If it’s spliced onto a Kodama’s Reach, that Kodama’s Reach deals 2 damage to the taget. 1125 Example: Glacial Ray is an instant with splice onto Arcane that says “Glacial Ray deals 2 damage to any target.” If it’s spliced onto a Kodama’s Reach, that Kodama’s Reach deals 2 damage to the target.
1126 Example: Dimi Doppelgange says “{1}{U}{B}: Exile taget ceatue cad fom a gaveyad. Dimi Doppelgange becomes a copy of that cad and gains this ability.” Dimi Doppelgange’s ability is activated tageting a Runeclaw Bea cad. The Doppelgange becomes a copy of Runeclaw Bea and gains an ability that should be teated as saying “{1}{U}{B}: Exile taget ceatue cad fom a gaveyad. Runeclaw Bea becomes a copy of that cad and gains this ability.” 1126 Example: Dimir Doppelganger says “{1}{U}{B}: Exile target creature card from a graveyard. Dimir Doppelganger becomes a copy of that card and gains this ability.” Dimir Doppelganger’s ability is activated targeting a Runeclaw Bear card. The Doppelganger becomes a copy of Runeclaw Bear and gains an ability that should be treated as saying “{1}{U}{B}: Exile target creature card from a graveyard. Runeclaw Bear becomes a copy of that card and gains this ability.”
1127 1127
1128 201.4c Text pinted on some legenday cads efes to that cad by a shotened vesion of its name. Instances of a cad’s shotened name used in this manne ae teated as though they used the cad’s full name. 1128 201.4c Text printed on some legendary cards refers to that card by a shortened version of its name. Instances of a card’s shortened name used in this manner are treated as though they used the card’s full name.
1129 1129
1130 202. Mana Cost and Colo 1130 202. Mana Cost and Color
1131 1131
1132 202.1. A cad’s mana cost is indicated by mana symbols nea the top of the cad. (See ule 107.4.) On most cads, these symbols ae pinted in the uppe ight cone. Some cads fom the Futue Sight set have altenate fames in which the mana symbols appea to the left of the illustation. 1132 202.1. A card’s mana cost is indicated by mana symbols near the top of the card. (See rule 107.4.) On most cards, these symbols are printed in the upper right corner. Some cards from the Future Sight set have alternate frames in which the mana symbols appear to the left of the illustration.
1133 1133
1134 202.1a The mana cost of an object epesents what a playe must spend fom thei mana pool to cast that cad. Unless an object’s mana cost includes Phyexian mana symbols (see ule 107.4f), paying that mana cost equies matching the type of any coloed o cololess mana symbols as well as paying the geneic mana indicated in the cost. 1134 202.1a The mana cost of an object represents what a player must spend from their mana pool to cast that card. Unless an object’s mana cost includes Phyrexian mana symbols (see rule 107.4f), paying that mana cost requires matching the type of any colored or colorless mana symbols as well as paying the generic mana indicated in the cost.
1135 1135
1136 202.1b Some objects have no mana cost. This nomally includes all land cads, any othe cads that have no mana symbols whee thei mana cost would appea, tokens (unless the effect that ceates them specifies othewise), and nontaditional Magic cads. Having no mana cost epesents an unpayable cost (see ule 118.6). Note that lands ae played without paying any costs (see ule 305, “Lands”). 1136 202.1b Some objects have no mana cost. This normally includes all land cards, any other cards that have no mana symbols where their mana cost would appear, tokens (unless the effect that creates them specifies otherwise), and nontraditional Magic cards. Having no mana cost represents an unpayable cost (see rule 118.6). Note that lands are played without paying any costs (see rule 305, “Lands”).
1137 1137
1138 202.2. An object is the colo o colos of the mana symbols in its mana cost, egadless of the colo of its fame. 1138 202.2. An object is the color or colors of the mana symbols in its mana cost, regardless of the color of its frame.
1139 1139
1140 202.2a The five colos ae white, blue, black, ed, and geen. The white mana symbol is epesented by {W}, blue by {U}, black by {B}, ed by {R}, and geen by {G}. 1140 202.2a The five colors are white, blue, black, red, and green. The white mana symbol is represented by {W}, blue by {U}, black by {B}, red by {R}, and green by {G}.
1141 Example: An object with a mana cost of {2}{W} is white, an object with a mana cost of {2} is cololess, and one with a mana cost of {2}{W}{B} is both white and black. 1141 Example: An object with a mana cost of {2}{W} is white, an object with a mana cost of {2} is colorless, and one with a mana cost of {2}{W}{B} is both white and black.
1142 1142
1143 202.2b Objects with no coloed mana symbols in thei mana costs ae cololess. 1143 202.2b Objects with no colored mana symbols in their mana costs are colorless.
1144 1144
1145 202.2c An object with two o moe diffeent coloed mana symbols in its mana cost is each of the colos of those mana symbols. Most multicoloed cads ae pinted with a gold fame, but this is not a equiement fo a cad to be multicoloed. 1145 202.2c An object with two or more different colored mana symbols in its mana cost is each of the colors of those mana symbols. Most multicolored cards are printed with a gold frame, but this is not a requirement for a card to be multicolored.
1146 1146
1147 202.2d An object with one o moe hybid mana symbols and/o Phyexian mana symbols in its mana cost is all of the colos of those mana symbols, in addition to any othe colos the object might be. (Most cads with hybid mana symbols in thei mana costs ae pinted in a two-tone fame. See ule 107.4e.) 1147 202.2d An object with one or more hybrid mana symbols and/or Phyrexian mana symbols in its mana cost is all of the colors of those mana symbols, in addition to any other colors the object might be. (Most cards with hybrid mana symbols in their mana costs are printed in a two-tone frame. See rule 107.4e.)
1148 1148
1149 202.2e An object may have a colo indicato pinted to the left of the type line. That object is each colo denoted by that colo indicato. (See ule 204.) 1149 202.2e An object may have a color indicator printed to the left of the type line. That object is each color denoted by that color indicator. (See rule 204.)
1150 1150
1151 202.2f Effects may change an object’s colo, give a colo to a cololess object, o make a coloed object become cololess; see ule 105.3. 1151 202.2f Effects may change an object’s color, give a color to a colorless object, or make a colored object become colorless; see rule 105.3.
1152 1152
1153 202.3. The conveted mana cost of an object is a numbe equal to the total amount of mana in its mana cost, egadless of colo. 1153 202.3. The converted mana cost of an object is a number equal to the total amount of mana in its mana cost, regardless of color.
1154 Example: A mana cost of {3}{U}{U} tanslates to a conveted mana cost of 5. 1154 Example: A mana cost of {3}{U}{U} translates to a converted mana cost of 5.
1155 1155
1156 202.3a The conveted mana cost of an object with no mana cost is 0, unless that object is the back face of a double-faced pemanent o is a melded pemanent. 1156 202.3a The converted mana cost of an object with no mana cost is 0, unless that object is the back face of a double-faced permanent or is a melded permanent.
1157 1157
1158 202.3b The conveted mana cost of a double-faced pemanent’s back face is calculated as though it had the mana cost of its font face. If a pemanent is a copy of the back face of a double-faced cad (even if the cad epesenting that copy is itself a double-faced cad), the conveted mana cost of that pemanent is 0. 1158 202.3b The converted mana cost of a double-faced permanent’s back face is calculated as though it had the mana cost of its front face. If a permanent is a copy of the back face of a double-faced card (even if the card representing that copy is itself a double-faced card), the converted mana cost of that permanent is 0.
1159 Example: Huntmaste of the Fells is a double-faced cad with mana cost {2}{R}{G}. Its conveted mana cost is 4. Afte it tansfoms to its othe face (Ravage of the Fells), its conveted mana cost emains 4. 1159 Example: Huntmaster of the Fells is a double-faced card with mana cost {2}{R}{G}. Its converted mana cost is 4. After it transforms to its other face (Ravager of the Fells), its converted mana cost remains 4.
1160 Example: A Clone entes the battlefield as a copy of Ravage of the Fells. Its conveted mana cost is 0. 1160 Example: A Clone enters the battlefield as a copy of Ravager of the Fells. Its converted mana cost is 0.
1161 Example: Insectile Abeation is the back face of a double-faced cad whose font face has mana cost {U}. It becomes a copy of Ravage of the Fells. Its conveted mana cost becomes 0. 1161 Example: Insectile Aberration is the back face of a double-faced card whose front face has mana cost {U}. It becomes a copy of Ravager of the Fells. Its converted mana cost becomes 0.
1162 1162
1163 202.3c The conveted mana cost of a melded pemanent is calculated as though it had the combined mana cost of the font faces of each cad that epesents it. If a pemanent is a copy of a melded pemanent (even if that copy is epesented by two othe meld cads), the conveted mana cost of the copy is 0. 1163 202.3c The converted mana cost of a melded permanent is calculated as though it had the combined mana cost of the front faces of each card that represents it. If a permanent is a copy of a melded permanent (even if that copy is represented by two other meld cards), the converted mana cost of the copy is 0.
1164 1164
1165 202.3d The conveted mana cost of a split cad not on the stack o of a fused split spell on the stack is detemined fom the combined mana costs of its halves. Othewise, while a split cad is on the stack, the conveted mana cost of the spell is detemined by the mana cost of the half that was chosen to be cast. See ule 708, “Split Cads.” 1165 202.3d The converted mana cost of a split card not on the stack or of a fused split spell on the stack is determined from the combined mana costs of its halves. Otherwise, while a split card is on the stack, the converted mana cost of the spell is determined by the mana cost of the half that was chosen to be cast. See rule 708, “Split Cards.”
1166 1166
1167 202.3e When calculating the conveted mana cost of an object with an {X} in its mana cost, X is teated as 0 while the object is not on the stack, and X is teated as the numbe chosen fo it while the object is on the stack. 1167 202.3e When calculating the converted mana cost of an object with an {X} in its mana cost, X is treated as 0 while the object is not on the stack, and X is treated as the number chosen for it while the object is on the stack.
1168 1168
1169 202.3f When calculating the conveted mana cost of an object with a hybid mana symbol in its mana cost, use the lagest component of each hybid symbol. 1169 202.3f When calculating the converted mana cost of an object with a hybrid mana symbol in its mana cost, use the largest component of each hybrid symbol.
1170 Example: The conveted mana cost of a cad with mana cost {1}{W/U}{W/U} is 3. 1170 Example: The converted mana cost of a card with mana cost {1}{W/U}{W/U} is 3.
1171 Example: The conveted mana cost of a cad with mana cost {2/B}{2/B}{2/B} is 6. 1171 Example: The converted mana cost of a card with mana cost {2/B}{2/B}{2/B} is 6.
1172 1172
1173 202.3g Each Phyexian mana symbol in a cad’s mana cost contibutes 1 to its conveted mana cost. 1173 202.3g Each Phyrexian mana symbol in a card’s mana cost contributes 1 to its converted mana cost.
1174 Example: The conveted mana cost of a cad with mana cost {1}{W/P}{W/P} is 3. 1174 Example: The converted mana cost of a card with mana cost {1}{W/P}{W/P} is 3.
1175 1175
1176 202.4. Any additional cost listed in an object’s ules text o imposed by an effect isn’t pat of the mana cost. (See ule 601, “Casting Spells.”) Such costs ae paid at the same time as the spell’s othe costs. 1176 202.4. Any additional cost listed in an object’s rules text or imposed by an effect isn’t part of the mana cost. (See rule 601, “Casting Spells.”) Such costs are paid at the same time as the spell’s other costs.
1177 1177
1178 203. Illustation 1178 203. Illustration
1179 1179
1180 203.1. The illustation is pinted on the uppe half of a cad and has no effect on game play. Fo example, a ceatue doesn’t have the flying ability unless stated in its ules text, even if it’s depicted as flying. 1180 203.1. The illustration is printed on the upper half of a card and has no effect on game play. For example, a creature doesn’t have the flying ability unless stated in its rules text, even if it’s depicted as flying.
1181 1181
1182 204. Colo Indicato 1182 204. Color Indicator
1183 1183
1184 204.1. The colo indicato is pinted to the left of the type line diectly below the illustation. It consists of a cicula symbol filled in with one o moe colos. A colo indicato is usually found on nonland cads without a mana cost. 1184 204.1. The color indicator is printed to the left of the type line directly below the illustration. It consists of a circular symbol filled in with one or more colors. A color indicator is usually found on nonland cards without a mana cost.
1185 1185
1186 204.2. An object with a colo indicato is each colo denoted by that colo indicato. 1186 204.2. An object with a color indicator is each color denoted by that color indicator.
1187 1187
1188 205. Type Line 1188 205. Type Line
1189 1189
1190 205.1. The type line is pinted diectly below the illustation. It contains the cad’s cad type(s). It also contains the cad’s subtype(s) and supetype(s), if applicable. 1190 205.1. The type line is printed directly below the illustration. It contains the card’s card type(s). It also contains the card’s subtype(s) and supertype(s), if applicable.
1191 1191
1192 205.1a Some effects set an object’s cad type. In such cases, the new cad type(s) eplaces any existing cad types. Countes, effects, and damage maked on the object emain with it, even if they ae meaningless to the new cad type. Similaly, when an effect sets one o moe of an object’s subtypes, the new subtype(s) eplaces any existing subtypes fom the appopiate set (ceatue types, land types, atifact types, enchantment types, planeswalke types, o spell types). If an object’s cad type is emoved, the subtypes coelated with that cad type will emain if they ae also the subtypes of a cad type the object cuently has; othewise, they ae also emoved fo the entie time the object’s cad type is emoved. Removing an object’s subtype doesn’t affect its cad types at all. 1192 205.1a Some effects set an object’s card type. In such cases, the new card type(s) replaces any existing card types. Counters, effects, and damage marked on the object remain with it, even if they are meaningless to the new card type. Similarly, when an effect sets one or more of an object’s subtypes, the new subtype(s) replaces any existing subtypes from the appropriate set (creature types, land types, artifact types, enchantment types, planeswalker types, or spell types). If an object’s card type is removed, the subtypes correlated with that card type will remain if they are also the subtypes of a card type the object currently has; otherwise, they are also removed for the entire time the object’s card type is removed. Removing an object’s subtype doesn’t affect its card types at all.
1193 1193
1194 205.1b Some effects change an object’s cad type, supetype, o subtype but specify that the object etains a pio cad type, supetype, o subtype. In such cases, all the object’s pio cad types, supetypes, and subtypes ae etained. This ule applies to effects that use the phase “in addition to its types” o that state that something is “still a [type, supetype, o subtype].” Some effects state that an object becomes an “atifact ceatue”; these effects also allow the object to etain all of its pio cad types and subtypes. Some effects state that an object becomes a “[ceatue type o types] atifact ceatue”; these effects also allow the object to etain all of its pio cad types and subtypes othe than ceatue types, but eplace any existing ceatue types. 1194 205.1b Some effects change an object’s card type, supertype, or subtype but specify that the object retains a prior card type, supertype, or subtype. In such cases, all the object’s prior card types, supertypes, and subtypes are retained. This rule applies to effects that use the phrase “in addition to its types” or that state that something is “still a [type, supertype, or subtype].” Some effects state that an object becomes an “artifact creature”; these effects also allow the object to retain all of its prior card types and subtypes. Some effects state that an object becomes a “[creature type or types] artifact creature”; these effects also allow the object to retain all of its prior card types and subtypes other than creature types, but replace any existing creature types.
1195 Example: An ability eads, “All lands ae 1/1 ceatues that ae still lands.” The affected lands now have two cad types: ceatue and land. If thee wee any lands that wee also atifacts befoe the ability’s effect applied to them, those lands would become “atifact land ceatues,” not just “ceatues,” o “land ceatues.” The effect allows them to etain both the atifact and land cad types. In addition, each land affected by the ability etains any land types and supetypes it had befoe the ability took effect. 1195 Example: An ability reads, “All lands are 1/1 creatures that are still lands.” The affected lands now have two card types: creature and land. If there were any lands that were also artifacts before the ability’s effect applied to them, those lands would become “artifact land creatures,” not just “creatures,” or “land creatures.” The effect allows them to retain both the artifact and land card types. In addition, each land affected by the ability retains any land types and supertypes it had before the ability took effect.
1196 Example: An ability eads, “All atifacts ae 1/1 atifact ceatues.” If a pemanent is both an atifact and an enchantment, it will become an atifact enchantment ceatue. 1196 Example: An ability reads, “All artifacts are 1/1 artifact creatures.” If a permanent is both an artifact and an enchantment, it will become an artifact enchantment creature.
1197 1197
1198 205.2. Cad Types 1198 205.2. Card Types
1199 1199
1200 205.2a The cad types ae atifact, conspiacy, ceatue, enchantment, instant, land, phenomenon, plane, planeswalke, scheme, socey, tibal, and vanguad. See section 3, “Cad Types.” 1200 205.2a The card types are artifact, conspiracy, creature, enchantment, instant, land, phenomenon, plane, planeswalker, scheme, sorcery, tribal, and vanguard. See section 3, “Card Types.”
1201 1201
1202 205.2b Some objects have moe than one cad type (fo example, an atifact ceatue). Such objects satisfy the citeia fo any effect that applies to any of thei cad types. 1202 205.2b Some objects have more than one card type (for example, an artifact creature). Such objects satisfy the criteria for any effect that applies to any of their card types.
1203 1203
1204 205.2c Tokens have cad types even though they aen’t cads. The same is tue of copies of spells and copies of cads. 1204 205.2c Tokens have card types even though they aren’t cards. The same is true of copies of spells and copies of cards.
1205 1205
1206 205.3. Subtypes 1206 205.3. Subtypes
1207 1207
1208 205.3a A cad can have one o moe subtypes pinted on its type line. 1208 205.3a A card can have one or more subtypes printed on its type line.
1209 1209
1210 205.3b Subtypes of each cad type except plane ae always single wods and ae listed afte a long dash. Each wod afte the dash is a sepaate subtype; such objects may have multiple types. Subtypes of planes ae also listed afte a long dash, but may be multiple wods; all wods afte the dash ae, collectively, a single subtype. 1210 205.3b Subtypes of each card type except plane are always single words and are listed after a long dash. Each word after the dash is a separate subtype; such objects may have multiple types. Subtypes of planes are also listed after a long dash, but may be multiple words; all words after the dash are, collectively, a single subtype.
1211 Example: “Basic Land — Mountain” means the cad is a land with the subtype Mountain. “Ceatue — Goblin Wizad” means the cad is a ceatue with the subtypes Goblin and Wizad. “Atifact — Equipment” means the cad is an atifact with the subtype Equipment. 1211 Example: “Basic Land — Mountain” means the card is a land with the subtype Mountain. “Creature — Goblin Wizard” means the card is a creature with the subtypes Goblin and Wizard. “Artifact — Equipment” means the card is an artifact with the subtype Equipment.
1212 1212
1213 205.3c If a cad with multiple cad types has one o moe subtypes, each subtype is coelated to its appopiate cad type. 1213 205.3c If a card with multiple card types has one or more subtypes, each subtype is correlated to its appropriate card type.
1214 Example: Dyad Abo’s type line says “Land Ceatue — Foest Dyad.” Foest is a land type, and Dyad is a ceatue type. 1214 Example: Dryad Arbor’s type line says “Land Creature — Forest Dryad.” Forest is a land type, and Dryad is a creature type.
1215 1215
1216 205.3d An object can’t gain a subtype that doesn’t coespond to one of that object’s types. 1216 205.3d An object can’t gain a subtype that doesn’t correspond to one of that object’s types.
1217 1217
1218 205.3e If an effect instucts a playe to choose a subtype, that playe must choose one, and only one, existing subtype, and the subtype must be fo the appopiate cad type. Fo example, the playe can’t choose a land type if an instuction equies choosing a ceatue type. 1218 205.3e If an effect instructs a player to choose a subtype, that player must choose one, and only one, existing subtype, and the subtype must be for the appropriate card type. For example, the player can’t choose a land type if an instruction requires choosing a creature type.
1219 Example: When choosing a ceatue type, “Mefolk” o “Wizad” is acceptable, but “Mefolk Wizad” is not. Wods like “atifact,” “opponent,” “Swamp,” o “tuck” can’t be chosen because they aen’t ceatue types. 1219 Example: When choosing a creature type, “Merfolk” or “Wizard” is acceptable, but “Merfolk Wizard” is not. Words like “artifact,” “opponent,” “Swamp,” or “truck” can’t be chosen because they aren’t creature types.
1220 1220
1221 205.3f Many cads wee pinted with subtypes that ae now obsolete. Many cads have etoactively eceived subtypes. Use the Oacle cad efeence to detemine what a cad’s subtypes ae. (See ule 108.1.) 1221 205.3f Many cards were printed with subtypes that are now obsolete. Many cards have retroactively received subtypes. Use the Oracle card reference to determine what a card’s subtypes are. (See rule 108.1.)
1222 1222
1223 205.3g Atifacts have thei own unique set of subtypes; these subtypes ae called atifact types. The atifact types ae Clue, Contaption, Equipment (see ule 301.5), Food, Fotification (see ule 301.6), Teasue, and Vehicle (see ule 301.7). 1223 205.3g Artifacts have their own unique set of subtypes; these subtypes are called artifact types. The artifact types are Clue, Contraption, Equipment (see rule 301.5), Food, Fortification (see rule 301.6), Treasure, and Vehicle (see rule 301.7).
1224 1224
1225 205.3h Enchantments have thei own unique set of subtypes; these subtypes ae called enchantment types. The enchantment types ae Aua (see ule 303.4), Catouche, Cuse, Saga (see ule 714), and Shine. 1225 205.3h Enchantments have their own unique set of subtypes; these subtypes are called enchantment types. The enchantment types are Aura (see rule 303.4), Cartouche, Curse, Saga (see rule 714), and Shrine.
1226 1226
1227 205.3i Lands have thei own unique set of subtypes; these subtypes ae called land types. The land types ae Deset, Foest, Gate, Island, Lai, Locus, Mine, Mountain, Plains, Powe-Plant, Swamp, Towe, and Uza’s. 1227 205.3i Lands have their own unique set of subtypes; these subtypes are called land types. The land types are Desert, Forest, Gate, Island, Lair, Locus, Mine, Mountain, Plains, Power-Plant, Swamp, Tower, and Urza’s.
1228 Of that list, Foest, Island, Mountain, Plains, and Swamp ae the basic land types. See ule 305.6. 1228 Of that list, Forest, Island, Mountain, Plains, and Swamp are the basic land types. See rule 305.6.
1229 1229
1230 205.3j Planeswalkes have thei own unique set of subtypes; these subtypes ae called planeswalke types. The planeswalke types ae Ajani, Aminatou, Angath, Alinn, Ashiok, Bolas, Chanda, Dack, Daetti, Daviel, Domi, Dovin, Elspeth, Estid, Feyalise, Gauk, Gideon, Huatli, Jace, Jaya, Kan, Kasmina, Kaya, Kioa, Koth, Liliana, Nahii, Naset, Nissa, Nixilis, Oko, Ral, Rowan, Saheeli, Samut, Sakhan, Sea, Soin, Tamiyo, Tefei, Teyo, Tezzeet, Tibalt, Ugin, Vense, Vivien, Vaska, Will, Windgace, Wenn, Xenagos, Yanggu, and Yanling. 1230 205.3j Planeswalkers have their own unique set of subtypes; these subtypes are called planeswalker types. The planeswalker types are Ajani, Aminatou, Angrath, Arlinn, Ashiok, Bolas, Chandra, Dack, Daretti, Davriel, Domri, Dovin, Elspeth, Estrid, Freyalise, Garruk, Gideon, Huatli, Jace, Jaya, Karn, Kasmina, Kaya, Kiora, Koth, Liliana, Nahiri, Narset, Nissa, Nixilis, Oko, Ral, Rowan, Saheeli, Samut, Sarkhan, Serra, Sorin, Tamiyo, Teferi, Teyo, Tezzeret, Tibalt, Ugin, Venser, Vivien, Vraska, Will, Windgrace, Wrenn, Xenagos, Yanggu, and Yanling.
1231 1231
1232 205.3k Instants and soceies shae thei lists of subtypes; these subtypes ae called spell types. The spell types ae Adventue, Acane, and Tap. 1232 205.3k Instants and sorceries share their lists of subtypes; these subtypes are called spell types. The spell types are Adventure, Arcane, and Trap.
1233 1233
1234 205.3m Ceatues and tibals shae thei lists of subtypes; these subtypes ae called ceatue types. The ceatue types ae Adviso, Aethebon, Ally, Angel, Antelope, Ape, Ache, Achon, Amy, Atifice, Assassin, Assembly-Woke, Atog, Auochs, Avata, Aza, Badge, Babaian, Basilisk, Bat, Bea, Beast, Beeble, Beseke, Bid, Blinkmoth, Boa, Binge, Bushwagg, Camaid, Camel, Caibou, Caie, Cat, Centau, Cephalid, Chimea, Citizen, Cleic, Cockatice, Constuct, Cowad, Cab, Cocodile, Cyclops, Dauthi, Demon, Desete, Devil, Dinosau, Djinn, Dagon, Dake, Deadnought, Done, Duid, Dyad, Dwaf, Efeet, Egg, Elde, Eldazi, Elemental, Elephant, Elf, Elk, Eye, Faeie, Feet, Fish, Flagbeae, Fox, Fog, Fungus, Gagoyle, Gem, Giant, Gnome, Goat, Goblin, God, Golem, Gogon, Gavebon, Gemlin, Giffin, Hag, Hapy, Hellion, Hippo, Hippogiff, Homaid, Homunculus, Hoo, Hose, Hound, Human, Hyda, Hyena, Illusion, Imp, Incanation, Insect, Jackal, Jellyfish, Juggenaut, Kavu, Kiin, Kithkin, Knight, Kobold, Ko, Kaken, Lamia, Lammasu, Leech, Leviathan, Lhugoyf, Licid, Lizad, Manticoe, Masticoe, Mecenay, Mefolk, Metathan, Minion, Minotau, Mole, Monge, Mongoose, Monk, Monkey, Moonfolk, Mouse, Mutant, My, Mystic, Naga, Nautilus, Nephilim, Nightmae, Nightstalke, Ninja, Noble, Noggle, Nomad, Nymph, Octopus, Oge, Ooze, Ob, Oc, Ogg, Ouphe, Ox, Oyste, Pangolin, Peasant, Pegasus, Pentavite, Pest, Phelddagif, Phoenix, Pilot, Pinche, Piate, Plant, Paeto, Pism, Pocesso, Rabbit, Rat, Rebel, Reflection, Rhino, Rigge, Rogue, Sable, Salamande, Samuai, Sand, Sapoling, Saty, Scaecow, Scion, Scopion, Scout, Sculptue, Sef, Sepent, Sevo, Shade, Shaman, Shapeshifte, Sheep, Sien, Skeleton, Slith, Slive, Slug, Snake, Soldie, Soltai, Spawn, Specte, Spellshape, Sphinx, Spide, Spike, Spiit, Splinte, Sponge, Squid, Squiel, Stafish, Suaka, Suvivo, Tetavite, Thalakos, Thopte, Thull, Teefolk, Tilobite, Tiskelavite, Toll, Tutle, Unicon, Vampie, Vedalken, Viashino, Volve, Wall, Walock, Waio, Weid, Weewolf, Whale, Wizad, Wolf, Wolveine, Wombat, Wom, Waith, Wum, Yeti, Zombie, and Zubea. 1234 205.3m Creatures and tribals share their lists of subtypes; these subtypes are called creature types. The creature types are Advisor, Aetherborn, Ally, Angel, Antelope, Ape, Archer, Archon, Army, Artificer, Assassin, Assembly-Worker, Atog, Aurochs, Avatar, Azra, Badger, Barbarian, Basilisk, Bat, Bear, Beast, Beeble, Berserker, Bird, Blinkmoth, Boar, Bringer, Brushwagg, Camarid, Camel, Caribou, Carrier, Cat, Centaur, Cephalid, Chimera, Citizen, Cleric, Cockatrice, Construct, Coward, Crab, Crocodile, Cyclops, Dauthi, Demon, Deserter, Devil, Dinosaur, Djinn, Dragon, Drake, Dreadnought, Drone, Druid, Dryad, Dwarf, Efreet, Egg, Elder, Eldrazi, Elemental, Elephant, Elf, Elk, Eye, Faerie, Ferret, Fish, Flagbearer, Fox, Frog, Fungus, Gargoyle, Germ, Giant, Gnome, Goat, Goblin, God, Golem, Gorgon, Graveborn, Gremlin, Griffin, Hag, Harpy, Hellion, Hippo, Hippogriff, Homarid, Homunculus, Horror, Horse, Hound, Human, Hydra, Hyena, Illusion, Imp, Incarnation, Insect, Jackal, Jellyfish, Juggernaut, Kavu, Kirin, Kithkin, Knight, Kobold, Kor, Kraken, Lamia, Lammasu, Leech, Leviathan, Lhurgoyf, Licid, Lizard, Manticore, Masticore, Mercenary, Merfolk, Metathran, Minion, Minotaur, Mole, Monger, Mongoose, Monk, Monkey, Moonfolk, Mouse, Mutant, Myr, Mystic, Naga, Nautilus, Nephilim, Nightmare, Nightstalker, Ninja, Noble, Noggle, Nomad, Nymph, Octopus, Ogre, Ooze, Orb, Orc, Orgg, Ouphe, Ox, Oyster, Pangolin, Peasant, Pegasus, Pentavite, Pest, Phelddagrif, Phoenix, Pilot, Pincher, Pirate, Plant, Praetor, Prism, Processor, Rabbit, Rat, Rebel, Reflection, Rhino, Rigger, Rogue, Sable, Salamander, Samurai, Sand, Saproling, Satyr, Scarecrow, Scion, Scorpion, Scout, Sculpture, Serf, Serpent, Servo, Shade, Shaman, Shapeshifter, Sheep, Siren, Skeleton, Slith, Sliver, Slug, Snake, Soldier, Soltari, Spawn, Specter, Spellshaper, Sphinx, Spider, Spike, Spirit, Splinter, Sponge, Squid, Squirrel, Starfish, Surrakar, Survivor, Tetravite, Thalakos, Thopter, Thrull, Treefolk, Trilobite, Triskelavite, Troll, Turtle, Unicorn, Vampire, Vedalken, Viashino, Volver, Wall, Warlock, Warrior, Weird, Werewolf, Whale, Wizard, Wolf, Wolverine, Wombat, Worm, Wraith, Wurm, Yeti, Zombie, and Zubera.
1235 1235
1236 205.3n Planes have thei own unique set of subtypes; these subtypes ae called plana types. The plana types ae Alaa, Akhos, Azgol, Belenon, Bolas’s Meditation Realm, Dominaia, Equilo, Egamon, Fabacin, Innistad, Iquatana, I, Kaldheim, Kamigawa, Kasus, Kephalai, Kinshala, Kolbahan, Kyneth, Lowyn, Luvion, Mecadia, Miodin, Moag, Mongseng, Muaganda, New Phyexia, Phyexia, Pyulea, Rabiah, Rath, Ravnica, Regatha, Segovia, Sea’s Realm, Shadowmoo, Shandala, Ulgotha, Valla, Vyn, Wildfie, Xeex, and Zendika. 1236 205.3n Planes have their own unique set of subtypes; these subtypes are called planar types. The planar types are Alara, Arkhos, Azgol, Belenon, Bolas’s Meditation Realm, Dominaria, Equilor, Ergamon, Fabacin, Innistrad, Iquatana, Ir, Kaldheim, Kamigawa, Karsus, Kephalai, Kinshala, Kolbahan, Kyneth, Lorwyn, Luvion, Mercadia, Mirrodin, Moag, Mongseng, Muraganda, New Phyrexia, Phyrexia, Pyrulea, Rabiah, Rath, Ravnica, Regatha, Segovia, Serra’s Realm, Shadowmoor, Shandalar, Ulgrotha, Valla, Vryn, Wildfire, Xerex, and Zendikar.
1237 1237
1238 205.3p Phenomenon cads, scheme cads, vanguad cads, and conspiacy cads have no subtypes. 1238 205.3p Phenomenon cards, scheme cards, vanguard cards, and conspiracy cards have no subtypes.
1239 1239
1240 205.4. Supetypes 1240 205.4. Supertypes
1241 1241
1242 205.4a A cad can also have one o moe supetypes. These ae pinted diectly befoe its cad types. The supetypes ae basic, legenday, ongoing, snow, and wold. 1242 205.4a A card can also have one or more supertypes. These are printed directly before its card types. The supertypes are basic, legendary, ongoing, snow, and world.
1243 1243
1244 205.4b An object’s supetype is independent of its cad type and subtype, even though some supetypes ae closely identified with specific cad types. Changing an object’s cad types o subtypes won’t change its supetypes. Changing an object’s supetypes won’t change its cad types o subtypes. When an object gains o loses a supetype, it etains any othe supetypes it had. 1244 205.4b An object’s supertype is independent of its card type and subtype, even though some supertypes are closely identified with specific card types. Changing an object’s card types or subtypes won’t change its supertypes. Changing an object’s supertypes won’t change its card types or subtypes. When an object gains or loses a supertype, it retains any other supertypes it had.
1245 Example: An ability eads, “All lands ae 1/1 ceatues that ae still lands.” If any of the affected lands wee legenday, they ae still legenday. 1245 Example: An ability reads, “All lands are 1/1 creatures that are still lands.” If any of the affected lands were legendary, they are still legendary.
1246 1246
1247 205.4c Any land with the supetype “basic” is a basic land. Any land that doesn’t have this supetype is a nonbasic land, even if it has a basic land type. 1247 205.4c Any land with the supertype “basic” is a basic land. Any land that doesn’t have this supertype is a nonbasic land, even if it has a basic land type.
1248 Cads pinted in sets pio to the Eighth Edition coe set didn’t use the wod “basic” to indicate a basic land. Cads fom those sets with the following names ae basic lands and have eceived eata in the Oacle cad efeence accodingly: Foest, Island, Mountain, Plains, Swamp, Snow-Coveed Foest, Snow-Coveed Island, Snow-Coveed Mountain, Snow-Coveed Plains, and Snow-Coveed Swamp. 1248 Cards printed in sets prior to the Eighth Edition core set didn’t use the word “basic” to indicate a basic land. Cards from those sets with the following names are basic lands and have received errata in the Oracle card reference accordingly: Forest, Island, Mountain, Plains, Swamp, Snow-Covered Forest, Snow-Covered Island, Snow-Covered Mountain, Snow-Covered Plains, and Snow-Covered Swamp.
1249 1249
1250 205.4d Any pemanent with the supetype “legenday” is subject to the state-based action fo legenday pemanents, also called the “legend ule” (see ule 704.5j). 1250 205.4d Any permanent with the supertype “legendary” is subject to the state-based action for legendary permanents, also called the “legend rule” (see rule 704.5j).
1251 1251
1252 205.4e Any instant o socey spell with the supetype “legenday” is subject to a casting estiction. A playe can’t cast a legenday instant o socey spell unless that playe contols a legenday ceatue o a legenday planeswalke. 1252 205.4e Any instant or sorcery spell with the supertype “legendary” is subject to a casting restriction. A player can’t cast a legendary instant or sorcery spell unless that player controls a legendary creature or a legendary planeswalker.
1253 1253
1254 205.4f Any pemanent with the supetype “wold” is subject to the state-based action fo wold pemanents, also called the “wold ule” (see ule 704.5k). 1254 205.4f Any permanent with the supertype “world” is subject to the state-based action for world permanents, also called the “world rule” (see rule 704.5k).
1255 1255
1256 205.4g Any pemanent with the supetype “snow” is a snow pemanent. Any pemanent that doesn’t have this supetype is a nonsnow pemanent, egadless of its name. 1256 205.4g Any permanent with the supertype “snow” is a snow permanent. Any permanent that doesn’t have this supertype is a nonsnow permanent, regardless of its name.
1257 1257
1258 205.4h Any scheme cad with the supetype “ongoing” is exempt fom the state-based action fo schemes (see ule 704.5w). 1258 205.4h Any scheme card with the supertype “ongoing” is exempt from the state-based action for schemes (see rule 704.5w).
1259 1259
1260 206. Expansion Symbol 1260 206. Expansion Symbol
1261 1261
1262 206.1. The expansion symbol indicates which Magic set a cad is fom. It’s a small icon nomally pinted below the ight edge of the illustation. It has no effect on game play. 1262 206.1. The expansion symbol indicates which Magic set a card is from. It’s a small icon normally printed below the right edge of the illustration. It has no effect on game play.
1263 1263
1264 206.2. The colo of the expansion symbol indicates the aity of the cad within its set. A ed-oange symbol indicates the cad is mythic ae. A gold symbol indicates the cad is ae. A silve symbol indicates the cad is uncommon. A black o white symbol indicates the cad is common o is a basic land. A puple symbol signifies a special aity; to date, only the Time Spial® “timeshifted” cads, which wee ae than that set’s ae cads, have had puple expansion symbols. (Pio to the Exodus™ set, all expansion symbols wee black, egadless of aity. Also, pio to the Sixth Edition coe set, with the exception of the Simplified Chinese Fifth Edition coe set, Magic coe sets didn’t have expansion symbols at all.) 1264 206.2. The color of the expansion symbol indicates the rarity of the card within its set. A red-orange symbol indicates the card is mythic rare. A gold symbol indicates the card is rare. A silver symbol indicates the card is uncommon. A black or white symbol indicates the card is common or is a basic land. A purple symbol signifies a special rarity; to date, only the Time Spiral® “timeshifted” cards, which were rarer than that set’s rare cards, have had purple expansion symbols. (Prior to the Exodus™ set, all expansion symbols were black, regardless of rarity. Also, prior to the Sixth Edition core set, with the exception of the Simplified Chinese Fifth Edition core set, Magic core sets didn’t have expansion symbols at all.)
1265 1265
1266 206.3. Peviously, a spell o ability that affected cads fom a paticula set checked fo that set’s expansion symbol. These cads have eceived eata in the Oacle cad efeence to say they affect cads “with a name oiginally pinted” in a paticula set. See ule 700.8 fo details. 1266 206.3. Previously, a spell or ability that affected cards from a particular set checked for that set’s expansion symbol. These cards have received errata in the Oracle card reference to say they affect cards “with a name originally printed” in a particular set. See rule 700.8 for details.
1267 1267
1268 206.4. Playes may include cads fom any pinting in thei constucted decks if those cads appea in sets allowed in that fomat (o those cads ae specifically allowed by the Magic: The Gatheing Tounament Rules). See the Magic: The Gatheing Tounament Rules fo the cuent definitions of the constucted fomats (WPN.Wizads.com/en/esouces/ules-documents). 1268 206.4. Players may include cards from any printing in their constructed decks if those cards appear in sets allowed in that format (or those cards are specifically allowed by the Magic: The Gathering Tournament Rules). See the Magic: The Gathering Tournament Rules for the current definitions of the constructed formats (WPN.Wizards.com/en/resources/rules-documents).
1269 1269
1270 206.5. The full list of expansions and expansion symbols can be found in the Cad Set Achive section of the Magic website (Magic.Wizads.com/en/game-info/poducts/cad-set-achive). 1270 206.5. The full list of expansions and expansion symbols can be found in the Card Set Archive section of the Magic website (Magic.Wizards.com/en/game-info/products/card-set-archive).
1271 1271
1272 207. Text Box 1272 207. Text Box
1273 1273
1274 207.1. The text box is pinted on the lowe half of the cad. It usually contains ules text defining the cad’s abilities. 1274 207.1. The text box is printed on the lower half of the card. It usually contains rules text defining the card’s abilities.
1275 1275
1276 207.2. The text box may also contain italicized text that has no game function. 1276 207.2. The text box may also contain italicized text that has no game function.
1277 1277
1278 207.2a Reminde text is italicized text within paentheses that summaizes a ule that applies to that cad. It usually appeas on the same line as the ability it’s elevant to, but it may appea on its own line if it applies to an aspect of the cad othe than an ability. 1278 207.2a Reminder text is italicized text within parentheses that summarizes a rule that applies to that card. It usually appears on the same line as the ability it’s relevant to, but it may appear on its own line if it applies to an aspect of the card other than an ability.
1279 1279
1280 207.2b Flavo text is italicized text that, like the illustation, adds atistic appeal to the game. It appeas below the ules text. 1280 207.2b Flavor text is italicized text that, like the illustration, adds artistic appeal to the game. It appears below the rules text.
1281 1281
1282 207.2c An ability wod appeas in italics at the beginning of some abilities. Ability wods ae simila to keywods in that they tie togethe cads that have simila functionality, but they have no special ules meaning and no individual enties in the Compehensive Rules. The ability wods ae adamant, addendum, battalion, bloodush, channel, choma, cohot, constellation, convege, council’s dilemma, deliium, domain, eminence, enage, fateful hou, feocious, fomidable, gandeu, hellbent, heoic, impint, inspied, join foces, kinship, landfall, lieutenant, metalcaft, mobid, paley, adiance, aid, ally, evolt, spell mastey, stive, sweep, tempting offe, theshold, undegowth, and will of the council. 1282 207.2c An ability word appears in italics at the beginning of some abilities. Ability words are similar to keywords in that they tie together cards that have similar functionality, but they have no special rules meaning and no individual entries in the Comprehensive Rules. The ability words are adamant, addendum, battalion, bloodrush, channel, chroma, cohort, constellation, converge, council’s dilemma, delirium, domain, eminence, enrage, fateful hour, ferocious, formidable, grandeur, hellbent, heroic, imprint, inspired, join forces, kinship, landfall, lieutenant, metalcraft, morbid, parley, radiance, raid, rally, revolt, spell mastery, strive, sweep, tempting offer, threshold, undergrowth, and will of the council.
1283 1283
1284 207.3. Some cads have decoative icons in the backgound of thei text boxes. Fo example, a guild icon appeas in the text box of many cads associated with the guilds of Ravnica, and a faction icon appeas in the text box of most Scas of Miodin™ block cads. Similaly, many pomotional cads include decoative icons. These icons have no effect on game play. 1284 207.3. Some cards have decorative icons in the background of their text boxes. For example, a guild icon appears in the text box of many cards associated with the guilds of Ravnica, and a faction icon appears in the text box of most Scars of Mirrodin™ block cards. Similarly, many promotional cards include decorative icons. These icons have no effect on game play.
1285 1285
1286 207.4. The chaos symbol {CHAOS} appeas in the text box of each plane cad to the left of a tiggeed ability that tigges wheneve {CHAOS} is olled on the plana die. The symbol itself has no special ules meaning. 1286 207.4. The chaos symbol {CHAOS} appears in the text box of each plane card to the left of a triggered ability that triggers whenever {CHAOS} is rolled on the planar die. The symbol itself has no special rules meaning.
1287 1287
1288 208. Powe/Toughness 1288 208. Power/Toughness
1289 1289
1290 208.1. A ceatue cad has two numbes sepaated by a slash pinted in its lowe ight cone. The fist numbe is its powe (the amount of damage it deals in combat); the second is its toughness (the amount of damage needed to destoy it). Fo example, 2/3 means the object has powe 2 and toughness 3. Powe and toughness can be modified o set to paticula values by effects. 1290 208.1. A creature card has two numbers separated by a slash printed in its lower right corner. The first number is its power (the amount of damage it deals in combat); the second is its toughness (the amount of damage needed to destroy it). For example, 2/3 means the object has power 2 and toughness 3. Power and toughness can be modified or set to particular values by effects.
1291 1291
1292 208.2. Rathe than a fixed numbe, some ceatue cads have powe and/o toughness that includes a sta (*). 1292 208.2. Rather than a fixed number, some creature cards have power and/or toughness that includes a star (*).
1293 1293
1294 208.2a The cad may have a chaacteistic-defining ability that sets its powe and/o toughness accoding to some stated condition. (See ule 604.3.) Such an ability is woded “[This ceatue’s] [powe o toughness] is equal to . . .” o “[This ceatue’s] powe and toughness ae each equal to . . .” This ability functions eveywhee, even outside the game. If the ability needs to use a numbe that can’t be detemined, including inside a calculation, use 0 instead of that numbe. 1294 208.2a The card may have a characteristic-defining ability that sets its power and/or toughness according to some stated condition. (See rule 604.3.) Such an ability is worded “[This creature’s] [power or toughness] is equal to . . .” or “[This creature’s] power and toughness are each equal to . . .” This ability functions everywhere, even outside the game. If the ability needs to use a number that can’t be determined, including inside a calculation, use 0 instead of that number.
1295 Example: Lost Ode of Jakeld has powe and toughness each equal to 1+*. It has the abilities “As Lost Ode of Jakeld entes the battlefield, choose an opponent” and “Lost Ode of Jakeld’s powe and toughness ae each equal to 1 plus the numbe of ceatues the chosen playe contols.” While Lost Ode of Jakeld isn’t on the battlefield, thee won’t be a chosen playe. Its powe and toughness will each be equal to 1 plus 0, so it’s 1/1. 1295 Example: Lost Order of Jarkeld has power and toughness each equal to 1+*. It has the abilities “As Lost Order of Jarkeld enters the battlefield, choose an opponent” and “Lost Order of Jarkeld’s power and toughness are each equal to 1 plus the number of creatures the chosen player controls.” While Lost Order of Jarkeld isn’t on the battlefield, there won’t be a chosen player. Its power and toughness will each be equal to 1 plus 0, so it’s 1/1.
1296 1296
1297 208.2b The cad may have a static ability that ceates a eplacement effect that sets the ceatue’s powe and toughness to one of a numbe of specific values as it entes the battlefield o is tuned face up. (See ule 614, “Replacement Effects.”) Such an ability is woded “As [this ceatue] entes the battlefield . . . ,” “As [this ceatue] is tuned face up . . . ,” o “[This ceatue] entes the battlefield as . . .” and lists two o moe specific powe and toughness values (and may also list additional chaacteistics). The chaacteistics chosen o detemined with these effects affect the ceatue’s copiable values. (See ule 706.2.) While the cad isn’t on the battlefield, its powe and toughness ae each consideed to be 0. 1297 208.2b The card may have a static ability that creates a replacement effect that sets the creature’s power and toughness to one of a number of specific values as it enters the battlefield or is turned face up. (See rule 614, “Replacement Effects.”) Such an ability is worded “As [this creature] enters the battlefield . . . ,” “As [this creature] is turned face up . . . ,” or “[This creature] enters the battlefield as . . .” and lists two or more specific power and toughness values (and may also list additional characteristics). The characteristics chosen or determined with these effects affect the creature’s copiable values. (See rule 706.2.) While the card isn’t on the battlefield, its power and toughness are each considered to be 0.
1298 1298
1299 208.3. A nonceatue pemanent has no powe o toughness, even if it’s a cad with a powe and toughness pinted on it (such as a Vehicle). A nonceatue object not on the battlefield has powe o toughness only if it has a powe and toughness pinted on it. 1299 208.3. A noncreature permanent has no power or toughness, even if it’s a card with a power and toughness printed on it (such as a Vehicle). A noncreature object not on the battlefield has power or toughness only if it has a power and toughness printed on it.
1300 1300
1301 208.3a If an effect would be ceated that affects the powe and/o toughness of a nonceatue pemanent, that effect is ceated even though it doesn’t do anything unless that pemanent becomes a ceatue. 1301 208.3a If an effect would be created that affects the power and/or toughness of a noncreature permanent, that effect is created even though it doesn’t do anything unless that permanent becomes a creature.
1302 Example: Vetean Motoist has the ability “Wheneve Vetean Motoist cews a Vehicle, that Vehicle gets +1/+1 until end of tun,” and it’s tapped to pay the cew cost of a Vehicle. This tiggeed ability esolves while the Vehicle it cewed isn’t yet a ceatue. The continuous effect is ceated and will apply to the Vehicle once it becomes a ceatue. 1302 Example: Veteran Motorist has the ability “Whenever Veteran Motorist crews a Vehicle, that Vehicle gets +1/+1 until end of turn,” and it’s tapped to pay the crew cost of a Vehicle. This triggered ability resolves while the Vehicle it crewed isn’t yet a creature. The continuous effect is created and will apply to the Vehicle once it becomes a creature.
1303 1303
1304 208.4. Effects that set a ceatue’s powe and/o toughness to specific values may efe to that ceatue’s “base powe,” “base toughness,” o “base powe and toughness.” Othe continuous effects may futhe modify the ceatue’s powe and toughness. See ule 613, “Inteaction of Continuous Effects.” 1304 208.4. Effects that set a creature’s power and/or toughness to specific values may refer to that creature’s “base power,” “base toughness,” or “base power and toughness.” Other continuous effects may further modify the creature’s power and toughness. See rule 613, “Interaction of Continuous Effects.”
1305 1305
1306 208.5. If a ceatue somehow has no value fo its powe, its powe is 0. The same is tue fo toughness. 1306 208.5. If a creature somehow has no value for its power, its power is 0. The same is true for toughness.
1307 1307
1308 209. Loyalty 1308 209. Loyalty
1309 1309
1310 209.1. Each planeswalke cad has a loyalty numbe pinted in its lowe ight cone. This indicates its loyalty while it’s not on the battlefield, and it also indicates that the planeswalke entes the battlefield with that many loyalty countes on it. 1310 209.1. Each planeswalker card has a loyalty number printed in its lower right corner. This indicates its loyalty while it’s not on the battlefield, and it also indicates that the planeswalker enters the battlefield with that many loyalty counters on it.
1311 1311
1312 209.2. An activated ability with a loyalty symbol in its cost is a loyalty ability. Loyalty abilities follow special ules: A playe may activate a loyalty ability of a pemanent they contol any time they have pioity and the stack is empty duing a main phase of thei tun, but only if none of that pemanent’s loyalty abilities have been activated that tun. See ule 606, “Loyalty Abilities.” 1312 209.2. An activated ability with a loyalty symbol in its cost is a loyalty ability. Loyalty abilities follow special rules: A player may activate a loyalty ability of a permanent they control any time they have priority and the stack is empty during a main phase of their turn, but only if none of that permanent’s loyalty abilities have been activated that turn. See rule 606, “Loyalty Abilities.”
1313 1313
1314 210. Hand Modifie 1314 210. Hand Modifier
1315 1315
1316 210.1. Each vanguad cad has a hand modifie pinted in its lowe left cone. This is a numbe peceded by a plus sign, a numbe peceded by a minus sign, o a zeo. This modifie is applied as the stating hand size and the maximum hand size of the vanguad cad’s owne ae detemined. See ule 103.4. 1316 210.1. Each vanguard card has a hand modifier printed in its lower left corner. This is a number preceded by a plus sign, a number preceded by a minus sign, or a zero. This modifier is applied as the starting hand size and the maximum hand size of the vanguard card’s owner are determined. See rule 103.4.
1317 1317
1318 211. Life Modifie 1318 211. Life Modifier
1319 1319
1320 211.1. Each vanguad cad has a life modifie pinted in its lowe ight cone. This is a numbe peceded by a plus sign, a numbe peceded by a minus sign, o a zeo. This modifie is applied as the stating life total of the vanguad cad’s owne is detemined. See ule 103.3. 1320 211.1. Each vanguard card has a life modifier printed in its lower right corner. This is a number preceded by a plus sign, a number preceded by a minus sign, or a zero. This modifier is applied as the starting life total of the vanguard card’s owner is determined. See rule 103.3.
1321 1321
1322 212. Infomation Below the Text Box 1322 212. Information Below the Text Box
1323 1323
1324 212.1. Each cad featues text pinted below the text box that has no effect on game play. Not all cad sets wee pinted with all of the infomation listed below on each cad. 1324 212.1. Each card features text printed below the text box that has no effect on game play. Not all card sets were printed with all of the information listed below on each card.
1325 1325
1326 212.1a Most cad sets featue collecto numbes. This infomation is pinted in the fom [cad numbe]/[total cads in the set] o simply [cad numbe]. Some cads, such as unique cads in Planeswalke Decks, have cad numbes that exceed the listed total numbe of cads. 1326 212.1a Most card sets feature collector numbers. This information is printed in the form [card number]/[total cards in the set] or simply [card number]. Some cards, such as unique cards in Planeswalker Decks, have card numbers that exceed the listed total number of cards.
1327 1327
1328 212.1b A cad’s aity is indicated with a single lette following the collecto numbe. 1328 212.1b A card’s rarity is indicated with a single letter following the collector number.
1329 1329
1330 212.1c Some pomotional cads include infomation to indicate the specific pomotion the cad is associated with. 1330 212.1c Some promotional cards include information to indicate the specific promotion the card is associated with.
1331 1331
1332 212.1d The thee-chaacte code epesenting the set in which a cad is pinted and the two-chaacte code epesenting the language in which a cad is pinted ae sepaated by a bullet point. If a cad is pemium, these codes ae instead sepaated by a sta. 1332 212.1d The three-character code representing the set in which a card is printed and the two-character code representing the language in which a card is printed are separated by a bullet point. If a card is premium, these codes are instead separated by a star.
1333 1333
1334 212.1e The illustation cedit fo a cad follows the paintbush icon o, on olde cads, the abbeviation “Illus.” 1334 212.1e The illustration credit for a card follows the paintbrush icon or, on older cards, the abbreviation “Illus.”
1335 1335
1336 212.1f Legal text (the fine pint at the bottom o bottom-ight of the cad) lists the tademak and copyight infomation. 1336 212.1f Legal text (the fine print at the bottom or bottom-right of the card) lists the trademark and copyright information.
1337 1337
1338 3. Cad Types 1338 3. Card Types
1339 1339
1340 300. Geneal 1340 300. General
1341 1341
1342 300.1. The cad types ae atifact, conspiacy, ceatue, enchantment, instant, land, phenomenon, plane, planeswalke, scheme, socey, tibal, and vanguad. 1342 300.1. The card types are artifact, conspiracy, creature, enchantment, instant, land, phenomenon, plane, planeswalker, scheme, sorcery, tribal, and vanguard.
1343 1343
1344 300.2. Some objects have moe than one cad type (fo example, an atifact ceatue). Such objects combine the aspects of each of those cad types, and ae subject to spells and abilities that affect eithe o all of those cad types. 1344 300.2. Some objects have more than one card type (for example, an artifact creature). Such objects combine the aspects of each of those card types, and are subject to spells and abilities that affect either or all of those card types.
1345 1345
1346 300.2a An object that’s both a land and anothe cad type (fo example, an atifact land) can only be played as a land. It can’t be cast as a spell. 1346 300.2a An object that’s both a land and another card type (for example, an artifact land) can only be played as a land. It can’t be cast as a spell.
1347 1347
1348 300.2b Each tibal cad has anothe cad type. Casting and esolving a tibal cad follow the ules fo casting and esolving a cad of the othe cad type. 1348 300.2b Each tribal card has another card type. Casting and resolving a tribal card follow the rules for casting and resolving a card of the other card type.
1349 1349
1350 301. Atifacts 1350 301. Artifacts
1351 1351
1352 301.1. A playe who has pioity may cast an atifact cad fom thei hand duing a main phase of thei tun when the stack is empty. Casting an atifact as a spell uses the stack. (See ule 601, “Casting Spells.”) 1352 301.1. A player who has priority may cast an artifact card from their hand during a main phase of their turn when the stack is empty. Casting an artifact as a spell uses the stack. (See rule 601, “Casting Spells.”)
1353 1353
1354 301.2. When an atifact spell esolves, its contolle puts it onto the battlefield unde thei contol. 1354 301.2. When an artifact spell resolves, its controller puts it onto the battlefield under their control.
1355 1355
1356 301.3. Atifact subtypes ae always a single wod and ae listed afte a long dash: “Atifact — Equipment.” Atifact subtypes ae also called atifact types. Atifacts may have multiple subtypes. See ule 205.3g fo the complete list of atifact types. 1356 301.3. Artifact subtypes are always a single word and are listed after a long dash: “Artifact — Equipment.” Artifact subtypes are also called artifact types. Artifacts may have multiple subtypes. See rule 205.3g for the complete list of artifact types.
1357 1357
1358 301.4. Atifacts have no chaacteistics specific to thei cad type. Most atifacts have no coloed mana symbols in thei mana costs, and ae theefoe cololess. Howeve, thee is no coelation between being cololess and being an atifact: atifacts may be coloed, and cololess objects may be cad types othe than atifact. 1358 301.4. Artifacts have no characteristics specific to their card type. Most artifacts have no colored mana symbols in their mana costs, and are therefore colorless. However, there is no correlation between being colorless and being an artifact: artifacts may be colored, and colorless objects may be card types other than artifact.
1359 1359
1360 301.5. Some atifacts have the subtype “Equipment.” An Equipment can be attached to a ceatue. It can’t legally be attached to anything that isn’t a ceatue. 1360 301.5. Some artifacts have the subtype “Equipment.” An Equipment can be attached to a creature. It can’t legally be attached to anything that isn’t a creature.
1361 1361
1362 301.5a The ceatue an Equipment is attached to is called the “equipped ceatue.” The Equipment is attached to, o “equips,” that ceatue. 1362 301.5a The creature an Equipment is attached to is called the “equipped creature.” The Equipment is attached to, or “equips,” that creature.
1363 1363
1364 301.5b An Equipment is cast and entes the battlefield just like any othe atifact. An Equipment doesn’t ente the battlefield attached to a ceatue. The equip keywod ability attaches the Equipment to a ceatue you contol (see ule 702.6, “Equip”). Contol of the ceatue mattes only when the equip ability is activated and when it esolves. Spells and othe abilities may also attach an Equipment to a ceatue. If an effect attempts to attach an Equipment to an object that can’t be equipped by it, the Equipment doesn’t move. 1364 301.5b An Equipment is cast and enters the battlefield just like any other artifact. An Equipment doesn’t enter the battlefield attached to a creature. The equip keyword ability attaches the Equipment to a creature you control (see rule 702.6, “Equip”). Control of the creature matters only when the equip ability is activated and when it resolves. Spells and other abilities may also attach an Equipment to a creature. If an effect attempts to attach an Equipment to an object that can’t be equipped by it, the Equipment doesn’t move.
1365 1365
1366 301.5c An Equipment that’s also a ceatue can’t equip a ceatue. An Equipment that loses the subtype “Equipment” can’t equip a ceatue. An Equipment can’t equip itself. An Equipment that equips an illegal o nonexistent pemanent becomes unattached fom that pemanent but emains on the battlefield. (This is a state-based action. See ule 704.) An Equipment can’t equip moe than one ceatue. If a spell o ability would cause an Equipment to equip moe than one ceatue, the Equipment’s contolle chooses which ceatue it equips. 1366 301.5c An Equipment that’s also a creature can’t equip a creature. An Equipment that loses the subtype “Equipment” can’t equip a creature. An Equipment can’t equip itself. An Equipment that equips an illegal or nonexistent permanent becomes unattached from that permanent but remains on the battlefield. (This is a state-based action. See rule 704.) An Equipment can’t equip more than one creature. If a spell or ability would cause an Equipment to equip more than one creature, the Equipment’s controller chooses which creature it equips.
1367 1367
1368 301.5d An Equipment’s contolle is sepaate fom the equipped ceatue’s contolle; the two need not be the same. Changing contol of the ceatue doesn’t change contol of the Equipment, and vice vesa. Only the Equipment’s contolle can activate its abilities. Howeve, if the Equipment gants an ability to the equipped ceatue (with “gains” o “has”), the equipped ceatue’s contolle is the only one who can activate that ability. 1368 301.5d An Equipment’s controller is separate from the equipped creature’s controller; the two need not be the same. Changing control of the creature doesn’t change control of the Equipment, and vice versa. Only the Equipment’s controller can activate its abilities. However, if the Equipment grants an ability to the equipped creature (with “gains” or “has”), the equipped creature’s controller is the only one who can activate that ability.
1369 1369
1370 301.5e An ability of a pemanent that efes to the “equipped ceatue” efes to whateve ceatue that pemanent is attached to, even if the pemanent with the ability isn’t an Equipment. 1370 301.5e An ability of a permanent that refers to the “equipped creature” refers to whatever creature that permanent is attached to, even if the permanent with the ability isn’t an Equipment.
1371 1371
1372 301.6. Some atifacts have the subtype “Fotification.” A Fotification can be attached to a land. It can’t legally be attached to an object that isn’t a land. Fotification’s analog to the equip keywod ability is the fotify keywod ability. Rules 301.5a–e apply to Fotifications in elation to lands just as they apply to Equipment in elation to ceatues, with one claification elating to ule 301.5c: a Fotification that’s also a ceatue (not a land) can’t fotify a land. (See ule 702.66, “Fotify.”) 1372 301.6. Some artifacts have the subtype “Fortification.” A Fortification can be attached to a land. It can’t legally be attached to an object that isn’t a land. Fortification’s analog to the equip keyword ability is the fortify keyword ability. Rules 301.5a–e apply to Fortifications in relation to lands just as they apply to Equipment in relation to creatures, with one clarification relating to rule 301.5c: a Fortification that’s also a creature (not a land) can’t fortify a land. (See rule 702.66, “Fortify.”)
1373 1373
1374 301.7. Some atifacts have the subtype “Vehicle.” Vehicles have a cew ability, which allows them to become atifact ceatues. See ule 702.121, “Cew.” 1374 301.7. Some artifacts have the subtype “Vehicle.” Vehicles have a crew ability, which allows them to become artifact creatures. See rule 702.121, “Crew.”
1375 1375
1376 301.7a Each Vehicle has a pinted powe and toughness, but it has these chaacteistics only if it’s also a ceatue. See ule 208.3. 1376 301.7a Each Vehicle has a printed power and toughness, but it has these characteristics only if it’s also a creature. See rule 208.3.
1377 1377
1378 301.7b If a Vehicle becomes a ceatue, it immediately has its pinted powe and toughness. Othe effects, including the effect that makes it a ceatue, may modify these values o set them to diffeent values. 1378 301.7b If a Vehicle becomes a creature, it immediately has its printed power and toughness. Other effects, including the effect that makes it a creature, may modify these values or set them to different values.
1379 1379
1380 302. Ceatues 1380 302. Creatures
1381 1381
1382 302.1. A playe who has pioity may cast a ceatue cad fom thei hand duing a main phase of thei tun when the stack is empty. Casting a ceatue as a spell uses the stack. (See ule 601, “Casting Spells.”) 1382 302.1. A player who has priority may cast a creature card from their hand during a main phase of their turn when the stack is empty. Casting a creature as a spell uses the stack. (See rule 601, “Casting Spells.”)
1383 1383
1384 302.2. When a ceatue spell esolves, its contolle puts it onto the battlefield unde thei contol. 1384 302.2. When a creature spell resolves, its controller puts it onto the battlefield under their control.
1385 1385
1386 302.3. Ceatue subtypes ae always a single wod and ae listed afte a long dash: “Ceatue — Human Soldie,” “Atifact Ceatue — Golem,” and so on. Ceatue subtypes ae also called ceatue types. Ceatues may have multiple subtypes. See ule 205.3m fo the complete list of ceatue types. 1386 302.3. Creature subtypes are always a single word and are listed after a long dash: “Creature — Human Soldier,” “Artifact Creature — Golem,” and so on. Creature subtypes are also called creature types. Creatures may have multiple subtypes. See rule 205.3m for the complete list of creature types.
1387 Example: “Ceatue — Goblin Wizad” means the cad is a ceatue with the subtypes Goblin and Wizad. 1387 Example: “Creature — Goblin Wizard” means the card is a creature with the subtypes Goblin and Wizard.
1388 1388
1389 302.4. Powe and toughness ae chaacteistics only ceatues have. 1389 302.4. Power and toughness are characteristics only creatures have.
1390 1390
1391 302.4a A ceatue’s powe is the amount of damage it deals in combat. 1391 302.4a A creature’s power is the amount of damage it deals in combat.
1392 1392
1393 302.4b A ceatue’s toughness is the amount of damage needed to destoy it. 1393 302.4b A creature’s toughness is the amount of damage needed to destroy it.
1394 1394
1395 302.4c To detemine a ceatue’s powe and toughness, stat with the numbes pinted in its lowe ight cone, then apply any applicable continuous effects. (See ule 613, “Inteaction of Continuous Effects.”) 1395 302.4c To determine a creature’s power and toughness, start with the numbers printed in its lower right corner, then apply any applicable continuous effects. (See rule 613, “Interaction of Continuous Effects.”)
1396 1396
1397 302.5. Ceatues can attack and block. (See ule 508, “Declae Attackes Step,” and ule 509, “Declae Blockes Step.”) 1397 302.5. Creatures can attack and block. (See rule 508, “Declare Attackers Step,” and rule 509, “Declare Blockers Step.”)
1398 1398
1399 302.6. A ceatue’s activated ability with the tap symbol o the untap symbol in its activation cost can’t be activated unless the ceatue has been unde its contolle’s contol continuously since thei most ecent tun began. A ceatue can’t attack unless it has been unde its contolle’s contol continuously since thei most ecent tun began. This ule is infomally called the “summoning sickness” ule. 1399 302.6. A creature’s activated ability with the tap symbol or the untap symbol in its activation cost can’t be activated unless the creature has been under its controller’s control continuously since their most recent turn began. A creature can’t attack unless it has been under its controller’s control continuously since their most recent turn began. This rule is informally called the “summoning sickness” rule.
1400 1400
1401 302.7. Damage dealt to a ceatue by a souce with neithe withe no infect is maked on that ceatue (see ule 120.3). If the total damage maked on that ceatue is geate than o equal to its toughness, that ceatue has been dealt lethal damage and is destoyed as a state-based action (see ule 704). All damage maked on a ceatue is emoved when it egeneates (see ule 701.14, “Regeneate”) and duing the cleanup step (see ule 514.2). 1401 302.7. Damage dealt to a creature by a source with neither wither nor infect is marked on that creature (see rule 120.3). If the total damage marked on that creature is greater than or equal to its toughness, that creature has been dealt lethal damage and is destroyed as a state-based action (see rule 704). All damage marked on a creature is removed when it regenerates (see rule 701.14, “Regenerate”) and during the cleanup step (see rule 514.2).
1402 1402
1403 303. Enchantments 1403 303. Enchantments
1404 1404
1405 303.1. A playe who has pioity may cast an enchantment cad fom thei hand duing a main phase of thei tun when the stack is empty. Casting an enchantment as a spell uses the stack. (See ule 601, “Casting Spells.”) 1405 303.1. A player who has priority may cast an enchantment card from their hand during a main phase of their turn when the stack is empty. Casting an enchantment as a spell uses the stack. (See rule 601, “Casting Spells.”)
1406 1406
1407 303.2. When an enchantment spell esolves, its contolle puts it onto the battlefield unde thei contol. 1407 303.2. When an enchantment spell resolves, its controller puts it onto the battlefield under their control.
1408 1408
1409 303.3. Enchantment subtypes ae always a single wod and ae listed afte a long dash: “Enchantment — Shine.” Each wod afte the dash is a sepaate subtype. Enchantment subtypes ae also called enchantment types. Enchantments may have multiple subtypes. See ule 205.3h fo the complete list of enchantment types. 1409 303.3. Enchantment subtypes are always a single word and are listed after a long dash: “Enchantment — Shrine.” Each word after the dash is a separate subtype. Enchantment subtypes are also called enchantment types. Enchantments may have multiple subtypes. See rule 205.3h for the complete list of enchantment types.
1410 1410
1411 303.4. Some enchantments have the subtype “Aua.” An Aua entes the battlefield attached to an object o playe. What an Aua can be attached to is defined by its enchant keywod ability (see ule 702.5, “Enchant”). Othe effects can limit what a pemanent can be enchanted by. 1411 303.4. Some enchantments have the subtype “Aura.” An Aura enters the battlefield attached to an object or player. What an Aura can be attached to is defined by its enchant keyword ability (see rule 702.5, “Enchant”). Other effects can limit what a permanent can be enchanted by.
1412 1412
1413 303.4a An Aua spell equies a taget, which is defined by its enchant ability. 1413 303.4a An Aura spell requires a target, which is defined by its enchant ability.
1414 1414
1415 303.4b The object o playe an Aua is attached to is called enchanted. The Aua is attached to, o “enchants,” that object o playe. 1415 303.4b The object or player an Aura is attached to is called enchanted. The Aura is attached to, or “enchants,” that object or player.
1416 1416
1417 303.4c If an Aua is enchanting an illegal object o playe as defined by its enchant ability and othe applicable effects, the object it was attached to no longe exists, o the playe it was attached to has left the game, the Aua is put into its owne’s gaveyad. (This is a state-based action. See ule 704.) 1417 303.4c If an Aura is enchanting an illegal object or player as defined by its enchant ability and other applicable effects, the object it was attached to no longer exists, or the player it was attached to has left the game, the Aura is put into its owner’s graveyard. (This is a state-based action. See rule 704.)
1418 1418
1419 303.4d An Aua can’t enchant itself. If this occus somehow, the Aua is put into its owne’s gaveyad. An Aua that’s also a ceatue can’t enchant anything. If this occus somehow, the Aua becomes unattached, then is put into its owne’s gaveyad. (These ae state-based actions. See ule 704.) An Aua can’t enchant moe than one object o playe. If a spell o ability would cause an Aua to become attached to moe than one object o playe, the Aua’s contolle chooses which object o playe it becomes attached to. 1419 303.4d An Aura can’t enchant itself. If this occurs somehow, the Aura is put into its owner’s graveyard. An Aura that’s also a creature can’t enchant anything. If this occurs somehow, the Aura becomes unattached, then is put into its owner’s graveyard. (These are state-based actions. See rule 704.) An Aura can’t enchant more than one object or player. If a spell or ability would cause an Aura to become attached to more than one object or player, the Aura’s controller chooses which object or player it becomes attached to.
1420 1420
1421 303.4e An Aua’s contolle is sepaate fom the enchanted object’s contolle o the enchanted playe; the two need not be the same. If an Aua enchants an object, changing contol of the object doesn’t change contol of the Aua, and vice vesa. Only the Aua’s contolle can activate its abilities. Howeve, if the Aua gants an ability to the enchanted object (with “gains” o “has”), the enchanted object’s contolle is the only one who can activate that ability. 1421 303.4e An Aura’s controller is separate from the enchanted object’s controller or the enchanted player; the two need not be the same. If an Aura enchants an object, changing control of the object doesn’t change control of the Aura, and vice versa. Only the Aura’s controller can activate its abilities. However, if the Aura grants an ability to the enchanted object (with “gains” or “has”), the enchanted object’s controller is the only one who can activate that ability.
1422 1422
1423 303.4f If an Aua is enteing the battlefield unde a playe’s contol by any means othe than by esolving as an Aua spell, and the effect putting it onto the battlefield doesn’t specify the object o playe the Aua will enchant, that playe chooses what it will enchant as the Aua entes the battlefield. The playe must choose a legal object o playe accoding to the Aua’s enchant ability and any othe applicable effects. 1423 303.4f If an Aura is entering the battlefield under a player’s control by any means other than by resolving as an Aura spell, and the effect putting it onto the battlefield doesn’t specify the object or player the Aura will enchant, that player chooses what it will enchant as the Aura enters the battlefield. The player must choose a legal object or player according to the Aura’s enchant ability and any other applicable effects.
1424 1424
1425 303.4g If an Aua is enteing the battlefield and thee is no legal object o playe fo it to enchant, the Aua emains in its cuent zone, unless that zone is the stack. In that case, the Aua is put into its owne’s gaveyad instead of enteing the battlefield. 1425 303.4g If an Aura is entering the battlefield and there is no legal object or player for it to enchant, the Aura remains in its current zone, unless that zone is the stack. In that case, the Aura is put into its owner’s graveyard instead of entering the battlefield.
1426 1426
1427 303.4h If an effect attempts to put a pemanent that isn’t an Aua, Equipment, o Fotification onto the battlefield attached to an object o playe, it entes the battlefield unattached. 1427 303.4h If an effect attempts to put a permanent that isn’t an Aura, Equipment, or Fortification onto the battlefield attached to an object or player, it enters the battlefield unattached.
1428 1428
1429 303.4i If an effect attempts to put an Aua onto the battlefield attached to an object o playe it can’t legally enchant, the Aua emains in its cuent zone, unless that zone is the stack. In that case, the Aua is put into its owne’s gaveyad instead of enteing the battlefield. If the Aua is a token, it isn’t ceated. 1429 303.4i If an effect attempts to put an Aura onto the battlefield attached to an object or player it can’t legally enchant, the Aura remains in its current zone, unless that zone is the stack. In that case, the Aura is put into its owner’s graveyard instead of entering the battlefield. If the Aura is a token, it isn’t created.
1430 1430
1431 303.4j If an effect attempts to attach an Aua on the battlefield to an object o playe it can’t legally enchant, the Aua doesn’t move. 1431 303.4j If an effect attempts to attach an Aura on the battlefield to an object or player it can’t legally enchant, the Aura doesn’t move.
1432 1432
1433 303.4k If an effect allows an Aua that’s being tuned face up to become attached to an object o playe, the Aua’s contolle consides the chaacteistics of that Aua as it would exist if it wee face up to detemine what it may be attached to, and they must choose a legal object o playe accoding to the Aua’s enchant ability and any othe applicable effects. 1433 303.4k If an effect allows an Aura that’s being turned face up to become attached to an object or player, the Aura’s controller considers the characteristics of that Aura as it would exist if it were face up to determine what it may be attached to, and they must choose a legal object or player according to the Aura’s enchant ability and any other applicable effects.
1434 1434
1435 303.4m An ability of a pemanent that efes to the “enchanted [object o playe]” efes to whateve object o playe that pemanent is attached to, even if the pemanent with the ability isn’t an Aua. 1435 303.4m An ability of a permanent that refers to the “enchanted [object or player]” refers to whatever object or player that permanent is attached to, even if the permanent with the ability isn’t an Aura.
1436 1436
1437 303.5. Some enchantments have the subtype “Saga.” See ule 714 fo moe infomation about Saga cads. 1437 303.5. Some enchantments have the subtype “Saga.” See rule 714 for more information about Saga cards.
1438 1438
1439 304. Instants 1439 304. Instants
1440 1440
1441 304.1. A playe who has pioity may cast an instant cad fom thei hand. Casting an instant as a spell uses the stack. (See ule 601, “Casting Spells.”) 1441 304.1. A player who has priority may cast an instant card from their hand. Casting an instant as a spell uses the stack. (See rule 601, “Casting Spells.”)
1442 1442
1443 304.2. When an instant spell esolves, the actions stated in its ules text ae followed. Then it’s put into its owne’s gaveyad. 1443 304.2. When an instant spell resolves, the actions stated in its rules text are followed. Then it’s put into its owner’s graveyard.
1444 1444
1445 304.3. Instant subtypes ae always a single wod and ae listed afte a long dash: “Instant — Acane.” Each wod afte the dash is a sepaate subtype. The set of instant subtypes is the same as the set of socey subtypes; these subtypes ae called spell types. Instants may have multiple subtypes. See ule 205.3k fo the complete list of spell types. 1445 304.3. Instant subtypes are always a single word and are listed after a long dash: “Instant — Arcane.” Each word after the dash is a separate subtype. The set of instant subtypes is the same as the set of sorcery subtypes; these subtypes are called spell types. Instants may have multiple subtypes. See rule 205.3k for the complete list of spell types.
1446 1446
1447 304.4. Instants can’t ente the battlefield. If an instant would ente the battlefield, it emains in its pevious zone instead. 1447 304.4. Instants can’t enter the battlefield. If an instant would enter the battlefield, it remains in its previous zone instead.
1448 1448
1449 304.5. If text states that a playe may do something “any time they could cast an instant,” it means only that the playe must have pioity. The playe doesn’t need to have an instant they could cast. Effects that would peclude that playe fom casting a spell o casting an instant don’t affect the playe’s capability to pefom that action (unless the action is actually casting a spell o casting an instant). 1449 304.5. If text states that a player may do something “any time they could cast an instant,” it means only that the player must have priority. The player doesn’t need to have an instant they could cast. Effects that would preclude that player from casting a spell or casting an instant don’t affect the player’s capability to perform that action (unless the action is actually casting a spell or casting an instant).
1450 1450
1451 305. Lands 1451 305. Lands
1452 1452
1453 305.1. A playe who has pioity may play a land cad fom thei hand duing a main phase of thei tun when the stack is empty. Playing a land is a special action; it doesn’t use the stack (see ule 116). Rathe, the playe simply puts the land onto the battlefield. Since the land doesn’t go on the stack, it is neve a spell, and playes can’t espond to it with instants o activated abilities. 1453 305.1. A player who has priority may play a land card from their hand during a main phase of their turn when the stack is empty. Playing a land is a special action; it doesn’t use the stack (see rule 116). Rather, the player simply puts the land onto the battlefield. Since the land doesn’t go on the stack, it is never a spell, and players can’t respond to it with instants or activated abilities.
1454 1454
1455 305.2. A playe can nomally play one land duing thei tun; howeve, continuous effects may incease this numbe. 1455 305.2. A player can normally play one land during their turn; however, continuous effects may increase this number.
1456 1456
1457 305.2a To detemine whethe a playe can play a land, compae the numbe of lands the playe can play this tun with the numbe of lands they have aleady played this tun (including lands played as special actions and lands played duing the esolution of spells and abilities). If the numbe of lands the playe can play is geate, the play is legal. 1457 305.2a To determine whether a player can play a land, compare the number of lands the player can play this turn with the number of lands they have already played this turn (including lands played as special actions and lands played during the resolution of spells and abilities). If the number of lands the player can play is greater, the play is legal.
1458 1458
1459 305.2b A playe can’t play a land, fo any eason, if the numbe of lands the playe can play this tun is equal to o less than the numbe of lands they have aleady played this tun. Ignoe any pat of an effect that instucts a playe to do so. 1459 305.2b A player can’t play a land, for any reason, if the number of lands the player can play this turn is equal to or less than the number of lands they have already played this turn. Ignore any part of an effect that instructs a player to do so.
1460 1460
1461 305.3. A playe can’t play a land, fo any eason, if it isn’t thei tun. Ignoe any pat of an effect that instucts a playe to do so. 1461 305.3. A player can’t play a land, for any reason, if it isn’t their turn. Ignore any part of an effect that instructs a player to do so.
1462 1462
1463 305.4. Effects may also allow playes to “put” lands onto the battlefield. This isn’t the same as “playing a land” and doesn’t count as a land played duing the cuent tun. 1463 305.4. Effects may also allow players to “put” lands onto the battlefield. This isn’t the same as “playing a land” and doesn’t count as a land played during the current turn.
1464 1464
1465 305.5. Land subtypes ae always a single wod and ae listed afte a long dash. Land subtypes ae also called land types. Lands may have multiple subtypes. See ule 205.3i fo the complete list of land types. 1465 305.5. Land subtypes are always a single word and are listed after a long dash. Land subtypes are also called land types. Lands may have multiple subtypes. See rule 205.3i for the complete list of land types.
1466 Example: “Basic Land — Mountain” means the cad is a land with the subtype Mountain. 1466 Example: “Basic Land — Mountain” means the card is a land with the subtype Mountain.
1467 1467
1468 305.6. The basic land types ae Plains, Island, Swamp, Mountain, and Foest. If an object uses the wods “basic land type,” it’s efeing to one of these subtypes. A land with a basic land type has the intinsic ability “{T}: Add [mana symbol],” even if the text box doesn’t actually contain that text o the object has no text box. Fo Plains, [mana symbol] is {W}; fo Islands, {U}; fo Swamps, {B}; fo Mountains, {R}; and fo Foests, {G}. See ule 107.4a. See also ule 605, “Mana Abilities.” 1468 305.6. The basic land types are Plains, Island, Swamp, Mountain, and Forest. If an object uses the words “basic land type,” it’s referring to one of these subtypes. A land with a basic land type has the intrinsic ability “{T}: Add [mana symbol],” even if the text box doesn’t actually contain that text or the object has no text box. For Plains, [mana symbol] is {W}; for Islands, {U}; for Swamps, {B}; for Mountains, {R}; and for Forests, {G}. See rule 107.4a. See also rule 605, “Mana Abilities.”
1469 1469
1470 305.7. If an effect sets a land’s subtype to one o moe of the basic land types, the land no longe has its old land type. It loses all abilities geneated fom its ules text, its old land types, and any copy effects affecting that land, and it gains the appopiate mana ability fo each new basic land type. Note that this doesn’t emove any abilities that wee ganted to the land by othe effects. Setting a land’s subtype doesn’t add o emove any cad types (such as ceatue) o supetypes (such as basic, legenday, and snow) the land may have. If a land gains one o moe land types in addition to its own, it keeps its land types and ules text, and it gains the new land types and mana abilities. 1470 305.7. If an effect sets a land’s subtype to one or more of the basic land types, the land no longer has its old land type. It loses all abilities generated from its rules text, its old land types, and any copy effects affecting that land, and it gains the appropriate mana ability for each new basic land type. Note that this doesn’t remove any abilities that were granted to the land by other effects. Setting a land’s subtype doesn’t add or remove any card types (such as creature) or supertypes (such as basic, legendary, and snow) the land may have. If a land gains one or more land types in addition to its own, it keeps its land types and rules text, and it gains the new land types and mana abilities.
1471 1471
1472 305.8. Any land with the supetype “basic” is a basic land. Any land that doesn’t have this supetype is a nonbasic land, even if it has a basic land type. 1472 305.8. Any land with the supertype “basic” is a basic land. Any land that doesn’t have this supertype is a nonbasic land, even if it has a basic land type.
1473 1473
1474 305.9. If an object is both a land and anothe cad type, it can be played only as a land. It can’t be cast as a spell. 1474 305.9. If an object is both a land and another card type, it can be played only as a land. It can’t be cast as a spell.
1475 1475
1476 306. Planeswalkes 1476 306. Planeswalkers
1477 1477
1478 306.1. A playe who has pioity may cast a planeswalke cad fom thei hand duing a main phase of thei tun when the stack is empty. Casting a planeswalke as a spell uses the stack. (See ule 601, “Casting Spells.”) 1478 306.1. A player who has priority may cast a planeswalker card from their hand during a main phase of their turn when the stack is empty. Casting a planeswalker as a spell uses the stack. (See rule 601, “Casting Spells.”)
1479 1479
1480 306.2. When a planeswalke spell esolves, its contolle puts it onto the battlefield unde thei contol. 1480 306.2. When a planeswalker spell resolves, its controller puts it onto the battlefield under their control.
1481 1481
1482 306.3. Planeswalke subtypes ae always a single wod and ae listed afte a long dash: “Planeswalke — Jace.” Each wod afte the dash is a sepaate subtype. Planeswalke subtypes ae also called planeswalke types. Planeswalkes may have multiple subtypes. See ule 205.3j fo the complete list of planeswalke types. 1482 306.3. Planeswalker subtypes are always a single word and are listed after a long dash: “Planeswalker — Jace.” Each word after the dash is a separate subtype. Planeswalker subtypes are also called planeswalker types. Planeswalkers may have multiple subtypes. See rule 205.3j for the complete list of planeswalker types.
1483 1483
1484 306.4. Peviously, planeswalkes wee subject to a “planeswalke uniqueness ule” that stopped a playe fom contolling two planeswalkes of the same planeswalke type. This ule has been emoved and planeswalke cads pinted befoe this change have eceived eata in the Oacle cad efeence to have the legenday supetype. Like othe legenday pemanents, they ae subject to the “legend ule” (see ule 704.5j). 1484 306.4. Previously, planeswalkers were subject to a “planeswalker uniqueness rule” that stopped a player from controlling two planeswalkers of the same planeswalker type. This rule has been removed and planeswalker cards printed before this change have received errata in the Oracle card reference to have the legendary supertype. Like other legendary permanents, they are subject to the “legend rule” (see rule 704.5j).
1485 1485
1486 306.5. Loyalty is a chaacteistic only planeswalkes have. 1486 306.5. Loyalty is a characteristic only planeswalkers have.
1487 1487
1488 306.5a The loyalty of a planeswalke cad not on the battlefield is equal to the numbe pinted in its lowe ight cone. 1488 306.5a The loyalty of a planeswalker card not on the battlefield is equal to the number printed in its lower right corner.
1489 1489
1490 306.5b A planeswalke has the intinsic ability “This pemanent entes the battlefield with a numbe of loyalty countes on it equal to its pinted loyalty numbe.” This ability ceates a eplacement effect (see ule 614.1c). 1490 306.5b A planeswalker has the intrinsic ability “This permanent enters the battlefield with a number of loyalty counters on it equal to its printed loyalty number.” This ability creates a replacement effect (see rule 614.1c).
1491 1491
1492 306.5c The loyalty of a planeswalke on the battlefield is equal to the numbe of loyalty countes on it. 1492 306.5c The loyalty of a planeswalker on the battlefield is equal to the number of loyalty counters on it.
1493 1493
1494 306.5d Each planeswalke has a numbe of loyalty abilities, which ae activated abilities with loyalty symbols in thei costs. Loyalty abilities follow special ules: A playe may activate a loyalty ability of a pemanent they contol any time they have pioity and the stack is empty duing a main phase of thei tun, but only if none of that pemanent’s loyalty abilities have been activated that tun. See ule 606, “Loyalty Abilities.” 1494 306.5d Each planeswalker has a number of loyalty abilities, which are activated abilities with loyalty symbols in their costs. Loyalty abilities follow special rules: A player may activate a loyalty ability of a permanent they control any time they have priority and the stack is empty during a main phase of their turn, but only if none of that permanent’s loyalty abilities have been activated that turn. See rule 606, “Loyalty Abilities.”
1495 1495
1496 306.6. Planeswalkes can be attacked. (See ule 508, “Declae Attackes Step.”) 1496 306.6. Planeswalkers can be attacked. (See rule 508, “Declare Attackers Step.”)
1497 1497
1498 306.7. Peviously, planeswalkes wee subject to a ediection effect that allowed a playe to have noncombat damage that would be dealt to an opponent be dealt to a planeswalke unde that opponent’s contol instead. This ule has been emoved and cetain cads have eceived eata in the Oacle cad efeence to deal damage diectly to planeswalkes. 1498 306.7. Previously, planeswalkers were subject to a redirection effect that allowed a player to have noncombat damage that would be dealt to an opponent be dealt to a planeswalker under that opponent’s control instead. This rule has been removed and certain cards have received errata in the Oracle card reference to deal damage directly to planeswalkers.
1499 1499
1500 306.8. Damage dealt to a planeswalke esults in that many loyalty countes being emoved fom it. 1500 306.8. Damage dealt to a planeswalker results in that many loyalty counters being removed from it.
1501 1501
1502 306.9. If a planeswalke’s loyalty is 0, it’s put into its owne’s gaveyad. (This is a state-based action. See ule 704.) 1502 306.9. If a planeswalker’s loyalty is 0, it’s put into its owner’s graveyard. (This is a state-based action. See rule 704.)
1503 1503
1504 307. Soceies 1504 307. Sorceries
1505 1505
1506 307.1. A playe who has pioity may cast a socey cad fom thei hand duing a main phase of thei tun when the stack is empty. Casting a socey as a spell uses the stack. (See ule 601, “Casting Spells.”) 1506 307.1. A player who has priority may cast a sorcery card from their hand during a main phase of their turn when the stack is empty. Casting a sorcery as a spell uses the stack. (See rule 601, “Casting Spells.”)
1507 1507
1508 307.2. When a socey spell esolves, the actions stated in its ules text ae followed. Then it’s put into its owne’s gaveyad. 1508 307.2. When a sorcery spell resolves, the actions stated in its rules text are followed. Then it’s put into its owner’s graveyard.
1509 1509
1510 307.3. Socey subtypes ae always a single wod and ae listed afte a long dash: “Socey — Acane.” Each wod afte the dash is a sepaate subtype. The set of socey subtypes is the same as the set of instant subtypes; these subtypes ae called spell types. Soceies may have multiple subtypes. See ule 205.3k fo the complete list of spell types. 1510 307.3. Sorcery subtypes are always a single word and are listed after a long dash: “Sorcery — Arcane.” Each word after the dash is a separate subtype. The set of sorcery subtypes is the same as the set of instant subtypes; these subtypes are called spell types. Sorceries may have multiple subtypes. See rule 205.3k for the complete list of spell types.
1511 1511
1512 307.4. Soceies can’t ente the battlefield. If a socey would ente the battlefield, it emains in its pevious zone instead. 1512 307.4. Sorceries can’t enter the battlefield. If a sorcery would enter the battlefield, it remains in its previous zone instead.
1513 1513
1514 307.5. If a spell, ability, o effect states that a playe can do something only “any time they could cast a socey,” it means only that the playe must have pioity, it must be duing the main phase of thei tun, and the stack must be empty. The playe doesn’t need to have a socey they could cast. Effects that would peclude that playe fom casting a spell o casting a socey don’t affect the playe’s capability to pefom that action (unless the action is actually casting a spell o casting a socey). 1514 307.5. If a spell, ability, or effect states that a player can do something only “any time they could cast a sorcery,” it means only that the player must have priority, it must be during the main phase of their turn, and the stack must be empty. The player doesn’t need to have a sorcery they could cast. Effects that would preclude that player from casting a spell or casting a sorcery don’t affect the player’s capability to perform that action (unless the action is actually casting a spell or casting a sorcery).
1515 1515
1516 307.5a Similaly, if an effect checks to see if a spell was cast “any time a socey couldn’t have been cast,” it’s checking only whethe the spell’s contolle cast it without having pioity, duing a phase othe than thei main phase, o while anothe object was on the stack. 1516 307.5a Similarly, if an effect checks to see if a spell was cast “any time a sorcery couldn’t have been cast,” it’s checking only whether the spell’s controller cast it without having priority, during a phase other than their main phase, or while another object was on the stack.
1517 1517
1518 308. Tibals 1518 308. Tribals
1519 1519
1520 308.1. Each tibal cad has anothe cad type. Casting and esolving a tibal cad follows the ules fo casting and esolving a cad of the othe cad type. 1520 308.1. Each tribal card has another card type. Casting and resolving a tribal card follows the rules for casting and resolving a card of the other card type.
1521 1521
1522 308.2. Tibal subtypes ae always a single wod and ae listed afte a long dash: “Tibal Enchantment — Mefolk.” The set of tibal subtypes is the same as the set of ceatue subtypes; these subtypes ae called ceatue types. Tibals may have multiple subtypes. See ule 205.3m fo the complete list of ceatue types. 1522 308.2. Tribal subtypes are always a single word and are listed after a long dash: “Tribal Enchantment — Merfolk.” The set of tribal subtypes is the same as the set of creature subtypes; these subtypes are called creature types. Tribals may have multiple subtypes. See rule 205.3m for the complete list of creature types.
1523 1523
1524 309. Planes 1524 309. Planes
1525 1525
1526 309.1. Plane is a cad type seen only on nontaditional Magic cads. Only the Planechase casual vaiant uses plane cads. See ule 901, “Planechase.” 1526 309.1. Plane is a card type seen only on nontraditional Magic cards. Only the Planechase casual variant uses plane cards. See rule 901, “Planechase.”
1527 1527
1528 309.2. Plane cads emain in the command zone thoughout the game, both while they’e pat of a plana deck and while they’e face up. They’e not pemanents. They can’t be cast. If a plane cad would leave the command zone, it emains in the command zone. 1528 309.2. Plane cards remain in the command zone throughout the game, both while they’re part of a planar deck and while they’re face up. They’re not permanents. They can’t be cast. If a plane card would leave the command zone, it remains in the command zone.
1529 1529
1530 309.3. Plane subtypes ae listed afte a long dash, and may be multiple wods: “Plane — Sea’s Realm.” All wods afte the dash ae, collectively, a single subtype. Plana subtypes ae called plana types. A plane can have only one subtype. See ule 205.3n fo the complete list of plana types. 1530 309.3. Plane subtypes are listed after a long dash, and may be multiple words: “Plane — Serra’s Realm.” All words after the dash are, collectively, a single subtype. Planar subtypes are called planar types. A plane can have only one subtype. See rule 205.3n for the complete list of planar types.
1531 1531
1532 309.4. A plane cad may have any numbe of static, tiggeed, and/o activated abilities. As long as a plane cad is face up in the command zone, its static abilities affect the game, its tiggeed abilities may tigge, and its activated abilities may be activated. 1532 309.4. A plane card may have any number of static, triggered, and/or activated abilities. As long as a plane card is face up in the command zone, its static abilities affect the game, its triggered abilities may trigger, and its activated abilities may be activated.
1533 1533
1534 309.5. The contolle of a face-up plane cad is the playe designated as the plana contolle. Nomally, the plana contolle is whoeve the active playe is. Howeve, if the cuent plana contolle would leave the game, instead the next playe in tun ode that wouldn’t leave the game becomes the plana contolle, then the old plana contolle leaves the game. The new plana contolle etains that designation until they leave the game o a diffeent playe becomes the active playe, whicheve comes fist. 1534 309.5. The controller of a face-up plane card is the player designated as the planar controller. Normally, the planar controller is whoever the active player is. However, if the current planar controller would leave the game, instead the next player in turn order that wouldn’t leave the game becomes the planar controller, then the old planar controller leaves the game. The new planar controller retains that designation until they leave the game or a different player becomes the active player, whichever comes first.
1535 1535
1536 309.6. A face-up plane cad that’s tuned face down becomes a new object. 1536 309.6. A face-up plane card that’s turned face down becomes a new object.
1537 1537
1538 309.7. Each plane cad has a tiggeed ability that tigges “Wheneve you oll {CHAOS}.” These ae called “chaos abilities.” Each one is indicated by a {CHAOS} to its left, though the symbol itself has no special ules meaning. 1538 309.7. Each plane card has a triggered ability that triggers “Whenever you roll {CHAOS}.” These are called “chaos abilities.” Each one is indicated by a {CHAOS} to its left, though the symbol itself has no special rules meaning.
1539 1539
1540 310. Phenomena 1540 310. Phenomena
1541 1541
1542 310.1. Phenomenon is a cad type seen only on nontaditional Magic cads. Only the Planechase casual vaiant uses phenomenon cads. See ule 901, “Planechase.” 1542 310.1. Phenomenon is a card type seen only on nontraditional Magic cards. Only the Planechase casual variant uses phenomenon cards. See rule 901, “Planechase.”
1543 1543
1544 310.2. Phenomenon cads emain in the command zone thoughout the game, both while they’e pat of a plana deck and while they’e face up. They’e not pemanents. They can’t be cast. If a phenomenon cad would leave the command zone, it emains in the command zone. 1544 310.2. Phenomenon cards remain in the command zone throughout the game, both while they’re part of a planar deck and while they’re face up. They’re not permanents. They can’t be cast. If a phenomenon card would leave the command zone, it remains in the command zone.
1545 1545
1546 310.3. Phenomenon cads have no subtypes. 1546 310.3. Phenomenon cards have no subtypes.
1547 1547
1548 310.4. The contolle of a face-up phenomenon cad is the playe designated as the plana contolle. Nomally, the plana contolle is whoeve the active playe is. Howeve, if the cuent plana contolle would leave the game, instead the next playe in tun ode that wouldn’t leave the game becomes the plana contolle, then the old plana contolle leaves the game. The new plana contolle etains that designation until they leave the game o a diffeent playe becomes the active playe, whicheve comes fist. 1548 310.4. The controller of a face-up phenomenon card is the player designated as the planar controller. Normally, the planar controller is whoever the active player is. However, if the current planar controller would leave the game, instead the next player in turn order that wouldn’t leave the game becomes the planar controller, then the old planar controller leaves the game. The new planar controller retains that designation until they leave the game or a different player becomes the active player, whichever comes first.
1549 1549
1550 310.5. Each phenomenon cad has a tiggeed ability that tigges when you encounte it. “When you encounte [this phenomenon]” means “When you move this cad off a plana deck and tun it face up.” 1550 310.5. Each phenomenon card has a triggered ability that triggers when you encounter it. “When you encounter [this phenomenon]” means “When you move this card off a planar deck and turn it face up.”
1551 1551
1552 310.6. A face-up phenomenon cad that’s tuned face down becomes a new object. 1552 310.6. A face-up phenomenon card that’s turned face down becomes a new object.
1553 1553
1554 310.7. If a phenomenon cad is face up in the command zone, and it isn’t the souce of a tiggeed ability that has tiggeed but not yet left the stack, the plana contolle planeswalks the next time a playe would eceive pioity. (This is a state-based action; see ule 704. See also ule 701.23, “Planeswalk.”) 1554 310.7. If a phenomenon card is face up in the command zone, and it isn’t the source of a triggered ability that has triggered but not yet left the stack, the planar controller planeswalks the next time a player would receive priority. (This is a state-based action; see rule 704. See also rule 701.23, “Planeswalk.”)
1555 1555
1556 311. Vanguads 1556 311. Vanguards
1557 1557
1558 311.1. Vanguad is a cad type seen only on nontaditional Magic cads. Only the Vanguad casual vaiant uses vanguad cads. See ule 902, “Vanguad.” 1558 311.1. Vanguard is a card type seen only on nontraditional Magic cards. Only the Vanguard casual variant uses vanguard cards. See rule 902, “Vanguard.”
1559 1559
1560 311.2. Vanguad cads emain in the command zone thoughout the game. They’e not pemanents. They can’t be cast. If a vanguad cad would leave the command zone, it emains in the command zone. 1560 311.2. Vanguard cards remain in the command zone throughout the game. They’re not permanents. They can’t be cast. If a vanguard card would leave the command zone, it remains in the command zone.
1561 1561
1562 311.3. Vanguad cads have no subtypes. 1562 311.3. Vanguard cards have no subtypes.
1563 1563
1564 311.4. A vanguad cad may have any numbe of static, tiggeed, and/o activated abilities. As long as a vanguad cad is in the command zone, its static abilities affect the game, its tiggeed abilities may tigge, and its activated abilities may be activated. 1564 311.4. A vanguard card may have any number of static, triggered, and/or activated abilities. As long as a vanguard card is in the command zone, its static abilities affect the game, its triggered abilities may trigger, and its activated abilities may be activated.
1565 1565
1566 311.5. The owne of a vanguad cad is the playe who stated the game with it in the command zone. The contolle of a face-up vanguad cad is its owne. 1566 311.5. The owner of a vanguard card is the player who started the game with it in the command zone. The controller of a face-up vanguard card is its owner.
1567 1567
1568 311.6. Each vanguad cad has a hand modifie pinted in its lowe left cone. This is a numbe peceded by a plus sign, a numbe peceded by a minus sign, o a zeo. This modifie is applied to the stating hand size and maximum hand size of the vanguad cad’s owne (nomally seven). The esulting numbe is both how many cads that playe daws at the beginning of the game and thei maximum hand size. 1568 311.6. Each vanguard card has a hand modifier printed in its lower left corner. This is a number preceded by a plus sign, a number preceded by a minus sign, or a zero. This modifier is applied to the starting hand size and maximum hand size of the vanguard card’s owner (normally seven). The resulting number is both how many cards that player draws at the beginning of the game and their maximum hand size.
1569 1569
1570 311.7. Each vanguad cad has a life modifie pinted in its lowe ight cone. This is a numbe peceded by a plus sign, a numbe peceded by a minus sign, o a zeo. This modifie is applied as the stating life total of the vanguad cad’s owne (nomally 20) to is detemined. See ule 103.3. 1570 311.7. Each vanguard card has a life modifier printed in its lower right corner. This is a number preceded by a plus sign, a number preceded by a minus sign, or a zero. This modifier is applied as the starting life total of the vanguard card’s owner (normally 20) to is determined. See rule 103.3.
1571 1571
1572 312. Schemes 1572 312. Schemes
1573 1573
1574 312.1. Scheme is a cad type seen only on nontaditional Magic cads. Only the Achenemy casual vaiant uses scheme cads. See ule 904, “Achenemy.” 1574 312.1. Scheme is a card type seen only on nontraditional Magic cards. Only the Archenemy casual variant uses scheme cards. See rule 904, “Archenemy.”
1575 1575
1576 312.2. Scheme cads emain in the command zone thoughout the game, both while they’e pat of a scheme deck and while they’e face up. They’e not pemanents. They can’t be cast. If a scheme cad would leave the command zone, it emains in the command zone. 1576 312.2. Scheme cards remain in the command zone throughout the game, both while they’re part of a scheme deck and while they’re face up. They’re not permanents. They can’t be cast. If a scheme card would leave the command zone, it remains in the command zone.
1577 1577
1578 312.3. Scheme cads have no subtypes. 1578 312.3. Scheme cards have no subtypes.
1579 1579
1580 312.4. A scheme cad may have any numbe of static, tiggeed, and/o activated abilities. As long as a scheme cad is face up in the command zone, its static abilities affect the game, its tiggeed abilities may tigge, and its activated abilities may be activated. 1580 312.4. A scheme card may have any number of static, triggered, and/or activated abilities. As long as a scheme card is face up in the command zone, its static abilities affect the game, its triggered abilities may trigger, and its activated abilities may be activated.
1581 1581
1582 312.5. The owne of a scheme cad is the playe who stated the game with it in the command zone. The contolle of a face-up scheme cad is its owne. 1582 312.5. The owner of a scheme card is the player who started the game with it in the command zone. The controller of a face-up scheme card is its owner.
1583 1583
1584 312.6. If a non-ongoing scheme cad is face up in the command zone, and no tiggeed abilities of any scheme ae on the stack o waiting to be put on the stack, that scheme cad is tuned face down and put on the bottom of its owne’s scheme deck the next time a playe would eceive pioity. (This is a state-based action. See ule 704.) 1584 312.6. If a non-ongoing scheme card is face up in the command zone, and no triggered abilities of any scheme are on the stack or waiting to be put on the stack, that scheme card is turned face down and put on the bottom of its owner’s scheme deck the next time a player would receive priority. (This is a state-based action. See rule 704.)
1585 1585
1586 312.7. If an ability of a scheme cad includes the text “this scheme,” it means the scheme cad in the command zone that’s the souce of that ability. This is an exception to ule 109.2. 1586 312.7. If an ability of a scheme card includes the text “this scheme,” it means the scheme card in the command zone that’s the source of that ability. This is an exception to rule 109.2.
1587 1587
1588 313. Conspiacies 1588 313. Conspiracies
1589 1589
1590 313.1. Conspiacy cads ae used only in limited play, paticulaly in the Conspiacy Daft vaiant (see ule 905). Conspiacy cads aen’t used in constucted play. 1590 313.1. Conspiracy cards are used only in limited play, particularly in the Conspiracy Draft variant (see rule 905). Conspiracy cards aren’t used in constructed play.
1591 1591
1592 313.2. At the stat of a game, befoe decks ae shuffled, each playe may put any numbe of conspiacy cads fom thei sideboad into the command zone. Conspiacy cads with hidden agenda ae put into the command zone face down. (See ule 702.105, “Hidden Agenda.”) 1592 313.2. At the start of a game, before decks are shuffled, each player may put any number of conspiracy cards from their sideboard into the command zone. Conspiracy cards with hidden agenda are put into the command zone face down. (See rule 702.105, “Hidden Agenda.”)
1593 1593
1594 313.3. Conspiacy cads emain in the command zone thoughout the game. They’e not pemanents. They can’t be cast o included in a deck. If a conspiacy cad would leave the command zone, it emains in the command zone. Conspiacy cads that aen’t in the game can’t be bought into the game. 1594 313.3. Conspiracy cards remain in the command zone throughout the game. They’re not permanents. They can’t be cast or included in a deck. If a conspiracy card would leave the command zone, it remains in the command zone. Conspiracy cards that aren’t in the game can’t be brought into the game.
1595 1595
1596 313.4. Conspiacy cads have no subtypes. 1596 313.4. Conspiracy cards have no subtypes.
1597 1597
1598 313.5. Conspiacy cads may have any numbe of static o tiggeed abilities. As long as a conspiacy cad is face up in the command zone, its static abilities affect the game, and its tiggeed abilities may tigge. 1598 313.5. Conspiracy cards may have any number of static or triggered abilities. As long as a conspiracy card is face up in the command zone, its static abilities affect the game, and its triggered abilities may trigger.
1599 1599
1600 313.5a Abilities of conspiacy cads may affect the stat-of-game pocedue. 1600 313.5a Abilities of conspiracy cards may affect the start-of-game procedure.
1601 1601
1602 313.5b Face-down conspiacy cads have no chaacteistics. 1602 313.5b Face-down conspiracy cards have no characteristics.
1603 1603
1604 313.6. The owne of a conspiacy cad is the playe who put it into the command zone at the stat of the game. The contolle of a conspiacy cad is its owne. 1604 313.6. The owner of a conspiracy card is the player who put it into the command zone at the start of the game. The controller of a conspiracy card is its owner.
1605 1605
1606 313.7. At any time, you may look at a face-down conspiacy cad you contol. You can’t look at face-down conspiacy cads contolled by othe playes. 1606 313.7. At any time, you may look at a face-down conspiracy card you control. You can’t look at face-down conspiracy cards controlled by other players.
1607 1607
1608 1608
1609 4. Zones 1609 4. Zones
1610 1610
1611 400. Geneal 1611 400. General
1612 1612
1613 400.1. A zone is a place whee objects can be duing a game. Thee ae nomally seven zones: libay, hand, battlefield, gaveyad, stack, exile, and command. Some olde cads also use the ante zone. Each playe has thei own libay, hand, and gaveyad. The othe zones ae shaed by all playes. 1613 400.1. A zone is a place where objects can be during a game. There are normally seven zones: library, hand, battlefield, graveyard, stack, exile, and command. Some older cards also use the ante zone. Each player has their own library, hand, and graveyard. The other zones are shared by all players.
1614 1614
1615 400.2. Public zones ae zones in which all playes can see the cads’ faces, except fo those cads that some ule o effect specifically allow to be face down. Gaveyad, battlefield, stack, exile, ante, and command ae public zones. Hidden zones ae zones in which not all playes can be expected to see the cads’ faces. Libay and hand ae hidden zones, even if all the cads in one such zone happen to be evealed. 1615 400.2. Public zones are zones in which all players can see the cards’ faces, except for those cards that some rule or effect specifically allow to be face down. Graveyard, battlefield, stack, exile, ante, and command are public zones. Hidden zones are zones in which not all players can be expected to see the cards’ faces. Library and hand are hidden zones, even if all the cards in one such zone happen to be revealed.
1616 1616
1617 400.3. If an object would go to any libay, gaveyad, o hand othe than its owne’s, it goes to its owne’s coesponding zone. 1617 400.3. If an object would go to any library, graveyard, or hand other than its owner’s, it goes to its owner’s corresponding zone.
1618 1618
1619 400.4. Cads with cetain cad types can’t ente cetain zones. 1619 400.4. Cards with certain card types can’t enter certain zones.
1620 1620
1621 400.4a If an instant o socey cad would ente the battlefield, it emains in its pevious zone. 1621 400.4a If an instant or sorcery card would enter the battlefield, it remains in its previous zone.
1622 1622
1623 400.4b If a conspiacy, phenomenon, plane, scheme, o vanguad cad would leave the command zone, it emains in the command zone. 1623 400.4b If a conspiracy, phenomenon, plane, scheme, or vanguard card would leave the command zone, it remains in the command zone.
1624 1624
1625 400.5. The ode of objects in a libay, in a gaveyad, o on the stack can’t be changed except when effects o ules allow it. The same is tue fo objects aanged in face-down piles in othe zones. Othe objects in othe zones can be aanged howeve thei ownes wish, although who contols those objects, whethe they’e tapped o flipped, and what othe objects ae attached to them must emain clea to all playes. 1625 400.5. The order of objects in a library, in a graveyard, or on the stack can’t be changed except when effects or rules allow it. The same is true for objects arranged in face-down piles in other zones. Other objects in other zones can be arranged however their owners wish, although who controls those objects, whether they’re tapped or flipped, and what other objects are attached to them must remain clear to all players.
1626 1626
1627 400.6. If an object would move fom one zone to anothe, detemine what event is moving the object. If the object is moving to a public zone and its owne will be able to look at it in that zone, its owne looks at it to see if it has any abilities that would affect the move. If the object is moving to the battlefield, each othe playe who will be able to look at it in that zone does so. Then any appopiate eplacement effects, whethe they come fom that object o fom elsewhee, ae applied to that event. If any effects o ules ty to do two o moe contadictoy o mutually exclusive things to a paticula object, that object’s contolle—o its owne if it has no contolle—chooses which effect to apply, and what that effect does. (Note that multiple instances of the same thing may be mutually exclusive; fo example, two simultaneous “destoy” effects.) Then the event moves the object. 1627 400.6. If an object would move from one zone to another, determine what event is moving the object. If the object is moving to a public zone and its owner will be able to look at it in that zone, its owner looks at it to see if it has any abilities that would affect the move. If the object is moving to the battlefield, each other player who will be able to look at it in that zone does so. Then any appropriate replacement effects, whether they come from that object or from elsewhere, are applied to that event. If any effects or rules try to do two or more contradictory or mutually exclusive things to a particular object, that object’s controller—or its owner if it has no controller—chooses which effect to apply, and what that effect does. (Note that multiple instances of the same thing may be mutually exclusive; for example, two simultaneous “destroy” effects.) Then the event moves the object.
1628 Example: Exquisite Achangel has an ability which eads “If you would lose the game, instead exile Exquisite Achangel and you life total becomes equal to you stating life total.” A spell deals 5 damage to a playe with 5 life and 5 damage to an Exquisite Achangel unde that playe’s contol. As state-based actions ae pefomed, that playe’s life total becomes equal to thei stating life total, and that playe chooses whethe Exquisite Achangel moves to its owne’s gaveyad o to exile. 1628 Example: Exquisite Archangel has an ability which reads “If you would lose the game, instead exile Exquisite Archangel and your life total becomes equal to your starting life total.” A spell deals 5 damage to a player with 5 life and 5 damage to an Exquisite Archangel under that player’s control. As state-based actions are performed, that player’s life total becomes equal to their starting life total, and that player chooses whether Exquisite Archangel moves to its owner’s graveyard or to exile.
1629 1629
1630 400.7. An object that moves fom one zone to anothe becomes a new object with no memoy of, o elation to, its pevious existence. Thee ae nine exceptions to this ule: 1630 400.7. An object that moves from one zone to another becomes a new object with no memory of, or relation to, its previous existence. There are nine exceptions to this rule:
1631 1631
1632 400.7a Effects fom spells, activated abilities, and tiggeed abilities that change the chaacteistics o contolle of a pemanent spell on the stack continue to apply to the pemanent that spell becomes. 1632 400.7a Effects from spells, activated abilities, and triggered abilities that change the characteristics or controller of a permanent spell on the stack continue to apply to the permanent that spell becomes.
1633 1633
1634 400.7b Pevention effects that apply to damage fom a pemanent spell on the stack continue to apply to damage fom the pemanent that spell becomes. 1634 400.7b Prevention effects that apply to damage from a permanent spell on the stack continue to apply to damage from the permanent that spell becomes.
1635 1635
1636 400.7c An ability of a pemanent can efeence infomation about the spell that became that pemanent as it esolved, including what costs wee paid to cast that spell o what mana was spent to pay those costs. 1636 400.7c An ability of a permanent can reference information about the spell that became that permanent as it resolved, including what costs were paid to cast that spell or what mana was spent to pay those costs.
1637 1637
1638 400.7d Abilities that tigge when an object moves fom one zone to anothe (fo example, “When Ranco is put into a gaveyad fom the battlefield”) can find the new object that it became in the zone it moved to when the ability tiggeed, if that zone is a public zone. 1638 400.7d Abilities that trigger when an object moves from one zone to another (for example, “When Rancor is put into a graveyard from the battlefield”) can find the new object that it became in the zone it moved to when the ability triggered, if that zone is a public zone.
1639 1639
1640 400.7e Abilities of Auas that tigge when the enchanted pemanent leaves the battlefield can find the new object that Aua became in its owne’s gaveyad if it was put into that gaveyad at the same time the enchanted pemanent left the battlefield. It can also find the new object that Aua became in its owne’s gaveyad as a esult of being put thee as a state-based action fo not being attached to a pemanent. (See ule 704.5m.) 1640 400.7e Abilities of Auras that trigger when the enchanted permanent leaves the battlefield can find the new object that Aura became in its owner’s graveyard if it was put into that graveyard at the same time the enchanted permanent left the battlefield. It can also find the new object that Aura became in its owner’s graveyard as a result of being put there as a state-based action for not being attached to a permanent. (See rule 704.5m.)
1641 1641
1642 400.7f If an effect gants a nonland cad an ability that allows it to be cast, that ability will continue to apply to the new object that cad became afte it moved to the stack as a esult of being cast this way. 1642 400.7f If an effect grants a nonland card an ability that allows it to be cast, that ability will continue to apply to the new object that card became after it moved to the stack as a result of being cast this way.
1643 1643
1644 400.7g If an effect allows a nonland cad to be cast, othe pats of that effect can find the new object that cad becomes afte it moves to the stack as a esult of being cast this way. 1644 400.7g If an effect allows a nonland card to be cast, other parts of that effect can find the new object that card becomes after it moves to the stack as a result of being cast this way.
1645 1645
1646 400.7h If an effect causes an object to move to a public zone, othe pats of that effect can find that object. If the cost of a spell o ability causes an object to move to a public zone, that spell o ability’s effects can find that object. 1646 400.7h If an effect causes an object to move to a public zone, other parts of that effect can find that object. If the cost of a spell or ability causes an object to move to a public zone, that spell or ability’s effects can find that object.
1647 1647
1648 400.7i Afte esolving a madness tiggeed ability (see ule 702.34), if the exiled cad wasn’t cast and was moved to a public zone, effects efeencing the discaded cad can find that object. 1648 400.7i After resolving a madness triggered ability (see rule 702.34), if the exiled card wasn’t cast and was moved to a public zone, effects referencing the discarded card can find that object.
1649 1649
1650 400.8. If an object in the exile zone is exiled, it doesn’t change zones, but it becomes a new object that has just been exiled. 1650 400.8. If an object in the exile zone is exiled, it doesn’t change zones, but it becomes a new object that has just been exiled.
1651 1651
1652 400.9. If a face-up object in the command zone is tuned face down, it becomes a new object. 1652 400.9. If a face-up object in the command zone is turned face down, it becomes a new object.
1653 1653
1654 400.10. An object is outside the game if it isn’t in any of the game’s zones. Outside the game is not a zone. 1654 400.10. An object is outside the game if it isn’t in any of the game’s zones. Outside the game is not a zone.
1655 1655
1656 400.10a Cads in a playe’s sideboad ae outside the game. See ule 100.4. 1656 400.10a Cards in a player’s sideboard are outside the game. See rule 100.4.
1657 1657
1658 400.10b Some effects bing cads into a game fom outside of it. Those cads emain in the game until it ends. 1658 400.10b Some effects bring cards into a game from outside of it. Those cards remain in the game until it ends.
1659 1659
1660 400.10c Cads outside the game can’t be affected by spells o abilities, except fo chaacteistic-defining abilities pinted on them (see ule 604.3) and spells and abilities that allow those cads to be bought into the game. 1660 400.10c Cards outside the game can’t be affected by spells or abilities, except for characteristic-defining abilities printed on them (see rule 604.3) and spells and abilities that allow those cards to be brought into the game.
1661 1661
1662 400.11. Some effects instuct a playe to do something to a zone (such as “Shuffle you hand into you libay”). That action is pefomed on all cads in that zone. The zone itself is not affected. 1662 400.11. Some effects instruct a player to do something to a zone (such as “Shuffle your hand into your library”). That action is performed on all cards in that zone. The zone itself is not affected.
1663 1663
1664 401. Libay 1664 401. Library
1665 1665
1666 401.1. When a game begins, each playe’s deck becomes thei libay. 1666 401.1. When a game begins, each player’s deck becomes their library.
1667 1667
1668 401.2. Each libay must be kept in a single face-down pile. Playes can’t look at o change the ode of cads in a libay. 1668 401.2. Each library must be kept in a single face-down pile. Players can’t look at or change the order of cards in a library.
1669 1669
1670 401.3. Any playe may count the numbe of cads emaining in any playe’s libay at any time. 1670 401.3. Any player may count the number of cards remaining in any player’s library at any time.
1671 1671
1672 401.4. If an effect puts two o moe cads in a specific position in a libay at the same time, the owne of those cads may aange them in any ode. That libay’s owne doesn’t eveal the ode in which the cads go into the libay. 1672 401.4. If an effect puts two or more cards in a specific position in a library at the same time, the owner of those cards may arrange them in any order. That library’s owner doesn’t reveal the order in which the cards go into the library.
1673 1673
1674 401.5. Some effects tell a playe to play with the top cad of thei libay evealed, o say that a playe may look at the top cad of thei libay. If the top cad of the playe’s libay changes while a spell is being cast, the new top cad won’t be evealed and can’t be looked at until the spell becomes cast (see ule 601.2i). The same is tue with elation to an ability being activated. 1674 401.5. Some effects tell a player to play with the top card of their library revealed, or say that a player may look at the top card of their library. If the top card of the player’s library changes while a spell is being cast, the new top card won’t be revealed and can’t be looked at until the spell becomes cast (see rule 601.2i). The same is true with relation to an ability being activated.
1675 1675
1676 401.6. If an effect causes a playe to play with the top cad of thei libay evealed, and that paticula cad stops being evealed fo any length of time befoe being evealed again, it becomes a new object. 1676 401.6. If an effect causes a player to play with the top card of their library revealed, and that particular card stops being revealed for any length of time before being revealed again, it becomes a new object.
1677 1677
1678 401.7. If an effect causes a playe to put a cad into a libay “Nth fom the top,” and that libay has fewe than N cads in it, the playe puts that cad on the bottom of that libay. 1678 401.7. If an effect causes a player to put a card into a library “Nth from the top,” and that library has fewer than N cards in it, the player puts that card on the bottom of that library.
1679 1679
1680 402. Hand 1680 402. Hand
1681 1681
1682 402.1. The hand is whee a playe holds cads that have been dawn. Cads can be put into a playe’s hand by othe effects as well. At the beginning of the game, each playe daws a numbe of cads equal to that playe’s stating hand size, nomally seven. (See ule 103, “Stating the Game.”) 1682 402.1. The hand is where a player holds cards that have been drawn. Cards can be put into a player’s hand by other effects as well. At the beginning of the game, each player draws a number of cards equal to that player’s starting hand size, normally seven. (See rule 103, “Starting the Game.”)
1683 1683
1684 402.2. Each playe has a maximum hand size, which is nomally seven cads. A playe may have any numbe of cads in thei hand, but as pat of thei cleanup step, the playe must discad excess cads down to the maximum hand size. 1684 402.2. Each player has a maximum hand size, which is normally seven cards. A player may have any number of cards in their hand, but as part of their cleanup step, the player must discard excess cards down to the maximum hand size.
1685 1685
1686 402.3. A playe may aange thei hand in any convenient fashion and look at it at any time. A playe can’t look at the cads in anothe playe’s hand but may count those cads at any time. 1686 402.3. A player may arrange their hand in any convenient fashion and look at it at any time. A player can’t look at the cards in another player’s hand but may count those cards at any time.
1687 1687
1688 403. Battlefield 1688 403. Battlefield
1689 1689
1690 403.1. Most of the aea between the playes epesents the battlefield. The battlefield stats out empty. Pemanents a playe contols ae nomally kept in font of them on the battlefield, though thee ae some cases (such as an Aua attached to anothe playe’s pemanent) when a pemanent one playe contols is kept close to a diffeent playe. 1690 403.1. Most of the area between the players represents the battlefield. The battlefield starts out empty. Permanents a player controls are normally kept in front of them on the battlefield, though there are some cases (such as an Aura attached to another player’s permanent) when a permanent one player controls is kept closer to a different player.
1691 1691
1692 403.2. A spell o ability affects and checks only the battlefield unless it specifically mentions a playe o anothe zone. 1692 403.2. A spell or ability affects and checks only the battlefield unless it specifically mentions a player or another zone.
1693 1693
1694 403.3. Pemanents exist only on the battlefield. Evey object on the battlefield is a pemanent. See ule 110, “Pemanents.” 1694 403.3. Permanents exist only on the battlefield. Every object on the battlefield is a permanent. See rule 110, “Permanents.”
1695 1695
1696 403.4. Wheneve a pemanent entes the battlefield, it becomes a new object and has no elationship to any pevious pemanent epesented by the same cad, except fo the cases listed in ule 400.7. (This is also tue fo any objects enteing any zone.) 1696 403.4. Whenever a permanent enters the battlefield, it becomes a new object and has no relationship to any previous permanent represented by the same card, except for the cases listed in rule 400.7. (This is also true for any objects entering any zone.)
1697 1697
1698 403.5. Peviously, the battlefield was called the “in-play zone.” Cads that wee pinted with text that contains the phases “in play,” “fom play,” “into play,” o the like ae efeing to the battlefield. Cads that wee pinted with that text have eceived eata in the Oacle cad efeence. 1698 403.5. Previously, the battlefield was called the “in-play zone.” Cards that were printed with text that contains the phrases “in play,” “from play,” “into play,” or the like are referring to the battlefield. Cards that were printed with that text have received errata in the Oracle card reference.
1699 1699
1700 404. Gaveyad 1700 404. Graveyard
1701 1701
1702 404.1. A playe’s gaveyad is thei discad pile. Any object that’s counteed, discaded, destoyed, o sacificed is put on top of its owne’s gaveyad, as is any instant o socey spell that’s finished esolving. Each playe’s gaveyad stats out empty. 1702 404.1. A player’s graveyard is their discard pile. Any object that’s countered, discarded, destroyed, or sacrificed is put on top of its owner’s graveyard, as is any instant or sorcery spell that’s finished resolving. Each player’s graveyard starts out empty.
1703 1703
1704 404.2. Each gaveyad is kept in a single face-up pile. A playe can examine the cads in any gaveyad at any time but nomally can’t change thei ode. Additional ules applying to sanctioned tounaments may allow a playe to change the ode of cads in thei gaveyad. 1704 404.2. Each graveyard is kept in a single face-up pile. A player can examine the cards in any graveyard at any time but normally can’t change their order. Additional rules applying to sanctioned tournaments may allow a player to change the order of cards in their graveyard.
1705 1705
1706 404.3. If an effect o ule puts two o moe cads into the same gaveyad at the same time, the owne of those cads may aange them in any ode. 1706 404.3. If an effect or rule puts two or more cards into the same graveyard at the same time, the owner of those cards may arrange them in any order.
1707 1707
1708 405. Stack 1708 405. Stack
1709 1709
1710 405.1. When a spell is cast, the physical cad is put on the stack (see ule 601.2a). When an ability is activated o tigges, it goes on top of the stack without any cad associated with it (see ules 602.2a and 603.3). 1710 405.1. When a spell is cast, the physical card is put on the stack (see rule 601.2a). When an ability is activated or triggers, it goes on top of the stack without any card associated with it (see rules 602.2a and 603.3).
1711 1711
1712 405.2. The stack keeps tack of the ode that spells and/o abilities wee added to it. Each time an object is put on the stack, it’s put on top of all objects aleady thee. 1712 405.2. The stack keeps track of the order that spells and/or abilities were added to it. Each time an object is put on the stack, it’s put on top of all objects already there.
1713 1713
1714 405.3. If an effect puts two o moe objects on the stack at the same time, those contolled by the active playe ae put on lowest, followed by each othe playe’s objects in APNAP ode (see ule 101.4). If a playe contols moe than one of these objects, that playe chooses thei elative ode on the stack. 1714 405.3. If an effect puts two or more objects on the stack at the same time, those controlled by the active player are put on lowest, followed by each other player’s objects in APNAP order (see rule 101.4). If a player controls more than one of these objects, that player chooses their relative order on the stack.
1715 1715
1716 405.4. Each spell has all the chaacteistics of the cad associated with it. Each activated o tiggeed ability that’s on the stack has the text of the ability that ceated it and no othe chaacteistics. The contolle of a spell is the peson who cast it. The contolle of an activated ability is the playe who activated it. The contolle of a tiggeed ability is the playe who contolled the ability’s souce when it tiggeed, unless it’s a delayed tiggeed ability. To detemine the contolle of a delayed tiggeed ability, see ules 603.7d–f. 1716 405.4. Each spell has all the characteristics of the card associated with it. Each activated or triggered ability that’s on the stack has the text of the ability that created it and no other characteristics. The controller of a spell is the person who cast it. The controller of an activated ability is the player who activated it. The controller of a triggered ability is the player who controlled the ability’s source when it triggered, unless it’s a delayed triggered ability. To determine the controller of a delayed triggered ability, see rules 603.7d–f.
1717 1717
1718 405.5. When all playes pass in succession, the top (last-added) spell o ability on the stack esolves. If the stack is empty when all playes pass, the cuent step o phase ends and the next begins. 1718 405.5. When all players pass in succession, the top (last-added) spell or ability on the stack resolves. If the stack is empty when all players pass, the current step or phase ends and the next begins.
1719 1719
1720 405.6. Some things that happen duing the game don’t use the stack. 1720 405.6. Some things that happen during the game don’t use the stack.
1721 1721
1722 405.6a Effects don’t go on the stack; they’e the esult of spells and abilities esolving. Effects may ceate delayed tiggeed abilities, howeve, and these may go on the stack when they tigge (see ule 603.7). 1722 405.6a Effects don’t go on the stack; they’re the result of spells and abilities resolving. Effects may create delayed triggered abilities, however, and these may go on the stack when they trigger (see rule 603.7).
1723 1723
1724 405.6b Static abilities continuously geneate effects and don’t go on the stack. (See ule 604, “Handling Static Abilities.”) This includes chaacteistic-defining abilities such as “[This object] is ed” (see ule 604.3). 1724 405.6b Static abilities continuously generate effects and don’t go on the stack. (See rule 604, “Handling Static Abilities.”) This includes characteristic-defining abilities such as “[This object] is red” (see rule 604.3).
1725 1725
1726 405.6c Mana abilities esolve immediately. If a mana ability both poduces mana and has anothe effect, the mana is poduced and the othe effect happens immediately. If a playe had pioity befoe a mana ability was activated, that playe gets pioity afte it esolves. (See ule 605, “Mana Abilities.”) 1726 405.6c Mana abilities resolve immediately. If a mana ability both produces mana and has another effect, the mana is produced and the other effect happens immediately. If a player had priority before a mana ability was activated, that player gets priority after it resolves. (See rule 605, “Mana Abilities.”)
1727 1727
1728 405.6d Special actions don’t use the stack; they happen immediately. See ule 116, “Special Actions.” 1728 405.6d Special actions don’t use the stack; they happen immediately. See rule 116, “Special Actions.”
1729 1729
1730 405.6e Tun-based actions don’t use the stack; they happen automatically when cetain steps o phases begin. They’e dealt with befoe a playe would eceive pioity (see ule 117.3a). Tun-based actions also happen automatically when each step and phase ends; no playe eceives pioity aftewad. See ule 703. 1730 405.6e Turn-based actions don’t use the stack; they happen automatically when certain steps or phases begin. They’re dealt with before a player would receive priority (see rule 117.3a). Turn-based actions also happen automatically when each step and phase ends; no player receives priority afterward. See rule 703.
1731 1731
1732 405.6f State-based actions don’t use the stack; they happen automatically when cetain conditions ae met. See ule 704. They ae dealt with befoe a playe would eceive pioity. See ule 117.5. 1732 405.6f State-based actions don’t use the stack; they happen automatically when certain conditions are met. See rule 704. They are dealt with before a player would receive priority. See rule 117.5.
1733 1733
1734 405.6g A playe may concede the game at any time. That playe leaves the game immediately. See ule 104.3a. 1734 405.6g A player may concede the game at any time. That player leaves the game immediately. See rule 104.3a.
1735 1735
1736 405.6h If a playe leaves a multiplaye game, objects may leave the game, cease to exist, change contol, o be exiled as a esult. These actions happen immediately. See ule 800.4a. 1736 405.6h If a player leaves a multiplayer game, objects may leave the game, cease to exist, change control, or be exiled as a result. These actions happen immediately. See rule 800.4a.
1737 1737
1738 406. Exile 1738 406. Exile
1739 1739
1740 406.1. The exile zone is essentially a holding aea fo objects. Some spells and abilities exile an object without any way to etun that object to anothe zone. Othe spells and abilities exile an object only tempoaily. 1740 406.1. The exile zone is essentially a holding area for objects. Some spells and abilities exile an object without any way to return that object to another zone. Other spells and abilities exile an object only temporarily.
1741 1741
1742 406.2. To exile an object is to put it into the exile zone fom whateve zone it’s cuently in. An exiled cad is a cad that’s been put into the exile zone. 1742 406.2. To exile an object is to put it into the exile zone from whatever zone it’s currently in. An exiled card is a card that’s been put into the exile zone.
1743 1743
1744 406.3. Exiled cads ae, by default, kept face up and may be examined by any playe at any time. Cads “exiled face down” can’t be examined by any playe except when instuctions allow it. Howeve, once a playe is allowed to look at a cad exiled face down, that playe may continue to look at that cad as long as it emains exiled, even if the instuction allowing the playe to do so no longe applies. A cad exiled face down has no chaacteistics, but the spell o ability that exiled it may allow it to be played fom exile. Unless that cad is being cast face down (see ule 707.4), the cad is tuned face up just befoe the playe announces that they ae playing the cad (see ule 601.2). 1744 406.3. Exiled cards are, by default, kept face up and may be examined by any player at any time. Cards “exiled face down” can’t be examined by any player except when instructions allow it. However, once a player is allowed to look at a card exiled face down, that player may continue to look at that card as long as it remains exiled, even if the instruction allowing the player to do so no longer applies. A card exiled face down has no characteristics, but the spell or ability that exiled it may allow it to be played from exile. Unless that card is being cast face down (see rule 707.4), the card is turned face up just before the player announces that they are playing the card (see rule 601.2).
1745 1745
1746 406.4. Face-down cads in exile should be kept in sepaate piles based on when they wee exiled and how they wee exiled. If a playe is instucted to choose an exiled cad, the playe may choose a specific face-down cad only if the playe is allowed to look at that cad. Othewise, they may choose a pile of face-down exiled cads, and then a cad is chosen at andom fom within that pile. If choosing such a cad is pat of casting a spell o activating an ability, the chosen cad isn’t evealed until afte that cost is fully paid. (See ule 601.2i.) 1746 406.4. Face-down cards in exile should be kept in separate piles based on when they were exiled and how they were exiled. If a player is instructed to choose an exiled card, the player may choose a specific face-down card only if the player is allowed to look at that card. Otherwise, they may choose a pile of face-down exiled cards, and then a card is chosen at random from within that pile. If choosing such a card is part of casting a spell or activating an ability, the chosen card isn’t revealed until after that cost is fully paid. (See rule 601.2i.)
1747 1747
1748 406.5. Exiled cads that might etun to the battlefield o any othe zone should be kept in sepaate piles to keep tack of thei espective ways of etuning. Exiled cads that may have an impact on the game due to thei own abilities (such as cads with haunt) o the abilities of the cads that exiled them should likewise be kept in sepaate piles. 1748 406.5. Exiled cards that might return to the battlefield or any other zone should be kept in separate piles to keep track of their respective ways of returning. Exiled cards that may have an impact on the game due to their own abilities (such as cards with haunt) or the abilities of the cards that exiled them should likewise be kept in separate piles.
1749 1749
1750 406.6. An object may have one ability pinted on it that causes one o moe cads to be exiled, and anothe ability that efes eithe to “the exiled cads” o to cads “exiled with [this object].” These abilities ae linked: the second efes only to cads that have been exiled due to the fist. See ule 607, “Linked Abilities.” 1750 406.6. An object may have one ability printed on it that causes one or more cards to be exiled, and another ability that refers either to “the exiled cards” or to cards “exiled with [this object].” These abilities are linked: the second refers only to cards that have been exiled due to the first. See rule 607, “Linked Abilities.”
1751 1751
1752 406.7. If an object in the exile zone becomes exiled, it doesn’t change zones, but it becomes a new object that has just been exiled. 1752 406.7. If an object in the exile zone becomes exiled, it doesn’t change zones, but it becomes a new object that has just been exiled.
1753 1753
1754 406.8. Peviously, the exile zone was called the “emoved-fom-the-game zone.” Cads that wee pinted with text that “emoves [an object] fom the game” exiles that object. The same is tue fo cads pinted with text that “sets [an object] aside.” Cads that wee pinted with that text have eceived eata in the Oacle cad efeence. 1754 406.8. Previously, the exile zone was called the “removed-from-the-game zone.” Cards that were printed with text that “removes [an object] from the game” exiles that object. The same is true for cards printed with text that “sets [an object] aside.” Cards that were printed with that text have received errata in the Oracle card reference.
1755 1755
1756 407. Ante 1756 407. Ante
1757 1757
1758 407.1. Ealie vesions of the Magic ules included an ante ule as a way of playing “fo keeps.” Playing Magic games fo ante is now consideed an optional vaiation on the game, and it’s allowed only whee it’s not fobidden by law o by othe ules. Playing fo ante is stictly fobidden unde the Magic: The Gatheing Tounament Rules (WPN.Wizads.com/en/esouces/ules-documents). 1758 407.1. Earlier versions of the Magic rules included an ante rule as a way of playing “for keeps.” Playing Magic games for ante is now considered an optional variation on the game, and it’s allowed only where it’s not forbidden by law or by other rules. Playing for ante is strictly forbidden under the Magic: The Gathering Tournament Rules (WPN.Wizards.com/en/resources/rules-documents).
1759 1759
1760 407.2. When playing fo ante, each playe puts one andom cad fom thei deck into the ante zone afte detemining which playe goes fist but befoe playes daw any cads. Cads in the ante zone may be examined by any playe at any time. At the end of the game, the winne becomes the owne of all the cads in the ante zone. 1760 407.2. When playing for ante, each player puts one random card from their deck into the ante zone after determining which player goes first but before players draw any cards. Cards in the ante zone may be examined by any player at any time. At the end of the game, the winner becomes the owner of all the cards in the ante zone.
1761 1761
1762 407.3. A few cads have the text “Remove [this cad] fom you deck befoe playing if you’e not playing fo ante.” These ae the only cads that can add o emove cads fom the ante zone o change a cad’s owne. When not playing fo ante, playes can’t include these cads in thei decks o sideboads, and these cads can’t be bought into the game fom outside the game. 1762 407.3. A few cards have the text “Remove [this card] from your deck before playing if you’re not playing for ante.” These are the only cards that can add or remove cards from the ante zone or change a card’s owner. When not playing for ante, players can’t include these cards in their decks or sideboards, and these cards can’t be brought into the game from outside the game.
1763 1763
1764 407.4. To ante an object is to put that object into the ante zone fom whicheve zone it’s cuently in. The owne of an object is the only peson who can ante that object. 1764 407.4. To ante an object is to put that object into the ante zone from whichever zone it’s currently in. The owner of an object is the only person who can ante that object.
1765 1765
1766 408. Command 1766 408. Command
1767 1767
1768 408.1. The command zone is a game aea eseved fo cetain specialized objects that have an oveaching effect on the game, yet ae not pemanents and cannot be destoyed. 1768 408.1. The command zone is a game area reserved for certain specialized objects that have an overarching effect on the game, yet are not permanents and cannot be destroyed.
1769 1769
1770 408.2. Emblems may be ceated in the command zone. See ule 114, “Emblems.” 1770 408.2. Emblems may be created in the command zone. See rule 114, “Emblems.”
1771 1771
1772 408.3. In the Planechase, Vanguad, Commande, Achenemy, and Conspiacy Daft casual vaiants, nontaditional Magic cads and/o specially designated cads stat the game in the command zone. Each vaiant has its own ules egading such cads. See section 9, “Casual Vaiants.” 1772 408.3. In the Planechase, Vanguard, Commander, Archenemy, and Conspiracy Draft casual variants, nontraditional Magic cards and/or specially designated cards start the game in the command zone. Each variant has its own rules regarding such cards. See section 9, “Casual Variants.”
1773 1773
1774 1774
1775 5. Tun Stuctue 1775 5. Turn Structure
1776 1776
1777 500. Geneal 1777 500. General
1778 1778
1779 500.1. A tun consists of five phases, in this ode: beginning, pecombat main, combat, postcombat main, and ending. Each of these phases takes place evey tun, even if nothing happens duing the phase. The beginning, combat, and ending phases ae futhe boken down into steps, which poceed in ode. 1779 500.1. A turn consists of five phases, in this order: beginning, precombat main, combat, postcombat main, and ending. Each of these phases takes place every turn, even if nothing happens during the phase. The beginning, combat, and ending phases are further broken down into steps, which proceed in order.
1780 1780
1781 500.2. A phase o step in which playes eceive pioity ends when the stack is empty and all playes pass in succession. Simply having the stack become empty doesn’t cause such a phase o step to end; all playes have to pass in succession with the stack empty. Because of this, each playe gets a chance to add new things to the stack befoe that phase o step ends. 1781 500.2. A phase or step in which players receive priority ends when the stack is empty and all players pass in succession. Simply having the stack become empty doesn’t cause such a phase or step to end; all players have to pass in succession with the stack empty. Because of this, each player gets a chance to add new things to the stack before that phase or step ends.
1782 1782
1783 500.3. A step in which no playes eceive pioity ends when all specified actions that take place duing that step ae completed. The only such steps ae the untap step (see ule 502) and cetain cleanup steps (see ule 514). 1783 500.3. A step in which no players receive priority ends when all specified actions that take place during that step are completed. The only such steps are the untap step (see rule 502) and certain cleanup steps (see rule 514).
1784 1784
1785 500.4. When a step o phase ends, any unused mana left in a playe’s mana pool empties. This tun-based action doesn’t use the stack. 1785 500.4. When a step or phase ends, any unused mana left in a player’s mana pool empties. This turn-based action doesn’t use the stack.
1786 1786
1787 500.5. When a phase o step ends, any effects scheduled to last “until end of” that phase o step expie. When a phase o step begins, any effects scheduled to last “until” that phase o step expie. Effects that last “until end of combat” expie at the end of the combat phase, not at the beginning of the end of combat step. Effects that last “until end of tun” ae subject to special ules; see ule 514.2. 1787 500.5. When a phase or step ends, any effects scheduled to last “until end of” that phase or step expire. When a phase or step begins, any effects scheduled to last “until” that phase or step expire. Effects that last “until end of combat” expire at the end of the combat phase, not at the beginning of the end of combat step. Effects that last “until end of turn” are subject to special rules; see rule 514.2.
1788 1788
1789 500.6. When a phase o step begins, any abilities that tigge “at the beginning of” that phase o step tigge. They ae put on the stack the next time a playe would eceive pioity. (See ule 117, “Timing and Pioity.”) 1789 500.6. When a phase or step begins, any abilities that trigger “at the beginning of” that phase or step trigger. They are put on the stack the next time a player would receive priority. (See rule 117, “Timing and Priority.”)
1790 1790
1791 500.7. Some effects can give a playe exta tuns. They do this by adding the tuns diectly afte the specified tun. If a playe is given multiple exta tuns, the exta tuns ae added one at a time. If multiple playes ae given exta tuns, the exta tuns ae added one at a time, in APNAP ode (see ule 101.4). The most ecently ceated tun will be taken fist. 1791 500.7. Some effects can give a player extra turns. They do this by adding the turns directly after the specified turn. If a player is given multiple extra turns, the extra turns are added one at a time. If multiple players are given extra turns, the extra turns are added one at a time, in APNAP order (see rule 101.4). The most recently created turn will be taken first.
1792 1792
1793 500.8. Some effects can add phases to a tun. They do this by adding the phases diectly afte the specified phase. If multiple exta phases ae ceated afte the same phase, the most ecently ceated phase will occu fist. 1793 500.8. Some effects can add phases to a turn. They do this by adding the phases directly after the specified phase. If multiple extra phases are created after the same phase, the most recently created phase will occur first.
1794 1794
1795 500.9. Some effects can add steps to a phase. They do this by adding the steps diectly afte a specified step o diectly befoe a specified step. If multiple exta steps ae ceated afte the same step, the most ecently ceated step will occu fist. 1795 500.9. Some effects can add steps to a phase. They do this by adding the steps directly after a specified step or directly before a specified step. If multiple extra steps are created after the same step, the most recently created step will occur first.
1796 1796
1797 500.10. Some effects can cause a step, phase, o tun to be skipped. To skip a step, phase, o tun is to poceed past it as though it didn’t exist. See ule 614.10. 1797 500.10. Some effects can cause a step, phase, or turn to be skipped. To skip a step, phase, or turn is to proceed past it as though it didn’t exist. See rule 614.10.
1798 1798
1799 500.11. No game events can occu between tuns, phases, o steps. 1799 500.11. No game events can occur between turns, phases, or steps.
1800 1800
1801 501. Beginning Phase 1801 501. Beginning Phase
1802 1802
1803 501.1. The beginning phase consists of thee steps, in this ode: untap, upkeep, and daw. 1803 501.1. The beginning phase consists of three steps, in this order: untap, upkeep, and draw.
1804 1804
1805 502. Untap Step 1805 502. Untap Step
1806 1806
1807 502.1. Fist, all phased-in pemanents with phasing that the active playe contols phase out, and all phased-out pemanents that the active playe contolled when they phased out phase in. This all happens simultaneously. This tun-based action doesn’t use the stack. See ule 702.25, “Phasing.” 1807 502.1. First, all phased-in permanents with phasing that the active player controls phase out, and all phased-out permanents that the active player controlled when they phased out phase in. This all happens simultaneously. This turn-based action doesn’t use the stack. See rule 702.25, “Phasing.”
1808 1808
1809 502.2. Second, the active playe detemines which pemanents they contol will untap. Then they untap them all simultaneously. This tun-based action doesn’t use the stack. Nomally, all of a playe’s pemanents untap, but effects can keep one o moe of a playe’s pemanents fom untapping. 1809 502.2. Second, the active player determines which permanents they control will untap. Then they untap them all simultaneously. This turn-based action doesn’t use the stack. Normally, all of a player’s permanents untap, but effects can keep one or more of a player’s permanents from untapping.
1810 1810
1811 502.3. No playe eceives pioity duing the untap step, so no spells can be cast o esolve and no abilities can be activated o esolve. Any ability that tigges duing this step will be held until the next time a playe would eceive pioity, which is usually duing the upkeep step. (See ule 503, “Upkeep Step.”) 1811 502.3. No player receives priority during the untap step, so no spells can be cast or resolve and no abilities can be activated or resolve. Any ability that triggers during this step will be held until the next time a player would receive priority, which is usually during the upkeep step. (See rule 503, “Upkeep Step.”)
1812 1812
1813 503. Upkeep Step 1813 503. Upkeep Step
1814 1814
1815 503.1. The upkeep step has no tun-based actions. Once it begins, the active playe gets pioity. (See ule 117, “Timing and Pioity.”) 1815 503.1. The upkeep step has no turn-based actions. Once it begins, the active player gets priority. (See rule 117, “Timing and Priority.”)
1816 1816
1817 503.1a Any abilities that tiggeed duing the untap step and any abilities that tiggeed at the beginning of the upkeep ae put onto the stack befoe the active playe gets pioity; the ode in which they tiggeed doesn’t matte. (See ule 603, “Handling Tiggeed Abilities.”) 1817 503.1a Any abilities that triggered during the untap step and any abilities that triggered at the beginning of the upkeep are put onto the stack before the active player gets priority; the order in which they triggered doesn’t matter. (See rule 603, “Handling Triggered Abilities.”)
1818 1818
1819 503.2. If a spell states that it may be cast only “afte [a playe’s] upkeep step,” and the tun has multiple upkeep steps, that spell may be cast any time afte the fist upkeep step ends. 1819 503.2. If a spell states that it may be cast only “after [a player’s] upkeep step,” and the turn has multiple upkeep steps, that spell may be cast any time after the first upkeep step ends.
1820 1820
1821 504. Daw Step 1821 504. Draw Step
1822 1822
1823 504.1. Fist, the active playe daws a cad. This tun-based action doesn’t use the stack. 1823 504.1. First, the active player draws a card. This turn-based action doesn’t use the stack.
1824 1824
1825 504.2. Second, the active playe gets pioity. (See ule 117, “Timing and Pioity.”) 1825 504.2. Second, the active player gets priority. (See rule 117, “Timing and Priority.”)
1826 1826
1827 505. Main Phase 1827 505. Main Phase
1828 1828
1829 505.1. Thee ae two main phases in a tun. In each tun, the fist main phase (also known as the pecombat main phase) and the second main phase (also known as the postcombat main phase) ae sepaated by the combat phase (see ule 506, “Combat Phase”). The pecombat and postcombat main phases ae individually and collectively known as the main phase. 1829 505.1. There are two main phases in a turn. In each turn, the first main phase (also known as the precombat main phase) and the second main phase (also known as the postcombat main phase) are separated by the combat phase (see rule 506, “Combat Phase”). The precombat and postcombat main phases are individually and collectively known as the main phase.
1830 1830
1831 505.1a Only the fist main phase of the tun is a pecombat main phase. All othe main phases ae postcombat main phases. This includes the second main phase of a tun in which the combat phase has been skipped. It is also tue of a tun in which an effect has caused an additional combat phase and an additional main phase to be ceated. 1831 505.1a Only the first main phase of the turn is a precombat main phase. All other main phases are postcombat main phases. This includes the second main phase of a turn in which the combat phase has been skipped. It is also true of a turn in which an effect has caused an additional combat phase and an additional main phase to be created.
1832 1832
1833 505.2. The main phase has no steps, so a main phase ends when all playes pass in succession while the stack is empty. (See ule 500.2.) 1833 505.2. The main phase has no steps, so a main phase ends when all players pass in succession while the stack is empty. (See rule 500.2.)
1834 1834
1835 505.3. Fist, but only if the playes ae playing an Achenemy game (see ule 904), the active playe is the achenemy, and it’s the active playe’s pecombat main phase, the active playe sets the top cad of thei scheme deck in motion (see ule 701.24). This tun-based action doesn’t use the stack. 1835 505.3. First, but only if the players are playing an Archenemy game (see rule 904), the active player is the archenemy, and it’s the active player’s precombat main phase, the active player sets the top card of their scheme deck in motion (see rule 701.24). This turn-based action doesn’t use the stack.
1836 1836
1837 505.4. Second, if the active playe contols one o moe Saga enchantments and it’s the active playe’s pecombat main phase, the active playe puts a loe counte on each Saga they contol. (See ule 714, “Saga Cads.”) This tun-based action doesn’t use the stack. 1837 505.4. Second, if the active player controls one or more Saga enchantments and it’s the active player’s precombat main phase, the active player puts a lore counter on each Saga they control. (See rule 714, “Saga Cards.”) This turn-based action doesn’t use the stack.
1838 1838
1839 505.5. Thid, the active playe gets pioity. (See ule 117, “Timing and Pioity.”) 1839 505.5. Third, the active player gets priority. (See rule 117, “Timing and Priority.”)
1840 1840
1841 505.5a The main phase is the only phase in which a playe can nomally cast atifact, ceatue, enchantment, planeswalke, and socey spells. The active playe may cast these spells. 1841 505.5a The main phase is the only phase in which a player can normally cast artifact, creature, enchantment, planeswalker, and sorcery spells. The active player may cast these spells.
1842 1842
1843 505.5b Duing eithe main phase, the active playe may play one land cad fom thei hand if the stack is empty, if the playe has pioity, and if they haven’t played a land this tun (unless an effect states the playe may play additional lands). This action doesn’t use the stack. Neithe the land no the action of playing the land is a spell o ability, so it can’t be counteed, and playes can’t espond to it with instants o activated abilities. (See ule 305, “Lands.”) 1843 505.5b During either main phase, the active player may play one land card from their hand if the stack is empty, if the player has priority, and if they haven’t played a land this turn (unless an effect states the player may play additional lands). This action doesn’t use the stack. Neither the land nor the action of playing the land is a spell or ability, so it can’t be countered, and players can’t respond to it with instants or activated abilities. (See rule 305, “Lands.”)
1844 1844
1845 506. Combat Phase 1845 506. Combat Phase
1846 1846
1847 506.1. The combat phase has five steps, which poceed in ode: beginning of combat, declae attackes, declae blockes, combat damage, and end of combat. The declae blockes and combat damage steps ae skipped if no ceatues ae declaed as attackes o put onto the battlefield attacking (see ule 508.8). Thee ae two combat damage steps if any attacking o blocking ceatue has fist stike (see ule 702.7) o double stike (see ule 702.4). 1847 506.1. The combat phase has five steps, which proceed in order: beginning of combat, declare attackers, declare blockers, combat damage, and end of combat. The declare blockers and combat damage steps are skipped if no creatures are declared as attackers or put onto the battlefield attacking (see rule 508.8). There are two combat damage steps if any attacking or blocking creature has first strike (see rule 702.7) or double strike (see rule 702.4).
1848 1848
1849 506.2. Duing the combat phase, the active playe is the attacking playe; ceatues that playe contols may attack. Duing the combat phase of a two-playe game, the nonactive playe is the defending playe; that playe and planeswalkes they contol may be attacked. 1849 506.2. During the combat phase, the active player is the attacking player; creatures that player controls may attack. During the combat phase of a two-player game, the nonactive player is the defending player; that player and planeswalkers they control may be attacked.
1850 1850
1851 506.2a Duing the combat phase of a multiplaye game, thee may be one o moe defending playes, depending on the vaiant being played and the options chosen fo it. Unless all the attacking playe’s opponents automatically become defending playes duing the combat phase, the attacking playe chooses one of thei opponents as a tun-based action duing the beginning of combat step. (Note that the choice may be dictated by the vaiant being played o the options chosen fo it.) That playe becomes the defending playe. See ule 802, “Attack Multiple Playes Option,” ule 803, “Attack Left and Attack Right Options,” and ule 809, “Empeo Vaiant.” 1851 506.2a During the combat phase of a multiplayer game, there may be one or more defending players, depending on the variant being played and the options chosen for it. Unless all the attacking player’s opponents automatically become defending players during the combat phase, the attacking player chooses one of their opponents as a turn-based action during the beginning of combat step. (Note that the choice may be dictated by the variant being played or the options chosen for it.) That player becomes the defending player. See rule 802, “Attack Multiple Players Option,” rule 803, “Attack Left and Attack Right Options,” and rule 809, “Emperor Variant.”
1852 1852
1853 506.2b In multiplaye games using the shaed team tuns option, the active team is the attacking team and the nonactive team is the defending team. See ule 805, “Shaed Team Tuns Option.” 1853 506.2b In multiplayer games using the shared team turns option, the active team is the attacking team and the nonactive team is the defending team. See rule 805, “Shared Team Turns Option.”
1854 1854
1855 506.3. Only a ceatue can attack o block. Only a playe o a planeswalke can be attacked. 1855 506.3. Only a creature can attack or block. Only a player or a planeswalker can be attacked.
1856 1856
1857 506.3a If an effect would put a nonceatue pemanent onto the battlefield attacking o blocking, the pemanent does ente the battlefield but it’s neve consideed to be an attacking o blocking pemanent. 1857 506.3a If an effect would put a noncreature permanent onto the battlefield attacking or blocking, the permanent does enter the battlefield but it’s never considered to be an attacking or blocking permanent.
1858 1858
1859 506.3b If an effect would put a ceatue onto the battlefield attacking unde the contol of any playe except an attacking playe, that ceatue does ente the battlefield, but it’s neve consideed to be an attacking ceatue. 1859 506.3b If an effect would put a creature onto the battlefield attacking under the control of any player except an attacking player, that creature does enter the battlefield, but it’s never considered to be an attacking creature.
1860 1860
1861 506.3c If an effect would put a ceatue onto the battlefield attacking eithe a playe not in the game o a planeswalke no longe on the battlefield o no longe a planeswalke, that ceatue does ente the battlefield, but it’s neve consideed to be an attacking ceatue. 1861 506.3c If an effect would put a creature onto the battlefield attacking either a player not in the game or a planeswalker no longer on the battlefield or no longer a planeswalker, that creature does enter the battlefield, but it’s never considered to be an attacking creature.
1862 1862
1863 506.3d If an effect would put a ceatue onto the battlefield blocking but the ceatue it would block isn’t attacking eithe the fist ceatue’s contolle o a planeswalke that playe contols, that ceatue does ente the battlefield, but it’s neve consideed to be a blocking ceatue. 1863 506.3d If an effect would put a creature onto the battlefield blocking but the creature it would block isn’t attacking either the first creature’s controller or a planeswalker that player controls, that creature does enter the battlefield, but it’s never considered to be a blocking creature.
1864 1864
1865 506.4. A pemanent is emoved fom combat if it leaves the battlefield, if its contolle changes, if it phases out, if an effect specifically emoves it fom combat, if it’s a planeswalke that’s being attacked and stops being a planeswalke, o if it’s an attacking o blocking ceatue that egeneates (see ule 701.14) o stops being a ceatue. A ceatue that’s emoved fom combat stops being an attacking, blocking, blocked, and/o unblocked ceatue. A planeswalke that’s emoved fom combat stops being attacked. 1865 506.4. A permanent is removed from combat if it leaves the battlefield, if its controller changes, if it phases out, if an effect specifically removes it from combat, if it’s a planeswalker that’s being attacked and stops being a planeswalker, or if it’s an attacking or blocking creature that regenerates (see rule 701.14) or stops being a creature. A creature that’s removed from combat stops being an attacking, blocking, blocked, and/or unblocked creature. A planeswalker that’s removed from combat stops being attacked.
1866 1866
1867 506.4a Once a ceatue has been declaed as an attacking o blocking ceatue, spells o abilities that would have kept that ceatue fom attacking o blocking don’t emove the ceatue fom combat. 1867 506.4a Once a creature has been declared as an attacking or blocking creature, spells or abilities that would have kept that creature from attacking or blocking don’t remove the creature from combat.
1868 1868
1869 506.4b Tapping o untapping a ceatue that’s aleady been declaed as an attacke o blocke doesn’t emove it fom combat and doesn’t pevent its combat damage. 1869 506.4b Tapping or untapping a creature that’s already been declared as an attacker or blocker doesn’t remove it from combat and doesn’t prevent its combat damage.
1870 1870
1871 506.4c If a ceatue is attacking a planeswalke, emoving that planeswalke fom combat doesn’t emove that ceatue fom combat. It continues to be an attacking ceatue, although it is attacking neithe a playe no a planeswalke. It may be blocked. If it is unblocked, it will deal no combat damage. 1871 506.4c If a creature is attacking a planeswalker, removing that planeswalker from combat doesn’t remove that creature from combat. It continues to be an attacking creature, although it is attacking neither a player nor a planeswalker. It may be blocked. If it is unblocked, it will deal no combat damage.
1872 1872
1873 506.4d A pemanent that’s both a blocking ceatue and a planeswalke that’s being attacked is emoved fom combat if it stops being both a ceatue and a planeswalke. If it stops being one of those cad types but continues to be the othe, it continues to be eithe a blocking ceatue o a planeswalke that’s being attacked, whicheve is appopiate. 1873 506.4d A permanent that’s both a blocking creature and a planeswalker that’s being attacked is removed from combat if it stops being both a creature and a planeswalker. If it stops being one of those card types but continues to be the other, it continues to be either a blocking creature or a planeswalker that’s being attacked, whichever is appropriate.
1874 1874
1875 506.5. A ceatue attacks alone if it’s the only ceatue declaed as an attacke duing the declae attackes step. A ceatue is attacking alone if it’s attacking but no othe ceatues ae. A ceatue blocks alone if it’s the only ceatue declaed as a blocke duing the declae blockes step. A ceatue is blocking alone if it’s blocking but no othe ceatues ae. 1875 506.5. A creature attacks alone if it’s the only creature declared as an attacker during the declare attackers step. A creature is attacking alone if it’s attacking but no other creatures are. A creature blocks alone if it’s the only creature declared as a blocker during the declare blockers step. A creature is blocking alone if it’s blocking but no other creatures are.
1876 1876
1877 506.6. Some spells state that they may be cast “only [befoe/afte] [a paticula point in the combat phase],” in which that point may be “attackes ae declaed,” “blockes ae declaed,” “the combat damage step,” “the end of combat step,” “the combat phase,” o “combat.” 1877 506.6. Some spells state that they may be cast “only [before/after] [a particular point in the combat phase],” in which that point may be “attackers are declared,” “blockers are declared,” “the combat damage step,” “the end of combat step,” “the combat phase,” or “combat.”
1878 1878
1879 506.6a A spell that states it may be cast “only befoe (o afte) attackes ae declaed” is efeing to the tun-based action of declaing attackes. It may be cast only befoe (o afte) the declae attackes step begins, egadless of whethe any attackes ae actually declaed. (See ule 508.) 1879 506.6a A spell that states it may be cast “only before (or after) attackers are declared” is referring to the turn-based action of declaring attackers. It may be cast only before (or after) the declare attackers step begins, regardless of whether any attackers are actually declared. (See rule 508.)
1880 1880
1881 506.6b A spell that states it may be cast “only befoe (o afte) blockes ae declaed” is efeing to the tun-based action of declaing blockes. It may be cast only befoe (o afte) the declae blockes step begins, egadless of whethe any blockes ae actually declaed. (See ule 509.) 1881 506.6b A spell that states it may be cast “only before (or after) blockers are declared” is referring to the turn-based action of declaring blockers. It may be cast only before (or after) the declare blockers step begins, regardless of whether any blockers are actually declared. (See rule 509.)
1882 1882
1883 506.6c Some spells state that they may be cast only “duing combat” o “duing a cetain playe’s combat phase” in addition to the citeia descibed in ule 506.6. If a tun has multiple combat phases, such spells may be cast at an appopiate time duing any of them. 1883 506.6c Some spells state that they may be cast only “during combat” or “during a certain player’s combat phase” in addition to the criteria described in rule 506.6. If a turn has multiple combat phases, such spells may be cast at an appropriate time during any of them.
1884 1884
1885 506.6d Some spells state that they may be cast “only befoe (o afte) [a paticula point in the combat phase],” but don’t meet the additional citeia descibed in ule 506.6c. If a tun has multiple combat phases, such spells may be cast that tun only befoe (o afte) the stated point of the fist combat phase. 1885 506.6d Some spells state that they may be cast “only before (or after) [a particular point in the combat phase],” but don’t meet the additional criteria described in rule 506.6c. If a turn has multiple combat phases, such spells may be cast that turn only before (or after) the stated point of the first combat phase.
1886 1886
1887 506.6e If a spell states that it may be cast “only befoe [a paticula point in the combat phase],” but the stated point doesn’t exist within the elevant combat phase because the declae blockes step and the combat damage step ae skipped (see ule 508.8), then the spell may be cast only befoe the declae attackes step ends. If the stated point doesn’t exist because the elevant combat phase has been skipped, then the spell may be cast only befoe the pecombat main phase ends. 1887 506.6e If a spell states that it may be cast “only before [a particular point in the combat phase],” but the stated point doesn’t exist within the relevant combat phase because the declare blockers step and the combat damage step are skipped (see rule 508.8), then the spell may be cast only before the declare attackers step ends. If the stated point doesn’t exist because the relevant combat phase has been skipped, then the spell may be cast only before the precombat main phase ends.
1888 1888
1889 506.6f If a spell states that it may be cast “only duing combat afte blockes ae declaed,” but the declae blockes step is skipped that combat phase (see ule 508.8), then the spell may not be cast duing that combat phase. 1889 506.6f If a spell states that it may be cast “only during combat after blockers are declared,” but the declare blockers step is skipped that combat phase (see rule 508.8), then the spell may not be cast during that combat phase.
1890 1890
1891 506.6g Rules 506.6 and 506.6a–f apply to abilities that state that they may be activated only at cetain times with espect to combat just as they apply to spells that state that they may be cast only at cetain times with espect to combat. 1891 506.6g Rules 506.6 and 506.6a–f apply to abilities that state that they may be activated only at certain times with respect to combat just as they apply to spells that state that they may be cast only at certain times with respect to combat.
1892 1892
1893 507. Beginning of Combat Step 1893 507. Beginning of Combat Step
1894 1894
1895 507.1. Fist, if the game being played is a multiplaye game in which the active playe’s opponents don’t all automatically become defending playes, the active playe chooses one of thei opponents. That playe becomes the defending playe. This tun-based action doesn’t use the stack. (See ule 506.2.) 1895 507.1. First, if the game being played is a multiplayer game in which the active player’s opponents don’t all automatically become defending players, the active player chooses one of their opponents. That player becomes the defending player. This turn-based action doesn’t use the stack. (See rule 506.2.)
1896 1896
1897 507.2. Second, the active playe gets pioity. (See ule 117, “Timing and Pioity.”) 1897 507.2. Second, the active player gets priority. (See rule 117, “Timing and Priority.”)
1898 1898
1899 508. Declae Attackes Step 1899 508. Declare Attackers Step
1900 1900
1901 508.1. Fist, the active playe declaes attackes. This tun-based action doesn’t use the stack. To declae attackes, the active playe follows the steps below, in ode. If at any point duing the declaation of attackes, the active playe is unable to comply with any of the steps listed below, the declaation is illegal; the game etuns to the moment befoe the declaation (see ule 722, “Handling Illegal Actions”). 1901 508.1. First, the active player declares attackers. This turn-based action doesn’t use the stack. To declare attackers, the active player follows the steps below, in order. If at any point during the declaration of attackers, the active player is unable to comply with any of the steps listed below, the declaration is illegal; the game returns to the moment before the declaration (see rule 722, “Handling Illegal Actions”).
1902 1902
1903 508.1a The active playe chooses which ceatues that they contol, if any, will attack. The chosen ceatues must be untapped, and each one must eithe have haste o have been contolled by the active playe continuously since the tun began. 1903 508.1a The active player chooses which creatures that they control, if any, will attack. The chosen creatures must be untapped, and each one must either have haste or have been controlled by the active player continuously since the turn began.
1904 1904
1905 508.1b If the defending playe contols any planeswalkes, o the game allows the active playe to attack multiple othe playes, the active playe announces which playe o planeswalke each of the chosen ceatues is attacking. 1905 508.1b If the defending player controls any planeswalkers, or the game allows the active player to attack multiple other players, the active player announces which player or planeswalker each of the chosen creatures is attacking.
1906 1906
1907 508.1c The active playe checks each ceatue they contol to see whethe it’s affected by any estictions (effects that say a ceatue can’t attack, o that it can’t attack unless some condition is met). If any estictions ae being disobeyed, the declaation of attackes is illegal. 1907 508.1c The active player checks each creature they control to see whether it’s affected by any restrictions (effects that say a creature can’t attack, or that it can’t attack unless some condition is met). If any restrictions are being disobeyed, the declaration of attackers is illegal.
1908 Example: A playe contols two ceatues, each with a estiction that states “[This ceatue] can’t attack alone.” It’s legal to declae both as attackes. 1908 Example: A player controls two creatures, each with a restriction that states “[This creature] can’t attack alone.” It’s legal to declare both as attackers.
1909 1909
1910 508.1d The active playe checks each ceatue they contol to see whethe it’s affected by any equiements (effects that say a ceatue attacks if able, o that it attacks if some condition is met). If the numbe of equiements that ae being obeyed is fewe than the maximum possible numbe of equiements that could be obeyed without disobeying any estictions, the declaation of attackes is illegal. If a ceatue can’t attack unless a playe pays a cost, that playe is not equied to pay that cost, even if attacking with that ceatue would incease the numbe of equiements being obeyed. If a equiement that says a ceatue attacks if able duing a cetain tun efes to a tun with multiple combat phases, the ceatue attacks if able duing each declae attackes step in that tun. 1910 508.1d The active player checks each creature they control to see whether it’s affected by any requirements (effects that say a creature attacks if able, or that it attacks if some condition is met). If the number of requirements that are being obeyed is fewer than the maximum possible number of requirements that could be obeyed without disobeying any restrictions, the declaration of attackers is illegal. If a creature can’t attack unless a player pays a cost, that player is not required to pay that cost, even if attacking with that creature would increase the number of requirements being obeyed. If a requirement that says a creature attacks if able during a certain turn refers to a turn with multiple combat phases, the creature attacks if able during each declare attackers step in that turn.
1911 Example: A playe contols two ceatues: one that “attacks if able” and one with no abilities. An effect states “No moe than one ceatue can attack each tun.” The only legal attack is fo just the ceatue that “attacks if able” to attack. It’s illegal to attack with the othe ceatue, attack with both, o attack with neithe. 1911 Example: A player controls two creatures: one that “attacks if able” and one with no abilities. An effect states “No more than one creature can attack each turn.” The only legal attack is for just the creature that “attacks if able” to attack. It’s illegal to attack with the other creature, attack with both, or attack with neither.
1912 1912
1913 508.1e If any of the chosen ceatues have banding o a “bands with othe” ability, the active playe announces which ceatues, if any, ae banded with which. (See ule 702.21, “Banding.”) 1913 508.1e If any of the chosen creatures have banding or a “bands with other” ability, the active player announces which creatures, if any, are banded with which. (See rule 702.21, “Banding.”)
1914 1914
1915 508.1f The active playe taps the chosen ceatues. Tapping a ceatue when it’s declaed as an attacke isn’t a cost; attacking simply causes ceatues to become tapped. 1915 508.1f The active player taps the chosen creatures. Tapping a creature when it’s declared as an attacker isn’t a cost; attacking simply causes creatures to become tapped.
1916 1916
1917 508.1g If thee ae any optional costs to attack with the chosen ceatues (expessed as costs a playe may pay “as” a ceatue attacks), the active playe chooses which, if any, they will pay. 1917 508.1g If there are any optional costs to attack with the chosen creatures (expressed as costs a player may pay “as” a creature attacks), the active player chooses which, if any, they will pay.
1918 1918
1919 508.1h If any of the chosen ceatues equie paying costs to attack, o if any optional costs to attack wee chosen, the active playe detemines the total cost to attack. Costs may include paying mana, tapping pemanents, sacificing pemanents, discading cads, and so on. Once the total cost is detemined, it becomes “locked in.” If effects would change the total cost afte this time, ignoe this change. 1919 508.1h If any of the chosen creatures require paying costs to attack, or if any optional costs to attack were chosen, the active player determines the total cost to attack. Costs may include paying mana, tapping permanents, sacrificing permanents, discarding cards, and so on. Once the total cost is determined, it becomes “locked in.” If effects would change the total cost after this time, ignore this change.
1920 1920
1921 508.1i If any of the costs equie mana, the active playe then has a chance to activate mana abilities (see ule 605, “Mana Abilities”). 1921 508.1i If any of the costs require mana, the active player then has a chance to activate mana abilities (see rule 605, “Mana Abilities”).
1922 1922
1923 508.1j Once the playe has enough mana in thei mana pool, they pay all costs in any ode. Patial payments ae not allowed. 1923 508.1j Once the player has enough mana in their mana pool, they pay all costs in any order. Partial payments are not allowed.
1924 1924
1925 508.1k Each chosen ceatue still contolled by the active playe becomes an attacking ceatue. It emains an attacking ceatue until it’s emoved fom combat o the combat phase ends, whicheve comes fist. See ule 506.4. 1925 508.1k Each chosen creature still controlled by the active player becomes an attacking creature. It remains an attacking creature until it’s removed from combat or the combat phase ends, whichever comes first. See rule 506.4.
1926 1926
1927 508.1m Any abilities that tigge on attackes being declaed tigge. 1927 508.1m Any abilities that trigger on attackers being declared trigger.
1928 1928
1929 508.2. Second, the active playe gets pioity. (See ule 117, “Timing and Pioity.”) 1929 508.2. Second, the active player gets priority. (See rule 117, “Timing and Priority.”)
1930 1930
1931 508.2a Abilities that tigge on a ceatue attacking tigge only at the point the ceatue is declaed as an attacke. They will not tigge if a ceatue attacks and then that ceatue’s chaacteistics change to match the ability’s tigge condition. 1931 508.2a Abilities that trigger on a creature attacking trigger only at the point the creature is declared as an attacker. They will not trigger if a creature attacks and then that creature’s characteristics change to match the ability’s trigger condition.
1932 Example: A pemanent has the ability “Wheneve a geen ceatue attacks, destoy that ceatue at end of combat.” If a blue ceatue attacks and is late tuned geen, the ability will not tigge. 1932 Example: A permanent has the ability “Whenever a green creature attacks, destroy that creature at end of combat.” If a blue creature attacks and is later turned green, the ability will not trigger.
1933 1933
1934 508.2b Any abilities that tiggeed on attackes being declaed o that tiggeed duing the pocess descibed in ules 508.1 ae put onto the stack befoe the active playe gets pioity; the ode in which they tiggeed doesn’t matte. (See ule 603, “Handling Tiggeed Abilities.”) 1934 508.2b Any abilities that triggered on attackers being declared or that triggered during the process described in rules 508.1 are put onto the stack before the active player gets priority; the order in which they triggered doesn’t matter. (See rule 603, “Handling Triggered Abilities.”)
1935 1935
1936 508.3. Tiggeed abilities that tigge on attackes being declaed may have diffeent tigge conditions. 1936 508.3. Triggered abilities that trigger on attackers being declared may have different trigger conditions.
1937 1937
1938 508.3a An ability that eads “Wheneve [a ceatue] attacks, . . .” tigges if that ceatue is declaed as an attacke. Similaly, “Wheneve [a ceatue] attacks [a playe o planeswalke], . . .” tigges if that ceatue is declaed as an attacke attacking that playe o planeswalke. Such abilities won’t tigge if a ceatue is put onto the battlefield attacking. 1938 508.3a An ability that reads “Whenever [a creature] attacks, . . .” triggers if that creature is declared as an attacker. Similarly, “Whenever [a creature] attacks [a player or planeswalker], . . .” triggers if that creature is declared as an attacker attacking that player or planeswalker. Such abilities won’t trigger if a creature is put onto the battlefield attacking.
1939 1939
1940 508.3b An ability that eads “Wheneve [a playe o planeswalke] is attacked, . . .” tigges if one o moe ceatues ae declaed as attackes attacking that playe o planeswalke. It won’t tigge if a ceatue is put onto the battlefield attacking that playe o planeswalke. 1940 508.3b An ability that reads “Whenever [a player or planeswalker] is attacked, . . .” triggers if one or more creatures are declared as attackers attacking that player or planeswalker. It won’t trigger if a creature is put onto the battlefield attacking that player or planeswalker.
1941 1941
1942 508.3c An ability that eads “Wheneve [a playe] attacks with [a ceatue], . . .” tigges wheneve a ceatue that playe contols is declaed as an attacke. 1942 508.3c An ability that reads “Whenever [a player] attacks with [a creature], . . .” triggers whenever a creature that player controls is declared as an attacker.
1943 1943
1944 508.3d An ability that eads “Wheneve [a ceatue] attacks and isn’t blocked, . . .” tigges duing the declae blockes step, not the declae attackes step. See ule 509.5g. 1944 508.3d An ability that reads “Whenever [a creature] attacks and isn’t blocked, . . .” triggers during the declare blockers step, not the declare attackers step. See rule 509.5g.
1945 1945
1946 508.4. If a ceatue is put onto the battlefield attacking, its contolle chooses which defending playe o which planeswalke a defending playe contols it’s attacking as it entes the battlefield (unless the effect that put it onto the battlefield specifies what it’s attacking). Similaly, if an effect states that a ceatue is attacking, its contolle chooses which defending playe o which planeswalke a defending playe contols it’s attacking it becomes attacking (unless the effect has aleady specified). Such ceatues ae “attacking” but, fo the puposes of tigge events and effects, they neve “attacked.” 1946 508.4. If a creature is put onto the battlefield attacking, its controller chooses which defending player or which planeswalker a defending player controls it’s attacking as it enters the battlefield (unless the effect that put it onto the battlefield specifies what it’s attacking). Similarly, if an effect states that a creature is attacking, its controller chooses which defending player or which planeswalker a defending player controls it’s attacking it becomes attacking (unless the effect has already specified). Such creatures are “attacking” but, for the purposes of trigger events and effects, they never “attacked.”
1947 1947
1948 508.4a If the effect that puts a ceatue onto the battlefield attacking specifies it’s attacking a cetain playe, and that playe is no longe in the game when the effect esolves, the ceatue is put onto the battlefield but is neve consideed an attacking ceatue. The same is tue if the effect specifies a ceatue is put onto the battlefield attacking a planeswalke and that planeswalke is no longe on the battlefield o is no longe a planeswalke when the effect esolves. 1948 508.4a If the effect that puts a creature onto the battlefield attacking specifies it’s attacking a certain player, and that player is no longer in the game when the effect resolves, the creature is put onto the battlefield but is never considered an attacking creature. The same is true if the effect specifies a creature is put onto the battlefield attacking a planeswalker and that planeswalker is no longer on the battlefield or is no longer a planeswalker when the effect resolves.
1949 1949
1950 508.4b If the effect that states a ceatue is attacking specifies it’s attacking a cetain playe, and that playe is no longe in the game when the effect esolves, the ceatue doesn’t become an attacking ceatue. The same is tue if the effect specifies a ceatue is attacking a planeswalke and that planeswalke is no longe on the battlefield o is no longe a planeswalke when the effect esolves. 1950 508.4b If the effect that states a creature is attacking specifies it’s attacking a certain player, and that player is no longer in the game when the effect resolves, the creature doesn’t become an attacking creature. The same is true if the effect specifies a creature is attacking a planeswalker and that planeswalker is no longer on the battlefield or is no longer a planeswalker when the effect resolves.
1951 1951
1952 508.4c A ceatue that’s put onto the battlefield attacking o that is stated to be attacking isn’t affected by equiements o estictions that apply to the declaation of attackes. 1952 508.4c A creature that’s put onto the battlefield attacking or that is stated to be attacking isn’t affected by requirements or restrictions that apply to the declaration of attackers.
1953 1953
1954 508.5. If an ability of an attacking ceatue efes to a defending playe, o a spell o ability efes to both an attacking ceatue and a defending playe, then unless othewise specified, the defending playe it’s efeing to is the playe that ceatue is attacking, o the contolle of the planeswalke that ceatue is attacking. If that ceatue is no longe attacking, the defending playe it’s efeing to is the playe that ceatue was attacking befoe it was emoved fom combat o the contolle of the planeswalke that ceatue was attacking befoe it was emoved fom combat. 1954 508.5. If an ability of an attacking creature refers to a defending player, or a spell or ability refers to both an attacking creature and a defending player, then unless otherwise specified, the defending player it’s referring to is the player that creature is attacking, or the controller of the planeswalker that creature is attacking. If that creature is no longer attacking, the defending player it’s referring to is the player that creature was attacking before it was removed from combat or the controller of the planeswalker that creature was attacking before it was removed from combat.
1955 1955
1956 508.5a In a multiplaye game, any ule, object, o effect that efes to a “defending playe” efes to one specific defending playe, not to all of the defending playes. If a spell o ability could apply to multiple attacking ceatues, the appopiate defending playe is individually detemined fo each of those attacking ceatues. If thee ae multiple defending playes that could be chosen, the contolle of the spell o ability chooses one. 1956 508.5a In a multiplayer game, any rule, object, or effect that refers to a “defending player” refers to one specific defending player, not to all of the defending players. If a spell or ability could apply to multiple attacking creatures, the appropriate defending player is individually determined for each of those attacking creatures. If there are multiple defending players that could be chosen, the controller of the spell or ability chooses one.
1957 1957
1958 508.6. A playe is “attacking [a playe]” if the fist playe contols a ceatue that is attacking the second playe. A playe has “attacked [a playe]” if the fist playe declaed one o moe ceatues as attackes attacking the second playe. 1958 508.6. A player is “attacking [a player]” if the first player controls a creature that is attacking the second player. A player has “attacked [a player]” if the first player declared one or more creatures as attackers attacking the second player.
1959 1959
1960 508.7. One cad (Potal Mage) allows a playe to eselect which playe o planeswalke a ceatue is attacking. 1960 508.7. One card (Portal Mage) allows a player to reselect which player or planeswalker a creature is attacking.
1961 1961
1962 508.7a The attacking ceatue isn’t emoved fom combat and it isn’t consideed to have attacked a second time. That ceatue is attacking the eselected playe o planeswalke, but it’s still consideed to have attacked the playe o planeswalke chosen as it was declaed as an attacke. 1962 508.7a The attacking creature isn’t removed from combat and it isn’t considered to have attacked a second time. That creature is attacking the reselected player or planeswalker, but it’s still considered to have attacked the player or planeswalker chosen as it was declared as an attacker.
1963 1963
1964 508.7b While eselecting which playe o planeswalke a ceatue is attacking, that ceatue isn’t affected by equiements o estictions that apply to the declaation of attackes. 1964 508.7b While reselecting which player or planeswalker a creature is attacking, that creature isn’t affected by requirements or restrictions that apply to the declaration of attackers.
1965 1965
1966 508.7c The eselected playe o planeswalke must be an opponent of the attacking ceatue’s contolle, o a planeswalke contolled by an opponent of the attacking ceatue’s contolle. 1966 508.7c The reselected player or planeswalker must be an opponent of the attacking creature’s controller, or a planeswalker controlled by an opponent of the attacking creature’s controller.
1967 1967
1968 508.7d In a multiplaye game not using the attack multiple playes option (see ule 802), the eselected playe o planeswalke must be the chosen defending playe o a planeswalke contolled by that playe. 1968 508.7d In a multiplayer game not using the attack multiple players option (see rule 802), the reselected player or planeswalker must be the chosen defending player or a planeswalker controlled by that player.
1969 1969
1970 508.7e In a multiplaye game using the limited ange of influence option (see ule 801), the eselected playe o planeswalke must be within the ange of influence of the attacking ceatue’s contolle. 1970 508.7e In a multiplayer game using the limited range of influence option (see rule 801), the reselected player or planeswalker must be within the range of influence of the attacking creature’s controller.
1971 1971
1972 508.8. If no ceatues ae declaed as attackes o put onto the battlefield attacking, skip the declae blockes and combat damage steps. 1972 508.8. If no creatures are declared as attackers or put onto the battlefield attacking, skip the declare blockers and combat damage steps.
1973 1973
1974 509. Declae Blockes Step 1974 509. Declare Blockers Step
1975 1975
1976 509.1. Fist, the defending playe declaes blockes. This tun-based action doesn’t use the stack. To declae blockes, the defending playe follows the steps below, in ode. If at any point duing the declaation of blockes, the defending playe is unable to comply with any of the steps listed below, the declaation is illegal; the game etuns to the moment befoe the declaation (see ule 722, “Handling Illegal Actions”). 1976 509.1. First, the defending player declares blockers. This turn-based action doesn’t use the stack. To declare blockers, the defending player follows the steps below, in order. If at any point during the declaration of blockers, the defending player is unable to comply with any of the steps listed below, the declaration is illegal; the game returns to the moment before the declaration (see rule 722, “Handling Illegal Actions”).
1977 1977
1978 509.1a The defending playe chooses which ceatues they contol, if any, will block. The chosen ceatues must be untapped. Fo each of the chosen ceatues, the defending playe chooses one ceatue fo it to block that’s attacking that playe o a planeswalke they contol. 1978 509.1a The defending player chooses which creatures they control, if any, will block. The chosen creatures must be untapped. For each of the chosen creatures, the defending player chooses one creature for it to block that’s attacking that player or a planeswalker they control.
1979 1979
1980 509.1b The defending playe checks each ceatue they contol to see whethe it’s affected by any estictions (effects that say a ceatue can’t block, o that it can’t block unless some condition is met). If any estictions ae being disobeyed, the declaation of blockes is illegal. 1980 509.1b The defending player checks each creature they control to see whether it’s affected by any restrictions (effects that say a creature can’t block, or that it can’t block unless some condition is met). If any restrictions are being disobeyed, the declaration of blockers is illegal.
1981 A estiction may be ceated by an evasion ability (a static ability an attacking ceatue has that esticts what can block it). If an attacking ceatue gains o loses an evasion ability afte a legal block has been declaed, it doesn’t affect that block. Diffeent evasion abilities ae cumulative. 1981 A restriction may be created by an evasion ability (a static ability an attacking creature has that restricts what can block it). If an attacking creature gains or loses an evasion ability after a legal block has been declared, it doesn’t affect that block. Different evasion abilities are cumulative.
1982 Example: An attacking ceatue with flying and shadow can’t be blocked by a ceatue with flying but without shadow. 1982 Example: An attacking creature with flying and shadow can’t be blocked by a creature with flying but without shadow.
1983 1983
1984 509.1c The defending playe checks each ceatue they contol to see whethe it’s affected by any equiements (effects that say a ceatue must block, o that it must block if some condition is met). If the numbe of equiements that ae being obeyed is fewe than the maximum possible numbe of equiements that could be obeyed without disobeying any estictions, the declaation of blockes is illegal. If a ceatue can’t block unless a playe pays a cost, that playe is not equied to pay that cost, even if blocking with that ceatue would incease the numbe of equiements being obeyed. If a equiement that says a ceatue blocks if able duing a cetain tun efes to a tun with multiple combat phases, the ceatue blocks if able duing each declae blockes step in that tun. 1984 509.1c The defending player checks each creature they control to see whether it’s affected by any requirements (effects that say a creature must block, or that it must block if some condition is met). If the number of requirements that are being obeyed is fewer than the maximum possible number of requirements that could be obeyed without disobeying any restrictions, the declaration of blockers is illegal. If a creature can’t block unless a player pays a cost, that player is not required to pay that cost, even if blocking with that creature would increase the number of requirements being obeyed. If a requirement that says a creature blocks if able during a certain turn refers to a turn with multiple combat phases, the creature blocks if able during each declare blockers step in that turn.
1985 Example: A playe contols one ceatue that “blocks if able” and anothe ceatue with no abilities. If a ceatue with menace attacks that playe, the playe must block with both ceatues. Having only the fist ceatue block violates the estiction ceated by menace (the attacking ceatue can’t be blocked except by two o moe ceatues). Having only the second ceatue block violates both the menace estiction and the fist ceatue’s blocking equiement. Having neithe ceatue block fulfills the estiction but not the equiement. 1985 Example: A player controls one creature that “blocks if able” and another creature with no abilities. If a creature with menace attacks that player, the player must block with both creatures. Having only the first creature block violates the restriction created by menace (the attacking creature can’t be blocked except by two or more creatures). Having only the second creature block violates both the menace restriction and the first creature’s blocking requirement. Having neither creature block fulfills the restriction but not the requirement.
1986 1986
1987 509.1d If any of the chosen ceatues equie paying costs to block, the defending playe detemines the total cost to block. Costs may include paying mana, tapping pemanents, sacificing pemanents, discading cads, and so on. Once the total cost is detemined, it becomes “locked in.” If effects would change the total cost afte this time, ignoe this change. 1987 509.1d If any of the chosen creatures require paying costs to block, the defending player determines the total cost to block. Costs may include paying mana, tapping permanents, sacrificing permanents, discarding cards, and so on. Once the total cost is determined, it becomes “locked in.” If effects would change the total cost after this time, ignore this change.
1988 1988
1989 509.1e If any of the costs equie mana, the defending playe then has a chance to activate mana abilities (see ule 605, “Mana Abilities”). 1989 509.1e If any of the costs require mana, the defending player then has a chance to activate mana abilities (see rule 605, “Mana Abilities”).
1990 1990
1991 509.1f Once the playe has enough mana in thei mana pool, they pay all costs in any ode. Patial payments ae not allowed. 1991 509.1f Once the player has enough mana in their mana pool, they pay all costs in any order. Partial payments are not allowed.
1992 1992
1993 509.1g Each chosen ceatue still contolled by the defending playe becomes a blocking ceatue. Each one is blocking the attacking ceatues chosen fo it. It emains a blocking ceatue until it’s emoved fom combat o the combat phase ends, whicheve comes fist. See ule 506.4. 1993 509.1g Each chosen creature still controlled by the defending player becomes a blocking creature. Each one is blocking the attacking creatures chosen for it. It remains a blocking creature until it’s removed from combat or the combat phase ends, whichever comes first. See rule 506.4.
1994 1994
1995 509.1h An attacking ceatue with one o moe ceatues declaed as blockes fo it becomes a blocked ceatue; one with no ceatues declaed as blockes fo it becomes an unblocked ceatue. This emains unchanged until the ceatue is emoved fom combat, an effect says that it becomes blocked o unblocked, o the combat phase ends, whicheve comes fist. A ceatue emains blocked even if all the ceatues blocking it ae emoved fom combat. 1995 509.1h An attacking creature with one or more creatures declared as blockers for it becomes a blocked creature; one with no creatures declared as blockers for it becomes an unblocked creature. This remains unchanged until the creature is removed from combat, an effect says that it becomes blocked or unblocked, or the combat phase ends, whichever comes first. A creature remains blocked even if all the creatures blocking it are removed from combat.
1996 1996
1997 509.1i Any abilities that tigge on blockes being declaed tigge. See ule 509.4 fo moe infomation. 1997 509.1i Any abilities that trigger on blockers being declared trigger. See rule 509.4 for more information.
1998 1998
1999 509.2. Second, fo each attacking ceatue that’s become blocked, the active playe announces that ceatue’s damage assignment ode, which consists of the ceatues blocking it in an ode of that playe’s choice. (Duing the combat damage step, an attacking ceatue can’t assign combat damage to a ceatue that’s blocking it unless each ceatue ahead of that blocking ceatue in its ode is assigned lethal damage.) This tun-based action doesn’t use the stack. 1999 509.2. Second, for each attacking creature that’s become blocked, the active player announces that creature’s damage assignment order, which consists of the creatures blocking it in an order of that player’s choice. (During the combat damage step, an attacking creature can’t assign combat damage to a creature that’s blocking it unless each creature ahead of that blocking creature in its order is assigned lethal damage.) This turn-based action doesn’t use the stack.
2000 Example: Vastwood Goge is blocked by Llanowa Elves, Runeclaw Bea, and Sea Angel. Vastwood Goge’s contolle announces the Vastwood Goge’s damage assignment ode as Sea Angel, then Llanowa Elves, then Runeclaw Bea. 2000 Example: Vastwood Gorger is blocked by Llanowar Elves, Runeclaw Bear, and Serra Angel. Vastwood Gorger’s controller announces the Vastwood Gorger’s damage assignment order as Serra Angel, then Llanowar Elves, then Runeclaw Bear.
2001 2001
2002 509.2a Duing the declae blockes step, if a blocking ceatue is emoved fom combat o a spell o ability causes it to stop blocking an attacking ceatue, the blocking ceatue is emoved fom all elevant damage assignment odes. The elative ode among the emaining blocking ceatues is unchanged. 2002 509.2a During the declare blockers step, if a blocking creature is removed from combat or a spell or ability causes it to stop blocking an attacking creature, the blocking creature is removed from all relevant damage assignment orders. The relative order among the remaining blocking creatures is unchanged.
2003 2003
2004 509.3. Thid, fo each blocking ceatue, the defending playe announces that ceatue’s damage assignment ode, which consists of the ceatues it’s blocking in an ode of that playe’s choice. (Duing the combat damage step, a blocking ceatue can’t assign combat damage to a ceatue it’s blocking unless each ceatue ahead of that blocked ceatue in its ode is assigned lethal damage.) This tun-based action doesn’t use the stack. 2004 509.3. Third, for each blocking creature, the defending player announces that creature’s damage assignment order, which consists of the creatures it’s blocking in an order of that player’s choice. (During the combat damage step, a blocking creature can’t assign combat damage to a creature it’s blocking unless each creature ahead of that blocked creature in its order is assigned lethal damage.) This turn-based action doesn’t use the stack.
2005 2005
2006 509.3a Duing the declae blockes step, if an attacking ceatue is emoved fom combat o a spell o ability causes it to stop being blocked by a blocking ceatue, the attacking ceatue is emoved fom all elevant damage assignment odes. The elative ode among the emaining attacking ceatues is unchanged. 2006 509.3a During the declare blockers step, if an attacking creature is removed from combat or a spell or ability causes it to stop being blocked by a blocking creature, the attacking creature is removed from all relevant damage assignment orders. The relative order among the remaining attacking creatures is unchanged.
2007 2007
2008 509.4. Fouth, the active playe gets pioity. (See ule 117, “Timing and Pioity.”) 2008 509.4. Fourth, the active player gets priority. (See rule 117, “Timing and Priority.”)
2009 2009
2010 509.4a Any abilities that tiggeed on blockes being declaed o that tiggeed duing the pocess descibed in ules 509.1–3 ae put onto the stack befoe the active playe gets pioity; the ode in which they tiggeed doesn’t matte. (See ule 603, “Handling Tiggeed Abilities.”) 2010 509.4a Any abilities that triggered on blockers being declared or that triggered during the process described in rules 509.1–3 are put onto the stack before the active player gets priority; the order in which they triggered doesn’t matter. (See rule 603, “Handling Triggered Abilities.”)
2011 2011
2012 509.5. Tiggeed abilities that tigge on blockes being declaed may have diffeent tigge conditions. 2012 509.5. Triggered abilities that trigger on blockers being declared may have different trigger conditions.
2013 2013
2014 509.5a An ability that eads “Wheneve [a ceatue] blocks, . . .” geneally tigges only once each combat fo that ceatue, even if it blocks multiple ceatues. It tigges if the ceatue is declaed as a blocke. It will also tigge if that ceatue becomes a blocke as the esult of an effect, but only if it wasn’t a blocking ceatue at that time. (See ule 509.1g.) It won’t tigge if the ceatue is put onto the battlefield blocking. 2014 509.5a An ability that reads “Whenever [a creature] blocks, . . .” generally triggers only once each combat for that creature, even if it blocks multiple creatures. It triggers if the creature is declared as a blocker. It will also trigger if that creature becomes a blocker as the result of an effect, but only if it wasn’t a blocking creature at that time. (See rule 509.1g.) It won’t trigger if the creature is put onto the battlefield blocking.
2015 2015
2016 509.5b An ability that eads “Wheneve [a ceatue] blocks a ceatue, . . .” tigges once fo each attacking ceatue the ceatue with the ability blocks. It tigges if the ceatue is declaed as a blocke. It will also tigge if an effect causes that ceatue to block an attacking ceatue, but only if it wasn’t aleady blocking that attacking ceatue at that time. It won’t tigge if the ceatue is put onto the battlefield blocking. 2016 509.5b An ability that reads “Whenever [a creature] blocks a creature, . . .” triggers once for each attacking creature the creature with the ability blocks. It triggers if the creature is declared as a blocker. It will also trigger if an effect causes that creature to block an attacking creature, but only if it wasn’t already blocking that attacking creature at that time. It won’t trigger if the creature is put onto the battlefield blocking.
2017 2017
2018 509.5c An ability that eads “Wheneve [a ceatue] becomes blocked, . . .” geneally tigges only once each combat fo that ceatue, even if it’s blocked by multiple ceatues. It will tigge if that ceatue becomes blocked by at least one ceatue declaed as a blocke. It will also tigge if that ceatue becomes blocked by an effect o by a ceatue that’s put onto the battlefield as a blocke, but only if the attacking ceatue was an unblocked ceatue at that time. (See ule 509.1h.) 2018 509.5c An ability that reads “Whenever [a creature] becomes blocked, . . .” generally triggers only once each combat for that creature, even if it’s blocked by multiple creatures. It will trigger if that creature becomes blocked by at least one creature declared as a blocker. It will also trigger if that creature becomes blocked by an effect or by a creature that’s put onto the battlefield as a blocker, but only if the attacking creature was an unblocked creature at that time. (See rule 509.1h.)
2019 2019
2020 509.5d An ability that eads “Wheneve [a ceatue] becomes blocked by a ceatue, . . .” tigges once fo each ceatue that blocks the named ceatue. It tigges if a ceatue is declaed as a blocke fo the attacking ceatue. It will also tigge if an effect causes a ceatue to block the attacking ceatue, but only if it wasn’t aleady blocking that attacking ceatue at that time. In addition, it will tigge if a ceatue is put onto the battlefield blocking that ceatue. It won’t tigge if the ceatue becomes blocked by an effect athe than a ceatue. 2020 509.5d An ability that reads “Whenever [a creature] becomes blocked by a creature, . . .” triggers once for each creature that blocks the named creature. It triggers if a creature is declared as a blocker for the attacking creature. It will also trigger if an effect causes a creature to block the attacking creature, but only if it wasn’t already blocking that attacking creature at that time. In addition, it will trigger if a creature is put onto the battlefield blocking that creature. It won’t trigger if the creature becomes blocked by an effect rather than a creature.
2021 2021
2022 509.5e If an ability tigges when a ceatue blocks o becomes blocked by a paticula numbe of ceatues, the ability tigges if the ceatue blocks o is blocked by that many ceatues when blockes ae declaed. Effects that add o emove blockes can also cause such abilities to tigge. This applies to abilities that tigge on a ceatue blocking o being blocked by at least a cetain numbe of ceatues as well. 2022 509.5e If an ability triggers when a creature blocks or becomes blocked by a particular number of creatures, the ability triggers if the creature blocks or is blocked by that many creatures when blockers are declared. Effects that add or remove blockers can also cause such abilities to trigger. This applies to abilities that trigger on a creature blocking or being blocked by at least a certain number of creatures as well.
2023 2023
2024 509.5f If an ability tigges when a ceatue with cetain chaacteistics blocks, it will tigge only if the ceatue has those chaacteistics at the point blockes ae declaed, o at the point an effect causes it to block. If an ability tigges when a ceatue with cetain chaacteistics becomes blocked, it will tigge only if the ceatue has those chaacteistics at the point it becomes a blocked ceatue. If an ability tigges when a ceatue becomes blocked by a ceatue with cetain chaacteistics, it will tigge only if the latte ceatue has those chaacteistics at the point it becomes a blocking ceatue. None of those abilities will tigge if the elevant ceatue’s chaacteistics change to match the ability’s tigge condition late on. 2024 509.5f If an ability triggers when a creature with certain characteristics blocks, it will trigger only if the creature has those characteristics at the point blockers are declared, or at the point an effect causes it to block. If an ability triggers when a creature with certain characteristics becomes blocked, it will trigger only if the creature has those characteristics at the point it becomes a blocked creature. If an ability triggers when a creature becomes blocked by a creature with certain characteristics, it will trigger only if the latter creature has those characteristics at the point it becomes a blocking creature. None of those abilities will trigger if the relevant creature’s characteristics change to match the ability’s trigger condition later on.
2025 Example: A ceatue has the ability “Wheneve this ceatue becomes blocked by a white ceatue, destoy that ceatue at end of combat.” If the ceatue becomes blocked by a black ceatue that is late tuned white, the ability will not tigge. 2025 Example: A creature has the ability “Whenever this creature becomes blocked by a white creature, destroy that creature at end of combat.” If the creature becomes blocked by a black creature that is later turned white, the ability will not trigger.
2026 2026
2027 509.5g An ability that eads “Wheneve [a ceatue] attacks and isn’t blocked, . . .” tigges if no ceatues ae declaed as blockes fo that ceatue. It will tigge even if the ceatue was neve declaed as an attacke (fo example, if it enteed the battlefield attacking). It won’t tigge if the attacking ceatue is blocked and then all its blockes ae emoved fom combat. 2027 509.5g An ability that reads “Whenever [a creature] attacks and isn’t blocked, . . .” triggers if no creatures are declared as blockers for that creature. It will trigger even if the creature was never declared as an attacker (for example, if it entered the battlefield attacking). It won’t trigger if the attacking creature is blocked and then all its blockers are removed from combat.
2028 2028
2029 509.6. If a spell o ability causes a ceatue on the battlefield to block an attacking ceatue, the active playe announces the blocking ceatue’s placement in the attacking ceatue’s damage assignment ode. The elative ode among the emaining blocking ceatues is unchanged. Then the defending playe announces the attacking ceatue’s placement in the blocking ceatue’s damage assignment ode. The elative ode among the emaining attacking ceatues is unchanged. This is done as pat of the blocking effect. 2029 509.6. If a spell or ability causes a creature on the battlefield to block an attacking creature, the active player announces the blocking creature’s placement in the attacking creature’s damage assignment order. The relative order among the remaining blocking creatures is unchanged. Then the defending player announces the attacking creature’s placement in the blocking creature’s damage assignment order. The relative order among the remaining attacking creatures is unchanged. This is done as part of the blocking effect.
2030 2030
2031 509.7. If a ceatue is put onto the battlefield blocking, its contolle chooses which attacking ceatue it’s blocking as it entes the battlefield (unless the effect that put it onto the battlefield specifies what it’s blocking), then the active playe announces the new ceatue’s placement in the blocked ceatue’s damage assignment ode. The elative ode among the emaining blocking ceatues is unchanged. A ceatue put onto the battlefield this way is “blocking” but, fo the puposes of tigge events and effects, it neve “blocked.” 2031 509.7. If a creature is put onto the battlefield blocking, its controller chooses which attacking creature it’s blocking as it enters the battlefield (unless the effect that put it onto the battlefield specifies what it’s blocking), then the active player announces the new creature’s placement in the blocked creature’s damage assignment order. The relative order among the remaining blocking creatures is unchanged. A creature put onto the battlefield this way is “blocking” but, for the purposes of trigger events and effects, it never “blocked.”
2032 Example: Giant Spide is blocked by Canyon Minotau. The defending playe casts Flash Foliage, which ceates a Sapoling ceatue token blocking the Giant Spide. Giant Spide’s contolle announces the Giant Spide’s damage assignment ode as the Sapoling token, then Canyon Minotau. 2032 Example: Giant Spider is blocked by Canyon Minotaur. The defending player casts Flash Foliage, which creates a Saproling creature token blocking the Giant Spider. Giant Spider’s controller announces the Giant Spider’s damage assignment order as the Saproling token, then Canyon Minotaur.
2033 2033
2034 509.7a If the effect that puts a ceatue onto the battlefield blocking specifies it’s blocking a cetain ceatue and that ceatue is no longe attacking, the ceatue is put onto the battlefield but is neve consideed a blocking ceatue. The same is tue if the contolle of the ceatue that’s put onto the battlefield blocking isn’t a defending playe fo the specified attacking ceatue. 2034 509.7a If the effect that puts a creature onto the battlefield blocking specifies it’s blocking a certain creature and that creature is no longer attacking, the creature is put onto the battlefield but is never considered a blocking creature. The same is true if the controller of the creature that’s put onto the battlefield blocking isn’t a defending player for the specified attacking creature.
2035 2035
2036 509.7b A ceatue that’s put onto the battlefield blocking isn’t affected by equiements o estictions that apply to the declaation of blockes. 2036 509.7b A creature that’s put onto the battlefield blocking isn’t affected by requirements or restrictions that apply to the declaration of blockers.
2037 2037
2038 510. Combat Damage Step 2038 510. Combat Damage Step
2039 2039
2040 510.1. Fist, the active playe announces how each attacking ceatue assigns its combat damage, then the defending playe announces how each blocking ceatue assigns its combat damage. This tun-based action doesn’t use the stack. A playe assigns a ceatue’s combat damage accoding to the following ules: 2040 510.1. First, the active player announces how each attacking creature assigns its combat damage, then the defending player announces how each blocking creature assigns its combat damage. This turn-based action doesn’t use the stack. A player assigns a creature’s combat damage according to the following rules:
2041 2041
2042 510.1a Each attacking ceatue and each blocking ceatue assigns combat damage equal to its powe. Ceatues that would assign 0 o less damage this way don’t assign combat damage at all. 2042 510.1a Each attacking creature and each blocking creature assigns combat damage equal to its power. Creatures that would assign 0 or less damage this way don’t assign combat damage at all.
2043 2043
2044 510.1b An unblocked ceatue assigns its combat damage to the playe o planeswalke it’s attacking. If it isn’t cuently attacking anything (if, fo example, it was attacking a planeswalke that has left the battlefield), it assigns no combat damage. 2044 510.1b An unblocked creature assigns its combat damage to the player or planeswalker it’s attacking. If it isn’t currently attacking anything (if, for example, it was attacking a planeswalker that has left the battlefield), it assigns no combat damage.
2045 2045
2046 510.1c A blocked ceatue assigns its combat damage to the ceatues blocking it. If no ceatues ae cuently blocking it (if, fo example, they wee destoyed o emoved fom combat), it assigns no combat damage. If exactly one ceatue is blocking it, it assigns all its combat damage to that ceatue. If two o moe ceatues ae blocking it, it assigns its combat damage to those ceatues accoding to the damage assignment ode announced fo it. This may allow the blocked ceatue to divide its combat damage. Howeve, it can’t assign combat damage to a ceatue that’s blocking it unless, when combat damage assignments ae complete, each ceatue that pecedes that blocking ceatue in its ode is assigned lethal damage. When checking fo assigned lethal damage, take into account damage aleady maked on the ceatue and damage fom othe ceatues that’s being assigned duing the same combat damage step, but not any abilities o effects that might change the amount of damage that’s actually dealt. An amount of damage that’s geate than a ceatue’s lethal damage may be assigned to it. 2046 510.1c A blocked creature assigns its combat damage to the creatures blocking it. If no creatures are currently blocking it (if, for example, they were destroyed or removed from combat), it assigns no combat damage. If exactly one creature is blocking it, it assigns all its combat damage to that creature. If two or more creatures are blocking it, it assigns its combat damage to those creatures according to the damage assignment order announced for it. This may allow the blocked creature to divide its combat damage. However, it can’t assign combat damage to a creature that’s blocking it unless, when combat damage assignments are complete, each creature that precedes that blocking creature in its order is assigned lethal damage. When checking for assigned lethal damage, take into account damage already marked on the creature and damage from other creatures that’s being assigned during the same combat damage step, but not any abilities or effects that might change the amount of damage that’s actually dealt. An amount of damage that’s greater than a creature’s lethal damage may be assigned to it.
2047 Example: The damage assignment ode of an attacking Vastwood Goge (a 5/6 ceatue) is Pide Guadian (a 0/3 ceatue) then Llanowa Elves (a 1/1 ceatue). Vastwood Goge can assign 3 damage to the Guadian and 2 damage to the Elves, 4 damage to the Guadian and 1 damage to the Elves, o 5 damage to the Guadian. 2047 Example: The damage assignment order of an attacking Vastwood Gorger (a 5/6 creature) is Pride Guardian (a 0/3 creature) then Llanowar Elves (a 1/1 creature). Vastwood Gorger can assign 3 damage to the Guardian and 2 damage to the Elves, 4 damage to the Guardian and 1 damage to the Elves, or 5 damage to the Guardian.
2048 Example: The damage assignment ode of an attacking Vastwood Goge (a 5/6 ceatue) is Pide Guadian (a 0/3 ceatue) then Llanowa Elves (a 1/1 ceatue). Duing the declae blockes step, the defending playe casts Giant Gowth tageting Pide Guadian, which gives it +3/+3 until end of tun. Vastwood Goge must assign its 5 damage to the Guadian. 2048 Example: The damage assignment order of an attacking Vastwood Gorger (a 5/6 creature) is Pride Guardian (a 0/3 creature) then Llanowar Elves (a 1/1 creature). During the declare blockers step, the defending player casts Giant Growth targeting Pride Guardian, which gives it +3/+3 until end of turn. Vastwood Gorger must assign its 5 damage to the Guardian.
2049 Example: The damage assignment ode of an attacking Vastwood Goge (a 5/6 ceatue) is Pide Guadian (a 0/3 ceatue) then Llanowa Elves (a 1/1 ceatue). Duing the declae blockes step, the defending playe casts Mending Hands tageting Pide Guadian, which pevents the next 4 damage that would be dealt to it. Vastwood Goge can assign 3 damage to the Guadian and 2 damage to the Elves, 4 damage to the Guadian and 1 damage to the Elves, o 5 damage to the Guadian. 2049 Example: The damage assignment order of an attacking Vastwood Gorger (a 5/6 creature) is Pride Guardian (a 0/3 creature) then Llanowar Elves (a 1/1 creature). During the declare blockers step, the defending player casts Mending Hands targeting Pride Guardian, which prevents the next 4 damage that would be dealt to it. Vastwood Gorger can assign 3 damage to the Guardian and 2 damage to the Elves, 4 damage to the Guardian and 1 damage to the Elves, or 5 damage to the Guardian.
2050 Example: The damage assignment ode of an attacking Enomous Baloth (a 7/7 ceatue) is Tained Amodon (a 3/3 ceatue) that aleady has 2 damage maked on it, then Foiysian Bigade (a 2/4 ceatue that can block an additional ceatue), then Silveback Ape (a 5/5 ceatue). The damage assignment ode of an attacking Dukwood Boas (a 4/4 ceatue) is the same Foiysian Bigade, then Goblin Pike (a 2/1 ceatue). Among othe possibilities, the active playe may have the Baloth assign 1 damage to the Amodon, 1 damage to the Bigade, and 5 damage to the Ape, and have the Boas assign 3 damage to the Bigade and 1 damage to the Pike. 2050 Example: The damage assignment order of an attacking Enormous Baloth (a 7/7 creature) is Trained Armodon (a 3/3 creature) that already has 2 damage marked on it, then Foriysian Brigade (a 2/4 creature that can block an additional creature), then Silverback Ape (a 5/5 creature). The damage assignment order of an attacking Durkwood Boars (a 4/4 creature) is the same Foriysian Brigade, then Goblin Piker (a 2/1 creature). Among other possibilities, the active player may have the Baloth assign 1 damage to the Armodon, 1 damage to the Brigade, and 5 damage to the Ape, and have the Boars assign 3 damage to the Brigade and 1 damage to the Piker.
2051 2051
2052 510.1d A blocking ceatue assigns combat damage to the ceatues it’s blocking. If it isn’t cuently blocking any ceatues (if, fo example, they wee destoyed o emoved fom combat), it assigns no combat damage. If it’s blocking exactly one ceatue, it assigns all its combat damage to that ceatue. If it’s blocking two o moe ceatues, it assigns its combat damage to those ceatues accoding to the damage assignment ode announced fo it. This may allow the blocking ceatue to divide its combat damage. Howeve, it can’t assign combat damage to a ceatue that it’s blocking unless, when combat damage assignments ae complete, each ceatue that pecedes that blocked ceatue is assigned lethal damage. When checking fo assigned lethal damage, take into account damage aleady maked on the ceatue and damage fom othe ceatues that’s being assigned duing the same combat damage step, but not any abilities o effects that might change the amount of damage that’s actually dealt. An amount of damage that’s geate than a ceatue’s lethal damage may be assigned to it. 2052 510.1d A blocking creature assigns combat damage to the creatures it’s blocking. If it isn’t currently blocking any creatures (if, for example, they were destroyed or removed from combat), it assigns no combat damage. If it’s blocking exactly one creature, it assigns all its combat damage to that creature. If it’s blocking two or more creatures, it assigns its combat damage to those creatures according to the damage assignment order announced for it. This may allow the blocking creature to divide its combat damage. However, it can’t assign combat damage to a creature that it’s blocking unless, when combat damage assignments are complete, each creature that precedes that blocked creature is assigned lethal damage. When checking for assigned lethal damage, take into account damage already marked on the creature and damage from other creatures that’s being assigned during the same combat damage step, but not any abilities or effects that might change the amount of damage that’s actually dealt. An amount of damage that’s greater than a creature’s lethal damage may be assigned to it.
2053 2053
2054 510.1e Once a playe has assigned combat damage fom each attacking o blocking ceatue they contol, the total damage assignment (not solely the damage assignment of any individual attacking o blocking ceatue) is checked to see if it complies with the above ules. If it doesn’t, the combat damage assignment is illegal; the game etuns to the moment befoe that playe began to assign combat damage. (See ule 722, “Handling Illegal Actions.”) 2054 510.1e Once a player has assigned combat damage from each attacking or blocking creature they control, the total damage assignment (not solely the damage assignment of any individual attacking or blocking creature) is checked to see if it complies with the above rules. If it doesn’t, the combat damage assignment is illegal; the game returns to the moment before that player began to assign combat damage. (See rule 722, “Handling Illegal Actions.”)
2055 2055
2056 510.2. Second, all combat damage that’s been assigned is dealt simultaneously. This tun-based action doesn’t use the stack. No playe has the chance to cast spells o activate abilities between the time combat damage is assigned and the time it’s dealt. 2056 510.2. Second, all combat damage that’s been assigned is dealt simultaneously. This turn-based action doesn’t use the stack. No player has the chance to cast spells or activate abilities between the time combat damage is assigned and the time it’s dealt.
2057 Example: Squadon Hawk (a 1/1 ceatue with flying) and Goblin Pike (a 2/1 ceatue) ae attacking. Mogg Fanatic (a 1/1 ceatue with the ability “Sacifice Mogg Fanatic: Mogg Fanatic deals 1 damage to any taget.”) blocks the Goblin Pike. The defending playe sacifices Mogg Fanatic duing the declae blockes step to deal 1 damage to the Squadon Hawk. The Hawk is destoyed. The Pike deals and is dealt no combat damage this tun. If the defending playe instead left Mogg Fanatic on the battlefield, the Fanatic and the Pike would have dealt lethal damage to one anothe, but the Squadon Hawk couldn’t have been dealt damage. 2057 Example: Squadron Hawk (a 1/1 creature with flying) and Goblin Piker (a 2/1 creature) are attacking. Mogg Fanatic (a 1/1 creature with the ability “Sacrifice Mogg Fanatic: Mogg Fanatic deals 1 damage to any target.”) blocks the Goblin Piker. The defending player sacrifices Mogg Fanatic during the declare blockers step to deal 1 damage to the Squadron Hawk. The Hawk is destroyed. The Piker deals and is dealt no combat damage this turn. If the defending player instead left Mogg Fanatic on the battlefield, the Fanatic and the Piker would have dealt lethal damage to one another, but the Squadron Hawk couldn’t have been dealt damage.
2058 2058
2059 510.3. Thid, the active playe gets pioity. (See ule 117, “Timing and Pioity.”) 2059 510.3. Third, the active player gets priority. (See rule 117, “Timing and Priority.”)
2060 2060
2061 510.3a Any abilities that tiggeed on damage being dealt o while state-based actions ae pefomed aftewad ae put onto the stack befoe the active playe gets pioity; the ode in which they tiggeed doesn’t matte. (See ule 603, “Handling Tiggeed Abilities.”) 2061 510.3a Any abilities that triggered on damage being dealt or while state-based actions are performed afterward are put onto the stack before the active player gets priority; the order in which they triggered doesn’t matter. (See rule 603, “Handling Triggered Abilities.”)
2062 2062
2063 510.4. If at least one attacking o blocking ceatue has fist stike (see ule 702.7) o double stike (see ule 702.4) as the combat damage step begins, the only ceatues that assign combat damage in that step ae those with fist stike o double stike. Afte that step, instead of poceeding to the end of combat step, the phase gets a second combat damage step. The only ceatues that assign combat damage in that step ae the emaining attackes and blockes that had neithe fist stike no double stike as the fist combat damage step began, as well as the emaining attackes and blockes that cuently have double stike. Afte that step, the phase poceeds to the end of combat step. 2063 510.4. If at least one attacking or blocking creature has first strike (see rule 702.7) or double strike (see rule 702.4) as the combat damage step begins, the only creatures that assign combat damage in that step are those with first strike or double strike. After that step, instead of proceeding to the end of combat step, the phase gets a second combat damage step. The only creatures that assign combat damage in that step are the remaining attackers and blockers that had neither first strike nor double strike as the first combat damage step began, as well as the remaining attackers and blockers that currently have double strike. After that step, the phase proceeds to the end of combat step.
2064 2064
2065 511. End of Combat Step 2065 511. End of Combat Step
2066 2066
2067 511.1. The end of combat step has no tun-based actions. Once it begins, the active playe gets pioity. (See ule 117, “Timing and Pioity.”) 2067 511.1. The end of combat step has no turn-based actions. Once it begins, the active player gets priority. (See rule 117, “Timing and Priority.”)
2068 2068
2069 511.2. Abilities that tigge “at end of combat” tigge as the end of combat step begins. Effects that last “until end of combat” expie at the end of the combat phase. 2069 511.2. Abilities that trigger “at end of combat” trigger as the end of combat step begins. Effects that last “until end of combat” expire at the end of the combat phase.
2070 2070
2071 511.3. As soon as the end of combat step ends, all ceatues and planeswalkes ae emoved fom combat. Afte the end of combat step ends, the combat phase is ove and the postcombat main phase begins (see ule 505). 2071 511.3. As soon as the end of combat step ends, all creatures and planeswalkers are removed from combat. After the end of combat step ends, the combat phase is over and the postcombat main phase begins (see rule 505).
2072 2072
2073 512. Ending Phase 2073 512. Ending Phase
2074 2074
2075 512.1. The ending phase consists of two steps: end and cleanup. 2075 512.1. The ending phase consists of two steps: end and cleanup.
2076 2076
2077 513. End Step 2077 513. End Step
2078 2078
2079 513.1. The end step has no tun-based actions. Once it begins, the active playe gets pioity. (See ule 117, “Timing and Pioity.”) 2079 513.1. The end step has no turn-based actions. Once it begins, the active player gets priority. (See rule 117, “Timing and Priority.”)
2080 2080
2081 513.1a Peviously, abilities that tiggeed at the beginning of the end step wee pinted with the tigge condition “at end of tun.” Cads that wee pinted with that text have eceived eata in the Oacle cad efeence to say “at the beginning of the end step” o “at the beginning of the next end step.” 2081 513.1a Previously, abilities that triggered at the beginning of the end step were printed with the trigger condition “at end of turn.” Cards that were printed with that text have received errata in the Oracle card reference to say “at the beginning of the end step” or “at the beginning of the next end step.”
2082 2082
2083 513.2. If a pemanent with an ability that tigges “at the beginning of the end step” entes the battlefield duing this step, that ability won’t tigge until the next tun’s end step. Likewise, if a delayed tiggeed ability that tigges “at the beginning of the next end step” is ceated duing this step, that ability won’t tigge until the next tun’s end step. In othe wods, the step doesn’t “back up” so those abilities can go on the stack. This ule applies only to tiggeed abilities; it doesn’t apply to continuous effects whose duations say “until end of tun” o “this tun.” (See ule 514, “Cleanup Step.”) 2083 513.2. If a permanent with an ability that triggers “at the beginning of the end step” enters the battlefield during this step, that ability won’t trigger until the next turn’s end step. Likewise, if a delayed triggered ability that triggers “at the beginning of the next end step” is created during this step, that ability won’t trigger until the next turn’s end step. In other words, the step doesn’t “back up” so those abilities can go on the stack. This rule applies only to triggered abilities; it doesn’t apply to continuous effects whose durations say “until end of turn” or “this turn.” (See rule 514, “Cleanup Step.”)
2084 2084
2085 514. Cleanup Step 2085 514. Cleanup Step
2086 2086
2087 514.1. Fist, if the active playe’s hand contains moe cads than thei maximum hand size (nomally seven), they discad enough cads to educe thei hand size to that numbe. This tun-based action doesn’t use the stack. 2087 514.1. First, if the active player’s hand contains more cards than their maximum hand size (normally seven), they discard enough cards to reduce their hand size to that number. This turn-based action doesn’t use the stack.
2088 2088
2089 514.2. Second, the following actions happen simultaneously: all damage maked on pemanents (including phased-out pemanents) is emoved and all “until end of tun” and “this tun” effects end. This tun-based action doesn’t use the stack. 2089 514.2. Second, the following actions happen simultaneously: all damage marked on permanents (including phased-out permanents) is removed and all “until end of turn” and “this turn” effects end. This turn-based action doesn’t use the stack.
2090 2090
2091 514.3. Nomally, no playe eceives pioity duing the cleanup step, so no spells can be cast and no abilities can be activated. Howeve, this ule is subject to the following exception: 2091 514.3. Normally, no player receives priority during the cleanup step, so no spells can be cast and no abilities can be activated. However, this rule is subject to the following exception:
2092 2092
2093 514.3a At this point, the game checks to see if any state-based actions would be pefomed and/o any tiggeed abilities ae waiting to be put onto the stack (including those that tigge “at the beginning of the next cleanup step”). If so, those state-based actions ae pefomed, then those tiggeed abilities ae put on the stack, then the active playe gets pioity. Playes may cast spells and activate abilities. Once the stack is empty and all playes pass in succession, anothe cleanup step begins. 2093 514.3a At this point, the game checks to see if any state-based actions would be performed and/or any triggered abilities are waiting to be put onto the stack (including those that trigger “at the beginning of the next cleanup step”). If so, those state-based actions are performed, then those triggered abilities are put on the stack, then the active player gets priority. Players may cast spells and activate abilities. Once the stack is empty and all players pass in succession, another cleanup step begins.
2094 2094
2095 2095
2096 6. Spells, Abilities, and Effects 2096 6. Spells, Abilities, and Effects
2097 2097
2098 600. Geneal 2098 600. General
2099 2099
2100 601. Casting Spells 2100 601. Casting Spells
2101 2101
2102 601.1. Peviously, the action of casting a spell, o casting a cad as a spell, was efeed to on cads as “playing” that spell o that cad. Cads that wee pinted with that text have eceived eata in the Oacle cad efeence so they now efe to “casting” that spell o that cad. 2102 601.1. Previously, the action of casting a spell, or casting a card as a spell, was referred to on cards as “playing” that spell or that card. Cards that were printed with that text have received errata in the Oracle card reference so they now refer to “casting” that spell or that card.
2103 2103
2104 601.1a Some effects still efe to “playing” a cad. “Playing a cad” means playing that cad as a land o casting that cad as a spell, whicheve is appopiate. 2104 601.1a Some effects still refer to “playing” a card. “Playing a card” means playing that card as a land or casting that card as a spell, whichever is appropriate.
2105 2105
2106 601.2. To cast a spell is to take it fom whee it is (usually the hand), put it on the stack, and pay its costs, so that it will eventually esolve and have its effect. Casting a spell includes poposal of the spell (ules 601.2a–d) and detemination and payment of costs (ules 601.2f–h). To cast a spell, a playe follows the steps listed below, in ode. A playe must be legally allowed to cast the spell to begin this pocess (see ule 601.3). If a playe is unable to comply with the equiements of a step listed below while pefoming that step, the casting of the spell is illegal ; the game etuns to the moment befoe the casting of that spell was poposed (see ule 722, “Handling Illegal Actions”). 2106 601.2. To cast a spell is to take it from where it is (usually the hand), put it on the stack, and pay its costs, so that it will eventually resolve and have its effect. Casting a spell includes proposal of the spell (rules 601.2a–d) and determination and payment of costs (rules 601.2f–h). To cast a spell, a player follows the steps listed below, in order. A player must be legally allowed to cast the spell to begin this process (see rule 601.3). If a player is unable to comply with the requirements of a step listed below while performing that step, the casting of the spell is illegal ; the game returns to the moment before the casting of that spell was proposed (see rule 722, “Handling Illegal Actions”).
2107 2107
2108 601.2a To popose the casting of a spell, a playe fist moves that cad (o that copy of a cad) fom whee it is to the stack. It becomes the topmost object on the stack. It has all the chaacteistics of the cad (o the copy of a cad) associated with it, and that playe becomes its contolle. The spell emains on the stack until it’s counteed, it esolves, o an effect moves it elsewhee. 2108 601.2a To propose the casting of a spell, a player first moves that card (or that copy of a card) from where it is to the stack. It becomes the topmost object on the stack. It has all the characteristics of the card (or the copy of a card) associated with it, and that player becomes its controller. The spell remains on the stack until it’s countered, it resolves, or an effect moves it elsewhere.
2109 2109
2110 601.2b If the spell is modal, the playe announces the mode choice (see ule 700.2). If the playe wishes to splice any cads onto the spell (see ule 702.46), they eveal those cads in thei hand. If the spell has altenative o additional costs that will be paid as it’s being cast such as buyback o kicke costs (see ules 118.8 and 118.9), the playe announces thei intentions to pay any o all of those costs (see ule 601.2f). A playe can’t apply two altenative methods of casting o two altenative costs to a single spell. If the spell has a vaiable cost that will be paid as it’s being cast (such as an {X} in its mana cost; see ule 107.3), the playe announces the value of that vaiable. If the value of that vaiable is defined in the text of the spell by a choice that playe would make late in the announcement o esolution of the spell, that playe makes that choice at this time instead of that late time. If a cost that will be paid as the spell is being cast includes hybid mana symbols, the playe announces the nonhybid equivalent cost they intend to pay. If a cost that will be paid as the spell is being cast includes Phyexian mana symbols, the playe announces whethe they intend to pay 2 life o the coesponding coloed mana cost fo each of those symbols. Peviously made choices (such as choosing to cast a spell with flashback fom a gaveyad o choosing to cast a ceatue with moph face down) may estict the playe’s options when making these choices. 2110 601.2b If the spell is modal, the player announces the mode choice (see rule 700.2). If the player wishes to splice any cards onto the spell (see rule 702.46), they reveal those cards in their hand. If the spell has alternative or additional costs that will be paid as it’s being cast such as buyback or kicker costs (see rules 118.8 and 118.9), the player announces their intentions to pay any or all of those costs (see rule 601.2f). A player can’t apply two alternative methods of casting or two alternative costs to a single spell. If the spell has a variable cost that will be paid as it’s being cast (such as an {X} in its mana cost; see rule 107.3), the player announces the value of that variable. If the value of that variable is defined in the text of the spell by a choice that player would make later in the announcement or resolution of the spell, that player makes that choice at this time instead of that later time. If a cost that will be paid as the spell is being cast includes hybrid mana symbols, the player announces the nonhybrid equivalent cost they intend to pay. If a cost that will be paid as the spell is being cast includes Phyrexian mana symbols, the player announces whether they intend to pay 2 life or the corresponding colored mana cost for each of those symbols. Previously made choices (such as choosing to cast a spell with flashback from a graveyard or choosing to cast a creature with morph face down) may restrict the player’s options when making these choices.
2111 2111
2112 601.2c The playe announces thei choice of an appopiate object o playe fo each taget the spell equies. A spell may equie some tagets only if an altenative o additional cost (such as a kicke cost) o a paticula mode was chosen fo it; othewise, the spell is cast as though it did not equie those tagets. Similaly, a spell may equie altenative tagets only if an altenative o additional cost was chosen fo it. If the spell has a vaiable numbe of tagets, the playe announces how many tagets they will choose befoe they announce those tagets. In some cases, the numbe of tagets will be defined by the spell’s text. Once the numbe of tagets the spell has is detemined, that numbe doesn’t change, even if the infomation used to detemine the numbe of tagets does. The same taget can’t be chosen multiple times fo any one instance of the wod “taget” on the spell. Howeve, if the spell uses the wod “taget” in multiple places, the same object o playe can be chosen once fo each instance of the wod “taget” (as long as it fits the tageting citeia). If any effects say that an object o playe must be chosen as a taget, the playe chooses tagets so that they obey the maximum possible numbe of such effects without violating any ules o effects that say that an object o playe can’t be chosen as a taget. The chosen objects and/o playes each become a taget of that spell. (Any abilities that tigge when those objects and/o playes become the taget of a spell tigge at this point; they’ll wait to be put on the stack until the spell has finished being cast.) 2112 601.2c The player announces their choice of an appropriate object or player for each target the spell requires. A spell may require some targets only if an alternative or additional cost (such as a kicker cost) or a particular mode was chosen for it; otherwise, the spell is cast as though it did not require those targets. Similarly, a spell may require alternative targets only if an alternative or additional cost was chosen for it. If the spell has a variable number of targets, the player announces how many targets they will choose before they announce those targets. In some cases, the number of targets will be defined by the spell’s text. Once the number of targets the spell has is determined, that number doesn’t change, even if the information used to determine the number of targets does. The same target can’t be chosen multiple times for any one instance of the word “target” on the spell. However, if the spell uses the word “target” in multiple places, the same object or player can be chosen once for each instance of the word “target” (as long as it fits the targeting criteria). If any effects say that an object or player must be chosen as a target, the player chooses targets so that they obey the maximum possible number of such effects without violating any rules or effects that say that an object or player can’t be chosen as a target. The chosen objects and/or players each become a target of that spell. (Any abilities that trigger when those objects and/or players become the target of a spell trigger at this point; they’ll wait to be put on the stack until the spell has finished being cast.)
2113 Example: If a spell says “Tap two taget ceatues,” then the same ceatue can’t be chosen twice; the spell equies two diffeent legal tagets. A spell that says “Destoy taget atifact and taget land,” howeve, can taget the same atifact land twice because it uses the wod “taget” in multiple places. 2113 Example: If a spell says “Tap two target creatures,” then the same creature can’t be chosen twice; the spell requires two different legal targets. A spell that says “Destroy target artifact and target land,” however, can target the same artifact land twice because it uses the word “target” in multiple places.
2114 2114
2115 601.2d If the spell equies the playe to divide o distibute an effect (such as damage o countes) among one o moe tagets, the playe announces the division. Each of these tagets must eceive at least one of whateve is being divided. 2115 601.2d If the spell requires the player to divide or distribute an effect (such as damage or counters) among one or more targets, the player announces the division. Each of these targets must receive at least one of whatever is being divided.
2116 2116
2117 601.2e The game checks to see if the poposed spell can legally be cast. If the poposed spell is illegal, the game etuns to the moment befoe the casting of that spell was poposed (see ule 722, “Handling Illegal Actions”). 2117 601.2e The game checks to see if the proposed spell can legally be cast. If the proposed spell is illegal, the game returns to the moment before the casting of that spell was proposed (see rule 722, “Handling Illegal Actions”).
2118 2118
2119 601.2f The playe detemines the total cost of the spell. Usually this is just the mana cost. Some spells have additional o altenative costs. Some effects may incease o educe the cost to pay, o may povide othe altenative costs. Costs may include paying mana, tapping pemanents, sacificing pemanents, discading cads, and so on. The total cost is the mana cost o altenative cost (as detemined in ule 601.2b), plus all additional costs and cost inceases, and minus all cost eductions. If multiple cost eductions apply, the playe may apply them in any ode. If the mana component of the total cost is educed to nothing by cost eduction effects, it is consideed to be {0}. It can’t be educed to less than {0}. Once the total cost is detemined, any effects that diectly affect the total cost ae applied. Then the esulting total cost becomes “locked in.” If effects would change the total cost afte this time, they have no effect. 2119 601.2f The player determines the total cost of the spell. Usually this is just the mana cost. Some spells have additional or alternative costs. Some effects may increase or reduce the cost to pay, or may provide other alternative costs. Costs may include paying mana, tapping permanents, sacrificing permanents, discarding cards, and so on. The total cost is the mana cost or alternative cost (as determined in rule 601.2b), plus all additional costs and cost increases, and minus all cost reductions. If multiple cost reductions apply, the player may apply them in any order. If the mana component of the total cost is reduced to nothing by cost reduction effects, it is considered to be {0}. It can’t be reduced to less than {0}. Once the total cost is determined, any effects that directly affect the total cost are applied. Then the resulting total cost becomes “locked in.” If effects would change the total cost after this time, they have no effect.
2120 2120
2121 601.2g If the total cost includes a mana payment, the playe then has a chance to activate mana abilities (see ule 605, “Mana Abilities”). Mana abilities must be activated befoe costs ae paid. 2121 601.2g If the total cost includes a mana payment, the player then has a chance to activate mana abilities (see rule 605, “Mana Abilities”). Mana abilities must be activated before costs are paid.
2122 2122
2123 601.2h The playe pays the total cost in any ode. Patial payments ae not allowed. Unpayable costs can’t be paid. 2123 601.2h The player pays the total cost in any order. Partial payments are not allowed. Unpayable costs can’t be paid.
2124 Example: You cast Alta’s Reap, which costs {1}{B} and has an additional cost of sacificing a ceatue. You sacifice Thundescape Familia, whose effect makes you black spells cost {1} less to cast. Because a spell’s total cost is “locked in” befoe payments ae actually made, you pay {B}, not {1}{B}, even though you’e sacificing the Familia. 2124 Example: You cast Altar’s Reap, which costs {1}{B} and has an additional cost of sacrificing a creature. You sacrifice Thunderscape Familiar, whose effect makes your black spells cost {1} less to cast. Because a spell’s total cost is “locked in” before payments are actually made, you pay {B}, not {1}{B}, even though you’re sacrificing the Familiar.
2125 2125
2126 601.2i Once the steps descibed in 601.2a–h ae completed, effects that modify the chaacteistics of the spell as it’s cast ae applied, then the spell becomes cast. Any abilities that tigge when a spell is cast o put onto the stack tigge at this time. If the spell’s contolle had pioity befoe casting it, they get pioity. 2126 601.2i Once the steps described in 601.2a–h are completed, effects that modify the characteristics of the spell as it’s cast are applied, then the spell becomes cast. Any abilities that trigger when a spell is cast or put onto the stack trigger at this time. If the spell’s controller had priority before casting it, they get priority.
2127 2127
2128 601.3. A playe can begin to cast a spell only if a ule o effect allows that playe to cast it and no ule o effect pohibits that playe fom casting it. 2128 601.3. A player can begin to cast a spell only if a rule or effect allows that player to cast it and no rule or effect prohibits that player from casting it.
2129 2129
2130 601.3a If an effect pohibits a playe fom casting a spell with cetain qualities, that playe may conside any choices to be made duing that spell’s poposal that may cause those qualities to change. If any such choices could cause that effect to no longe pohibit that playe fom casting that spell, the playe may begin to cast the spell, ignoing the effect. 2130 601.3a If an effect prohibits a player from casting a spell with certain qualities, that player may consider any choices to be made during that spell’s proposal that may cause those qualities to change. If any such choices could cause that effect to no longer prohibit that player from casting that spell, the player may begin to cast the spell, ignoring the effect.
2131 Example: A playe contols Void Winnowe, which eads, in pat, “You opponents can't cast spells with even conveted mana costs.” That playe’s opponent may begin to cast Rolling Thunde, a cad whose mana cost is {X}{R}{R}, because the chosen value of X may cause the spell’s conveted mana cost to become odd. 2131 Example: A player controls Void Winnower, which reads, in part, “Your opponents can't cast spells with even converted mana costs.” That player’s opponent may begin to cast Rolling Thunder, a card whose mana cost is {X}{R}{R}, because the chosen value of X may cause the spell’s converted mana cost to become odd.
2132 2132
2133 601.3b If an effect allows a playe to cast a spell with cetain qualities as though it had flash, that playe may conside any choices to be made duing that spell’s poposal that may cause that spell’s qualities to change. If any such choices could cause that effect to apply, that playe may begin to cast that spell as though it had flash. 2133 601.3b If an effect allows a player to cast a spell with certain qualities as though it had flash, that player may consider any choices to be made during that spell’s proposal that may cause that spell’s qualities to change. If any such choices could cause that effect to apply, that player may begin to cast that spell as though it had flash.
2134 Example: An effect says that you may cast Aua spells as though they had flash, and you have a ceatue cad with bestow in you hand. Because choosing the bestow ability’s altenative cost causes that spell to become an Aua spell, you may legally begin to cast that spell as though it had flash. 2134 Example: An effect says that you may cast Aura spells as though they had flash, and you have a creature card with bestow in your hand. Because choosing the bestow ability’s alternative cost causes that spell to become an Aura spell, you may legally begin to cast that spell as though it had flash.
2135 2135
2136 601.3c If an effect allows a playe to cast a spell as though it had flash only if an altenative o additional cost is paid, that playe may begin to cast that spell as though it had flash. 2136 601.3c If an effect allows a player to cast a spell as though it had flash only if an alternative or additional cost is paid, that player may begin to cast that spell as though it had flash.
2137 2137
2138 601.3d If a spell would have flash only if cetain conditions ae met, its contolle may begin to cast that spell as though it had flash if those conditions ae met. 2138 601.3d If a spell would have flash only if certain conditions are met, its controller may begin to cast that spell as though it had flash if those conditions are met.
2139 2139
2140 601.3e If a ule o effect states that only an altenative set of chaacteistics o a subset of chaacteistics ae consideed to detemine if a cad o copy of a cad is legal to cast, those altenative chaacteistics eplace the object’s chaacteistics pio to detemining whethe the playe may begin to cast it. 2140 601.3e If a rule or effect states that only an alternative set of characteristics or a subset of characteristics are considered to determine if a card or copy of a card is legal to cast, those alternative characteristics replace the object’s characteristics prior to determining whether the player may begin to cast it.
2141 Example: Gauk’s Hode says, in pat, “You may cast the top cad of you libay if it’s a ceatue cad.” If you contol Gauk’s Hode and the top cad of you libay is a nonceatue cad with moph, you may cast it using its moph ability. 2141 Example: Garruk’s Horde says, in part, “You may cast the top card of your library if it’s a creature card.” If you control Garruk’s Horde and the top card of your library is a noncreature card with morph, you may cast it using its morph ability.
2142 Example: Melek, Izzet Paagon says, in pat, “You may cast the top cad of you libay if it’s an instant o socey cad.” If you contol Melek, Izzet Paagon and the top cad of you libay is Giant Kille, an adventue ceatue cad whose Adventue is an instant named Chop Down, you may cast Chop Down but not Giant Kille. If instead you contol Gauk’s Hode and the top cad of you libay is Giant Kille, you may cast Giant Kille but not Chop Down. 2142 Example: Melek, Izzet Paragon says, in part, “You may cast the top card of your library if it’s an instant or sorcery card.” If you control Melek, Izzet Paragon and the top card of your library is Giant Killer, an adventurer creature card whose Adventure is an instant named Chop Down, you may cast Chop Down but not Giant Killer. If instead you control Garruk’s Horde and the top card of your library is Giant Killer, you may cast Giant Killer but not Chop Down.
2143 2143
2144 601.4. If a playe is no longe allowed to cast a spell afte completing its poposal (see ules 601.2a–d), the casting of the spell is illegal and the game etuns to the moment befoe the casting of that spell was poposed (see ule 722, “Handling Illegal Actions”). It doesn’t matte if a ule o effect would make the casting of the spell illegal while detemining and paying that spell’s costs (see ules 601.2f-h) o any time afte the spell has been cast. 2144 601.4. If a player is no longer allowed to cast a spell after completing its proposal (see rules 601.2a–d), the casting of the spell is illegal and the game returns to the moment before the casting of that spell was proposed (see rule 722, “Handling Illegal Actions”). It doesn’t matter if a rule or effect would make the casting of the spell illegal while determining and paying that spell’s costs (see rules 601.2f-h) or any time after the spell has been cast.
2145 2145
2146 601.5. Some spells specify that one of thei contolle’s opponents does something the contolle would nomally do while it’s being cast, such as choose a mode o choose tagets. In these cases, the opponent does so when the spell’s contolle nomally would do so. 2146 601.5. Some spells specify that one of their controller’s opponents does something the controller would normally do while it’s being cast, such as choose a mode or choose targets. In these cases, the opponent does so when the spell’s controller normally would do so.
2147 2147
2148 601.5a If thee is moe than one opponent who could make such a choice, the spell’s contolle decides which of those opponents will make the choice. 2148 601.5a If there is more than one opponent who could make such a choice, the spell’s controller decides which of those opponents will make the choice.
2149 2149
2150 601.5b If the spell instucts its contolle and anothe playe to do something at the same time as the spell is being cast, the spell’s contolle goes fist, then the othe playe. This is an exception to ule 101.4. 2150 601.5b If the spell instructs its controller and another player to do something at the same time as the spell is being cast, the spell’s controller goes first, then the other player. This is an exception to rule 101.4.
2151 2151
2152 601.6. Casting a spell that altes costs won’t affect spells and abilities that ae aleady on the stack. 2152 601.6. Casting a spell that alters costs won’t affect spells and abilities that are already on the stack.
2153 2153
2154 602. Activating Activated Abilities 2154 602. Activating Activated Abilities
2155 2155
2156 602.1. Activated abilities have a cost and an effect. They ae witten as “[Cost]: [Effect.] [Activation instuctions (if any).]” 2156 602.1. Activated abilities have a cost and an effect. They are written as “[Cost]: [Effect.] [Activation instructions (if any).]”
2157 2157
2158 602.1a The activation cost is eveything befoe the colon (:). An ability’s activation cost must be paid by the playe who is activating it. 2158 602.1a The activation cost is everything before the colon (:). An ability’s activation cost must be paid by the player who is activating it.
2159 Example: The activation cost of an ability that eads “{2}, {T}: You gain 1 life” is two mana of any type plus tapping the pemanent that has the ability. 2159 Example: The activation cost of an ability that reads “{2}, {T}: You gain 1 life” is two mana of any type plus tapping the permanent that has the ability.
2160 2160
2161 602.1b Some text afte the colon of an activated ability states instuctions that must be followed while activating that ability. Such text may state which playes can activate that ability, may estict when a playe can activate the ability, o may define some aspect of the activation cost. This text is not pat of the ability’s effect. It functions at all times. If an activated ability has any activation instuctions, they appea last, afte the ability’s effect. 2161 602.1b Some text after the colon of an activated ability states instructions that must be followed while activating that ability. Such text may state which players can activate that ability, may restrict when a player can activate the ability, or may define some aspect of the activation cost. This text is not part of the ability’s effect. It functions at all times. If an activated ability has any activation instructions, they appear last, after the ability’s effect.
2162 2162
2163 602.1c An activated ability is the only kind of ability that can be activated. If an object o ule efes to activating an ability without specifying what kind, it must be efeing to an activated ability. 2163 602.1c An activated ability is the only kind of ability that can be activated. If an object or rule refers to activating an ability without specifying what kind, it must be referring to an activated ability.
2164 2164
2165 602.1d Peviously, the action of using an activated ability was efeed to on cads as “playing” that ability. Cads that wee pinted with that text have eceived eata in the Oacle cad efeence so they now efe to “activating” that ability. 2165 602.1d Previously, the action of using an activated ability was referred to on cards as “playing” that ability. Cards that were printed with that text have received errata in the Oracle card reference so they now refer to “activating” that ability.
2166 2166
2167 602.2. To activate an ability is to put it onto the stack and pay its costs, so that it will eventually esolve and have its effect. Only an object’s contolle (o its owne, if it doesn’t have a contolle) can activate its activated ability unless the object specifically says othewise. Activating an ability follows the steps listed below, in ode. If, at any point duing the activation of an ability, a playe is unable to comply with any of those steps, the activation is illegal; the game etuns to the moment befoe that ability stated to be activated (see ule 722, “Handling Illegal Actions”). Announcements and payments can’t be alteed afte they’ve been made. 2167 602.2. To activate an ability is to put it onto the stack and pay its costs, so that it will eventually resolve and have its effect. Only an object’s controller (or its owner, if it doesn’t have a controller) can activate its activated ability unless the object specifically says otherwise. Activating an ability follows the steps listed below, in order. If, at any point during the activation of an ability, a player is unable to comply with any of those steps, the activation is illegal; the game returns to the moment before that ability started to be activated (see rule 722, “Handling Illegal Actions”). Announcements and payments can’t be altered after they’ve been made.
2168 2168
2169 602.2a The playe announces that they ae activating the ability. If an activated ability is being activated fom a hidden zone, the cad that has that ability is evealed. That ability is ceated on the stack as an object that’s not a cad. It becomes the topmost object on the stack. It has the text of the ability that ceated it, and no othe chaacteistics. Its contolle is the playe who activated the ability. The ability emains on the stack until it’s counteed, it esolves, o an effect moves it elsewhee. 2169 602.2a The player announces that they are activating the ability. If an activated ability is being activated from a hidden zone, the card that has that ability is revealed. That ability is created on the stack as an object that’s not a card. It becomes the topmost object on the stack. It has the text of the ability that created it, and no other characteristics. Its controller is the player who activated the ability. The ability remains on the stack until it’s countered, it resolves, or an effect moves it elsewhere.
2170 2170
2171 602.2b The emainde of the pocess fo activating an ability is identical to the pocess fo casting a spell listed in ules 601.2b–i. Those ules apply to activating an ability just as they apply to casting a spell. An activated ability’s analog to a spell’s mana cost (as efeenced in ule 601.2f) is its activation cost. 2171 602.2b The remainder of the process for activating an ability is identical to the process for casting a spell listed in rules 601.2b–i. Those rules apply to activating an ability just as they apply to casting a spell. An activated ability’s analog to a spell’s mana cost (as referenced in rule 601.2f) is its activation cost.
2172 2172
2173 602.3. Some abilities specify that one of thei contolle’s opponents does something the contolle would nomally do while it’s being activated, such as choose a mode o choose tagets. In these cases, the opponent does so when the ability’s contolle nomally would do so. 2173 602.3. Some abilities specify that one of their controller’s opponents does something the controller would normally do while it’s being activated, such as choose a mode or choose targets. In these cases, the opponent does so when the ability’s controller normally would do so.
2174 2174
2175 602.3a If thee is moe than one opponent who could make such a choice, the ability’s contolle decides which of those opponents will make the choice. 2175 602.3a If there is more than one opponent who could make such a choice, the ability’s controller decides which of those opponents will make the choice.
2176 2176
2177 602.3b If the ability instucts its contolle and anothe playe to do something at the same time as the ability is being activated, the ability’s contolle goes fist, then the othe playe. This is an exception to ule 101.4. 2177 602.3b If the ability instructs its controller and another player to do something at the same time as the ability is being activated, the ability’s controller goes first, then the other player. This is an exception to rule 101.4.
2178 2178
2179 602.4. Activating an ability that altes costs won’t affect spells and abilities that ae aleady on the stack. 2179 602.4. Activating an ability that alters costs won’t affect spells and abilities that are already on the stack.
2180 2180
2181 602.5. A playe can’t begin to activate an ability that’s pohibited fom being activated. 2181 602.5. A player can’t begin to activate an ability that’s prohibited from being activated.
2182 2182
2183 602.5a A ceatue’s activated ability with the tap symbol ({T}) o the untap symbol ({Q}) in its activation cost can’t be activated unless the ceatue has been unde its contolle’s contol since the stat of thei most ecent tun. Ignoe this ule fo ceatues with haste (see ule 702.10). 2183 602.5a A creature’s activated ability with the tap symbol ({T}) or the untap symbol ({Q}) in its activation cost can’t be activated unless the creature has been under its controller’s control since the start of their most recent turn. Ignore this rule for creatures with haste (see rule 702.10).
2184 2184
2185 602.5b If an activated ability has a estiction on its use (fo example, “Activate this ability only once each tun”), the estiction continues to apply to that object even if its contolle changes. 2185 602.5b If an activated ability has a restriction on its use (for example, “Activate this ability only once each turn”), the restriction continues to apply to that object even if its controller changes.
2186 2186
2187 602.5c If an object acquies an activated ability with a estiction on its use fom anothe object, that estiction applies only to that ability as acquied fom that object. It doesn’t apply to othe, identically woded abilities. 2187 602.5c If an object acquires an activated ability with a restriction on its use from another object, that restriction applies only to that ability as acquired from that object. It doesn’t apply to other, identically worded abilities.
2188 2188
2189 602.5d Activated abilities that ead “Activate this ability only any time you could cast a socey” mean the playe must follow the timing ules fo casting a socey spell, though the ability isn’t actually a socey. The playe doesn’t actually need to have a socey cad that they could cast. 2189 602.5d Activated abilities that read “Activate this ability only any time you could cast a sorcery” mean the player must follow the timing rules for casting a sorcery spell, though the ability isn’t actually a sorcery. The player doesn’t actually need to have a sorcery card that they could cast.
2190 2190
2191 602.5e Activated abilities that ead “Activate this ability only any time you could cast an instant” mean the playe must follow the timing ules fo casting an instant spell, though the ability isn’t actually an instant. The playe doesn’t actually need to have an instant cad that they could cast. 2191 602.5e Activated abilities that read “Activate this ability only any time you could cast an instant” mean the player must follow the timing rules for casting an instant spell, though the ability isn’t actually an instant. The player doesn’t actually need to have an instant card that they could cast.
2192 2192
2193 603. Handling Tiggeed Abilities 2193 603. Handling Triggered Abilities
2194 2194
2195 603.1. Tiggeed abilities have a tigge condition and an effect. They ae witten as “[When/Wheneve/At] [tigge condition o event], [effect]. [Instuctions (if any).]” 2195 603.1. Triggered abilities have a trigger condition and an effect. They are written as “[When/Whenever/At] [trigger condition or event], [effect]. [Instructions (if any).]”
2196 2196
2197 603.1a A tiggeed ability may include instuctions afte its effects that limit what the ability may taget o state that it can’t be counteed. This text is not pat of the ability’s effect. It functions while the ability is on the stack. 2197 603.1a A triggered ability may include instructions after its effects that limit what the ability may target or state that it can’t be countered. This text is not part of the ability’s effect. It functions while the ability is on the stack.
2198 2198
2199 603.2. Wheneve a game event o game state matches a tiggeed ability’s tigge event, that ability automatically tigges. The ability doesn’t do anything at this point. 2199 603.2. Whenever a game event or game state matches a triggered ability’s trigger event, that ability automatically triggers. The ability doesn’t do anything at this point.
2200 2200
2201 603.2a Because they aen’t cast o activated, tiggeed abilities can tigge even when it isn’t legal to cast spells and activate abilities. Effects that peclude abilities fom being activated don’t affect them. 2201 603.2a Because they aren’t cast or activated, triggered abilities can trigger even when it isn’t legal to cast spells and activate abilities. Effects that preclude abilities from being activated don’t affect them.
2202 2202
2203 603.2b When a phase o step begins, all abilities that tigge “at the beginning of” that phase o step tigge. 2203 603.2b When a phase or step begins, all abilities that trigger “at the beginning of” that phase or step trigger.
2204 2204
2205 603.2c An ability tigges only once each time its tigge event occus. Howeve, it can tigge epeatedly if one event contains multiple occuences. 2205 603.2c An ability triggers only once each time its trigger event occurs. However, it can trigger repeatedly if one event contains multiple occurrences.
2206 Example: A pemanent has an ability whose tigge condition eads, “Wheneve a land is put into a gaveyad fom the battlefield, . . . .” If someone casts a spell that destoys all lands, the ability will tigge once fo each land put into the gaveyad duing the spell’s esolution. 2206 Example: A permanent has an ability whose trigger condition reads, “Whenever a land is put into a graveyard from the battlefield, . . . .” If someone casts a spell that destroys all lands, the ability will trigger once for each land put into the graveyard during the spell’s resolution.
2207 2207
2208 603.2d Some tigge events use the wod “becomes” (fo example, “becomes attached” o “becomes blocked”). These tigge only at the time the named event happens—they don’t tigge if that state aleady exists o etigge if it pesists. An ability that tigges when a pemanent “becomes tapped” o “becomes untapped” doesn’t tigge if the pemanent entes the battlefield in that state. 2208 603.2d Some trigger events use the word “becomes” (for example, “becomes attached” or “becomes blocked”). These trigger only at the time the named event happens—they don’t trigger if that state already exists or retrigger if it persists. An ability that triggers when a permanent “becomes tapped” or “becomes untapped” doesn’t trigger if the permanent enters the battlefield in that state.
2209 Example: An ability that tigges when a pemanent “becomes tapped” tigges only when the status of a pemanent that’s aleady on the battlefield changes fom untapped to tapped. 2209 Example: An ability that triggers when a permanent “becomes tapped” triggers only when the status of a permanent that’s already on the battlefield changes from untapped to tapped.
2210 2210
2211 603.2e If a tiggeed ability’s tigge condition is met, but the object with that tiggeed ability is at no time visible to all playes, the ability does not tigge. 2211 603.2e If a triggered ability’s trigger condition is met, but the object with that triggered ability is at no time visible to all players, the ability does not trigger.
2212 2212
2213 603.2f An ability tigges only if its tigge event actually occus. An event that’s pevented o eplaced won’t tigge anything. 2213 603.2f An ability triggers only if its trigger event actually occurs. An event that’s prevented or replaced won’t trigger anything.
2214 Example: An ability that tigges on damage being dealt won’t tigge if all the damage is pevented. 2214 Example: An ability that triggers on damage being dealt won’t trigger if all the damage is prevented.
2215 2215
2216 603.3. Once an ability has tiggeed, its contolle puts it on the stack as an object that’s not a cad the next time a playe would eceive pioity. See ule 117, “Timing and Pioity.” The ability becomes the topmost object on the stack. It has the text of the ability that ceated it, and no othe chaacteistics. It emains on the stack until it’s counteed, it esolves, a ule causes it to be emoved fom the stack, o an effect moves it elsewhee. 2216 603.3. Once an ability has triggered, its controller puts it on the stack as an object that’s not a card the next time a player would receive priority. See rule 117, “Timing and Priority.” The ability becomes the topmost object on the stack. It has the text of the ability that created it, and no other characteristics. It remains on the stack until it’s countered, it resolves, a rule causes it to be removed from the stack, or an effect moves it elsewhere.
2217 2217
2218 603.3a A tiggeed ability is contolled by the playe who contolled its souce at the time it tiggeed, unless it’s a delayed tiggeed ability. To detemine the contolle of a delayed tiggeed ability, see ules 603.7d–f. 2218 603.3a A triggered ability is controlled by the player who controlled its source at the time it triggered, unless it’s a delayed triggered ability. To determine the controller of a delayed triggered ability, see rules 603.7d–f.
2219 2219
2220 603.3b If multiple abilities have tiggeed since the last time a playe eceived pioity, each playe, in APNAP ode, puts tiggeed abilities they contol on the stack in any ode they choose. (See ule 101.4.) Then the game once again checks fo and esolves state-based actions until none ae pefomed, then abilities that tiggeed duing this pocess go on the stack. This pocess epeats until no new state-based actions ae pefomed and no abilities tigge. Then the appopiate playe gets pioity. 2220 603.3b If multiple abilities have triggered since the last time a player received priority, each player, in APNAP order, puts triggered abilities they control on the stack in any order they choose. (See rule 101.4.) Then the game once again checks for and resolves state-based actions until none are performed, then abilities that triggered during this process go on the stack. This process repeats until no new state-based actions are performed and no abilities trigger. Then the appropriate player gets priority.
2221 2221
2222 603.3c If a tiggeed ability is modal, its contolle announces the mode choice when putting the ability on the stack. If one of the modes would be illegal (due to an inability to choose legal tagets, fo example), that mode can’t be chosen. If no mode is chosen, the ability is emoved fom the stack. (See ule 700.2.) 2222 603.3c If a triggered ability is modal, its controller announces the mode choice when putting the ability on the stack. If one of the modes would be illegal (due to an inability to choose legal targets, for example), that mode can’t be chosen. If no mode is chosen, the ability is removed from the stack. (See rule 700.2.)
2223 2223
2224 603.3d The emainde of the pocess fo putting a tiggeed ability on the stack is identical to the pocess fo casting a spell listed in ules 601.2c–d. If a choice is equied when the tiggeed ability goes on the stack but no legal choices can be made fo it, o if a ule o a continuous effect othewise makes the ability illegal, the ability is simply emoved fom the stack. 2224 603.3d The remainder of the process for putting a triggered ability on the stack is identical to the process for casting a spell listed in rules 601.2c–d. If a choice is required when the triggered ability goes on the stack but no legal choices can be made for it, or if a rule or a continuous effect otherwise makes the ability illegal, the ability is simply removed from the stack.
2225 2225
2226 603.4. A tiggeed ability may ead “When/Wheneve/At [tigge event], if [condition], [effect].” When the tigge event occus, the ability checks whethe the stated condition is tue. The ability tigges only if it is; othewise it does nothing. If the ability tigges, it checks the stated condition again as it esolves. If the condition isn’t tue at that time, the ability is emoved fom the stack and does nothing. Note that this mios the check fo legal tagets. This ule is efeed to as the “intevening ‘if’ clause” ule. (The wod “if” has only its nomal English meaning anywhee else in the text of a cad; this ule only applies to an “if” that immediately follows a tigge condition.) 2226 603.4. A triggered ability may read “When/Whenever/At [trigger event], if [condition], [effect].” When the trigger event occurs, the ability checks whether the stated condition is true. The ability triggers only if it is; otherwise it does nothing. If the ability triggers, it checks the stated condition again as it resolves. If the condition isn’t true at that time, the ability is removed from the stack and does nothing. Note that this mirrors the check for legal targets. This rule is referred to as the “intervening ‘if’ clause” rule. (The word “if” has only its normal English meaning anywhere else in the text of a card; this rule only applies to an “if” that immediately follows a trigger condition.)
2227 Example: Felida Soveeign eads, “At the beginning of you upkeep, if you have 40 o moe life, you win the game.” Its contolle’s life total is checked as that playe’s upkeep begins. If that playe has 39 o less life, the ability doesn’t tigge at all. If that playe has 40 o moe life, the ability tigges and goes on the stack. As the ability esolves, that playe’s life total is checked again. If that playe has 39 o less life at this time, the ability is emoved fom the stack and has no effect. If that playe has 40 o moe life at this time, the ability esolves and that playe wins the game. 2227 Example: Felidar Sovereign reads, “At the beginning of your upkeep, if you have 40 or more life, you win the game.” Its controller’s life total is checked as that player’s upkeep begins. If that player has 39 or less life, the ability doesn’t trigger at all. If that player has 40 or more life, the ability triggers and goes on the stack. As the ability resolves, that player’s life total is checked again. If that player has 39 or less life at this time, the ability is removed from the stack and has no effect. If that player has 40 or more life at this time, the ability resolves and that player wins the game.
2228 2228
2229 603.5. Some tiggeed abilities’ effects ae optional (they contain “may,” as in “At the beginning of you upkeep, you may daw a cad”). These abilities go on the stack when they tigge, egadless of whethe thei contolle intends to execise the ability’s option o not. The choice is made when the ability esolves. Likewise, tiggeed abilities that have an effect “unless” something is tue o a playe chooses to do something will go on the stack nomally; the “unless” pat of the ability is dealt with when the ability esolves. 2229 603.5. Some triggered abilities’ effects are optional (they contain “may,” as in “At the beginning of your upkeep, you may draw a card”). These abilities go on the stack when they trigger, regardless of whether their controller intends to exercise the ability’s option or not. The choice is made when the ability resolves. Likewise, triggered abilities that have an effect “unless” something is true or a player chooses to do something will go on the stack normally; the “unless” part of the ability is dealt with when the ability resolves.
2230 2230
2231 603.6. Tigge events that involve objects changing zones ae called “zone-change tigges.” Many abilities with zone-change tigges attempt to do something to that object afte it changes zones. Duing esolution, these abilities look fo the object in the zone that it moved to. If the object is unable to be found in the zone it went to, the pat of the ability attempting to do something to the object will fail to do anything. The ability could be unable to find the object because the object neve enteed the specified zone, because it left the zone befoe the ability esolved, o because it is in a zone that is hidden fom a playe, such as a libay o an opponent’s hand. (This ule applies even if the object leaves the zone and etuns again befoe the ability esolves.) The most common zone-change tigges ae entes-the-battlefield tigges and leaves-the-battlefield tigges. 2231 603.6. Trigger events that involve objects changing zones are called “zone-change triggers.” Many abilities with zone-change triggers attempt to do something to that object after it changes zones. During resolution, these abilities look for the object in the zone that it moved to. If the object is unable to be found in the zone it went to, the part of the ability attempting to do something to the object will fail to do anything. The ability could be unable to find the object because the object never entered the specified zone, because it left the zone before the ability resolved, or because it is in a zone that is hidden from a player, such as a library or an opponent’s hand. (This rule applies even if the object leaves the zone and returns again before the ability resolves.) The most common zone-change triggers are enters-the-battlefield triggers and leaves-the-battlefield triggers.
2232 2232
2233 603.6a Entes-the-battlefield abilities tigge when a pemanent entes the battlefield. These ae witten, “When [this object] entes the battlefield, . . . “ o “Wheneve a [type] entes the battlefield, . . .” Each time an event puts one o moe pemanents onto the battlefield, all pemanents on the battlefield (including the newcomes) ae checked fo any entes-the-battlefield tigges that match the event. 2233 603.6a Enters-the-battlefield abilities trigger when a permanent enters the battlefield. These are written, “When [this object] enters the battlefield, . . . “ or “Whenever a [type] enters the battlefield, . . .” Each time an event puts one or more permanents onto the battlefield, all permanents on the battlefield (including the newcomers) are checked for any enters-the-battlefield triggers that match the event.
2234 2234
2235 603.6b Continuous effects that modify chaacteistics of a pemanent do so the moment the pemanent is on the battlefield (and not befoe then). The pemanent is neve on the battlefield with its unmodified chaacteistics. Continuous effects don’t apply befoe the pemanent is on the battlefield, howeve (see ule 603.6d). 2235 603.6b Continuous effects that modify characteristics of a permanent do so the moment the permanent is on the battlefield (and not before then). The permanent is never on the battlefield with its unmodified characteristics. Continuous effects don’t apply before the permanent is on the battlefield, however (see rule 603.6d).
2236 Example: If an effect eads “All lands ae ceatues” and a land cad is played, the effect makes the land cad into a ceatue the moment it entes the battlefield, so it would tigge abilities that tigge when a ceatue entes the battlefield. Convesely, if an effect eads “All ceatues lose all abilities” and a ceatue cad with an entes-the-battlefield tiggeed ability entes the battlefield, that effect will cause it to lose its abilities the moment it entes the battlefield, so the entes-the-battlefield ability won’t tigge. 2236 Example: If an effect reads “All lands are creatures” and a land card is played, the effect makes the land card into a creature the moment it enters the battlefield, so it would trigger abilities that trigger when a creature enters the battlefield. Conversely, if an effect reads “All creatures lose all abilities” and a creature card with an enters-the-battlefield triggered ability enters the battlefield, that effect will cause it to lose its abilities the moment it enters the battlefield, so the enters-the-battlefield ability won’t trigger.
2237 2237
2238 603.6c Leaves-the-battlefield abilities tigge when a pemanent moves fom the battlefield to anothe zone, o when a phased-in pemanent leaves the game because its owne leaves the game. These ae witten as, but aen’t limited to, “When [this object] leaves the battlefield, . . .” o “Wheneve [something] is put into a gaveyad fom the battlefield, . . . .” (See also ule 603.10.) An ability that attempts to do something to the cad that left the battlefield checks fo it only in the fist zone that it went to. An ability that tigges when a cad is put into a cetain zone “fom anywhee” is neve teated as a leaves-the-battlefield ability, even if an object is put into that zone fom the battlefield. 2238 603.6c Leaves-the-battlefield abilities trigger when a permanent moves from the battlefield to another zone, or when a phased-in permanent leaves the game because its owner leaves the game. These are written as, but aren’t limited to, “When [this object] leaves the battlefield, . . .” or “Whenever [something] is put into a graveyard from the battlefield, . . . .” (See also rule 603.10.) An ability that attempts to do something to the card that left the battlefield checks for it only in the first zone that it went to. An ability that triggers when a card is put into a certain zone “from anywhere” is never treated as a leaves-the-battlefield ability, even if an object is put into that zone from the battlefield.
2239 2239
2240 603.6d Some pemanents have text that eads “[This pemanent] entes the battlefield with . . . ,” “As [this pemanent] entes the battlefield . . . ,” “[This pemanent] entes the battlefield as . . . ,” o “[This pemanent] entes the battlefield tapped.” Such text is a static ability—not a tiggeed ability—whose effect occus as pat of the event that puts the pemanent onto the battlefield. 2240 603.6d Some permanents have text that reads “[This permanent] enters the battlefield with . . . ,” “As [this permanent] enters the battlefield . . . ,” “[This permanent] enters the battlefield as . . . ,” or “[This permanent] enters the battlefield tapped.” Such text is a static ability—not a triggered ability—whose effect occurs as part of the event that puts the permanent onto the battlefield.
2241 2241
2242 603.6e Some Auas have tiggeed abilities that tigge on the enchanted pemanent leaving the battlefield. These tiggeed abilities can find the new object that pemanent cad became in the zone it moved to; they can also find the new object the Aua cad became in its owne’s gaveyad afte state-based actions have been checked. See ule 400.7. 2242 603.6e Some Auras have triggered abilities that trigger on the enchanted permanent leaving the battlefield. These triggered abilities can find the new object that permanent card became in the zone it moved to; they can also find the new object the Aura card became in its owner’s graveyard after state-based actions have been checked. See rule 400.7.
2243 2243
2244 603.7. An effect may ceate a delayed tiggeed ability that can do something at a late time. A delayed tiggeed ability will contain “when,” “wheneve,” o “at,” although that wod won’t usually begin the ability. 2244 603.7. An effect may create a delayed triggered ability that can do something at a later time. A delayed triggered ability will contain “when,” “whenever,” or “at,” although that word won’t usually begin the ability.
2245 2245
2246 603.7a Delayed tiggeed abilities ae ceated duing the esolution of spells o abilities, as the esult of a eplacement effect being applied, o as a esult of a static ability that allows a playe to take an action. A delayed tiggeed ability won’t tigge until it has actually been ceated, even if its tigge event occued just befoehand. Othe events that happen ealie may make the tigge event impossible. 2246 603.7a Delayed triggered abilities are created during the resolution of spells or abilities, as the result of a replacement effect being applied, or as a result of a static ability that allows a player to take an action. A delayed triggered ability won’t trigger until it has actually been created, even if its trigger event occurred just beforehand. Other events that happen earlier may make the trigger event impossible.
2247 Example: Pat of an effect eads “When this ceatue leaves the battlefield,” but the ceatue in question leaves the battlefield befoe the spell o ability ceating the effect esolves. In this case, the delayed ability neve tigges. 2247 Example: Part of an effect reads “When this creature leaves the battlefield,” but the creature in question leaves the battlefield before the spell or ability creating the effect resolves. In this case, the delayed ability never triggers.
2248 Example: If an effect eads “When this ceatue becomes untapped” and the named ceatue becomes untapped befoe the effect esolves, the ability waits fo the next time that ceatue untaps. 2248 Example: If an effect reads “When this creature becomes untapped” and the named creature becomes untapped before the effect resolves, the ability waits for the next time that creature untaps.
2249 2249
2250 603.7b A delayed tiggeed ability will tigge only once—the next time its tigge event occus—unless it has a stated duation, such as “this tun.” If its tigge event occus moe than once simultaneously and the ability doesn’t have a stated duation, the contolle of the delayed tiggeed ability chooses which event causes the ability to tigge. 2250 603.7b A delayed triggered ability will trigger only once—the next time its trigger event occurs—unless it has a stated duration, such as “this turn.” If its trigger event occurs more than once simultaneously and the ability doesn’t have a stated duration, the controller of the delayed triggered ability chooses which event causes the ability to trigger.
2251 2251
2252 603.7c A delayed tiggeed ability that efes to a paticula object still affects it even if the object changes chaacteistics. Howeve, if that object is no longe in the zone it’s expected to be in at the time the delayed tiggeed ability esolves, the ability won’t affect it. (Note that if that object left that zone and then etuned, it’s a new object and thus won’t be affected. See ule 400.7.) 2252 603.7c A delayed triggered ability that refers to a particular object still affects it even if the object changes characteristics. However, if that object is no longer in the zone it’s expected to be in at the time the delayed triggered ability resolves, the ability won’t affect it. (Note that if that object left that zone and then returned, it’s a new object and thus won’t be affected. See rule 400.7.)
2253 Example: An ability that eads “Exile this ceatue at the beginning of the next end step” will exile the pemanent even if it’s no longe a ceatue duing the next end step. Howeve, it won’t do anything if the pemanent left the battlefield befoe then. 2253 Example: An ability that reads “Exile this creature at the beginning of the next end step” will exile the permanent even if it’s no longer a creature during the next end step. However, it won’t do anything if the permanent left the battlefield before then.
2254 2254
2255 603.7d If a spell ceates a delayed tiggeed ability, the souce of that delayed tiggeed ability is that spell. The contolle of that delayed tiggeed ability is the playe who contolled that spell as it esolved. 2255 603.7d If a spell creates a delayed triggered ability, the source of that delayed triggered ability is that spell. The controller of that delayed triggered ability is the player who controlled that spell as it resolved.
2256 2256
2257 603.7e If an activated o tiggeed ability ceates a delayed tiggeed ability, the souce of that delayed tiggeed ability is the same as the souce of that othe ability. The contolle of that delayed tiggeed ability is the playe who contolled that othe ability as it esolved. 2257 603.7e If an activated or triggered ability creates a delayed triggered ability, the source of that delayed triggered ability is the same as the source of that other ability. The controller of that delayed triggered ability is the player who controlled that other ability as it resolved.
2258 2258
2259 603.7f If a static ability geneates a eplacement effect which causes a delayed tiggeed ability to be ceated, the souce of that delayed tiggeed ability is the object with that static ability. The contolle of that delayed tiggeed ability is the same as the contolle of that object at the time the eplacement effect was applied. 2259 603.7f If a static ability generates a replacement effect which causes a delayed triggered ability to be created, the source of that delayed triggered ability is the object with that static ability. The controller of that delayed triggered ability is the same as the controller of that object at the time the replacement effect was applied.
2260 2260
2261 603.7g If a static ability allows a playe to take an action and ceates a delayed tiggeed ability if that playe does so, the souce of that delayed tiggeed ability is the object with that static ability. The contolle of that delayed tiggeed ability is the same as the contolle of that object at the time the action was taken. 2261 603.7g If a static ability allows a player to take an action and creates a delayed triggered ability if that player does so, the source of that delayed triggered ability is the object with that static ability. The controller of that delayed triggered ability is the same as the controller of that object at the time the action was taken.
2262 2262
2263 603.8. Some tiggeed abilities tigge when a game state (such as a playe contolling no pemanents of a paticula cad type) is tue, athe than tiggeing when an event occus. These abilities tigge as soon as the game state matches the condition. They’ll go onto the stack at the next available oppotunity. These ae called state tigges. (Note that state tigges aen’t the same as state-based actions.) A state-tiggeed ability doesn’t tigge again until the ability has esolved, has been counteed, o has othewise left the stack. Then, if the object with the ability is still in the same zone and the game state still matches its tigge condition, the ability will tigge again. 2263 603.8. Some triggered abilities trigger when a game state (such as a player controlling no permanents of a particular card type) is true, rather than triggering when an event occurs. These abilities trigger as soon as the game state matches the condition. They’ll go onto the stack at the next available opportunity. These are called state triggers. (Note that state triggers aren’t the same as state-based actions.) A state-triggered ability doesn’t trigger again until the ability has resolved, has been countered, or has otherwise left the stack. Then, if the object with the ability is still in the same zone and the game state still matches its trigger condition, the ability will trigger again.
2264 Example: A pemanent’s ability eads, “Wheneve you have no cads in hand, daw a cad.” If its contolle plays the last cad fom thei hand, the ability will tigge once and won’t tigge again until it has left the stack. If its contolle casts a spell that eads “Discad you hand, then daw that many cads,” the ability will tigge duing the spell’s esolution because the playe’s hand was momentaily empty. 2264 Example: A permanent’s ability reads, “Whenever you have no cards in hand, draw a card.” If its controller plays the last card from their hand, the ability will trigger once and won’t trigger again until it has left the stack. If its controller casts a spell that reads “Discard your hand, then draw that many cards,” the ability will trigger during the spell’s resolution because the player’s hand was momentarily empty.
2265 2265
2266 603.9. Some tiggeed abilities tigge specifically when a playe loses the game. These abilities tigge when a playe loses o leaves the game, egadless of the eason, unless that playe leaves the game as the esult of a daw. See ule 104.3. 2266 603.9. Some triggered abilities trigger specifically when a player loses the game. These abilities trigger when a player loses or leaves the game, regardless of the reason, unless that player leaves the game as the result of a draw. See rule 104.3.
2267 2267
2268 603.10. Nomally, objects that exist immediately afte an event ae checked to see if the event matched any tigge conditions, and continuous effects that exist at that time ae used to detemine what the tigge conditions ae and what the objects involved in the event look like. Howeve, some tiggeed abilities ae exceptions to this ule; the game “looks back in time” to detemine if those abilities tigge, using the existence of those abilities and the appeaance of objects immediately pio to the event. The list of exceptions is as follows: 2268 603.10. Normally, objects that exist immediately after an event are checked to see if the event matched any trigger conditions, and continuous effects that exist at that time are used to determine what the trigger conditions are and what the objects involved in the event look like. However, some triggered abilities are exceptions to this rule; the game “looks back in time” to determine if those abilities trigger, using the existence of those abilities and the appearance of objects immediately prior to the event. The list of exceptions is as follows:
2269 2269
2270 603.10a Some zone-change tigges look back in time. These ae leaves-the-battlefield abilities, abilities that tigge when a cad leaves a gaveyad, and abilities that tigge when an object that all playes can see is put into a hand o libay. 2270 603.10a Some zone-change triggers look back in time. These are leaves-the-battlefield abilities, abilities that trigger when a card leaves a graveyard, and abilities that trigger when an object that all players can see is put into a hand or library.
2271 Example: Two ceatues ae on the battlefield along with an atifact that has the ability “Wheneve a ceatue dies, you gain 1 life.” Someone casts a spell that destoys all atifacts, ceatues, and enchantments. The atifact’s ability tigges twice, even though the atifact goes to its owne’s gaveyad at the same time as the ceatues. 2271 Example: Two creatures are on the battlefield along with an artifact that has the ability “Whenever a creature dies, you gain 1 life.” Someone casts a spell that destroys all artifacts, creatures, and enchantments. The artifact’s ability triggers twice, even though the artifact goes to its owner’s graveyard at the same time as the creatures.
2272 2272
2273 603.10b Abilities that tigge when a pemanent phases out look back in time. 2273 603.10b Abilities that trigger when a permanent phases out look back in time.
2274 2274
2275 603.10c Abilities that tigge specifically when an object becomes unattached look back in time. 2275 603.10c Abilities that trigger specifically when an object becomes unattached look back in time.
2276 2276
2277 603.10d Abilities that tigge when a playe loses contol of an object look back in time. 2277 603.10d Abilities that trigger when a player loses control of an object look back in time.
2278 2278
2279 603.10e Abilities that tigge when a spell is counteed look back in time. 2279 603.10e Abilities that trigger when a spell is countered look back in time.
2280 2280
2281 603.10f Abilities that tigge when a playe loses the game look back in time. 2281 603.10f Abilities that trigger when a player loses the game look back in time.
2282 2282
2283 603.10g Abilities that tigge when a playe planeswalks away fom a plane look back in time. 2283 603.10g Abilities that trigger when a player planeswalks away from a plane look back in time.
2284 2284
2285 603.11. Some objects have a static ability that’s linked to one o moe tiggeed abilities. (See ule 607, “Linked Abilities.”) These objects combine the abilities into one paagaph, with the static ability fist, followed by each tiggeed ability that’s linked to it. A vey few objects have tiggeed abilities which ae witten with the tigge condition in the middle of the ability, athe than at the beginning. 2285 603.11. Some objects have a static ability that’s linked to one or more triggered abilities. (See rule 607, “Linked Abilities.”) These objects combine the abilities into one paragraph, with the static ability first, followed by each triggered ability that’s linked to it. A very few objects have triggered abilities which are written with the trigger condition in the middle of the ability, rather than at the beginning.
2286 Example: An ability that eads “Reveal the fist cad you daw each tun. Wheneve you eveal a basic land cad this way, daw a cad” is a static ability linked to a tiggeed ability. 2286 Example: An ability that reads “Reveal the first card you draw each turn. Whenever you reveal a basic land card this way, draw a card” is a static ability linked to a triggered ability.
2287 2287
2288 603.12. A esolving spell o ability may allow o instuct a playe to take an action and ceate a tiggeed ability that tigges “when [a playe] [does o doesn’t]” take that action o “when [something happens] this way.” These eflexive tiggeed abilities follow the ules fo delayed tiggeed abilities (see ule 603.7), except that they’e checked immediately afte being ceated and tigge based on whethe the tigge event o events occued ealie duing the esolution of the spell o ability that ceated them. 2288 603.12. A resolving spell or ability may allow or instruct a player to take an action and create a triggered ability that triggers “when [a player] [does or doesn’t]” take that action or “when [something happens] this way.” These reflexive triggered abilities follow the rules for delayed triggered abilities (see rule 603.7), except that they’re checked immediately after being created and trigger based on whether the trigger event or events occurred earlier during the resolution of the spell or ability that created them.
2289 Example: Heat-Piece Manticoe has an ability that eads “When Heat-Piece Manticoe entes the battlefield, you may sacifice anothe ceatue. When you do, Heat-Piece Manticoe deals damage equal to that ceatue’s powe to any taget.” The eflexive tiggeed ability tigges only when you sacifice anothe ceatue due to the oiginal tiggeed ability, and not if you sacifice a ceatue fo any othe eason. 2289 Example: Heart-Piercer Manticore has an ability that reads “When Heart-Piercer Manticore enters the battlefield, you may sacrifice another creature. When you do, Heart-Piercer Manticore deals damage equal to that creature’s power to any target.” The reflexive triggered ability triggers only when you sacrifice another creature due to the original triggered ability, and not if you sacrifice a creature for any other reason.
2290 2290
2291 604. Handling Static Abilities 2291 604. Handling Static Abilities
2292 2292
2293 604.1. Static abilities do something all the time athe than being activated o tiggeed. They ae witten as statements, and they’e simply tue. 2293 604.1. Static abilities do something all the time rather than being activated or triggered. They are written as statements, and they’re simply true.
2294 2294
2295 604.2. Static abilities ceate continuous effects, some of which ae pevention effects o eplacement effects. These effects ae active as long as the pemanent with the ability emains on the battlefield and has the ability, o as long as the object with the ability emains in the appopiate zone, as descibed in ule 113.6. 2295 604.2. Static abilities create continuous effects, some of which are prevention effects or replacement effects. These effects are active as long as the permanent with the ability remains on the battlefield and has the ability, or as long as the object with the ability remains in the appropriate zone, as described in rule 113.6.
2296 2296
2297 604.3. Some static abilities ae chaacteistic-defining abilities. A chaacteistic-defining ability conveys infomation about an object’s chaacteistics that would nomally be found elsewhee on that object (such as in its mana cost, type line, o powe/toughness box) o oveides infomation found elsewhee on that object. Chaacteistic-defining abilities function in all zones. They also function outside the game. 2297 604.3. Some static abilities are characteristic-defining abilities. A characteristic-defining ability conveys information about an object’s characteristics that would normally be found elsewhere on that object (such as in its mana cost, type line, or power/toughness box) or overrides information found elsewhere on that object. Characteristic-defining abilities function in all zones. They also function outside the game.
2298 2298
2299 604.3a A static ability is a chaacteistic-defining ability if it meets the following citeia: (1) It defines an object’s colos, subtypes, powe, o toughness; (2) it is pinted on the cad it affects, it was ganted to the token it affects by the effect that ceated the token, o it was acquied by the object it affects as the esult of a copy effect o text-changing effect; (3) it does not diectly affect the chaacteistics of any othe objects; (4) it is not an ability that an object gants to itself; and (5) it does not set the values of such chaacteistics only if cetain conditions ae met. 2299 604.3a A static ability is a characteristic-defining ability if it meets the following criteria: (1) It defines an object’s colors, subtypes, power, or toughness; (2) it is printed on the card it affects, it was granted to the token it affects by the effect that created the token, or it was acquired by the object it affects as the result of a copy effect or text-changing effect; (3) it does not directly affect the characteristics of any other objects; (4) it is not an ability that an object grants to itself; and (5) it does not set the values of such characteristics only if certain conditions are met.
2300 2300
2301 604.4. Many Auas, Equipment, and Fotifications have static abilities that modify the object they’e attached to, but those abilities don’t taget that object. If an Aua, Equipment, o Fotification is moved to a diffeent object, the ability stops applying to the oiginal object and stats modifying the new one. 2301 604.4. Many Auras, Equipment, and Fortifications have static abilities that modify the object they’re attached to, but those abilities don’t target that object. If an Aura, Equipment, or Fortification is moved to a different object, the ability stops applying to the original object and starts modifying the new one.
2302 2302
2303 604.5. Some static abilities apply while a spell is on the stack. These ae often abilities that efe to counteing the spell. Also, abilities that say “As an additional cost to cast . . . ,” “You may pay [cost] athe than pay [this object]’s mana cost,” and “You may cast [this object] without paying its mana cost” wok while a spell is on the stack. 2303 604.5. Some static abilities apply while a spell is on the stack. These are often abilities that refer to countering the spell. Also, abilities that say “As an additional cost to cast . . . ,” “You may pay [cost] rather than pay [this object]’s mana cost,” and “You may cast [this object] without paying its mana cost” work while a spell is on the stack.
2304 2304
2305 604.6. Some static abilities apply while a cad is in any zone that you could cast o play it fom (usually you hand). These ae limited to those that ead, “You may [cast/play] [this cad] . . . ,” “You can’t [cast/play] [this cad] . . . ,” and “[Cast/Play] [this cad] only . . . .” 2305 604.6. Some static abilities apply while a card is in any zone that you could cast or play it from (usually your hand). These are limited to those that read, “You may [cast/play] [this card] . . . ,” “You can’t [cast/play] [this card] . . . ,” and “[Cast/Play] [this card] only . . . .”
2306 2306
2307 604.7. Unlike spells and othe kinds of abilities, static abilities can’t use an object’s last known infomation fo puposes of detemining how thei effects ae applied. 2307 604.7. Unlike spells and other kinds of abilities, static abilities can’t use an object’s last known information for purposes of determining how their effects are applied.
2308 2308
2309 605. Mana Abilities 2309 605. Mana Abilities
2310 2310
2311 605.1. Some activated abilities and some tiggeed abilities ae mana abilities, which ae subject to special ules. Only abilities that meet eithe of the following two sets of citeia ae mana abilities, egadless of what othe effects they may geneate o what timing estictions (such as “Activate this ability only any time you could cast an instant”) they may have. 2311 605.1. Some activated abilities and some triggered abilities are mana abilities, which are subject to special rules. Only abilities that meet either of the following two sets of criteria are mana abilities, regardless of what other effects they may generate or what timing restrictions (such as “Activate this ability only any time you could cast an instant”) they may have.
2312 2312
2313 605.1a An activated ability is a mana ability if it meets all of the following citeia: it doesn’t equie a taget (see ule 115.6), it could add mana to a playe’s mana pool when it esolves, and it’s not a loyalty ability. (See ule 606, “Loyalty Abilities.”) 2313 605.1a An activated ability is a mana ability if it meets all of the following criteria: it doesn’t require a target (see rule 115.6), it could add mana to a player’s mana pool when it resolves, and it’s not a loyalty ability. (See rule 606, “Loyalty Abilities.”)
2314 2314
2315 605.1b A tiggeed ability is a mana ability if it meets all of the following citeia: it doesn’t equie a taget (see ule 115.6), it tigges fom the esolution of an activated mana ability (see ule 605.1a) o fom mana being added to a playe’s mana pool, and it could add mana to a playe’s mana pool when it esolves. 2315 605.1b A triggered ability is a mana ability if it meets all of the following criteria: it doesn’t require a target (see rule 115.6), it triggers from the resolution of an activated mana ability (see rule 605.1a) or from mana being added to a player’s mana pool, and it could add mana to a player’s mana pool when it resolves.
2316 2316
2317 605.2. A mana ability emains a mana ability even if the game state doesn’t allow it to poduce mana. 2317 605.2. A mana ability remains a mana ability even if the game state doesn’t allow it to produce mana.
2318 Example: A pemanent has an ability that eads “{T}: Add {G} fo each ceatue you contol.” The ability is still a mana ability even if you contol no ceatues o if the pemanent is aleady tapped. 2318 Example: A permanent has an ability that reads “{T}: Add {G} for each creature you control.” The ability is still a mana ability even if you control no creatures or if the permanent is already tapped.
2319 2319
2320 605.3. Activating an activated mana ability follows the ules fo activating any othe activated ability (see ule 602.2), with the following exceptions: 2320 605.3. Activating an activated mana ability follows the rules for activating any other activated ability (see rule 602.2), with the following exceptions:
2321 2321
2322 605.3a A playe may activate an activated mana ability wheneve they have pioity, wheneve they ae casting a spell o activating an ability that equies a mana payment, o wheneve a ule o effect asks fo a mana payment, even if it’s in the middle of casting o esolving a spell o activating o esolving an ability. 2322 605.3a A player may activate an activated mana ability whenever they have priority, whenever they are casting a spell or activating an ability that requires a mana payment, or whenever a rule or effect asks for a mana payment, even if it’s in the middle of casting or resolving a spell or activating or resolving an ability.
2323 2323
2324 605.3b An activated mana ability doesn’t go on the stack, so it can’t be tageted, counteed, o othewise esponded to. Rathe, it esolves immediately afte it is activated. (See ule 405.6c.) 2324 605.3b An activated mana ability doesn’t go on the stack, so it can’t be targeted, countered, or otherwise responded to. Rather, it resolves immediately after it is activated. (See rule 405.6c.)
2325 2325
2326 605.3c Once a playe begins to activate a mana ability, that ability can’t be activated again until it has esolved. 2326 605.3c Once a player begins to activate a mana ability, that ability can’t be activated again until it has resolved.
2327 2327
2328 605.4. Tiggeed mana abilities follow all the ules fo othe tiggeed abilities (see ule 603, “Handling Tiggeed Abilities”), with the following exception: 2328 605.4. Triggered mana abilities follow all the rules for other triggered abilities (see rule 603, “Handling Triggered Abilities”), with the following exception:
2329 2329
2330 605.4a A tiggeed mana ability doesn’t go on the stack, so it can’t be tageted, counteed, o othewise esponded to. Rathe, it esolves immediately afte the mana ability that tiggeed it, without waiting fo pioity. 2330 605.4a A triggered mana ability doesn’t go on the stack, so it can’t be targeted, countered, or otherwise responded to. Rather, it resolves immediately after the mana ability that triggered it, without waiting for priority.
2331 Example: An enchantment eads, “Wheneve a playe taps a land fo mana, that playe adds one mana of any type that land poduced.” If a playe taps lands fo mana while casting a spell, the additional mana is added immediately and can be used to pay fo the spell. 2331 Example: An enchantment reads, “Whenever a player taps a land for mana, that player adds one mana of any type that land produced.” If a player taps lands for mana while casting a spell, the additional mana is added immediately and can be used to pay for the spell.
2332 2332
2333 605.5. Abilities that don’t meet the citeia specified in ules 605.1a–b and spells aen’t mana abilities. 2333 605.5. Abilities that don’t meet the criteria specified in rules 605.1a–b and spells aren’t mana abilities.
2334 2334
2335 605.5a An ability with a taget is not a mana ability, even if it could put mana into a playe’s mana pool when it esolves. The same is tue fo a tiggeed ability that could poduce mana but tigges fom an event othe than activating a mana ability, o a tiggeed ability that tigges fom activating a mana ability but couldn’t poduce mana. These follow the nomal ules fo activated o tiggeed abilities, as appopiate. 2335 605.5a An ability with a target is not a mana ability, even if it could put mana into a player’s mana pool when it resolves. The same is true for a triggered ability that could produce mana but triggers from an event other than activating a mana ability, or a triggered ability that triggers from activating a mana ability but couldn’t produce mana. These follow the normal rules for activated or triggered abilities, as appropriate.
2336 2336
2337 605.5b A spell can neve be a mana ability, even if it could put mana into a playe’s mana pool when it esolves. It’s cast and esolves just like any othe spell. Some olde cads wee pinted with the cad type “mana souce”; these cads have eceived eata in the Oacle cad efeence and ae now instants. 2337 605.5b A spell can never be a mana ability, even if it could put mana into a player’s mana pool when it resolves. It’s cast and resolves just like any other spell. Some older cards were printed with the card type “mana source”; these cards have received errata in the Oracle card reference and are now instants.
2338 2338
2339 606. Loyalty Abilities 2339 606. Loyalty Abilities
2340 2340
2341 606.1. Some activated abilities ae loyalty abilities, which ae subject to special ules. 2341 606.1. Some activated abilities are loyalty abilities, which are subject to special rules.
2342 2342
2343 606.2. An activated ability with a loyalty symbol in its cost is a loyalty ability. Nomally, only planeswalkes have loyalty abilities. 2343 606.2. An activated ability with a loyalty symbol in its cost is a loyalty ability. Normally, only planeswalkers have loyalty abilities.
2344 2344
2345 606.3. A playe may activate a loyalty ability of a pemanent they contol any time they have pioity and the stack is empty duing a main phase of thei tun, but only if no playe has peviously activated a loyalty ability of that pemanent that tun. 2345 606.3. A player may activate a loyalty ability of a permanent they control any time they have priority and the stack is empty during a main phase of their turn, but only if no player has previously activated a loyalty ability of that permanent that turn.
2346 2346
2347 606.4. The cost to activate a loyalty ability of a pemanent is to put on o emove fom that pemanent a cetain numbe of loyalty countes, as shown by the loyalty symbol in the ability’s cost. 2347 606.4. The cost to activate a loyalty ability of a permanent is to put on or remove from that permanent a certain number of loyalty counters, as shown by the loyalty symbol in the ability’s cost.
2348 2348
2349 606.5. A loyalty ability with a negative loyalty cost can’t be activated unless the pemanent has at least that many loyalty countes on it. 2349 606.5. A loyalty ability with a negative loyalty cost can’t be activated unless the permanent has at least that many loyalty counters on it.
2350 2350
2351 607. Linked Abilities 2351 607. Linked Abilities
2352 2352
2353 607.1. An object may have two abilities pinted on it such that one of them causes actions to be taken o objects o playes to be affected and the othe one diectly efes to those actions, objects, o playes. If so, these two abilities ae linked: the second efes only to actions that wee taken o objects o playes that wee affected by the fist, and not by any othe ability. 2353 607.1. An object may have two abilities printed on it such that one of them causes actions to be taken or objects or players to be affected and the other one directly refers to those actions, objects, or players. If so, these two abilities are linked: the second refers only to actions that were taken or objects or players that were affected by the first, and not by any other ability.
2354 2354
2355 607.1a An ability pinted on an object within anothe ability that gants that ability to that object is consideed to be “pinted on” that object fo these puposes. 2355 607.1a An ability printed on an object within another ability that grants that ability to that object is considered to be “printed on” that object for these purposes.
2356 2356
2357 607.1b An ability pinted on eithe face of a double-faced cad (see ule 711) is consideed to be “pinted on” that object fo these puposes, egadless of which face is up. 2357 607.1b An ability printed on either face of a double-faced card (see rule 711) is considered to be “printed on” that object for these purposes, regardless of which face is up.
2358 2358
2359 607.1c An ability pinted on an object that fulfills both citeia descibed in ule 607.1 is linked to itself. 2359 607.1c An ability printed on an object that fulfills both criteria described in rule 607.1 is linked to itself.
2360 2360
2361 607.2. Thee ae diffeent kinds of linked abilities. 2361 607.2. There are different kinds of linked abilities.
2362 2362
2363 607.2a If an object has an activated o tiggeed ability pinted on it that instucts a playe to exile one o moe cads and an ability pinted on it that efes eithe to “the exiled cads” o to cads “exiled with [this object],” these abilities ae linked. The second ability efes only to cads in the exile zone that wee put thee as a esult of an instuction to exile them in the fist ability. 2363 607.2a If an object has an activated or triggered ability printed on it that instructs a player to exile one or more cards and an ability printed on it that refers either to “the exiled cards” or to cards “exiled with [this object],” these abilities are linked. The second ability refers only to cards in the exile zone that were put there as a result of an instruction to exile them in the first ability.
2364 2364
2365 607.2b If an object has an ability pinted on it that geneates a eplacement effect which causes one o moe cads to be exiled and an ability pinted on it that efes eithe to “the exiled cads” o to cads “exiled with [this object],” these abilities ae linked. The second ability efes only to cads in the exile zone that wee put thee as a diect esult of a eplacement event caused by the fist ability. See ule 614, “Replacement Effects.” 2365 607.2b If an object has an ability printed on it that generates a replacement effect which causes one or more cards to be exiled and an ability printed on it that refers either to “the exiled cards” or to cards “exiled with [this object],” these abilities are linked. The second ability refers only to cards in the exile zone that were put there as a direct result of a replacement event caused by the first ability. See rule 614, “Replacement Effects.”
2366 2366
2367 607.2c If an object has an activated o tiggeed ability pinted on it that puts one o moe objects onto the battlefield and an ability pinted on it that efes to objects “put onto the battlefield with [this object]” o “ceated with [this object],” those abilities ae linked. The second can efe only to objects put onto the battlefield as a esult of the fist. 2367 607.2c If an object has an activated or triggered ability printed on it that puts one or more objects onto the battlefield and an ability printed on it that refers to objects “put onto the battlefield with [this object]” or “created with [this object],” those abilities are linked. The second can refer only to objects put onto the battlefield as a result of the first.
2368 2368
2369 607.2d If an object has an ability pinted on it that causes a playe to “choose a [value]” and an ability pinted on it that efes to “the chosen [value],” “the last chosen [value],” o simila, those abilities ae linked. The second ability efes only to a choice made as a esult of the fist ability. 2369 607.2d If an object has an ability printed on it that causes a player to “choose a [value]” and an ability printed on it that refers to “the chosen [value],” “the last chosen [value],” or similar, those abilities are linked. The second ability refers only to a choice made as a result of the first ability.
2370 2370
2371 607.2e If an object has an ability pinted on it that causes a playe to choose fom between two o moe wods that othewise have no ules meaning and an ability pinted on it that efes to a choice involving one o moe of those wods, those abilities ae linked. The second can efe only to a choice made as a esult of the fist ability. 2371 607.2e If an object has an ability printed on it that causes a player to choose from between two or more words that otherwise have no rules meaning and an ability printed on it that refers to a choice involving one or more of those words, those abilities are linked. The second can refer only to a choice made as a result of the first ability.
2372 2372
2373 607.2f If an object has an ability pinted on it that causes a playe to pay a cost as it entes the battlefield and an ability pinted on it that efes to the cost paid “as [this object] enteed the battlefield,” these abilities ae linked. The second ability efes only to a cost paid as a esult of the fist ability. 2373 607.2f If an object has an ability printed on it that causes a player to pay a cost as it enters the battlefield and an ability printed on it that refers to the cost paid “as [this object] entered the battlefield,” these abilities are linked. The second ability refers only to a cost paid as a result of the first ability.
2374 2374
2375 607.2g If an object has both a static ability and one o moe tiggeed abilities pinted on it in the same paagaph, each of those tiggeed abilities is linked to the static ability. Each tiggeed ability efes only to actions taken as a esult of the static ability. See ule 603.11. 2375 607.2g If an object has both a static ability and one or more triggered abilities printed on it in the same paragraph, each of those triggered abilities is linked to the static ability. Each triggered ability refers only to actions taken as a result of the static ability. See rule 603.11.
2376 2376
2377 607.2h If an object has a kicke ability pinted on it and an ability pinted on it that efes to whethe that object was kicked, those abilities ae linked. The second efes only to whethe the intent to pay the kicke cost listed in the fist was declaed as the object was cast as a spell. If a kicke ability lists multiple costs, it will have multiple abilities linked to it. Each of those abilities will specify which kicke cost it efes to. See ule 702.32, “Kicke.” 2377 607.2h If an object has a kicker ability printed on it and an ability printed on it that refers to whether that object was kicked, those abilities are linked. The second refers only to whether the intent to pay the kicker cost listed in the first was declared as the object was cast as a spell. If a kicker ability lists multiple costs, it will have multiple abilities linked to it. Each of those abilities will specify which kicker cost it refers to. See rule 702.32, “Kicker.”
2378 2378
2379 607.2i If an object has an ability pinted on it that causes a playe to pay a vaiable additional cost as it’s cast and an ability pinted on it that efes to the cost paid “as [this object] was cast,” these abilities ae linked. The second efes only to the value chosen fo the cost listed in the fist as the object was cast as a spell. See ule 601.2b. 2379 607.2i If an object has an ability printed on it that causes a player to pay a variable additional cost as it’s cast and an ability printed on it that refers to the cost paid “as [this object] was cast,” these abilities are linked. The second refers only to the value chosen for the cost listed in the first as the object was cast as a spell. See rule 601.2b.
2380 2380
2381 607.2j The two abilities epesented by the champion keywod ae linked abilities. See ule 702.71, “Champion.” 2381 607.2j The two abilities represented by the champion keyword are linked abilities. See rule 702.71, “Champion.”
2382 2382
2383 607.2k Abilities peceded by an ancho wod ae linked to the ability that allows a playe to choose that ancho wod. See ule 614.12b. 2383 607.2k Abilities preceded by an anchor word are linked to the ability that allows a player to choose that anchor word. See rule 614.12b.
2384 2384
2385 607.2m If an object has a static ability pinted on it that allows a playe to exile one o moe cads “befoe you shuffle you deck to stat the game” and an ability pinted on it that efes to cads “exiled with cads named [this object’s name],” the second ability is linked to the fist ability of any objects that had the specified name befoe the game began. 2385 607.2m If an object has a static ability printed on it that allows a player to exile one or more cards “before you shuffle your deck to start the game” and an ability printed on it that refers to cards “exiled with cards named [this object’s name],” the second ability is linked to the first ability of any objects that had the specified name before the game began.
2386 2386
2387 607.3. If, within a pai of linked abilities, one ability efes to a single object as “the exiled cad,” “a cad exiled with [this cad],” o a simila phase, and the othe ability has exiled multiple cads (usually because it was copied), the ability efes to each of the exiled cads. If that ability asks fo any infomation about the exiled cad, such as a chaacteistic o conveted mana cost, it gets multiple answes. If these answes ae used to detemine the value of a vaiable, the sum of the answes is used. If that ability pefoms any actions on the exiled cad, it pefoms that action on each exiled cad. 2387 607.3. If, within a pair of linked abilities, one ability refers to a single object as “the exiled card,” “a card exiled with [this card],” or a similar phrase, and the other ability has exiled multiple cards (usually because it was copied), the ability refers to each of the exiled cards. If that ability asks for any information about the exiled card, such as a characteristic or converted mana cost, it gets multiple answers. If these answers are used to determine the value of a variable, the sum of the answers is used. If that ability performs any actions on the exiled card, it performs that action on each exiled card.
2388 2388
2389 607.4. An ability may be pat of moe than one pai of linked abilities. 2389 607.4. An ability may be part of more than one pair of linked abilities.
2390 Example: Paadise Plume has the following thee abilities: “As Paadise Plume entes the battlefield, choose a colo,” “Wheneve a playe casts a spell of the chosen colo, you may gain 1 life,” and “{T}: Add one mana of the chosen colo.” The fist and second abilities ae linked. The fist and thid abilities ae linked. 2390 Example: Paradise Plume has the following three abilities: “As Paradise Plume enters the battlefield, choose a color,” “Whenever a player casts a spell of the chosen color, you may gain 1 life,” and “{T}: Add one mana of the chosen color.” The first and second abilities are linked. The first and third abilities are linked.
2391 2391
2392 607.5. If an object acquies a pai of linked abilities as pat of the same effect, the abilities will be similaly linked to one anothe on that object even though they ween’t pinted on that object. They can’t be linked to any othe ability, egadless of what othe abilities the object may cuently have o may have had in the past. 2392 607.5. If an object acquires a pair of linked abilities as part of the same effect, the abilities will be similarly linked to one another on that object even though they weren’t printed on that object. They can’t be linked to any other ability, regardless of what other abilities the object may currently have or may have had in the past.
2393 Example: Ac-Slogge has the ability “{R}, Exile the top ten cads of you libay: Ac-Slogge deals 2 damage to any taget.” Sistes of Stone Death has the ability “{B}{G}: Exile taget ceatue blocking o blocked by Sistes of Stone Death” and the ability “{2}{B}: Put a ceatue cad exiled with Sistes of Stone Death onto the battlefield unde you contol.” Quicksilve Elemental has the ability “{U}: Quicksilve Elemental gains all activated abilities of taget ceatue until end of tun.” If a playe has Quicksilve Elemental gain Ac-Slogge’s ability, activates it, then has Quicksilve Elemental gain Sistes of Stone Death’s abilities, activates the exile ability, and then activates the etun-to-the-battlefield ability, only the ceatue cad Quicksilve Elemental exiled with Sistes of Stone Death’s ability can be etuned to the battlefield. Ceatue cads Quicksilve Elemental exiled with Ac-Slogge’s ability can’t be etuned. 2393 Example: Arc-Slogger has the ability “{R}, Exile the top ten cards of your library: Arc-Slogger deals 2 damage to any target.” Sisters of Stone Death has the ability “{B}{G}: Exile target creature blocking or blocked by Sisters of Stone Death” and the ability “{2}{B}: Put a creature card exiled with Sisters of Stone Death onto the battlefield under your control.” Quicksilver Elemental has the ability “{U}: Quicksilver Elemental gains all activated abilities of target creature until end of turn.” If a player has Quicksilver Elemental gain Arc-Slogger’s ability, activates it, then has Quicksilver Elemental gain Sisters of Stone Death’s abilities, activates the exile ability, and then activates the return-to-the-battlefield ability, only the creature card Quicksilver Elemental exiled with Sisters of Stone Death’s ability can be returned to the battlefield. Creature cards Quicksilver Elemental exiled with Arc-Slogger’s ability can’t be returned.
2394 2394
2395 608. Resolving Spells and Abilities 2395 608. Resolving Spells and Abilities
2396 2396
2397 608.1. Each time all playes pass in succession, the spell o ability on top of the stack esolves. (See ule 609, “Effects.”) 2397 608.1. Each time all players pass in succession, the spell or ability on top of the stack resolves. (See rule 609, “Effects.”)
2398 2398
2399 608.2. If the object that’s esolving is an instant spell, a socey spell, o an ability, its esolution may involve seveal steps. The steps descibed in ules 608.2a and 608.2b ae followed fist. The steps descibed in ules 608.2c–j ae then followed as appopiate, in no specific ode. The step descibed in ule 608.2k is followed last. 2399 608.2. If the object that’s resolving is an instant spell, a sorcery spell, or an ability, its resolution may involve several steps. The steps described in rules 608.2a and 608.2b are followed first. The steps described in rules 608.2c–j are then followed as appropriate, in no specific order. The step described in rule 608.2k is followed last.
2400 2400
2401 608.2a If a tiggeed ability has an intevening “if” clause, it checks whethe the clause’s condition is tue. If it isn’t, the ability is emoved fom the stack and does nothing. Othewise, it continues to esolve. See ule 603.4. 2401 608.2a If a triggered ability has an intervening “if” clause, it checks whether the clause’s condition is true. If it isn’t, the ability is removed from the stack and does nothing. Otherwise, it continues to resolve. See rule 603.4.
2402 2402
2403 608.2b If the spell o ability specifies tagets, it checks whethe the tagets ae still legal. A taget that’s no longe in the zone it was in when it was tageted is illegal. Othe changes to the game state may cause a taget to no longe be legal; fo example, its chaacteistics may have changed o an effect may have changed the text of the spell. If the souce of an ability has left the zone it was in, its last known infomation is used duing this pocess. If all its tagets, fo evey instance of the wod “taget,” ae now illegal, the spell o ability doesn’t esolve. It’s emoved fom the stack and, if it’s a spell, put into its owne’s gaveyad. Othewise, the spell o ability will esolve nomally. Illegal tagets, if any, won’t be affected by pats of a esolving spell’s effect fo which they’e illegal. Othe pats of the effect fo which those tagets ae not illegal may still affect them. If the spell o ability ceates any continuous effects that affect game ules (see ule 613.10), those effects don’t apply to illegal tagets. If pat of the effect equies infomation about an illegal taget, it fails to detemine any such infomation. Any pat of the effect that equies that infomation won’t happen. 2403 608.2b If the spell or ability specifies targets, it checks whether the targets are still legal. A target that’s no longer in the zone it was in when it was targeted is illegal. Other changes to the game state may cause a target to no longer be legal; for example, its characteristics may have changed or an effect may have changed the text of the spell. If the source of an ability has left the zone it was in, its last known information is used during this process. If all its targets, for every instance of the word “target,” are now illegal, the spell or ability doesn’t resolve. It’s removed from the stack and, if it’s a spell, put into its owner’s graveyard. Otherwise, the spell or ability will resolve normally. Illegal targets, if any, won’t be affected by parts of a resolving spell’s effect for which they’re illegal. Other parts of the effect for which those targets are not illegal may still affect them. If the spell or ability creates any continuous effects that affect game rules (see rule 613.10), those effects don’t apply to illegal targets. If part of the effect requires information about an illegal target, it fails to determine any such information. Any part of the effect that requires that information won’t happen.
2404 Example: Soin’s Thist is a black instant that eads, “Soin’s Thist deals 2 damage to taget ceatue and you gain 2 life.” If the ceatue isn’t a legal taget duing the esolution of Soin’s Thist (say, if the ceatue has gained potection fom black o left the battlefield), then Soin’s Thist doesn’t esolve. Its contolle doesn’t gain any life. 2404 Example: Sorin’s Thirst is a black instant that reads, “Sorin’s Thirst deals 2 damage to target creature and you gain 2 life.” If the creature isn’t a legal target during the resolution of Sorin’s Thirst (say, if the creature has gained protection from black or left the battlefield), then Sorin’s Thirst doesn’t resolve. Its controller doesn’t gain any life.
2405 Example: Plague Spoes eads, “Destoy taget nonblack ceatue and taget land. They can’t be egeneated.” Suppose the same ceatue land is chosen both as the nonblack ceatue and as the land, and the colo of the ceatue land is changed to black befoe Plague Spoes esolves. Plague Spoes still esolves because the black ceatue land is still a legal taget fo the “taget land” pat of the spell. The “destoy taget nonblack ceatue” pat of the spell won’t affect that pemanent, but the “destoy taget land” pat of the spell will still destoy it. It can’t be egeneated. 2405 Example: Plague Spores reads, “Destroy target nonblack creature and target land. They can’t be regenerated.” Suppose the same creature land is chosen both as the nonblack creature and as the land, and the color of the creature land is changed to black before Plague Spores resolves. Plague Spores still resolves because the black creature land is still a legal target for the “target land” part of the spell. The “destroy target nonblack creature” part of the spell won’t affect that permanent, but the “destroy target land” part of the spell will still destroy it. It can’t be regenerated.
2406 2406
2407 608.2c The contolle of the spell o ability follows its instuctions in the ode witten. Howeve, eplacement effects may modify these actions. In some cases, late text on the cad may modify the meaning of ealie text (fo example, “Destoy taget ceatue. It can’t be egeneated” o “Counte taget spell. If that spell is counteed this way, put it on top of its owne’s libay instead of into its owne’s gaveyad.”) Don’t just apply effects step by step without thinking in these cases—ead the whole text and apply the ules of English to the text. 2407 608.2c The controller of the spell or ability follows its instructions in the order written. However, replacement effects may modify these actions. In some cases, later text on the card may modify the meaning of earlier text (for example, “Destroy target creature. It can’t be regenerated” or “Counter target spell. If that spell is countered this way, put it on top of its owner’s library instead of into its owner’s graveyard.”) Don’t just apply effects step by step without thinking in these cases—read the whole text and apply the rules of English to the text.
2408 2408
2409 608.2d If an effect of a spell o ability offes any choices othe than choices aleady made as pat of casting the spell, activating the ability, o othewise putting the spell o ability on the stack, the playe announces these while applying the effect. The playe can’t choose an option that’s illegal o impossible, with the exception that having a libay with no cads in it doesn’t make dawing a cad an impossible action (see ule 121.3). If an effect divides o distibutes something, such as damage o countes, as a playe chooses among any numbe of untageted playes and/o objects, the playe chooses the amount and division such that each chosen playe o object eceives at least one of whateve is being divided. (Note that if an effect divides o distibutes something, such as damage o countes, as a playe chooses among some numbe of taget objects and/o playes, the amount and division wee detemined as the spell o ability was put onto the stack athe than at this time; see ule 601.2d.) 2409 608.2d If an effect of a spell or ability offers any choices other than choices already made as part of casting the spell, activating the ability, or otherwise putting the spell or ability on the stack, the player announces these while applying the effect. The player can’t choose an option that’s illegal or impossible, with the exception that having a library with no cards in it doesn’t make drawing a card an impossible action (see rule 121.3). If an effect divides or distributes something, such as damage or counters, as a player chooses among any number of untargeted players and/or objects, the player chooses the amount and division such that each chosen player or object receives at least one of whatever is being divided. (Note that if an effect divides or distributes something, such as damage or counters, as a player chooses among some number of target objects and/or players, the amount and division were determined as the spell or ability was put onto the stack rather than at this time; see rule 601.2d.)
2410 Example: A spell’s instuction eads, “You may sacifice a ceatue. If you don’t, you lose 4 life.” A playe who contols no ceatues can’t choose the sacifice option. 2410 Example: A spell’s instruction reads, “You may sacrifice a creature. If you don’t, you lose 4 life.” A player who controls no creatures can’t choose the sacrifice option.
2411 2411
2412 608.2e Some spells and abilities have multiple steps o actions, denoted by sepaate sentences o clauses, that involve multiple playes. In these cases, the choices fo the fist action ae made in APNAP ode, and then the fist action is pocessed simultaneously. Then the choices fo the second action ae made in APNAP ode, and then that action is pocessed simultaneously, and so on. See ule 101.4. 2412 608.2e Some spells and abilities have multiple steps or actions, denoted by separate sentences or clauses, that involve multiple players. In these cases, the choices for the first action are made in APNAP order, and then the first action is processed simultaneously. Then the choices for the second action are made in APNAP order, and then that action is processed simultaneously, and so on. See rule 101.4.
2413 2413
2414 608.2f If an effect gives a playe the option to pay mana, they may activate mana abilities befoe taking that action. If an effect specifically instucts o allows a playe to cast a spell duing esolution, they do so by following the steps in ules 601.2a–i, except no playe eceives pioity afte it’s cast. That spell becomes the topmost object on the stack, and the cuently esolving spell o ability continues to esolve, which may include casting othe spells this way. No othe spells can nomally be cast and no othe abilities can nomally be activated duing esolution. 2414 608.2f If an effect gives a player the option to pay mana, they may activate mana abilities before taking that action. If an effect specifically instructs or allows a player to cast a spell during resolution, they do so by following the steps in rules 601.2a–i, except no player receives priority after it’s cast. That spell becomes the topmost object on the stack, and the currently resolving spell or ability continues to resolve, which may include casting other spells this way. No other spells can normally be cast and no other abilities can normally be activated during resolution.
2415 2415
2416 608.2g If an effect equies infomation fom the game (such as the numbe of ceatues on the battlefield), the answe is detemined only once, when the effect is applied. If the effect equies infomation fom a specific object, including the souce of the ability itself, the effect uses the cuent infomation of that object if it’s in the public zone it was expected to be in; if it’s no longe in that zone, o if the effect has moved it fom a public zone to a hidden zone, the effect uses the object’s last known infomation. See ule 113.7a. If an ability states that an object does something, it’s the object as it exists—o as it most ecently existed—that does it, not the ability. 2416 608.2g If an effect requires information from the game (such as the number of creatures on the battlefield), the answer is determined only once, when the effect is applied. If the effect requires information from a specific object, including the source of the ability itself, the effect uses the current information of that object if it’s in the public zone it was expected to be in; if it’s no longer in that zone, or if the effect has moved it from a public zone to a hidden zone, the effect uses the object’s last known information. See rule 113.7a. If an ability states that an object does something, it’s the object as it exists—or as it most recently existed—that does it, not the ability.
2417 2417
2418 608.2h If an effect efes to cetain chaacteistics, it checks only fo the value of the specified chaacteistics, egadless of any elated ones an object may also have. 2418 608.2h If an effect refers to certain characteristics, it checks only for the value of the specified characteristics, regardless of any related ones an object may also have.
2419 Example: An effect that eads “Destoy all black ceatues” destoys a white-and-black ceatue, but one that eads “Destoy all nonblack ceatues” doesn’t. 2419 Example: An effect that reads “Destroy all black creatures” destroys a white-and-black creature, but one that reads “Destroy all nonblack creatures” doesn’t.
2420 2420
2421 608.2i If an ability’s effect efes to a specific untageted object that has been peviously efeed to by that ability’s cost o tigge condition, it still affects that object even if the object has changed chaacteistics. 2421 608.2i If an ability’s effect refers to a specific untargeted object that has been previously referred to by that ability’s cost or trigger condition, it still affects that object even if the object has changed characteristics.
2422 Example: Wall of Teas says “Wheneve Wall of Teas blocks a ceatue, etun that ceatue to its owne’s hand at end of combat.” If Wall of Teas blocks a ceatue, then that ceatue ceases to be a ceatue befoe the tiggeed ability esolves, the pemanent will still be etuned to its owne’s hand. 2422 Example: Wall of Tears says “Whenever Wall of Tears blocks a creature, return that creature to its owner’s hand at end of combat.” If Wall of Tears blocks a creature, then that creature ceases to be a creature before the triggered ability resolves, the permanent will still be returned to its owner’s hand.
2423 2423
2424 608.2j If an instant spell, socey spell, o ability that can legally esolve leaves the stack once it stats to esolve, it will continue to esolve fully. 2424 608.2j If an instant spell, sorcery spell, or ability that can legally resolve leaves the stack once it starts to resolve, it will continue to resolve fully.
2425 2425
2426 608.2k As the final pat of an instant o socey spell’s esolution, the spell is put into its owne’s gaveyad. As the final pat of an ability’s esolution, the ability is emoved fom the stack and ceases to exist. 2426 608.2k As the final part of an instant or sorcery spell’s resolution, the spell is put into its owner’s graveyard. As the final part of an ability’s resolution, the ability is removed from the stack and ceases to exist.
2427 2427
2428 608.3. If the object that’s esolving is a pemanent spell, its esolution involves a single step (unless it’s an Aua). The spell cad becomes a pemanent and is put onto the battlefield unde the contol of the spell’s contolle. 2428 608.3. If the object that’s resolving is a permanent spell, its resolution involves a single step (unless it’s an Aura). The spell card becomes a permanent and is put onto the battlefield under the control of the spell’s controller.
2429 2429
2430 608.3a If the object that’s esolving is an Aua spell, its esolution involves two steps. Fist, it checks whethe the taget specified by its enchant ability is still legal, as descibed in ule 608.2b. (See ule 702.5, “Enchant.”) If so, the spell cad becomes a pemanent and is put onto the battlefield unde the contol of the spell’s contolle attached to the object it was tageting. 2430 608.3a If the object that’s resolving is an Aura spell, its resolution involves two steps. First, it checks whether the target specified by its enchant ability is still legal, as described in rule 608.2b. (See rule 702.5, “Enchant.”) If so, the spell card becomes a permanent and is put onto the battlefield under the control of the spell’s controller attached to the object it was targeting.
2431 2431
2432 608.3b If a pemanent spell esolves but its contolle can’t put it onto the battlefield, that playe puts it into its owne’s gaveyad. 2432 608.3b If a permanent spell resolves but its controller can’t put it onto the battlefield, that player puts it into its owner’s graveyard.
2433 Example: Woms of the Eath has the ability “Lands can’t ente the battlefield.” Clone says “You may have Clone ente the battlefield as a copy of any ceatue on the battlefield.” If a playe casts Clone and chooses to copy Dyad Abo (a land ceatue) while Woms of the Eath is on the battlefield, Clone can’t ente the battlefield fom the stack. It’s put into its owne’s gaveyad. 2433 Example: Worms of the Earth has the ability “Lands can’t enter the battlefield.” Clone says “You may have Clone enter the battlefield as a copy of any creature on the battlefield.” If a player casts Clone and chooses to copy Dryad Arbor (a land creature) while Worms of the Earth is on the battlefield, Clone can’t enter the battlefield from the stack. It’s put into its owner’s graveyard.
2434 2434
2435 609. Effects 2435 609. Effects
2436 2436
2437 609.1. An effect is something that happens in the game as a esult of a spell o ability. When a spell, activated ability, o tiggeed ability esolves, it may ceate one o moe one-shot o continuous effects. Static abilities may ceate one o moe continuous effects. Text itself is neve an effect. 2437 609.1. An effect is something that happens in the game as a result of a spell or ability. When a spell, activated ability, or triggered ability resolves, it may create one or more one-shot or continuous effects. Static abilities may create one or more continuous effects. Text itself is never an effect.
2438 2438
2439 609.2. Effects apply only to pemanents unless the instuction’s text states othewise o they clealy can apply only to objects in one o moe othe zones. 2439 609.2. Effects apply only to permanents unless the instruction’s text states otherwise or they clearly can apply only to objects in one or more other zones.
2440 Example: An effect that changes all lands into ceatues won’t alte land cads in playes’ gaveyads. But an effect that says spells cost moe to cast will apply only to spells on the stack, since a spell is always on the stack while a playe is casting it. 2440 Example: An effect that changes all lands into creatures won’t alter land cards in players’ graveyards. But an effect that says spells cost more to cast will apply only to spells on the stack, since a spell is always on the stack while a player is casting it.
2441 2441
2442 609.3. If an effect attempts to do something impossible, it does only as much as possible. 2442 609.3. If an effect attempts to do something impossible, it does only as much as possible.
2443 Example: If a playe is holding only one cad, an effect that eads “Discad two cads” causes them to discad only that cad. If an effect moves cads out of the libay (as opposed to dawing), it moves as many as possible. 2443 Example: If a player is holding only one card, an effect that reads “Discard two cards” causes them to discard only that card. If an effect moves cards out of the library (as opposed to drawing), it moves as many as possible.
2444 2444
2445 609.4. Some effects state that a playe may do something “as though” some condition wee tue o a ceatue can do something “as though” some condition wee tue. This applies only to the stated effect. Fo puposes of that effect, teat the game exactly as if the stated condition wee tue. Fo all othe puposes, teat the game nomally. 2445 609.4. Some effects state that a player may do something “as though” some condition were true or a creature can do something “as though” some condition were true. This applies only to the stated effect. For purposes of that effect, treat the game exactly as if the stated condition were true. For all other purposes, treat the game normally.
2446 2446
2447 609.4a If two effects state that a playe may (o a ceatue can) do the same thing “as though” diffeent conditions wee tue, both conditions could apply. If one “as though” effect satisfies the equiements fo anothe “as though” effect, then both effects will apply. 2447 609.4a If two effects state that a player may (or a creature can) do the same thing “as though” different conditions were true, both conditions could apply. If one “as though” effect satisfies the requirements for another “as though” effect, then both effects will apply.
2448 Example: A playe contols Vedalken Oey, an atifact that says “You may cast nonland cads as though they had flash.” That playe casts Shaman’s Tance, an instant that says, in pat, “You may play cads fom othe playes’ gaveyads as though they wee in you gaveyad.” The playe may cast a socey with flashback fom anothe playe’s gaveyad as though it wee in that playe’s gaveyad and as though it had flash. 2448 Example: A player controls Vedalken Orrery, an artifact that says “You may cast nonland cards as though they had flash.” That player casts Shaman’s Trance, an instant that says, in part, “You may play cards from other players’ graveyards as though they were in your graveyard.” The player may cast a sorcery with flashback from another player’s graveyard as though it were in that player’s graveyard and as though it had flash.
2449 2449
2450 609.4b If an effect allows a playe to spend mana “as though it wee mana of any [type o colo],” this affects only how the playe may pay a cost. It doesn’t change that cost, and it doesn’t change what mana was actually spent to pay that cost. 2450 609.4b If an effect allows a player to spend mana “as though it were mana of any [type or color],” this affects only how the player may pay a cost. It doesn’t change that cost, and it doesn’t change what mana was actually spent to pay that cost.
2451 2451
2452 609.5. If an effect could esult in a tie, the text of the spell o ability that ceated the effect will specify what to do in the event of a tie. The Magic game has no default fo ties. 2452 609.5. If an effect could result in a tie, the text of the spell or ability that created the effect will specify what to do in the event of a tie. The Magic game has no default for ties.
2453 2453
2454 609.6. Some continuous effects ae eplacement effects o pevention effects. See ules 614 and 615. 2454 609.6. Some continuous effects are replacement effects or prevention effects. See rules 614 and 615.
2455 2455
2456 609.7. Some effects apply to damage fom a souce—fo example, “The next time a ed souce of you choice would deal damage to you this tun, pevent that damage.” 2456 609.7. Some effects apply to damage from a source—for example, “The next time a red source of your choice would deal damage to you this turn, prevent that damage.”
2457 2457
2458 609.7a If an effect equies a playe to choose a souce of damage, they may choose a pemanent; a spell on the stack (including a pemanent spell); any object efeed to by an object on the stack, by a eplacement o pevention effect that’s waiting to apply, o by a delayed tiggeed ability that’s waiting to tigge (even if that object is no longe in the zone it used to be in); o a face-up object in the command zone. A souce doesn’t need to be capable of dealing damage to be a legal choice. The souce is chosen when the effect is ceated. If the playe chooses a pemanent, the effect will apply to the next damage dealt by that pemanent, egadless of whethe it’s combat damage o damage dealt as the esult of a spell o ability. If the playe chooses a pemanent spell, the effect will apply to any damage dealt by that spell and any damage dealt by the pemanent that spell becomes when it esolves. 2458 609.7a If an effect requires a player to choose a source of damage, they may choose a permanent; a spell on the stack (including a permanent spell); any object referred to by an object on the stack, by a replacement or prevention effect that’s waiting to apply, or by a delayed triggered ability that’s waiting to trigger (even if that object is no longer in the zone it used to be in); or a face-up object in the command zone. A source doesn’t need to be capable of dealing damage to be a legal choice. The source is chosen when the effect is created. If the player chooses a permanent, the effect will apply to the next damage dealt by that permanent, regardless of whether it’s combat damage or damage dealt as the result of a spell or ability. If the player chooses a permanent spell, the effect will apply to any damage dealt by that spell and any damage dealt by the permanent that spell becomes when it resolves.
2459 2459
2460 609.7b Some effects fom esolved spells and abilities pevent o eplace damage fom souces with cetain popeties, such as a ceatue o a souce of a paticula colo. When the souce would deal damage, the “shield” echecks the souce’s popeties. If the popeties no longe match, the damage isn’t pevented o eplaced. If fo any eason the shield pevents no damage o eplaces no damage, the shield isn’t used up. 2460 609.7b Some effects from resolved spells and abilities prevent or replace damage from sources with certain properties, such as a creature or a source of a particular color. When the source would deal damage, the “shield” rechecks the source’s properties. If the properties no longer match, the damage isn’t prevented or replaced. If for any reason the shield prevents no damage or replaces no damage, the shield isn’t used up.
2461 2461
2462 609.7c Some effects fom static abilities pevent o eplace damage fom souces with cetain popeties. Fo these effects, the pevention o eplacement applies to souces that ae pemanents with that popety and to any souces that aen’t on the battlefield that have that popety. 2462 609.7c Some effects from static abilities prevent or replace damage from sources with certain properties. For these effects, the prevention or replacement applies to sources that are permanents with that property and to any sources that aren’t on the battlefield that have that property.
2463 2463
2464 610. One-Shot Effects 2464 610. One-Shot Effects
2465 2465
2466 610.1. A one-shot effect does something just once and doesn’t have a duation. Examples include dealing damage, destoying a pemanent, ceating a token, and moving an object fom one zone to anothe. 2466 610.1. A one-shot effect does something just once and doesn’t have a duration. Examples include dealing damage, destroying a permanent, creating a token, and moving an object from one zone to another.
2467 2467
2468 610.2. Some one-shot effects ceate a delayed tiggeed ability, which instucts a playe to do something late in the game (usually at a specific time) athe than as the spell o ability that’s ceating the one-shot effect esolves. See ule 603.7. 2468 610.2. Some one-shot effects create a delayed triggered ability, which instructs a player to do something later in the game (usually at a specific time) rather than as the spell or ability that’s creating the one-shot effect resolves. See rule 603.7.
2469 2469
2470 610.3. Some one-shot effects cause an object to change zones “until” a specified event occus. A second one-shot effect is ceated immediately afte the specified event. This second one-shot effect etuns the object to its pevious zone. 2470 610.3. Some one-shot effects cause an object to change zones “until” a specified event occurs. A second one-shot effect is created immediately after the specified event. This second one-shot effect returns the object to its previous zone.
2471 2471
2472 610.3a If the specified event has aleady occued when the initial one-shot effect would cause the object to change zones, the object doesn’t move. 2472 610.3a If the specified event has already occurred when the initial one-shot effect would cause the object to change zones, the object doesn’t move.
2473 2473
2474 610.3b An object etuned to the battlefield this way etuns unde its owne’s contol unless othewise specified. 2474 610.3b An object returned to the battlefield this way returns under its owner’s control unless otherwise specified.
2475 2475
2476 610.3c If multiple one-shot effects ae ceated this way immediately afte one o moe simultaneous events, those one-shot effects ae also simultaneous. 2476 610.3c If multiple one-shot effects are created this way immediately after one or more simultaneous events, those one-shot effects are also simultaneous.
2477 Example: Two Banishe Piests have each exiled a cad. All ceatues ae destoyed at the same time by Day of Judgment. The two exiled cads ae etuned to the battlefield at the same time. 2477 Example: Two Banisher Priests have each exiled a card. All creatures are destroyed at the same time by Day of Judgment. The two exiled cards are returned to the battlefield at the same time.
2478 2478
2479 611. Continuous Effects 2479 611. Continuous Effects
2480 2480
2481 611.1. A continuous effect modifies chaacteistics of objects, modifies contol of objects, o affects playes o the ules of the game, fo a fixed o indefinite peiod. 2481 611.1. A continuous effect modifies characteristics of objects, modifies control of objects, or affects players or the rules of the game, for a fixed or indefinite period.
2482 2482
2483 611.2. A continuous effect may be geneated by the esolution of a spell o ability. 2483 611.2. A continuous effect may be generated by the resolution of a spell or ability.
2484 2484
2485 611.2a A continuous effect geneated by the esolution of a spell o ability lasts as long as stated by the spell o ability ceating it (such as “until end of tun”). If no duation is stated, it lasts until the end of the game. 2485 611.2a A continuous effect generated by the resolution of a spell or ability lasts as long as stated by the spell or ability creating it (such as “until end of turn”). If no duration is stated, it lasts until the end of the game.
2486 2486
2487 611.2b Some continuous effects geneated by the esolution of a spell o ability have duations woded “fo as long as . . . .” If the “fo as long as” duation neve stats, o it ends befoe the moment the effect would fist be applied, the effect does nothing. It doesn’t stat and immediately stop again, and it doesn’t last foeve. 2487 611.2b Some continuous effects generated by the resolution of a spell or ability have durations worded “for as long as . . . .” If the “for as long as” duration never starts, or it ends before the moment the effect would first be applied, the effect does nothing. It doesn’t start and immediately stop again, and it doesn’t last forever.
2488 Example: Maste Thief has the ability “When Maste Thief entes the battlefield, gain contol of taget atifact fo as long as you contol Maste Thief.” If you lose contol of Maste Thief befoe the ability esolves, it does nothing, because its duation—as long as you contol Maste Thief—was ove befoe the effect began. 2488 Example: Master Thief has the ability “When Master Thief enters the battlefield, gain control of target artifact for as long as you control Master Thief.” If you lose control of Master Thief before the ability resolves, it does nothing, because its duration—as long as you control Master Thief—was over before the effect began.
2489 2489
2490 611.2c If a continuous effect geneated by the esolution of a spell o ability modifies the chaacteistics o changes the contolle of any objects, the set of objects it affects is detemined when that continuous effect begins. Afte that point, the set won’t change. (Note that this woks diffeently than a continuous effect fom a static ability.) A continuous effect geneated by the esolution of a spell o ability that doesn’t modify the chaacteistics o change the contolle of any objects modifies the ules of the game, so it can affect objects that ween’t affected when that continuous effect began. If a single continuous effect has pats that modify the chaacteistics o changes the contolle of any objects and othe pats that don’t, the set of objects each pat applies to is detemined independently. 2490 611.2c If a continuous effect generated by the resolution of a spell or ability modifies the characteristics or changes the controller of any objects, the set of objects it affects is determined when that continuous effect begins. After that point, the set won’t change. (Note that this works differently than a continuous effect from a static ability.) A continuous effect generated by the resolution of a spell or ability that doesn’t modify the characteristics or change the controller of any objects modifies the rules of the game, so it can affect objects that weren’t affected when that continuous effect began. If a single continuous effect has parts that modify the characteristics or changes the controller of any objects and other parts that don’t, the set of objects each part applies to is determined independently.
2491 Example: An effect that eads “All white ceatues get +1/+1 until end of tun” gives the bonus to all pemanents that ae white ceatues when the spell o ability esolves—even if they change colo late—and doesn’t affect those that ente the battlefield o tun white aftewad. 2491 Example: An effect that reads “All white creatures get +1/+1 until end of turn” gives the bonus to all permanents that are white creatures when the spell or ability resolves—even if they change color later—and doesn’t affect those that enter the battlefield or turn white afterward.
2492 Example: An effect that eads “Pevent all damage ceatues would deal this tun” doesn’t modify any object’s chaacteistics, so it’s modifying the ules of the game. That means the effect will apply even to damage fom ceatues that ween’t on the battlefield when the continuous effect began. It also affects damage fom pemanents that become ceatues late in the tun. 2492 Example: An effect that reads “Prevent all damage creatures would deal this turn” doesn’t modify any object’s characteristics, so it’s modifying the rules of the game. That means the effect will apply even to damage from creatures that weren’t on the battlefield when the continuous effect began. It also affects damage from permanents that become creatures later in the turn.
2493 2493
2494 611.2d If a esolving spell o ability that ceates a continuous effect contains a vaiable such as X, the value of that vaiable is detemined only once, on esolution. See ule 608.2g. 2494 611.2d If a resolving spell or ability that creates a continuous effect contains a variable such as X, the value of that variable is determined only once, on resolution. See rule 608.2g.
2495 2495
2496 611.2e If a esolving spell o ability both puts a nontoken pemanent onto the battlefield and ceates a continuous effect stating that the pemanent “is [chaacteistic],” that continuous effect applies simultaneously with the pemanent enteing the battlefield. This chaacteistic is usually a colo o a ceatue type. If the continuous effect says the pemanent “becomes [chaacteistic]” o “gains [an ability],” that effect applies afte the pemanent is on the battlefield. 2496 611.2e If a resolving spell or ability both puts a nontoken permanent onto the battlefield and creates a continuous effect stating that the permanent “is [characteristic],” that continuous effect applies simultaneously with the permanent entering the battlefield. This characteristic is usually a color or a creature type. If the continuous effect says the permanent “becomes [characteristic]” or “gains [an ability],” that effect applies after the permanent is on the battlefield.
2497 Example: Abite of the Ideal puts an atifact, ceatue, o land cad onto the battlefield and says, in pat, “That pemanent is an enchantment in addition to its othe types.” An ability that tigges wheneve an enchantment entes the battlefield would tigge. The pemanent doesn’t ente the battlefield and then become an enchantment. 2497 Example: Arbiter of the Ideal puts an artifact, creature, or land card onto the battlefield and says, in part, “That permanent is an enchantment in addition to its other types.” An ability that triggers whenever an enchantment enters the battlefield would trigger. The permanent doesn’t enter the battlefield and then become an enchantment.
2498 2498
2499 611.3. A continuous effect may be geneated by the static ability of an object. 2499 611.3. A continuous effect may be generated by the static ability of an object.
2500 2500
2501 611.3a A continuous effect geneated by a static ability isn’t “locked in”; it applies at any given moment to whateve its text indicates. 2501 611.3a A continuous effect generated by a static ability isn’t “locked in”; it applies at any given moment to whatever its text indicates.
2502 2502
2503 611.3b The effect applies at all times that the pemanent geneating it is on the battlefield o the object geneating it is in the appopiate zone. 2503 611.3b The effect applies at all times that the permanent generating it is on the battlefield or the object generating it is in the appropriate zone.
2504 Example: A pemanent with the static ability “All white ceatues get +1/+1” geneates an effect that continuously gives +1/+1 to each white ceatue on the battlefield. If a ceatue becomes white, it gets this bonus; a ceatue that stops being white loses it. 2504 Example: A permanent with the static ability “All white creatures get +1/+1” generates an effect that continuously gives +1/+1 to each white creature on the battlefield. If a creature becomes white, it gets this bonus; a creature that stops being white loses it.
2505 2505
2506 611.3c Continuous effects that modify chaacteistics of pemanents do so simultaneously with the pemanent enteing the battlefield. They don’t wait until the pemanent is on the battlefield and then change it. Because such effects apply as the pemanent entes the battlefield, they ae applied befoe detemining whethe the pemanent will cause an ability to tigge when it entes the battlefield. 2506 611.3c Continuous effects that modify characteristics of permanents do so simultaneously with the permanent entering the battlefield. They don’t wait until the permanent is on the battlefield and then change it. Because such effects apply as the permanent enters the battlefield, they are applied before determining whether the permanent will cause an ability to trigger when it enters the battlefield.
2507 Example: A pemanent with the static ability “All white ceatues get +1/+1” is on the battlefield. A ceatue spell that would nomally ceate a 1/1 white ceatue instead ceates a 2/2 white ceatue. The ceatue doesn’t ente the battlefield as 1/1 and then change to 2/2. 2507 Example: A permanent with the static ability “All white creatures get +1/+1” is on the battlefield. A creature spell that would normally create a 1/1 white creature instead creates a 2/2 white creature. The creature doesn’t enter the battlefield as 1/1 and then change to 2/2.
2508 2508
2509 612. Text-Changing Effects 2509 612. Text-Changing Effects
2510 2510
2511 612.1. Some continuous effects change an object’s text. This can apply to any wods o symbols pinted on that object, but geneally affects only that object’s ules text (which appeas in its text box) and/o the text that appeas in its type line. Such an effect is a text-changing effect. 2511 612.1. Some continuous effects change an object’s text. This can apply to any words or symbols printed on that object, but generally affects only that object’s rules text (which appears in its text box) and/or the text that appears in its type line. Such an effect is a text-changing effect.
2512 2512
2513 612.2. A text-changing effect changes only those wods that ae used in the coect way (fo example, a Magic colo wod being used as a colo wod, a land type wod used as a land type, o a ceatue type wod used as a ceatue type). An effect that changes a colo wod o a subtype can’t change a cad name, even if that name contains a wod o a seies of lettes that is the same as a Magic colo wod, basic land type, o ceatue type. 2513 612.2. A text-changing effect changes only those words that are used in the correct way (for example, a Magic color word being used as a color word, a land type word used as a land type, or a creature type word used as a creature type). An effect that changes a color word or a subtype can’t change a card name, even if that name contains a word or a series of letters that is the same as a Magic color word, basic land type, or creature type.
2514 2514
2515 612.2a Most spells and abilities that ceate ceatue tokens use ceatue types to define both the ceatue types and the names of the tokens. A text-changing effect that affects such a spell o an object with such an ability can change these wods because they’e being used as ceatue types, even though they’e also being used as names. 2515 612.2a Most spells and abilities that create creature tokens use creature types to define both the creature types and the names of the tokens. A text-changing effect that affects such a spell or an object with such an ability can change these words because they’re being used as creature types, even though they’re also being used as names.
2516 2516
2517 612.3. Effects that add o emove abilities don’t change the text of the objects they affect, so any abilities that ae ganted to an object can’t be modified by text-changing effects that affect that object. 2517 612.3. Effects that add or remove abilities don’t change the text of the objects they affect, so any abilities that are granted to an object can’t be modified by text-changing effects that affect that object.
2518 2518
2519 612.4. A token’s subtypes and ules text ae defined by the spell o ability that ceated the token. A text-changing effect that affects a token can change these chaacteistics. 2519 612.4. A token’s subtypes and rules text are defined by the spell or ability that created the token. A text-changing effect that affects a token can change these characteristics.
2520 2520
2521 612.5. One cad (Volath’s Shapeshifte) states that an object has the “full text” of anothe object. This changes not just the text that appeas in the object’s text box and type line, but also changes the text that epesents its name, mana cost, colo indicato, powe, and toughness. 2521 612.5. One card (Volrath’s Shapeshifter) states that an object has the “full text” of another object. This changes not just the text that appears in the object’s text box and type line, but also changes the text that represents its name, mana cost, color indicator, power, and toughness.
2522 2522
2523 612.6. One cad (Spy Kit) states that an object has “all names of nonlegenday ceatue cads.” This changes the text that epesents the object’s name. That object has the name of each nonlegenday ceatue cad in the Oacle cad efeence. (See ule 108.1.) 2523 612.6. One card (Spy Kit) states that an object has “all names of nonlegendary creature cards.” This changes the text that represents the object’s name. That object has the name of each nonlegendary creature card in the Oracle card reference. (See rule 108.1.)
2524 2524
2525 612.7. One cad (Awakening of Vitu-Ghazi) ceates a continuous effect that sets the name of an object. This changes the text that epesents the object’s name. That object loses any names it had and has only the specified name. 2525 612.7. One card (Awakening of Vitu-Ghazi) creates a continuous effect that sets the name of an object. This changes the text that represents the object’s name. That object loses any names it had and has only the specified name.
2526 2526
2527 612.8. A splice ability changes a spell’s text by adding the ules text of the cad with splice to the spell, following that spell’s own ules text. It doesn’t modify o eplace any of that spell’s own text. (See ule 702.46, “Splice.”) 2527 612.8. A splice ability changes a spell’s text by adding the rules text of the card with splice to the spell, following that spell’s own rules text. It doesn’t modify or replace any of that spell’s own text. (See rule 702.46, “Splice.”)
2528 2528
2529 613. Inteaction of Continuous Effects 2529 613. Interaction of Continuous Effects
2530 2530
2531 613.1. The values of an object’s chaacteistics ae detemined by stating with the actual object. Fo a cad, that means the values of the chaacteistics pinted on that cad. Fo a token o a copy of a spell o cad, that means the values of the chaacteistics defined by the effect that ceated it. Then all applicable continuous effects ae applied in a seies of layes in the following ode: 2531 613.1. The values of an object’s characteristics are determined by starting with the actual object. For a card, that means the values of the characteristics printed on that card. For a token or a copy of a spell or card, that means the values of the characteristics defined by the effect that created it. Then all applicable continuous effects are applied in a series of layers in the following order:
2532 2532
2533 613.1a Laye 1: Copy effects ae applied. See ule 706, “Copying Objects.” 2533 613.1a Layer 1: Copy effects are applied. See rule 706, “Copying Objects.”
2534 2534
2535 613.1b Laye 2: Contol-changing effects ae applied. 2535 613.1b Layer 2: Control-changing effects are applied.
2536 2536
2537 613.1c Laye 3: Text-changing effects ae applied. See ule 612, “Text-Changing Effects.” 2537 613.1c Layer 3: Text-changing effects are applied. See rule 612, “Text-Changing Effects.”
2538 2538
2539 613.1d Laye 4: Type-changing effects ae applied. These include effects that change an object’s cad type, subtype, and/o supetype. 2539 613.1d Layer 4: Type-changing effects are applied. These include effects that change an object’s card type, subtype, and/or supertype.
2540 2540
2541 613.1e Laye 5: Colo-changing effects ae applied. 2541 613.1e Layer 5: Color-changing effects are applied.
2542 2542
2543 613.1f Laye 6: Ability-adding effects, ability-emoving effects, and effects that say an object can’t have an ability ae applied. 2543 613.1f Layer 6: Ability-adding effects, ability-removing effects, and effects that say an object can’t have an ability are applied.
2544 2544
2545 613.1g Laye 7: Powe- and/o toughness-changing effects ae applied. 2545 613.1g Layer 7: Power- and/or toughness-changing effects are applied.
2546 2546
2547 613.2. Within layes 1–6, apply effects fom chaacteistic-defining abilities fist (see ule 604.3), then all othe effects in timestamp ode (see ule 613.6). Note that dependency may alte the ode in which effects ae applied within a laye. (See ule 613.7.) 2547 613.2. Within layers 1–6, apply effects from characteristic-defining abilities first (see rule 604.3), then all other effects in timestamp order (see rule 613.6). Note that dependency may alter the order in which effects are applied within a layer. (See rule 613.7.)
2548 2548
2549 613.3. Within laye 7, apply effects in a seies of sublayes in the ode descibed below. Within each sublaye, apply effects in timestamp ode. (See ule 613.6.) Note that dependency may alte the ode in which effects ae applied within a sublaye. (See ule 613.7.) 2549 613.3. Within layer 7, apply effects in a series of sublayers in the order described below. Within each sublayer, apply effects in timestamp order. (See rule 613.6.) Note that dependency may alter the order in which effects are applied within a sublayer. (See rule 613.7.)
2550 2550
2551 613.3a Laye 7a: Effects fom chaacteistic-defining abilities that define powe and/o toughness ae applied. See ule 604.3. 2551 613.3a Layer 7a: Effects from characteristic-defining abilities that define power and/or toughness are applied. See rule 604.3.
2552 2552
2553 613.3b Laye 7b: Effects that set powe and/o toughness to a specific numbe o value ae applied. Effects that efe to the base powe and/o toughness of a ceatue apply in this laye. 2553 613.3b Layer 7b: Effects that set power and/or toughness to a specific number or value are applied. Effects that refer to the base power and/or toughness of a creature apply in this layer.
2554 2554
2555 613.3c Laye 7c: Effects that modify powe and/o toughness (but don’t set powe and/o toughness to a specific numbe o value) ae applied. 2555 613.3c Layer 7c: Effects that modify power and/or toughness (but don’t set power and/or toughness to a specific number or value) are applied.
2556 2556
2557 613.3d Laye 7d: Powe and/o toughness changes fom countes ae applied. See ule 122, “Countes.” 2557 613.3d Layer 7d: Power and/or toughness changes from counters are applied. See rule 122, “Counters.”
2558 2558
2559 613.3e Laye 7e: Effects that switch a ceatue’s powe and toughness ae applied. Such effects take the value of powe and apply it to the ceatue’s toughness, and take the value of toughness and apply it to the ceatue’s powe. 2559 613.3e Layer 7e: Effects that switch a creature’s power and toughness are applied. Such effects take the value of power and apply it to the creature’s toughness, and take the value of toughness and apply it to the creature’s power.
2560 Example: A 1/3 ceatue is given +0/+1 by an effect. Then anothe effect switches the ceatue’s powe and toughness. Its new powe and toughness is 4/1. A new effect gives the ceatue +5/+0. Its “unswitched” powe and toughness would be 6/4, so its actual powe and toughness is 4/6. 2560 Example: A 1/3 creature is given +0/+1 by an effect. Then another effect switches the creature’s power and toughness. Its new power and toughness is 4/1. A new effect gives the creature +5/+0. Its “unswitched” power and toughness would be 6/4, so its actual power and toughness is 4/6.
2561 Example: A 1/3 ceatue is given +0/+1 by an effect. Then anothe effect switches the ceatue’s powe and toughness. Its new powe and toughness is 4/1. If the +0/+1 effect ends befoe the switch effect ends, the ceatue becomes 3/1. 2561 Example: A 1/3 creature is given +0/+1 by an effect. Then another effect switches the creature’s power and toughness. Its new power and toughness is 4/1. If the +0/+1 effect ends before the switch effect ends, the creature becomes 3/1.
2562 Example: A 1/3 ceatue is given +0/+1 by an effect. Then anothe effect switches the ceatue’s powe and toughness. Then anothe effect switches its powe and toughness again. The two switches essentially cancel each othe, and the ceatue becomes 1/4. 2562 Example: A 1/3 creature is given +0/+1 by an effect. Then another effect switches the creature’s power and toughness. Then another effect switches its power and toughness again. The two switches essentially cancel each other, and the creature becomes 1/4.
2563 2563
2564 613.4. The application of continuous effects as descibed by the laye system is continually and automatically pefomed by the game. All esulting changes to an object’s chaacteistics ae instantaneous. 2564 613.4. The application of continuous effects as described by the layer system is continually and automatically performed by the game. All resulting changes to an object’s characteristics are instantaneous.
2565 Example: Hono of the Pue is an enchantment that eads “White ceatues you contol get +1/+1.” Hono of the Pue and a 2/2 black ceatue ae on the battlefield unde you contol. If an effect then tuns the ceatue white (laye 5), it gets +1/+1 fom Hono of the Pue (laye 7c), becoming 3/3. If the ceatue’s colo is late changed to ed (laye 5), Hono of the Pue’s effect stops applying to it, and it will etun to being 2/2. 2565 Example: Honor of the Pure is an enchantment that reads “White creatures you control get +1/+1.” Honor of the Pure and a 2/2 black creature are on the battlefield under your control. If an effect then turns the creature white (layer 5), it gets +1/+1 from Honor of the Pure (layer 7c), becoming 3/3. If the creature’s color is later changed to red (layer 5), Honor of the Pure’s effect stops applying to it, and it will return to being 2/2.
2566 Example: Gay Oge, a 2/2 ceatue, is on the battlefield. An effect puts a +1/+1 counte on it (laye 7d), making it 3/3. A spell tageting it that says “Taget ceatue gets +4/+4 until end of tun” esolves (laye 7c), making it 7/7. An enchantment that says “Ceatues you contol get +0/+2” entes the battlefield (laye 7c), making it 7/9. An effect that says “Taget ceatue becomes 0/1 until end of tun” is applied to it (laye 7b), making it 5/8 (0/1, with +4/+4 fom the esolved spell, +0/+2 fom the enchantment, and +1/+1 fom the counte). 2566 Example: Gray Ogre, a 2/2 creature, is on the battlefield. An effect puts a +1/+1 counter on it (layer 7d), making it 3/3. A spell targeting it that says “Target creature gets +4/+4 until end of turn” resolves (layer 7c), making it 7/7. An enchantment that says “Creatures you control get +0/+2” enters the battlefield (layer 7c), making it 7/9. An effect that says “Target creature becomes 0/1 until end of turn” is applied to it (layer 7b), making it 5/8 (0/1, with +4/+4 from the resolved spell, +0/+2 from the enchantment, and +1/+1 from the counter).
2567 2567
2568 613.5. If an effect should be applied in diffeent layes and/o sublayes, the pats of the effect each apply in thei appopiate ones. If an effect stats to apply in one laye and/o sublaye, it will continue to be applied to the same set of objects in each othe applicable laye and/o sublaye, even if the ability geneating the effect is emoved duing this pocess. 2568 613.5. If an effect should be applied in different layers and/or sublayers, the parts of the effect each apply in their appropriate ones. If an effect starts to apply in one layer and/or sublayer, it will continue to be applied to the same set of objects in each other applicable layer and/or sublayer, even if the ability generating the effect is removed during this process.
2569 Example: An effect that eads “Wild Mongel gets +1/+1 and becomes the colo of you choice until end of tun” is both a powe- and toughness-changing effect and a colo-changing effect. The “becomes the colo of you choice” pat is applied in laye 5, and then the “gets +1/+1” pat is applied in laye 7c. 2569 Example: An effect that reads “Wild Mongrel gets +1/+1 and becomes the color of your choice until end of turn” is both a power- and toughness-changing effect and a color-changing effect. The “becomes the color of your choice” part is applied in layer 5, and then the “gets +1/+1” part is applied in layer 7c.
2570 Example: Act of Teason has an effect that eads “Gain contol of taget ceatue until end of tun. Untap that ceatue. It gains haste until end of tun.” This is both a contol-changing effect and an effect that adds an ability to an object. The “gain contol” pat is applied in laye 2, and then the “it gains haste” pat is applied in laye 6. 2570 Example: Act of Treason has an effect that reads “Gain control of target creature until end of turn. Untap that creature. It gains haste until end of turn.” This is both a control-changing effect and an effect that adds an ability to an object. The “gain control” part is applied in layer 2, and then the “it gains haste” part is applied in layer 6.
2571 Example: An effect that eads “All nonceatue atifacts become 2/2 atifact ceatues until end of tun” is both a type-changing effect and a powe- and toughness-setting effect. The type-changing effect is applied to all nonceatue atifacts in laye 4 and the powe- and toughness-setting effect is applied to those same pemanents in laye 7b, even though those pemanents aen’t nonceatue atifacts by then. 2571 Example: An effect that reads “All noncreature artifacts become 2/2 artifact creatures until end of turn” is both a type-changing effect and a power- and toughness-setting effect. The type-changing effect is applied to all noncreature artifacts in layer 4 and the power- and toughness-setting effect is applied to those same permanents in layer 7b, even though those permanents aren’t noncreature artifacts by then.
2572 Example: Svogthos, the Restless Tomb, is on the battlefield. An effect that says “Until end of tun, taget land becomes a 3/3 ceatue that’s still a land” is applied to it (layes 4 and 7b). An effect that says “Taget ceatue gets +1/+1 until end of tun” is applied to it (laye 7c), making it a 4/4 land ceatue. Then while you have ten ceatue cads in you gaveyad, you activate Svogthos’s ability: “Until end of tun, Svogthos, the Restless Tomb becomes a black and geen Plant Zombie ceatue with ‘This ceatue’s powe and toughness ae each equal to the numbe of ceatue cads in you gaveyad.’ It’s still a land.” (layes 4, 5, and 7b). It becomes an 11/11 land ceatue. If a ceatue cad entes o leaves you gaveyad, Svogthos’s powe and toughness will be modified accodingly. If the fist effect is applied to it again, it will become a 4/4 land ceatue again. 2572 Example: Svogthos, the Restless Tomb, is on the battlefield. An effect that says “Until end of turn, target land becomes a 3/3 creature that’s still a land” is applied to it (layers 4 and 7b). An effect that says “Target creature gets +1/+1 until end of turn” is applied to it (layer 7c), making it a 4/4 land creature. Then while you have ten creature cards in your graveyard, you activate Svogthos’s ability: “Until end of turn, Svogthos, the Restless Tomb becomes a black and green Plant Zombie creature with ‘This creature’s power and toughness are each equal to the number of creature cards in your graveyard.’ It’s still a land.” (layers 4, 5, and 7b). It becomes an 11/11 land creature. If a creature card enters or leaves your graveyard, Svogthos’s power and toughness will be modified accordingly. If the first effect is applied to it again, it will become a 4/4 land creature again.
2573 2573
2574 613.6. Within a laye o sublaye, detemining which ode effects ae applied in is usually done using a timestamp system. An effect with an ealie timestamp is applied befoe an effect with a late timestamp. 2574 613.6. Within a layer or sublayer, determining which order effects are applied in is usually done using a timestamp system. An effect with an earlier timestamp is applied before an effect with a later timestamp.
2575 2575
2576 613.6a A continuous effect geneated by a static ability has the same timestamp as the object the static ability is on, o the timestamp of the effect that ceated the ability, whicheve is late. 2576 613.6a A continuous effect generated by a static ability has the same timestamp as the object the static ability is on, or the timestamp of the effect that created the ability, whichever is later.
2577 2577
2578 613.6b A continuous effect geneated by the esolution of a spell o ability eceives a timestamp at the time it’s ceated. 2578 613.6b A continuous effect generated by the resolution of a spell or ability receives a timestamp at the time it’s created.
2579 2579
2580 613.6c An object eceives a timestamp at the time it entes a zone. 2580 613.6c An object receives a timestamp at the time it enters a zone.
2581 2581
2582 613.6d An Aua, Equipment, o Fotification eceives a new timestamp at the time it becomes attached to an object o playe. 2582 613.6d An Aura, Equipment, or Fortification receives a new timestamp at the time it becomes attached to an object or player.
2583 2583
2584 613.6e A pemanent eceives a new timestamp at the time it tuns face up o face down. 2584 613.6e A permanent receives a new timestamp at the time it turns face up or face down.
2585 2585
2586 613.6f A double-faced pemanent eceives a new timestamp at the time it tansfoms. 2586 613.6f A double-faced permanent receives a new timestamp at the time it transforms.
2587 2587
2588 613.6g A face-up plane cad, phenomenon cad, o scheme cad eceives a timestamp at the time it’s tuned face up. 2588 613.6g A face-up plane card, phenomenon card, or scheme card receives a timestamp at the time it’s turned face up.
2589 2589
2590 613.6h A face-up vanguad cad eceives a timestamp at the beginning of the game. 2590 613.6h A face-up vanguard card receives a timestamp at the beginning of the game.
2591 2591
2592 613.6i A conspiacy cad eceives a timestamp at the beginning of the game. If it’s face down, it eceives a new timestamp at the time it tuns face up. 2592 613.6i A conspiracy card receives a timestamp at the beginning of the game. If it’s face down, it receives a new timestamp at the time it turns face up.
2593 2593
2594 613.6j If two o moe objects would eceive a timestamp simultaneously, such as by enteing a zone simultaneously o becoming attached simultaneously, the active playe detemines thei elative timestamp ode at that time. 2594 613.6j If two or more objects would receive a timestamp simultaneously, such as by entering a zone simultaneously or becoming attached simultaneously, the active player determines their relative timestamp order at that time.
2595 2595
2596 613.7. Within a laye o sublaye, detemining which ode effects ae applied in is sometimes done using a dependency system. If a dependency exists, it will oveide the timestamp system. 2596 613.7. Within a layer or sublayer, determining which order effects are applied in is sometimes done using a dependency system. If a dependency exists, it will override the timestamp system.
2597 2597
2598 613.7a An effect is said to “depend on” anothe if (a) it’s applied in the same laye (and, if applicable, sublaye) as the othe effect (see ules 613.1 and 613.3); (b) applying the othe would change the text o the existence of the fist effect, what it applies to, o what it does to any of the things it applies to; and (c) neithe effect is fom a chaacteistic-defining ability o both effects ae fom chaacteistic-defining abilities. Othewise, the effect is consideed to be independent of the othe effect. 2598 613.7a An effect is said to “depend on” another if (a) it’s applied in the same layer (and, if applicable, sublayer) as the other effect (see rules 613.1 and 613.3); (b) applying the other would change the text or the existence of the first effect, what it applies to, or what it does to any of the things it applies to; and (c) neither effect is from a characteristic-defining ability or both effects are from characteristic-defining abilities. Otherwise, the effect is considered to be independent of the other effect.
2599 2599
2600 613.7b An effect dependent on one o moe othe effects waits to apply until just afte all of those effects have been applied. If multiple dependent effects would apply simultaneously in this way, they’e applied in timestamp ode elative to each othe. If seveal dependent effects fom a dependency loop, then this ule is ignoed and the effects in the dependency loop ae applied in timestamp ode. 2600 613.7b An effect dependent on one or more other effects waits to apply until just after all of those effects have been applied. If multiple dependent effects would apply simultaneously in this way, they’re applied in timestamp order relative to each other. If several dependent effects form a dependency loop, then this rule is ignored and the effects in the dependency loop are applied in timestamp order.
2601 2601
2602 613.7c Afte each effect is applied, the ode of emaining effects is eevaluated and may change if an effect that has not yet been applied becomes dependent on o independent of one o moe othe effects that have not yet been applied. 2602 613.7c After each effect is applied, the order of remaining effects is reevaluated and may change if an effect that has not yet been applied becomes dependent on or independent of one or more other effects that have not yet been applied.
2603 2603
2604 613.8. One continuous effect can oveide anothe. Sometimes the esults of one effect detemine whethe anothe effect applies o what anothe effect does. 2604 613.8. One continuous effect can override another. Sometimes the results of one effect determine whether another effect applies or what another effect does.
2605 Example: Two effects ae affecting the same ceatue: one fom an Aua that says “Enchanted ceatue has flying” and one fom an Aua that says “Enchanted ceatue loses flying.” Neithe of these depends on the othe, since nothing changes what they affect o what they’e doing to it. Applying them in timestamp ode means the one that was geneated last “wins.” The same pocess would be followed, and the same esult eached, if eithe of the effects had a duation (such as “Taget ceatue loses flying until end of tun”) o came fom a non-Aua souce (such as “All ceatues lose flying”). 2605 Example: Two effects are affecting the same creature: one from an Aura that says “Enchanted creature has flying” and one from an Aura that says “Enchanted creature loses flying.” Neither of these depends on the other, since nothing changes what they affect or what they’re doing to it. Applying them in timestamp order means the one that was generated last “wins.” The same process would be followed, and the same result reached, if either of the effects had a duration (such as “Target creature loses flying until end of turn”) or came from a non-Aura source (such as “All creatures lose flying”).
2606 Example: One effect eads, “White ceatues get +1/+1,” and anothe eads, “Enchanted ceatue is white.” The enchanted ceatue gets +1/+1 fom the fist effect, egadless of its pevious colo. 2606 Example: One effect reads, “White creatures get +1/+1,” and another reads, “Enchanted creature is white.” The enchanted creature gets +1/+1 from the first effect, regardless of its previous color.
2607 2607
2608 613.9. Some continuous effects affect playes athe than objects. Fo example, an effect might give a playe potection fom ed. All such effects ae applied in timestamp ode afte the detemination of objects’ chaacteistics. See also the ules fo timestamp ode and dependency (ules 613.6 and 613.7). 2608 613.9. Some continuous effects affect players rather than objects. For example, an effect might give a player protection from red. All such effects are applied in timestamp order after the determination of objects’ characteristics. See also the rules for timestamp order and dependency (rules 613.6 and 613.7).
2609 2609
2610 613.10. Some continuous effects affect game ules athe than objects. Fo example, effects may modify a playe’s maximum hand size, o say that a ceatue must attack this tun if able. These effects ae applied afte all othe continuous effects have been applied. Continuous effects that affect the costs of spells o abilities ae applied accoding to the ode specified in ule 601.2f. All othe such effects ae applied in timestamp ode. See also the ules fo timestamp ode and dependency (ules 613.6 and 613.7). 2610 613.10. Some continuous effects affect game rules rather than objects. For example, effects may modify a player’s maximum hand size, or say that a creature must attack this turn if able. These effects are applied after all other continuous effects have been applied. Continuous effects that affect the costs of spells or abilities are applied according to the order specified in rule 601.2f. All other such effects are applied in timestamp order. See also the rules for timestamp order and dependency (rules 613.6 and 613.7).
2611 2611
2612 614. Replacement Effects 2612 614. Replacement Effects
2613 2613
2614 614.1. Some continuous effects ae eplacement effects. Like pevention effects (see ule 615), eplacement effects apply continuously as events happen—they aen’t locked in ahead of time. Such effects watch fo a paticula event that would happen and completely o patially eplace that event with a diffeent event. They act like “shields” aound whateve they’e affecting. 2614 614.1. Some continuous effects are replacement effects. Like prevention effects (see rule 615), replacement effects apply continuously as events happen—they aren’t locked in ahead of time. Such effects watch for a particular event that would happen and completely or partially replace that event with a different event. They act like “shields” around whatever they’re affecting.
2615 2615
2616 614.1a Effects that use the wod “instead” ae eplacement effects. Most eplacement effects use the wod “instead” to indicate what events will be eplaced with othe events. 2616 614.1a Effects that use the word “instead” are replacement effects. Most replacement effects use the word “instead” to indicate what events will be replaced with other events.
2617 2617
2618 614.1b Effects that use the wod “skip” ae eplacement effects. These eplacement effects use the wod “skip” to indicate what events, steps, phases, o tuns will be eplaced with nothing. 2618 614.1b Effects that use the word “skip” are replacement effects. These replacement effects use the word “skip” to indicate what events, steps, phases, or turns will be replaced with nothing.
2619 2619
2620 614.1c Effects that ead “[This pemanent] entes the battlefield with . . . ,” “As [this pemanent] entes the battlefield . . . ,” o “[This pemanent] entes the battlefield as . . . “ ae eplacement effects. 2620 614.1c Effects that read “[This permanent] enters the battlefield with . . . ,” “As [this permanent] enters the battlefield . . . ,” or “[This permanent] enters the battlefield as . . . “ are replacement effects.
2621 2621
2622 614.1d Continuous effects that ead “[This pemanent] entes the battlefield . . .” o “[Objects] ente the battlefield . . .” ae eplacement effects. 2622 614.1d Continuous effects that read “[This permanent] enters the battlefield . . .” or “[Objects] enter the battlefield . . .” are replacement effects.
2623 2623
2624 614.1e Effects that ead “As [this pemanent] is tuned face up . . . ,” ae eplacement effects. 2624 614.1e Effects that read “As [this permanent] is turned face up . . . ,” are replacement effects.
2625 2625
2626 614.2. Some eplacement effects apply to damage fom a souce. See ule 609.7. 2626 614.2. Some replacement effects apply to damage from a source. See rule 609.7.
2627 2627
2628 614.3. Thee ae no special estictions on casting a spell o activating an ability that geneates a eplacement effect. Such effects last until they’e used up o thei duation has expied. 2628 614.3. There are no special restrictions on casting a spell or activating an ability that generates a replacement effect. Such effects last until they’re used up or their duration has expired.
2629 2629
2630 614.4. Replacement effects must exist befoe the appopiate event occus—they can’t “go back in time” and change something that’s aleady happened. Spells o abilities that geneate these effects ae often cast o activated in esponse to whateve would poduce the event and thus esolve befoe that event would occu. 2630 614.4. Replacement effects must exist before the appropriate event occurs—they can’t “go back in time” and change something that’s already happened. Spells or abilities that generate these effects are often cast or activated in response to whatever would produce the event and thus resolve before that event would occur.
2631 Example: A playe can activate an ability to egeneate a ceatue in esponse to a spell that would destoy it. Once the spell esolves, though, it’s too late to egeneate the ceatue. 2631 Example: A player can activate an ability to regenerate a creature in response to a spell that would destroy it. Once the spell resolves, though, it’s too late to regenerate the creature.
2632 2632
2633 614.5. A eplacement effect doesn’t invoke itself epeatedly; it gets only one oppotunity to affect an event o any modified events that may eplace it. 2633 614.5. A replacement effect doesn’t invoke itself repeatedly; it gets only one opportunity to affect an event or any modified events that may replace it.
2634 Example: A playe contols two pemanents, each with an ability that eads “If a ceatue you contol would deal damage to a pemanent o playe, it deals double that damage to that pemanent o playe instead.” A ceatue that nomally deals 2 damage will deal 8 damage—not just 4, and not an infinite amount. 2634 Example: A player controls two permanents, each with an ability that reads “If a creature you control would deal damage to a permanent or player, it deals double that damage to that permanent or player instead.” A creature that normally deals 2 damage will deal 8 damage—not just 4, and not an infinite amount.
2635 2635
2636 614.6. If an event is eplaced, it neve happens. A modified event occus instead, which may in tun tigge abilities. Note that the modified event may contain instuctions that can’t be caied out, in which case the impossible instuction is simply ignoed. 2636 614.6. If an event is replaced, it never happens. A modified event occurs instead, which may in turn trigger abilities. Note that the modified event may contain instructions that can’t be carried out, in which case the impossible instruction is simply ignored.
2637 2637
2638 614.7. If a eplacement effect would eplace an event, but that event neve happens, the eplacement effect simply doesn’t do anything. 2638 614.7. If a replacement effect would replace an event, but that event never happens, the replacement effect simply doesn’t do anything.
2639 2639
2640 614.7a If a souce would deal 0 damage, it does not deal damage at all. Replacement effects that would incease the damage dealt by that souce, o would have that souce deal that damage to a diffeent object o playe, have no event to eplace, so they have no effect. 2640 614.7a If a source would deal 0 damage, it does not deal damage at all. Replacement effects that would increase the damage dealt by that source, or would have that source deal that damage to a different object or player, have no event to replace, so they have no effect.
2641 2641
2642 614.8. Regeneation is a destuction-eplacement effect. The wod “instead” doesn’t appea on the cad but is implicit in the definition of egeneation. “Regeneate [pemanent]” means “The next time [pemanent] would be destoyed this tun, instead emove all damage maked on it and tap it. If it’s an attacking o blocking ceatue, emove it fom combat.” Abilities that tigge fom damage being dealt still tigge even if the pemanent egeneates. See ule 701.14. 2642 614.8. Regeneration is a destruction-replacement effect. The word “instead” doesn’t appear on the card but is implicit in the definition of regeneration. “Regenerate [permanent]” means “The next time [permanent] would be destroyed this turn, instead remove all damage marked on it and tap it. If it’s an attacking or blocking creature, remove it from combat.” Abilities that trigger from damage being dealt still trigger even if the permanent regenerates. See rule 701.14.
2643 2643
2644 614.9. Some effects eplace damage dealt to one ceatue, planeswalke, o playe with the same damage dealt to anothe ceatue, planeswalke, o playe; such effects ae called ediection effects. If eithe ceatue o planeswalke is no longe on the battlefield when the damage would be ediected, o is no longe a ceatue o planeswalke when the damage would be ediected, the effect does nothing. If damage would be ediected to o fom a playe who has left the game, the effect does nothing. 2644 614.9. Some effects replace damage dealt to one creature, planeswalker, or player with the same damage dealt to another creature, planeswalker, or player; such effects are called redirection effects. If either creature or planeswalker is no longer on the battlefield when the damage would be redirected, or is no longer a creature or planeswalker when the damage would be redirected, the effect does nothing. If damage would be redirected to or from a player who has left the game, the effect does nothing.
2645 2645
2646 614.10. An effect that causes a playe to skip an event, step, phase, o tun is a eplacement effect. “Skip [something]” is the same as “Instead of doing [something], do nothing.” Once a step, phase, o tun has stated, it can no longe be skipped—any skip effects will wait until the next occuence. 2646 614.10. An effect that causes a player to skip an event, step, phase, or turn is a replacement effect. “Skip [something]” is the same as “Instead of doing [something], do nothing.” Once a step, phase, or turn has started, it can no longer be skipped—any skip effects will wait until the next occurrence.
2647 2647
2648 614.10a Anything scheduled fo a skipped step, phase, o tun won’t happen. Anything scheduled fo the “next” occuence of something waits fo the fist occuence that isn’t skipped. If two effects each cause a playe to skip thei next occuence, that playe must skip the next two; one effect will be satisfied in skipping the fist occuence, while the othe will emain until anothe occuence can be skipped. 2648 614.10a Anything scheduled for a skipped step, phase, or turn won’t happen. Anything scheduled for the “next” occurrence of something waits for the first occurrence that isn’t skipped. If two effects each cause a player to skip their next occurrence, that player must skip the next two; one effect will be satisfied in skipping the first occurrence, while the other will remain until another occurrence can be skipped.
2649 2649
2650 614.10b Some effects cause a playe to skip a step, phase, o tun, then take anothe action. That action is consideed to be the fist thing that happens duing the next step, phase, o tun to actually occu. 2650 614.10b Some effects cause a player to skip a step, phase, or turn, then take another action. That action is considered to be the first thing that happens during the next step, phase, or turn to actually occur.
2651 2651
2652 614.11. Some effects eplace cad daws. These effects ae applied even if no cads could be dawn because thee ae no cads in the affected playe’s libay. 2652 614.11. Some effects replace card draws. These effects are applied even if no cards could be drawn because there are no cards in the affected player’s library.
2653 2653
2654 614.11a If an effect eplaces a daw within a sequence of cad daws, all actions equied by the eplacement ae completed, if possible, befoe esuming the sequence. 2654 614.11a If an effect replaces a draw within a sequence of card draws, all actions required by the replacement are completed, if possible, before resuming the sequence.
2655 2655
2656 614.11b If an effect would have a playe both daw a cad and pefom an additional action on that cad, and the daw is eplaced, the additional action is not pefomed on any cads that ae dawn as a esult of that eplacement effect. 2656 614.11b If an effect would have a player both draw a card and perform an additional action on that card, and the draw is replaced, the additional action is not performed on any cards that are drawn as a result of that replacement effect.
2657 2657
2658 614.12. Some eplacement effects modify how a pemanent entes the battlefield. (See ules 614.1c–d.) Such effects may come fom the pemanent itself if they affect only that pemanent (as opposed to a geneal subset of pemanents that includes it). They may also come fom othe souces. To detemine which eplacement effects apply and how they apply, check the chaacteistics of the pemanent as it would exist on the battlefield, taking into account eplacement effects that have aleady modified how it entes the battlefield (see ule 616.1), continuous effects fom the pemanent’s own static abilities that would apply to it once it’s on the battlefield, and continuous effects that aleady exist and would apply to the pemanent. 2658 614.12. Some replacement effects modify how a permanent enters the battlefield. (See rules 614.1c–d.) Such effects may come from the permanent itself if they affect only that permanent (as opposed to a general subset of permanents that includes it). They may also come from other sources. To determine which replacement effects apply and how they apply, check the characteristics of the permanent as it would exist on the battlefield, taking into account replacement effects that have already modified how it enters the battlefield (see rule 616.1), continuous effects from the permanent’s own static abilities that would apply to it once it’s on the battlefield, and continuous effects that already exist and would apply to the permanent.
2659 Example: Voice of All says “As Voice of All entes the battlefield, choose a colo” and “Voice of All has potection fom the chosen colo.” An effect ceates a token that’s a copy of Voice of All. As that token is ceated, the token’s contolle chooses a colo fo it. 2659 Example: Voice of All says “As Voice of All enters the battlefield, choose a color” and “Voice of All has protection from the chosen color.” An effect creates a token that’s a copy of Voice of All. As that token is created, the token’s controller chooses a color for it.
2660 Example: Yixlid Jaile says “Cads in gaveyads lose all abilities.” Scawood Teefolk says “Scawood Teefolk entes the battlefield tapped.” A Scawood Teefolk that’s put onto the battlefield fom a gaveyad entes the battlefield tapped. 2660 Example: Yixlid Jailer says “Cards in graveyards lose all abilities.” Scarwood Treefolk says “Scarwood Treefolk enters the battlefield tapped.” A Scarwood Treefolk that’s put onto the battlefield from a graveyard enters the battlefield tapped.
2661 Example: Ob of Deams is an atifact that says “Pemanents ente the battlefield tapped.” It won’t affect itself, so Ob of Deams entes the battlefield untapped. 2661 Example: Orb of Dreams is an artifact that says “Permanents enter the battlefield tapped.” It won’t affect itself, so Orb of Dreams enters the battlefield untapped.
2662 2662
2663 614.12a If a eplacement effect that modifies how a pemanent entes the battlefield equies a choice, that choice is made befoe the pemanent entes the battlefield. 2663 614.12a If a replacement effect that modifies how a permanent enters the battlefield requires a choice, that choice is made before the permanent enters the battlefield.
2664 2664
2665 614.12b Some eplacement effects cause a pemanent to ente the battlefield with its contolle’s choice of one of two abilities, each maked with an ancho wod and peceded by a bullet point. “[Ancho wod] — [ability]” means “As long as [ancho wod] was chosen as this pemanent enteed the battlefield, this pemanent has [ability].” The abilities peceded by ancho wods ae each linked to the ability that causes a playe to choose between them. See ule 607, “Linked Abilities.” 2665 614.12b Some replacement effects cause a permanent to enter the battlefield with its controller’s choice of one of two abilities, each marked with an anchor word and preceded by a bullet point. “[Anchor word] — [ability]” means “As long as [anchor word] was chosen as this permanent entered the battlefield, this permanent has [ability].” The abilities preceded by anchor words are each linked to the ability that causes a player to choose between them. See rule 607, “Linked Abilities.”
2666 2666
2667 614.13. An effect that modifies how a pemanent entes the battlefield may cause othe objects to change zones. 2667 614.13. An effect that modifies how a permanent enters the battlefield may cause other objects to change zones.
2668 2668
2669 614.13a While applying an effect that modifies how a pemanent entes the battlefield, you may have to choose a numbe of objects that will also change zones. You can’t choose the object that will become that pemanent o any othe object enteing the battlefield at the same time as that object. 2669 614.13a While applying an effect that modifies how a permanent enters the battlefield, you may have to choose a number of objects that will also change zones. You can’t choose the object that will become that permanent or any other object entering the battlefield at the same time as that object.
2670 Example: Sutued Ghoul says, in pat, “As Sutued Ghoul entes the battlefield, exile any numbe of ceatue cads fom you gaveyad.” If Sutued Ghoul and Runeclaw Bea ente the battlefield fom you gaveyad at the same time, you can’t choose to exile eithe of them when applying Sutued Ghoul’s eplacement effect. 2670 Example: Sutured Ghoul says, in part, “As Sutured Ghoul enters the battlefield, exile any number of creature cards from your graveyard.” If Sutured Ghoul and Runeclaw Bear enter the battlefield from your graveyard at the same time, you can’t choose to exile either of them when applying Sutured Ghoul’s replacement effect.
2671 2671
2672 614.13b The same object can’t be chosen to change zones moe than once when applying eplacement effects that modify how a single pemanent entes the battlefield. 2672 614.13b The same object can’t be chosen to change zones more than once when applying replacement effects that modify how a single permanent enters the battlefield.
2673 Example: Jund (a plane cad) says, “Wheneve a playe casts a black, ed, o geen ceatue spell, it gains devou 5.” A playe contols Runeclaw Bea and casts Thunde-Thash Elde, a ed ceatue spell with devou 3. As Thunde-Thash Elde entes the battlefield, its contolle can choose to sacifice Runeclaw Bea when applying the devou 3 effect o when applying the devou 5 effect, but not both. Thunde-Thash Elde will ente the battlefield with zeo, thee, o five +1/+1 countes, depending on this choice. 2673 Example: Jund (a plane card) says, “Whenever a player casts a black, red, or green creature spell, it gains devour 5.” A player controls Runeclaw Bear and casts Thunder-Thrash Elder, a red creature spell with devour 3. As Thunder-Thrash Elder enters the battlefield, its controller can choose to sacrifice Runeclaw Bear when applying the devour 3 effect or when applying the devour 5 effect, but not both. Thunder-Thrash Elder will enter the battlefield with zero, three, or five +1/+1 counters, depending on this choice.
2674 2674
2675 614.14. An object may have one ability pinted on it that geneates a eplacement effect which causes one o moe cads to be exiled, and anothe ability that efes eithe to “the exiled cads” o to cads “exiled with [this object].” These abilities ae linked: the second efes only to cads in the exile zone that wee put thee as a diect esult of the eplacement event caused by the fist. If anothe object gains a pai of linked abilities, the abilities will be similaly linked on that object. They can’t be linked to any othe ability, egadless of what othe abilities the object may cuently have o may have had in the past. See ule 607, “Linked Abilities.” 2675 614.14. An object may have one ability printed on it that generates a replacement effect which causes one or more cards to be exiled, and another ability that refers either to “the exiled cards” or to cards “exiled with [this object].” These abilities are linked: the second refers only to cards in the exile zone that were put there as a direct result of the replacement event caused by the first. If another object gains a pair of linked abilities, the abilities will be similarly linked on that object. They can’t be linked to any other ability, regardless of what other abilities the object may currently have or may have had in the past. See rule 607, “Linked Abilities.”
2676 2676
2677 614.15. Some eplacement effects ae not continuous effects. Rathe, they ae an effect of a esolving spell o ability that eplace pat o all of that spell o ability’s own effect(s). Such effects ae called self-eplacement effects. The text ceating a self-eplacement effect is usually pat of the ability whose effect is being eplaced, but the text can be a sepaate ability, paticulaly when peceded by an ability wod. When applying eplacement effects to an event, self-eplacement effects ae applied befoe othe eplacement effects. 2677 614.15. Some replacement effects are not continuous effects. Rather, they are an effect of a resolving spell or ability that replace part or all of that spell or ability’s own effect(s). Such effects are called self-replacement effects. The text creating a self-replacement effect is usually part of the ability whose effect is being replaced, but the text can be a separate ability, particularly when preceded by an ability word. When applying replacement effects to an event, self-replacement effects are applied before other replacement effects.
2678 2678
2679 614.16. Some eplacement effects apply “if an effect would ceate one o moe tokens” o “if an effect would put one o moe countes on a pemanent.” These eplacement effects apply if the effect of a esolving spell o ability ceates a token o puts a counte on a pemanent, and they also apply if anothe eplacement o pevention effect does so, even if the oiginal event being modified wasn’t itself an effect. 2679 614.16. Some replacement effects apply “if an effect would create one or more tokens” or “if an effect would put one or more counters on a permanent.” These replacement effects apply if the effect of a resolving spell or ability creates a token or puts a counter on a permanent, and they also apply if another replacement or prevention effect does so, even if the original event being modified wasn’t itself an effect.
2680 2680
2681 614.17. Some effects state that something can’t happen. These effects aen’t eplacement effects, but follow simila ules. 2681 614.17. Some effects state that something can’t happen. These effects aren’t replacement effects, but follow similar rules.
2682 2682
2683 614.17a “Can’t” effects must exist befoe the appopiate event occus—they can’t “go back in time” and change something that’s aleady happened. 2683 614.17a “Can’t” effects must exist before the appropriate event occurs—they can’t “go back in time” and change something that’s already happened.
2684 2684
2685 614.17b If an event can’t happen, a playe can’t choose to pay a cost that includes that event. 2685 614.17b If an event can’t happen, a player can’t choose to pay a cost that includes that event.
2686 2686
2687 614.17c If an event can’t happen, it can only be eplaced by a self-eplacement effect (see ule 614.15). Othe eplacement and/o pevention effects can’t modify o eplace it. 2687 614.17c If an event can’t happen, it can only be replaced by a self-replacement effect (see rule 614.15). Other replacement and/or prevention effects can’t modify or replace it.
2688 2688
2689 614.17d Some “can’t” effects modify how a pemanent entes the battlefield o whethe it can ente the battlefield. Such effects may come fom the pemanent itself if they affect only that pemanent (as opposed to a geneal subset of pemanents that includes it). They may also come fom othe souces. To detemine which “can’t” effects apply, check the chaacteistics of the pemanent as it would exist on the battlefield, taking into account eplacement effects that have aleady modified how it entes the battlefield (see ule 616.1), continuous effects fom the pemanent’s own static abilities that would apply to it once it’s on the battlefield, and continuous effects that aleady exist and would apply to the pemanent. 2689 614.17d Some “can’t” effects modify how a permanent enters the battlefield or whether it can enter the battlefield. Such effects may come from the permanent itself if they affect only that permanent (as opposed to a general subset of permanents that includes it). They may also come from other sources. To determine which “can’t” effects apply, check the characteristics of the permanent as it would exist on the battlefield, taking into account replacement effects that have already modified how it enters the battlefield (see rule 616.1), continuous effects from the permanent’s own static abilities that would apply to it once it’s on the battlefield, and continuous effects that already exist and would apply to the permanent.
2690 2690
2691 615. Pevention Effects 2691 615. Prevention Effects
2692 2692
2693 615.1. Some continuous effects ae pevention effects. Like eplacement effects (see ule 614), pevention effects apply continuously as events happen—they aen’t locked in ahead of time. Such effects watch fo a damage event that would happen and completely o patially pevent the damage that would be dealt. They act like “shields” aound whateve they’e affecting. 2693 615.1. Some continuous effects are prevention effects. Like replacement effects (see rule 614), prevention effects apply continuously as events happen—they aren’t locked in ahead of time. Such effects watch for a damage event that would happen and completely or partially prevent the damage that would be dealt. They act like “shields” around whatever they’re affecting.
2694 2694
2695 615.1a Effects that use the wod “pevent” ae pevention effects. Pevention effects use “pevent” to indicate what damage will not be dealt. 2695 615.1a Effects that use the word “prevent” are prevention effects. Prevention effects use “prevent” to indicate what damage will not be dealt.
2696 2696
2697 615.2. Many pevention effects apply to damage fom a souce. See ule 609.7. 2697 615.2. Many prevention effects apply to damage from a source. See rule 609.7.
2698 2698
2699 615.3. Thee ae no special estictions on casting a spell o activating an ability that geneates a pevention effect. Such effects last until they’e used up o thei duation has expied. 2699 615.3. There are no special restrictions on casting a spell or activating an ability that generates a prevention effect. Such effects last until they’re used up or their duration has expired.
2700 2700
2701 615.4. Pevention effects must exist befoe the appopiate damage event occus—they can’t “go back in time” and change something that’s aleady happened. Spells o abilities that geneate these effects ae often cast o activated in esponse to whateve would poduce the event and thus esolve befoe that event would occu. 2701 615.4. Prevention effects must exist before the appropriate damage event occurs—they can’t “go back in time” and change something that’s already happened. Spells or abilities that generate these effects are often cast or activated in response to whatever would produce the event and thus resolve before that event would occur.
2702 Example: A playe can activate an ability that pevents damage in esponse to a spell that would deal damage. Once the spell esolves, though, it’s too late to pevent the damage. 2702 Example: A player can activate an ability that prevents damage in response to a spell that would deal damage. Once the spell resolves, though, it’s too late to prevent the damage.
2703 2703
2704 615.5. Some pevention effects also include an additional effect, which may efe to the amount of damage that was pevented. The pevention takes place at the time the oiginal event would have happened; the est of the effect takes place immediately aftewad. 2704 615.5. Some prevention effects also include an additional effect, which may refer to the amount of damage that was prevented. The prevention takes place at the time the original event would have happened; the rest of the effect takes place immediately afterward.
2705 2705
2706 615.6. If damage that would be dealt is pevented, it neve happens. A modified event may occu instead, which may in tun tigge abilities. Note that the modified event may contain instuctions that can’t be caied out, in which case the impossible instuction is simply ignoed. 2706 615.6. If damage that would be dealt is prevented, it never happens. A modified event may occur instead, which may in turn trigger abilities. Note that the modified event may contain instructions that can’t be carried out, in which case the impossible instruction is simply ignored.
2707 2707
2708 615.7. Some pevention effects geneated by the esolution of a spell o ability efe to a specific amount of damage—fo example, “Pevent the next 3 damage that would be dealt to any taget this tun.” These wok like shields. Each 1 damage that would be dealt to the “shielded” pemanent o playe is pevented. Peventing 1 damage educes the emaining shield by 1. If damage would be dealt to the shielded pemanent o playe by two o moe applicable souces at the same time, the playe o the contolle of the pemanent chooses which damage the shield pevents. Once the shield has been educed to 0, any emaining damage is dealt nomally. Such effects count only the amount of damage; the numbe of events o souces dealing it doesn’t matte. 2708 615.7. Some prevention effects generated by the resolution of a spell or ability refer to a specific amount of damage—for example, “Prevent the next 3 damage that would be dealt to any target this turn.” These work like shields. Each 1 damage that would be dealt to the “shielded” permanent or player is prevented. Preventing 1 damage reduces the remaining shield by 1. If damage would be dealt to the shielded permanent or player by two or more applicable sources at the same time, the player or the controller of the permanent chooses which damage the shield prevents. Once the shield has been reduced to 0, any remaining damage is dealt normally. Such effects count only the amount of damage; the number of events or sources dealing it doesn’t matter.
2709 2709
2710 615.8. Some pevention effects geneated by the esolution of a spell o ability efe to the next time a specific souce would deal damage. These effects pevent the next instance of damage fom that souce, egadless of how much damage that is. Once an instance of damage fom that souce has been pevented, any subsequent instances of damage that would be dealt by that souce ae dealt nomally. 2710 615.8. Some prevention effects generated by the resolution of a spell or ability refer to the next time a specific source would deal damage. These effects prevent the next instance of damage from that source, regardless of how much damage that is. Once an instance of damage from that source has been prevented, any subsequent instances of damage that would be dealt by that source are dealt normally.
2711 2711
2712 615.9. Some effects geneated by the esolution of a spell o ability pevent damage fom a souce of a playe’s choice with cetain popeties. When the souce would deal damage, the shield echecks the souce’s popeties. If the popeties no longe match, the damage isn’t pevented o eplaced and the shield isn’t used up. See ule 609.7b. 2712 615.9. Some effects generated by the resolution of a spell or ability prevent damage from a source of a player’s choice with certain properties. When the source would deal damage, the shield rechecks the source’s properties. If the properties no longer match, the damage isn’t prevented or replaced and the shield isn’t used up. See rule 609.7b.
2713 2713
2714 615.10. Some pevention effects geneated by static abilities efe to a specific amount of damage—fo example, “If a souce would deal damage to you, pevent 1 of that damage.” Such an effect pevents only the indicated amount of damage in any applicable damage event at any given time. It will apply sepaately to damage fom othe applicable events that would happen at the same time, o at a diffeent time. 2714 615.10. Some prevention effects generated by static abilities refer to a specific amount of damage—for example, “If a source would deal damage to you, prevent 1 of that damage.” Such an effect prevents only the indicated amount of damage in any applicable damage event at any given time. It will apply separately to damage from other applicable events that would happen at the same time, or at a different time.
2715 Example: Daunting Defende says “If a souce would deal damage to a Cleic ceatue you contol, pevent 1 of that damage.” Pyoclasm says “Pyoclasm deals 2 damage to each ceatue.” Pyoclasm will deal 1 damage to each Cleic ceatue contolled by Daunting Defende’s contolle. It will deal 2 damage to each othe ceatue. 2715 Example: Daunting Defender says “If a source would deal damage to a Cleric creature you control, prevent 1 of that damage.” Pyroclasm says “Pyroclasm deals 2 damage to each creature.” Pyroclasm will deal 1 damage to each Cleric creature controlled by Daunting Defender’s controller. It will deal 2 damage to each other creature.
2716 2716
2717 615.11. Some pevention effects pevent the next N damage that would be dealt to each of a numbe of untageted ceatues. Such an effect ceates a pevention shield fo each applicable ceatue when the spell o ability that geneates that effect esolves. 2717 615.11. Some prevention effects prevent the next N damage that would be dealt to each of a number of untargeted creatures. Such an effect creates a prevention shield for each applicable creature when the spell or ability that generates that effect resolves.
2718 Example: Wojek Apothecay has an ability that says “{T}: Pevent the next 1 damage that would be dealt to taget ceatue and each othe ceatue that shaes a colo with it this tun.” When the ability esolves, it gives the taget ceatue and each othe ceatue on the battlefield that shaes a colo with it at that time a shield peventing the next 1 damage that would be dealt to it. Changing ceatues’ colos afte the ability esolves doesn’t add o emove shields, and ceatues that ente the battlefield late in the tun don’t get the shield. 2718 Example: Wojek Apothecary has an ability that says “{T}: Prevent the next 1 damage that would be dealt to target creature and each other creature that shares a color with it this turn.” When the ability resolves, it gives the target creature and each other creature on the battlefield that shares a color with it at that time a shield preventing the next 1 damage that would be dealt to it. Changing creatures’ colors after the ability resolves doesn’t add or remove shields, and creatures that enter the battlefield later in the turn don’t get the shield.
2719 2719
2720 615.12. Some effects state that damage “can’t be pevented.” If unpeventable damage would be dealt, any applicable pevention effects ae still applied to it. Those effects won’t pevent any damage, but any additional effects they have will take place. Existing damage pevention shields won’t be educed by damage that can’t be pevented. 2720 615.12. Some effects state that damage “can’t be prevented.” If unpreventable damage would be dealt, any applicable prevention effects are still applied to it. Those effects won’t prevent any damage, but any additional effects they have will take place. Existing damage prevention shields won’t be reduced by damage that can’t be prevented.
2721 2721
2722 615.12a A pevention effect is applied to any paticula unpeventable damage event just once. It won’t invoke itself epeatedly tying to pevent that damage. 2722 615.12a A prevention effect is applied to any particular unpreventable damage event just once. It won’t invoke itself repeatedly trying to prevent that damage.
2723 2723
2724 615.13. Some tiggeed abilities tigge when damage that would be dealt is pevented. Such an ability tigges each time a pevention effect is applied to one o moe simultaneous damage events and pevents some o all of that damage. 2724 615.13. Some triggered abilities trigger when damage that would be dealt is prevented. Such an ability triggers each time a prevention effect is applied to one or more simultaneous damage events and prevents some or all of that damage.
2725 2725
2726 616. Inteaction of Replacement and/o Pevention Effects 2726 616. Interaction of Replacement and/or Prevention Effects
2727 2727
2728 616.1. If two o moe eplacement and/o pevention effects ae attempting to modify the way an event affects an object o playe, the affected object’s contolle (o its owne if it has no contolle) o the affected playe chooses one to apply, following the steps listed below. If two o moe playes have to make these choices at the same time, choices ae made in APNAP ode (see ule 101.4). 2728 616.1. If two or more replacement and/or prevention effects are attempting to modify the way an event affects an object or player, the affected object’s controller (or its owner if it has no controller) or the affected player chooses one to apply, following the steps listed below. If two or more players have to make these choices at the same time, choices are made in APNAP order (see rule 101.4).
2729 2729
2730 616.1a If any of the eplacement and/o pevention effects ae self-eplacement effects (see ule 614.15), one of them must be chosen. If not, poceed to ule 616.1b. 2730 616.1a If any of the replacement and/or prevention effects are self-replacement effects (see rule 614.15), one of them must be chosen. If not, proceed to rule 616.1b.
2731 2731
2732 616.1b If any of the eplacement and/o pevention effects would modify unde whose contol an object would ente the battlefield, one of them must be chosen. If not, poceed to ule 616.1c. 2732 616.1b If any of the replacement and/or prevention effects would modify under whose control an object would enter the battlefield, one of them must be chosen. If not, proceed to rule 616.1c.
2733 2733
2734 616.1c If any of the eplacement and/o pevention effects would cause an object to become a copy of anothe object as it entes the battlefield, one of them must be chosen. If not, poceed to ule 616.1d. 2734 616.1c If any of the replacement and/or prevention effects would cause an object to become a copy of another object as it enters the battlefield, one of them must be chosen. If not, proceed to rule 616.1d.
2735 2735
2736 616.1d Any of the applicable eplacement and/o pevention effects may be chosen. 2736 616.1d Any of the applicable replacement and/or prevention effects may be chosen.
2737 2737
2738 616.1e Once the chosen effect has been applied, this pocess is epeated (taking into account only eplacement o pevention effects that would now be applicable) until thee ae no moe left to apply. 2738 616.1e Once the chosen effect has been applied, this process is repeated (taking into account only replacement or prevention effects that would now be applicable) until there are no more left to apply.
2739 Example: Two pemanents ae on the battlefield. One is an enchantment that eads “If a cad would be put into a gaveyad fom anywhee, instead exile it,” and the othe is a ceatue that eads “If [this ceatue] would die, instead shuffle it into its owne’s libay.” If the ceatue is destoyed, its contolle decides which eplacement to apply fist; the othe does nothing. 2739 Example: Two permanents are on the battlefield. One is an enchantment that reads “If a card would be put into a graveyard from anywhere, instead exile it,” and the other is a creature that reads “If [this creature] would die, instead shuffle it into its owner’s library.” If the creature is destroyed, its controller decides which replacement to apply first; the other does nothing.
2740 Example: Essence of the Wild eads “Ceatues you contol ente the battlefield as a copy of Essence of the Wild.” A playe who contols Essence of the Wild casts Rusted Sentinel, which nomally entes the battlefield tapped. As it entes the battlefield, the copy effect fom Essence of the Wild is applied fist. As a esult, it no longe has the ability that causes it to ente the battlefield tapped. Rusted Sentinel will ente the battlefield as an untapped copy of Essence of the Wild. 2740 Example: Essence of the Wild reads “Creatures you control enter the battlefield as a copy of Essence of the Wild.” A player who controls Essence of the Wild casts Rusted Sentinel, which normally enters the battlefield tapped. As it enters the battlefield, the copy effect from Essence of the Wild is applied first. As a result, it no longer has the ability that causes it to enter the battlefield tapped. Rusted Sentinel will enter the battlefield as an untapped copy of Essence of the Wild.
2741 2741
2742 616.1f While following the steps in 616.1a–d, one eplacement o pevention effect may apply to an event, and anothe may apply to an event contained within the fist event. In this case, the second effect can’t be chosen until afte the fist effect has been chosen. 2742 616.1f While following the steps in 616.1a–d, one replacement or prevention effect may apply to an event, and another may apply to an event contained within the first event. In this case, the second effect can’t be chosen until after the first effect has been chosen.
2743 Example: A playe is instucted to ceate a token that’s a copy of Voice of All, which has the ability “As Voice of All entes the battlefield, choose a colo.” Doubling Season has an ability that eads “If an effect would ceate one o moe tokens unde you contol, it ceates twice that many of those tokens instead.” Because enteing the battlefield is an event contained within the event of ceating a token, the effect of Doubling Season must be applied fist, and then the effects of the two Voice of All tokens may be applied in eithe ode. 2743 Example: A player is instructed to create a token that’s a copy of Voice of All, which has the ability “As Voice of All enters the battlefield, choose a color.” Doubling Season has an ability that reads “If an effect would create one or more tokens under your control, it creates twice that many of those tokens instead.” Because entering the battlefield is an event contained within the event of creating a token, the effect of Doubling Season must be applied first, and then the effects of the two Voice of All tokens may be applied in either order.
2744 2744
2745 616.2. A eplacement o pevention effect can become applicable to an event as the esult of anothe eplacement o pevention effect that modifies the event. 2745 616.2. A replacement or prevention effect can become applicable to an event as the result of another replacement or prevention effect that modifies the event.
2746 Example: One effect eads “If you would gain life, daw that many cads instead,” and anothe eads “If you would daw a cad, etun a cad fom you gaveyad to you hand instead.” Both effects combine (egadless of the ode they came into existence): Instead of gaining 1 life, the playe puts a cad fom thei gaveyad into thei hand. 2746 Example: One effect reads “If you would gain life, draw that many cards instead,” and another reads “If you would draw a card, return a card from your graveyard to your hand instead.” Both effects combine (regardless of the order they came into existence): Instead of gaining 1 life, the player puts a card from their graveyard into their hand.
2747 2747
2748 2748
2749 7. Additional Rules 2749 7. Additional Rules
2750 2750
2751 700. Geneal 2751 700. General
2752 2752
2753 700.1. Anything that happens in a game is an event. Multiple events may take place duing the esolution of a spell o ability. The text of tiggeed abilities and eplacement effects defines the event they’e looking fo. One “happening” may be teated as a single event by one ability and as multiple events by anothe. 2753 700.1. Anything that happens in a game is an event. Multiple events may take place during the resolution of a spell or ability. The text of triggered abilities and replacement effects defines the event they’re looking for. One “happening” may be treated as a single event by one ability and as multiple events by another.
2754 Example: If an attacking ceatue is blocked by two ceatues, this is one event fo a tiggeed ability that eads “Wheneve [this ceatue] becomes blocked” but two events fo a tiggeed ability that eads “Wheneve [this ceatue] becomes blocked by a ceatue.” 2754 Example: If an attacking creature is blocked by two creatures, this is one event for a triggered ability that reads “Whenever [this creature] becomes blocked” but two events for a triggered ability that reads “Whenever [this creature] becomes blocked by a creature.”
2755 2755
2756 700.2. A spell o ability is modal if it has two o moe options in a bulleted list peceded by instuctions fo a playe to choose a numbe of those options, such as “Choose one —.” Each of those options is a mode. Modal cads pinted pio to the Khans of Taki® set didn’t use bulleted lists fo the modes; these cads have eceived eata in the Oacle cad efeence so the modes do appea in a bulleted list. 2756 700.2. A spell or ability is modal if it has two or more options in a bulleted list preceded by instructions for a player to choose a number of those options, such as “Choose one —.” Each of those options is a mode. Modal cards printed prior to the Khans of Tarkir® set didn’t use bulleted lists for the modes; these cards have received errata in the Oracle card reference so the modes do appear in a bulleted list.
2757 2757
2758 700.2a The contolle of a modal spell o activated ability chooses the mode(s) as pat of casting that spell o activating that ability. If one of the modes would be illegal (due to an inability to choose legal tagets, fo example), that mode can’t be chosen. (See ule 601.2b.) 2758 700.2a The controller of a modal spell or activated ability chooses the mode(s) as part of casting that spell or activating that ability. If one of the modes would be illegal (due to an inability to choose legal targets, for example), that mode can’t be chosen. (See rule 601.2b.)
2759 2759
2760 700.2b The contolle of a modal tiggeed ability chooses the mode(s) as pat of putting that ability on the stack. If one of the modes would be illegal (due to an inability to choose legal tagets, fo example), that mode can’t be chosen. If no mode is chosen, the ability is emoved fom the stack. (See ule 603.3c.) 2760 700.2b The controller of a modal triggered ability chooses the mode(s) as part of putting that ability on the stack. If one of the modes would be illegal (due to an inability to choose legal targets, for example), that mode can’t be chosen. If no mode is chosen, the ability is removed from the stack. (See rule 603.3c.)
2761 2761
2762 700.2c If a spell o ability tagets one o moe tagets only if a paticula mode is chosen fo it, its contolle will need to choose those tagets only if they chose that mode. Othewise, the spell o ability is teated as though it did not have those tagets. (See ule 601.2c.) 2762 700.2c If a spell or ability targets one or more targets only if a particular mode is chosen for it, its controller will need to choose those targets only if they chose that mode. Otherwise, the spell or ability is treated as though it did not have those targets. (See rule 601.2c.)
2763 2763
2764 700.2d If a playe is allowed to choose moe than one mode fo a modal spell o ability, that playe nomally can’t choose the same mode moe than once. Howeve, a few modal spells include the instuction “You may choose the same mode moe than once.” If a paticula mode is chosen multiple times, the spell is teated as if that mode appeaed that many times in sequence. If that mode equies a taget, the same playe o object may be chosen as the taget fo each of those modes, o diffeent tagets may be chosen. 2764 700.2d If a player is allowed to choose more than one mode for a modal spell or ability, that player normally can’t choose the same mode more than once. However, a few modal spells include the instruction “You may choose the same mode more than once.” If a particular mode is chosen multiple times, the spell is treated as if that mode appeared that many times in sequence. If that mode requires a target, the same player or object may be chosen as the target for each of those modes, or different targets may be chosen.
2765 2765
2766 700.2e Some spells and abilities specify that a playe othe than thei contolle chooses a mode fo it. In that case, the othe playe does so when the spell o ability’s contolle nomally would do so. If thee is moe than one othe playe who could make such a choice, the spell o ability’s contolle decides which of those playes will make the choice. 2766 700.2e Some spells and abilities specify that a player other than their controller chooses a mode for it. In that case, the other player does so when the spell or ability’s controller normally would do so. If there is more than one other player who could make such a choice, the spell or ability’s controller decides which of those players will make the choice.
2767 2767
2768 700.2f Modal spells and abilities may have diffeent tageting equiements fo each mode. Changing a spell o ability’s taget can’t change its mode. 2768 700.2f Modal spells and abilities may have different targeting requirements for each mode. Changing a spell or ability’s target can’t change its mode.
2769 2769
2770 700.2g A copy of a modal spell o ability copies the mode(s) chosen fo it. The contolle of the copy can’t choose a diffeent mode. (See ule 706.10.) 2770 700.2g A copy of a modal spell or ability copies the mode(s) chosen for it. The controller of the copy can’t choose a different mode. (See rule 706.10.)
2771 2771
2772 700.3. Some effects cause objects to be tempoaily gouped into piles. 2772 700.3. Some effects cause objects to be temporarily grouped into piles.
2773 2773
2774 700.3a Each of the affected objects must be put into exactly one of those piles, unless the effect specifies othewise. 2774 700.3a Each of the affected objects must be put into exactly one of those piles, unless the effect specifies otherwise.
2775 2775
2776 700.3b Each object in a pile is still an individual object. The pile is not an object. 2776 700.3b Each object in a pile is still an individual object. The pile is not an object.
2777 2777
2778 700.3c Objects gouped into piles don’t leave the zone they’e cuently in. If cads in a gaveyad ae split into piles, the ode of the gaveyad must be maintained. 2778 700.3c Objects grouped into piles don’t leave the zone they’re currently in. If cards in a graveyard are split into piles, the order of the graveyard must be maintained.
2779 Example: Fact o Fiction eads, “Reveal the top five cads of you libay. An opponent sepaates those cads into two piles. Put one pile into you hand and the othe into you gaveyad.” While an opponent is sepaating the evealed cads into piles, they’e still in thei owne’s libay. They don’t leave the libay until they’e put into thei owne’s hand o gaveyad. 2779 Example: Fact or Fiction reads, “Reveal the top five cards of your library. An opponent separates those cards into two piles. Put one pile into your hand and the other into your graveyard.” While an opponent is separating the revealed cards into piles, they’re still in their owner’s library. They don’t leave the library until they’re put into their owner’s hand or graveyard.
2780 2780
2781 700.3d A pile can contain zeo o moe objects. 2781 700.3d A pile can contain zero or more objects.
2782 2782
2783 700.4. The tem dies means “is put into a gaveyad fom the battlefield.” 2783 700.4. The term dies means “is put into a graveyard from the battlefield.”
2784 2784
2785 700.5. A playe’s devotion to [colo] is equal to the numbe of mana symbols of that colo among the mana costs of pemanents that playe contols. A playe’s devotion to [colo 1] and [colo 2] is equal to the numbe of mana symbols among the mana costs of pemanents that playe contols that ae [colo 1], [colo 2], o both colos. 2785 700.5. A player’s devotion to [color] is equal to the number of mana symbols of that color among the mana costs of permanents that player controls. A player’s devotion to [color 1] and [color 2] is equal to the number of mana symbols among the mana costs of permanents that player controls that are [color 1], [color 2], or both colors.
2786 2786
2787 700.6. The tem histoic efes to an object that has the legenday supetype, the atifact cad type, o the Saga subtype. 2787 700.6. The term historic refers to an object that has the legendary supertype, the artifact card type, or the Saga subtype.
2788 2788
2789 700.7. If an ability of an object uses a phase such as “this [something]” to identify an object, whee [something] is a chaacteistic, it is efeing to that paticula object, even if it isn’t the appopiate chaacteistic at the time. 2789 700.7. If an ability of an object uses a phrase such as “this [something]” to identify an object, where [something] is a characteristic, it is referring to that particular object, even if it isn’t the appropriate characteristic at the time.
2790 Example: An ability eads “Taget ceatue gets +2/+2 until end of tun. Destoy that ceatue at the beginning of the next end step.” The ability will destoy the object it gave +2/+2 to even if that object isn’t a ceatue at the beginning of the next end step. 2790 Example: An ability reads “Target creature gets +2/+2 until end of turn. Destroy that creature at the beginning of the next end step.” The ability will destroy the object it gave +2/+2 to even if that object isn’t a creature at the beginning of the next end step.
2791 2791
2792 700.8. Some cads efe to cads with a name oiginally pinted in a paticula set. 2792 700.8. Some cards refer to cards with a name originally printed in a particular set.
2793 2793
2794 700.8a One cad (City in a Bottle) efes to pemanents and cads with a name oiginally pinted in the Aabian Nights™ expansion. Those names ae Abu Ja’fa, Aladdin, Aladdin’s Lamp, Aladdin’s Ring, Ali Baba, Ali fom Caio, Amy of Allah, Bazaa of Baghdad, Bid Maiden, Bottle of Suleiman, Bass Man, Camel, City in a Bottle, City of Bass, Cuombajj Witches, Cyclone, Dancing Scimita, Dandân, Deset, Deset Nomads, Deset Twiste, Diamond Valley, Dop of Honey, Ebony Hose, Elephant Gaveyad, El-Hajjâj, Eg Raides, Ehnam Djinn, Eye fo an Eye, Fishlive Oil, Flying Capet, Flying Men, Ghazbán Oge, Giant Totoise, Guadian Beast, Hasan Ogess, Hu Jackal, Ifh-Biff Efeet, Island Fish Jasconius, Island of Wak-Wak, Jando’s Ring, Jando’s Saddlebags, Jeweled Bid, Jihad, Junún Efeet, Juzám Djinn, Khabál Ghoul, King Suleiman, Kid Ape, Libay of Alexandia, Magnetic Mountain, Mechant Ship, Metamophosis, Mijae Djinn, Mooish Cavaly, Nafs Asp, Oasis, Old Man of the Sea, Oubliette, Piety, Pyamids, Repentant Blacksmith, Ring of Ma’ûf, Rukh Egg, Sandals of Abdallah, Sandstom, Seendib Djinn, Seendib Efeet, Shahazad, Sindbad, Singing Tee, Soceess Queen, Stone-Thowing Devils, Unstable Mutation, Wa Elephant, Wyluli Wolf, and Ydwen Efeet. 2794 700.8a One card (City in a Bottle) refers to permanents and cards with a name originally printed in the Arabian Nights™ expansion. Those names are Abu Ja’far, Aladdin, Aladdin’s Lamp, Aladdin’s Ring, Ali Baba, Ali from Cairo, Army of Allah, Bazaar of Baghdad, Bird Maiden, Bottle of Suleiman, Brass Man, Camel, City in a Bottle, City of Brass, Cuombajj Witches, Cyclone, Dancing Scimitar, Dandân, Desert, Desert Nomads, Desert Twister, Diamond Valley, Drop of Honey, Ebony Horse, Elephant Graveyard, El-Hajjâj, Erg Raiders, Erhnam Djinn, Eye for an Eye, Fishliver Oil, Flying Carpet, Flying Men, Ghazbán Ogre, Giant Tortoise, Guardian Beast, Hasran Ogress, Hurr Jackal, Ifh-Biff Efreet, Island Fish Jasconius, Island of Wak-Wak, Jandor’s Ring, Jandor’s Saddlebags, Jeweled Bird, Jihad, Junún Efreet, Juzám Djinn, Khabál Ghoul, King Suleiman, Kird Ape, Library of Alexandria, Magnetic Mountain, Merchant Ship, Metamorphosis, Mijae Djinn, Moorish Cavalry, Nafs Asp, Oasis, Old Man of the Sea, Oubliette, Piety, Pyramids, Repentant Blacksmith, Ring of Ma’rûf, Rukh Egg, Sandals of Abdallah, Sandstorm, Serendib Djinn, Serendib Efreet, Shahrazad, Sindbad, Singing Tree, Sorceress Queen, Stone-Throwing Devils, Unstable Mutation, War Elephant, Wyluli Wolf, and Ydwen Efreet.
2795 2795
2796 700.8b One cad (Golgothian Sylex) efes to pemanents with a name oiginally pinted in the Antiquities™ expansion. Those names ae Amulet of Koog, Agivian Achaeologist, Agivian Blacksmith, Agothian Pixies, Agothian Teefolk, Amageddon Clock, Atifact Blast, Atifact Possession, Atifact Wad, Ashnod’s Alta, Ashnod’s Battle Gea, Ashnod’s Tansmogant, Atog, Batteing Ram, Bonze Tablet, Candelaba of Tawnos, Cicle of Potection: Atifacts, Citanul Duid, Clay Statue, Clockwok Avian, Colossus of Sadia, Coal Helm, Cumble, Cused Rack, Damping Field, Detonate, Dafna’s Restoation, Dagon Engine, Dwaven Weaponsmith, Enegy Flux, Feldon’s Cane, Gaea’s Avenge, Gate to Phyexia, Goblin Atisans, Golgothian Sylex, Gapeshot Catapult, Haunting Wind, Hukyl’s Recall, Ivoy Towe, Jalum Tome, Matys of Kolis, Mightstone, Millstone, Misha’s Factoy, Misha’s Wa Machine, Misha’s Wokshop, Obelisk of Undoing, Onulet, Ocish Mechanics, Onithopte, Phyexian Gemlins, Powe Atifact, Poweleech, Piest of Yawgmoth, Pimal Clay, The Rack, Rakalite, Reconstuction, Revese Polaity, Rocket Launche, Sage of Lat-Nam, Shapeshifte, Shattestom, Staff of Zegon, Stip Mine, Su-Chi, Tablet of Epity, Tawnos’s Coffin, Tawnos’s Wand, Tawnos’s Weapony, Tetavus, Titania’s Song, Tansmute Atifact, Tiskelion, Uza’s Avenge, Uza’s Chalice, Uza’s Mine, Uza’s Mite, Uza’s Powe Plant, Uza’s Towe, Wall of Speas, Weakstone, Xenic Poltegeist, Yawgmoth Demon, and Yotian Soldie. 2796 700.8b One card (Golgothian Sylex) refers to permanents with a name originally printed in the Antiquities™ expansion. Those names are Amulet of Kroog, Argivian Archaeologist, Argivian Blacksmith, Argothian Pixies, Argothian Treefolk, Armageddon Clock, Artifact Blast, Artifact Possession, Artifact Ward, Ashnod’s Altar, Ashnod’s Battle Gear, Ashnod’s Transmogrant, Atog, Battering Ram, Bronze Tablet, Candelabra of Tawnos, Circle of Protection: Artifacts, Citanul Druid, Clay Statue, Clockwork Avian, Colossus of Sardia, Coral Helm, Crumble, Cursed Rack, Damping Field, Detonate, Drafna’s Restoration, Dragon Engine, Dwarven Weaponsmith, Energy Flux, Feldon’s Cane, Gaea’s Avenger, Gate to Phyrexia, Goblin Artisans, Golgothian Sylex, Grapeshot Catapult, Haunting Wind, Hurkyl’s Recall, Ivory Tower, Jalum Tome, Martyrs of Korlis, Mightstone, Millstone, Mishra’s Factory, Mishra’s War Machine, Mishra’s Workshop, Obelisk of Undoing, Onulet, Orcish Mechanics, Ornithopter, Phyrexian Gremlins, Power Artifact, Powerleech, Priest of Yawgmoth, Primal Clay, The Rack, Rakalite, Reconstruction, Reverse Polarity, Rocket Launcher, Sage of Lat-Nam, Shapeshifter, Shatterstorm, Staff of Zegon, Strip Mine, Su-Chi, Tablet of Epityr, Tawnos’s Coffin, Tawnos’s Wand, Tawnos’s Weaponry, Tetravus, Titania’s Song, Transmute Artifact, Triskelion, Urza’s Avenger, Urza’s Chalice, Urza’s Mine, Urza’s Miter, Urza’s Power Plant, Urza’s Tower, Wall of Spears, Weakstone, Xenic Poltergeist, Yawgmoth Demon, and Yotian Soldier.
2797 2797
2798 700.8c One cad (Apocalypse Chime) efes to pemanents with a name oiginally pinted in the Homelands™ expansion. Those names ae Abbey Gagoyles; Abbey Maton; Aethe Stom; Aliban’s Towe; Ambush; Ambush Paty; Anaba Ancesto; Anaba Bodyguad; Anaba Shaman; Anaba Spiit Cafte; An-Havva Constable; An-Havva Inn; An-Havva Township; An-Zein Ruins; Apocalypse Chime; Autumn Willow; Aysen Abbey; Aysen Bueaucats; Aysen Cusade; Aysen Highway; Baki’s Cuse; Baon Sengi; Beast Walkes; Black Caiage; Boken Visage; Caapace; Castle Sengi; Cemetey Gate; Chain Stasis; Chandle; Clockwok Gnomes; Clockwok Steed; Clockwok Swam; Coal Reef; Dak Maze; Daughte of Autumn; Death Speakes; Didgeidoo; Dudge Spell; Dy Spell; Dwaven Pony; Dwaven Sea Clan; Dwaven Tade; Ebony Rhino; Eon the Relentless; Evapoate; Faeie Noble; Feast of the Unicon; Feoz’s Ban; Folk of An-Havva; Foget; Funeal Mach; Ghost Hounds; Giant Albatoss; Giant Oyste; Gandmothe Sengi; Geate Weewolf; Hazduh the Abbot; Headstone; Heat Wolf; Hungy Mist; Ihsan’s Shade; Iini Sengi; Ionclaw Cuse; Jinx; Joven; Joven’s Feets; Joven’s Tools; Koskun Falls; Koskun Keep; Labyinth Minotau; Leaping Lizad; Leeches; Mammoth Haness; Majhan; Memoy Lapse; Mechant Scoll; Mesa Falcon; Mystic Decee; Nawhal; Ocish Mine; Pimal Ode; Pophecy; Rashka the Slaye; Reef Piates; Renewal; Retibution; Reveka, Wizad Savant; Root Spide; Roots; Roteothopte; Rysoian Badge; Samite Alchemist; Sea Spite; Sea Toll; Sengi Autocat; Sengi Bats; Sea Aviay; Sea Bestiay; Sea Inquisitos; Sea Paladin; Seated Aows; Shink; Soaya the Falcone; Spectal Beas; Timmeian Fiends; Totue; Tade Caavan; Tuce; Veldane of Sengi; Wall of Kelp; Willow Faeie; Willow Piestess; Winte Sky; and Wizads’ School. 2798 700.8c One card (Apocalypse Chime) refers to permanents with a name originally printed in the Homelands™ expansion. Those names are Abbey Gargoyles; Abbey Matron; Aether Storm; Aliban’s Tower; Ambush; Ambush Party; Anaba Ancestor; Anaba Bodyguard; Anaba Shaman; Anaba Spirit Crafter; An-Havva Constable; An-Havva Inn; An-Havva Township; An-Zerrin Ruins; Apocalypse Chime; Autumn Willow; Aysen Abbey; Aysen Bureaucrats; Aysen Crusader; Aysen Highway; Baki’s Curse; Baron Sengir; Beast Walkers; Black Carriage; Broken Visage; Carapace; Castle Sengir; Cemetery Gate; Chain Stasis; Chandler; Clockwork Gnomes; Clockwork Steed; Clockwork Swarm; Coral Reef; Dark Maze; Daughter of Autumn; Death Speakers; Didgeridoo; Drudge Spell; Dry Spell; Dwarven Pony; Dwarven Sea Clan; Dwarven Trader; Ebony Rhino; Eron the Relentless; Evaporate; Faerie Noble; Feast of the Unicorn; Feroz’s Ban; Folk of An-Havva; Forget; Funeral March; Ghost Hounds; Giant Albatross; Giant Oyster; Grandmother Sengir; Greater Werewolf; Hazduhr the Abbot; Headstone; Heart Wolf; Hungry Mist; Ihsan’s Shade; Irini Sengir; Ironclaw Curse; Jinx; Joven; Joven’s Ferrets; Joven’s Tools; Koskun Falls; Koskun Keep; Labyrinth Minotaur; Leaping Lizard; Leeches; Mammoth Harness; Marjhan; Memory Lapse; Merchant Scroll; Mesa Falcon; Mystic Decree; Narwhal; Orcish Mine; Primal Order; Prophecy; Rashka the Slayer; Reef Pirates; Renewal; Retribution; Reveka, Wizard Savant; Root Spider; Roots; Roterothopter; Rysorian Badger; Samite Alchemist; Sea Sprite; Sea Troll; Sengir Autocrat; Sengir Bats; Serra Aviary; Serra Bestiary; Serra Inquisitors; Serra Paladin; Serrated Arrows; Shrink; Soraya the Falconer; Spectral Bears; Timmerian Fiends; Torture; Trade Caravan; Truce; Veldrane of Sengir; Wall of Kelp; Willow Faerie; Willow Priestess; Winter Sky; and Wizards’ School.
2799 2799
2800 701. Keywod Actions 2800 701. Keyword Actions
2801 2801
2802 701.1. Most actions descibed in a cad’s ules text use the standad English definitions of the vebs within, but some specialized vebs ae used whose meanings may not be clea. These “keywods” ae game tems; sometimes eminde text summaizes thei meanings. 2802 701.1. Most actions described in a card’s rules text use the standard English definitions of the verbs within, but some specialized verbs are used whose meanings may not be clear. These “keywords” are game terms; sometimes reminder text summarizes their meanings.
2803 2803
2804 701.2. Activate 2804 701.2. Activate
2805 2805
2806 701.2a To activate an activated ability is to put it onto the stack and pay its costs, so that it will eventually esolve and have its effect. Only an object’s contolle (o its owne, if it doesn’t have a contolle) can activate its activated ability unless the object specifically says othewise. A playe may activate an ability if they have pioity. See ule 602, “Activating Activated Abilities.” 2806 701.2a To activate an activated ability is to put it onto the stack and pay its costs, so that it will eventually resolve and have its effect. Only an object’s controller (or its owner, if it doesn’t have a controller) can activate its activated ability unless the object specifically says otherwise. A player may activate an ability if they have priority. See rule 602, “Activating Activated Abilities.”
2807 2807
2808 701.3. Attach 2808 701.3. Attach
2809 2809
2810 701.3a To attach an Aua, Equipment, o Fotification to an object o playe means to take it fom whee it cuently is and put it onto that object o playe. If something is attached to a pemanent on the battlefield, it’s customay to place it so that it’s physically touching the pemanent. An Aua, Equipment, o Fotification can’t be attached to an object o playe it couldn’t enchant, equip, o fotify, espectively. 2810 701.3a To attach an Aura, Equipment, or Fortification to an object or player means to take it from where it currently is and put it onto that object or player. If something is attached to a permanent on the battlefield, it’s customary to place it so that it’s physically touching the permanent. An Aura, Equipment, or Fortification can’t be attached to an object or player it couldn’t enchant, equip, or fortify, respectively.
2811 2811
2812 701.3b If an effect ties to attach an Aua, Equipment, o Fotification to an object o playe it can’t be attached to, the Aua, Equipment, o Fotification doesn’t move. If an effect ties to attach an Aua, Equipment, o Fotification to the object o playe it’s aleady attached to, the effect does nothing. If an effect ties to attach an object that isn’t an Aua, Equipment, o Fotification to anothe object o playe, the effect does nothing and the fist object doesn’t move. 2812 701.3b If an effect tries to attach an Aura, Equipment, or Fortification to an object or player it can’t be attached to, the Aura, Equipment, or Fortification doesn’t move. If an effect tries to attach an Aura, Equipment, or Fortification to the object or player it’s already attached to, the effect does nothing. If an effect tries to attach an object that isn’t an Aura, Equipment, or Fortification to another object or player, the effect does nothing and the first object doesn’t move.
2813 2813
2814 701.3c Attaching an Aua, Equipment, o Fotification on the battlefield to a diffeent object o playe causes the Aua, Equipment, o Fotification to eceive a new timestamp. 2814 701.3c Attaching an Aura, Equipment, or Fortification on the battlefield to a different object or player causes the Aura, Equipment, or Fortification to receive a new timestamp.
2815 2815
2816 701.3d To “unattach” an Equipment fom a ceatue means to move it away fom that ceatue so the Equipment is on the battlefield but is not equipping anything. It should no longe be physically touching any ceatue. If an Aua, Equipment, o Fotification that was attached to an object o playe ceases to be attached to it, that counts as “becoming unattached [fom that object o playe]”; this includes if that Aua, Equipment, o Fotification leaves the battlefield, the object leaves the zone it was in, o that playe leaves the game. 2816 701.3d To “unattach” an Equipment from a creature means to move it away from that creature so the Equipment is on the battlefield but is not equipping anything. It should no longer be physically touching any creature. If an Aura, Equipment, or Fortification that was attached to an object or player ceases to be attached to it, that counts as “becoming unattached [from that object or player]”; this includes if that Aura, Equipment, or Fortification leaves the battlefield, the object leaves the zone it was in, or that player leaves the game.
2817 2817
2818 701.4. Cast 2818 701.4. Cast
2819 2819
2820 701.4a To cast a spell is to take it fom the zone it’s in (usually the hand), put it on the stack, and pay its costs, so that it will eventually esolve and have its effect. A playe may cast a spell if they have pioity. See ule 601, “Casting Spells.” 2820 701.4a To cast a spell is to take it from the zone it’s in (usually the hand), put it on the stack, and pay its costs, so that it will eventually resolve and have its effect. A player may cast a spell if they have priority. See rule 601, “Casting Spells.”
2821 2821
2822 701.4b To cast a cad is to cast it as a spell. 2822 701.4b To cast a card is to cast it as a spell.
2823 2823
2824 701.5. Counte 2824 701.5. Counter
2825 2825
2826 701.5a To counte a spell o ability means to cancel it, emoving it fom the stack. It doesn’t esolve and none of its effects occu. A counteed spell is put into its owne’s gaveyad. 2826 701.5a To counter a spell or ability means to cancel it, removing it from the stack. It doesn’t resolve and none of its effects occur. A countered spell is put into its owner’s graveyard.
2827 2827
2828 701.5b The playe who cast a counteed spell o activated a counteed ability doesn’t get a “efund” of any costs that wee paid. 2828 701.5b The player who cast a countered spell or activated a countered ability doesn’t get a “refund” of any costs that were paid.
2829 2829
2830 701.6. Ceate 2830 701.6. Create
2831 2831
2832 701.6a To ceate one o moe tokens with cetain chaacteistics, put the specified numbe of tokens with the specified chaacteistics onto the battlefield. 2832 701.6a To create one or more tokens with certain characteristics, put the specified number of tokens with the specified characteristics onto the battlefield.
2833 2833
2834 701.6b If a eplacement effect applies to a token being ceated, that effect applies befoe consideing any continuous effects that will modify the chaacteistics of that token. If a eplacement effect applies to a token enteing the battlefield, that effect applies afte consideing any continuous effects that will modify the chaacteistics of that token. 2834 701.6b If a replacement effect applies to a token being created, that effect applies before considering any continuous effects that will modify the characteristics of that token. If a replacement effect applies to a token entering the battlefield, that effect applies after considering any continuous effects that will modify the characteristics of that token.
2835 2835
2836 701.6c Peviously, an effect that ceated tokens instucted a playe to “put [those tokens] onto the battlefield.” Cads that wee pinted with that text have eceived eata in the Oacle cad efeence so they now “ceate” those tokens. 2836 701.6c Previously, an effect that created tokens instructed a player to “put [those tokens] onto the battlefield.” Cards that were printed with that text have received errata in the Oracle card reference so they now “create” those tokens.
2837 2837
2838 701.7. Destoy 2838 701.7. Destroy
2839 2839
2840 701.7a To destoy a pemanent, move it fom the battlefield to its owne’s gaveyad. 2840 701.7a To destroy a permanent, move it from the battlefield to its owner’s graveyard.
2841 2841
2842 701.7b The only ways a pemanent can be destoyed ae as a esult of an effect that uses the wod “destoy” o as a esult of the state-based actions that check fo lethal damage (see ule 704.5g) o damage fom a souce with deathtouch (see ule 704.5h). If a pemanent is put into its owne’s gaveyad fo any othe eason, it hasn’t been “destoyed.” 2842 701.7b The only ways a permanent can be destroyed are as a result of an effect that uses the word “destroy” or as a result of the state-based actions that check for lethal damage (see rule 704.5g) or damage from a source with deathtouch (see rule 704.5h). If a permanent is put into its owner’s graveyard for any other reason, it hasn’t been “destroyed.”
2843 2843
2844 701.7c A egeneation effect eplaces a destuction event. See ule 701.14, “Regeneate.” 2844 701.7c A regeneration effect replaces a destruction event. See rule 701.14, “Regenerate.”
2845 2845
2846 701.8. Discad 2846 701.8. Discard
2847 2847
2848 701.8a To discad a cad, move it fom its owne’s hand to that playe’s gaveyad. 2848 701.8a To discard a card, move it from its owner’s hand to that player’s graveyard.
2849 2849
2850 701.8b By default, effects that cause a playe to discad a cad allow the affected playe to choose which cad to discad. Some effects, howeve, equie a andom discad o allow anothe playe to choose which cad is discaded. 2850 701.8b By default, effects that cause a player to discard a card allow the affected player to choose which card to discard. Some effects, however, require a random discard or allow another player to choose which card is discarded.
2851 2851
2852 701.8c If a cad is discaded, but an effect causes it to be put into a hidden zone instead of into its owne’s gaveyad without being evealed, all values of that cad’s chaacteistics ae consideed to be undefined. If a cad is discaded this way to pay a cost that specifies a chaacteistic about the discaded cad, that cost payment is illegal; the game etuns to the moment befoe the cost was paid (see ule 722, “Handling Illegal Actions”). 2852 701.8c If a card is discarded, but an effect causes it to be put into a hidden zone instead of into its owner’s graveyard without being revealed, all values of that card’s characteristics are considered to be undefined. If a card is discarded this way to pay a cost that specifies a characteristic about the discarded card, that cost payment is illegal; the game returns to the moment before the cost was paid (see rule 722, “Handling Illegal Actions”).
2853 2853
2854 701.9. Double 2854 701.9. Double
2855 2855
2856 701.9a Doubling a ceatue’s powe and/o toughness ceates a continuous effect. This effect modifies that ceatue’s powe and/o toughness but doesn’t set those chaacteistics to a specific value. See ule 613.3c. 2856 701.9a Doubling a creature’s power and/or toughness creates a continuous effect. This effect modifies that creature’s power and/or toughness but doesn’t set those characteristics to a specific value. See rule 613.3c.
2857 2857
2858 701.9b To double a ceatue’s powe, that ceatue gets +X/+0, whee X is that ceatue’s powe as the spell o ability that doubles its powe esolves. Similaly, an effect that doubles a ceatue’s toughness gives it +0/+X, whee X is that ceatue’s toughness. Doubling a ceatue’s powe and toughness gives it +X/+Y, whee X is its powe and Y is its toughness. 2858 701.9b To double a creature’s power, that creature gets +X/+0, where X is that creature’s power as the spell or ability that doubles its power resolves. Similarly, an effect that doubles a creature’s toughness gives it +0/+X, where X is that creature’s toughness. Doubling a creature’s power and toughness gives it +X/+Y, where X is its power and Y is its toughness.
2859 2859
2860 701.9c If a ceatue’s powe is less than 0 when it’s doubled, doubling that ceatue’s powe instead means that the ceatue gets -X/-0, whee X is the diffeence between 0 and its powe. Similaly, if its toughness is less than 0 when doubled, it gets -0/-X. If one chaacteistic’s value is negative but the othe isn’t when both ae doubled, it gets -X/+Y o +X/-Y, as appopiate. 2860 701.9c If a creature’s power is less than 0 when it’s doubled, doubling that creature’s power instead means that the creature gets -X/-0, where X is the difference between 0 and its power. Similarly, if its toughness is less than 0 when doubled, it gets -0/-X. If one characteristic’s value is negative but the other isn’t when both are doubled, it gets -X/+Y or +X/-Y, as appropriate.
2861 2861
2862 701.9d To double a playe’s life total, the playe gains o loses an amount of life such that thei new life total is twice its cuent value. 2862 701.9d To double a player’s life total, the player gains or loses an amount of life such that their new life total is twice its current value.
2863 2863
2864 701.9e To double the numbe of a kind of countes on a playe o pemanent, give that playe o pemanent as many of those countes as that playe o pemanent aleady has. 2864 701.9e To double the number of a kind of counters on a player or permanent, give that player or permanent as many of those counters as that player or permanent already has.
2865 2865
2866 701.9f To double the amount of a type of mana in a playe’s mana pool, that playe adds an amount of mana of that type equal to the amount they aleady have. 2866 701.9f To double the amount of a type of mana in a player’s mana pool, that player adds an amount of mana of that type equal to the amount they already have.
2867 2867
2868 701.10. Exchange 2868 701.10. Exchange
2869 2869
2870 701.10a A spell o ability may instuct playes to exchange something (fo example, life totals o contol of two pemanents) as pat of its esolution. When such a spell o ability esolves, if the entie exchange can’t be completed, no pat of the exchange occus. 2870 701.10a A spell or ability may instruct players to exchange something (for example, life totals or control of two permanents) as part of its resolution. When such a spell or ability resolves, if the entire exchange can’t be completed, no part of the exchange occurs.
2871 Example: If a spell attempts to exchange contol of two taget ceatues but one of those ceatues is destoyed befoe the spell esolves, the spell does nothing to the othe ceatue. 2871 Example: If a spell attempts to exchange control of two target creatures but one of those creatures is destroyed before the spell resolves, the spell does nothing to the other creature.
2872 2872
2873 701.10b When contol of two pemanents is exchanged, if those pemanents ae contolled by diffeent playes, each of those playes simultaneously gains contol of the pemanent that was contolled by the othe playe. If, on the othe hand, those pemanents ae contolled by the same playe, the exchange effect does nothing. 2873 701.10b When control of two permanents is exchanged, if those permanents are controlled by different players, each of those players simultaneously gains control of the permanent that was controlled by the other player. If, on the other hand, those permanents are controlled by the same player, the exchange effect does nothing.
2874 2874
2875 701.10c When life totals ae exchanged, each playe gains o loses the amount of life necessay to equal the othe playe’s pevious life total. Replacement effects may modify these gains and losses, and tiggeed abilities may tigge on them. A playe who can’t gain life can’t be given a highe life total this way, and a playe who can’t lose life can’t be given a lowe life total this way (see ules 119.7–8). 2875 701.10c When life totals are exchanged, each player gains or loses the amount of life necessary to equal the other player’s previous life total. Replacement effects may modify these gains and losses, and triggered abilities may trigger on them. A player who can’t gain life can’t be given a higher life total this way, and a player who can’t lose life can’t be given a lower life total this way (see rules 119.7–8).
2876 2876
2877 701.10d Some spells o abilities may instuct a playe to exchange cads in one zone with cads in a diffeent zone (fo example, exiled cads and cads in a playe’s hand). These spells and abilities wok the same as othe “exchange” spells and abilities, except they can exchange the cads only if all the cads ae owned by the same playe, and they can exchange the cads even if one zone is empty. 2877 701.10d Some spells or abilities may instruct a player to exchange cards in one zone with cards in a different zone (for example, exiled cards and cards in a player’s hand). These spells and abilities work the same as other “exchange” spells and abilities, except they can exchange the cards only if all the cards are owned by the same player, and they can exchange the cards even if one zone is empty.
2878 2878
2879 701.10e If a cad in one zone is exchanged with a cad in a diffeent zone, and eithe of them is attached to an object, that cad stops being attached to that object and the othe cad becomes attached to that object. 2879 701.10e If a card in one zone is exchanged with a card in a different zone, and either of them is attached to an object, that card stops being attached to that object and the other card becomes attached to that object.
2880 2880
2881 701.10f If a spell o ability instucts a playe to simply exchange two zones, and one of the zones is empty, the cads in the zones ae still exchanged. 2881 701.10f If a spell or ability instructs a player to simply exchange two zones, and one of the zones is empty, the cards in the zones are still exchanged.
2882 2882
2883 701.10g A spell o ability may instuct a playe to exchange two numeical values. In such an exchange, each value becomes equal to the pevious value of the othe. If eithe of those values is a life total, the affected playe gains o loses the amount of life necessay to equal the othe value. Replacement effects may modify this gain o loss, and tiggeed abilities may tigge on it. A playe who can’t gain life can’t be given a highe life total this way, and a playe who can’t lose life can’t be given a lowe life total this way (see ules 119.7–8). If eithe of those values is a powe o toughness, a continuous effect is ceated setting that powe o toughness to the othe value (see ule 613.3b). This ule does not apply to spells and abilities that switch a ceatue’s powe and toughness. 2883 701.10g A spell or ability may instruct a player to exchange two numerical values. In such an exchange, each value becomes equal to the previous value of the other. If either of those values is a life total, the affected player gains or loses the amount of life necessary to equal the other value. Replacement effects may modify this gain or loss, and triggered abilities may trigger on it. A player who can’t gain life can’t be given a higher life total this way, and a player who can’t lose life can’t be given a lower life total this way (see rules 119.7–8). If either of those values is a power or toughness, a continuous effect is created setting that power or toughness to the other value (see rule 613.3b). This rule does not apply to spells and abilities that switch a creature’s power and toughness.
2884 2884
2885 701.11. Exile 2885 701.11. Exile
2886 2886
2887 701.11a To exile an object, move it to the exile zone fom wheeve it is. See ule 406, “Exile.” 2887 701.11a To exile an object, move it to the exile zone from wherever it is. See rule 406, “Exile.”
2888 2888
2889 701.12. Fight 2889 701.12. Fight
2890 2890
2891 701.12a A spell o ability may instuct a ceatue to fight anothe ceatue o it may instuct two ceatues to fight each othe. Each of those ceatues deals damage equal to its powe to the othe ceatue. 2891 701.12a A spell or ability may instruct a creature to fight another creature or it may instruct two creatures to fight each other. Each of those creatures deals damage equal to its power to the other creature.
2892 2892
2893 701.12b If a ceatue instucted to fight is no longe on the battlefield o is no longe a ceatue, no damage is dealt. If a ceatue is an illegal taget fo a esolving spell o ability that instucts it to fight, no damage is dealt. 2893 701.12b If a creature instructed to fight is no longer on the battlefield or is no longer a creature, no damage is dealt. If a creature is an illegal target for a resolving spell or ability that instructs it to fight, no damage is dealt.
2894 2894
2895 701.12c If a ceatue fights itself, it deals damage to itself equal to twice its powe. 2895 701.12c If a creature fights itself, it deals damage to itself equal to twice its power.
2896 2896
2897 701.12d The damage dealt when a ceatue fights isn’t combat damage. 2897 701.12d The damage dealt when a creature fights isn’t combat damage.
2898 2898
2899 701.13. Play 2899 701.13. Play
2900 2900
2901 701.13a To play a land means to put it onto the battlefield fom the zone it’s in (usually the hand). A playe may play a land if they have pioity, it’s the main phase of thei tun, the stack is empty, and they haven’t played a land this tun. Playing a land is a special action (see ule 116), so it doesn’t use the stack; it simply happens. Putting a land onto the battlefield as the esult of a spell o ability isn’t the same as playing a land. See ule 305, “Lands.” 2901 701.13a To play a land means to put it onto the battlefield from the zone it’s in (usually the hand). A player may play a land if they have priority, it’s the main phase of their turn, the stack is empty, and they haven’t played a land this turn. Playing a land is a special action (see rule 116), so it doesn’t use the stack; it simply happens. Putting a land onto the battlefield as the result of a spell or ability isn’t the same as playing a land. See rule 305, “Lands.”
2902 2902
2903 701.13b To play a cad means to play that cad as a land o to cast that cad as a spell, whicheve is appopiate. 2903 701.13b To play a card means to play that card as a land or to cast that card as a spell, whichever is appropriate.
2904 2904
2905 701.13c Some effects instuct a playe to “play” with a cetain aspect of the game changed, such as “Play with the top cad of you libay evealed.” “Play” in this sense means to play the Magic game. 2905 701.13c Some effects instruct a player to “play” with a certain aspect of the game changed, such as “Play with the top card of your library revealed.” “Play” in this sense means to play the Magic game.
2906 2906
2907 701.13d Peviously, the action of casting a spell, o casting a cad as a spell, was efeed to on cads as “playing” that spell o that cad. Cads that wee pinted with that text have eceived eata in the Oacle cad efeence so they now efe to “casting” that spell o that cad. 2907 701.13d Previously, the action of casting a spell, or casting a card as a spell, was referred to on cards as “playing” that spell or that card. Cards that were printed with that text have received errata in the Oracle card reference so they now refer to “casting” that spell or that card.
2908 2908
2909 701.13e Peviously, the action of using an activated ability was efeed to on cads as “playing” that ability. Cads that wee pinted with that text have eceived eata in the Oacle cad efeence so they now efe to “activating” that ability. 2909 701.13e Previously, the action of using an activated ability was referred to on cards as “playing” that ability. Cards that were printed with that text have received errata in the Oracle card reference so they now refer to “activating” that ability.
2910 2910
2911 701.14. Regeneate 2911 701.14. Regenerate
2912 2912
2913 701.14a If the effect of a esolving spell o ability egeneates a pemanent, it ceates a eplacement effect that potects the pemanent the next time it would be destoyed this tun. In this case, “Regeneate [pemanent]” means “The next time [pemanent] would be destoyed this tun, instead emove all damage maked on it and tap it. If it’s an attacking o blocking ceatue, emove it fom combat.” 2913 701.14a If the effect of a resolving spell or ability regenerates a permanent, it creates a replacement effect that protects the permanent the next time it would be destroyed this turn. In this case, “Regenerate [permanent]” means “The next time [permanent] would be destroyed this turn, instead remove all damage marked on it and tap it. If it’s an attacking or blocking creature, remove it from combat.”
2914 2914
2915 701.14b If the effect of a static ability egeneates a pemanent, it eplaces destuction with an altenate effect each time that pemanent would be destoyed. In this case, “Regeneate [pemanent]” means “Instead emove all damage maked on [pemanent] and tap it. If it’s an attacking o blocking ceatue, emove it fom combat.” 2915 701.14b If the effect of a static ability regenerates a permanent, it replaces destruction with an alternate effect each time that permanent would be destroyed. In this case, “Regenerate [permanent]” means “Instead remove all damage marked on [permanent] and tap it. If it’s an attacking or blocking creature, remove it from combat.”
2916 2916
2917 701.14c Neithe activating an ability that ceates a egeneation shield no casting a spell that ceates a egeneation shield is the same as egeneating a pemanent. Effects that say that a pemanent can’t be egeneated don’t peclude such abilities fom being activated o such spells fom being cast; athe, they cause egeneation shields to not be applied. 2917 701.14c Neither activating an ability that creates a regeneration shield nor casting a spell that creates a regeneration shield is the same as regenerating a permanent. Effects that say that a permanent can’t be regenerated don’t preclude such abilities from being activated or such spells from being cast; rather, they cause regeneration shields to not be applied.
2918 2918
2919 701.15. Reveal 2919 701.15. Reveal
2920 2920
2921 701.15a To eveal a cad, show that cad to all playes fo a bief time. If an effect causes a cad to be evealed, it emains evealed fo as long as necessay to complete the pats of the effect that cad is elevant to. If the cost to cast a spell o activate an ability includes evealing a cad, the cad emains evealed fom the time the spell o ability is announced until the time it leaves the stack. If evealing a cad causes a tiggeed ability to tigge, the cad emains evealed until that tiggeed ability leaves the stack. If that ability isn’t put onto the stack the next time a playe would eceive pioity, the cad ceases to be evealed. 2921 701.15a To reveal a card, show that card to all players for a brief time. If an effect causes a card to be revealed, it remains revealed for as long as necessary to complete the parts of the effect that card is relevant to. If the cost to cast a spell or activate an ability includes revealing a card, the card remains revealed from the time the spell or ability is announced until the time it leaves the stack. If revealing a card causes a triggered ability to trigger, the card remains revealed until that triggered ability leaves the stack. If that ability isn’t put onto the stack the next time a player would receive priority, the card ceases to be revealed.
2922 2922
2923 701.15b Revealing a cad doesn’t cause it to leave the zone it’s in. 2923 701.15b Revealing a card doesn’t cause it to leave the zone it’s in.
2924 2924
2925 701.15c If cads in a playe’s libay ae shuffled o othewise eodeed, any evealed cads that ae eodeed stop being evealed and become new objects. 2925 701.15c If cards in a player’s library are shuffled or otherwise reordered, any revealed cards that are reordered stop being revealed and become new objects.
2926 2926
2927 701.15d Some effects instuct a playe to look at one o moe cads. Looking at a cad follows the same ules as evealing a cad, except that the cad is shown only to the specified playe. 2927 701.15d Some effects instruct a player to look at one or more cards. Looking at a card follows the same rules as revealing a card, except that the card is shown only to the specified player.
2928 2928
2929 701.16. Sacifice 2929 701.16. Sacrifice
2930 2930
2931 701.16a To sacifice a pemanent, its contolle moves it fom the battlefield diectly to its owne’s gaveyad. A playe can’t sacifice something that isn’t a pemanent, o something that’s a pemanent they don’t contol. Sacificing a pemanent doesn’t destoy it, so egeneation o othe effects that eplace destuction can’t affect this action. 2931 701.16a To sacrifice a permanent, its controller moves it from the battlefield directly to its owner’s graveyard. A player can’t sacrifice something that isn’t a permanent, or something that’s a permanent they don’t control. Sacrificing a permanent doesn’t destroy it, so regeneration or other effects that replace destruction can’t affect this action.
2932 2932
2933 701.17. Scy 2933 701.17. Scry
2934 2934
2935 701.17a To “scy N” means to look at the top N cads of you libay, then put any numbe of them on the bottom of you libay in any ode and the est on top of you libay in any ode. 2935 701.17a To “scry N” means to look at the top N cards of your library, then put any number of them on the bottom of your library in any order and the rest on top of your library in any order.
2936 2936
2937 701.17b If a playe is instucted to scy 0, no scy event occus. Abilities that tigge wheneve a playe scies won’t tigge. 2937 701.17b If a player is instructed to scry 0, no scry event occurs. Abilities that trigger whenever a player scries won’t trigger.
2938 2938
2939 701.17c If multiple playes scy at once, each of those playes looks at the top cads of thei libay at the same time. Those playes decide in APNAP ode (see ule 101.4) whee to put those cads, then those cads move at the same time. 2939 701.17c If multiple players scry at once, each of those players looks at the top cards of their library at the same time. Those players decide in APNAP order (see rule 101.4) where to put those cards, then those cards move at the same time.
2940 2940
2941 701.18. Seach 2941 701.18. Search
2942 2942
2943 701.18a To seach fo a cad in a zone, look at all cads in that zone (even if it’s a hidden zone) and find a cad that matches the given desciption. 2943 701.18a To search for a card in a zone, look at all cards in that zone (even if it’s a hidden zone) and find a card that matches the given description.
2944 2944
2945 701.18b If a playe is seaching a hidden zone fo cads with a stated quality, such as a cad with a cetain cad type o colo, that playe isn’t equied to find some o all of those cads even if they’e pesent in that zone. 2945 701.18b If a player is searching a hidden zone for cards with a stated quality, such as a card with a certain card type or color, that player isn’t required to find some or all of those cards even if they’re present in that zone.
2946 Example: Splinte says “Exile taget atifact. Seach its contolle’s gaveyad, hand, and libay fo all cads with the same name as that atifact and exile them. Then that playe shuffles thei libay.” A playe casts Splinte tageting Howling Mine (an atifact). Howling Mine’s contolle has anothe Howling Mine in he gaveyad and two moe in he libay. Splinte’s contolle must find the Howling Mine in the gaveyad, but may choose to find zeo, one, o two of the Howling Mines in the libay. 2946 Example: Splinter says “Exile target artifact. Search its controller’s graveyard, hand, and library for all cards with the same name as that artifact and exile them. Then that player shuffles their library.” A player casts Splinter targeting Howling Mine (an artifact). Howling Mine’s controller has another Howling Mine in her graveyard and two more in her library. Splinter’s controller must find the Howling Mine in the graveyard, but may choose to find zero, one, or two of the Howling Mines in the library.
2947 2947
2948 701.18c If a playe is instucted to seach a hidden zone fo cads that match an undefined quality, that playe may still seach that zone but can’t find any cads. 2948 701.18c If a player is instructed to search a hidden zone for cards that match an undefined quality, that player may still search that zone but can’t find any cards.
2949 Example: Lobotomy says “Taget playe eveals thei hand, then you choose a cad othe than a basic land cad fom it. Seach that playe’s gaveyad, hand, and libay fo all cads with the same name as the chosen cad and exile them. Then that playe shuffles thei libay.” If the taget playe has no cads in thei hand when Lobotomy esolves, the playe who cast Lobotomy seaches the specified zones but doesn’t exile any cads. 2949 Example: Lobotomy says “Target player reveals their hand, then you choose a card other than a basic land card from it. Search that player’s graveyard, hand, and library for all cards with the same name as the chosen card and exile them. Then that player shuffles their library.” If the target player has no cards in their hand when Lobotomy resolves, the player who cast Lobotomy searches the specified zones but doesn’t exile any cards.
2950 2950
2951 701.18d If a playe is seaching a hidden zone simply fo a quantity of cads, such as “a cad” o “thee cads,” that playe must find that many cads (o as many as possible, if the zone doesn’t contain enough cads). 2951 701.18d If a player is searching a hidden zone simply for a quantity of cards, such as “a card” or “three cards,” that player must find that many cards (or as many as possible, if the zone doesn’t contain enough cards).
2952 2952
2953 701.18e If the effect that contains the seach instuction doesn’t also contain instuctions to eveal the found cad(s), then they’e not evealed. 2953 701.18e If the effect that contains the search instruction doesn’t also contain instructions to reveal the found card(s), then they’re not revealed.
2954 2954
2955 701.18f If seaching a zone is eplaced with seaching a potion of that zone, any othe instuctions that efe to seaching the zone still apply. Any abilities that tigge on a libay being seached will tigge. 2955 701.18f If searching a zone is replaced with searching a portion of that zone, any other instructions that refer to searching the zone still apply. Any abilities that trigger on a library being searched will trigger.
2956 Example: Aven Mindcenso says, in pat, “If an opponent would seach a libay, that playe seaches the top fou cads of that libay instead.” Vetean Exploe says “When Vetean Exploe dies, each playe may seach thei libay fo up to two basic land cads and put them onto the battlefield. Then each playe who seached thei libay this way shuffles it.” An opponent who seached the top fou cads of thei libay because of Vetean Exploe’s ability would shuffle the entie libay. 2956 Example: Aven Mindcensor says, in part, “If an opponent would search a library, that player searches the top four cards of that library instead.” Veteran Explorer says “When Veteran Explorer dies, each player may search their library for up to two basic land cards and put them onto the battlefield. Then each player who searched their library this way shuffles it.” An opponent who searched the top four cards of their library because of Veteran Explorer’s ability would shuffle the entire library.
2957 2957
2958 701.18g If an effect offes a playe a choice to seach a zone and take additional actions with the cads found, that playe may choose to seach even if the additional actions ae illegal o impossible. 2958 701.18g If an effect offers a player a choice to search a zone and take additional actions with the cards found, that player may choose to search even if the additional actions are illegal or impossible.
2959 2959
2960 701.18h An effect may instuct a playe to seach a libay fo one o moe cads moe than once befoe instucting a playe to shuffle that libay. This is the same as a single instuction fo that playe to seach that libay fo all those cads. The playe seaches that libay only once. 2960 701.18h An effect may instruct a player to search a library for one or more cards more than once before instructing a player to shuffle that library. This is the same as a single instruction for that player to search that library for all those cards. The player searches that library only once.
2961 2961
2962 701.18i If multiple playes seach at once, each of those playes looks at the appopiate cads at the same time, then those playes decide in APNAP ode (see ule 101.4) which cad to find. 2962 701.18i If multiple players search at once, each of those players looks at the appropriate cards at the same time, then those players decide in APNAP order (see rule 101.4) which card to find.
2963 2963
2964 701.19. Shuffle 2964 701.19. Shuffle
2965 2965
2966 701.19a To shuffle a libay o a face-down pile of cads, andomize the cads within it so that no playe knows thei ode. 2966 701.19a To shuffle a library or a face-down pile of cards, randomize the cards within it so that no player knows their order.
2967 2967
2968 701.19b Some effects cause a playe to seach a libay fo a cad o cads, shuffle that libay, then put the found cad o cads in a cetain position in that libay. Even though the found cad o cads neve leave that libay, they aen’t included in the shuffle. Rathe, all the cads in that libay except those ae shuffled. Abilities that tigge when a libay is shuffled will still tigge. See also ule 401, “Libay.” 2968 701.19b Some effects cause a player to search a library for a card or cards, shuffle that library, then put the found card or cards in a certain position in that library. Even though the found card or cards never leave that library, they aren’t included in the shuffle. Rather, all the cards in that library except those are shuffled. Abilities that trigger when a library is shuffled will still trigger. See also rule 401, “Library.”
2969 2969
2970 701.19c If an effect would cause a playe to shuffle one o moe specific objects into a libay, that libay is shuffled even if none of those objects ae in the zone they’e expected to be in o an effect causes all of those objects to be moved to anothe zone o emain in thei cuent zone. 2970 701.19c If an effect would cause a player to shuffle one or more specific objects into a library, that library is shuffled even if none of those objects are in the zone they’re expected to be in or an effect causes all of those objects to be moved to another zone or remain in their current zone.
2971 Example: Guile says, in pat, “When Guile is put into a gaveyad fom anywhee, shuffle it into its owne’s libay.” It’s put into a gaveyad and its ability tigges, then a playe exiles it fom that gaveyad in esponse. When the ability esolves, the libay is shuffled. 2971 Example: Guile says, in part, “When Guile is put into a graveyard from anywhere, shuffle it into its owner’s library.” It’s put into a graveyard and its ability triggers, then a player exiles it from that graveyard in response. When the ability resolves, the library is shuffled.
2972 Example: Black Sun’s Zenith says, in pat, “Shuffle Black Sun’s Zenith into its owne’s libay.” Black Sun’s Zenith is in a gaveyad, has gained flashback (due to Recoup, pehaps), and is cast fom that gaveyad. Black Sun’s Zenith will be exiled, and its owne’s libay will be shuffled. 2972 Example: Black Sun’s Zenith says, in part, “Shuffle Black Sun’s Zenith into its owner’s library.” Black Sun’s Zenith is in a graveyard, has gained flashback (due to Recoup, perhaps), and is cast from that graveyard. Black Sun’s Zenith will be exiled, and its owner’s library will be shuffled.
2973 2973
2974 701.19d If an effect would cause a playe to shuffle a set of objects into a libay, that libay is shuffled even if thee ae no objects in that set. 2974 701.19d If an effect would cause a player to shuffle a set of objects into a library, that library is shuffled even if there are no objects in that set.
2975 Example: Loaming Shaman says “When Loaming Shaman entes the battlefield, taget playe shuffles any numbe of taget cads fom thei gaveyad into thei libay.” It entes the battlefield, its ability tigges, and no cads ae tageted. When the ability esolves, the tageted playe will still have to shuffle thei libay. 2975 Example: Loaming Shaman says “When Loaming Shaman enters the battlefield, target player shuffles any number of target cards from their graveyard into their library.” It enters the battlefield, its ability triggers, and no cards are targeted. When the ability resolves, the targeted player will still have to shuffle their library.
2976 2976
2977 701.19e If an effect causes a playe to shuffle a libay containing zeo o one cads, abilities that tigge when a libay is shuffled will still tigge. 2977 701.19e If an effect causes a player to shuffle a library containing zero or one cards, abilities that trigger when a library is shuffled will still trigger.
2978 2978
2979 701.19f If two o moe effects cause a libay to be shuffled multiple times simultaneously, abilities that tigge when that libay is shuffled will tigge that many times. 2979 701.19f If two or more effects cause a library to be shuffled multiple times simultaneously, abilities that trigger when that library is shuffled will trigger that many times.
2980 2980
2981 701.20. Tap and Untap 2981 701.20. Tap and Untap
2982 2982
2983 701.20a To tap a pemanent, tun it sideways fom an upight position. Only untapped pemanents can be tapped. 2983 701.20a To tap a permanent, turn it sideways from an upright position. Only untapped permanents can be tapped.
2984 2984
2985 701.20b To untap a pemanent, otate it back to the upight position fom a sideways position. Only tapped pemanents can be untapped. 2985 701.20b To untap a permanent, rotate it back to the upright position from a sideways position. Only tapped permanents can be untapped.
2986 2986
2987 701.21. Fateseal 2987 701.21. Fateseal
2988 2988
2989 701.21a To “fateseal N” means to look at the top N cads of an opponent’s libay, then put any numbe of them on the bottom of that libay in any ode and the est on top of that libay in any ode. 2989 701.21a To “fateseal N” means to look at the top N cards of an opponent’s library, then put any number of them on the bottom of that library in any order and the rest on top of that library in any order.
2990 2990
2991 701.22. Clash 2991 701.22. Clash
2992 2992
2993 701.22a To clash, a playe eveals the top cad of thei libay. That playe may then put that cad on the bottom of thei libay. 2993 701.22a To clash, a player reveals the top card of their library. That player may then put that card on the bottom of their library.
2994 2994
2995 701.22b “Clash with an opponent” means “Choose an opponent. You and that opponent each clash.” 2995 701.22b “Clash with an opponent” means “Choose an opponent. You and that opponent each clash.”
2996 2996
2997 701.22c Each clashing playe eveals the top cad of thei libay at the same time. Then those playes decide in APNAP ode (see ule 101.4) whee to put those cads, then those cads move at the same time. 2997 701.22c Each clashing player reveals the top card of their library at the same time. Then those players decide in APNAP order (see rule 101.4) where to put those cards, then those cards move at the same time.
2998 2998
2999 701.22d A playe wins a clash if that playe evealed a cad with a highe conveted mana cost than all othe cads evealed in that clash. 2999 701.22d A player wins a clash if that player revealed a card with a higher converted mana cost than all other cards revealed in that clash.
3000 3000
3001 701.23. Planeswalk 3001 701.23. Planeswalk
3002 3002
3003 701.23a A playe may planeswalk only duing a Planechase game. Only the plana contolle may planeswalk. See ule 901, “Planechase.” 3003 701.23a A player may planeswalk only during a Planechase game. Only the planar controller may planeswalk. See rule 901, “Planechase.”
3004 3004
3005 701.23b To planeswalk is to put each face-up plane cad and phenomenon cad on the bottom of its owne’s plana deck face down, then move the top cad of you plana deck off that plana deck and tun it face up. 3005 701.23b To planeswalk is to put each face-up plane card and phenomenon card on the bottom of its owner’s planar deck face down, then move the top card of your planar deck off that planar deck and turn it face up.
3006 3006
3007 701.23c A playe may planeswalk as the esult of the “planeswalking ability” (see ule 901.8), because the owne of a face-up plane cad o phenomenon cad leaves the game (see ule 901.10), o because a phenomenon’s tiggeed ability leaves the stack (see ule 704.5x). Abilities may also instuct a playe to planeswalk. 3007 701.23c A player may planeswalk as the result of the “planeswalking ability” (see rule 901.8), because the owner of a face-up plane card or phenomenon card leaves the game (see rule 901.10), or because a phenomenon’s triggered ability leaves the stack (see rule 704.5x). Abilities may also instruct a player to planeswalk.
3008 3008
3009 701.23d The plane cad that’s tuned face up is the plane the playe planeswalks to. The plane cad that’s tuned face down o that leaves the game is the plane the playe planeswalks away fom. The same is tue with espect to phenomena. 3009 701.23d The plane card that’s turned face up is the plane the player planeswalks to. The plane card that’s turned face down or that leaves the game is the plane the player planeswalks away from. The same is true with respect to phenomena.
3010 3010
3011 701.24. Set in Motion 3011 701.24. Set in Motion
3012 3012
3013 701.24a Only a scheme cad may be set in motion, and only duing an Achenemy game. Only the achenemy may set a scheme cad in motion. See ule 312, “Schemes,” and ule 904, “Achenemy.” 3013 701.24a Only a scheme card may be set in motion, and only during an Archenemy game. Only the archenemy may set a scheme card in motion. See rule 312, “Schemes,” and rule 904, “Archenemy.”
3014 3014
3015 701.24b To set a scheme in motion, move it off the top of you scheme deck if it’s on top of you scheme deck and tun it face up if it isn’t face up. That scheme is consideed to have been set in motion even if neithe of these actions was pefomed on it. 3015 701.24b To set a scheme in motion, move it off the top of your scheme deck if it’s on top of your scheme deck and turn it face up if it isn’t face up. That scheme is considered to have been set in motion even if neither of these actions was performed on it.
3016 3016
3017 701.24c Schemes may only be set in motion one at a time. If a playe is instucted to set multiple schemes in motion, that playe sets a scheme in motion that many times. 3017 701.24c Schemes may only be set in motion one at a time. If a player is instructed to set multiple schemes in motion, that player sets a scheme in motion that many times.
3018 3018
3019 701.25. Abandon 3019 701.25. Abandon
3020 3020
3021 701.25a Only a face-up ongoing scheme cad may be abandoned, and only duing an Achenemy game. See ule 312, “Schemes,” and ule 904, “Achenemy.” 3021 701.25a Only a face-up ongoing scheme card may be abandoned, and only during an Archenemy game. See rule 312, “Schemes,” and rule 904, “Archenemy.”
3022 3022
3023 701.25b To abandon a scheme, tun it face down and put it on the bottom of its owne’s scheme deck. 3023 701.25b To abandon a scheme, turn it face down and put it on the bottom of its owner’s scheme deck.
3024 3024
3025 701.26. Polifeate 3025 701.26. Proliferate
3026 3026
3027 701.26a To polifeate means to choose any numbe of pemanents and/o playes that have a counte, then give each one additional counte of each kind that pemanent o playe aleady has. 3027 701.26a To proliferate means to choose any number of permanents and/or players that have a counter, then give each one additional counter of each kind that permanent or player already has.
3028 3028
3029 701.26b In a Two-Headed Giant game, poison countes ae shaed by the team. If moe than one playe on a team is chosen this way, only one of those playes can be given an additional poison counte. The playe who polifeates chooses which playe that is. See ule 810, “Two-Headed Giant Vaiant.” 3029 701.26b In a Two-Headed Giant game, poison counters are shared by the team. If more than one player on a team is chosen this way, only one of those players can be given an additional poison counter. The player who proliferates chooses which player that is. See rule 810, “Two-Headed Giant Variant.”
3030 3030
3031 701.27. Tansfom 3031 701.27. Transform
3032 3032
3033 701.27a To tansfom a pemanent, tun it ove so that its othe face is up. Only pemanents epesented by double-faced cads can tansfom. (See ule 711, “Double-Faced Cads.”) 3033 701.27a To transform a permanent, turn it over so that its other face is up. Only permanents represented by double-faced cards can transform. (See rule 711, “Double-Faced Cards.”)
3034 3034
3035 701.27b Although tansfoming a pemanent uses the same physical action as tuning a pemanent face up o face down, they ae diffeent game actions. Abilities that tigge when a pemanent is tuned face down won’t tigge when that pemanent tansfoms, and so on. 3035 701.27b Although transforming a permanent uses the same physical action as turning a permanent face up or face down, they are different game actions. Abilities that trigger when a permanent is turned face down won’t trigger when that permanent transforms, and so on.
3036 3036
3037 701.27c If a spell o ability instucts a playe to tansfom a pemanent that isn’t epesented by a double-faced cad, nothing happens. 3037 701.27c If a spell or ability instructs a player to transform a permanent that isn’t represented by a double-faced card, nothing happens.
3038 3038
3039 701.27d If a spell o ability instucts a playe to tansfom a pemanent, and the face that pemanent would tansfom into is epesented by an instant o socey cad face, nothing happens. 3039 701.27d If a spell or ability instructs a player to transform a permanent, and the face that permanent would transform into is represented by an instant or sorcery card face, nothing happens.
3040 3040
3041 701.27e Some tiggeed abilities tigge when an object “tansfoms into” an object with a specified chaacteistic. Such an ability tigges if the object tansfoms and has the specified chaacteistic immediately afte it tansfoms. 3041 701.27e Some triggered abilities trigger when an object “transforms into” an object with a specified characteristic. Such an ability triggers if the object transforms and has the specified characteristic immediately after it transforms.
3042 3042
3043 701.27f If an activated o tiggeed ability of a pemanent that isn’t a delayed tiggeed ability of that pemanent ties to tansfom it, the pemanent tansfoms only if it hasn’t tansfomed since the ability was put onto the stack. If a delayed tiggeed ability of a pemanent ties to tansfom that pemanent, the pemanent tansfoms only if it hasn’t tansfomed since that delayed tiggeed ability was ceated. In eithe case, if the pemanent has aleady tansfomed, the instuction to tansfom is ignoed. 3043 701.27f If an activated or triggered ability of a permanent that isn’t a delayed triggered ability of that permanent tries to transform it, the permanent transforms only if it hasn’t transformed since the ability was put onto the stack. If a delayed triggered ability of a permanent tries to transform that permanent, the permanent transforms only if it hasn’t transformed since that delayed triggered ability was created. In either case, if the permanent has already transformed, the instruction to transform is ignored.
3044 3044
3045 701.28. Detain 3045 701.28. Detain
3046 3046
3047 701.28a Cetain spells and abilities can detain a pemanent. Until the next tun of the contolle of that spell o ability, that pemanent can’t attack o block and its activated abilities can’t be activated. 3047 701.28a Certain spells and abilities can detain a permanent. Until the next turn of the controller of that spell or ability, that permanent can’t attack or block and its activated abilities can’t be activated.
3048 3048
3049 701.29. Populate 3049 701.29. Populate
3050 3050
3051 701.29a To populate means to choose a ceatue token you contol and ceate a token that’s a copy of that ceatue token. 3051 701.29a To populate means to choose a creature token you control and create a token that’s a copy of that creature token.
3052 3052
3053 701.29b If you contol no ceatue tokens when instucted to populate, you won’t ceate a token. 3053 701.29b If you control no creature tokens when instructed to populate, you won’t create a token.
3054 3054
3055 701.30. Monstosity 3055 701.30. Monstrosity
3056 3056
3057 701.30a “Monstosity N” means “If this pemanent isn’t monstous, put N +1/+1 countes on it and it becomes monstous.” 3057 701.30a “Monstrosity N” means “If this permanent isn’t monstrous, put N +1/+1 counters on it and it becomes monstrous.”
3058 3058
3059 701.30b Monstous is a designation that has no ules meaning othe than to act as a make that the monstosity action and othe spells and abilities can identify. Only pemanents can be o become monstous. Once a pemanent becomes monstous, it stays monstous until it leaves the battlefield. Monstous is neithe an ability no pat of the pemanent’s copiable values. 3059 701.30b Monstrous is a designation that has no rules meaning other than to act as a marker that the monstrosity action and other spells and abilities can identify. Only permanents can be or become monstrous. Once a permanent becomes monstrous, it stays monstrous until it leaves the battlefield. Monstrous is neither an ability nor part of the permanent’s copiable values.
3060 3060
3061 701.30c If a pemanent’s ability instucts a playe to “monstosity X,” othe abilities of that pemanent may also efe to X. The value of X in those abilities is equal to the value of X as that pemanent became monstous. 3061 701.30c If a permanent’s ability instructs a player to “monstrosity X,” other abilities of that permanent may also refer to X. The value of X in those abilities is equal to the value of X as that permanent became monstrous.
3062 3062
3063 701.31. Vote 3063 701.31. Vote
3064 3064
3065 701.31a Some spells and abilities instuct playes to vote fo one choice fom a list of options to detemine some aspect of the effect of that spell o ability. To vote, each playe, stating with a specified playe and poceeding in tun ode, chooses one of those choices. 3065 701.31a Some spells and abilities instruct players to vote for one choice from a list of options to determine some aspect of the effect of that spell or ability. To vote, each player, starting with a specified player and proceeding in turn order, chooses one of those choices.
3066 3066
3067 701.31b The listed choices may be objects, wods with no ules meaning that ae each connected to a diffeent effect, o othe vaiables elevant to the esolution of the spell o ability. 3067 701.31b The listed choices may be objects, words with no rules meaning that are each connected to a different effect, or other variables relevant to the resolution of the spell or ability.
3068 3068
3069 701.31c If the text of a spell o ability efes to “voting,” it efes only to an actual vote, not to any spell o ability that involves the playes making choices o decisions without using the wod “vote.” 3069 701.31c If the text of a spell or ability refers to “voting,” it refers only to an actual vote, not to any spell or ability that involves the players making choices or decisions without using the word “vote.”
3070 3070
3071 701.31d If an effect gives a playe multiple votes, those votes all happen at the same time the playe would othewise have voted. 3071 701.31d If an effect gives a player multiple votes, those votes all happen at the same time the player would otherwise have voted.
3072 3072
3073 701.32. Bolste 3073 701.32. Bolster
3074 3074
3075 701.32a “Bolste N” means “Choose a ceatue you contol with the least toughness o tied fo least toughness among ceatues you contol. Put N +1/+1 countes on that ceatue.” 3075 701.32a “Bolster N” means “Choose a creature you control with the least toughness or tied for least toughness among creatures you control. Put N +1/+1 counters on that creature.”
3076 3076
3077 701.33. Manifest 3077 701.33. Manifest
3078 3078
3079 701.33a To manifest a cad, tun it face down. It becomes a 2/2 face-down ceatue cad with no text, no name, no subtypes, and no mana cost. Put that cad onto the battlefield face down. That pemanent is a manifested pemanent as long as it emains face down. The effect defining its chaacteistics woks while the cad is face down and ends when it’s tuned face up. 3079 701.33a To manifest a card, turn it face down. It becomes a 2/2 face-down creature card with no text, no name, no subtypes, and no mana cost. Put that card onto the battlefield face down. That permanent is a manifested permanent as long as it remains face down. The effect defining its characteristics works while the card is face down and ends when it’s turned face up.
3080 3080
3081 701.33b Any time you have pioity, you may tun a manifested pemanent you contol face up. This is a special action that doesn’t use the stack (see ule 116.2b). To do this, show all playes that the cad epesenting that pemanent is a ceatue cad and what that cad’s mana cost is, pay that cost, then tun the pemanent face up. The effect defining its chaacteistics while it was face down ends, and it egains its nomal chaacteistics. (If the cad epesenting that pemanent isn’t a ceatue cad o it doesn’t have a mana cost, it can’t be tuned face up this way.) 3081 701.33b Any time you have priority, you may turn a manifested permanent you control face up. This is a special action that doesn’t use the stack (see rule 116.2b). To do this, show all players that the card representing that permanent is a creature card and what that card’s mana cost is, pay that cost, then turn the permanent face up. The effect defining its characteristics while it was face down ends, and it regains its normal characteristics. (If the card representing that permanent isn’t a creature card or it doesn’t have a mana cost, it can’t be turned face up this way.)
3082 3082
3083 701.33c If a cad with moph is manifested, its contolle may tun that cad face up using eithe the pocedue descibed in ule 702.36e to tun a face-down pemanent with moph face up o the pocedue descibed above to tun a manifested pemanent face up. 3083 701.33c If a card with morph is manifested, its controller may turn that card face up using either the procedure described in rule 702.36e to turn a face-down permanent with morph face up or the procedure described above to turn a manifested permanent face up.
3084 3084
3085 701.33d If an effect instucts a playe to manifest multiple cads fom thei libay, those cads ae manifested one at a time. 3085 701.33d If an effect instructs a player to manifest multiple cards from their library, those cards are manifested one at a time.
3086 3086
3087 701.33e If an effect instucts a playe to manifest a cad and a ule o effect pohibits the face-down object fom enteing the battlefield, that cad isn’t manifested. Its chaacteistics emain unmodified and it emains in its pevious zone. If it was face up, it emains face up. 3087 701.33e If an effect instructs a player to manifest a card and a rule or effect prohibits the face-down object from entering the battlefield, that card isn’t manifested. Its characteristics remain unmodified and it remains in its previous zone. If it was face up, it remains face up.
3088 3088
3089 701.33f If a manifested pemanent that’s epesented by an instant o socey cad would tun face up, its contolle eveals it and leaves it face down. Abilities that tigge wheneve a pemanent is tuned face up won’t tigge. 3089 701.33f If a manifested permanent that’s represented by an instant or sorcery card would turn face up, its controller reveals it and leaves it face down. Abilities that trigger whenever a permanent is turned face up won’t trigger.
3090 3090
3091 701.33g See ule 707, “Face-Down Spells and Pemanents,” fo moe infomation. 3091 701.33g See rule 707, “Face-Down Spells and Permanents,” for more information.
3092 3092
3093 701.34. Suppot 3093 701.34. Support
3094 3094
3095 701.34a “Suppot N” on a pemanent means “Put a +1/+1 counte on each of up to N othe taget ceatues.” “Suppot N” on an instant o socey spell means “Put a +1/+1 counte on each of up to N taget ceatues.” 3095 701.34a “Support N” on a permanent means “Put a +1/+1 counter on each of up to N other target creatures.” “Support N” on an instant or sorcery spell means “Put a +1/+1 counter on each of up to N target creatures.”
3096 3096
3097 701.35. Investigate 3097 701.35. Investigate
3098 3098
3099 701.35a “Investigate” means “Ceate a cololess Clue atifact token with ‘{2}, Sacifice this atifact: Daw a cad.’” 3099 701.35a “Investigate” means “Create a colorless Clue artifact token with ‘{2}, Sacrifice this artifact: Draw a card.’”
3100 3100
3101 701.36. Meld 3101 701.36. Meld
3102 3102
3103 701.36a Meld is a keywod action that appeas in an ability on one cad in a meld pai. (See ule 712, “Meld Cads.”) To meld the two cads in a meld pai, put them onto the battlefield with thei back faces up and combined. The esulting pemanent is a single object epesented by two cads. 3103 701.36a Meld is a keyword action that appears in an ability on one card in a meld pair. (See rule 712, “Meld Cards.”) To meld the two cards in a meld pair, put them onto the battlefield with their back faces up and combined. The resulting permanent is a single object represented by two cards.
3104 3104
3105 701.36b Only two cads belonging to the same meld pai can be melded. Tokens, cads that aen’t meld cads, o meld cads that don’t fom a meld pai can’t be melded. 3105 701.36b Only two cards belonging to the same meld pair can be melded. Tokens, cards that aren’t meld cards, or meld cards that don’t form a meld pair can’t be melded.
3106 3106
3107 701.36c If an effect instucts a playe to meld cads that can’t be melded, they stay in thei cuent zone. 3107 701.36c If an effect instructs a player to meld cards that can’t be melded, they stay in their current zone.
3108 Example: A playe owns and contols Midnight Scavenges and a token that’s a copy of Gaf Rats. At the beginning of combat, both ae exiled but can’t be melded. Midnight Scavenges emains exiled and the exiled token ceases to exist. 3108 Example: A player owns and controls Midnight Scavengers and a token that’s a copy of Graf Rats. At the beginning of combat, both are exiled but can’t be melded. Midnight Scavengers remains exiled and the exiled token ceases to exist.
3109 3109
3110 701.37. Goad 3110 701.37. Goad
3111 3111
3112 701.37a Cetain spells and abilities can goad a ceatue. Until the next tun of the contolle of that spell o ability, that ceatue attacks each combat if able and attacks a playe othe than that playe if able. 3112 701.37a Certain spells and abilities can goad a creature. Until the next turn of the controller of that spell or ability, that creature attacks each combat if able and attacks a player other than that player if able.
3113 3113
3114 701.37b A static ability may state that a ceatue “is goaded.” That ceatue attacks each combat if able and attacks a playe othe than the contolle of the pemanent with that static ability if able. 3114 701.37b A static ability may state that a creature “is goaded.” That creature attacks each combat if able and attacks a player other than the controller of the permanent with that static ability if able.
3115 3115
3116 701.37c Once a playe has goaded a ceatue, the same playe goading it again has no effect. It doesn’t ceate additional combat equiements. 3116 701.37c Once a player has goaded a creature, the same player goading it again has no effect. It doesn’t create additional combat requirements.
3117 3117
3118 701.38. Exet 3118 701.38. Exert
3119 3119
3120 701.38a To exet a pemanent, you choose to have it not untap duing you next untap step. 3120 701.38a To exert a permanent, you choose to have it not untap during your next untap step.
3121 3121
3122 701.38b A pemanent can be exeted even if it’s not tapped o has aleady been exeted in a tun. If you exet a pemanent moe than once befoe you next untap step, each effect causing it not to untap expies duing the same untap step. 3122 701.38b A permanent can be exerted even if it’s not tapped or has already been exerted in a turn. If you exert a permanent more than once before your next untap step, each effect causing it not to untap expires during the same untap step.
3123 3123
3124 701.38c An object that isn’t on the battlefield can’t be exeted. 3124 701.38c An object that isn’t on the battlefield can’t be exerted.
3125 3125
3126 701.38d “You may exet [this ceatue] as it attacks” is an optional cost to attack (see ule 508.1g). Some objects with this static ability have a tiggeed ability that tigges “when you do” pinted in the same paagaph. These abilities ae linked. (See ule 607.2g.) 3126 701.38d “You may exert [this creature] as it attacks” is an optional cost to attack (see rule 508.1g). Some objects with this static ability have a triggered ability that triggers “when you do” printed in the same paragraph. These abilities are linked. (See rule 607.2g.)
3127 3127
3128 701.39. Exploe 3128 701.39. Explore
3129 3129
3130 701.39a Cetain abilities instuct a pemanent to exploe. To do so, that pemanent’s contolle eveals the top cad of thei libay. If a land cad is evealed this way, that playe puts that cad into thei hand. Othewise, that playe puts a +1/+1 counte on the exploing pemanent and may put the evealed cad into thei gaveyad. 3130 701.39a Certain abilities instruct a permanent to explore. To do so, that permanent’s controller reveals the top card of their library. If a land card is revealed this way, that player puts that card into their hand. Otherwise, that player puts a +1/+1 counter on the exploring permanent and may put the revealed card into their graveyard.
3131 3131
3132 701.39b A pemanent “exploes” afte the pocess descibed in ule 701.39a is complete, even if some o all of those actions wee impossible. 3132 701.39b A permanent “explores” after the process described in rule 701.39a is complete, even if some or all of those actions were impossible.
3133 3133
3134 701.39c If a pemanent changes zones befoe an effect causes it to exploe, its last known infomation is used to detemine which object exploed and who contolled it. 3134 701.39c If a permanent changes zones before an effect causes it to explore, its last known information is used to determine which object explored and who controlled it.
3135 3135
3136 701.40. Assemble 3136 701.40. Assemble
3137 3137
3138 701.40a Assemble is a keywod action in the Unstable set that puts Contaptions onto the battlefield. Outside of silve-bodeed cads, only one cad (Steamflogge Boss) efes to assembling a Contaption. Cads and mechanics fom the Unstable set aen’t included in these ules. See the Unstable FAQ fo moe infomation. 3138 701.40a Assemble is a keyword action in the Unstable set that puts Contraptions onto the battlefield. Outside of silver-bordered cards, only one card (Steamflogger Boss) refers to assembling a Contraption. Cards and mechanics from the Unstable set aren’t included in these rules. See the Unstable FAQ for more information.
3139 3139
3140 701.41. Suveil 3140 701.41. Surveil
3141 3141
3142 701.41a To “suveil N” means to look at the top N cads of you libay, then put any numbe of them into you gaveyad and the est on top of you libay in any ode. 3142 701.41a To “surveil N” means to look at the top N cards of your library, then put any number of them into your graveyard and the rest on top of your library in any order.
3143 3143
3144 701.41b If an effect allows you to look at additional cads while you suveil, those cads ae included among the cads you may put into you gaveyad and on top of you libay in any ode. 3144 701.41b If an effect allows you to look at additional cards while you surveil, those cards are included among the cards you may put into your graveyard and on top of your library in any order.
3145 3145
3146 701.42. Adapt 3146 701.42. Adapt
3147 3147
3148 701.42a “Adapt N” means “If this pemanent has no +1/+1 countes on it, put N +1/+1 countes on it.” 3148 701.42a “Adapt N” means “If this permanent has no +1/+1 counters on it, put N +1/+1 counters on it.”
3149 3149
3150 701.43. Amass 3150 701.43. Amass
3151 3151
3152 701.43a To amass N means “If you don’t contol an Amy ceatue, ceate a 0/0 black Zombie Amy ceatue token. Choose an Amy ceatue you contol. Put N +1/+1 countes on that ceatue.” 3152 701.43a To amass N means “If you don’t control an Army creature, create a 0/0 black Zombie Army creature token. Choose an Army creature you control. Put N +1/+1 counters on that creature.”
3153 3153
3154 701.43b The phase “the [subtype] you amassed” efes to the ceatue you chose, whethe o not it eceived countes. 3154 701.43b The phrase “the [subtype] you amassed” refers to the creature you chose, whether or not it received counters.
3155 3155
3156 702. Keywod Abilities 3156 702. Keyword Abilities
3157 3157
3158 702.1. Most abilities descibe exactly what they do in the cad’s ules text. Some, though, ae vey common o would equie too much space to define on the cad. In these cases, the object lists only the name of the ability as a “keywod”; sometimes eminde text summaizes the game ule. 3158 702.1. Most abilities describe exactly what they do in the card’s rules text. Some, though, are very common or would require too much space to define on the card. In these cases, the object lists only the name of the ability as a “keyword”; sometimes reminder text summarizes the game rule.
3159 3159
3160 702.1a If an effect efes to a “[keywod ability] cost,” it efes only to the vaiable costs fo that keywod. 3160 702.1a If an effect refers to a “[keyword ability] cost,” it refers only to the variable costs for that keyword.
3161 Example: Vaolz, the Sca-Stiped has an ability that says “Each ceatue cad in you gaveyad has scavenge. The scavenge cost is equal to its mana cost.” A ceatue cad’s scavenge cost is an amount of mana equal to its mana cost, and the activation cost of the scavenge ability is that amount of mana plus “Exile this cad fom you gaveyad.” 3161 Example: Varolz, the Scar-Striped has an ability that says “Each creature card in your graveyard has scavenge. The scavenge cost is equal to its mana cost.” A creature card’s scavenge cost is an amount of mana equal to its mana cost, and the activation cost of the scavenge ability is that amount of mana plus “Exile this card from your graveyard.”
3162 3162
3163 702.1b An effect that gants an object a keywod ability may define a vaiable in that ability based on chaacteistics of that object o othe infomation about the game state. Fo these abilities, the value of that vaiable is constantly eevaluated. 3163 702.1b An effect that grants an object a keyword ability may define a variable in that ability based on characteristics of that object or other information about the game state. For these abilities, the value of that variable is constantly reevaluated.
3164 Example: Volcano Hellion has the ability “Volcano Hellion has echo {X}, whee X is you life total.” If you life total is 10 when Volcano Hellion’s echo ability tigges but 5 when it esolves, the echo cost to pay is {5}. 3164 Example: Volcano Hellion has the ability “Volcano Hellion has echo {X}, where X is your life total.” If your life total is 10 when Volcano Hellion’s echo ability triggers but 5 when it resolves, the echo cost to pay is {5}.
3165 Example: Fie//Ice is a split cad whose halves have the mana costs {1}{R} and {1}{U}. Past in Flames eads “Each instant and socey cad in you gaveyad gains flashback until end of tun. The flashback cost is equal to its mana cost.” Fie//Ice has “Flashback {2}{U}{R}” while it is in you gaveyad, but if you choose to cast Fie, the esulting spell has “Flashback {1}{R}.” 3165 Example: Fire//Ice is a split card whose halves have the mana costs {1}{R} and {1}{U}. Past in Flames reads “Each instant and sorcery card in your graveyard gains flashback until end of turn. The flashback cost is equal to its mana cost.” Fire//Ice has “Flashback {2}{U}{R}” while it is in your graveyard, but if you choose to cast Fire, the resulting spell has “Flashback {1}{R}.”
3166 3166
3167 702.1c An effect may state that “the same is tue fo” a list of keywod abilities. If one of those keywod abilities has vaiants o vaiables and the effect gants that keywod to one o moe objects and/o playes, it gants each appopiate vaiant and vaiable of that keywod. 3167 702.1c An effect may state that “the same is true for” a list of keyword abilities. If one of those keyword abilities has variants or variables and the effect grants that keyword to one or more objects and/or players, it grants each appropriate variant and variable of that keyword.
3168 Example: Conceted Effot is an enchantment that eads “At the beginning of each upkeep, ceatues you contol gain flying until end of tun if a ceatue you contol has flying. The same is tue fo fea, fist stike, double stike, landwalk, potection, tample, and vigilance.” As that tiggeed ability esolves, each landwalk and potection ability fom among ceatues you contol is ganted to each ceatue you contol. 3168 Example: Concerted Effort is an enchantment that reads “At the beginning of each upkeep, creatures you control gain flying until end of turn if a creature you control has flying. The same is true for fear, first strike, double strike, landwalk, protection, trample, and vigilance.” As that triggered ability resolves, each landwalk and protection ability from among creatures you control is granted to each creature you control.
3169 3169
3170 702.1d An effect may efe to an object “with [keywod ability]” o “that has [keywod ability].” This means the same thing as an object “with a [keywod ability] ability” o an object “that has a [keywod ability] ability.” 3170 702.1d An effect may refer to an object “with [keyword ability]” or “that has [keyword ability].” This means the same thing as an object “with a [keyword ability] ability” or an object “that has a [keyword ability] ability.”
3171 3171
3172 702.2. Deathtouch 3172 702.2. Deathtouch
3173 3173
3174 702.2a Deathtouch is a static ability. 3174 702.2a Deathtouch is a static ability.
3175 3175
3176 702.2b A ceatue with toughness geate than 0 that’s been dealt damage by a souce with deathtouch since the last time state-based actions wee checked is destoyed as a state-based action. See ule 704. 3176 702.2b A creature with toughness greater than 0 that’s been dealt damage by a source with deathtouch since the last time state-based actions were checked is destroyed as a state-based action. See rule 704.
3177 3177
3178 702.2c Any nonzeo amount of combat damage assigned to a ceatue by a souce with deathtouch is consideed to be lethal damage fo the puposes of detemining if a poposed combat damage assignment is valid, egadless of that ceatue’s toughness. See ules 510.1c–d. 3178 702.2c Any nonzero amount of combat damage assigned to a creature by a source with deathtouch is considered to be lethal damage for the purposes of determining if a proposed combat damage assignment is valid, regardless of that creature’s toughness. See rules 510.1c–d.
3179 3179
3180 702.2d The deathtouch ules function no matte what zone an object with deathtouch deals damage fom. 3180 702.2d The deathtouch rules function no matter what zone an object with deathtouch deals damage from.
3181 3181
3182 702.2e If an object changes zones befoe an effect causes it to deal damage, its last known infomation is used to detemine whethe it had deathtouch. 3182 702.2e If an object changes zones before an effect causes it to deal damage, its last known information is used to determine whether it had deathtouch.
3183 3183
3184 702.2f Multiple instances of deathtouch on the same object ae edundant. 3184 702.2f Multiple instances of deathtouch on the same object are redundant.
3185 3185
3186 702.3. Defende 3186 702.3. Defender
3187 3187
3188 702.3a Defende is a static ability. 3188 702.3a Defender is a static ability.
3189 3189
3190 702.3b A ceatue with defende can’t attack. 3190 702.3b A creature with defender can’t attack.
3191 3191
3192 702.3c Multiple instances of defende on the same ceatue ae edundant. 3192 702.3c Multiple instances of defender on the same creature are redundant.
3193 3193
3194 702.4. Double Stike 3194 702.4. Double Strike
3195 3195
3196 702.4a Double stike is a static ability that modifies the ules fo the combat damage step. (See ule 510, “Combat Damage Step.”) 3196 702.4a Double strike is a static ability that modifies the rules for the combat damage step. (See rule 510, “Combat Damage Step.”)
3197 3197
3198 702.4b If at least one attacking o blocking ceatue has fist stike (see ule 702.7) o double stike as the combat damage step begins, the only ceatues that assign combat damage in that step ae those with fist stike o double stike. Afte that step, instead of poceeding to the end of combat step, the phase gets a second combat damage step. The only ceatues that assign combat damage in that step ae the emaining attackes and blockes that had neithe fist stike no double stike as the fist combat damage step began, as well as the emaining attackes and blockes that cuently have double stike. Afte that step, the phase poceeds to the end of combat step. 3198 702.4b If at least one attacking or blocking creature has first strike (see rule 702.7) or double strike as the combat damage step begins, the only creatures that assign combat damage in that step are those with first strike or double strike. After that step, instead of proceeding to the end of combat step, the phase gets a second combat damage step. The only creatures that assign combat damage in that step are the remaining attackers and blockers that had neither first strike nor double strike as the first combat damage step began, as well as the remaining attackers and blockers that currently have double strike. After that step, the phase proceeds to the end of combat step.
3199 3199
3200 702.4c Removing double stike fom a ceatue duing the fist combat damage step will stop it fom assigning combat damage in the second combat damage step. 3200 702.4c Removing double strike from a creature during the first combat damage step will stop it from assigning combat damage in the second combat damage step.
3201 3201
3202 702.4d Giving double stike to a ceatue with fist stike afte it has aleady dealt combat damage in the fist combat damage step will allow the ceatue to assign combat damage in the second combat damage step. 3202 702.4d Giving double strike to a creature with first strike after it has already dealt combat damage in the first combat damage step will allow the creature to assign combat damage in the second combat damage step.
3203 3203
3204 702.4e Multiple instances of double stike on the same ceatue ae edundant. 3204 702.4e Multiple instances of double strike on the same creature are redundant.
3205 3205
3206 702.5. Enchant 3206 702.5. Enchant
3207 3207
3208 702.5a Enchant is a static ability, witten “Enchant [object o playe].” The enchant ability esticts what an Aua spell can taget and what an Aua can enchant. 3208 702.5a Enchant is a static ability, written “Enchant [object or player].” The enchant ability restricts what an Aura spell can target and what an Aura can enchant.
3209 3209
3210 702.5b Fo moe infomation about Auas, see ule 303, “Enchantments.” 3210 702.5b For more information about Auras, see rule 303, “Enchantments.”
3211 3211
3212 702.5c If an Aua has multiple instances of enchant, all of them apply. The Aua’s taget must follow the estictions fom all the instances of enchant. The Aua can enchant only objects o playes that match all of its enchant abilities. 3212 702.5c If an Aura has multiple instances of enchant, all of them apply. The Aura’s target must follow the restrictions from all the instances of enchant. The Aura can enchant only objects or players that match all of its enchant abilities.
3213 3213
3214 702.5d Auas that can enchant a playe can taget and be attached to playes. Such Auas can’t taget pemanents and can’t be attached to pemanents. 3214 702.5d Auras that can enchant a player can target and be attached to players. Such Auras can’t target permanents and can’t be attached to permanents.
3215 3215
3216 702.6. Equip 3216 702.6. Equip
3217 3217
3218 702.6a Equip is an activated ability of Equipment cads. “Equip [cost]” means “[Cost]: Attach this pemanent to taget ceatue you contol. Activate this ability only any time you could cast a socey.” 3218 702.6a Equip is an activated ability of Equipment cards. “Equip [cost]” means “[Cost]: Attach this permanent to target creature you control. Activate this ability only any time you could cast a sorcery.”
3219 3219
3220 702.6b Fo moe infomation about Equipment, see ule 301, “Atifacts.” 3220 702.6b For more information about Equipment, see rule 301, “Artifacts.”
3221 3221
3222 702.6c “Equip [quality] ceatue” is a vaiant of the equip ability. “Equip [quality] [cost]” means “[Cost]: Attach this pemanent to taget [quality] ceatue you contol. Activate this ability only any time you could cast a socey.” This ability doesn’t estict what the Equipment may be attached to. 3222 702.6c “Equip [quality] creature” is a variant of the equip ability. “Equip [quality] [cost]” means “[Cost]: Attach this permanent to target [quality] creature you control. Activate this ability only any time you could cast a sorcery.” This ability doesn’t restrict what the Equipment may be attached to.
3223 3223
3224 702.6d An “equip [quality] ceatue” ability is an equip ability, and an “equip [quality] ceatue” cost is an equip cost. Any effect that modifies how o whethe a playe may activate an equip ability of an object affects “equip [quality] ceatue” abilities of that object. Any effect that inceases o educes an equip cost will incease o educe a “equip [quality] ceatue” cost. 3224 702.6d An “equip [quality] creature” ability is an equip ability, and an “equip [quality] creature” cost is an equip cost. Any effect that modifies how or whether a player may activate an equip ability of an object affects “equip [quality] creature” abilities of that object. Any effect that increases or reduces an equip cost will increase or reduce a “equip [quality] creature” cost.
3225 3225
3226 702.6e If a pemanent has multiple equip abilities, any of its equip abilities may be activated. 3226 702.6e If a permanent has multiple equip abilities, any of its equip abilities may be activated.
3227 3227
3228 702.7. Fist Stike 3228 702.7. First Strike
3229 3229
3230 702.7a Fist stike is a static ability that modifies the ules fo the combat damage step. (See ule 510, “Combat Damage Step.”) 3230 702.7a First strike is a static ability that modifies the rules for the combat damage step. (See rule 510, “Combat Damage Step.”)
3231 3231
3232 702.7b If at least one attacking o blocking ceatue has fist stike o double stike (see ule 702.4) as the combat damage step begins, the only ceatues that assign combat damage in that step ae those with fist stike o double stike. Afte that step, instead of poceeding to the end of combat step, the phase gets a second combat damage step. The only ceatues that assign combat damage in that step ae the emaining attackes and blockes that had neithe fist stike no double stike as the fist combat damage step began, as well as the emaining attackes and blockes that cuently have double stike. Afte that step, the phase poceeds to the end of combat step. 3232 702.7b If at least one attacking or blocking creature has first strike or double strike (see rule 702.4) as the combat damage step begins, the only creatures that assign combat damage in that step are those with first strike or double strike. After that step, instead of proceeding to the end of combat step, the phase gets a second combat damage step. The only creatures that assign combat damage in that step are the remaining attackers and blockers that had neither first strike nor double strike as the first combat damage step began, as well as the remaining attackers and blockers that currently have double strike. After that step, the phase proceeds to the end of combat step.
3233 3233
3234 702.7c Giving fist stike to a ceatue without it afte combat damage has aleady been dealt in the fist combat damage step won’t peclude that ceatue fom assigning combat damage in the second combat damage step. Removing fist stike fom a ceatue afte it has aleady dealt combat damage in the fist combat damage step won’t allow it to also assign combat damage in the second combat damage step (unless the ceatue has double stike). 3234 702.7c Giving first strike to a creature without it after combat damage has already been dealt in the first combat damage step won’t preclude that creature from assigning combat damage in the second combat damage step. Removing first strike from a creature after it has already dealt combat damage in the first combat damage step won’t allow it to also assign combat damage in the second combat damage step (unless the creature has double strike).
3235 3235
3236 702.7d Multiple instances of fist stike on the same ceatue ae edundant. 3236 702.7d Multiple instances of first strike on the same creature are redundant.
3237 3237
3238 702.8. Flash 3238 702.8. Flash
3239 3239
3240 702.8a Flash is a static ability that functions in any zone fom which you could play the cad it’s on. “Flash” means “You may play this cad any time you could cast an instant.” 3240 702.8a Flash is a static ability that functions in any zone from which you could play the card it’s on. “Flash” means “You may play this card any time you could cast an instant.”
3241 3241
3242 702.8b Multiple instances of flash on the same object ae edundant. 3242 702.8b Multiple instances of flash on the same object are redundant.
3243 3243
3244 702.9. Flying 3244 702.9. Flying
3245 3245
3246 702.9a Flying is an evasion ability. 3246 702.9a Flying is an evasion ability.
3247 3247
3248 702.9b A ceatue with flying can’t be blocked except by ceatues with flying and/o each. A ceatue with flying can block a ceatue with o without flying. (See ule 509, “Declae Blockes Step,” and ule 702.17, “Reach.”) 3248 702.9b A creature with flying can’t be blocked except by creatures with flying and/or reach. A creature with flying can block a creature with or without flying. (See rule 509, “Declare Blockers Step,” and rule 702.17, “Reach.”)
3249 3249
3250 702.9c Multiple instances of flying on the same ceatue ae edundant. 3250 702.9c Multiple instances of flying on the same creature are redundant.
3251 3251
3252 702.10. Haste 3252 702.10. Haste
3253 3253
3254 702.10a Haste is a static ability. 3254 702.10a Haste is a static ability.
3255 3255
3256 702.10b If a ceatue has haste, it can attack even if it hasn’t been contolled by its contolle continuously since thei most ecent tun began. (See ule 302.6.) 3256 702.10b If a creature has haste, it can attack even if it hasn’t been controlled by its controller continuously since their most recent turn began. (See rule 302.6.)
3257 3257
3258 702.10c If a ceatue has haste, its contolle can activate its activated abilities whose cost includes the tap symbol o the untap symbol even if that ceatue hasn’t been contolled by that playe continuously since thei most ecent tun began. (See ule 302.6.) 3258 702.10c If a creature has haste, its controller can activate its activated abilities whose cost includes the tap symbol or the untap symbol even if that creature hasn’t been controlled by that player continuously since their most recent turn began. (See rule 302.6.)
3259 3259
3260 702.10d Multiple instances of haste on the same ceatue ae edundant. 3260 702.10d Multiple instances of haste on the same creature are redundant.
3261 3261
3262 702.11. Hexpoof 3262 702.11. Hexproof
3263 3263
3264 702.11a Hexpoof is a static ability. 3264 702.11a Hexproof is a static ability.
3265 3265
3266 702.11b “Hexpoof” on a pemanent means “This pemanent can’t be the taget of spells o abilities you opponents contol.” 3266 702.11b “Hexproof” on a permanent means “This permanent can’t be the target of spells or abilities your opponents control.”
3267 3267
3268 702.11c “Hexpoof” on a playe means “You can’t be the taget of spells o abilities you opponents contol.” 3268 702.11c “Hexproof” on a player means “You can’t be the target of spells or abilities your opponents control.”
3269 3269
3270 702.11d “Hexpoof fom [quality]” is a vaiant of the hexpoof ability. “Hexpoof fom [quality]” on a pemanent means “This pemanent can’t be the taget of [quality] spells you opponents contol o abilities you opponents contol fom [quality] souces.” A “hexpoof fom [quality]” ability is a hexpoof ability. 3270 702.11d “Hexproof from [quality]” is a variant of the hexproof ability. “Hexproof from [quality]” on a permanent means “This permanent can’t be the target of [quality] spells your opponents control or abilities your opponents control from [quality] sources.” A “hexproof from [quality]” ability is a hexproof ability.
3271 3271
3272 702.11e Any effect that causes an object to lose hexpoof will cause an object to lose all “hexpoof fom [quality]” abilities. Any effect that allows a playe to choose a ceatue with hexpoof as a taget as though it didn’t have hexpoof will allow a playe to choose a ceatue with a “hexpoof fom [quality]” ability. Any effect that looks fo a cad with hexpoof will find a cad with a “hexpoof fom [quality]” ability. 3272 702.11e Any effect that causes an object to lose hexproof will cause an object to lose all “hexproof from [quality]” abilities. Any effect that allows a player to choose a creature with hexproof as a target as though it didn’t have hexproof will allow a player to choose a creature with a “hexproof from [quality]” ability. Any effect that looks for a card with hexproof will find a card with a “hexproof from [quality]” ability.
3273 3273
3274 702.11f “Hexpoof fom [quality A] and fom [quality B]” is shothand fo “hexpoof fom [quality A]” and “hexpoof fom [quality B]”; it behaves as two sepaate hexpoof abilities. If an effect causes an object with such an ability to lose hexpoof fom [quality A], fo example, that object would still have hexpoof fom [quality B]. 3274 702.11f “Hexproof from [quality A] and from [quality B]” is shorthand for “hexproof from [quality A]” and “hexproof from [quality B]”; it behaves as two separate hexproof abilities. If an effect causes an object with such an ability to lose hexproof from [quality A], for example, that object would still have hexproof from [quality B].
3275 3275
3276 702.11g Multiple instances of the same hexpoof ability on the same pemanent o playe ae edundant. 3276 702.11g Multiple instances of the same hexproof ability on the same permanent or player are redundant.
3277 3277
3278 702.12. Indestuctible 3278 702.12. Indestructible
3279 3279
3280 702.12a Indestuctible is a static ability. 3280 702.12a Indestructible is a static ability.
3281 3281
3282 702.12b A pemanent with indestuctible can’t be destoyed. Such pemanents aen’t destoyed by lethal damage, and they ignoe the state-based action that checks fo lethal damage (see ule 704.5g). 3282 702.12b A permanent with indestructible can’t be destroyed. Such permanents aren’t destroyed by lethal damage, and they ignore the state-based action that checks for lethal damage (see rule 704.5g).
3283 3283
3284 702.12c Multiple instances of indestuctible on the same pemanent ae edundant. 3284 702.12c Multiple instances of indestructible on the same permanent are redundant.
3285 3285
3286 702.13. Intimidate 3286 702.13. Intimidate
3287 3287
3288 702.13a Intimidate is an evasion ability. 3288 702.13a Intimidate is an evasion ability.
3289 3289
3290 702.13b A ceatue with intimidate can’t be blocked except by atifact ceatues and/o ceatues that shae a colo with it. (See ule 509, “Declae Blockes Step.”) 3290 702.13b A creature with intimidate can’t be blocked except by artifact creatures and/or creatures that share a color with it. (See rule 509, “Declare Blockers Step.”)
3291 3291
3292 702.13c Multiple instances of intimidate on the same ceatue ae edundant. 3292 702.13c Multiple instances of intimidate on the same creature are redundant.
3293 3293
3294 702.14. Landwalk 3294 702.14. Landwalk
3295 3295
3296 702.14a Landwalk is a geneic tem that appeas within an object’s ules text as “[type]walk,” whee [type] is usually a subtype, but can be the cad type land, any land type, any supetype, o any combination theeof. 3296 702.14a Landwalk is a generic term that appears within an object’s rules text as “[type]walk,” where [type] is usually a subtype, but can be the card type land, any land type, any supertype, or any combination thereof.
3297 3297
3298 702.14b Landwalk is an evasion ability. 3298 702.14b Landwalk is an evasion ability.
3299 3299
3300 702.14c A ceatue with landwalk can’t be blocked as long as the defending playe contols at least one land with the specified subtype (as in “islandwalk”), with the specified supetype (as in “legenday landwalk”), without the specified supetype (as in “nonbasic landwalk”), o with both the specified supetype and the specified subtype (as in “snow swampwalk”). (See ule 509, “Declae Blockes Step.”) 3300 702.14c A creature with landwalk can’t be blocked as long as the defending player controls at least one land with the specified subtype (as in “islandwalk”), with the specified supertype (as in “legendary landwalk”), without the specified supertype (as in “nonbasic landwalk”), or with both the specified supertype and the specified subtype (as in “snow swampwalk”). (See rule 509, “Declare Blockers Step.”)
3301 3301
3302 702.14d Landwalk abilities don’t “cancel” one anothe. 3302 702.14d Landwalk abilities don’t “cancel” one another.
3303 Example: If a playe contols a snow Foest, that playe can’t block an attacking ceatue with snow foestwalk even if they also contol a ceatue with snow foestwalk. 3303 Example: If a player controls a snow Forest, that player can’t block an attacking creature with snow forestwalk even if they also control a creature with snow forestwalk.
3304 3304
3305 702.14e Multiple instances of the same kind of landwalk on the same ceatue ae edundant. 3305 702.14e Multiple instances of the same kind of landwalk on the same creature are redundant.
3306 3306
3307 702.15. Lifelink 3307 702.15. Lifelink
3308 3308
3309 702.15a Lifelink is a static ability. 3309 702.15a Lifelink is a static ability.
3310 3310
3311 702.15b Damage dealt by a souce with lifelink causes that souce’s contolle, o its owne if it has no contolle, to gain that much life (in addition to any othe esults that damage causes). See ule 120.3. 3311 702.15b Damage dealt by a source with lifelink causes that source’s controller, or its owner if it has no controller, to gain that much life (in addition to any other results that damage causes). See rule 120.3.
3312 3312
3313 702.15c If a pemanent leaves the battlefield befoe an effect causes it to deal damage, its last known infomation is used to detemine whethe it had lifelink. 3313 702.15c If a permanent leaves the battlefield before an effect causes it to deal damage, its last known information is used to determine whether it had lifelink.
3314 3314
3315 702.15d The lifelink ules function no matte what zone an object with lifelink deals damage fom. 3315 702.15d The lifelink rules function no matter what zone an object with lifelink deals damage from.
3316 3316
3317 702.15e If multiple souces with lifelink deal damage at the same time, they cause sepaate life gain events (see ules 119.9–10). 3317 702.15e If multiple sources with lifelink deal damage at the same time, they cause separate life gain events (see rules 119.9–10).
3318 Example: A playe contols Ajani’s Pidemate, which eads “Wheneve you gain life, put a +1/+1 counte on Ajani’s Pidemate,” and two ceatues with lifelink. The ceatues with lifelink deal combat damage simultaneously. Ajani’s Pidemate’s ability tigges twice. 3318 Example: A player controls Ajani’s Pridemate, which reads “Whenever you gain life, put a +1/+1 counter on Ajani’s Pridemate,” and two creatures with lifelink. The creatures with lifelink deal combat damage simultaneously. Ajani’s Pridemate’s ability triggers twice.
3319 3319
3320 702.15f Multiple instances of lifelink on the same object ae edundant. 3320 702.15f Multiple instances of lifelink on the same object are redundant.
3321 3321
3322 702.16. Potection 3322 702.16. Protection
3323 3323
3324 702.16a Potection is a static ability, witten “Potection fom [quality].” This quality is usually a colo (as in “potection fom black”) but can be any chaacteistic value o infomation. If the quality happens to be a cad name, it is teated as such only if the potection ability specifies that the quality is a name. If the quality is a cad type, subtype, o supetype, the ability applies to souces that ae pemanents with that cad type, subtype, o supetype and to any souces not on the battlefield that ae of that cad type, subtype, o supetype. This is an exception to ule 109.2. 3324 702.16a Protection is a static ability, written “Protection from [quality].” This quality is usually a color (as in “protection from black”) but can be any characteristic value or information. If the quality happens to be a card name, it is treated as such only if the protection ability specifies that the quality is a name. If the quality is a card type, subtype, or supertype, the ability applies to sources that are permanents with that card type, subtype, or supertype and to any sources not on the battlefield that are of that card type, subtype, or supertype. This is an exception to rule 109.2.
3325 3325
3326 702.16b A pemanent o playe with potection can’t be tageted by spells with the stated quality and can’t be tageted by abilities fom a souce with the stated quality. 3326 702.16b A permanent or player with protection can’t be targeted by spells with the stated quality and can’t be targeted by abilities from a source with the stated quality.
3327 3327
3328 702.16c A pemanent o playe with potection can’t be enchanted by Auas that have the stated quality. Such Auas attached to the pemanent o playe with potection will be put into thei ownes’ gaveyads as a state-based action. (See ule 704, “State-Based Actions.”) 3328 702.16c A permanent or player with protection can’t be enchanted by Auras that have the stated quality. Such Auras attached to the permanent or player with protection will be put into their owners’ graveyards as a state-based action. (See rule 704, “State-Based Actions.”)
3329 3329
3330 702.16d A pemanent with potection can’t be equipped by Equipment that have the stated quality o fotified by Fotifications that have the stated quality. Such Equipment o Fotifications become unattached fom that pemanent as a state-based action, but emain on the battlefield. (See ule 704, “State-Based Actions.”) 3330 702.16d A permanent with protection can’t be equipped by Equipment that have the stated quality or fortified by Fortifications that have the stated quality. Such Equipment or Fortifications become unattached from that permanent as a state-based action, but remain on the battlefield. (See rule 704, “State-Based Actions.”)
3331 3331
3332 702.16e Any damage that would be dealt by souces that have the stated quality to a pemanent o playe with potection is pevented. 3332 702.16e Any damage that would be dealt by sources that have the stated quality to a permanent or player with protection is prevented.
3333 3333
3334 702.16f Attacking ceatues with potection can’t be blocked by ceatues that have the stated quality. 3334 702.16f Attacking creatures with protection can’t be blocked by creatures that have the stated quality.
3335 3335
3336 702.16g “Potection fom [quality A] and fom [quality B]” is shothand fo “potection fom [quality A]” and “potection fom [quality B]”; it behaves as two sepaate potection abilities. If an effect causes an object with such an ability to lose potection fom [quality A], fo example, that object would still have potection fom [quality B]. 3336 702.16g “Protection from [quality A] and from [quality B]” is shorthand for “protection from [quality A]” and “protection from [quality B]”; it behaves as two separate protection abilities. If an effect causes an object with such an ability to lose protection from [quality A], for example, that object would still have protection from [quality B].
3337 3337
3338 702.16h “Potection fom all [chaacteistic]” is shothand fo “potection fom [quality A],” “potection fom [quality B],” and so on fo each possible quality the listed chaacteistic could have; it behaves as multiple sepaate potection abilities. If an effect causes an object with such an ability to lose potection fom [quality A], fo example, that object would still have potection fom [quality B], [quality C], and so on. 3338 702.16h “Protection from all [characteristic]” is shorthand for “protection from [quality A],” “protection from [quality B],” and so on for each possible quality the listed characteristic could have; it behaves as multiple separate protection abilities. If an effect causes an object with such an ability to lose protection from [quality A], for example, that object would still have protection from [quality B], [quality C], and so on.
3339 3339
3340 702.16i “Potection fom each [set of chaacteistics, qualities, o playes]” is shothand fo “potection fom [A],” “potection fom [B],” and so on fo each chaacteistic, quality, o playe in the set. It behaves as multiple sepaate potection abilities. 3340 702.16i “Protection from each [set of characteristics, qualities, or players]” is shorthand for “protection from [A],” “protection from [B],” and so on for each characteristic, quality, or player in the set. It behaves as multiple separate protection abilities.
3341 3341
3342 702.16j “Potection fom eveything” is a vaiant of the potection ability. A pemanent with potection fom eveything has potection fom each object egadless of that object’s chaacteistic values. Such a pemanent can’t be tageted by spells o abilities, enchanted by Auas, equipped by Equipment, fotified by Fotifications, o blocked by ceatues, and all damage that would be dealt to it is pevented. 3342 702.16j “Protection from everything” is a variant of the protection ability. A permanent with protection from everything has protection from each object regardless of that object’s characteristic values. Such a permanent can’t be targeted by spells or abilities, enchanted by Auras, equipped by Equipment, fortified by Fortifications, or blocked by creatures, and all damage that would be dealt to it is prevented.
3343 3343
3344 702.16k “Potection fom [a playe]” is a vaiant of the potection ability. A pemanent with potection fom a specific playe has potection fom each object the playe contols and potection fom each object the playe owns not contolled by anothe playe, egadless of that object’s chaacteistic values. Such a pemanent can’t be tageted by spells o abilities the playe contols, enchanted by Auas the playe contols, equipped by Equipment the playe contols, fotified by Fotifications the playe contols, o blocked by ceatues the playe contols, and all damage that would be dealt to it by souces contolled by the playe o owned by the playe but not contolled by anothe playe is pevented. 3344 702.16k “Protection from [a player]” is a variant of the protection ability. A permanent with protection from a specific player has protection from each object the player controls and protection from each object the player owns not controlled by another player, regardless of that object’s characteristic values. Such a permanent can’t be targeted by spells or abilities the player controls, enchanted by Auras the player controls, equipped by Equipment the player controls, fortified by Fortifications the player controls, or blocked by creatures the player controls, and all damage that would be dealt to it by sources controlled by the player or owned by the player but not controlled by another player is prevented.
3345 3345
3346 702.16m Multiple instances of potection fom the same quality on the same pemanent o playe ae edundant. 3346 702.16m Multiple instances of protection from the same quality on the same permanent or player are redundant.
3347 3347
3348 702.16n Some Auas both give the enchanted ceatue potection and say “this effect doesn’t emove” eithe that specific Aua o all Auas. This means that the specified Auas can legally enchant that ceatue and aen’t put into thei ownes’ gaveyads as a state-based action. If the ceatue has othe instances of potection fom the same quality, those instances affect Auas as nomal. 3348 702.16n Some Auras both give the enchanted creature protection and say “this effect doesn’t remove” either that specific Aura or all Auras. This means that the specified Auras can legally enchant that creature and aren’t put into their owners’ graveyards as a state-based action. If the creature has other instances of protection from the same quality, those instances affect Auras as normal.
3349 3349
3350 702.17. Reach 3350 702.17. Reach
3351 3351
3352 702.17a Reach is a static ability. 3352 702.17a Reach is a static ability.
3353 3353
3354 702.17b A ceatue with flying can’t be blocked except by ceatues with flying and/o each. (See ule 509, “Declae Blockes Step,” and ule 702.9, “Flying.”) 3354 702.17b A creature with flying can’t be blocked except by creatures with flying and/or reach. (See rule 509, “Declare Blockers Step,” and rule 702.9, “Flying.”)
3355 3355
3356 702.17c Multiple instances of each on the same ceatue ae edundant. 3356 702.17c Multiple instances of reach on the same creature are redundant.
3357 3357
3358 702.18. Shoud 3358 702.18. Shroud
3359 3359
3360 702.18a Shoud is a static ability. “Shoud” means “This pemanent o playe can’t be the taget of spells o abilities.” 3360 702.18a Shroud is a static ability. “Shroud” means “This permanent or player can’t be the target of spells or abilities.”
3361 3361
3362 702.18b Multiple instances of shoud on the same pemanent o playe ae edundant. 3362 702.18b Multiple instances of shroud on the same permanent or player are redundant.
3363 3363
3364 702.19. Tample 3364 702.19. Trample
3365 3365
3366 702.19a Tample is a static ability that modifies the ules fo assigning an attacking ceatue’s combat damage. The ability has no effect when a ceatue with tample is blocking o is dealing noncombat damage. (See ule 510, “Combat Damage Step.”) 3366 702.19a Trample is a static ability that modifies the rules for assigning an attacking creature’s combat damage. The ability has no effect when a creature with trample is blocking or is dealing noncombat damage. (See rule 510, “Combat Damage Step.”)
3367 3367
3368 702.19b The contolle of an attacking ceatue with tample fist assigns damage to the ceatue(s) blocking it. Once all those blocking ceatues ae assigned lethal damage, any emaining damage is assigned as its contolle chooses among those blocking ceatues and the playe o planeswalke the ceatue is attacking. When checking fo assigned lethal damage, take into account damage aleady maked on the ceatue and damage fom othe ceatues that’s being assigned duing the same combat damage step, but not any abilities o effects that might change the amount of damage that’s actually dealt. The attacking ceatue’s contolle need not assign lethal damage to all those blocking ceatues but in that case can’t assign any damage to the playe o planeswalke it’s attacking. 3368 702.19b The controller of an attacking creature with trample first assigns damage to the creature(s) blocking it. Once all those blocking creatures are assigned lethal damage, any remaining damage is assigned as its controller chooses among those blocking creatures and the player or planeswalker the creature is attacking. When checking for assigned lethal damage, take into account damage already marked on the creature and damage from other creatures that’s being assigned during the same combat damage step, but not any abilities or effects that might change the amount of damage that’s actually dealt. The attacking creature’s controller need not assign lethal damage to all those blocking creatures but in that case can’t assign any damage to the player or planeswalker it’s attacking.
3369 Example: A 2/2 ceatue that can block an additional ceatue blocks two attackes: a 1/1 with no abilities and a 3/3 with tample. The active playe could assign 1 damage fom the fist attacke and 1 damage fom the second to the blocking ceatue, and 2 damage to the defending playe fom the ceatue with tample. 3369 Example: A 2/2 creature that can block an additional creature blocks two attackers: a 1/1 with no abilities and a 3/3 with trample. The active player could assign 1 damage from the first attacker and 1 damage from the second to the blocking creature, and 2 damage to the defending player from the creature with trample.
3370 Example: A 6/6 geen ceatue with tample is blocked by a 2/2 ceatue with potection fom geen. The attacking ceatue’s contolle must assign at least 2 damage to the blocke, even though that damage will be pevented by the blocke’s potection ability. The attacking ceatue’s contolle can divide the est of the damage as they choose between the blocking ceatue and the defending playe. 3370 Example: A 6/6 green creature with trample is blocked by a 2/2 creature with protection from green. The attacking creature’s controller must assign at least 2 damage to the blocker, even though that damage will be prevented by the blocker’s protection ability. The attacking creature’s controller can divide the rest of the damage as they choose between the blocking creature and the defending player.
3371 3371
3372 702.19c If an attacking ceatue with tample is blocked, but thee ae no ceatues blocking it when damage is assigned, all its damage is assigned to the playe o planeswalke it’s attacking. 3372 702.19c If an attacking creature with trample is blocked, but there are no creatures blocking it when damage is assigned, all its damage is assigned to the player or planeswalker it’s attacking.
3373 3373
3374 702.19d If a ceatue with tample is attacking a planeswalke, none of its combat damage can be assigned to the defending playe, even if that planeswalke has been emoved fom combat o the damage the attacking ceatue could assign is geate than the planeswalke’s loyalty. 3374 702.19d If a creature with trample is attacking a planeswalker, none of its combat damage can be assigned to the defending player, even if that planeswalker has been removed from combat or the damage the attacking creature could assign is greater than the planeswalker’s loyalty.
3375 3375
3376 702.19e Multiple instances of tample on the same ceatue ae edundant. 3376 702.19e Multiple instances of trample on the same creature are redundant.
3377 3377
3378 702.20. Vigilance 3378 702.20. Vigilance
3379 3379
3380 702.20a Vigilance is a static ability that modifies the ules fo the declae attackes step. 3380 702.20a Vigilance is a static ability that modifies the rules for the declare attackers step.
3381 3381
3382 702.20b Attacking doesn’t cause ceatues with vigilance to tap. (See ule 508, “Declae Attackes Step.”) 3382 702.20b Attacking doesn’t cause creatures with vigilance to tap. (See rule 508, “Declare Attackers Step.”)
3383 3383
3384 702.20c Multiple instances of vigilance on the same ceatue ae edundant. 3384 702.20c Multiple instances of vigilance on the same creature are redundant.
3385 3385
3386 702.21. Banding 3386 702.21. Banding
3387 3387
3388 702.21a Banding is a static ability that modifies the ules fo combat. 3388 702.21a Banding is a static ability that modifies the rules for combat.
3389 3389
3390 702.21b “Bands with othe” is a special fom of banding. If an effect causes a pemanent to lose banding, the pemanent loses all “bands with othe” abilities as well. 3390 702.21b “Bands with other” is a special form of banding. If an effect causes a permanent to lose banding, the permanent loses all “bands with other” abilities as well.
3391 3391
3392 702.21c As a playe declaes attackes, they may declae that one o moe attacking ceatues with banding and up to one attacking ceatue without banding (even if it has “bands with othe”) ae all in a “band.” They may also declae that one o moe attacking [quality] ceatues with “bands with othe [quality]” and any numbe of othe attacking [quality] ceatues ae all in a band. A playe may declae as many attacking bands as they want, but each ceatue may be a membe of only one of them. (Defending playes can’t declae bands but may use banding in a diffeent way; see ule 702.21j.) 3392 702.21c As a player declares attackers, they may declare that one or more attacking creatures with banding and up to one attacking creature without banding (even if it has “bands with other”) are all in a “band.” They may also declare that one or more attacking [quality] creatures with “bands with other [quality]” and any number of other attacking [quality] creatures are all in a band. A player may declare as many attacking bands as they want, but each creature may be a member of only one of them. (Defending players can’t declare bands but may use banding in a different way; see rule 702.21j.)
3393 3393
3394 702.21d All ceatues in an attacking band must attack the same playe o planeswalke. 3394 702.21d All creatures in an attacking band must attack the same player or planeswalker.
3395 3395
3396 702.21e Once an attacking band has been announced, it lasts fo the est of combat, even if something late emoves banding o “bands with othe” fom one o moe of the ceatues in the band. 3396 702.21e Once an attacking band has been announced, it lasts for the rest of combat, even if something later removes banding or “bands with other” from one or more of the creatures in the band.
3397 3397
3398 702.21f An attacking ceatue that’s emoved fom combat is also emoved fom the band it was in. 3398 702.21f An attacking creature that’s removed from combat is also removed from the band it was in.
3399 3399
3400 702.21g Banding doesn’t cause attacking ceatues to shae abilities, no does it emove any abilities. The attacking ceatues in a band ae sepaate pemanents. 3400 702.21g Banding doesn’t cause attacking creatures to share abilities, nor does it remove any abilities. The attacking creatures in a band are separate permanents.
3401 3401
3402 702.21h If an attacking ceatue becomes blocked by a ceatue, each othe ceatue in the same band as the attacking ceatue becomes blocked by that same blocking ceatue. 3402 702.21h If an attacking creature becomes blocked by a creature, each other creature in the same band as the attacking creature becomes blocked by that same blocking creature.
3403 Example: A playe attacks with a band consisting of a ceatue with flying and a ceatue with swampwalk. The defending playe, who contols a Swamp, can block the flying ceatue if able. If they do, then the ceatue with swampwalk will also become blocked by the blocking ceatue(s). 3403 Example: A player attacks with a band consisting of a creature with flying and a creature with swampwalk. The defending player, who controls a Swamp, can block the flying creature if able. If they do, then the creature with swampwalk will also become blocked by the blocking creature(s).
3404 3404
3405 702.21i If one membe of a band would become blocked due to an effect, the entie band becomes blocked. 3405 702.21i If one member of a band would become blocked due to an effect, the entire band becomes blocked.
3406 3406
3407 702.21j Duing the combat damage step, if an attacking ceatue is being blocked by a ceatue with banding, o by both a [quality] ceatue with “bands with othe [quality]” and anothe [quality] ceatue, the defending playe (athe than the active playe) chooses how the attacking ceatue’s damage is assigned. That playe can divide that ceatue’s combat damage as they choose among any ceatues blocking it. This is an exception to the pocedue descibed in ule 510.1c. 3407 702.21j During the combat damage step, if an attacking creature is being blocked by a creature with banding, or by both a [quality] creature with “bands with other [quality]” and another [quality] creature, the defending player (rather than the active player) chooses how the attacking creature’s damage is assigned. That player can divide that creature’s combat damage as they choose among any creatures blocking it. This is an exception to the procedure described in rule 510.1c.
3408 3408
3409 702.21k Duing the combat damage step, if a blocking ceatue is blocking a ceatue with banding, o both a [quality] ceatue with “bands with othe [quality]” and anothe [quality] ceatue, the active playe (athe than the defending playe) chooses how the blocking ceatue’s damage is assigned. That playe can divide that ceatue’s combat damage as they choose among any ceatues it’s blocking. This is an exception to the pocedue descibed in ule 510.1d. 3409 702.21k During the combat damage step, if a blocking creature is blocking a creature with banding, or both a [quality] creature with “bands with other [quality]” and another [quality] creature, the active player (rather than the defending player) chooses how the blocking creature’s damage is assigned. That player can divide that creature’s combat damage as they choose among any creatures it’s blocking. This is an exception to the procedure described in rule 510.1d.
3410 3410
3411 702.21m Multiple instances of banding on the same ceatue ae edundant. Multiple instances of “bands with othe” of the same kind on the same ceatue ae edundant. 3411 702.21m Multiple instances of banding on the same creature are redundant. Multiple instances of “bands with other” of the same kind on the same creature are redundant.
3412 3412
3413 702.22. Rampage 3413 702.22. Rampage
3414 3414
3415 702.22a Rampage is a tiggeed ability. “Rampage N” means “Wheneve this ceatue becomes blocked, it gets +N/+N until end of tun fo each ceatue blocking it beyond the fist.” (See ule 509, “Declae Blockes Step.”) 3415 702.22a Rampage is a triggered ability. “Rampage N” means “Whenever this creature becomes blocked, it gets +N/+N until end of turn for each creature blocking it beyond the first.” (See rule 509, “Declare Blockers Step.”)
3416 3416
3417 702.22b The ampage bonus is calculated only once pe combat, when the tiggeed ability esolves. Adding o emoving blockes late in combat won’t change the bonus. 3417 702.22b The rampage bonus is calculated only once per combat, when the triggered ability resolves. Adding or removing blockers later in combat won’t change the bonus.
3418 3418
3419 702.22c If a ceatue has multiple instances of ampage, each tigges sepaately. 3419 702.22c If a creature has multiple instances of rampage, each triggers separately.
3420 3420
3421 702.23. Cumulative Upkeep 3421 702.23. Cumulative Upkeep
3422 3422
3423 702.23a Cumulative upkeep is a tiggeed ability that imposes an inceasing cost on a pemanent. “Cumulative upkeep [cost]” means “At the beginning of you upkeep, if this pemanent is on the battlefield, put an age counte on this pemanent. Then you may pay [cost] fo each age counte on it. If you don’t, sacifice it.” If [cost] has choices associated with it, each choice is made sepaately fo each age counte, then eithe the entie set of costs is paid, o none of them is paid. Patial payments aen’t allowed. 3423 702.23a Cumulative upkeep is a triggered ability that imposes an increasing cost on a permanent. “Cumulative upkeep [cost]” means “At the beginning of your upkeep, if this permanent is on the battlefield, put an age counter on this permanent. Then you may pay [cost] for each age counter on it. If you don’t, sacrifice it.” If [cost] has choices associated with it, each choice is made separately for each age counter, then either the entire set of costs is paid, or none of them is paid. Partial payments aren’t allowed.
3424 Example: A ceatue has “Cumulative upkeep {W} o {U}” and two age countes on it. When its ability next tigges and esolves, the ceatue’s contolle puts an age counte on it and then may pay {W}{W}{W}, {W}{W}{U}, {W}{U}{U}, o {U}{U}{U} to keep the ceatue on the battlefield. 3424 Example: A creature has “Cumulative upkeep {W} or {U}” and two age counters on it. When its ability next triggers and resolves, the creature’s controller puts an age counter on it and then may pay {W}{W}{W}, {W}{W}{U}, {W}{U}{U}, or {U}{U}{U} to keep the creature on the battlefield.
3425 Example: A ceatue has “Cumulative upkeep—Sacifice a ceatue” and one age counte on it. When its ability next tigges and esolves, its contolle can’t choose the same ceatue to sacifice twice. Eithe two diffeent ceatues must be sacificed, o the ceatue with cumulative upkeep must be sacificed. 3425 Example: A creature has “Cumulative upkeep—Sacrifice a creature” and one age counter on it. When its ability next triggers and resolves, its controller can’t choose the same creature to sacrifice twice. Either two different creatures must be sacrificed, or the creature with cumulative upkeep must be sacrificed.
3426 3426
3427 702.23b If a pemanent has multiple instances of cumulative upkeep, each tigges sepaately. Howeve, the age countes ae not connected to any paticula ability; each cumulative upkeep ability will count the total numbe of age countes on the pemanent at the time that ability esolves. 3427 702.23b If a permanent has multiple instances of cumulative upkeep, each triggers separately. However, the age counters are not connected to any particular ability; each cumulative upkeep ability will count the total number of age counters on the permanent at the time that ability resolves.
3428 Example: A ceatue has two instances of “Cumulative upkeep—Pay 1 life.” The ceatue has no age countes, and both cumulative upkeep abilities tigge. When the fist ability esolves, the contolle adds a counte and then chooses to pay 1 life. When the second ability esolves, the contolle adds anothe counte and then chooses to pay an additional 2 life. 3428 Example: A creature has two instances of “Cumulative upkeep—Pay 1 life.” The creature has no age counters, and both cumulative upkeep abilities trigger. When the first ability resolves, the controller adds a counter and then chooses to pay 1 life. When the second ability resolves, the controller adds another counter and then chooses to pay an additional 2 life.
3429 3429
3430 702.24. Flanking 3430 702.24. Flanking
3431 3431
3432 702.24a Flanking is a tiggeed ability that tigges duing the declae blockes step. (See ule 509, “Declae Blockes Step.”) “Flanking” means “Wheneve this ceatue becomes blocked by a ceatue without flanking, the blocking ceatue gets -1/-1 until end of tun.” 3432 702.24a Flanking is a triggered ability that triggers during the declare blockers step. (See rule 509, “Declare Blockers Step.”) “Flanking” means “Whenever this creature becomes blocked by a creature without flanking, the blocking creature gets -1/-1 until end of turn.”
3433 3433
3434 702.24b If a ceatue has multiple instances of flanking, each tigges sepaately. 3434 702.24b If a creature has multiple instances of flanking, each triggers separately.
3435 3435
3436 702.25. Phasing 3436 702.25. Phasing
3437 3437
3438 702.25a Phasing is a static ability that modifies the ules of the untap step. Duing each playe’s untap step, befoe the active playe untaps pemanents, all phased-in pemanents with phasing that playe contols “phase out.” Simultaneously, all phased-out pemanents that had phased out unde that playe’s contol “phase in.” 3438 702.25a Phasing is a static ability that modifies the rules of the untap step. During each player’s untap step, before the active player untaps permanents, all phased-in permanents with phasing that player controls “phase out.” Simultaneously, all phased-out permanents that had phased out under that player’s control “phase in.”
3439 3439
3440 702.25b If a pemanent phases out, its status changes to “phased out.” Except fo ules and effects that specifically mention phased-out pemanents, a phased-out pemanent is teated as though it does not exist. It can’t affect o be affected by anything else in the game. A pemanent that phases out is emoved fom combat. (See ule 506.4.) 3440 702.25b If a permanent phases out, its status changes to “phased out.” Except for rules and effects that specifically mention phased-out permanents, a phased-out permanent is treated as though it does not exist. It can’t affect or be affected by anything else in the game. A permanent that phases out is removed from combat. (See rule 506.4.)
3441 Example: You contol thee ceatues, one of which is phased out. You cast a spell that says “Daw a cad fo each ceatue you contol.” You daw two cads. 3441 Example: You control three creatures, one of which is phased out. You cast a spell that says “Draw a card for each creature you control.” You draw two cards.
3442 Example: You contol a phased-out ceatue. You cast a spell that says “Destoy all ceatues.” The phased-out ceatue is not destoyed. 3442 Example: You control a phased-out creature. You cast a spell that says “Destroy all creatures.” The phased-out creature is not destroyed.
3443 3443
3444 702.25c If a pemanent phases in, its status changes to “phased in.” The game once again teats it as though it exists. 3444 702.25c If a permanent phases in, its status changes to “phased in.” The game once again treats it as though it exists.
3445 3445
3446 702.25d The phasing event doesn’t actually cause a pemanent to change zones o contol, even though it’s teated as though it’s not on the battlefield and not unde its contolle’s contol while it’s phased out. Zone-change tigges don’t tigge when a pemanent phases in o out. Tokens continue to exist on the battlefield while phased out. Countes emain on a pemanent while it’s phased out. Effects that check a phased-in pemanent’s histoy won’t teat the phasing event as having caused the pemanent to leave o ente the battlefield o its contolle’s contol. 3446 702.25d The phasing event doesn’t actually cause a permanent to change zones or control, even though it’s treated as though it’s not on the battlefield and not under its controller’s control while it’s phased out. Zone-change triggers don’t trigger when a permanent phases in or out. Tokens continue to exist on the battlefield while phased out. Counters remain on a permanent while it’s phased out. Effects that check a phased-in permanent’s history won’t treat the phasing event as having caused the permanent to leave or enter the battlefield or its controller’s control.
3447 3447
3448 702.25e Continuous effects that affect a phased-out pemanent may expie while that pemanent is phased out. If so, they will no longe affect that pemanent once it’s phased in. In paticula, effects with “fo as long as” duations that tack that pemanent (see ule 611.2b) end when that pemanent phases out because they can no longe see it. 3448 702.25e Continuous effects that affect a phased-out permanent may expire while that permanent is phased out. If so, they will no longer affect that permanent once it’s phased in. In particular, effects with “for as long as” durations that track that permanent (see rule 611.2b) end when that permanent phases out because they can no longer see it.
3449 3449
3450 702.25f When a pemanent phases out, any Auas, Equipment, o Fotifications attached to that pemanent phase out at the same time. This altenate way of phasing out is known as phasing out “indiectly.” An Aua, Equipment, o Fotification that phased out indiectly won’t phase in by itself, but instead phases in along with the pemanent it’s attached to. 3450 702.25f When a permanent phases out, any Auras, Equipment, or Fortifications attached to that permanent phase out at the same time. This alternate way of phasing out is known as phasing out “indirectly.” An Aura, Equipment, or Fortification that phased out indirectly won’t phase in by itself, but instead phases in along with the permanent it’s attached to.
3451 3451
3452 702.25g If an object would simultaneously phase out diectly and indiectly, it just phases out indiectly. 3452 702.25g If an object would simultaneously phase out directly and indirectly, it just phases out indirectly.
3453 3453
3454 702.25h An Aua, Equipment, o Fotification that phased out diectly will phase in attached to the object o playe it was attached to when it phased out, if that object is still in the same zone o that playe is still in the game. If not, that Aua, Equipment, o Fotification phases in unattached. State-based actions apply as appopiate. (See ules 704.5m and 704.5n.) 3454 702.25h An Aura, Equipment, or Fortification that phased out directly will phase in attached to the object or player it was attached to when it phased out, if that object is still in the same zone or that player is still in the game. If not, that Aura, Equipment, or Fortification phases in unattached. State-based actions apply as appropriate. (See rules 704.5m and 704.5n.)
3455 3455
3456 702.25i Abilities that tigge when a pemanent becomes attached o unattached fom an object o playe don’t tigge when that pemanent phases in o out. 3456 702.25i Abilities that trigger when a permanent becomes attached or unattached from an object or player don’t trigger when that permanent phases in or out.
3457 3457
3458 702.25j Phased-out pemanents owned by a playe who leaves the game also leave the game. This doesn’t tigge zone-change tigges. See ule 800.4. 3458 702.25j Phased-out permanents owned by a player who leaves the game also leave the game. This doesn’t trigger zone-change triggers. See rule 800.4.
3459 3459
3460 702.25k If an effect causes a playe to skip thei untap step, the phasing event simply doesn’t occu that tun. 3460 702.25k If an effect causes a player to skip their untap step, the phasing event simply doesn’t occur that turn.
3461 3461
3462 702.25m In a multiplaye game, game ules may cause a phased-out pemanent to leave the game o to be exiled once a playe leaves the game. (See ules 800.4a and 800.4c.) If a phased-out pemanent phased out unde the contol of a playe who has left the game, that pemanent phases in duing the next untap step afte that playe’s next tun would have begun. 3462 702.25m In a multiplayer game, game rules may cause a phased-out permanent to leave the game or to be exiled once a player leaves the game. (See rules 800.4a and 800.4c.) If a phased-out permanent phased out under the control of a player who has left the game, that permanent phases in during the next untap step after that player’s next turn would have begun.
3463 3463
3464 702.25n Multiple instances of phasing on the same pemanent ae edundant. 3464 702.25n Multiple instances of phasing on the same permanent are redundant.
3465 3465
3466 702.26. Buyback 3466 702.26. Buyback
3467 3467
3468 702.26a Buyback appeas on some instants and soceies. It epesents two static abilities that function while the spell is on the stack. “Buyback [cost]” means “You may pay an additional [cost] as you cast this spell” and “If the buyback cost was paid, put this spell into its owne’s hand instead of into that playe’s gaveyad as it esolves.” Paying a spell’s buyback cost follows the ules fo paying additional costs in ules 601.2b and 601.2f–h. 3468 702.26a Buyback appears on some instants and sorceries. It represents two static abilities that function while the spell is on the stack. “Buyback [cost]” means “You may pay an additional [cost] as you cast this spell” and “If the buyback cost was paid, put this spell into its owner’s hand instead of into that player’s graveyard as it resolves.” Paying a spell’s buyback cost follows the rules for paying additional costs in rules 601.2b and 601.2f–h.
3469 3469
3470 702.27. Shadow 3470 702.27. Shadow
3471 3471
3472 702.27a Shadow is an evasion ability. 3472 702.27a Shadow is an evasion ability.
3473 3473
3474 702.27b A ceatue with shadow can’t be blocked by ceatues without shadow, and a ceatue without shadow can’t be blocked by ceatues with shadow. (See ule 509, “Declae Blockes Step.”) 3474 702.27b A creature with shadow can’t be blocked by creatures without shadow, and a creature without shadow can’t be blocked by creatures with shadow. (See rule 509, “Declare Blockers Step.”)
3475 3475
3476 702.27c Multiple instances of shadow on the same ceatue ae edundant. 3476 702.27c Multiple instances of shadow on the same creature are redundant.
3477 3477
3478 702.28. Cycling 3478 702.28. Cycling
3479 3479
3480 702.28a Cycling is an activated ability that functions only while the cad with cycling is in a playe’s hand. “Cycling [cost]” means “[Cost], Discad this cad: Daw a cad.” 3480 702.28a Cycling is an activated ability that functions only while the card with cycling is in a player’s hand. “Cycling [cost]” means “[Cost], Discard this card: Draw a card.”
3481 3481
3482 702.28b Although the cycling ability can be activated only if the cad is in a playe’s hand, it continues to exist while the object is on the battlefield and in all othe zones. Theefoe objects with cycling will be affected by effects that depend on objects having one o moe activated abilities. 3482 702.28b Although the cycling ability can be activated only if the card is in a player’s hand, it continues to exist while the object is on the battlefield and in all other zones. Therefore objects with cycling will be affected by effects that depend on objects having one or more activated abilities.
3483 3483
3484 702.28c Some cads with cycling have abilities that tigge when they’e cycled. “When you cycle [this cad]” means “When you discad [this cad] to pay an activation cost of a cycling ability.” These abilities tigge fom whateve zone the cad winds up in afte it’s cycled. 3484 702.28c Some cards with cycling have abilities that trigger when they’re cycled. “When you cycle [this card]” means “When you discard [this card] to pay an activation cost of a cycling ability.” These abilities trigger from whatever zone the card winds up in after it’s cycled.
3485 3485
3486 702.28d Some cads have abilities that tigge wheneve a playe “cycles o discads” a cad. These abilities tigge only once when a cad is cycled. 3486 702.28d Some cards have abilities that trigger whenever a player “cycles or discards” a card. These abilities trigger only once when a card is cycled.
3487 3487
3488 702.28e Typecycling is a vaiant of the cycling ability. “[Type]cycling [cost]” means “[Cost], Discad this cad: Seach you libay fo a [type] cad, eveal it, and put it into you hand. Then shuffle you libay.” This type is usually a subtype (as in “mountaincycling”) but can be any cad type, subtype, supetype, o combination theeof (as in “basic landcycling”). 3488 702.28e Typecycling is a variant of the cycling ability. “[Type]cycling [cost]” means “[Cost], Discard this card: Search your library for a [type] card, reveal it, and put it into your hand. Then shuffle your library.” This type is usually a subtype (as in “mountaincycling”) but can be any card type, subtype, supertype, or combination thereof (as in “basic landcycling”).
3489 3489
3490 702.28f Typecycling abilities ae cycling abilities, and typecycling costs ae cycling costs. Any cads that tigge when a playe cycles a cad will tigge when a cad is discaded to pay an activation cost of a typecycling ability. Any effect that stops playes fom cycling cads will stop playes fom activating cads’ typecycling abilities. Any effect that inceases o educes a cycling cost will incease o educe a typecycling cost. Any effect that looks fo a cad with cycling will find a cad with typecycling. 3490 702.28f Typecycling abilities are cycling abilities, and typecycling costs are cycling costs. Any cards that trigger when a player cycles a card will trigger when a card is discarded to pay an activation cost of a typecycling ability. Any effect that stops players from cycling cards will stop players from activating cards’ typecycling abilities. Any effect that increases or reduces a cycling cost will increase or reduce a typecycling cost. Any effect that looks for a card with cycling will find a card with typecycling.
3491 3491
3492 702.29. Echo 3492 702.29. Echo
3493 3493
3494 702.29a Echo is a tiggeed ability. “Echo [cost]” means “At the beginning of you upkeep, if this pemanent came unde you contol since the beginning of you last upkeep, sacifice it unless you pay [cost].” 3494 702.29a Echo is a triggered ability. “Echo [cost]” means “At the beginning of your upkeep, if this permanent came under your control since the beginning of your last upkeep, sacrifice it unless you pay [cost].”
3495 3495
3496 702.29b Uza block cads with the echo ability wee pinted without an echo cost. These cads have been given eata in the Oacle cad efeence; each one now has an echo cost equal to its mana cost. 3496 702.29b Urza block cards with the echo ability were printed without an echo cost. These cards have been given errata in the Oracle card reference; each one now has an echo cost equal to its mana cost.
3497 3497
3498 702.30. Hosemanship 3498 702.30. Horsemanship
3499 3499
3500 702.30a Hosemanship is an evasion ability. 3500 702.30a Horsemanship is an evasion ability.
3501 3501
3502 702.30b A ceatue with hosemanship can’t be blocked by ceatues without hosemanship. A ceatue with hosemanship can block a ceatue with o without hosemanship. (See ule 509, “Declae Blockes Step.”) 3502 702.30b A creature with horsemanship can’t be blocked by creatures without horsemanship. A creature with horsemanship can block a creature with or without horsemanship. (See rule 509, “Declare Blockers Step.”)
3503 3503
3504 702.30c Multiple instances of hosemanship on the same ceatue ae edundant. 3504 702.30c Multiple instances of horsemanship on the same creature are redundant.
3505 3505
3506 702.31. Fading 3506 702.31. Fading
3507 3507
3508 702.31a Fading is a keywod that epesents two abilities. “Fading N” means “This pemanent entes the battlefield with N fade countes on it” and “At the beginning of you upkeep, emove a fade counte fom this pemanent. If you can’t, sacifice the pemanent.” 3508 702.31a Fading is a keyword that represents two abilities. “Fading N” means “This permanent enters the battlefield with N fade counters on it” and “At the beginning of your upkeep, remove a fade counter from this permanent. If you can’t, sacrifice the permanent.”
3509 3509
3510 702.32. Kicke 3510 702.32. Kicker
3511 3511
3512 702.32a Kicke is a static ability that functions while the spell with kicke is on the stack. “Kicke [cost]” means “You may pay an additional [cost] as you cast this spell.” Paying a spell’s kicke cost(s) follows the ules fo paying additional costs in ules 601.2b and 601.2f–h. 3512 702.32a Kicker is a static ability that functions while the spell with kicker is on the stack. “Kicker [cost]” means “You may pay an additional [cost] as you cast this spell.” Paying a spell’s kicker cost(s) follows the rules for paying additional costs in rules 601.2b and 601.2f–h.
3513 3513
3514 702.32b The phase “Kicke [cost 1] and/o [cost 2]” means the same thing as “Kicke [cost 1], kicke [cost 2].” 3514 702.32b The phrase “Kicker [cost 1] and/or [cost 2]” means the same thing as “Kicker [cost 1], kicker [cost 2].”
3515 3515
3516 702.32c Multikicke is a vaiant of the kicke ability. “Multikicke [cost]” means “You may pay an additional [cost] any numbe of times as you cast this spell.” A multikicke cost is a kicke cost. 3516 702.32c Multikicker is a variant of the kicker ability. “Multikicker [cost]” means “You may pay an additional [cost] any number of times as you cast this spell.” A multikicker cost is a kicker cost.
3517 3517
3518 702.32d If a spell’s contolle declaes the intention to pay any of that spell’s kicke costs, that spell has been “kicked.” If a spell has two kicke costs o has multikicke, it may be kicked multiple times. See ule 601.2b. 3518 702.32d If a spell’s controller declares the intention to pay any of that spell’s kicker costs, that spell has been “kicked.” If a spell has two kicker costs or has multikicker, it may be kicked multiple times. See rule 601.2b.
3519 3519
3520 702.32e Objects with kicke o multikicke have additional abilities that specify what happens if they ae kicked. These abilities ae linked to the kicke o multikicke abilities pinted on that object: they can efe only to those specific kicke o multikicke abilities. See ule 607, “Linked Abilities.” 3520 702.32e Objects with kicker or multikicker have additional abilities that specify what happens if they are kicked. These abilities are linked to the kicker or multikicker abilities printed on that object: they can refer only to those specific kicker or multikicker abilities. See rule 607, “Linked Abilities.”
3521 3521
3522 702.32f Objects with moe than one kicke cost have abilities that each coespond to a specific kicke cost. They contain the phases “if it was kicked with its [A] kicke” and “if it was kicked with its [B] kicke,” whee A and B ae the fist and second kicke costs listed on the cad, espectively. Each of those abilities is linked to the appopiate kicke ability. 3522 702.32f Objects with more than one kicker cost have abilities that each correspond to a specific kicker cost. They contain the phrases “if it was kicked with its [A] kicker” and “if it was kicked with its [B] kicker,” where A and B are the first and second kicker costs listed on the card, respectively. Each of those abilities is linked to the appropriate kicker ability.
3523 3523
3524 702.32g If pat of a spell’s ability has its effect only if that spell was kicked, and that pat of the ability includes any tagets, the spell’s contolle chooses those tagets only if that spell was kicked. Othewise, the spell is cast as if it did not have those tagets. See ule 601.2c. 3524 702.32g If part of a spell’s ability has its effect only if that spell was kicked, and that part of the ability includes any targets, the spell’s controller chooses those targets only if that spell was kicked. Otherwise, the spell is cast as if it did not have those targets. See rule 601.2c.
3525 3525
3526 702.33. Flashback 3526 702.33. Flashback
3527 3527
3528 702.33a Flashback appeas on some instants and soceies. It epesents two static abilities: one that functions while the cad is in a playe’s gaveyad and anothe that functions while the cad is on the stack. “Flashback [cost]” means “You may cast this cad fom you gaveyad by paying [cost] athe than paying its mana cost” and “If the flashback cost was paid, exile this cad instead of putting it anywhee else any time it would leave the stack.” Casting a spell using its flashback ability follows the ules fo paying altenative costs in ules 601.2b and 601.2f–h. 3528 702.33a Flashback appears on some instants and sorceries. It represents two static abilities: one that functions while the card is in a player’s graveyard and another that functions while the card is on the stack. “Flashback [cost]” means “You may cast this card from your graveyard by paying [cost] rather than paying its mana cost” and “If the flashback cost was paid, exile this card instead of putting it anywhere else any time it would leave the stack.” Casting a spell using its flashback ability follows the rules for paying alternative costs in rules 601.2b and 601.2f–h.
3529 3529
3530 702.34. Madness 3530 702.34. Madness
3531 3531
3532 702.34a Madness is a keywod that epesents two abilities. The fist is a static ability that functions while the cad with madness is in a playe’s hand. The second is a tiggeed ability that functions when the fist ability is applied. “Madness [cost]” means “If a playe would discad this cad, that playe discads it, but exiles it instead of putting it into thei gaveyad” and “When this cad is exiled this way, its owne may cast it by paying [cost] athe than paying its mana cost. If that playe doesn’t, they put this cad into thei gaveyad.” 3532 702.34a Madness is a keyword that represents two abilities. The first is a static ability that functions while the card with madness is in a player’s hand. The second is a triggered ability that functions when the first ability is applied. “Madness [cost]” means “If a player would discard this card, that player discards it, but exiles it instead of putting it into their graveyard” and “When this card is exiled this way, its owner may cast it by paying [cost] rather than paying its mana cost. If that player doesn’t, they put this card into their graveyard.”
3533 3533
3534 702.34b Casting a spell using its madness ability follows the ules fo paying altenative costs in ules 601.2b and 601.2f–h. 3534 702.34b Casting a spell using its madness ability follows the rules for paying alternative costs in rules 601.2b and 601.2f–h.
3535 3535
3536 702.34c Afte esolving a madness tiggeed ability, if the exiled cad wasn’t cast and was moved to a public zone, effects efeencing the discaded cad can find that cad. See ule 400.7i. 3536 702.34c After resolving a madness triggered ability, if the exiled card wasn’t cast and was moved to a public zone, effects referencing the discarded card can find that card. See rule 400.7i.
3537 3537
3538 702.35. Fea 3538 702.35. Fear
3539 3539
3540 702.35a Fea is an evasion ability. 3540 702.35a Fear is an evasion ability.
3541 3541
3542 702.35b A ceatue with fea can’t be blocked except by atifact ceatues and/o black ceatues. (See ule 509, “Declae Blockes Step.”) 3542 702.35b A creature with fear can’t be blocked except by artifact creatures and/or black creatures. (See rule 509, “Declare Blockers Step.”)
3543 3543
3544 702.35c Multiple instances of fea on the same ceatue ae edundant. 3544 702.35c Multiple instances of fear on the same creature are redundant.
3545 3545
3546 702.36. Moph 3546 702.36. Morph
3547 3547
3548 702.36a Moph is a static ability that functions in any zone fom which you could play the cad it’s on, and the moph effect woks any time the cad is face down. “Moph [cost]” means “You may cast this cad as a 2/2 face-down ceatue with no text, no name, no subtypes, and no mana cost by paying {3} athe than paying its mana cost.” (See ule 707, “Face-Down Spells and Pemanents.”) 3548 702.36a Morph is a static ability that functions in any zone from which you could play the card it’s on, and the morph effect works any time the card is face down. “Morph [cost]” means “You may cast this card as a 2/2 face-down creature with no text, no name, no subtypes, and no mana cost by paying {3} rather than paying its mana cost.” (See rule 707, “Face-Down Spells and Permanents.”)
3549 3549
3550 702.36b Megamoph is a vaiant of the moph ability. “Megamoph [cost]” means “You may cast this cad as a 2/2 face-down ceatue with no text, no name, no subtypes, and no mana cost by paying {3} athe than paying its mana cost” and “As this pemanent is tuned face up, put a +1/+1 counte on it if its megamoph cost was paid to tun it face up.” A megamoph cost is a moph cost. 3550 702.36b Megamorph is a variant of the morph ability. “Megamorph [cost]” means “You may cast this card as a 2/2 face-down creature with no text, no name, no subtypes, and no mana cost by paying {3} rather than paying its mana cost” and “As this permanent is turned face up, put a +1/+1 counter on it if its megamorph cost was paid to turn it face up.” A megamorph cost is a morph cost.
3551 3551
3552 702.36c To cast a cad using its moph ability, tun it face down. It becomes a 2/2 face-down ceatue cad with no text, no name, no subtypes, and no mana cost. Any effects o pohibitions that would apply to casting a cad with these chaacteistics (and not the face-up cad’s chaacteistics) ae applied to casting this cad. These values ae the copiable values of that object’s chaacteistics. (See ule 613, “Inteaction of Continuous Effects,” and ule 706, “Copying Objects.”) Put it onto the stack (as a face-down spell with the same chaacteistics), and pay {3} athe than pay its mana cost. This follows the ules fo paying altenative costs. You can use a moph ability to cast a cad fom any zone fom which you could nomally play it. When the spell esolves, it entes the battlefield with the same chaacteistics the spell had. The moph effect applies to the face-down object wheeve it is, and it ends when the pemanent is tuned face up. 3552 702.36c To cast a card using its morph ability, turn it face down. It becomes a 2/2 face-down creature card with no text, no name, no subtypes, and no mana cost. Any effects or prohibitions that would apply to casting a card with these characteristics (and not the face-up card’s characteristics) are applied to casting this card. These values are the copiable values of that object’s characteristics. (See rule 613, “Interaction of Continuous Effects,” and rule 706, “Copying Objects.”) Put it onto the stack (as a face-down spell with the same characteristics), and pay {3} rather than pay its mana cost. This follows the rules for paying alternative costs. You can use a morph ability to cast a card from any zone from which you could normally play it. When the spell resolves, it enters the battlefield with the same characteristics the spell had. The morph effect applies to the face-down object wherever it is, and it ends when the permanent is turned face up.
3553 3553
3554 702.36d You can’t nomally cast a cad face down. A moph ability allows you to do so. 3554 702.36d You can’t normally cast a card face down. A morph ability allows you to do so.
3555 3555
3556 702.36e Any time you have pioity, you may tun a face-down pemanent you contol with a moph ability face up. This is a special action; it doesn’t use the stack (see ule 116). To do this, show all playes what the pemanent’s moph cost would be if it wee face up, pay that cost, then tun the pemanent face up. (If the pemanent wouldn’t have a moph cost if it wee face up, it can’t be tuned face up this way.) The moph effect on it ends, and it egains its nomal chaacteistics. Any abilities elating to the pemanent enteing the battlefield don’t tigge when it’s tuned face up and don’t have any effect, because the pemanent has aleady enteed the battlefield. 3556 702.36e Any time you have priority, you may turn a face-down permanent you control with a morph ability face up. This is a special action; it doesn’t use the stack (see rule 116). To do this, show all players what the permanent’s morph cost would be if it were face up, pay that cost, then turn the permanent face up. (If the permanent wouldn’t have a morph cost if it were face up, it can’t be turned face up this way.) The morph effect on it ends, and it regains its normal characteristics. Any abilities relating to the permanent entering the battlefield don’t trigger when it’s turned face up and don’t have any effect, because the permanent has already entered the battlefield.
3557 3557
3558 702.36f If a pemanent’s moph cost includes X, othe abilities of that pemanent may also efe to X. The value of X in those abilities is equal to the value of X chosen as the moph special action was taken. 3558 702.36f If a permanent’s morph cost includes X, other abilities of that permanent may also refer to X. The value of X in those abilities is equal to the value of X chosen as the morph special action was taken.
3559 3559
3560 702.36g See ule 707, “Face-Down Spells and Pemanents,” fo moe infomation about how to cast cads with a moph ability. 3560 702.36g See rule 707, “Face-Down Spells and Permanents,” for more information about how to cast cards with a morph ability.
3561 3561
3562 702.37. Amplify 3562 702.37. Amplify
3563 3563
3564 702.37a Amplify is a static ability. “Amplify N” means “As this object entes the battlefield, eveal any numbe of cads fom you hand that shae a ceatue type with it. This pemanent entes the battlefield with N +1/+1 countes on it fo each cad evealed this way. You can’t eveal this cad o any othe cads that ae enteing the battlefield at the same time as this cad.” 3564 702.37a Amplify is a static ability. “Amplify N” means “As this object enters the battlefield, reveal any number of cards from your hand that share a creature type with it. This permanent enters the battlefield with N +1/+1 counters on it for each card revealed this way. You can’t reveal this card or any other cards that are entering the battlefield at the same time as this card.”
3565 3565
3566 702.37b If a ceatue has multiple instances of amplify, each one woks sepaately. 3566 702.37b If a creature has multiple instances of amplify, each one works separately.
3567 3567
3568 702.38. Povoke 3568 702.38. Provoke
3569 3569
3570 702.38a Povoke is a tiggeed ability. “Povoke” means “Wheneve this ceatue attacks, you may choose to have taget ceatue defending playe contols block this ceatue this combat if able. If you do, untap that ceatue.” 3570 702.38a Provoke is a triggered ability. “Provoke” means “Whenever this creature attacks, you may choose to have target creature defending player controls block this creature this combat if able. If you do, untap that creature.”
3571 3571
3572 702.38b If a ceatue has multiple instances of povoke, each tigges sepaately. 3572 702.38b If a creature has multiple instances of provoke, each triggers separately.
3573 3573
3574 702.39. Stom 3574 702.39. Storm
3575 3575
3576 702.39a Stom is a tiggeed ability that functions on the stack. “Stom” means “When you cast this spell, copy it fo each othe spell that was cast befoe it this tun. If the spell has any tagets, you may choose new tagets fo any of the copies.” 3576 702.39a Storm is a triggered ability that functions on the stack. “Storm” means “When you cast this spell, copy it for each other spell that was cast before it this turn. If the spell has any targets, you may choose new targets for any of the copies.”
3577 3577
3578 702.39b If a spell has multiple instances of stom, each tigges sepaately. 3578 702.39b If a spell has multiple instances of storm, each triggers separately.
3579 3579
3580 702.40. Affinity 3580 702.40. Affinity
3581 3581
3582 702.40a Affinity is a static ability that functions while the spell with affinity is on the stack. “Affinity fo [text]” means “This spell costs you {1} less to cast fo each [text] you contol.” 3582 702.40a Affinity is a static ability that functions while the spell with affinity is on the stack. “Affinity for [text]” means “This spell costs you {1} less to cast for each [text] you control.”
3583 3583
3584 702.40b If a spell has multiple instances of affinity, each of them applies. 3584 702.40b If a spell has multiple instances of affinity, each of them applies.
3585 3585
3586 702.41. Entwine 3586 702.41. Entwine
3587 3587
3588 702.41a Entwine is a static ability of modal spells (see ule 700.2) that functions while the spell is on the stack. “Entwine [cost]” means “You may choose all modes of this spell instead of just the numbe specified. If you do, you pay an additional [cost].” Using the entwine ability follows the ules fo choosing modes and paying additional costs in ules 601.2b and 601.2f–h. 3588 702.41a Entwine is a static ability of modal spells (see rule 700.2) that functions while the spell is on the stack. “Entwine [cost]” means “You may choose all modes of this spell instead of just the number specified. If you do, you pay an additional [cost].” Using the entwine ability follows the rules for choosing modes and paying additional costs in rules 601.2b and 601.2f–h.
3589 3589
3590 702.41b If the entwine cost was paid, follow the text of each of the modes in the ode witten on the cad when the spell esolves. 3590 702.41b If the entwine cost was paid, follow the text of each of the modes in the order written on the card when the spell resolves.
3591 3591
3592 702.42. Modula 3592 702.42. Modular
3593 3593
3594 702.42a Modula epesents both a static ability and a tiggeed ability. “Modula N” means “This pemanent entes the battlefield with N +1/+1 countes on it” and “When this pemanent is put into a gaveyad fom the battlefield, you may put a +1/+1 counte on taget atifact ceatue fo each +1/+1 counte on this pemanent.” 3594 702.42a Modular represents both a static ability and a triggered ability. “Modular N” means “This permanent enters the battlefield with N +1/+1 counters on it” and “When this permanent is put into a graveyard from the battlefield, you may put a +1/+1 counter on target artifact creature for each +1/+1 counter on this permanent.”
3595 3595
3596 702.42b If a ceatue has multiple instances of modula, each one woks sepaately. 3596 702.42b If a creature has multiple instances of modular, each one works separately.
3597 3597
3598 702.43. Sunbust 3598 702.43. Sunburst
3599 3599
3600 702.43a Sunbust is a static ability that functions as an object is enteing the battlefield. “Sunbust” means “If this object is enteing the battlefield as a ceatue, ignoing any type-changing effects that would affect it, it entes the battlefield with a +1/+1 counte on it fo each colo of mana spent to cast it. Othewise, it entes the battlefield with a chage counte on it fo each colo of mana spent to cast it.” 3600 702.43a Sunburst is a static ability that functions as an object is entering the battlefield. “Sunburst” means “If this object is entering the battlefield as a creature, ignoring any type-changing effects that would affect it, it enters the battlefield with a +1/+1 counter on it for each color of mana spent to cast it. Otherwise, it enters the battlefield with a charge counter on it for each color of mana spent to cast it.”
3601 3601
3602 702.43b Sunbust adds countes only if the object with sunbust is enteing the battlefield fom the stack as a esolving spell and only if one o moe coloed mana was spent on its costs, including additional o altenative costs. 3602 702.43b Sunburst adds counters only if the object with sunburst is entering the battlefield from the stack as a resolving spell and only if one or more colored mana was spent on its costs, including additional or alternative costs.
3603 3603
3604 702.43c Sunbust can also be used to set a vaiable numbe fo anothe ability. If the keywod is used in this way, it doesn’t matte whethe the ability is on a ceatue spell o on a nonceatue spell. 3604 702.43c Sunburst can also be used to set a variable number for another ability. If the keyword is used in this way, it doesn’t matter whether the ability is on a creature spell or on a noncreature spell.
3605 Example: The ability “Modula—Sunbust” means “This pemanent entes the battlefield with a +1/+1 counte on it fo each colo of mana spent to cast it” and “When this pemanent is put into a gaveyad fom the battlefield, you may put a +1/+1 counte on taget atifact ceatue fo each +1/+1 counte on this pemanent.” 3605 Example: The ability “Modular—Sunburst” means “This permanent enters the battlefield with a +1/+1 counter on it for each color of mana spent to cast it” and “When this permanent is put into a graveyard from the battlefield, you may put a +1/+1 counter on target artifact creature for each +1/+1 counter on this permanent.”
3606 3606
3607 702.43d If an object has multiple instances of sunbust, each one woks sepaately. 3607 702.43d If an object has multiple instances of sunburst, each one works separately.
3608 3608
3609 702.44. Bushido 3609 702.44. Bushido
3610 3610
3611 702.44a Bushido is a tiggeed ability. “Bushido N” means “Wheneve this ceatue blocks o becomes blocked, it gets +N/+N until end of tun.” (See ule 509, “Declae Blockes Step.”) 3611 702.44a Bushido is a triggered ability. “Bushido N” means “Whenever this creature blocks or becomes blocked, it gets +N/+N until end of turn.” (See rule 509, “Declare Blockers Step.”)
3612 3612
3613 702.44b If a ceatue has multiple instances of bushido, each tigges sepaately. 3613 702.44b If a creature has multiple instances of bushido, each triggers separately.
3614 3614
3615 702.45. Soulshift 3615 702.45. Soulshift
3616 3616
3617 702.45a Soulshift is a tiggeed ability. “Soulshift N” means “When this pemanent is put into a gaveyad fom the battlefield, you may etun taget Spiit cad with conveted mana cost N o less fom you gaveyad to you hand.” 3617 702.45a Soulshift is a triggered ability. “Soulshift N” means “When this permanent is put into a graveyard from the battlefield, you may return target Spirit card with converted mana cost N or less from your graveyard to your hand.”
3618 3618
3619 702.45b If a pemanent has multiple instances of soulshift, each tigges sepaately. 3619 702.45b If a permanent has multiple instances of soulshift, each triggers separately.
3620 3620
3621 702.46. Splice 3621 702.46. Splice
3622 3622
3623 702.46a Splice is a static ability that functions while a cad is in you hand. “Splice onto [quality] [cost]” means “You may eveal this cad fom you hand as you cast a [quality] spell. If you do, that spell gains the text of this cad’s ules text and you pay [cost] as an additional cost to cast that spell.” Paying a cad’s splice cost follows the ules fo paying additional costs in ules 601.2b and 601.2f–h. 3623 702.46a Splice is a static ability that functions while a card is in your hand. “Splice onto [quality] [cost]” means “You may reveal this card from your hand as you cast a [quality] spell. If you do, that spell gains the text of this card’s rules text and you pay [cost] as an additional cost to cast that spell.” Paying a card’s splice cost follows the rules for paying additional costs in rules 601.2b and 601.2f–h.
3624 Example: Since the cad with splice emains in the playe’s hand, it can late be cast nomally o spliced onto anothe spell. It can even be discaded to pay a “discad a cad” cost of the spell it’s spliced onto. 3624 Example: Since the card with splice remains in the player’s hand, it can later be cast normally or spliced onto another spell. It can even be discarded to pay a “discard a card” cost of the spell it’s spliced onto.
3625 3625
3626 702.46b You can’t choose to use a splice ability if you can’t make the equied choices (tagets, etc.) fo that cad’s ules text. You can’t splice any one cad onto the same spell moe than once. If you’e splicing moe than one cad onto a spell, eveal them all at once and choose the ode in which thei effects will happen. The effects of the main spell must happen fist. 3626 702.46b You can’t choose to use a splice ability if you can’t make the required choices (targets, etc.) for that card’s rules text. You can’t splice any one card onto the same spell more than once. If you’re splicing more than one card onto a spell, reveal them all at once and choose the order in which their effects will happen. The effects of the main spell must happen first.
3627 3627
3628 702.46c The spell has the chaacteistics of the main spell, plus the ules text of each of the spliced cads. This is a text-changing effect (see ule 612, “Text-Changing Effects”). The spell doesn’t gain any othe chaacteistics (name, mana cost, colo, supetypes, cad types, subtypes, etc.) of the spliced cads. Text gained by the spell that efes to a cad by name efes to the spell on the stack, not the cad fom which the text was copied. 3628 702.46c The spell has the characteristics of the main spell, plus the rules text of each of the spliced cards. This is a text-changing effect (see rule 612, “Text-Changing Effects”). The spell doesn’t gain any other characteristics (name, mana cost, color, supertypes, card types, subtypes, etc.) of the spliced cards. Text gained by the spell that refers to a card by name refers to the spell on the stack, not the card from which the text was copied.
3629 Example: Glacial Ray is a ed cad with splice onto Acane that eads, “Glacial Ray deals 2 damage to any taget.” Suppose Glacial Ray is spliced onto Reach Though Mists, a blue spell. The spell is still blue, and Reach Though Mists deals the damage. This means that the ability can taget a ceatue with potection fom ed and deal 2 damage to that ceatue. 3629 Example: Glacial Ray is a red card with splice onto Arcane that reads, “Glacial Ray deals 2 damage to any target.” Suppose Glacial Ray is spliced onto Reach Through Mists, a blue spell. The spell is still blue, and Reach Through Mists deals the damage. This means that the ability can target a creature with protection from red and deal 2 damage to that creature.
3630 3630
3631 702.46d Choose tagets fo the added text nomally (see ule 601.2c). Note that a spell with one o moe tagets won’t esolve if all of its tagets ae illegal on esolution. 3631 702.46d Choose targets for the added text normally (see rule 601.2c). Note that a spell with one or more targets won’t resolve if all of its targets are illegal on resolution.
3632 3632
3633 702.46e The spell loses any splice changes once it leaves the stack fo any eason. 3633 702.46e The spell loses any splice changes once it leaves the stack for any reason.
3634 3634
3635 702.47. Offeing 3635 702.47. Offering
3636 3636
3637 702.47a Offeing is a static ability that functions while the spell with offeing is on the stack. “[Subtype] offeing” means “As an additional cost to cast this spell, you may sacifice a [subtype] pemanent. If you chose to pay the additional cost, this spell’s total cost is educed by the sacificed pemanent’s mana cost, and you may cast this spell any time you could cast an instant.” 3637 702.47a Offering is a static ability that functions while the spell with offering is on the stack. “[Subtype] offering” means “As an additional cost to cast this spell, you may sacrifice a [subtype] permanent. If you chose to pay the additional cost, this spell’s total cost is reduced by the sacrificed permanent’s mana cost, and you may cast this spell any time you could cast an instant.”
3638 3638
3639 702.47b You choose which pemanent to sacifice as you make choices fo the spell (see ule 601.2b), and you sacifice that pemanent as you pay the total cost (see ule 601.2h). 3639 702.47b You choose which permanent to sacrifice as you make choices for the spell (see rule 601.2b), and you sacrifice that permanent as you pay the total cost (see rule 601.2h).
3640 3640
3641 702.47c Geneic mana in the sacificed pemanent’s mana cost educes geneic mana in the spell’s total cost. Coloed and cololess mana in the sacificed pemanent’s mana cost educes mana of the same type in spell’s total cost, and any excess educes that much geneic mana in spell’s total cost. (See ule 118.7.) 3641 702.47c Generic mana in the sacrificed permanent’s mana cost reduces generic mana in the spell’s total cost. Colored and colorless mana in the sacrificed permanent’s mana cost reduces mana of the same type in spell’s total cost, and any excess reduces that much generic mana in spell’s total cost. (See rule 118.7.)
3642 3642
3643 702.48. Ninjutsu 3643 702.48. Ninjutsu
3644 3644
3645 702.48a Ninjutsu is an activated ability that functions only while the cad with ninjutsu is in a playe’s hand. “Ninjutsu [cost]” means “[Cost], Reveal this cad fom you hand, Retun an unblocked attacking ceatue you contol to its owne’s hand: Put this cad onto the battlefield fom you hand tapped and attacking.” 3645 702.48a Ninjutsu is an activated ability that functions only while the card with ninjutsu is in a player’s hand. “Ninjutsu [cost]” means “[Cost], Reveal this card from your hand, Return an unblocked attacking creature you control to its owner’s hand: Put this card onto the battlefield from your hand tapped and attacking.”
3646 3646
3647 702.48b The cad with ninjutsu emains evealed fom the time the ability is announced until the ability leaves the stack. 3647 702.48b The card with ninjutsu remains revealed from the time the ability is announced until the ability leaves the stack.
3648 3648
3649 702.48c A ninjutsu ability may be activated only while a ceatue on the battlefield is unblocked (see ule 509.1h). The ceatue with ninjutsu is put onto the battlefield unblocked. It will be attacking the same playe o planeswalke as the ceatue that was etuned to its owne’s hand. 3649 702.48c A ninjutsu ability may be activated only while a creature on the battlefield is unblocked (see rule 509.1h). The creature with ninjutsu is put onto the battlefield unblocked. It will be attacking the same player or planeswalker as the creature that was returned to its owner’s hand.
3650 3650
3651 702.48d Commande ninjutsu is a vaiant of the ninjutsu ability that also functions while the cad with commande ninjutsu is in the command zone. “Commande ninjutsu [cost]” means “[Cost], Reveal this cad fom you hand o fom the command zone, Retun an unblocked attacking ceatue you contol to its owne’s hand: Put this cad onto the battlefield tapped and attacking.” 3651 702.48d Commander ninjutsu is a variant of the ninjutsu ability that also functions while the card with commander ninjutsu is in the command zone. “Commander ninjutsu [cost]” means “[Cost], Reveal this card from your hand or from the command zone, Return an unblocked attacking creature you control to its owner’s hand: Put this card onto the battlefield tapped and attacking.”
3652 3652
3653 702.49. Epic 3653 702.49. Epic
3654 3654
3655 702.49a Epic epesents two spell abilities, one of which ceates a delayed tiggeed ability. “Epic” means “Fo the est of the game, you can’t cast spells,” and “At the beginning of each of you upkeeps fo the est of the game, copy this spell except fo its epic ability. If the spell has any tagets, you may choose new tagets fo the copy.” See ule 706.10. 3655 702.49a Epic represents two spell abilities, one of which creates a delayed triggered ability. “Epic” means “For the rest of the game, you can’t cast spells,” and “At the beginning of each of your upkeeps for the rest of the game, copy this spell except for its epic ability. If the spell has any targets, you may choose new targets for the copy.” See rule 706.10.
3656 3656
3657 702.49b A playe can’t cast spells once a spell with epic they contol esolves, but effects (such as the epic ability itself) can still put copies of spells onto the stack. 3657 702.49b A player can’t cast spells once a spell with epic they control resolves, but effects (such as the epic ability itself) can still put copies of spells onto the stack.
3658 3658
3659 702.50. Convoke 3659 702.50. Convoke
3660 3660
3661 702.50a Convoke is a static ability that functions while the spell with convoke is on the stack. “Convoke” means “Fo each coloed mana in this spell’s total cost, you may tap an untapped ceatue of that colo you contol athe than pay that mana. Fo each geneic mana in this spell’s total cost, you may tap an untapped ceatue you contol athe than pay that mana.” 3661 702.50a Convoke is a static ability that functions while the spell with convoke is on the stack. “Convoke” means “For each colored mana in this spell’s total cost, you may tap an untapped creature of that color you control rather than pay that mana. For each generic mana in this spell’s total cost, you may tap an untapped creature you control rather than pay that mana.”
3662 3662
3663 702.50b The convoke ability isn’t an additional o altenative cost and applies only afte the total cost of the spell with convoke is detemined. 3663 702.50b The convoke ability isn’t an additional or alternative cost and applies only after the total cost of the spell with convoke is determined.
3664 Example: Heatless Summoning says, in pat, “Ceatue spells you cast cost {2} less to cast.” You contol Heatless Summoning and cast Siege Wum, a spell with convoke that costs {5}{G}{G}. The total cost to cast Siege Wum is {3}{G}{G}. Afte activating mana abilities, you pay that total cost. You may tap up to two geen ceatues and up to thee othe ceatues to pay that cost, and the emainde is paid with mana. 3664 Example: Heartless Summoning says, in part, “Creature spells you cast cost {2} less to cast.” You control Heartless Summoning and cast Siege Wurm, a spell with convoke that costs {5}{G}{G}. The total cost to cast Siege Wurm is {3}{G}{G}. After activating mana abilities, you pay that total cost. You may tap up to two green creatures and up to three other creatures to pay that cost, and the remainder is paid with mana.
3665 3665
3666 702.50c A ceatue tapped to pay fo mana in a spell’s total cost this way is said to have “convoked” that spell. 3666 702.50c A creature tapped to pay for mana in a spell’s total cost this way is said to have “convoked” that spell.
3667 3667
3668 702.50d Multiple instances of convoke on the same spell ae edundant. 3668 702.50d Multiple instances of convoke on the same spell are redundant.
3669 3669
3670 702.51. Dedge 3670 702.51. Dredge
3671 3671
3672 702.51a Dedge is a static ability that functions only while the cad with dedge is in a playe’s gaveyad. “Dedge N” means “As long as you have at least N cads in you libay, if you would daw a cad, you may instead put N cads fom the top of you libay into you gaveyad and etun this cad fom you gaveyad to you hand.” 3672 702.51a Dredge is a static ability that functions only while the card with dredge is in a player’s graveyard. “Dredge N” means “As long as you have at least N cards in your library, if you would draw a card, you may instead put N cards from the top of your library into your graveyard and return this card from your graveyard to your hand.”
3673 3673
3674 702.51b A playe with fewe cads in thei libay than the numbe equied by a dedge ability can’t put any of them into thei gaveyad this way. 3674 702.51b A player with fewer cards in their library than the number required by a dredge ability can’t put any of them into their graveyard this way.
3675 3675
3676 702.52. Tansmute 3676 702.52. Transmute
3677 3677
3678 702.52a Tansmute is an activated ability that functions only while the cad with tansmute is in a playe’s hand. “Tansmute [cost]” means “[Cost], Discad this cad: Seach you libay fo a cad with the same conveted mana cost as the discaded cad, eveal that cad, and put it into you hand. Then shuffle you libay. Activate this ability only any time you could cast a socey.” 3678 702.52a Transmute is an activated ability that functions only while the card with transmute is in a player’s hand. “Transmute [cost]” means “[Cost], Discard this card: Search your library for a card with the same converted mana cost as the discarded card, reveal that card, and put it into your hand. Then shuffle your library. Activate this ability only any time you could cast a sorcery.”
3679 3679
3680 702.52b Although the tansmute ability can be activated only if the cad is in a playe’s hand, it continues to exist while the object is on the battlefield and in all othe zones. Theefoe objects with tansmute will be affected by effects that depend on objects having one o moe activated abilities. 3680 702.52b Although the transmute ability can be activated only if the card is in a player’s hand, it continues to exist while the object is on the battlefield and in all other zones. Therefore objects with transmute will be affected by effects that depend on objects having one or more activated abilities.
3681 3681
3682 702.53. Bloodthist 3682 702.53. Bloodthirst
3683 3683
3684 702.53a Bloodthist is a static ability. “Bloodthist N” means “If an opponent was dealt damage this tun, this pemanent entes the battlefield with N +1/+1 countes on it.” 3684 702.53a Bloodthirst is a static ability. “Bloodthirst N” means “If an opponent was dealt damage this turn, this permanent enters the battlefield with N +1/+1 counters on it.”
3685 3685
3686 702.53b “Bloodthist X” is a special fom of bloodthist. “Bloodthist X” means “This pemanent entes the battlefield with X +1/+1 countes on it, whee X is the total damage you opponents have been dealt this tun.” 3686 702.53b “Bloodthirst X” is a special form of bloodthirst. “Bloodthirst X” means “This permanent enters the battlefield with X +1/+1 counters on it, where X is the total damage your opponents have been dealt this turn.”
3687 3687
3688 702.53c If an object has multiple instances of bloodthist, each applies sepaately. 3688 702.53c If an object has multiple instances of bloodthirst, each applies separately.
3689 3689
3690 702.54. Haunt 3690 702.54. Haunt
3691 3691
3692 702.54a Haunt is a tiggeed ability. “Haunt” on a pemanent means “When this pemanent is put into a gaveyad fom the battlefield, exile it haunting taget ceatue.” “Haunt” on an instant o socey spell means “When this spell is put into a gaveyad duing its esolution, exile it haunting taget ceatue.” 3692 702.54a Haunt is a triggered ability. “Haunt” on a permanent means “When this permanent is put into a graveyard from the battlefield, exile it haunting target creature.” “Haunt” on an instant or sorcery spell means “When this spell is put into a graveyard during its resolution, exile it haunting target creature.”
3693 3693
3694 702.54b Cads that ae in the exile zone as the esult of a haunt ability “haunt” the ceatue tageted by that ability. The phase “ceatue it haunts” efes to the object tageted by the haunt ability, egadless of whethe o not that object is still a ceatue. 3694 702.54b Cards that are in the exile zone as the result of a haunt ability “haunt” the creature targeted by that ability. The phrase “creature it haunts” refers to the object targeted by the haunt ability, regardless of whether or not that object is still a creature.
3695 3695
3696 702.54c Tiggeed abilities of cads with haunt that efe to the haunted ceatue can tigge in the exile zone. 3696 702.54c Triggered abilities of cards with haunt that refer to the haunted creature can trigger in the exile zone.
3697 3697
3698 702.55. Replicate 3698 702.55. Replicate
3699 3699
3700 702.55a Replicate is a keywod that epesents two abilities. The fist is a static ability that functions while the spell with eplicate is on the stack. The second is a tiggeed ability that functions while the spell with eplicate is on the stack. “Replicate [cost]” means “As an additional cost to cast this spell, you may pay [cost] any numbe of times” and “When you cast this spell, if a eplicate cost was paid fo it, copy it fo each time its eplicate cost was paid. If the spell has any tagets, you may choose new tagets fo any of the copies.” Paying a spell’s eplicate cost follows the ules fo paying additional costs in ules 601.2b and 601.2f–h. 3700 702.55a Replicate is a keyword that represents two abilities. The first is a static ability that functions while the spell with replicate is on the stack. The second is a triggered ability that functions while the spell with replicate is on the stack. “Replicate [cost]” means “As an additional cost to cast this spell, you may pay [cost] any number of times” and “When you cast this spell, if a replicate cost was paid for it, copy it for each time its replicate cost was paid. If the spell has any targets, you may choose new targets for any of the copies.” Paying a spell’s replicate cost follows the rules for paying additional costs in rules 601.2b and 601.2f–h.
3701 3701
3702 702.55b If a spell has multiple instances of eplicate, each is paid sepaately and tigges based on the payments made fo it, not any othe instance of eplicate. 3702 702.55b If a spell has multiple instances of replicate, each is paid separately and triggers based on the payments made for it, not any other instance of replicate.
3703 3703
3704 702.56. Foecast 3704 702.56. Forecast
3705 3705
3706 702.56a A foecast ability is a special kind of activated ability that can be activated only fom a playe’s hand. It’s witten “Foecast — [Activated ability].” 3706 702.56a A forecast ability is a special kind of activated ability that can be activated only from a player’s hand. It’s written “Forecast — [Activated ability].”
3707 3707
3708 702.56b A foecast ability may be activated only duing the upkeep step of the cad’s owne and only once each tun. The contolle of the foecast ability eveals the cad with that ability fom thei hand as the ability is activated. That playe plays with that cad evealed in thei hand until it leaves the playe’s hand o until a step o phase that isn’t an upkeep step begins, whicheve comes fist. 3708 702.56b A forecast ability may be activated only during the upkeep step of the card’s owner and only once each turn. The controller of the forecast ability reveals the card with that ability from their hand as the ability is activated. That player plays with that card revealed in their hand until it leaves the player’s hand or until a step or phase that isn’t an upkeep step begins, whichever comes first.
3709 3709
3710 702.57. Gaft 3710 702.57. Graft
3711 3711
3712 702.57a Gaft epesents both a static ability and a tiggeed ability. “Gaft N” means “This pemanent entes the battlefield with N +1/+1 countes on it” and “Wheneve anothe ceatue entes the battlefield, if this pemanent has a +1/+1 counte on it, you may move a +1/+1 counte fom this pemanent onto that ceatue.” 3712 702.57a Graft represents both a static ability and a triggered ability. “Graft N” means “This permanent enters the battlefield with N +1/+1 counters on it” and “Whenever another creature enters the battlefield, if this permanent has a +1/+1 counter on it, you may move a +1/+1 counter from this permanent onto that creature.”
3713 3713
3714 702.57b If a pemanent has multiple instances of gaft, each one woks sepaately. 3714 702.57b If a permanent has multiple instances of graft, each one works separately.
3715 3715
3716 702.58. Recove 3716 702.58. Recover
3717 3717
3718 702.58a Recove is a tiggeed ability that functions only while the cad with ecove is in a playe’s gaveyad. “Recove [cost]” means “When a ceatue is put into you gaveyad fom the battlefield, you may pay [cost]. If you do, etun this cad fom you gaveyad to you hand. Othewise, exile this cad.” 3718 702.58a Recover is a triggered ability that functions only while the card with recover is in a player’s graveyard. “Recover [cost]” means “When a creature is put into your graveyard from the battlefield, you may pay [cost]. If you do, return this card from your graveyard to your hand. Otherwise, exile this card.”
3719 3719
3720 702.59. Ripple 3720 702.59. Ripple
3721 3721
3722 702.59a Ripple is a tiggeed ability that functions only while the cad with ipple is on the stack. “Ripple N” means “When you cast this spell, you may eveal the top N cads of you libay, o, if thee ae fewe than N cads in you libay, you may eveal all the cads in you libay. If you eveal cads fom you libay this way, you may cast any of those cads with the same name as this spell without paying thei mana costs, then put all evealed cads not cast this way on the bottom of you libay in any ode.” 3722 702.59a Ripple is a triggered ability that functions only while the card with ripple is on the stack. “Ripple N” means “When you cast this spell, you may reveal the top N cards of your library, or, if there are fewer than N cards in your library, you may reveal all the cards in your library. If you reveal cards from your library this way, you may cast any of those cards with the same name as this spell without paying their mana costs, then put all revealed cards not cast this way on the bottom of your library in any order.”
3723 3723
3724 702.59b If a spell has multiple instances of ipple, each tigges sepaately. 3724 702.59b If a spell has multiple instances of ripple, each triggers separately.
3725 3725
3726 702.60. Split Second 3726 702.60. Split Second
3727 3727
3728 702.60a Split second is a static ability that functions only while the spell with split second is on the stack. “Split second” means “As long as this spell is on the stack, playes can’t cast othe spells o activate abilities that aen’t mana abilities.” 3728 702.60a Split second is a static ability that functions only while the spell with split second is on the stack. “Split second” means “As long as this spell is on the stack, players can’t cast other spells or activate abilities that aren’t mana abilities.”
3729 3729
3730 702.60b Playes may activate mana abilities and take special actions while a spell with split second is on the stack. Tiggeed abilities tigge and ae put on the stack as nomal while a spell with split second is on the stack. 3730 702.60b Players may activate mana abilities and take special actions while a spell with split second is on the stack. Triggered abilities trigger and are put on the stack as normal while a spell with split second is on the stack.
3731 3731
3732 702.60c Multiple instances of split second on the same spell ae edundant. 3732 702.60c Multiple instances of split second on the same spell are redundant.
3733 3733
3734 702.61. Suspend 3734 702.61. Suspend
3735 3735
3736 702.61a Suspend is a keywod that epesents thee abilities. The fist is a static ability that functions while the cad with suspend is in a playe’s hand. The second and thid ae tiggeed abilities that function in the exile zone. “Suspend N—[cost]” means “If you could begin to cast this cad by putting it onto the stack fom you hand, you may pay [cost] and exile it with N time countes on it. This action doesn’t use the stack,” and “At the beginning of you upkeep, if this cad is suspended, emove a time counte fom it,” and “When the last time counte is emoved fom this cad, if it’s exiled, play it without paying its mana cost if able. If you can’t, it emains exiled. If you cast a ceatue spell this way, it gains haste until you lose contol of the spell o the pemanent it becomes.” 3736 702.61a Suspend is a keyword that represents three abilities. The first is a static ability that functions while the card with suspend is in a player’s hand. The second and third are triggered abilities that function in the exile zone. “Suspend N—[cost]” means “If you could begin to cast this card by putting it onto the stack from your hand, you may pay [cost] and exile it with N time counters on it. This action doesn’t use the stack,” and “At the beginning of your upkeep, if this card is suspended, remove a time counter from it,” and “When the last time counter is removed from this card, if it’s exiled, play it without paying its mana cost if able. If you can’t, it remains exiled. If you cast a creature spell this way, it gains haste until you lose control of the spell or the permanent it becomes.”
3737 3737
3738 702.61b A cad is “suspended” if it’s in the exile zone, has suspend, and has a time counte on it. 3738 702.61b A card is “suspended” if it’s in the exile zone, has suspend, and has a time counter on it.
3739 3739
3740 702.61c While detemining if you could begin to cast a cad with suspend, take into consideation any effects that would pohibit that cad fom being cast. 3740 702.61c While determining if you could begin to cast a card with suspend, take into consideration any effects that would prohibit that card from being cast.
3741 3741
3742 702.61d Casting a spell as an effect of its suspend ability follows the ules fo paying altenative costs in ules 601.2b and 601.2f–h. 3742 702.61d Casting a spell as an effect of its suspend ability follows the rules for paying alternative costs in rules 601.2b and 601.2f–h.
3743 3743
3744 702.62. Vanishing 3744 702.62. Vanishing
3745 3745
3746 702.62a Vanishing is a keywod that epesents thee abilities. “Vanishing N” means “This pemanent entes the battlefield with N time countes on it,” “At the beginning of you upkeep, if this pemanent has a time counte on it, emove a time counte fom it,” and “When the last time counte is emoved fom this pemanent, sacifice it.” 3746 702.62a Vanishing is a keyword that represents three abilities. “Vanishing N” means “This permanent enters the battlefield with N time counters on it,” “At the beginning of your upkeep, if this permanent has a time counter on it, remove a time counter from it,” and “When the last time counter is removed from this permanent, sacrifice it.”
3747 3747
3748 702.62b Vanishing without a numbe means “At the beginning of you upkeep, if this pemanent has a time counte on it, emove a time counte fom it” and “When the last time counte is emoved fom this pemanent, sacifice it.” 3748 702.62b Vanishing without a number means “At the beginning of your upkeep, if this permanent has a time counter on it, remove a time counter from it” and “When the last time counter is removed from this permanent, sacrifice it.”
3749 3749
3750 702.62c If a pemanent has multiple instances of vanishing, each woks sepaately. 3750 702.62c If a permanent has multiple instances of vanishing, each works separately.
3751 3751
3752 702.63. Absob 3752 702.63. Absorb
3753 3753
3754 702.63a Absob is a static ability. “Absob N” means “If a souce would deal damage to this ceatue, pevent N of that damage.” 3754 702.63a Absorb is a static ability. “Absorb N” means “If a source would deal damage to this creature, prevent N of that damage.”
3755 3755
3756 702.63b Each absob ability can pevent only N damage fom any one souce at any one time. It will apply sepaately to damage fom othe souces, o to damage dealt by the same souce at a diffeent time. 3756 702.63b Each absorb ability can prevent only N damage from any one source at any one time. It will apply separately to damage from other sources, or to damage dealt by the same source at a different time.
3757 3757
3758 702.63c If an object has multiple instances of absob, each applies sepaately. 3758 702.63c If an object has multiple instances of absorb, each applies separately.
3759 3759
3760 702.64. Aua Swap 3760 702.64. Aura Swap
3761 3761
3762 702.64a Aua swap is an activated ability of some Aua cads. “Aua swap [cost]” means “[Cost]: You may exchange this pemanent with an Aua cad in you hand.” 3762 702.64a Aura swap is an activated ability of some Aura cards. “Aura swap [cost]” means “[Cost]: You may exchange this permanent with an Aura card in your hand.”
3763 3763
3764 702.64b If eithe half of the exchange can’t be completed, the ability has no effect. 3764 702.64b If either half of the exchange can’t be completed, the ability has no effect.
3765 Example: You activate the aua swap ability of an Aua. The only Aua cad in you hand can’t enchant the pemanent that’s enchanted by the Aua with aua swap. The ability has no effect. 3765 Example: You activate the aura swap ability of an Aura. The only Aura card in your hand can’t enchant the permanent that’s enchanted by the Aura with aura swap. The ability has no effect.
3766 Example: You activate the aua swap ability of an Aua that you contol but you don’t own. The ability has no effect. 3766 Example: You activate the aura swap ability of an Aura that you control but you don’t own. The ability has no effect.
3767 3767
3768 702.65. Delve 3768 702.65. Delve
3769 3769
3770 702.65a Delve is a static ability that functions while the spell with delve is on the stack. “Delve” means “Fo each geneic mana in this spell’s total cost, you may exile a cad fom you gaveyad athe than pay that mana.” 3770 702.65a Delve is a static ability that functions while the spell with delve is on the stack. “Delve” means “For each generic mana in this spell’s total cost, you may exile a card from your graveyard rather than pay that mana.”
3771 3771
3772 702.65b The delve ability isn’t an additional o altenative cost and applies only afte the total cost of the spell with delve is detemined. 3772 702.65b The delve ability isn’t an additional or alternative cost and applies only after the total cost of the spell with delve is determined.
3773 3773
3774 702.65c Multiple instances of delve on the same spell ae edundant. 3774 702.65c Multiple instances of delve on the same spell are redundant.
3775 3775
3776 702.66. Fotify 3776 702.66. Fortify
3777 3777
3778 702.66a Fotify is an activated ability of Fotification cads. “Fotify [cost]” means “[Cost]: Attach this Fotification to taget land you contol. Activate this ability only any time you could cast a socey.” 3778 702.66a Fortify is an activated ability of Fortification cards. “Fortify [cost]” means “[Cost]: Attach this Fortification to target land you control. Activate this ability only any time you could cast a sorcery.”
3779 3779
3780 702.66b Fo moe infomation about Fotifications, see ule 301, “Atifacts.” 3780 702.66b For more information about Fortifications, see rule 301, “Artifacts.”
3781 3781
3782 702.66c If a Fotification has multiple instances of fotify, any of its fotify abilities may be used. 3782 702.66c If a Fortification has multiple instances of fortify, any of its fortify abilities may be used.
3783 3783
3784 702.67. Fenzy 3784 702.67. Frenzy
3785 3785
3786 702.67a Fenzy is a tiggeed ability. “Fenzy N” means “Wheneve this ceatue attacks and isn’t blocked, it gets +N/+0 until end of tun.” 3786 702.67a Frenzy is a triggered ability. “Frenzy N” means “Whenever this creature attacks and isn’t blocked, it gets +N/+0 until end of turn.”
3787 3787
3788 702.67b If a ceatue has multiple instances of fenzy, each tigges sepaately. 3788 702.67b If a creature has multiple instances of frenzy, each triggers separately.
3789 3789
3790 702.68. Gavestom 3790 702.68. Gravestorm
3791 3791
3792 702.68a Gavestom is a tiggeed ability that functions on the stack. “Gavestom” means “When you cast this spell, copy it fo each pemanent that was put into a gaveyad fom the battlefield this tun. If the spell has any tagets, you may choose new tagets fo any of the copies.” 3792 702.68a Gravestorm is a triggered ability that functions on the stack. “Gravestorm” means “When you cast this spell, copy it for each permanent that was put into a graveyard from the battlefield this turn. If the spell has any targets, you may choose new targets for any of the copies.”
3793 3793
3794 702.68b If a spell has multiple instances of gavestom, each tigges sepaately. 3794 702.68b If a spell has multiple instances of gravestorm, each triggers separately.
3795 3795
3796 702.69. Poisonous 3796 702.69. Poisonous
3797 3797
3798 702.69a Poisonous is a tiggeed ability. “Poisonous N” means “Wheneve this ceatue deals combat damage to a playe, that playe gets N poison countes.” (Fo infomation about poison countes, see ule 104.3d.) 3798 702.69a Poisonous is a triggered ability. “Poisonous N” means “Whenever this creature deals combat damage to a player, that player gets N poison counters.” (For information about poison counters, see rule 104.3d.)
3799 3799
3800 702.69b If a ceatue has multiple instances of poisonous, each tigges sepaately. 3800 702.69b If a creature has multiple instances of poisonous, each triggers separately.
3801 3801
3802 702.70. Tansfigue 3802 702.70. Transfigure
3803 3803
3804 702.70a Tansfigue is an activated ability. “Tansfigue [cost]” means “[Cost], Sacifice this pemanent: Seach you libay fo a ceatue cad with the same conveted mana cost as this pemanent and put it onto the battlefield. Then shuffle you libay. Activate this ability only any time you could cast a socey.” 3804 702.70a Transfigure is an activated ability. “Transfigure [cost]” means “[Cost], Sacrifice this permanent: Search your library for a creature card with the same converted mana cost as this permanent and put it onto the battlefield. Then shuffle your library. Activate this ability only any time you could cast a sorcery.”
3805 3805
3806 702.71. Champion 3806 702.71. Champion
3807 3807
3808 702.71a Champion epesents two tiggeed abilities. “Champion an [object]” means “When this pemanent entes the battlefield, sacifice it unless you exile anothe [object] you contol” and “When this pemanent leaves the battlefield, etun the exiled cad to the battlefield unde its owne’s contol.” 3808 702.71a Champion represents two triggered abilities. “Champion an [object]” means “When this permanent enters the battlefield, sacrifice it unless you exile another [object] you control” and “When this permanent leaves the battlefield, return the exiled card to the battlefield under its owner’s control.”
3809 3809
3810 702.71b The two abilities epesented by champion ae linked. See ule 607, “Linked Abilities.” 3810 702.71b The two abilities represented by champion are linked. See rule 607, “Linked Abilities.”
3811 3811
3812 702.71c A pemanent is “championed” by anothe pemanent if the latte exiles the fome as the diect esult of a champion ability. 3812 702.71c A permanent is “championed” by another permanent if the latter exiles the former as the direct result of a champion ability.
3813 3813
3814 702.72. Changeling 3814 702.72. Changeling
3815 3815
3816 702.72a Changeling is a chaacteistic-defining ability. “Changeling” means “This object is evey ceatue type.” This ability woks eveywhee, even outside the game. See ule 604.3. 3816 702.72a Changeling is a characteristic-defining ability. “Changeling” means “This object is every creature type.” This ability works everywhere, even outside the game. See rule 604.3.
3817 3817
3818 702.73. Evoke 3818 702.73. Evoke
3819 3819
3820 702.73a Evoke epesents two abilities: a static ability that functions in any zone fom which the cad with evoke can be cast and a tiggeed ability that functions on the battlefield. “Evoke [cost]” means “You may cast this cad by paying [cost] athe than paying its mana cost” and “When this pemanent entes the battlefield, if its evoke cost was paid, its contolle sacifices it.” Paying a cad’s evoke cost follows the ules fo paying altenative costs in ules 601.2b and 601.2f–h. 3820 702.73a Evoke represents two abilities: a static ability that functions in any zone from which the card with evoke can be cast and a triggered ability that functions on the battlefield. “Evoke [cost]” means “You may cast this card by paying [cost] rather than paying its mana cost” and “When this permanent enters the battlefield, if its evoke cost was paid, its controller sacrifices it.” Paying a card’s evoke cost follows the rules for paying alternative costs in rules 601.2b and 601.2f–h.
3821 3821
3822 702.74. Hideaway 3822 702.74. Hideaway
3823 3823
3824 702.74a Hideaway epesents a static ability and a tiggeed ability. “Hideaway” means “This pemanent entes the battlefield tapped” and “When this pemanent entes the battlefield, look at the top fou cads of you libay. Exile one of them face down and put the est on the bottom of you libay in any ode. The exiled cad gains ‘Any playe who has contolled the pemanent that exiled this cad may look at this cad in the exile zone.’” 3824 702.74a Hideaway represents a static ability and a triggered ability. “Hideaway” means “This permanent enters the battlefield tapped” and “When this permanent enters the battlefield, look at the top four cards of your library. Exile one of them face down and put the rest on the bottom of your library in any order. The exiled card gains ‘Any player who has controlled the permanent that exiled this card may look at this card in the exile zone.’”
3825 3825
3826 702.75. Powl 3826 702.75. Prowl
3827 3827
3828 702.75a Powl is a static ability that functions on the stack. “Powl [cost]” means “You may pay [cost] athe than pay this spell’s mana cost if a playe was dealt combat damage this tun by a souce that, at the time it dealt that damage, was unde you contol and had any of this spell’s ceatue types.” Paying a spell’s powl cost follows the ules fo paying altenative costs in ules 601.2b and 601.2f–h. 3828 702.75a Prowl is a static ability that functions on the stack. “Prowl [cost]” means “You may pay [cost] rather than pay this spell’s mana cost if a player was dealt combat damage this turn by a source that, at the time it dealt that damage, was under your control and had any of this spell’s creature types.” Paying a spell’s prowl cost follows the rules for paying alternative costs in rules 601.2b and 601.2f–h.
3829 3829
3830 702.76. Reinfoce 3830 702.76. Reinforce
3831 3831
3832 702.76a Reinfoce is an activated ability that functions only while the cad with einfoce is in a playe’s hand. “Reinfoce N—[cost]” means “[Cost], Discad this cad: Put N +1/+1 countes on taget ceatue.” 3832 702.76a Reinforce is an activated ability that functions only while the card with reinforce is in a player’s hand. “Reinforce N—[cost]” means “[Cost], Discard this card: Put N +1/+1 counters on target creature.”
3833 3833
3834 702.76b Although the einfoce ability can be activated only if the cad is in a playe’s hand, it continues to exist while the object is on the battlefield and in all othe zones. Theefoe objects with einfoce will be affected by effects that depend on objects having one o moe activated abilities. 3834 702.76b Although the reinforce ability can be activated only if the card is in a player’s hand, it continues to exist while the object is on the battlefield and in all other zones. Therefore objects with reinforce will be affected by effects that depend on objects having one or more activated abilities.
3835 3835
3836 702.77. Conspie 3836 702.77. Conspire
3837 3837
3838 702.77a Conspie is a keywod that epesents two abilities. The fist is a static ability that functions while the spell with conspie is on the stack. The second is a tiggeed ability that functions while the spell with conspie is on the stack. “Conspie” means “As an additional cost to cast this spell, you may tap two untapped ceatues you contol that each shae a colo with it” and “When you cast this spell, if its conspie cost was paid, copy it. If the spell has any tagets, you may choose new tagets fo the copy.” Paying a spell’s conspie cost follows the ules fo paying additional costs in ules 601.2b and 601.2f–h. 3838 702.77a Conspire is a keyword that represents two abilities. The first is a static ability that functions while the spell with conspire is on the stack. The second is a triggered ability that functions while the spell with conspire is on the stack. “Conspire” means “As an additional cost to cast this spell, you may tap two untapped creatures you control that each share a color with it” and “When you cast this spell, if its conspire cost was paid, copy it. If the spell has any targets, you may choose new targets for the copy.” Paying a spell’s conspire cost follows the rules for paying additional costs in rules 601.2b and 601.2f–h.
3839 3839
3840 702.77b If a spell has multiple instances of conspie, each is paid sepaately and tigges based on its own payment, not any othe instance of conspie. 3840 702.77b If a spell has multiple instances of conspire, each is paid separately and triggers based on its own payment, not any other instance of conspire.
3841 3841
3842 702.78. Pesist 3842 702.78. Persist
3843 3843
3844 702.78a Pesist is a tiggeed ability. “Pesist” means “When this pemanent is put into a gaveyad fom the battlefield, if it had no -1/-1 countes on it, etun it to the battlefield unde its owne’s contol with a -1/-1 counte on it.” 3844 702.78a Persist is a triggered ability. “Persist” means “When this permanent is put into a graveyard from the battlefield, if it had no -1/-1 counters on it, return it to the battlefield under its owner’s control with a -1/-1 counter on it.”
3845 3845
3846 702.79. Withe 3846 702.79. Wither
3847 3847
3848 702.79a Withe is a static ability. Damage dealt to a ceatue by a souce with withe isn’t maked on that ceatue. Rathe, it causes that souce’s contolle to put that many -1/-1 countes on that ceatue. See ule 120.3. 3848 702.79a Wither is a static ability. Damage dealt to a creature by a source with wither isn’t marked on that creature. Rather, it causes that source’s controller to put that many -1/-1 counters on that creature. See rule 120.3.
3849 3849
3850 702.79b If a pemanent leaves the battlefield befoe an effect causes it to deal damage, its last known infomation is used to detemine whethe it had withe. 3850 702.79b If a permanent leaves the battlefield before an effect causes it to deal damage, its last known information is used to determine whether it had wither.
3851 3851
3852 702.79c The withe ules function no matte what zone an object with withe deals damage fom. 3852 702.79c The wither rules function no matter what zone an object with wither deals damage from.
3853 3853
3854 702.79d Multiple instances of withe on the same object ae edundant. 3854 702.79d Multiple instances of wither on the same object are redundant.
3855 3855
3856 702.80. Retace 3856 702.80. Retrace
3857 3857
3858 702.80a Retace appeas on some instants and soceies. It epesents a static ability that functions while the cad with etace is in a playe’s gaveyad. “Retace” means “You may cast this cad fom you gaveyad by discading a land cad as an additional cost to cast it.” Casting a spell using its etace ability follows the ules fo paying additional costs in ules 601.2b and 601.2f–h. 3858 702.80a Retrace appears on some instants and sorceries. It represents a static ability that functions while the card with retrace is in a player’s graveyard. “Retrace” means “You may cast this card from your graveyard by discarding a land card as an additional cost to cast it.” Casting a spell using its retrace ability follows the rules for paying additional costs in rules 601.2b and 601.2f–h.
3859 3859
3860 702.81. Devou 3860 702.81. Devour
3861 3861
3862 702.81a Devou is a static ability. “Devou N” means “As this object entes the battlefield, you may sacifice any numbe of ceatues. This pemanent entes the battlefield with N +1/+1 countes on it fo each ceatue sacificed this way.” 3862 702.81a Devour is a static ability. “Devour N” means “As this object enters the battlefield, you may sacrifice any number of creatures. This permanent enters the battlefield with N +1/+1 counters on it for each creature sacrificed this way.”
3863 3863
3864 702.81b Some objects have abilities that efe to the numbe of ceatues the pemanent devoued. “It devoued” means “sacificed as a esult of its devou ability as it enteed the battlefield.” 3864 702.81b Some objects have abilities that refer to the number of creatures the permanent devoured. “It devoured” means “sacrificed as a result of its devour ability as it entered the battlefield.”
3865 3865
3866 702.82. Exalted 3866 702.82. Exalted
3867 3867
3868 702.82a Exalted is a tiggeed ability. “Exalted” means “Wheneve a ceatue you contol attacks alone, that ceatue gets +1/+1 until end of tun.” 3868 702.82a Exalted is a triggered ability. “Exalted” means “Whenever a creature you control attacks alone, that creature gets +1/+1 until end of turn.”
3869 3869
3870 702.82b A ceatue “attacks alone” if it’s the only ceatue declaed as an attacke in a given combat phase. See ule 506.5. 3870 702.82b A creature “attacks alone” if it’s the only creature declared as an attacker in a given combat phase. See rule 506.5.
3871 3871
3872 702.83. Uneath 3872 702.83. Unearth
3873 3873
3874 702.83a Uneath is an activated ability that functions while the cad with uneath is in a gaveyad. “Uneath [cost]” means “[Cost]: Retun this cad fom you gaveyad to the battlefield. It gains haste. Exile it at the beginning of the next end step. If it would leave the battlefield, exile it instead of putting it anywhee else. Activate this ability only any time you could cast a socey.” 3874 702.83a Unearth is an activated ability that functions while the card with unearth is in a graveyard. “Unearth [cost]” means “[Cost]: Return this card from your graveyard to the battlefield. It gains haste. Exile it at the beginning of the next end step. If it would leave the battlefield, exile it instead of putting it anywhere else. Activate this ability only any time you could cast a sorcery.”
3875 3875
3876 702.84. Cascade 3876 702.84. Cascade
3877 3877
3878 702.84a Cascade is a tiggeed ability that functions only while the spell with cascade is on the stack. “Cascade” means “When you cast this spell, exile cads fom the top of you libay until you exile a nonland cad whose conveted mana cost is less than this spell’s conveted mana cost. You may cast that cad without paying its mana cost. Then put all cads exiled this way that ween’t cast on the bottom of you libay in a andom ode.” 3878 702.84a Cascade is a triggered ability that functions only while the spell with cascade is on the stack. “Cascade” means “When you cast this spell, exile cards from the top of your library until you exile a nonland card whose converted mana cost is less than this spell’s converted mana cost. You may cast that card without paying its mana cost. Then put all cards exiled this way that weren’t cast on the bottom of your library in a random order.”
3879 3879
3880 702.84b If a spell has multiple instances of cascade, each tigges sepaately. 3880 702.84b If a spell has multiple instances of cascade, each triggers separately.
3881 3881
3882 702.85. Annihilato 3882 702.85. Annihilator
3883 3883
3884 702.85a Annihilato is a tiggeed ability. “Annihilato N” means “Wheneve this ceatue attacks, defending playe sacifices N pemanents.” 3884 702.85a Annihilator is a triggered ability. “Annihilator N” means “Whenever this creature attacks, defending player sacrifices N permanents.”
3885 3885
3886 702.85b If a ceatue has multiple instances of annihilato, each tigges sepaately. 3886 702.85b If a creature has multiple instances of annihilator, each triggers separately.
3887 3887
3888 702.86. Level Up 3888 702.86. Level Up
3889 3889
3890 702.86a Level up is an activated ability. “Level up [cost]” means “[Cost]: Put a level counte on this pemanent. Activate this ability only any time you could cast a socey.” 3890 702.86a Level up is an activated ability. “Level up [cost]” means “[Cost]: Put a level counter on this permanent. Activate this ability only any time you could cast a sorcery.”
3891 3891
3892 702.86b Each cad pinted with a level up ability is known as a levele cad. It has a nonstandad layout and includes two level symbols that ae themselves keywod abilities. See ule 710, “Levele Cads.” 3892 702.86b Each card printed with a level up ability is known as a leveler card. It has a nonstandard layout and includes two level symbols that are themselves keyword abilities. See rule 710, “Leveler Cards.”
3893 3893
3894 702.87. Rebound 3894 702.87. Rebound
3895 3895
3896 702.87a Rebound appeas on some instants and soceies. It epesents a static ability that functions while the spell is on the stack and may ceate a delayed tiggeed ability. “Rebound” means “If this spell was cast fom you hand, instead of putting it into you gaveyad as it esolves, exile it and, at the beginning of you next upkeep, you may cast this cad fom exile without paying its mana cost.” 3896 702.87a Rebound appears on some instants and sorceries. It represents a static ability that functions while the spell is on the stack and may create a delayed triggered ability. “Rebound” means “If this spell was cast from your hand, instead of putting it into your graveyard as it resolves, exile it and, at the beginning of your next upkeep, you may cast this card from exile without paying its mana cost.”
3897 3897
3898 702.87b Casting a cad without paying its mana cost as the esult of a ebound ability follows the ules fo paying altenative costs in ules 601.2b and 601.2f–h. 3898 702.87b Casting a card without paying its mana cost as the result of a rebound ability follows the rules for paying alternative costs in rules 601.2b and 601.2f–h.
3899 3899
3900 702.87c Multiple instances of ebound on the same spell ae edundant. 3900 702.87c Multiple instances of rebound on the same spell are redundant.
3901 3901
3902 702.88. Totem Amo 3902 702.88. Totem Armor
3903 3903
3904 702.88a Totem amo is a static ability that appeas on some Auas. “Totem amo” means “If enchanted pemanent would be destoyed, instead emove all damage maked on it and destoy this Aua.” 3904 702.88a Totem armor is a static ability that appears on some Auras. “Totem armor” means “If enchanted permanent would be destroyed, instead remove all damage marked on it and destroy this Aura.”
3905 3905
3906 702.89. Infect 3906 702.89. Infect
3907 3907
3908 702.89a Infect is a static ability. 3908 702.89a Infect is a static ability.
3909 3909
3910 702.89b Damage dealt to a playe by a souce with infect doesn’t cause that playe to lose life. Rathe, it causes that souce’s contolle to give the playe that many poison countes. See ule 120.3. 3910 702.89b Damage dealt to a player by a source with infect doesn’t cause that player to lose life. Rather, it causes that source’s controller to give the player that many poison counters. See rule 120.3.
3911 3911
3912 702.89c Damage dealt to a ceatue by a souce with infect isn’t maked on that ceatue. Rathe, it causes that souce’s contolle to put that many -1/-1 countes on that ceatue. See ule 120.3. 3912 702.89c Damage dealt to a creature by a source with infect isn’t marked on that creature. Rather, it causes that source’s controller to put that many -1/-1 counters on that creature. See rule 120.3.
3913 3913
3914 702.89d If a pemanent leaves the battlefield befoe an effect causes it to deal damage, its last known infomation is used to detemine whethe it had infect. 3914 702.89d If a permanent leaves the battlefield before an effect causes it to deal damage, its last known information is used to determine whether it had infect.
3915 3915
3916 702.89e The infect ules function no matte what zone an object with infect deals damage fom. 3916 702.89e The infect rules function no matter what zone an object with infect deals damage from.
3917 3917
3918 702.89f Multiple instances of infect on the same object ae edundant. 3918 702.89f Multiple instances of infect on the same object are redundant.
3919 3919
3920 702.90. Battle Cy 3920 702.90. Battle Cry
3921 3921
3922 702.90a Battle cy is a tiggeed ability. “Battle cy” means “Wheneve this ceatue attacks, each othe attacking ceatue gets +1/+0 until end of tun.” 3922 702.90a Battle cry is a triggered ability. “Battle cry” means “Whenever this creature attacks, each other attacking creature gets +1/+0 until end of turn.”
3923 3923
3924 702.90b If a ceatue has multiple instances of battle cy, each tigges sepaately. 3924 702.90b If a creature has multiple instances of battle cry, each triggers separately.
3925 3925
3926 702.91. Living Weapon 3926 702.91. Living Weapon
3927 3927
3928 702.91a Living weapon is a tiggeed ability. “Living weapon” means “When this Equipment entes the battlefield, ceate a 0/0 black Gem ceatue token, then attach this Equipment to it.” 3928 702.91a Living weapon is a triggered ability. “Living weapon” means “When this Equipment enters the battlefield, create a 0/0 black Germ creature token, then attach this Equipment to it.”
3929 3929
3930 702.92. Undying 3930 702.92. Undying
3931 3931
3932 702.92a Undying is a tiggeed ability. “Undying” means “When this pemanent is put into a gaveyad fom the battlefield, if it had no +1/+1 countes on it, etun it to the battlefield unde its owne’s contol with a +1/+1 counte on it.” 3932 702.92a Undying is a triggered ability. “Undying” means “When this permanent is put into a graveyard from the battlefield, if it had no +1/+1 counters on it, return it to the battlefield under its owner’s control with a +1/+1 counter on it.”
3933 3933
3934 702.93. Miacle 3934 702.93. Miracle
3935 3935
3936 702.93a Miacle is a static ability linked to a tiggeed ability (see ule 603.11). “Miacle [cost]” means “You may eveal this cad fom you hand as you daw it if it’s the fist cad you’ve dawn this tun. When you eveal this cad this way, you may cast it by paying [cost] athe than its mana cost.” 3936 702.93a Miracle is a static ability linked to a triggered ability (see rule 603.11). “Miracle [cost]” means “You may reveal this card from your hand as you draw it if it’s the first card you’ve drawn this turn. When you reveal this card this way, you may cast it by paying [cost] rather than its mana cost.”
3937 3937
3938 702.93b If a playe chooses to eveal a cad using its miacle ability, they play with that cad evealed until that cad leaves thei hand, that ability esolves, o that ability othewise leaves the stack. (See ule 701.15a.) 3938 702.93b If a player chooses to reveal a card using its miracle ability, they play with that card revealed until that card leaves their hand, that ability resolves, or that ability otherwise leaves the stack. (See rule 701.15a.)
3939 3939
3940 702.94. Soulbond 3940 702.94. Soulbond
3941 3941
3942 702.94a Soulbond is a keywod that epesents two tiggeed abilities. “Soulbond” means “When this ceatue entes the battlefield, if you contol both this ceatue and anothe ceatue and both ae unpaied, you may pai this ceatue with anothe unpaied ceatue you contol fo as long as both emain ceatues on the battlefield unde you contol” and “Wheneve anothe ceatue entes the battlefield unde you contol, if you contol both that ceatue and this one and both ae unpaied, you may pai that ceatue with this ceatue fo as long as both emain ceatues on the battlefield unde you contol.” 3942 702.94a Soulbond is a keyword that represents two triggered abilities. “Soulbond” means “When this creature enters the battlefield, if you control both this creature and another creature and both are unpaired, you may pair this creature with another unpaired creature you control for as long as both remain creatures on the battlefield under your control” and “Whenever another creature enters the battlefield under your control, if you control both that creature and this one and both are unpaired, you may pair that creature with this creature for as long as both remain creatures on the battlefield under your control.”
3943 3943
3944 702.94b A ceatue becomes “paied” with anothe as the esult of a soulbond ability. Abilities may efe to a paied ceatue, the ceatue anothe ceatue is paied with, o whethe a ceatue is paied. An “unpaied” ceatue is one that is not paied. 3944 702.94b A creature becomes “paired” with another as the result of a soulbond ability. Abilities may refer to a paired creature, the creature another creature is paired with, or whether a creature is paired. An “unpaired” creature is one that is not paired.
3945 3945
3946 702.94c When the soulbond ability esolves, if eithe object that would be paied is no longe a ceatue, no longe on the battlefield, o no longe unde the contol of the playe who contols the soulbond ability, neithe object becomes paied. 3946 702.94c When the soulbond ability resolves, if either object that would be paired is no longer a creature, no longer on the battlefield, or no longer under the control of the player who controls the soulbond ability, neither object becomes paired.
3947 3947
3948 702.94d A ceatue can be paied with only one othe ceatue. 3948 702.94d A creature can be paired with only one other creature.
3949 3949
3950 702.94e A paied ceatue becomes unpaied if any of the following occu: anothe playe gains contol of it o the ceatue it’s paied with; it o the ceatue it’s paied with stops being a ceatue; o it o the ceatue it’s paied with leaves the battlefield. 3950 702.94e A paired creature becomes unpaired if any of the following occur: another player gains control of it or the creature it’s paired with; it or the creature it’s paired with stops being a creature; or it or the creature it’s paired with leaves the battlefield.
3951 3951
3952 702.95. Oveload 3952 702.95. Overload
3953 3953
3954 702.95a Oveload is a keywod that epesents two static abilities that function while the spell with oveload is on the stack. Oveload [cost] means “You may choose to pay [cost] athe than pay this spell’s mana cost” and “If you chose to pay this spell’s oveload cost, change its text by eplacing all instances of the wod ‘taget’ with the wod ‘each.’” Using the oveload ability follows the ules fo paying altenative costs in ules 601.2b and 601.2f–h. 3954 702.95a Overload is a keyword that represents two static abilities that function while the spell with overload is on the stack. Overload [cost] means “You may choose to pay [cost] rather than pay this spell’s mana cost” and “If you chose to pay this spell’s overload cost, change its text by replacing all instances of the word ‘target’ with the word ‘each.’” Using the overload ability follows the rules for paying alternative costs in rules 601.2b and 601.2f–h.
3955 3955
3956 702.95b If a playe chooses to pay the oveload cost of a spell, that spell won’t equie any tagets. It may affect objects that couldn’t be chosen as legal tagets if the spell wee cast without its oveload cost being paid. 3956 702.95b If a player chooses to pay the overload cost of a spell, that spell won’t require any targets. It may affect objects that couldn’t be chosen as legal targets if the spell were cast without its overload cost being paid.
3957 3957
3958 702.95c Oveload’s second ability ceates a text-changing effect. See ule 612, “Text-Changing Effects.” 3958 702.95c Overload’s second ability creates a text-changing effect. See rule 612, “Text-Changing Effects.”
3959 3959
3960 702.96. Scavenge 3960 702.96. Scavenge
3961 3961
3962 702.96a Scavenge is an activated ability that functions only while the cad with scavenge is in a gaveyad. “Scavenge [cost]” means “[Cost], Exile this cad fom you gaveyad: Put a numbe of +1/+1 countes equal to the powe of the cad you exiled on taget ceatue. Activate this ability only any time you could cast a socey.” 3962 702.96a Scavenge is an activated ability that functions only while the card with scavenge is in a graveyard. “Scavenge [cost]” means “[Cost], Exile this card from your graveyard: Put a number of +1/+1 counters equal to the power of the card you exiled on target creature. Activate this ability only any time you could cast a sorcery.”
3963 3963
3964 702.97. Unleash 3964 702.97. Unleash
3965 3965
3966 702.97a Unleash is a keywod that epesents two static abilities. “Unleash” means “You may have this pemanent ente the battlefield with an additional +1/+1 counte on it” and “This pemanent can’t block as long as it has a +1/+1 counte on it.” 3966 702.97a Unleash is a keyword that represents two static abilities. “Unleash” means “You may have this permanent enter the battlefield with an additional +1/+1 counter on it” and “This permanent can’t block as long as it has a +1/+1 counter on it.”
3967 3967
3968 702.98. Ciphe 3968 702.98. Cipher
3969 3969
3970 702.98a Ciphe appeas on some instants and soceies. It epesents two abilities. The fist is a spell ability that functions while the spell with ciphe is on the stack. The second is a static ability that functions while the cad with ciphe is in the exile zone. “Ciphe” means “If this spell is epesented by a cad, you may exile this cad encoded on a ceatue you contol” and “Fo as long as this cad is encoded on that ceatue, that ceatue has ‘Wheneve this ceatue deals combat damage to a playe, you may copy the encoded cad and you may cast the copy without paying its mana cost.’” 3970 702.98a Cipher appears on some instants and sorceries. It represents two abilities. The first is a spell ability that functions while the spell with cipher is on the stack. The second is a static ability that functions while the card with cipher is in the exile zone. “Cipher” means “If this spell is represented by a card, you may exile this card encoded on a creature you control” and “For as long as this card is encoded on that creature, that creature has ‘Whenever this creature deals combat damage to a player, you may copy the encoded card and you may cast the copy without paying its mana cost.’”
3971 3971
3972 702.98b The tem “encoded” descibes the elationship between the cad with ciphe while in the exile zone and the ceatue chosen when the spell epesented by that cad esolves. 3972 702.98b The term “encoded” describes the relationship between the card with cipher while in the exile zone and the creature chosen when the spell represented by that card resolves.
3973 3973
3974 702.98c The cad with ciphe emains encoded on the chosen ceatue as long as the cad with ciphe emains exiled and the ceatue emains on the battlefield. The cad emains encoded on that object even if it changes contolle o stops being a ceatue, as long as it emains on the battlefield. 3974 702.98c The card with cipher remains encoded on the chosen creature as long as the card with cipher remains exiled and the creature remains on the battlefield. The card remains encoded on that object even if it changes controller or stops being a creature, as long as it remains on the battlefield.
3975 3975
3976 702.99. Evolve 3976 702.99. Evolve
3977 3977
3978 702.99a Evolve is a tiggeed ability. “Evolve” means “Wheneve a ceatue entes the battlefield unde you contol, if that ceatue’s powe is geate than this ceatue’s powe and/o that ceatue’s toughness is geate than this ceatue’s toughness, put a +1/+1 counte on this ceatue.” 3978 702.99a Evolve is a triggered ability. “Evolve” means “Whenever a creature enters the battlefield under your control, if that creature’s power is greater than this creature’s power and/or that creature’s toughness is greater than this creature’s toughness, put a +1/+1 counter on this creature.”
3979 3979
3980 702.99b A ceatue “evolves” when one o moe +1/+1 countes ae put on it as a esult of its evolve ability esolving. 3980 702.99b A creature “evolves” when one or more +1/+1 counters are put on it as a result of its evolve ability resolving.
3981 3981
3982 702.99c A ceatue can’t have a geate powe o toughness than a nonceatue pemanent. 3982 702.99c A creature can’t have a greater power or toughness than a noncreature permanent.
3983 3983
3984 702.99d If a ceatue has multiple instances of evolve, each tigges sepaately. 3984 702.99d If a creature has multiple instances of evolve, each triggers separately.
3985 3985
3986 702.100. Extot 3986 702.100. Extort
3987 3987
3988 702.100a Extot is a tiggeed ability. “Extot” means “Wheneve you cast a spell, you may pay {W/B}. If you do, each opponent loses 1 life and you gain life equal to the total life lost this way.” 3988 702.100a Extort is a triggered ability. “Extort” means “Whenever you cast a spell, you may pay {W/B}. If you do, each opponent loses 1 life and you gain life equal to the total life lost this way.”
3989 3989
3990 702.100b If a pemanent has multiple instances of extot, each tigges sepaately. 3990 702.100b If a permanent has multiple instances of extort, each triggers separately.
3991 3991
3992 702.101. Fuse 3992 702.101. Fuse
3993 3993
3994 702.101a Fuse is a static ability found on some split cads (see ule 708, “Split Cads”) that applies while the cad with fuse is in a playe’s hand. If a playe casts a split cad with fuse fom thei hand, the playe may choose to cast both halves of that split cad athe than choose one half. This choice is made befoe putting the split cad with fuse onto the stack. The esulting spell is a fused split spell. 3994 702.101a Fuse is a static ability found on some split cards (see rule 708, “Split Cards”) that applies while the card with fuse is in a player’s hand. If a player casts a split card with fuse from their hand, the player may choose to cast both halves of that split card rather than choose one half. This choice is made before putting the split card with fuse onto the stack. The resulting spell is a fused split spell.
3995 3995
3996 702.101b A fused split spell has the combined chaacteistics of its two halves. (See ule 708.4.) 3996 702.101b A fused split spell has the combined characteristics of its two halves. (See rule 708.4.)
3997 3997
3998 702.101c The total cost of a fused split spell includes the mana cost of each half. 3998 702.101c The total cost of a fused split spell includes the mana cost of each half.
3999 3999
4000 702.101d As a fused split spell esolves, the contolle of the spell follows the instuctions of the left half and then follows the instuctions of the ight half. 4000 702.101d As a fused split spell resolves, the controller of the spell follows the instructions of the left half and then follows the instructions of the right half.
4001 4001
4002 702.102. Bestow 4002 702.102. Bestow
4003 4003
4004 702.102a Bestow epesents two static abilities, one that functions while the cad with bestow is on the stack and anothe that functions both while it’s on the stack and while it’s on the battlefield. “Bestow [cost]” means “You may cast this cad by paying [cost] athe than its mana cost.” and “If you chose to pay this spell’s bestow cost, it becomes an Aua enchantment and gains enchant ceatue. These effects last until one of two things happens: this spell has an illegal taget as it esolves o the pemanent this spell becomes, becomes unattached.” Paying a cad’s bestow cost follows the ules fo paying altenative costs in ules 601.2b and 601.2f–h. 4004 702.102a Bestow represents two static abilities, one that functions while the card with bestow is on the stack and another that functions both while it’s on the stack and while it’s on the battlefield. “Bestow [cost]” means “You may cast this card by paying [cost] rather than its mana cost.” and “If you chose to pay this spell’s bestow cost, it becomes an Aura enchantment and gains enchant creature. These effects last until one of two things happens: this spell has an illegal target as it resolves or the permanent this spell becomes, becomes unattached.” Paying a card’s bestow cost follows the rules for paying alternative costs in rules 601.2b and 601.2f–h.
4005 4005
4006 702.102b If a spell’s contolle chooses to pay its bestow cost, that playe chooses a legal taget fo that Aua spell as defined by its enchant ceatue ability and ule 601.2c. See also ule 303.4. 4006 702.102b If a spell’s controller chooses to pay its bestow cost, that player chooses a legal target for that Aura spell as defined by its enchant creature ability and rule 601.2c. See also rule 303.4.
4007 4007
4008 702.102c The check fo whethe a spell can legally be cast happens afte its contolle has chosen whethe to pay its bestow cost; see ule 601.2e. 4008 702.102c The check for whether a spell can legally be cast happens after its controller has chosen whether to pay its bestow cost; see rule 601.2e.
4009 Example: Aethe Stom is an enchantment with the ability “Ceatue spells can’t be cast.” This effect doesn’t stop a ceatue cad with bestow fom being cast fo its bestow cost because the spell is an Aua enchantment spell, not an enchantment ceatue spell, when the game checks whethe the spell is illegal. 4009 Example: Aether Storm is an enchantment with the ability “Creature spells can’t be cast.” This effect doesn’t stop a creature card with bestow from being cast for its bestow cost because the spell is an Aura enchantment spell, not an enchantment creature spell, when the game checks whether the spell is illegal.
4010 4010
4011 702.102d As an Aua spell with bestow begins esolving, if its taget is illegal, the effect making it an Aua spell ends. It continues esolving as a ceatue spell and will be put onto the battlefield unde the contol of the spell’s contolle. This is an exception to ule 608.3a. 4011 702.102d As an Aura spell with bestow begins resolving, if its target is illegal, the effect making it an Aura spell ends. It continues resolving as a creature spell and will be put onto the battlefield under the control of the spell’s controller. This is an exception to rule 608.3a.
4012 4012
4013 702.102e If an Aua with bestow is attached to an illegal object o playe, it becomes unattached. This is an exception to ule 704.5m. 4013 702.102e If an Aura with bestow is attached to an illegal object or player, it becomes unattached. This is an exception to rule 704.5m.
4014 4014
4015 702.102f If an Aua with bestow phases in unattached, the effects of casting it with its bestow ability end. See ule 702.25, “Phasing.” 4015 702.102f If an Aura with bestow phases in unattached, the effects of casting it with its bestow ability end. See rule 702.25, “Phasing.”
4016 4016
4017 702.103. Tibute 4017 702.103. Tribute
4018 4018
4019 702.103a Tibute is a static ability that functions as the ceatue with tibute is enteing the battlefield. “Tibute N” means “As this ceatue entes the battlefield, choose an opponent. That playe may put an additional N +1/+1 countes on it as it entes the battlefield.” 4019 702.103a Tribute is a static ability that functions as the creature with tribute is entering the battlefield. “Tribute N” means “As this creature enters the battlefield, choose an opponent. That player may put an additional N +1/+1 counters on it as it enters the battlefield.”
4020 4020
4021 702.103b Objects with tibute have tiggeed abilities that check “if tibute wasn’t paid.” This condition is tue if the opponent chosen as a esult of the tibute ability didn’t have the ceatue ente the battlefield with +1/+1 countes as specified by the ceatue’s tibute ability. 4021 702.103b Objects with tribute have triggered abilities that check “if tribute wasn’t paid.” This condition is true if the opponent chosen as a result of the tribute ability didn’t have the creature enter the battlefield with +1/+1 counters as specified by the creature’s tribute ability.
4022 4022
4023 702.104. Dethone 4023 702.104. Dethrone
4024 4024
4025 702.104a Dethone is a tiggeed ability. “Dethone” means “Wheneve this ceatue attacks the playe with the most life o tied fo most life, put a +1/+1 counte on this ceatue.” 4025 702.104a Dethrone is a triggered ability. “Dethrone” means “Whenever this creature attacks the player with the most life or tied for most life, put a +1/+1 counter on this creature.”
4026 4026
4027 702.104b If a ceatue has multiple instances of dethone, each tigges sepaately. 4027 702.104b If a creature has multiple instances of dethrone, each triggers separately.
4028 4028
4029 702.105. Hidden Agenda 4029 702.105. Hidden Agenda
4030 4030
4031 702.105a Hidden agenda is a static ability that functions as a conspiacy cad with hidden agenda is put into the command zone. “Hidden agenda” means “As you put this conspiacy cad into the command zone, tun it face down and secetly choose a cad name.” 4031 702.105a Hidden agenda is a static ability that functions as a conspiracy card with hidden agenda is put into the command zone. “Hidden agenda” means “As you put this conspiracy card into the command zone, turn it face down and secretly choose a card name.”
4032 4032
4033 702.105b To secetly choose a cad name, note that name on a piece of pape kept with the face-down conspiacy cad. 4033 702.105b To secretly choose a card name, note that name on a piece of paper kept with the face-down conspiracy card.
4034 4034
4035 702.105c Any time you have pioity, you may tun a face-down conspiacy cad you contol in the command zone face up. This is a special action. Doing so will eveal the chosen name. See ule 116.2h. 4035 702.105c Any time you have priority, you may turn a face-down conspiracy card you control in the command zone face up. This is a special action. Doing so will reveal the chosen name. See rule 116.2h.
4036 4036
4037 702.105d Hidden agenda and anothe ability of the object with hidden agenda that efes to “the chosen name” ae linked. The second ability efes only to the cad name chosen as a esult of that object’s hidden agenda ability. See ule 607.2d. 4037 702.105d Hidden agenda and another ability of the object with hidden agenda that refers to “the chosen name” are linked. The second ability refers only to the card name chosen as a result of that object’s hidden agenda ability. See rule 607.2d.
4038 4038
4039 702.105e If a playe leaves the game, all face-down conspiacy cads contolled by that playe must be evealed to all playes. At the end of each game, all face-down conspiacy cads must be evealed to all playes. 4039 702.105e If a player leaves the game, all face-down conspiracy cards controlled by that player must be revealed to all players. At the end of each game, all face-down conspiracy cards must be revealed to all players.
4040 4040
4041 702.105f Double agenda is a vaiant of the hidden agenda ability. As you put a conspiacy cad with double agenda into the command zone, you secetly name two diffeent cads athe than one. You don’t eveal that moe than one name was secetly chosen until you eveal the chosen names. 4041 702.105f Double agenda is a variant of the hidden agenda ability. As you put a conspiracy card with double agenda into the command zone, you secretly name two different cards rather than one. You don’t reveal that more than one name was secretly chosen until you reveal the chosen names.
4042 4042
4043 702.106. Outlast 4043 702.106. Outlast
4044 4044
4045 702.106a Outlast is an activated ability. “Outlast [cost]” means “[Cost], {T}: Put a +1/+1 counte on this ceatue. Activate this ability only any time you could cast a socey.” 4045 702.106a Outlast is an activated ability. “Outlast [cost]” means “[Cost], {T}: Put a +1/+1 counter on this creature. Activate this ability only any time you could cast a sorcery.”
4046 4046
4047 702.107. Powess 4047 702.107. Prowess
4048 4048
4049 702.107a Powess is a tiggeed ability. “Powess” means “Wheneve you cast a nonceatue spell, this ceatue gets +1/+1 until end of tun.” 4049 702.107a Prowess is a triggered ability. “Prowess” means “Whenever you cast a noncreature spell, this creature gets +1/+1 until end of turn.”
4050 4050
4051 702.107b If a ceatue has multiple instances of powess, each tigges sepaately. 4051 702.107b If a creature has multiple instances of prowess, each triggers separately.
4052 4052
4053 702.108. Dash 4053 702.108. Dash
4054 4054
4055 702.108a Dash epesents thee abilities: two static abilities that function while the cad with dash is on the stack, one of which may ceate a delayed tiggeed ability, and a static ability that functions while the object with dash is on the battlefield. “Dash [cost]” means “You may cast this cad by paying [cost] athe than its mana cost,” “If this spell’s dash cost was paid, etun the pemanent this spell becomes to its owne’s hand at the beginning of the next end step,” and “As long as this pemanent’s dash cost was paid, it has haste.” Paying a cad’s dash cost follows the ules fo paying altenative costs in ules 601.2b and 601.2f–h. 4055 702.108a Dash represents three abilities: two static abilities that function while the card with dash is on the stack, one of which may create a delayed triggered ability, and a static ability that functions while the object with dash is on the battlefield. “Dash [cost]” means “You may cast this card by paying [cost] rather than its mana cost,” “If this spell’s dash cost was paid, return the permanent this spell becomes to its owner’s hand at the beginning of the next end step,” and “As long as this permanent’s dash cost was paid, it has haste.” Paying a card’s dash cost follows the rules for paying alternative costs in rules 601.2b and 601.2f–h.
4056 4056
4057 702.109. Exploit 4057 702.109. Exploit
4058 4058
4059 702.109a Exploit is a tiggeed ability. “Exploit” means “When this ceatue entes the battlefield, you may sacifice a ceatue.” 4059 702.109a Exploit is a triggered ability. “Exploit” means “When this creature enters the battlefield, you may sacrifice a creature.”
4060 4060
4061 702.109b A ceatue with exploit “exploits a ceatue” when the contolle of the exploit ability sacifices a ceatue as that ability esolves. 4061 702.109b A creature with exploit “exploits a creature” when the controller of the exploit ability sacrifices a creature as that ability resolves.
4062 4062
4063 702.110. Menace 4063 702.110. Menace
4064 4064
4065 702.110a Menace is an evasion ability. 4065 702.110a Menace is an evasion ability.
4066 4066
4067 702.110b A ceatue with menace can’t be blocked except by two o moe ceatues. (See ule 509, “Declae Blockes Step.”) 4067 702.110b A creature with menace can’t be blocked except by two or more creatures. (See rule 509, “Declare Blockers Step.”)
4068 4068
4069 702.110c Multiple instances of menace on the same ceatue ae edundant. 4069 702.110c Multiple instances of menace on the same creature are redundant.
4070 4070
4071 702.111. Renown 4071 702.111. Renown
4072 4072
4073 702.111a Renown is a tiggeed ability. “Renown N” means “When this ceatue deals combat damage to a playe, if it isn’t enowned, put N +1/+1 countes on it and it becomes enowned.” 4073 702.111a Renown is a triggered ability. “Renown N” means “When this creature deals combat damage to a player, if it isn’t renowned, put N +1/+1 counters on it and it becomes renowned.”
4074 4074
4075 702.111b Renowned is a designation that has no ules meaning othe than to act as a make that the enown ability and othe spells and abilities can identify. Only pemanents can be o become enowned. Once a pemanent becomes enowned, it stays enowned until it leaves the battlefield. Renowned is neithe an ability no pat of the pemanent’s copiable values. 4075 702.111b Renowned is a designation that has no rules meaning other than to act as a marker that the renown ability and other spells and abilities can identify. Only permanents can be or become renowned. Once a permanent becomes renowned, it stays renowned until it leaves the battlefield. Renowned is neither an ability nor part of the permanent’s copiable values.
4076 4076
4077 702.111c If a ceatue has multiple instances of enown, each tigges sepaately. The fist such ability to esolve will cause the ceatue to become enowned, and subsequent abilities will have no effect. (See ule 603.4) 4077 702.111c If a creature has multiple instances of renown, each triggers separately. The first such ability to resolve will cause the creature to become renowned, and subsequent abilities will have no effect. (See rule 603.4)
4078 4078
4079 702.112. Awaken 4079 702.112. Awaken
4080 4080
4081 702.112a Awaken appeas on some instants and soceies. It epesents two abilities: a static ability that functions while the spell with awaken is on the stack and a spell ability. “Awaken N—[cost]” means “You may pay [cost] athe than pay this spell’s mana cost as you cast this spell” and “If this spell’s awaken cost was paid, put N +1/+1 countes on taget land you contol. That land becomes a 0/0 Elemental ceatue with haste. It’s still a land.” Paying a spell’s awaken cost follows the ules fo paying altenative costs in ules 601.2b and 601.2f–h. 4081 702.112a Awaken appears on some instants and sorceries. It represents two abilities: a static ability that functions while the spell with awaken is on the stack and a spell ability. “Awaken N—[cost]” means “You may pay [cost] rather than pay this spell’s mana cost as you cast this spell” and “If this spell’s awaken cost was paid, put N +1/+1 counters on target land you control. That land becomes a 0/0 Elemental creature with haste. It’s still a land.” Paying a spell’s awaken cost follows the rules for paying alternative costs in rules 601.2b and 601.2f–h.
4082 4082
4083 702.112b The contolle of a spell with awaken chooses the taget of the awaken spell ability only if that playe chose to pay the spell’s awaken cost. Othewise the spell is cast as if it didn’t have that taget. 4083 702.112b The controller of a spell with awaken chooses the target of the awaken spell ability only if that player chose to pay the spell’s awaken cost. Otherwise the spell is cast as if it didn’t have that target.
4084 4084
4085 702.113. Devoid 4085 702.113. Devoid
4086 4086
4087 702.113a Devoid is a chaacteistic-defining ability. “Devoid” means “This object is cololess.” This ability functions eveywhee, even outside the game. See ule 604.3. 4087 702.113a Devoid is a characteristic-defining ability. “Devoid” means “This object is colorless.” This ability functions everywhere, even outside the game. See rule 604.3.
4088 4088
4089 702.114. Ingest 4089 702.114. Ingest
4090 4090
4091 702.114a Ingest is a tiggeed ability. “Ingest” means “Wheneve this ceatue deals combat damage to a playe, that playe exiles the top cad of thei libay.” 4091 702.114a Ingest is a triggered ability. “Ingest” means “Whenever this creature deals combat damage to a player, that player exiles the top card of their library.”
4092 4092
4093 702.114b If a ceatue has multiple instances of ingest, each tigges sepaately. 4093 702.114b If a creature has multiple instances of ingest, each triggers separately.
4094 4094
4095 702.115. Myiad 4095 702.115. Myriad
4096 4096
4097 702.115a Myiad is a tiggeed ability that may also ceate a delayed tiggeed ability. “Myiad” means “Wheneve this ceatue attacks, fo each opponent othe than defending playe, you may ceate a token that’s a copy of this ceatue that’s tapped and attacking that playe o a planeswalke they contol. If one o moe tokens ae ceated this way, exile the tokens at end of combat.” 4097 702.115a Myriad is a triggered ability that may also create a delayed triggered ability. “Myriad” means “Whenever this creature attacks, for each opponent other than defending player, you may create a token that’s a copy of this creature that’s tapped and attacking that player or a planeswalker they control. If one or more tokens are created this way, exile the tokens at end of combat.”
4098 4098
4099 702.115b If a ceatue has multiple instances of myiad, each tigges sepaately. 4099 702.115b If a creature has multiple instances of myriad, each triggers separately.
4100 4100
4101 702.116. Suge 4101 702.116. Surge
4102 4102
4103 702.116a Suge is a static ability that functions while the spell with suge is on the stack. “Suge [cost]” means “You may pay [cost] athe than pay this spell’s mana cost as you cast this spell if you o one of you teammates has cast anothe spell this tun.” Paying a spell’s suge cost follows the ules fo paying altenative costs in ules 601.2b and 601.2f–h. 4103 702.116a Surge is a static ability that functions while the spell with surge is on the stack. “Surge [cost]” means “You may pay [cost] rather than pay this spell’s mana cost as you cast this spell if you or one of your teammates has cast another spell this turn.” Paying a spell’s surge cost follows the rules for paying alternative costs in rules 601.2b and 601.2f–h.
4104 4104
4105 702.117. Skulk 4105 702.117. Skulk
4106 4106
4107 702.117a Skulk is an evasion ability. 4107 702.117a Skulk is an evasion ability.
4108 4108
4109 702.117b A ceatue with skulk can’t be blocked by ceatues with geate powe. (See ule 509, “Declae Blockes Step.”) 4109 702.117b A creature with skulk can’t be blocked by creatures with greater power. (See rule 509, “Declare Blockers Step.”)
4110 4110
4111 702.117c Multiple instances of skulk on the same ceatue ae edundant. 4111 702.117c Multiple instances of skulk on the same creature are redundant.
4112 4112
4113 702.118. Emege 4113 702.118. Emerge
4114 4114
4115 702.118a Emege epesents two static abilities that function while the spell with emege is on the stack. “Emege [cost]” means “You may cast this spell by paying [cost] and sacificing a ceatue athe than paying its mana cost” and “If you chose to pay this spell’s emege cost, its total cost is educed by an amount of geneic mana equal to the sacificed ceatue’s conveted mana cost.” Paying a cad’s emege cost follows the ules fo paying altenative costs in ules 601.2b and 601.2f–h. 4115 702.118a Emerge represents two static abilities that function while the spell with emerge is on the stack. “Emerge [cost]” means “You may cast this spell by paying [cost] and sacrificing a creature rather than paying its mana cost” and “If you chose to pay this spell’s emerge cost, its total cost is reduced by an amount of generic mana equal to the sacrificed creature’s converted mana cost.” Paying a card’s emerge cost follows the rules for paying alternative costs in rules 601.2b and 601.2f–h.
4116 4116
4117 702.118b You choose which ceatue to sacifice as you choose to pay a spell’s emege cost (see ule 601.2b), and you sacifice that ceatue as you pay the total cost (see ule 601.2h). 4117 702.118b You choose which creature to sacrifice as you choose to pay a spell’s emerge cost (see rule 601.2b), and you sacrifice that creature as you pay the total cost (see rule 601.2h).
4118 4118
4119 702.119. Escalate 4119 702.119. Escalate
4120 4120
4121 702.119a Escalate is a static ability of modal spells (see ule 700.2) that functions while the spell with escalate is on the stack. “Escalate [cost]” means “Fo each mode you choose beyond the fist as you cast this spell, you pay an additional [cost].” Paying a spell’s escalate cost follows the ules fo paying additional costs in ules 601.2f–h. 4121 702.119a Escalate is a static ability of modal spells (see rule 700.2) that functions while the spell with escalate is on the stack. “Escalate [cost]” means “For each mode you choose beyond the first as you cast this spell, you pay an additional [cost].” Paying a spell’s escalate cost follows the rules for paying additional costs in rules 601.2f–h.
4122 4122
4123 702.120. Melee 4123 702.120. Melee
4124 4124
4125 702.120a Melee is a tiggeed ability. “Melee” means “Wheneve this ceatue attacks, it gets +1/+1 until end of tun fo each opponent you attacked with a ceatue this combat.” 4125 702.120a Melee is a triggered ability. “Melee” means “Whenever this creature attacks, it gets +1/+1 until end of turn for each opponent you attacked with a creature this combat.”
4126 4126
4127 702.120b If a ceatue has multiple instances of melee, each tigges sepaately. 4127 702.120b If a creature has multiple instances of melee, each triggers separately.
4128 4128
4129 702.121. Cew 4129 702.121. Crew
4130 4130
4131 702.121a Cew is an activated ability of Vehicle cads. “Cew N” means “Tap any numbe of untapped ceatues you contol with total powe N o geate: This pemanent becomes an atifact ceatue until end of tun.” 4131 702.121a Crew is an activated ability of Vehicle cards. “Crew N” means “Tap any number of untapped creatures you control with total power N or greater: This permanent becomes an artifact creature until end of turn.”
4132 4132
4133 702.121b A ceatue “cews a Vehicle” when it’s tapped to pay the cost to activate a Vehicle’s cew ability. 4133 702.121b A creature “crews a Vehicle” when it’s tapped to pay the cost to activate a Vehicle’s crew ability.
4134 4134
4135 702.121c If an effect states that a ceatue “can’t cew Vehicles,” that ceatue can’t be tapped to pay the cew cost of a Vehicle. 4135 702.121c If an effect states that a creature “can’t crew Vehicles,” that creature can’t be tapped to pay the crew cost of a Vehicle.
4136 4136
4137 702.122. Fabicate 4137 702.122. Fabricate
4138 4138
4139 702.122a Fabicate is a tiggeed ability. “Fabicate N” means “When this pemanent entes the battlefield, you may put N +1/+1 countes on it. If you don’t, ceate N 1/1 cololess Sevo atifact ceatue tokens.” 4139 702.122a Fabricate is a triggered ability. “Fabricate N” means “When this permanent enters the battlefield, you may put N +1/+1 counters on it. If you don’t, create N 1/1 colorless Servo artifact creature tokens.”
4140 4140
4141 702.122b If a pemanent has multiple instances of fabicate, each tigges sepaately. 4141 702.122b If a permanent has multiple instances of fabricate, each triggers separately.
4142 4142
4143 702.123. Patne 4143 702.123. Partner
4144 4144
4145 702.123a Patne is an ability that modifies the ules fo deck constuction in the Commande vaiant (see ule 903), and it functions befoe the game begins. Rathe than a single legenday ceatue cad, you may designate two legenday ceatue cads as you commande if each has patne. 4145 702.123a Partner is an ability that modifies the rules for deck construction in the Commander variant (see rule 903), and it functions before the game begins. Rather than a single legendary creature card, you may designate two legendary creature cards as your commander if each has partner.
4146 4146
4147 702.123b You deck must contain exactly 100 cads, including its two commandes. Both commandes begin the game in the command zone. 4147 702.123b Your deck must contain exactly 100 cards, including its two commanders. Both commanders begin the game in the command zone.
4148 4148
4149 702.123c A ule o effect that efes to you commande’s colo identity efes to the combined colo identities of you two commandes. See ule 903.4. 4149 702.123c A rule or effect that refers to your commander’s color identity refers to the combined color identities of your two commanders. See rule 903.4.
4150 4150
4151 702.123d Except fo detemining the colo identity of you commande, the two commandes function independently. When casting a commande with patne, ignoe how many times you othe commande has been cast. When detemining whethe a playe has been dealt 21 o moe combat damage by the same commande, conside damage fom each of you two commandes sepaately. See ule 903.11a. 4151 702.123d Except for determining the color identity of your commander, the two commanders function independently. When casting a commander with partner, ignore how many times your other commander has been cast. When determining whether a player has been dealt 21 or more combat damage by the same commander, consider damage from each of your two commanders separately. See rule 903.11a.
4152 4152
4153 702.123e If an effect efes to you commande while you have two commandes, it efes to eithe one. If an effect causes you to pefom an action on you commande and it could affect both, you choose which it efes to at the time the effect is applied. 4153 702.123e If an effect refers to your commander while you have two commanders, it refers to either one. If an effect causes you to perform an action on your commander and it could affect both, you choose which it refers to at the time the effect is applied.
4154 4154
4155 702.123f “Patne with [name]” is a vaiant of the patne ability. “Patne with [name]” epesents two abilities. One is a static ability that modifies the ules fo deck constuction. Rathe than a single legenday ceatue cad, you may designate two legenday ceatue cads as you commande if each has a “patne with [name]” ability with the othe’s name. You can’t designate two legenday cads as you commande if one has a “patne with [name]” ability and the othe isn’t the named cad. The othe ability epesented by “patne with [name]” is a tiggeed ability that means “When this pemanent entes the battlefield, taget playe may seach thei libay fo a cad named [name], eveal it, put it into thei hand, then shuffle thei libay.” 4155 702.123f “Partner with [name]” is a variant of the partner ability. “Partner with [name]” represents two abilities. One is a static ability that modifies the rules for deck construction. Rather than a single legendary creature card, you may designate two legendary creature cards as your commander if each has a “partner with [name]” ability with the other’s name. You can’t designate two legendary cards as your commander if one has a “partner with [name]” ability and the other isn’t the named card. The other ability represented by “partner with [name]” is a triggered ability that means “When this permanent enters the battlefield, target player may search their library for a card named [name], reveal it, put it into their hand, then shuffle their library.”
4156 4156
4157 702.124. Undaunted 4157 702.124. Undaunted
4158 4158
4159 702.124a Undaunted is a static ability that functions while the spell with undaunted is on the stack. Undaunted means “This spell costs {1} less to cast fo each opponent you have.” 4159 702.124a Undaunted is a static ability that functions while the spell with undaunted is on the stack. Undaunted means “This spell costs {1} less to cast for each opponent you have.”
4160 4160
4161 702.124b Playes who have left the game ae not counted when detemining how many opponents you have. 4161 702.124b Players who have left the game are not counted when determining how many opponents you have.
4162 4162
4163 702.124c If a spell has multiple instances of undaunted, each of them applies. 4163 702.124c If a spell has multiple instances of undaunted, each of them applies.
4164 4164
4165 702.125. Impovise 4165 702.125. Improvise
4166 4166
4167 702.125a Impovise is a static ability that functions while the spell with impovise is on the stack. “Impovise” means “Fo each geneic mana in this spell’s total cost, you may tap an untapped atifact you contol athe than pay that mana.” 4167 702.125a Improvise is a static ability that functions while the spell with improvise is on the stack. “Improvise” means “For each generic mana in this spell’s total cost, you may tap an untapped artifact you control rather than pay that mana.”
4168 4168
4169 702.125b The impovise ability isn’t an additional o altenative cost and applies only afte the total cost of the spell with impovise is detemined. 4169 702.125b The improvise ability isn’t an additional or alternative cost and applies only after the total cost of the spell with improvise is determined.
4170 4170
4171 702.125c Multiple instances of impovise on the same spell ae edundant. 4171 702.125c Multiple instances of improvise on the same spell are redundant.
4172 4172
4173 702.126. Aftemath 4173 702.126. Aftermath
4174 4174
4175 702.126a Aftemath is an ability found on some split cads (see ule 708, “Split Cads”). It epesents thee static abilities. “Aftemath” means “You may cast this half of this split cad fom you gaveyad,” “This half of this split cad can’t be cast fom any zone othe than a gaveyad,” and “If this spell was cast fom a gaveyad, exile it instead of putting it anywhee else any time it would leave the stack.” 4175 702.126a Aftermath is an ability found on some split cards (see rule 708, “Split Cards”). It represents three static abilities. “Aftermath” means “You may cast this half of this split card from your graveyard,” “This half of this split card can’t be cast from any zone other than a graveyard,” and “If this spell was cast from a graveyard, exile it instead of putting it anywhere else any time it would leave the stack.”
4176 4176
4177 702.127. Embalm 4177 702.127. Embalm
4178 4178
4179 702.127a Embalm is an activated ability that functions while the cad with embalm is in a gaveyad. “Embalm [cost]” means “[Cost], Exile this cad fom you gaveyad: Ceate a token that’s a copy of this cad, except it’s white, it has no mana cost, and it’s a Zombie in addition to its othe types. Activate this ability only any time you could cast a socey.” 4179 702.127a Embalm is an activated ability that functions while the card with embalm is in a graveyard. “Embalm [cost]” means “[Cost], Exile this card from your graveyard: Create a token that’s a copy of this card, except it’s white, it has no mana cost, and it’s a Zombie in addition to its other types. Activate this ability only any time you could cast a sorcery.”
4180 4180
4181 702.127b A token is “embalmed” if it’s ceated by a esolving embalm ability. 4181 702.127b A token is “embalmed” if it’s created by a resolving embalm ability.
4182 4182
4183 702.128. Etenalize 4183 702.128. Eternalize
4184 4184
4185 702.128a Etenalize is an activated ability that functions while the cad with etenalize is in a gaveyad. “Etenalize [cost]” means “[Cost], Exile this cad fom you gaveyad: Ceate a token that’s a copy of this cad, except it’s black, it’s 4/4, it has no mana cost, and it’s a Zombie in addition to its othe types. Activate this ability only any time you could cast a socey.” 4185 702.128a Eternalize is an activated ability that functions while the card with eternalize is in a graveyard. “Eternalize [cost]” means “[Cost], Exile this card from your graveyard: Create a token that’s a copy of this card, except it’s black, it’s 4/4, it has no mana cost, and it’s a Zombie in addition to its other types. Activate this ability only any time you could cast a sorcery.”
4186 4186
4187 702.129. Afflict 4187 702.129. Afflict
4188 4188
4189 702.129a Afflict is a tiggeed ability. “Afflict N” means “Wheneve this ceatue becomes blocked, defending playe loses N life.” 4189 702.129a Afflict is a triggered ability. “Afflict N” means “Whenever this creature becomes blocked, defending player loses N life.”
4190 4190
4191 702.129b If a ceatue has multiple instances of afflict, each tigges sepaately. 4191 702.129b If a creature has multiple instances of afflict, each triggers separately.
4192 4192
4193 702.130. Ascend 4193 702.130. Ascend
4194 4194
4195 702.130a Ascend on an instant o socey spell epesents a spell ability. It means “If you contol ten o moe pemanents and you don’t have the city’s blessing, you get the city’s blessing fo the est of the game.” 4195 702.130a Ascend on an instant or sorcery spell represents a spell ability. It means “If you control ten or more permanents and you don’t have the city’s blessing, you get the city’s blessing for the rest of the game.”
4196 4196
4197 702.130b Ascend on a pemanent epesents a static ability. It means “Any time you contol ten o moe pemanents and you don’t have the city’s blessing, you get the city’s blessing fo the est of the game.” 4197 702.130b Ascend on a permanent represents a static ability. It means “Any time you control ten or more permanents and you don’t have the city’s blessing, you get the city’s blessing for the rest of the game.”
4198 4198
4199 702.130c The city’s blessing is a designation that has no ules meaning othe than to act as a make that othe ules and effects can identify. Any numbe of playes may have the city’s blessing at the same time. 4199 702.130c The city’s blessing is a designation that has no rules meaning other than to act as a marker that other rules and effects can identify. Any number of players may have the city’s blessing at the same time.
4200 4200
4201 702.130d Afte a playe gets the city’s blessing, continuous effects ae eapplied befoe the game checks to see if the game state o peceding events have matched any tigge conditions. 4201 702.130d After a player gets the city’s blessing, continuous effects are reapplied before the game checks to see if the game state or preceding events have matched any trigger conditions.
4202 4202
4203 702.131. Assist 4203 702.131. Assist
4204 4204
4205 702.131a Assist is a static ability that modifies the ules of paying fo the spell with assist (see ules 601.2g-h). If the total cost to cast a spell with assist includes a geneic mana component, befoe you activate mana abilities while casting it, you may choose anothe playe. That playe has a chance to activate mana abilities. Once that playe chooses not to activate any moe mana abilities, you have a chance to activate mana abilities. Befoe you begin to pay the total cost of the spell, the playe you chose may pay fo any amount of the geneic mana in the spell’s total cost. 4205 702.131a Assist is a static ability that modifies the rules of paying for the spell with assist (see rules 601.2g-h). If the total cost to cast a spell with assist includes a generic mana component, before you activate mana abilities while casting it, you may choose another player. That player has a chance to activate mana abilities. Once that player chooses not to activate any more mana abilities, you have a chance to activate mana abilities. Before you begin to pay the total cost of the spell, the player you chose may pay for any amount of the generic mana in the spell’s total cost.
4206 4206
4207 702.132. Jump-Stat 4207 702.132. Jump-Start
4208 4208
4209 702.132a Jump-stat appeas on some instants and soceies. It epesents two static abilities: one that functions while the cad is in a playe’s gaveyad and anothe that functions while the cad is on the stack. “Jump-stat” means “You may cast this cad fom you gaveyad by discading a cad as an additional cost to cast it” and “If this spell was cast using its jump-stat ability, exile this cad instead of putting it anywhee else any time it would leave the stack.” Casting a spell using its jump-stat ability follows the ules fo paying additional costs in ules 601.2b and 601.2f–h. 4209 702.132a Jump-start appears on some instants and sorceries. It represents two static abilities: one that functions while the card is in a player’s graveyard and another that functions while the card is on the stack. “Jump-start” means “You may cast this card from your graveyard by discarding a card as an additional cost to cast it” and “If this spell was cast using its jump-start ability, exile this card instead of putting it anywhere else any time it would leave the stack.” Casting a spell using its jump-start ability follows the rules for paying additional costs in rules 601.2b and 601.2f–h.
4210 4210
4211 702.133. Mento 4211 702.133. Mentor
4212 4212
4213 702.133a Mento is a tiggeed ability. “Mento” means “Wheneve this ceatue attacks, put a +1/+1 counte on taget attacking ceatue with powe less than this ceatue’s powe.” 4213 702.133a Mentor is a triggered ability. “Mentor” means “Whenever this creature attacks, put a +1/+1 counter on target attacking creature with power less than this creature’s power.”
4214 4214
4215 702.133b If a ceatue has multiple instances of mento, each tigges sepaately. 4215 702.133b If a creature has multiple instances of mentor, each triggers separately.
4216 4216
4217 702.134. Aftelife 4217 702.134. Afterlife
4218 4218
4219 702.134a Aftelife is a tiggeed ability. “Aftelife N” means “When this pemanent is put into a gaveyad fom the battlefield, ceate N 1/1 white and black Spiit ceatue tokens with flying.” 4219 702.134a Afterlife is a triggered ability. “Afterlife N” means “When this permanent is put into a graveyard from the battlefield, create N 1/1 white and black Spirit creature tokens with flying.”
4220 4220
4221 702.134b If a pemanent has multiple instances of aftelife, each tigges sepaately. 4221 702.134b If a permanent has multiple instances of afterlife, each triggers separately.
4222 4222
4223 702.135. Riot 4223 702.135. Riot
4224 4224
4225 702.135a Riot is a static ability. “Riot” means “You may have this pemanent ente the battlefield with an additional +1/+1 counte on it. If you don’t, it gains haste.” 4225 702.135a Riot is a static ability. “Riot” means “You may have this permanent enter the battlefield with an additional +1/+1 counter on it. If you don’t, it gains haste.”
4226 4226
4227 702.135b If a pemanent has multiple instances of iot, each woks sepaately. 4227 702.135b If a permanent has multiple instances of riot, each works separately.
4228 4228
4229 702.136. Spectacle 4229 702.136. Spectacle
4230 4230
4231 702.136a Spectacle is a static ability that functions on the stack. “Spectacle [cost]” means “You may pay [cost] athe than pay this spell’s mana cost if an opponent lost life this tun.” Paying a spell’s spectacle cost follows the ules fo paying altenative costs in ules 601.2b and 601.2f–h. 4231 702.136a Spectacle is a static ability that functions on the stack. “Spectacle [cost]” means “You may pay [cost] rather than pay this spell’s mana cost if an opponent lost life this turn.” Paying a spell’s spectacle cost follows the rules for paying alternative costs in rules 601.2b and 601.2f–h.
4232 4232
4233 703. Tun-Based Actions 4233 703. Turn-Based Actions
4234 4234
4235 703.1. Tun-based actions ae game actions that happen automatically when cetain steps o phases begin, o when each step and phase ends. Tun-based actions don’t use the stack. 4235 703.1. Turn-based actions are game actions that happen automatically when certain steps or phases begin, or when each step and phase ends. Turn-based actions don’t use the stack.
4236 4236
4237 703.1a Abilities that watch fo a specified step o phase to begin ae tiggeed abilities, not tun-based actions. (See ule 603, “Handling Tiggeed Abilities.”) 4237 703.1a Abilities that watch for a specified step or phase to begin are triggered abilities, not turn-based actions. (See rule 603, “Handling Triggered Abilities.”)
4238 4238
4239 703.2. Tun-based actions ae not contolled by any playe. 4239 703.2. Turn-based actions are not controlled by any player.
4240 4240
4241 703.3. Wheneve a step o phase begins, if it’s a step o phase that has any tun-based action associated with it, those tun-based actions ae automatically dealt with fist. This happens befoe state-based actions ae checked, befoe tiggeed abilities ae put on the stack, and befoe playes eceive pioity. 4241 703.3. Whenever a step or phase begins, if it’s a step or phase that has any turn-based action associated with it, those turn-based actions are automatically dealt with first. This happens before state-based actions are checked, before triggered abilities are put on the stack, and before players receive priority.
4242 4242
4243 703.4. The tun-based actions ae as follows: 4243 703.4. The turn-based actions are as follows:
4244 4244
4245 703.4a Immediately afte the untap step begins, all phased-in pemanents with phasing that the active playe contols phase out, and all phased-out pemanents that the active playe contolled when they phased out phase in. This all happens simultaneously. See ule 502.1. 4245 703.4a Immediately after the untap step begins, all phased-in permanents with phasing that the active player controls phase out, and all phased-out permanents that the active player controlled when they phased out phase in. This all happens simultaneously. See rule 502.1.
4246 4246
4247 703.4b Immediately afte the phasing action has been completed duing the untap step, the active playe detemines which pemanents they contol will untap. Then they untap them all simultaneously. See ule 502.2. 4247 703.4b Immediately after the phasing action has been completed during the untap step, the active player determines which permanents they control will untap. Then they untap them all simultaneously. See rule 502.2.
4248 4248
4249 703.4c Immediately afte the daw step begins, the active playe daws a cad. See ule 504.1. 4249 703.4c Immediately after the draw step begins, the active player draws a card. See rule 504.1.
4250 4250
4251 703.4d In an Achenemy game (see ule 904), immediately afte the achenemy’s pecombat main phase begins, that playe sets the top cad of thei scheme deck in motion. See ule 701.24. 4251 703.4d In an Archenemy game (see rule 904), immediately after the archenemy’s precombat main phase begins, that player sets the top card of their scheme deck in motion. See rule 701.24.
4252 4252
4253 703.4e Immediately afte a playe’s pecombat main phase begins, that playe puts a loe counte on each Saga enchantment they contol. In an Achenemy game, this happens afte the achenemy’s scheme action. See ule 714, “Saga Cads.” 4253 703.4e Immediately after a player’s precombat main phase begins, that player puts a lore counter on each Saga enchantment they control. In an Archenemy game, this happens after the archenemy’s scheme action. See rule 714, “Saga Cards.”
4254 4254
4255 703.4f Immediately afte the beginning of combat step begins, if the game being played is a multiplaye game in which the active playe’s opponents don’t all automatically become defending playes, the active playe chooses one of thei opponents. That playe becomes the defending playe. See ule 507.1. 4255 703.4f Immediately after the beginning of combat step begins, if the game being played is a multiplayer game in which the active player’s opponents don’t all automatically become defending players, the active player chooses one of their opponents. That player becomes the defending player. See rule 507.1.
4256 4256
4257 703.4g Immediately afte the declae attackes step begins, the active playe declaes attackes. See ule 508.1. 4257 703.4g Immediately after the declare attackers step begins, the active player declares attackers. See rule 508.1.
4258 4258
4259 703.4h Immediately afte the declae blockes step begins, the defending playe declaes blockes. See ule 509.1. 4259 703.4h Immediately after the declare blockers step begins, the defending player declares blockers. See rule 509.1.
4260 4260
4261 703.4i Immediately afte blockes have been declaed duing the declae blockes step, fo each attacking ceatue that’s become blocked by multiple ceatues, the active playe announces the damage assignment ode among the blocking ceatues. See ule 509.2. 4261 703.4i Immediately after blockers have been declared during the declare blockers step, for each attacking creature that’s become blocked by multiple creatures, the active player announces the damage assignment order among the blocking creatures. See rule 509.2.
4262 4262
4263 703.4j Immediately afte the active playe has announced damage assignment odes (if necessay) duing the declae blockes step, fo each ceatue that’s blocking multiple ceatues, the defending playe announces the damage assignment ode among the attacking ceatues. See ule 509.3. 4263 703.4j Immediately after the active player has announced damage assignment orders (if necessary) during the declare blockers step, for each creature that’s blocking multiple creatures, the defending player announces the damage assignment order among the attacking creatures. See rule 509.3.
4264 4264
4265 703.4k Immediately afte the combat damage step begins, each playe in APNAP ode announces how each attacking o blocking ceatue they contol assigns its combat damage. See ule 510.1. 4265 703.4k Immediately after the combat damage step begins, each player in APNAP order announces how each attacking or blocking creature they control assigns its combat damage. See rule 510.1.
4266 4266
4267 703.4m Immediately afte combat damage has been assigned duing the combat damage step, all combat damage is dealt simultaneously. See ule 510.2. 4267 703.4m Immediately after combat damage has been assigned during the combat damage step, all combat damage is dealt simultaneously. See rule 510.2.
4268 4268
4269 703.4n Immediately afte the cleanup step begins, if the active playe’s hand contains moe cads than thei maximum hand size (nomally seven), they discad enough cads to educe thei hand size to that numbe. See ule 514.1. 4269 703.4n Immediately after the cleanup step begins, if the active player’s hand contains more cards than their maximum hand size (normally seven), they discard enough cards to reduce their hand size to that number. See rule 514.1.
4270 4270
4271 703.4p Immediately afte the active playe has discaded cads (if necessay) duing the cleanup step, all damage is emoved fom pemanents and all “until end of tun” and “this tun” effects end. These actions happen simultaneously. See ule 514.2. 4271 703.4p Immediately after the active player has discarded cards (if necessary) during the cleanup step, all damage is removed from permanents and all “until end of turn” and “this turn” effects end. These actions happen simultaneously. See rule 514.2.
4272 4272
4273 703.4q When each step o phase ends, any unused mana left in a playe’s mana pool empties. See ule 500.4. 4273 703.4q When each step or phase ends, any unused mana left in a player’s mana pool empties. See rule 500.4.
4274 4274
4275 704. State-Based Actions 4275 704. State-Based Actions
4276 4276
4277 704.1. State-based actions ae game actions that happen automatically wheneve cetain conditions (listed below) ae met. State-based actions don’t use the stack. 4277 704.1. State-based actions are game actions that happen automatically whenever certain conditions (listed below) are met. State-based actions don’t use the stack.
4278 4278
4279 704.1a Abilities that watch fo a specified game state ae tiggeed abilities, not state-based actions. (See ule 603, “Handling Tiggeed Abilities.”) 4279 704.1a Abilities that watch for a specified game state are triggered abilities, not state-based actions. (See rule 603, “Handling Triggered Abilities.”)
4280 4280
4281 704.2. State-based actions ae checked thoughout the game and ae not contolled by any playe. 4281 704.2. State-based actions are checked throughout the game and are not controlled by any player.
4282 4282
4283 704.3. Wheneve a playe would get pioity (see ule 117, “Timing and Pioity”), the game checks fo any of the listed conditions fo state-based actions, then pefoms all applicable state-based actions simultaneously as a single event. If any state-based actions ae pefomed as a esult of a check, the check is epeated; othewise all tiggeed abilities that ae waiting to be put on the stack ae put on the stack, then the check is epeated. Once no moe state-based actions have been pefomed as the esult of a check and no tiggeed abilities ae waiting to be put on the stack, the appopiate playe gets pioity. This pocess also occus duing the cleanup step (see ule 514), except that if no state-based actions ae pefomed as the esult of the step’s fist check and no tiggeed abilities ae waiting to be put on the stack, then no playe gets pioity and the step ends. 4283 704.3. Whenever a player would get priority (see rule 117, “Timing and Priority”), the game checks for any of the listed conditions for state-based actions, then performs all applicable state-based actions simultaneously as a single event. If any state-based actions are performed as a result of a check, the check is repeated; otherwise all triggered abilities that are waiting to be put on the stack are put on the stack, then the check is repeated. Once no more state-based actions have been performed as the result of a check and no triggered abilities are waiting to be put on the stack, the appropriate player gets priority. This process also occurs during the cleanup step (see rule 514), except that if no state-based actions are performed as the result of the step’s first check and no triggered abilities are waiting to be put on the stack, then no player gets priority and the step ends.
4284 4284
4285 704.4. Unlike tiggeed abilities, state-based actions pay no attention to what happens duing the esolution of a spell o ability. 4285 704.4. Unlike triggered abilities, state-based actions pay no attention to what happens during the resolution of a spell or ability.
4286 Example: A playe contols a ceatue with the ability “This ceatue’s powe and toughness ae each equal to the numbe of cads in you hand” and casts a spell whose effect is “Discad you hand, then daw seven cads.” The ceatue will tempoaily have toughness 0 in the middle of the spell’s esolution but will be back up to toughness 7 when the spell finishes esolving. Thus the ceatue will suvive when state-based actions ae checked. In contast, an ability that tigges when the playe has no cads in hand goes on the stack afte the spell esolves, because its tigge event happened duing esolution. 4286 Example: A player controls a creature with the ability “This creature’s power and toughness are each equal to the number of cards in your hand” and casts a spell whose effect is “Discard your hand, then draw seven cards.” The creature will temporarily have toughness 0 in the middle of the spell’s resolution but will be back up to toughness 7 when the spell finishes resolving. Thus the creature will survive when state-based actions are checked. In contrast, an ability that triggers when the player has no cards in hand goes on the stack after the spell resolves, because its trigger event happened during resolution.
4287 4287
4288 704.5. The state-based actions ae as follows: 4288 704.5. The state-based actions are as follows:
4289 4289
4290 704.5a If a playe has 0 o less life, that playe loses the game. 4290 704.5a If a player has 0 or less life, that player loses the game.
4291 4291
4292 704.5b If a playe attempted to daw a cad fom a libay with no cads in it since the last time state-based actions wee checked, that playe loses the game. 4292 704.5b If a player attempted to draw a card from a library with no cards in it since the last time state-based actions were checked, that player loses the game.
4293 4293
4294 704.5c If a playe has ten o moe poison countes, that playe loses the game. Ignoe this ule in Two-Headed Giant games; see ule 704.5u instead. 4294 704.5c If a player has ten or more poison counters, that player loses the game. Ignore this rule in Two-Headed Giant games; see rule 704.5u instead.
4295 4295
4296 704.5d If a token is in a zone othe than the battlefield, it ceases to exist. 4296 704.5d If a token is in a zone other than the battlefield, it ceases to exist.
4297 4297
4298 704.5e If a copy of a spell is in a zone othe than the stack, it ceases to exist. If a copy of a cad is in any zone othe than the stack o the battlefield, it ceases to exist. 4298 704.5e If a copy of a spell is in a zone other than the stack, it ceases to exist. If a copy of a card is in any zone other than the stack or the battlefield, it ceases to exist.
4299 4299
4300 704.5f If a ceatue has toughness 0 o less, it’s put into its owne’s gaveyad. Regeneation can’t eplace this event. 4300 704.5f If a creature has toughness 0 or less, it’s put into its owner’s graveyard. Regeneration can’t replace this event.
4301 4301
4302 704.5g If a ceatue has toughness geate than 0, and the total damage maked on it is geate than o equal to its toughness, that ceatue has been dealt lethal damage and is destoyed. Regeneation can eplace this event. 4302 704.5g If a creature has toughness greater than 0, and the total damage marked on it is greater than or equal to its toughness, that creature has been dealt lethal damage and is destroyed. Regeneration can replace this event.
4303 4303
4304 704.5h If a ceatue has toughness geate than 0, and it’s been dealt damage by a souce with deathtouch since the last time state-based actions wee checked, that ceatue is destoyed. Regeneation can eplace this event. 4304 704.5h If a creature has toughness greater than 0, and it’s been dealt damage by a source with deathtouch since the last time state-based actions were checked, that creature is destroyed. Regeneration can replace this event.
4305 4305
4306 704.5i If a planeswalke has loyalty 0, it’s put into its owne’s gaveyad. 4306 704.5i If a planeswalker has loyalty 0, it’s put into its owner’s graveyard.
4307 4307
4308 704.5j If a playe contols two o moe legenday pemanents with the same name, that playe chooses one of them, and the est ae put into thei ownes’ gaveyads. This is called the “legend ule.” 4308 704.5j If a player controls two or more legendary permanents with the same name, that player chooses one of them, and the rest are put into their owners’ graveyards. This is called the “legend rule.”
4309 4309
4310 704.5k If two o moe pemanents have the supetype wold, all except the one that has had the wold supetype fo the shotest amount of time ae put into thei ownes’ gaveyads. In the event of a tie fo the shotest amount of time, all ae put into thei ownes’ gaveyads. This is called the “wold ule.” 4310 704.5k If two or more permanents have the supertype world, all except the one that has had the world supertype for the shortest amount of time are put into their owners’ graveyards. In the event of a tie for the shortest amount of time, all are put into their owners’ graveyards. This is called the “world rule.”
4311 4311
4312 704.5m If an Aua is attached to an illegal object o playe, o is not attached to an object o playe, that Aua is put into its owne’s gaveyad. 4312 704.5m If an Aura is attached to an illegal object or player, or is not attached to an object or player, that Aura is put into its owner’s graveyard.
4313 4313
4314 704.5n If an Equipment o Fotification is attached to an illegal pemanent o to a playe, it becomes unattached fom that pemanent o playe. It emains on the battlefield. 4314 704.5n If an Equipment or Fortification is attached to an illegal permanent or to a player, it becomes unattached from that permanent or player. It remains on the battlefield.
4315 4315
4316 704.5p If a ceatue is attached to an object o playe, it becomes unattached and emains on the battlefield. Similaly, if a pemanent that’s neithe an Aua, an Equipment, no a Fotification is attached to an object o playe, it becomes unattached and emains on the battlefield. 4316 704.5p If a creature is attached to an object or player, it becomes unattached and remains on the battlefield. Similarly, if a permanent that’s neither an Aura, an Equipment, nor a Fortification is attached to an object or player, it becomes unattached and remains on the battlefield.
4317 4317
4318 704.5q If a pemanent has both a +1/+1 counte and a -1/-1 counte on it, N +1/+1 and N -1/-1 countes ae emoved fom it, whee N is the smalle of the numbe of +1/+1 and -1/-1 countes on it. 4318 704.5q If a permanent has both a +1/+1 counter and a -1/-1 counter on it, N +1/+1 and N -1/-1 counters are removed from it, where N is the smaller of the number of +1/+1 and -1/-1 counters on it.
4319 4319
4320 704.5 If a pemanent with an ability that says it can’t have moe than N countes of a cetain kind on it has moe than N countes of that kind on it, all but N of those countes ae emoved fom it. 4320 704.5r If a permanent with an ability that says it can’t have more than N counters of a certain kind on it has more than N counters of that kind on it, all but N of those counters are removed from it.
4321 4321
4322 704.5s If the numbe of loe countes on a Saga pemanent is geate than o equal to its final chapte numbe and it isn’t the souce of a chapte ability that has tiggeed but not yet left the stack, that Saga’s contolle sacifices it. See ule 714, “Saga Cads.” 4322 704.5s If the number of lore counters on a Saga permanent is greater than or equal to its final chapter number and it isn’t the source of a chapter ability that has triggered but not yet left the stack, that Saga’s controller sacrifices it. See rule 714, “Saga Cards.”
4323 4323
4324 704.5t In a Two-Headed Giant game, if a team has 0 o less life, that team loses the game. See ule 810, “Two-Headed Giant Vaiant.” 4324 704.5t In a Two-Headed Giant game, if a team has 0 or less life, that team loses the game. See rule 810, “Two-Headed Giant Variant.”
4325 4325
4326 704.5u In a Two-Headed Giant game, if a team has fifteen o moe poison countes, that team loses the game. See ule 810, “Two-Headed Giant Vaiant.” 4326 704.5u In a Two-Headed Giant game, if a team has fifteen or more poison counters, that team loses the game. See rule 810, “Two-Headed Giant Variant.”
4327 4327
4328 704.5v In a Commande game, a playe that’s been dealt 21 o moe combat damage by the same commande ove the couse of the game loses the game. See ule 903, “Commande.” 4328 704.5v In a Commander game, a player that’s been dealt 21 or more combat damage by the same commander over the course of the game loses the game. See rule 903, “Commander.”
4329 4329
4330 704.5w In an Achenemy game, if a non-ongoing scheme cad is face up in the command zone, and no tiggeed abilities of any scheme ae on the stack o waiting to be put on the stack, that scheme cad is tuned face down and put on the bottom of its owne’s scheme deck. See ule 904, “Achenemy.” 4330 704.5w In an Archenemy game, if a non-ongoing scheme card is face up in the command zone, and no triggered abilities of any scheme are on the stack or waiting to be put on the stack, that scheme card is turned face down and put on the bottom of its owner’s scheme deck. See rule 904, “Archenemy.”
4331 4331
4332 704.5x In a Planechase game, if a phenomenon cad is face up in the command zone, and it isn’t the souce of a tiggeed ability that has tiggeed but not yet left the stack, the plana contolle planeswalks. See ule 901, “Planechase.” 4332 704.5x In a Planechase game, if a phenomenon card is face up in the command zone, and it isn’t the source of a triggered ability that has triggered but not yet left the stack, the planar controller planeswalks. See rule 901, “Planechase.”
4333 4333
4334 704.6. If multiple state-based actions would have the same esult at the same time, a single eplacement effect will eplace all of them. 4334 704.6. If multiple state-based actions would have the same result at the same time, a single replacement effect will replace all of them.
4335 Example: You contol Lich’s Mio, which says “If you would lose the game, instead shuffle you hand, you gaveyad, and all pemanents you own into you libay, then daw seven cads and you life total becomes 20.” Thee’s one cad in you libay and you life total is 1. A spell causes you to daw two cads and lose 2 life. The next time state-based actions ae checked, you’d lose the game due to ule 704.5a and ule 704.5b. Instead, Lich’s Mio eplaces that game loss and you keep playing. 4335 Example: You control Lich’s Mirror, which says “If you would lose the game, instead shuffle your hand, your graveyard, and all permanents you own into your library, then draw seven cards and your life total becomes 20.” There’s one card in your library and your life total is 1. A spell causes you to draw two cards and lose 2 life. The next time state-based actions are checked, you’d lose the game due to rule 704.5a and rule 704.5b. Instead, Lich’s Mirror replaces that game loss and you keep playing.
4336 4336
4337 704.7. If a state-based action esults in a pemanent leaving the battlefield at the same time othe state-based actions wee pefomed, that pemanent’s last known infomation is deived fom the game state befoe any of those state-based actions wee pefomed. 4337 704.7. If a state-based action results in a permanent leaving the battlefield at the same time other state-based actions were performed, that permanent’s last known information is derived from the game state before any of those state-based actions were performed.
4338 Example: You contol Young Wolf, a 1/1 ceatue with undying, and it has a +1/+1 counte on it. A spell puts thee -1/-1 countes on Young Wolf. Befoe state-based actions ae pefomed, Young Wolf has one +1/+1 counte and thee -1/-1 countes on it. Afte state-based actions ae pefomed, Young Wolf is in the gaveyad. When it was last on the battlefield, it had a +1/+1 counte on it, so undying will not tigge. 4338 Example: You control Young Wolf, a 1/1 creature with undying, and it has a +1/+1 counter on it. A spell puts three -1/-1 counters on Young Wolf. Before state-based actions are performed, Young Wolf has one +1/+1 counter and three -1/-1 counters on it. After state-based actions are performed, Young Wolf is in the graveyard. When it was last on the battlefield, it had a +1/+1 counter on it, so undying will not trigger.
4339 4339
4340 705. Flipping a Coin 4340 705. Flipping a Coin
4341 4341
4342 705.1. An effect that instucts a playe to flip a coin may cae whethe that playe wins o loses the flip. To flip a coin fo such an effect, the playe flips the coin and calls “heads” o “tails.” If the call matches the esult, the playe wins the flip. Othewise, the playe loses the flip. Only the playe who flips the coin wins o loses the flip; no othe playes ae involved. 4342 705.1. An effect that instructs a player to flip a coin may care whether that player wins or loses the flip. To flip a coin for such an effect, the player flips the coin and calls “heads” or “tails.” If the call matches the result, the player wins the flip. Otherwise, the player loses the flip. Only the player who flips the coin wins or loses the flip; no other players are involved.
4343 4343
4344 705.2. If an effect instucts a playe to flip a coin and that effect caes only whethe the coin comes up heads o tails without specifying a winne o lose of the flip, that playe flips a coin without making a call. No playe wins o loses this kind of flip. 4344 705.2. If an effect instructs a player to flip a coin and that effect cares only whether the coin comes up heads or tails without specifying a winner or loser of the flip, that player flips a coin without making a call. No player wins or loses this kind of flip.
4345 4345
4346 705.3. A coin used in a flip must be a two-sided object with easily distinguished sides and equal likelihood that eithe side lands face up. If the coin that’s being flipped doesn’t have an obvious “heads” o “tails,” designate one side to be “heads,” and the othe side to be “tails.” Othe methods of andomization may be substituted fo flipping a coin as long as thee ae two possible outcomes of equal likelihood and all playes agee to the substitution. Fo example, the playe may oll an even-sided die and call “odds” o “evens,” o oll an even-sided die and designate that “odds” means “heads” and “evens” means “tails.” 4346 705.3. A coin used in a flip must be a two-sided object with easily distinguished sides and equal likelihood that either side lands face up. If the coin that’s being flipped doesn’t have an obvious “heads” or “tails,” designate one side to be “heads,” and the other side to be “tails.” Other methods of randomization may be substituted for flipping a coin as long as there are two possible outcomes of equal likelihood and all players agree to the substitution. For example, the player may roll an even-sided die and call “odds” or “evens,” or roll an even-sided die and designate that “odds” means “heads” and “evens” means “tails.”
4347 4347
4348 706. Copying Objects 4348 706. Copying Objects
4349 4349
4350 706.1. Some objects become o tun anothe object into a “copy” of a spell, pemanent, o cad. Some effects ceate a token that’s a copy of anothe object. (Cetain olde cads wee pinted with the phase “seach fo a copy.” This section doesn’t cove those cads, which have eceived new text in the Oacle cad efeence.) 4350 706.1. Some objects become or turn another object into a “copy” of a spell, permanent, or card. Some effects create a token that’s a copy of another object. (Certain older cards were printed with the phrase “search for a copy.” This section doesn’t cover those cards, which have received new text in the Oracle card reference.)
4351 4351
4352 706.2. When copying an object, the copy acquies the copiable values of the oiginal object’s chaacteistics and, fo an object on the stack, choices made when casting o activating it (mode, tagets, the value of X, whethe it was kicked, how it will affect multiple tagets, and so on). The “copiable values” ae the values deived fom the text pinted on the object (that text being name, mana cost, colo indicato, cad type, subtype, supetype, ules text, powe, toughness, and/o loyalty), as modified by othe copy effects, by its face-down status, and by “as . . . entes the battlefield” and “as . . . is tuned face up” abilities that set powe and toughness (and may also set additional chaacteistics). Othe effects (including type-changing and text-changing effects), status, and countes ae not copied. 4352 706.2. When copying an object, the copy acquires the copiable values of the original object’s characteristics and, for an object on the stack, choices made when casting or activating it (mode, targets, the value of X, whether it was kicked, how it will affect multiple targets, and so on). The “copiable values” are the values derived from the text printed on the object (that text being name, mana cost, color indicator, card type, subtype, supertype, rules text, power, toughness, and/or loyalty), as modified by other copy effects, by its face-down status, and by “as . . . enters the battlefield” and “as . . . is turned face up” abilities that set power and toughness (and may also set additional characteristics). Other effects (including type-changing and text-changing effects), status, and counters are not copied.
4353 Example: Chimeic Staff is an atifact that eads, “{X}: Chimeic Staff becomes an X/X atifact ceatue until end of tun.” Clone is a ceatue that eads, “You may have Clone ente the battlefield as a copy of any ceatue on the battlefield.” Afte a Staff has become a 5/5 atifact ceatue, a Clone entes the battlefield as a copy of it. The Clone is an atifact, not a 5/5 atifact ceatue. (The copy has the Staff’s ability, howeve, and will become a ceatue if that ability is activated.) 4353 Example: Chimeric Staff is an artifact that reads, “{X}: Chimeric Staff becomes an X/X artifact creature until end of turn.” Clone is a creature that reads, “You may have Clone enter the battlefield as a copy of any creature on the battlefield.” After a Staff has become a 5/5 artifact creature, a Clone enters the battlefield as a copy of it. The Clone is an artifact, not a 5/5 artifact creature. (The copy has the Staff’s ability, however, and will become a creature if that ability is activated.)
4354 Example: Clone entes the battlefield as a copy of a face-down Ginning Demon (a ceatue with moph {2}{B}{B}). The Clone is a cololess 2/2 ceatue with no name, no types, no abilities, and no mana cost. It will still be face up. Its contolle can’t pay {2}{B}{B} to tun it face up. 4354 Example: Clone enters the battlefield as a copy of a face-down Grinning Demon (a creature with morph {2}{B}{B}). The Clone is a colorless 2/2 creature with no name, no types, no abilities, and no mana cost. It will still be face up. Its controller can’t pay {2}{B}{B} to turn it face up.
4355 4355
4356 706.2a A copy acquies the colo of the object it’s copying because that value is deived fom its mana cost o colo indicato. A copy acquies the abilities of the object it’s copying because those values ae deived fom its ules text. A copy doesn’t wind up with two values of each ability (that is, it doesn’t copy the object’s abilities and its ules text, then have that ules text define a new set of abilities). 4356 706.2a A copy acquires the color of the object it’s copying because that value is derived from its mana cost or color indicator. A copy acquires the abilities of the object it’s copying because those values are derived from its rules text. A copy doesn’t wind up with two values of each ability (that is, it doesn’t copy the object’s abilities and its rules text, then have that rules text define a new set of abilities).
4357 4357
4358 706.2b Once an object has been copied, changing the copiable values of the oiginal object won’t cause the copy to change. 4358 706.2b Once an object has been copied, changing the copiable values of the original object won’t cause the copy to change.
4359 4359
4360 706.2c If a static ability geneates a continuous effect that’s a copy effect, the copiable values that effect gants ae detemined only at the time that effect fist stats to apply. 4360 706.2c If a static ability generates a continuous effect that’s a copy effect, the copiable values that effect grants are determined only at the time that effect first starts to apply.
4361 4361
4362 706.3. The copy’s copiable values become the copied infomation, as modified by the copy’s status (see ule 110.5). Objects that copy the object will use the new copiable values. 4362 706.3. The copy’s copiable values become the copied information, as modified by the copy’s status (see rule 110.5). Objects that copy the object will use the new copiable values.
4363 Example: Vesuvan Doppelgange eads, “You may have Vesuvan Doppelgange ente the battlefield as a copy of any ceatue on the battlefield, except it doesn’t copy that ceatue’s colo and it gains ‘At the beginning of you upkeep, you may have this ceatue become a copy of taget ceatue, except it doesn’t copy that ceatue’s colo. If you do, this ceatue gains this ability.’” A Vesuvan Doppelgange entes the battlefield as a copy of Runeclaw Bea (a 2/2 geen Bea ceatue with no abilities). Then a Clone entes the battlefield as a copy of the Doppelgange. The Clone is a 2/2 blue Bea named Runeclaw Bea that has the Doppelgange’s upkeep-tiggeed ability. 4363 Example: Vesuvan Doppelganger reads, “You may have Vesuvan Doppelganger enter the battlefield as a copy of any creature on the battlefield, except it doesn’t copy that creature’s color and it gains ‘At the beginning of your upkeep, you may have this creature become a copy of target creature, except it doesn’t copy that creature’s color. If you do, this creature gains this ability.’” A Vesuvan Doppelganger enters the battlefield as a copy of Runeclaw Bear (a 2/2 green Bear creature with no abilities). Then a Clone enters the battlefield as a copy of the Doppelganger. The Clone is a 2/2 blue Bear named Runeclaw Bear that has the Doppelganger’s upkeep-triggered ability.
4364 Example: Tomoya the Reveale (a flipped flip cad) becomes a copy of Nezumi Shotfang (an unflipped flip cad). Tomoya’s chaacteistics become the chaacteistics of Stabwhiske the Odious, which is the flipped vesion of Nezumi Shotfang. 4364 Example: Tomoya the Revealer (a flipped flip card) becomes a copy of Nezumi Shortfang (an unflipped flip card). Tomoya’s characteristics become the characteristics of Stabwhisker the Odious, which is the flipped version of Nezumi Shortfang.
4365 Example: A face-down Ginning Demon (a ceatue with moph) becomes a copy of a face-up Banchsnap Loian (a 4/1 geen ceatue with tample and moph {G}). The Demon’s chaacteistics become the chaacteistics of Banchsnap Loian. Howeve, since the ceatue is face down, it emains a 2/2 cololess ceatue with no name, types, o abilities, and no mana cost. It can be tuned face up fo {G}. If it’s tuned face up, it will have the chaacteistics of Banchsnap Loian. 4365 Example: A face-down Grinning Demon (a creature with morph) becomes a copy of a face-up Branchsnap Lorian (a 4/1 green creature with trample and morph {G}). The Demon’s characteristics become the characteristics of Branchsnap Lorian. However, since the creature is face down, it remains a 2/2 colorless creature with no name, types, or abilities, and no mana cost. It can be turned face up for {G}. If it’s turned face up, it will have the characteristics of Branchsnap Lorian.
4366 Example: A face-down Ginning Demon (a ceatue with moph) becomes a copy of Wandeing Ones (a 1/1 blue Spiit ceatue that doesn’t have moph). It will be a face-down Wandeing Ones. It emains a 2/2 cololess ceatue with no name, types, o abilities, and no mana cost. Its contolle can’t tun it face up as a special action. If an effect tuns it face up, it will have the chaacteistics of Wandeing Ones. 4366 Example: A face-down Grinning Demon (a creature with morph) becomes a copy of Wandering Ones (a 1/1 blue Spirit creature that doesn’t have morph). It will be a face-down Wandering Ones. It remains a 2/2 colorless creature with no name, types, or abilities, and no mana cost. Its controller can’t turn it face up as a special action. If an effect turns it face up, it will have the characteristics of Wandering Ones.
4367 4367
4368 706.4. Some effects cause a pemanent that’s copying a pemanent to copy a diffeent object while emaining on the battlefield. The change doesn’t tigge entes-the-battlefield o leaves-the-battlefield abilities. This also doesn’t change any noncopy effects pesently affecting the pemanent. 4368 706.4. Some effects cause a permanent that’s copying a permanent to copy a different object while remaining on the battlefield. The change doesn’t trigger enters-the-battlefield or leaves-the-battlefield abilities. This also doesn’t change any noncopy effects presently affecting the permanent.
4369 Example: Unstable Shapeshifte eads, “Wheneve a ceatue entes the battlefield, Unstable Shapeshifte becomes a copy of that ceatue and gains this ability.” It’s affected by Giant Gowth, which eads “Taget ceatue gets +3/+3 until end of tun.” If a ceatue entes the battlefield late this tun, Unstable Shapeshifte will become a copy of that ceatue, but it will still get +3/+3 fom the Giant Gowth. 4369 Example: Unstable Shapeshifter reads, “Whenever a creature enters the battlefield, Unstable Shapeshifter becomes a copy of that creature and gains this ability.” It’s affected by Giant Growth, which reads “Target creature gets +3/+3 until end of turn.” If a creature enters the battlefield later this turn, Unstable Shapeshifter will become a copy of that creature, but it will still get +3/+3 from the Giant Growth.
4370 4370
4371 706.5. An object that entes the battlefield “as a copy” o “that’s a copy” of anothe object becomes a copy as it entes the battlefield. It doesn’t ente the battlefield, and then become a copy of that pemanent. If the text that’s being copied includes any abilities that eplace the entes-the-battlefield event (such as “entes the battlefield with” o “as [this] entes the battlefield” abilities), those abilities will take effect. Also, any entes-the-battlefield tiggeed abilities of the copy will have a chance to tigge. 4371 706.5. An object that enters the battlefield “as a copy” or “that’s a copy” of another object becomes a copy as it enters the battlefield. It doesn’t enter the battlefield, and then become a copy of that permanent. If the text that’s being copied includes any abilities that replace the enters-the-battlefield event (such as “enters the battlefield with” or “as [this] enters the battlefield” abilities), those abilities will take effect. Also, any enters-the-battlefield triggered abilities of the copy will have a chance to trigger.
4372 Example: Skyshoud Behemoth eads, “Fading 2 (This ceatue entes the battlefield with two fade countes on it. At the beginning of you upkeep, emove a fade counte fom it. If you can’t, sacifice it.)” and “Skyshoud Behemoth entes the battlefield tapped.” A Clone that entes the battlefield as a copy of a Skyshoud Behemoth will also ente the battlefield tapped with two fade countes on it. 4372 Example: Skyshroud Behemoth reads, “Fading 2 (This creature enters the battlefield with two fade counters on it. At the beginning of your upkeep, remove a fade counter from it. If you can’t, sacrifice it.)” and “Skyshroud Behemoth enters the battlefield tapped.” A Clone that enters the battlefield as a copy of a Skyshroud Behemoth will also enter the battlefield tapped with two fade counters on it.
4373 Example: Wall of Omens eads, “When Wall of Omens entes the battlefield, daw a cad.” A Clone entes the battlefield as a copy of Wall of Omens. The Clone has the Wall’s entes-the-battlefield tiggeed ability, so the Clone’s contolle daws a cad. 4373 Example: Wall of Omens reads, “When Wall of Omens enters the battlefield, draw a card.” A Clone enters the battlefield as a copy of Wall of Omens. The Clone has the Wall’s enters-the-battlefield triggered ability, so the Clone’s controller draws a card.
4374 4374
4375 706.6. When copying a pemanent, any choices that have been made fo that pemanent aen’t copied. Instead, if an object entes the battlefield as a copy of anothe pemanent, the object’s contolle will get to make any “as [this] entes the battlefield” choices fo it. 4375 706.6. When copying a permanent, any choices that have been made for that permanent aren’t copied. Instead, if an object enters the battlefield as a copy of another permanent, the object’s controller will get to make any “as [this] enters the battlefield” choices for it.
4376 Example: A Clone entes the battlefield as a copy of Adaptive Automaton. Adaptive Automaton eads, in pat, “As Adaptive Automaton entes the battlefield, choose a ceatue type.” The Clone won’t copy the ceatue type choice of the Automaton; athe, the contolle of the Clone will get to make a new choice. 4376 Example: A Clone enters the battlefield as a copy of Adaptive Automaton. Adaptive Automaton reads, in part, “As Adaptive Automaton enters the battlefield, choose a creature type.” The Clone won’t copy the creature type choice of the Automaton; rather, the controller of the Clone will get to make a new choice.
4377 4377
4378 706.7. If a pai of linked abilities ae copied, those abilities will be similaly linked to one anothe on the object that copied them. One ability efes only to actions that wee taken o objects that wee affected by the othe. They can’t be linked to any othe ability, egadless of what othe abilities the copy may cuently have o may have had in the past. See ule 607, “Linked Abilities.” 4378 706.7. If a pair of linked abilities are copied, those abilities will be similarly linked to one another on the object that copied them. One ability refers only to actions that were taken or objects that were affected by the other. They can’t be linked to any other ability, regardless of what other abilities the copy may currently have or may have had in the past. See rule 607, “Linked Abilities.”
4379 4379
4380 706.7a If an ability causes a playe to “choose a [value]” and a second, linked ability efes to that choice, the second ability is the only ability that can efe to that choice. An object doesn’t “emembe” that choice and use it fo othe abilities it may copy late. If an object copies an ability that efes to a choice, but eithe (a) doesn’t copy that ability’s linked ability o (b) does copy the linked ability but no choice is made fo it, then the choice is consideed to be “undefined.” If an ability efes to an undefined choice, that pat of the ability won’t do anything. 4380 706.7a If an ability causes a player to “choose a [value]” and a second, linked ability refers to that choice, the second ability is the only ability that can refer to that choice. An object doesn’t “remember” that choice and use it for other abilities it may copy later. If an object copies an ability that refers to a choice, but either (a) doesn’t copy that ability’s linked ability or (b) does copy the linked ability but no choice is made for it, then the choice is considered to be “undefined.” If an ability refers to an undefined choice, that part of the ability won’t do anything.
4381 Example: Voice of All entes the battlefield and Unstable Shapeshifte copies it. Voice of All eads, in pat, “As Voice of All entes the battlefield, choose a colo.” and “Voice of All has potection fom the chosen colo.” Unstable Shapeshifte neve had a chance fo a colo to be chosen fo it, because it didn’t ente the battlefield as a Voice of All cad, so the potection ability doesn’t potect it fom anything at all. 4381 Example: Voice of All enters the battlefield and Unstable Shapeshifter copies it. Voice of All reads, in part, “As Voice of All enters the battlefield, choose a color.” and “Voice of All has protection from the chosen color.” Unstable Shapeshifter never had a chance for a color to be chosen for it, because it didn’t enter the battlefield as a Voice of All card, so the protection ability doesn’t protect it from anything at all.
4382 Example: A Vesuvan Doppelgange entes the battlefield as a copy of Voice of All, and the Doppelgange’s contolle chooses blue. Late, the Doppelgange copies Quiion Elves, which has the ability, “{T}: Add one mana of the chosen colo.” Even though a colo was chosen fo the Doppelgange, it wasn’t chosen fo the ability linked to the mana ability copied fom the Elves. If that mana ability of the Doppelgange is activated, it will not poduce mana. 4382 Example: A Vesuvan Doppelganger enters the battlefield as a copy of Voice of All, and the Doppelganger’s controller chooses blue. Later, the Doppelganger copies Quirion Elves, which has the ability, “{T}: Add one mana of the chosen color.” Even though a color was chosen for the Doppelganger, it wasn’t chosen for the ability linked to the mana ability copied from the Elves. If that mana ability of the Doppelganger is activated, it will not produce mana.
4383 4383
4384 706.8. When copying a double-faced pemanent, a face-up meld cad, o a melded pemanent, only the copiable values of the face that’s cuently up ae copied. (See ule 711, “Double-Faced Cads,” and ule 712, “Meld Cads.”) 4384 706.8. When copying a double-faced permanent, a face-up meld card, or a melded permanent, only the copiable values of the face that’s currently up are copied. (See rule 711, “Double-Faced Cards,” and rule 712, “Meld Cards.”)
4385 4385
4386 706.9. Copy effects may include modifications o exceptions to the copying pocess. 4386 706.9. Copy effects may include modifications or exceptions to the copying process.
4387 4387
4388 706.9a Some copy effects cause the copy to gain an ability as pat of the copying pocess. This ability becomes pat of the copiable values fo the copy, along with any othe abilities that wee copied. 4388 706.9a Some copy effects cause the copy to gain an ability as part of the copying process. This ability becomes part of the copiable values for the copy, along with any other abilities that were copied.
4389 Example: Quiion Elves entes the battlefield and an Unstable Shapeshifte copies it. The copiable values of the Shapeshifte now match those of the Elves, except that the Shapeshifte also has the ability “Wheneve a ceatue entes the battlefield, Unstable Shapeshifte becomes a copy of that ceatue, except it has this ability.” Then a Clone entes the battlefield as a copy of the Unstable Shapeshifte. The Clone copies the new copiable values of the Shapeshifte, including the ability that the Shapeshifte gave itself when it copied the Elves. 4389 Example: Quirion Elves enters the battlefield and an Unstable Shapeshifter copies it. The copiable values of the Shapeshifter now match those of the Elves, except that the Shapeshifter also has the ability “Whenever a creature enters the battlefield, Unstable Shapeshifter becomes a copy of that creature, except it has this ability.” Then a Clone enters the battlefield as a copy of the Unstable Shapeshifter. The Clone copies the new copiable values of the Shapeshifter, including the ability that the Shapeshifter gave itself when it copied the Elves.
4390 4390
4391 706.9b Some copy effects specifically state that they don’t copy cetain chaacteistics and instead etain thei oiginal values. They may also simply state that cetain chaacteistics ae not copied. 4391 706.9b Some copy effects specifically state that they don’t copy certain characteristics and instead retain their original values. They may also simply state that certain characteristics are not copied.
4392 4392
4393 706.9c Some copy effects modify a chaacteistic as pat of the copying pocess. The final value(s) fo that chaacteistic becomes pat of the copiable values fo the copy. 4393 706.9c Some copy effects modify a characteristic as part of the copying process. The final value(s) for that characteristic becomes part of the copiable values for the copy.
4394 Example: Copy Atifact is an enchantment that eads, “You may have Copy Atifact ente the battlefield as a copy of any atifact on the battlefield, except it’s an enchantment in addition to its othe types.” It entes the battlefield as a copy of Juggenaut. The copiable values of the Copy Atifact now match those of Juggenaut with one modification: its types ae now atifact, ceatue, and enchantment. 4394 Example: Copy Artifact is an enchantment that reads, “You may have Copy Artifact enter the battlefield as a copy of any artifact on the battlefield, except it’s an enchantment in addition to its other types.” It enters the battlefield as a copy of Juggernaut. The copiable values of the Copy Artifact now match those of Juggernaut with one modification: its types are now artifact, creature, and enchantment.
4395 4395
4396 706.9d When applying a copy effect that doesn’t copy a cetain chaacteistic, etains an oiginal value fo a cetain chaacteistic, o modifies the final value of a cetain chaacteistic, any chaacteistic-defining ability (see ule 604.3) of the object being copied that defines that chaacteistic is not copied. If that chaacteistic is colo, any colo indicato (see ule 204) of that object is also not copied. 4396 706.9d When applying a copy effect that doesn’t copy a certain characteristic, retains an original value for a certain characteristic, or modifies the final value of a certain characteristic, any characteristic-defining ability (see rule 604.3) of the object being copied that defines that characteristic is not copied. If that characteristic is color, any color indicator (see rule 204) of that object is also not copied.
4397 Example: Quicksilve Gagantuan is a ceatue that eads, “You may have Quicksilve Gagantuan ente the battlefield as a copy of any ceatue on the battlefield, except it’s 7/7.” Quicksilve Gagantuan entes the battlefield as a copy of Tamogoyf, which has a chaacteistic-defining ability that defines its powe and toughness. Quicksilve Gagantuan does not have that ability. It will be 7/7. 4397 Example: Quicksilver Gargantuan is a creature that reads, “You may have Quicksilver Gargantuan enter the battlefield as a copy of any creature on the battlefield, except it’s 7/7.” Quicksilver Gargantuan enters the battlefield as a copy of Tarmogoyf, which has a characteristic-defining ability that defines its power and toughness. Quicksilver Gargantuan does not have that ability. It will be 7/7.
4398 4398
4399 706.9e Some eplacement effects that geneate copy effects include an exception that’s an additional effect athe than a modification of the affected object’s chaacteistics. If anothe copy effect is applied to that object afte applying the copy effect with that exception, the exception’s effect doesn’t happen. 4399 706.9e Some replacement effects that generate copy effects include an exception that’s an additional effect rather than a modification of the affected object’s characteristics. If another copy effect is applied to that object after applying the copy effect with that exception, the exception’s effect doesn’t happen.
4400 Example: Alteed Ego eads, “You may have Alteed Ego ente the battlefield as a copy of any ceatue on the battlefield, except it entes with X additional +1/+1 countes on it.” You choose fo it to ente the battlefield as a copy of Clone, which eads “You may have Clone ente the battlefield as a copy of any ceatue on the battlefield,” fo which no ceatue was chosen as it enteed the battlefield. If you then choose a ceatue to copy as you apply the eplacement effect Alteed Ego gains by copying Clone, Alteed Ego’s eplacement effect won’t cause it to ente the battlefield with any +1/+1 countes on it. 4400 Example: Altered Ego reads, “You may have Altered Ego enter the battlefield as a copy of any creature on the battlefield, except it enters with X additional +1/+1 counters on it.” You choose for it to enter the battlefield as a copy of Clone, which reads “You may have Clone enter the battlefield as a copy of any creature on the battlefield,” for which no creature was chosen as it entered the battlefield. If you then choose a creature to copy as you apply the replacement effect Altered Ego gains by copying Clone, Altered Ego’s replacement effect won’t cause it to enter the battlefield with any +1/+1 counters on it.
4401 4401
4402 706.9f Some eplacement effects that geneate copy effects ae linked to tiggeed abilities witten in the same paagaph. (See ule 603.11.) If anothe copy effect is applied to that object afte applying the copy effect with the linked tiggeed ability, the ability doesn’t tigge. 4402 706.9f Some replacement effects that generate copy effects are linked to triggered abilities written in the same paragraph. (See rule 603.11.) If another copy effect is applied to that object after applying the copy effect with the linked triggered ability, the ability doesn’t trigger.
4403 4403
4404 706.10. To copy a spell, activated ability, o tiggeed ability means to put a copy of it onto the stack; a copy of a spell isn’t cast and a copy of an activated ability isn’t activated. A copy of a spell o ability copies both the chaacteistics of the spell o ability and all decisions made fo it, including modes, tagets, the value of X, and additional o altenative costs. (See ule 601, “Casting Spells.”) Choices that ae nomally made on esolution ae not copied. If an effect of the copy efes to objects used to pay its costs, it uses the objects used to pay the costs of the oiginal spell o ability. A copy of a spell is owned by the playe unde whose contol it was put on the stack. A copy of a spell o ability is contolled by the playe unde whose contol it was put on the stack. A copy of a spell is itself a spell, even though it has no spell cad associated with it. A copy of an ability is itself an ability. 4404 706.10. To copy a spell, activated ability, or triggered ability means to put a copy of it onto the stack; a copy of a spell isn’t cast and a copy of an activated ability isn’t activated. A copy of a spell or ability copies both the characteristics of the spell or ability and all decisions made for it, including modes, targets, the value of X, and additional or alternative costs. (See rule 601, “Casting Spells.”) Choices that are normally made on resolution are not copied. If an effect of the copy refers to objects used to pay its costs, it uses the objects used to pay the costs of the original spell or ability. A copy of a spell is owned by the player under whose control it was put on the stack. A copy of a spell or ability is controlled by the player under whose control it was put on the stack. A copy of a spell is itself a spell, even though it has no spell card associated with it. A copy of an ability is itself an ability.
4405 Example: A playe casts Fok, tageting an Emeald Cham. Fok eads, “Copy taget instant o socey spell, except that the copy is ed. You may choose new tagets fo the copy.” Emeald Cham is a modal geen instant. When the Fok esolves, it puts a copy of the Emeald Cham on the stack except the copy is ed, not geen. The copy has the same mode that was chosen fo the oiginal Emeald Cham. It does not necessaily have the same taget, but only because Fok allows choosing of new tagets. 4405 Example: A player casts Fork, targeting an Emerald Charm. Fork reads, “Copy target instant or sorcery spell, except that the copy is red. You may choose new targets for the copy.” Emerald Charm is a modal green instant. When the Fork resolves, it puts a copy of the Emerald Charm on the stack except the copy is red, not green. The copy has the same mode that was chosen for the original Emerald Charm. It does not necessarily have the same target, but only because Fork allows choosing of new targets.
4406 Example: Fling is an instant that eads, “As an additional cost to cast this spell, sacifice a ceatue” and “Fling deals damage equal to the sacificed ceatue’s powe to any taget.” When detemining how much damage a copy of Fling deals, it checks the powe of the ceatue sacificed to pay fo the oiginal Fling. 4406 Example: Fling is an instant that reads, “As an additional cost to cast this spell, sacrifice a creature” and “Fling deals damage equal to the sacrificed creature’s power to any target.” When determining how much damage a copy of Fling deals, it checks the power of the creature sacrificed to pay for the original Fling.
4407 Example: Dawnglow Infusion is a socey that eads, “You gain X life if {G} was spent to cast this spell and X life if {W} was spent to cast it.” Because mana isn’t an object, a copy of Dawnglow Infusion won’t cause you to gain any life, no matte what mana was spent to cast the oiginal spell. 4407 Example: Dawnglow Infusion is a sorcery that reads, “You gain X life if {G} was spent to cast this spell and X life if {W} was spent to cast it.” Because mana isn’t an object, a copy of Dawnglow Infusion won’t cause you to gain any life, no matter what mana was spent to cast the original spell.
4408 4408
4409 706.10a If a copy of a spell is in a zone othe than the stack, it ceases to exist. If a copy of a cad is in any zone othe than the stack o the battlefield, it ceases to exist. These ae state-based actions. See ule 704. 4409 706.10a If a copy of a spell is in a zone other than the stack, it ceases to exist. If a copy of a card is in any zone other than the stack or the battlefield, it ceases to exist. These are state-based actions. See rule 704.
4410 4410
4411 706.10b A copy of an ability has the same souce as the oiginal ability. If the ability efes to its souce by name, the copy efes to that same object and not to any othe object with the same name. The copy is consideed to be the same ability by effects that count how many times that ability has esolved duing the tun. 4411 706.10b A copy of an ability has the same source as the original ability. If the ability refers to its source by name, the copy refers to that same object and not to any other object with the same name. The copy is considered to be the same ability by effects that count how many times that ability has resolved during the turn.
4412 4412
4413 706.10c Some effects copy a spell o ability and state that its contolle may choose new tagets fo the copy. The playe may leave any numbe of the tagets unchanged, even if those tagets would be illegal. If the playe chooses to change some o all of the tagets, the new tagets must be legal. Once the playe has decided what the copy’s tagets will be, the copy is put onto the stack with those tagets. 4413 706.10c Some effects copy a spell or ability and state that its controller may choose new targets for the copy. The player may leave any number of the targets unchanged, even if those targets would be illegal. If the player chooses to change some or all of the targets, the new targets must be legal. Once the player has decided what the copy’s targets will be, the copy is put onto the stack with those targets.
4414 4414
4415 706.10d Some effects copy a spell o ability fo each playe o object it “could taget.” The copies ae put onto the stack with those tagets in the ode of thei contolle’s choice. If the spell o ability has moe than one taget, each of its tagets must be the same playe o object. If that playe o object isn’t a legal taget fo each instance of the wod “taget,” a copy isn’t ceated fo that playe o object. 4415 706.10d Some effects copy a spell or ability for each player or object it “could target.” The copies are put onto the stack with those targets in the order of their controller’s choice. If the spell or ability has more than one target, each of its targets must be the same player or object. If that player or object isn’t a legal target for each instance of the word “target,” a copy isn’t created for that player or object.
4416 4416
4417 706.10e Some effects copy a spell o ability and specify a new taget fo the copy. If the spell o ability has moe than one taget, each of the copy’s tagets must be that playe o object. If that playe o object isn’t a legal taget fo each instance of the wod “taget,” the copy isn’t ceated. 4417 706.10e Some effects copy a spell or ability and specify a new target for the copy. If the spell or ability has more than one target, each of the copy’s targets must be that player or object. If that player or object isn’t a legal target for each instance of the word “target,” the copy isn’t created.
4418 4418
4419 706.11. If an effect efes to a pemanent by name, the effect still tacks that pemanent even if it changes names o becomes a copy of something else. 4419 706.11. If an effect refers to a permanent by name, the effect still tracks that permanent even if it changes names or becomes a copy of something else.
4420 Example: An Unstable Shapeshifte copies a Cazed Amodon. Cazed Amodon eads, “{G}: Cazed Amodon gets +3/+0 and gains tample until end of tun. Destoy Cazed Amodon at the beginning of the next end step. Activate this ability only once each tun.” If this ability of the Shapeshifte is activated, the Shapeshifte will be destoyed at the beginning of the next end step, even if it’s no longe a copy of Cazed Amodon at that time. 4420 Example: An Unstable Shapeshifter copies a Crazed Armodon. Crazed Armodon reads, “{G}: Crazed Armodon gets +3/+0 and gains trample until end of turn. Destroy Crazed Armodon at the beginning of the next end step. Activate this ability only once each turn.” If this ability of the Shapeshifter is activated, the Shapeshifter will be destroyed at the beginning of the next end step, even if it’s no longer a copy of Crazed Armodon at that time.
4421 4421
4422 706.12. An effect that instucts a playe to cast a copy of an object (and not just copy a spell) follows the ules fo casting spells, except that the copy is ceated in the same zone the object is in and then cast while anothe spell o ability is esolving. Casting a copy of an object follows steps 601.2a–h of ule 601, “Casting Spells,” and then the copy becomes cast. Once cast, the copy is a spell on the stack, and just like any othe spell it can esolve o be counteed. 4422 706.12. An effect that instructs a player to cast a copy of an object (and not just copy a spell) follows the rules for casting spells, except that the copy is created in the same zone the object is in and then cast while another spell or ability is resolving. Casting a copy of an object follows steps 601.2a–h of rule 601, “Casting Spells,” and then the copy becomes cast. Once cast, the copy is a spell on the stack, and just like any other spell it can resolve or be countered.
4423 4423
4424 707. Face-Down Spells and Pemanents 4424 707. Face-Down Spells and Permanents
4425 4425
4426 707.1. Some cads allow spells and pemanents to be face down. 4426 707.1. Some cards allow spells and permanents to be face down.
4427 4427
4428 707.2. Face-down spells and face-down pemanents have no chaacteistics othe than those listed by the ability o ules that allowed the spell o pemanent to be face down. Any listed chaacteistics ae the copiable values of that object’s chaacteistics. (See ule 613, “Inteaction of Continuous Effects,” and ule 706, “Copying Objects.”) 4428 707.2. Face-down spells and face-down permanents have no characteristics other than those listed by the ability or rules that allowed the spell or permanent to be face down. Any listed characteristics are the copiable values of that object’s characteristics. (See rule 613, “Interaction of Continuous Effects,” and rule 706, “Copying Objects.”)
4429 4429
4430 707.2a If a face-up pemanent is tuned face down by a spell o ability that doesn’t list any chaacteistics fo that object, it becomes a 2/2 face-down ceatue with no text, no name, no subtypes, and no mana cost. A pemanent that entes the battlefield face down also has these chaacteistics unless othewise specified by the effect that put it onto the battlefield face down o allowed it to be cast face down. These values ae the copiable values of that object’s chaacteistics. 4430 707.2a If a face-up permanent is turned face down by a spell or ability that doesn’t list any characteristics for that object, it becomes a 2/2 face-down creature with no text, no name, no subtypes, and no mana cost. A permanent that enters the battlefield face down also has these characteristics unless otherwise specified by the effect that put it onto the battlefield face down or allowed it to be cast face down. These values are the copiable values of that object’s characteristics.
4431 4431
4432 707.3. Objects that ae put onto the battlefield face down ae tuned face down befoe they ente the battlefield, so the pemanent’s entes-the-battlefield abilities won’t tigge (if tiggeed) o have any effect (if static). 4432 707.3. Objects that are put onto the battlefield face down are turned face down before they enter the battlefield, so the permanent’s enters-the-battlefield abilities won’t trigger (if triggered) or have any effect (if static).
4433 4433
4434 707.4. Objects that ae cast face down ae tuned face down befoe they ae put onto the stack, so effects that cae about the chaacteistics of a spell will see only the face-down spell’s chaacteistics. Any effects o pohibitions that would apply to casting an object with these chaacteistics (and not the face-up object’s chaacteistics) ae applied to casting this object. The pemanent the spell becomes will be a face-down pemanent. 4434 707.4. Objects that are cast face down are turned face down before they are put onto the stack, so effects that care about the characteristics of a spell will see only the face-down spell’s characteristics. Any effects or prohibitions that would apply to casting an object with these characteristics (and not the face-up object’s characteristics) are applied to casting this object. The permanent the spell becomes will be a face-down permanent.
4435 4435
4436 707.5. At any time, you may look at a face-down spell you contol on the stack o a face-down pemanent you contol (even if it’s phased out). You can’t look at face-down cads in any othe zone o face-down spells o pemanents contolled by anothe playe. 4436 707.5. At any time, you may look at a face-down spell you control on the stack or a face-down permanent you control (even if it’s phased out). You can’t look at face-down cards in any other zone or face-down spells or permanents controlled by another player.
4437 4437
4438 707.6. If you contol multiple face-down spells o face-down pemanents, you must ensue at all times that you face-down spells and pemanents can be easily diffeentiated fom each othe. This includes, but is not limited to, knowing what ability o ules caused the pemanents to be face down, the ode spells wee cast, the ode that face-down pemanents enteed the battlefield, which ceatue(s) attacked last tun, and any othe diffeences between face-down spells o pemanents. Common methods fo distinguishing between face-down objects include using countes o dice to mak the diffeent objects, o clealy placing those objects in ode on the table. 4438 707.6. If you control multiple face-down spells or face-down permanents, you must ensure at all times that your face-down spells and permanents can be easily differentiated from each other. This includes, but is not limited to, knowing what ability or rules caused the permanents to be face down, the order spells were cast, the order that face-down permanents entered the battlefield, which creature(s) attacked last turn, and any other differences between face-down spells or permanents. Common methods for distinguishing between face-down objects include using counters or dice to mark the different objects, or clearly placing those objects in order on the table.
4439 4439
4440 707.7. The ability o ules that allow a pemanent to be face down may also allow the pemanent’s contolle to tun it face up. Spells nomally can’t be tuned face up. 4440 707.7. The ability or rules that allow a permanent to be face down may also allow the permanent’s controller to turn it face up. Spells normally can’t be turned face up.
4441 4441
4442 707.8. As a face-down pemanent is tuned face up, its copiable values evet to its nomal copiable values. Any effects that have been applied to the face-down pemanent still apply to the face-up pemanent. Any abilities elating to the pemanent enteing the battlefield don’t tigge and don’t have any effect, because the pemanent has aleady enteed the battlefield. 4442 707.8. As a face-down permanent is turned face up, its copiable values revert to its normal copiable values. Any effects that have been applied to the face-down permanent still apply to the face-up permanent. Any abilities relating to the permanent entering the battlefield don’t trigger and don’t have any effect, because the permanent has already entered the battlefield.
4443 4443
4444 707.9. If a face-down pemanent moves fom the battlefield to any othe zone, its owne must eveal it to all playes as they move it. If a face-down spell moves fom the stack to any zone othe than the battlefield, its owne must eveal it to all playes as they move it. If a playe leaves the game, all face-down pemanents and spells owned by that playe must be evealed to all playes. At the end of each game, all face-down pemanents and spells must be evealed to all playes. 4444 707.9. If a face-down permanent moves from the battlefield to any other zone, its owner must reveal it to all players as they move it. If a face-down spell moves from the stack to any zone other than the battlefield, its owner must reveal it to all players as they move it. If a player leaves the game, all face-down permanents and spells owned by that player must be revealed to all players. At the end of each game, all face-down permanents and spells must be revealed to all players.
4445 4445
4446 707.10. If a face-down pemanent becomes a copy of anothe pemanent, its copiable values become the copiable values of that pemanent, as modified by its face-down status. Its chaacteistics theefoe emain the same: the chaacteistics listed by the ability o ules that allowed it to be tuned face down. Howeve, if it is tuned face up, its copiable values become the values it copied fom the othe pemanent. See ule 706.3. 4446 707.10. If a face-down permanent becomes a copy of another permanent, its copiable values become the copiable values of that permanent, as modified by its face-down status. Its characteristics therefore remain the same: the characteristics listed by the ability or rules that allowed it to be turned face down. However, if it is turned face up, its copiable values become the values it copied from the other permanent. See rule 706.3.
4447 4447
4448 707.11. If a face-down pemanent would have an “As [this pemanent] is tuned face up . . .” ability afte it’s tuned face up, that ability is applied while that pemanent is being tuned face up, not aftewad. 4448 707.11. If a face-down permanent would have an “As [this permanent] is turned face up . . .” ability after it’s turned face up, that ability is applied while that permanent is being turned face up, not afterward.
4449 4449
4450 708. Split Cads 4450 708. Split Cards
4451 4451
4452 708.1. Split cads have two cad faces on a single cad. The back of a split cad is the nomal Magic cad back. 4452 708.1. Split cards have two card faces on a single card. The back of a split card is the normal Magic card back.
4453 4453
4454 708.2. Although split cads have two castable halves, each split cad is only one cad. Fo example, a playe who has dawn o discaded a split cad has dawn o discaded one cad, not two. 4454 708.2. Although split cards have two castable halves, each split card is only one card. For example, a player who has drawn or discarded a split card has drawn or discarded one card, not two.
4455 4455
4456 708.3. A playe chooses which half of a split cad they ae casting befoe putting it onto the stack. 4456 708.3. A player chooses which half of a split card they are casting before putting it onto the stack.
4457 4457
4458 708.3a Only the chosen half is evaluated to see if it can be cast. Only that half is consideed to be put onto the stack. 4458 708.3a Only the chosen half is evaluated to see if it can be cast. Only that half is considered to be put onto the stack.
4459 4459
4460 708.3b While on the stack, only the chaacteistics of the half being cast exist. The othe half’s chaacteistics ae teated as though they didn’t exist. 4460 708.3b While on the stack, only the characteristics of the half being cast exist. The other half’s characteristics are treated as though they didn’t exist.
4461 4461
4462 708.3c An effect may ceate a copy of a split cad and allow a playe to cast the copy. That copy etains the chaacteistics of the two halves sepaated into the same two halves as the oiginal cad. (See ule 706.12.) 4462 708.3c An effect may create a copy of a split card and allow a player to cast the copy. That copy retains the characteristics of the two halves separated into the same two halves as the original card. (See rule 706.12.)
4463 4463
4464 708.4. In evey zone except the stack, the chaacteistics of a split cad ae those of its two halves combined. This is a change fom pevious ules. 4464 708.4. In every zone except the stack, the characteristics of a split card are those of its two halves combined. This is a change from previous rules.
4465 4465
4466 708.4a Each split cad has two names. If an effect instucts a playe to choose a cad name and the playe wants to choose a split cad’s name, the playe must choose one of those names and not both. An object has the chosen name if one of its names is the chosen name. 4466 708.4a Each split card has two names. If an effect instructs a player to choose a card name and the player wants to choose a split card’s name, the player must choose one of those names and not both. An object has the chosen name if one of its names is the chosen name.
4467 4467
4468 708.4b The mana cost of a split cad is the combined mana costs of its two halves. A split cad’s colos and conveted mana cost ae detemined fom its combined mana cost. 4468 708.4b The mana cost of a split card is the combined mana costs of its two halves. A split card’s colors and converted mana cost are determined from its combined mana cost.
4469 Example: Assault/Battey’s mana cost is {3}{R}{G}. It’s a ed and geen cad with a conveted mana cost of 5. If you cast Assault, the esulting spell is a ed spell with a conveted mana cost of 1. 4469 Example: Assault/Battery’s mana cost is {3}{R}{G}. It’s a red and green card with a converted mana cost of 5. If you cast Assault, the resulting spell is a red spell with a converted mana cost of 1.
4470 4470
4471 708.4c A split cad has each cad type specified on eithe of its halves and each ability in the text box of each half. 4471 708.4c A split card has each card type specified on either of its halves and each ability in the text box of each half.
4472 4472
4473 708.4d The chaacteistics of a fused split spell on the stack ae also those of its two halves combined (see ule 702.101, “Fuse”). 4473 708.4d The characteristics of a fused split spell on the stack are also those of its two halves combined (see rule 702.101, “Fuse”).
4474 4474
4475 709. Flip Cads 4475 709. Flip Cards
4476 4476
4477 709.1. Flip cads have a two-pat cad fame on a single cad. The text that appeas ight side up on the cad defines the cad’s nomal chaacteistics. Additional altenative chaacteistics appea upside down on the cad. The back of a flip cad is the nomal Magic cad back. 4477 709.1. Flip cards have a two-part card frame on a single card. The text that appears right side up on the card defines the card’s normal characteristics. Additional alternative characteristics appear upside down on the card. The back of a flip card is the normal Magic card back.
4478 4478
4479 709.1a The top half of a flip cad contains the cad’s nomal name, text box, type line, powe, and toughness. The text box usually contains an ability that causes the pemanent to “flip” if cetain conditions ae met. 4479 709.1a The top half of a flip card contains the card’s normal name, text box, type line, power, and toughness. The text box usually contains an ability that causes the permanent to “flip” if certain conditions are met.
4480 4480
4481 709.1b The bottom half of a flip cad contains an altenative name, text box, type line, powe, and toughness. These chaacteistics ae used only if the pemanent is on the battlefield and only if the pemanent is flipped. 4481 709.1b The bottom half of a flip card contains an alternative name, text box, type line, power, and toughness. These characteristics are used only if the permanent is on the battlefield and only if the permanent is flipped.
4482 4482
4483 709.1c A flip cad’s colo and mana cost don’t change if the pemanent is flipped. Also, any changes to it by extenal effects will still apply. 4483 709.1c A flip card’s color and mana cost don’t change if the permanent is flipped. Also, any changes to it by external effects will still apply.
4484 4484
4485 709.2. In evey zone othe than the battlefield, and also on the battlefield befoe the pemanent flips, a flip cad has only the nomal chaacteistics of the cad. Once a pemanent is flipped, its nomal name, text box, type line, powe, and toughness don’t apply and the altenative vesions of those chaacteistics apply instead. 4485 709.2. In every zone other than the battlefield, and also on the battlefield before the permanent flips, a flip card has only the normal characteristics of the card. Once a permanent is flipped, its normal name, text box, type line, power, and toughness don’t apply and the alternative versions of those characteristics apply instead.
4486 Example: Akki Lavaunne is a nonlegenday ceatue that flips into a legenday ceatue named Tok-Tok, Volcano Bon. An effect that says “Seach you libay fo a legenday cad” can’t find this flip cad. An effect that says “Legenday ceatues get +2/+2” doesn’t affect Akki Lavaunne, but it does affect Tok-Tok. 4486 Example: Akki Lavarunner is a nonlegendary creature that flips into a legendary creature named Tok-Tok, Volcano Born. An effect that says “Search your library for a legendary card” can’t find this flip card. An effect that says “Legendary creatures get +2/+2” doesn’t affect Akki Lavarunner, but it does affect Tok-Tok.
4487 4487
4488 709.3. You must ensue that it’s clea at all times whethe a pemanent you contol is flipped o not, both when it’s untapped and when it’s tapped. Common methods fo distinguishing between flipped and unflipped pemanents include using coins o dice to mak flipped objects. 4488 709.3. You must ensure that it’s clear at all times whether a permanent you control is flipped or not, both when it’s untapped and when it’s tapped. Common methods for distinguishing between flipped and unflipped permanents include using coins or dice to mark flipped objects.
4489 4489
4490 709.4. Flipping a pemanent is a one-way pocess. Once a pemanent is flipped, it’s impossible fo it to become unflipped. Howeve, if a flipped pemanent leaves the battlefield, it etains no memoy of its status. See ule 110.5. 4490 709.4. Flipping a permanent is a one-way process. Once a permanent is flipped, it’s impossible for it to become unflipped. However, if a flipped permanent leaves the battlefield, it retains no memory of its status. See rule 110.5.
4491 4491
4492 709.5. If an effect instucts a playe to choose a cad name and the playe wants to choose a flip cad’s altenative name, the playe may do so. 4492 709.5. If an effect instructs a player to choose a card name and the player wants to choose a flip card’s alternative name, the player may do so.
4493 4493
4494 710. Levele Cads 4494 710. Leveler Cards
4495 4495
4496 710.1. Each levele cad has a stiated text box and thee powe/toughness boxes. The text box of a levele cad contains two level symbols. 4496 710.1. Each leveler card has a striated text box and three power/toughness boxes. The text box of a leveler card contains two level symbols.
4497 4497
4498 710.2. A level symbol is a keywod ability that epesents a static ability. The level symbol includes eithe a ange of numbes, indicated hee as “N1-N2,” o a single numbe followed by a plus sign, indicated hee as “N3+.” Any abilities pinted within the same text box stiation as a level symbol ae pat of its static ability. The same is tue of the powe/toughness box pinted within that stiation, indicated hee as “[P/T].” 4498 710.2. A level symbol is a keyword ability that represents a static ability. The level symbol includes either a range of numbers, indicated here as “N1-N2,” or a single number followed by a plus sign, indicated here as “N3+.” Any abilities printed within the same text box striation as a level symbol are part of its static ability. The same is true of the power/toughness box printed within that striation, indicated here as “[P/T].”
4499 4499
4500 710.2a “{LEVEL N1-N2} [Abilities] [P/T]” means “As long as this ceatue has at least N1 level countes on it, but no moe than N2 level countes on it, it has base powe and toughness [P/T] and has [abilities].” 4500 710.2a “{LEVEL N1-N2} [Abilities] [P/T]” means “As long as this creature has at least N1 level counters on it, but no more than N2 level counters on it, it has base power and toughness [P/T] and has [abilities].”
4501 4501
4502 710.2b “{LEVEL N3+} [Abilities] [P/T]” means “As long as this ceatue has N3 o moe level countes on it, it has base powe and toughness [P/T] and has [abilities].” 4502 710.2b “{LEVEL N3+} [Abilities] [P/T]” means “As long as this creature has N3 or more level counters on it, it has base power and toughness [P/T] and has [abilities].”
4503 4503
4504 710.3. The text box stiations have no game significance othe than clealy demacating which abilities and which powe/toughness box ae associated with which level symbol. Levele cads each contain only one text box. 4504 710.3. The text box striations have no game significance other than clearly demarcating which abilities and which power/toughness box are associated with which level symbol. Leveler cards each contain only one text box.
4505 4505
4506 710.4. Any ability a levele cad has that isn’t peceded by a level symbol is teated nomally. In paticula, each levele pemanent has its level up ability (see ule 702.86) at all times; it may be activated egadless of how many level countes ae on that pemanent. 4506 710.4. Any ability a leveler card has that isn’t preceded by a level symbol is treated normally. In particular, each leveler permanent has its level up ability (see rule 702.86) at all times; it may be activated regardless of how many level counters are on that permanent.
4507 4507
4508 710.5. If the numbe of level countes on a levele ceatue is less than N1 (the fist numbe pinted in its {LEVEL N1-N2} symbol), it has the powe and toughness denoted by its uppemost powe/toughness box. 4508 710.5. If the number of level counters on a leveler creature is less than N1 (the first number printed in its {LEVEL N1-N2} symbol), it has the power and toughness denoted by its uppermost power/toughness box.
4509 4509
4510 710.6. In evey zone othe than the battlefield, a levele cad has the powe and toughness denoted by its uppemost powe/toughness box. 4510 710.6. In every zone other than the battlefield, a leveler card has the power and toughness denoted by its uppermost power/toughness box.
4511 4511
4512 711. Double-Faced Cads 4512 711. Double-Faced Cards
4513 4513
4514 711.1. A double-faced cad has a Magic cad face on each side athe than a Magic cad face on one side and a Magic cad back on the othe. Each face may have abilities that allow the cad to “tansfom,” o tun ove to its othe face. Tokens and cads with a Magic cad back can’t tansfom. (See ule 701.27, “Tansfom.”) 4514 711.1. A double-faced card has a Magic card face on each side rather than a Magic card face on one side and a Magic card back on the other. Each face may have abilities that allow the card to “transform,” or turn over to its other face. Tokens and cards with a Magic card back can’t transform. (See rule 701.27, “Transform.”)
4515 4515
4516 711.1a A double-faced cad’s font face is maked by a font-face symbol in its uppe left cone. On Magic Oigins® and Coe Set 2019 double-faced cads, the font-face symbol is a modified Planeswalke icon. On cads in the Innistad™ block and Shadows ove Innistad set, as well as on Ulich of the Kallenhode in the Elditch Moon™ set, the font-face symbol is a sun. On othe Elditch Moon double-faced cads, the font-face symbol is a full moon. On Ixalan™ and Rivals of Ixalan™ cads, the font-face symbol is a compass ose. 4516 711.1a A double-faced card’s front face is marked by a front-face symbol in its upper left corner. On Magic Origins® and Core Set 2019 double-faced cards, the front-face symbol is a modified Planeswalker icon. On cards in the Innistrad™ block and Shadows over Innistrad set, as well as on Ulrich of the Krallenhorde in the Eldritch Moon™ set, the front-face symbol is a sun. On other Eldritch Moon double-faced cards, the front-face symbol is a full moon. On Ixalan™ and Rivals of Ixalan™ cards, the front-face symbol is a compass rose.
4517 4517
4518 711.1b A double-faced cad’s back face is maked by a back-face symbol in its uppe left cone. On Magic Oigins and Coe Set 2019 double-faced cads, the back-face symbol is a full Planeswalke icon. On cads in the Innistad block and Shadows ove Innistad set, as well as on Ulich, Uncontested Alpha in the Elditch Moon set, the back-face symbol is a cescent moon. On othe Elditch Moon double-faced cads, the back-face symbol is a stylized image of Emakul. On Ixalan and Rivals of Ixalan cads, the back-face symbol is a land icon. 4518 711.1b A double-faced card’s back face is marked by a back-face symbol in its upper left corner. On Magic Origins and Core Set 2019 double-faced cards, the back-face symbol is a full Planeswalker icon. On cards in the Innistrad block and Shadows over Innistrad set, as well as on Ulrich, Uncontested Alpha in the Eldritch Moon set, the back-face symbol is a crescent moon. On other Eldritch Moon double-faced cards, the back-face symbol is a stylized image of Emrakul. On Ixalan and Rivals of Ixalan cards, the back-face symbol is a land icon.
4519 4519
4520 711.1c If the back face of a double-faced cad is a ceatue, the font face of that cad will have the back face’s powe and toughness pinted in gay above the powe and toughness box. This is eminde text and has no effect on game play. 4520 711.1c If the back face of a double-faced card is a creature, the front face of that card will have the back face’s power and toughness printed in gray above the power and toughness box. This is reminder text and has no effect on game play.
4521 4521
4522 711.1d Meld cads have a Magic cad face on one side and half of an ovesized Magic cad face on the othe. These aen’t double-faced cads and ae subject to thei own set of ules. See ule 712, “Meld Cads.” 4522 711.1d Meld cards have a Magic card face on one side and half of an oversized Magic card face on the other. These aren’t double-faced cards and are subject to their own set of rules. See rule 712, “Meld Cards.”
4523 4523
4524 711.2. Playes who ae allowed to look at a double-faced cad may look at both faces. 4524 711.2. Players who are allowed to look at a double-faced card may look at both faces.
4525 4525
4526 711.3. Playes must ensue that double-faced cads in hidden zones ae indistinguishable fom othe cads in the same zone. To do this, the owne of a double-faced cad may use completely opaque cad sleeves o substitute a checklist cad (see ule 713). Sanctioned tounaments have additional ules fo playing with double-faced cads. See ule 100.6. 4526 711.3. Players must ensure that double-faced cards in hidden zones are indistinguishable from other cards in the same zone. To do this, the owner of a double-faced card may use completely opaque card sleeves or substitute a checklist card (see rule 713). Sanctioned tournaments have additional rules for playing with double-faced cards. See rule 100.6.
4527 4527
4528 711.4. Each face of a double-faced cad has its own set of chaacteistics. 4528 711.4. Each face of a double-faced card has its own set of characteristics.
4529 4529
4530 711.4a While a double-faced cad is outside the game, in a zone othe than the battlefield, o on the battlefield with its font face up, it has only the chaacteistics of its font face. 4530 711.4a While a double-faced card is outside the game, in a zone other than the battlefield, or on the battlefield with its front face up, it has only the characteristics of its front face.
4531 4531
4532 711.4b While a double-faced pemanent’s back face is up, it has only the chaacteistics of its back face. Howeve, its conveted mana cost is calculated using the mana cost of its font face. If a pemanent is copying the back face of a double-faced cad (even if the cad epesenting that copy is itself a double-faced cad), the conveted mana cost of that pemanent is 0. 4532 711.4b While a double-faced permanent’s back face is up, it has only the characteristics of its back face. However, its converted mana cost is calculated using the mana cost of its front face. If a permanent is copying the back face of a double-faced card (even if the card representing that copy is itself a double-faced card), the converted mana cost of that permanent is 0.
4533 4533
4534 711.5. Only pemanents epesented by double-faced cads can tansfom. (See ule 701.27, “Tansfom.”) If a spell o ability instucts a playe to tansfom any pemanent that isn’t epesented by a double-faced cad, nothing happens. 4534 711.5. Only permanents represented by double-faced cards can transform. (See rule 701.27, “Transform.”) If a spell or ability instructs a player to transform any permanent that isn’t represented by a double-faced card, nothing happens.
4535 Example: A Clone entes the battlefield as a copy of Wildblood Pack (the back face of a double-faced cad). The Clone will be a copy of the Wildblood Pack. Because the Clone is itself not a double-faced cad, it can’t tansfom. 4535 Example: A Clone enters the battlefield as a copy of Wildblood Pack (the back face of a double-faced card). The Clone will be a copy of the Wildblood Pack. Because the Clone is itself not a double-faced card, it can’t transform.
4536 Example: A playe casts Cytoshape, causing a Kuin Outlaw (the font face of a double-faced cad) to become a copy of Elite Vanguad (a 2/1 Human Soldie ceatue) until end of tun. The playe then casts Moonmist, which eads, in pat, “Tansfom all Humans.” Because the copy of Elite Vanguad is a double-faced cad, it will tansfom. The esulting pemanent will have its back face up, but it will still be a copy of Elite Vanguad that tun. 4536 Example: A player casts Cytoshape, causing a Kruin Outlaw (the front face of a double-faced card) to become a copy of Elite Vanguard (a 2/1 Human Soldier creature) until end of turn. The player then casts Moonmist, which reads, in part, “Transform all Humans.” Because the copy of Elite Vanguard is a double-faced card, it will transform. The resulting permanent will have its back face up, but it will still be a copy of Elite Vanguard that turn.
4537 4537
4538 711.6. If a spell o ability instucts a playe to tansfom a pemanent, and the face that pemanent would tansfom into is epesented by an instant o socey cad face, nothing happens. 4538 711.6. If a spell or ability instructs a player to transform a permanent, and the face that permanent would transform into is represented by an instant or sorcery card face, nothing happens.
4539 4539
4540 711.7. If a double-faced cad is cast as a spell, it’s put on the stack with its font face up. See ule 601, “Casting Spells.” 4540 711.7. If a double-faced card is cast as a spell, it’s put on the stack with its front face up. See rule 601, “Casting Spells.”
4541 4541
4542 711.8. A double-faced cad entes the battlefield with its font face up by default. If a spell o ability puts it onto the battlefield “tansfomed,” it entes the battlefield with its back face up. 4542 711.8. A double-faced card enters the battlefield with its front face up by default. If a spell or ability puts it onto the battlefield “transformed,” it enters the battlefield with its back face up.
4543 4543
4544 711.8a If a playe is instucted to put a cad that isn’t a double-faced cad onto the battlefield tansfomed, that cad stays in its cuent zone. 4544 711.8a If a player is instructed to put a card that isn’t a double-faced card onto the battlefield transformed, that card stays in its current zone.
4545 4545
4546 711.9. If an effect allows a playe to cast a double-faced cad as a face-down ceatue spell, o if a double-faced cad entes the battlefield face down, it will have the chaacteistics given to it by the ule o effect that caused it to be face down. That cad emains hidden, using eithe a face-down checklist cad o opaque sleeves. See ule 707, “Face-Down Spells and Pemanents.” 4546 711.9. If an effect allows a player to cast a double-faced card as a face-down creature spell, or if a double-faced card enters the battlefield face down, it will have the characteristics given to it by the rule or effect that caused it to be face down. That card remains hidden, using either a face-down checklist card or opaque sleeves. See rule 707, “Face-Down Spells and Permanents.”
4547 4547
4548 711.9a While face down, a double-faced pemanent can’t tansfom. If it is tuned face up, it will have its font face up. 4548 711.9a While face down, a double-faced permanent can’t transform. If it is turned face up, it will have its front face up.
4549 4549
4550 711.10. Double-faced pemanents can’t be tuned face down. If a spell o ability ties to tun a double-faced pemanent face down, nothing happens. 4550 711.10. Double-faced permanents can’t be turned face down. If a spell or ability tries to turn a double-faced permanent face down, nothing happens.
4551 4551
4552 711.11. A double-faced cad that is exiled face down emains hidden, using eithe a face-down checklist cad o opaque sleeves. See ule 713, “Checklist Cads.” 4552 711.11. A double-faced card that is exiled face down remains hidden, using either a face-down checklist card or opaque sleeves. See rule 713, “Checklist Cards.”
4553 4553
4554 711.12. When a double-faced pemanent tansfoms, it doesn’t become a new object. Any effects that applied to that pemanent will continue to apply to it afte it tansfoms. 4554 711.12. When a double-faced permanent transforms, it doesn’t become a new object. Any effects that applied to that permanent will continue to apply to it after it transforms.
4555 Example: An effect gives Village Ionsmith (the font face of a double-faced cad) +2/+2 until end of tun and then Village Ionsmith tansfoms into Ionfang. Ionfang will continue to get +2/+2 until end of tun. 4555 Example: An effect gives Village Ironsmith (the front face of a double-faced card) +2/+2 until end of turn and then Village Ironsmith transforms into Ironfang. Ironfang will continue to get +2/+2 until end of turn.
4556 4556
4557 711.13. If an effect instucts a playe to choose a cad name, the playe may name eithe face of a double-faced cad but not both. 4557 711.13. If an effect instructs a player to choose a card name, the player may name either face of a double-faced card but not both.
4558 4558
4559 712. Meld Cads 4559 712. Meld Cards
4560 4560
4561 712.1. A meld cad has a Magic cad face on one side and half of an ovesized Magic cad face on the othe. It doesn’t have a Magic cad back. 4561 712.1. A meld card has a Magic card face on one side and half of an oversized Magic card face on the other. It doesn’t have a Magic card back.
4562 4562
4563 712.1a Thee ae thee specific meld pais. Each meld pai consists of two specific cads whose back faces combine to fom one ovesized Magic cad face: Midnight Scavenges and Gaf Rats meld to fom Chitteing Host; Hanwei Gaison and Hanwei Battlements meld to fom Hanwei, the Withing Township; and Buna, the Fading Light and Gisela, the Boken Blade meld to fom Bisela, Voice of Nightmaes. 4563 712.1a There are three specific meld pairs. Each meld pair consists of two specific cards whose back faces combine to form one oversized Magic card face: Midnight Scavengers and Graf Rats meld to form Chittering Host; Hanweir Garrison and Hanweir Battlements meld to form Hanweir, the Writhing Township; and Bruna, the Fading Light and Gisela, the Broken Blade meld to form Brisela, Voice of Nightmares.
4564 4564
4565 712.1b A meld cad isn’t a double-faced cad. It can’t tansfom o ente the battlefield tansfomed. (See ule 711, “Double-Faced Cads.”) 4565 712.1b A meld card isn’t a double-faced card. It can’t transform or enter the battlefield transformed. (See rule 711, “Double-Faced Cards.”)
4566 4566
4567 712.2. One cad in each meld pai has an ability that exiles both that object and its countepat and melds them. To meld the two cads in a meld pai, put them onto the battlefield with thei back faces up and combined (see ule 701.36, “Meld”). The esulting pemanent is a single object epesented by two cads. 4567 712.2. One card in each meld pair has an ability that exiles both that object and its counterpart and melds them. To meld the two cards in a meld pair, put them onto the battlefield with their back faces up and combined (see rule 701.36, “Meld”). The resulting permanent is a single object represented by two cards.
4568 4568
4569 712.3. The font face of each meld cad and the combined face fomed by a meld pai each has its own set of chaacteistics. 4569 712.3. The front face of each meld card and the combined face formed by a meld pair each has its own set of characteristics.
4570 4570
4571 712.3a While a meld cad is outside the game, in a zone othe than the battlefield, o on the battlefield with its font face up, it has only the chaacteistics of its font face. 4571 712.3a While a meld card is outside the game, in a zone other than the battlefield, or on the battlefield with its front face up, it has only the characteristics of its front face.
4572 4572
4573 712.3b While the two cads of a meld pai ae on the battlefield as a melded pemanent, the object epesented by those cads has only the chaacteistics of the combined back face, and its conveted mana cost is the sum of the conveted mana costs of its font faces. If a pemanent is copying a melded pemanent, the conveted mana cost of the copy is 0. See ule 202.3c. 4573 712.3b While the two cards of a meld pair are on the battlefield as a melded permanent, the object represented by those cards has only the characteristics of the combined back face, and its converted mana cost is the sum of the converted mana costs of its front faces. If a permanent is copying a melded permanent, the converted mana cost of the copy is 0. See rule 202.3c.
4574 4574
4575 712.3c Anything that needs infomation about a meld cad o a melded pemanent sees only the infomation given by the face that is cuently up. 4575 712.3c Anything that needs information about a meld card or a melded permanent sees only the information given by the face that is currently up.
4576 Example: A Clone entes the battlefield as a copy of Chitteing Host (the combined back face of a meld pai). It has the chaacteistics of Chitteing Host, even though the object it becomes is epesented by only a single cad, and its conveted mana cost is 0. 4576 Example: A Clone enters the battlefield as a copy of Chittering Host (the combined back face of a meld pair). It has the characteristics of Chittering Host, even though the object it becomes is represented by only a single card, and its converted mana cost is 0.
4577 4577
4578 712.4. If a melded pemanent leaves the battlefield, one pemanent leaves the battlefield and two cads ae put into the appopiate zone. 4578 712.4. If a melded permanent leaves the battlefield, one permanent leaves the battlefield and two cards are put into the appropriate zone.
4579 Example: Chitteing Host, a melded pemanent, dies. An ability that tigges “wheneve a ceatue dies” tigges once. An ability that tigges “wheneve a cad is put into a gaveyad fom anywhee” tigges twice. 4579 Example: Chittering Host, a melded permanent, dies. An ability that triggers “whenever a creature dies” triggers once. An ability that triggers “whenever a card is put into a graveyard from anywhere” triggers twice.
4580 4580
4581 712.4a If a melded pemanent is put into its owne’s gaveyad o libay, that playe may aange the two cads in any ode. If it’s put into its owne’s libay, that playe doesn’t eveal the ode. 4581 712.4a If a melded permanent is put into its owner’s graveyard or library, that player may arrange the two cards in any order. If it’s put into its owner’s library, that player doesn’t reveal the order.
4582 4582
4583 712.4b If a playe exiles a melded pemanent, that playe detemines the elative timestamp ode of the two cads at that time. This is an exception to the pocedue descibed in ule 613.6j. 4583 712.4b If a player exiles a melded permanent, that player determines the relative timestamp order of the two cards at that time. This is an exception to the procedure described in rule 613.6j.
4584 Example: Duplicant is a cad with the abilities “When Duplicant entes the battlefield, you may exile taget nontoken ceatue” and “As long as a cad exiled with Duplicant is a ceatue cad, Duplicant has the powe, toughness, and ceatue types of the last ceatue cad exiled with Duplicant. It’s still a Shapeshifte.” As Duplicant’s fist ability exiles Chitteing Host, a melded pemanent, Duplicant’s contolle chooses whethe the last ceatue cad exiled is Midnight Scavenges o Gaf Rats. 4584 Example: Duplicant is a card with the abilities “When Duplicant enters the battlefield, you may exile target nontoken creature” and “As long as a card exiled with Duplicant is a creature card, Duplicant has the power, toughness, and creature types of the last creature card exiled with Duplicant. It’s still a Shapeshifter.” As Duplicant’s first ability exiles Chittering Host, a melded permanent, Duplicant’s controller chooses whether the last creature card exiled is Midnight Scavengers or Graf Rats.
4585 4585
4586 712.4c If an effect can find the new object that a melded pemanent becomes as it leaves the battlefield, it finds both cads. (See ule 400.7.) If that effect causes actions to be taken upon those cads, the same actions ae taken upon each of them. 4586 712.4c If an effect can find the new object that a melded permanent becomes as it leaves the battlefield, it finds both cards. (See rule 400.7.) If that effect causes actions to be taken upon those cards, the same actions are taken upon each of them.
4587 Example: Othewoldly Jouney is an instant that eads “Exile taget ceatue. At the beginning of the next end step, etun that cad to the battlefield unde its owne’s contol with a +1/+1 counte on it.” A playe casts Othewoldly Jouney tageting Chitteing Host, a melded pemanent. Chitteing Host is exiled. At the beginning of the next end step, Midnight Scavenges and Gaf Rats ae both etuned to the battlefield, each with a +1/+1 counte on it. 4587 Example: Otherworldly Journey is an instant that reads “Exile target creature. At the beginning of the next end step, return that card to the battlefield under its owner’s control with a +1/+1 counter on it.” A player casts Otherworldly Journey targeting Chittering Host, a melded permanent. Chittering Host is exiled. At the beginning of the next end step, Midnight Scavengers and Graf Rats are both returned to the battlefield, each with a +1/+1 counter on it.
4588 Example: False Demise is an Aua with the ability “When enchanted ceatue dies, etun that cad to the battlefield unde you contol.” A Chitteing Host enchanted by False Demise dies. The tiggeed ability etuns both Midnight Scavenges and Gaf Rats to the battlefield. 4588 Example: False Demise is an Aura with the ability “When enchanted creature dies, return that card to the battlefield under your control.” A Chittering Host enchanted by False Demise dies. The triggered ability returns both Midnight Scavengers and Graf Rats to the battlefield.
4589 Example: Mimic Vat is an atifact that eads, in pat, “Wheneve a nontoken ceatue dies, you may exile that cad.” A Chitteing Host dies. As Mimic Vat’s tiggeed ability esolves, its contolle makes a single choice and both cads that epesented Chitteing Host ae eithe exiled o not. 4589 Example: Mimic Vat is an artifact that reads, in part, “Whenever a nontoken creature dies, you may exile that card.” A Chittering Host dies. As Mimic Vat’s triggered ability resolves, its controller makes a single choice and both cards that represented Chittering Host are either exiled or not.
4590 4590
4591 712.4d If multiple eplacement effects could be applied to the event of a melded pemanent leaving the battlefield o being put into the new zone, applying one of those eplacement effects to one of the two cads affects both cads. If the melded pemanent is a commande, it may be exempt fom this ule; see ule 903.9a. 4591 712.4d If multiple replacement effects could be applied to the event of a melded permanent leaving the battlefield or being put into the new zone, applying one of those replacement effects to one of the two cards affects both cards. If the melded permanent is a commander, it may be exempt from this rule; see rule 903.9a.
4592 Example: Leyline of the Void is an enchantment that eads, in pat, “If a cad would be put into an opponent’s gaveyad fom anywhee, exile it instead.” Wheel of Sun and Moon is an Aua with enchant playe and the ability “If a cad would be put into enchanted playe’s gaveyad fom anywhee, instead that cad is evealed and put on the bottom of its owne’s libay.” If the contolle of Chitteing Host is affected by both cads’ effects, that playe chooses one effect to apply to the event and Midnight Scavenges and Gaf Rats ae both moved to the appopiate zone. 4592 Example: Leyline of the Void is an enchantment that reads, in part, “If a card would be put into an opponent’s graveyard from anywhere, exile it instead.” Wheel of Sun and Moon is an Aura with enchant player and the ability “If a card would be put into enchanted player’s graveyard from anywhere, instead that card is revealed and put on the bottom of its owner’s library.” If the controller of Chittering Host is affected by both cards’ effects, that player chooses one effect to apply to the event and Midnight Scavengers and Graf Rats are both moved to the appropriate zone.
4593 4593
4594 712.4e If an effect needs to know the numbe of objects that changed zones, a melded pemanent among those objects counts as one object that moved. If the effect needs to know the numbe of cads that changed zones, that melded pemanent counts as two cads that moved. 4594 712.4e If an effect needs to know the number of objects that changed zones, a melded permanent among those objects counts as one object that moved. If the effect needs to know the number of cards that changed zones, that melded permanent counts as two cards that moved.
4595 4595
4596 712.5. Playes who ae allowed to look at a meld cad may look at its half of the combined back face. Playes may access Oacle text fo the othe membe of the meld pai and the combined face at any time (see ule 108.1). 4596 712.5. Players who are allowed to look at a meld card may look at its half of the combined back face. Players may access Oracle text for the other member of the meld pair and the combined face at any time (see rule 108.1).
4597 4597
4598 712.6. Meld cads in a playe’s deck may be epesented by checklist cads. See ule 713, “Checklist Cads.” 4598 712.6. Meld cards in a player’s deck may be represented by checklist cards. See rule 713, “Checklist Cards.”
4599 4599
4600 712.7. If a meld cad is cast as a spell, it’s put on the stack with its font face up. See ule 601, “Casting Spells.” 4600 712.7. If a meld card is cast as a spell, it’s put on the stack with its front face up. See rule 601, “Casting Spells.”
4601 4601
4602 712.8. A meld cad entes the battlefield with its font face up unless it’s being melded with its countepat. 4602 712.8. A meld card enters the battlefield with its front face up unless it’s being melded with its counterpart.
4603 4603
4604 712.9. If an effect allows a playe to cast a meld cad as a face-down spell, o if a meld cad entes the battlefield face down, it will have the chaacteistics given to it by the ule o effect that caused it to be face down. That cad emains hidden, using eithe a face-down checklist cad o opaque sleeves. See ule 707, “Face-Down Spells and Pemanents.” 4604 712.9. If an effect allows a player to cast a meld card as a face-down spell, or if a meld card enters the battlefield face down, it will have the characteristics given to it by the rule or effect that caused it to be face down. That card remains hidden, using either a face-down checklist card or opaque sleeves. See rule 707, “Face-Down Spells and Permanents.”
4605 4605
4606 712.10. Meld cads on the battlefield and melded pemanents can’t be tuned face down. If a spell o ability ties to tun such a pemanent face down, nothing happens. 4606 712.10. Meld cards on the battlefield and melded permanents can’t be turned face down. If a spell or ability tries to turn such a permanent face down, nothing happens.
4607 4607
4608 712.11. If an effect instucts a playe to choose a cad name, the playe may choose the name of a font face of a meld cad o the combined back face of a meld pai. 4608 712.11. If an effect instructs a player to choose a card name, the player may choose the name of a front face of a meld card or the combined back face of a meld pair.
4609 4609
4610 713. Checklist Cads 4610 713. Checklist Cards
4611 4611
4612 713.1. A checklist cad is a game supplement that can be used to epesent a double-faced cad o meld cad. 4612 713.1. A checklist card is a game supplement that can be used to represent a double-faced card or meld card.
4613 4613
4614 713.2. A checklist cad has a nomal Magic cad back. The face of a checklist cad is divided into sections. Each section lists the name and mana cost of each double-faced cad o meld cad it could epesent and includes a fill-in cicle. Befoe a checklist cad can be used, exactly one of the fill-in cicles must be maked to denote which cad the checklist cad epesents. 4614 713.2. A checklist card has a normal Magic card back. The face of a checklist card is divided into sections. Each section lists the name and mana cost of each double-faced card or meld card it could represent and includes a fill-in circle. Before a checklist card can be used, exactly one of the fill-in circles must be marked to denote which card the checklist card represents.
4615 4615
4616 713.3. If a checklist cad is used in a deck, the cad it epesents is set aside pio to the beginning of the game (see ule 103.1a) and must emain available thoughout the game. A checklist cad can’t be included in a deck unless it is epesenting a double-faced cad o a meld cad. 4616 713.3. If a checklist card is used in a deck, the card it represents is set aside prior to the beginning of the game (see rule 103.1a) and must remain available throughout the game. A checklist card can’t be included in a deck unless it is representing a double-faced card or a meld card.
4617 4617
4618 713.4. Fo all game puposes, the checklist cad is consideed to be the cad it’s epesenting. 4618 713.4. For all game purposes, the checklist card is considered to be the card it’s representing.
4619 4619
4620 713.5. If the checklist cad is face up in a public zone, it should be set aside and the double-faced cad o meld cad that it epesents should be used instead. 4620 713.5. If the checklist card is face up in a public zone, it should be set aside and the double-faced card or meld card that it represents should be used instead.
4621 4621
4622 714. Saga Cads 4622 714. Saga Cards
4623 4623
4624 714.1. Each Saga cad has a stiated text box containing a numbe of chapte symbols. Its illustation is vetically oiented on the ight side of the cad, and its type line is along the bottom of the cad. 4624 714.1. Each Saga card has a striated text box containing a number of chapter symbols. Its illustration is vertically oriented on the right side of the card, and its type line is along the bottom of the card.
4625 4625
4626 714.2. A chapte symbol is a keywod ability that epesents a tiggeed ability efeed to as a chapte ability. 4626 714.2. A chapter symbol is a keyword ability that represents a triggered ability referred to as a chapter ability.
4627 4627
4628 714.2a A chapte symbol includes a Roman numeal, indicated hee as “{N}.” The numeal I epesents 1, II epesents 2, and III epesents 3. 4628 714.2a A chapter symbol includes a Roman numeral, indicated here as “{rN}.” The numeral I represents 1, II represents 2, and III represents 3.
4629 4629
4630 714.2b “{N}—[Effect]” means “When one o moe loe countes ae put onto this Saga, if the numbe of loe countes on it was less than N and became at least N, [effect].” 4630 714.2b “{rN}—[Effect]” means “When one or more lore counters are put onto this Saga, if the number of lore counters on it was less than N and became at least N, [effect].”
4631 4631
4632 714.2c “{N1}, {N2}—[Effect]” means the same as “{N1}—[Effect]” and “{N2}—[Effect].” 4632 714.2c “{rN1}, {rN2}—[Effect]” means the same as “{rN1}—[Effect]” and “{rN2}—[Effect].”
4633 4633
4634 714.2d A Saga’s final chapte numbe is the geatest value among chapte abilities it has. If a Saga somehow has no chapte abilities, its final chapte numbe is 0. 4634 714.2d A Saga’s final chapter number is the greatest value among chapter abilities it has. If a Saga somehow has no chapter abilities, its final chapter number is 0.
4635 4635
4636 714.3. Sagas use loe countes to tack thei pogess. 4636 714.3. Sagas use lore counters to track their progress.
4637 4637
4638 714.3a As a Saga entes the battlefield, its contolle puts a loe counte it. 4638 714.3a As a Saga enters the battlefield, its controller puts a lore counter it.
4639 4639
4640 714.3b As a playe’s pecombat main phase begins, that playe puts a loe counte on each Saga they contol. This tun-based action doesn’t use the stack. 4640 714.3b As a player’s precombat main phase begins, that player puts a lore counter on each Saga they control. This turn-based action doesn’t use the stack.
4641 4641
4642 714.4. If the numbe of loe countes on a Saga pemanent is geate than o equal to its final chapte numbe, and it isn’t the souce of a chapte ability that has tiggeed but not yet left the stack, that Saga’s contolle sacifices it. This state-based action doesn’t use the stack. 4642 714.4. If the number of lore counters on a Saga permanent is greater than or equal to its final chapter number, and it isn’t the source of a chapter ability that has triggered but not yet left the stack, that Saga’s controller sacrifices it. This state-based action doesn’t use the stack.
4643 4643
4644 715. Adventue Cads 4644 715. Adventurer Cards
4645 4645
4646 715.1. Adventue cads have a two-pat cad fame, with a smalle fame inset within thei text box. 4646 715.1. Adventurer cards have a two-part card frame, with a smaller frame inset within their text box.
4647 4647
4648 715.2. The text that appeas in the inset fame on the left defines altenative chaacteistics that the object may have while it’s a spell. The cad’s nomal chaacteistics appea as usual, although with a smalle text box on the ight. 4648 715.2. The text that appears in the inset frame on the left defines alternative characteristics that the object may have while it’s a spell. The card’s normal characteristics appear as usual, although with a smaller text box on the right.
4649 4649
4650 715.2a If an effect efes to a cad, spell, o pemanent that “has an Adventue,” it efes to an object fo which these altenative chaacteistics exist, even if the object cuently doesn’t use them. 4650 715.2a If an effect refers to a card, spell, or permanent that “has an Adventure,” it refers to an object for which these alternative characteristics exist, even if the object currently doesn’t use them.
4651 4651
4652 715.2b The existence and values of these altenative chaacteistics is pat of the object’s copiable values. 4652 715.2b The existence and values of these alternative characteristics is part of the object’s copiable values.
4653 4653
4654 715.2c Although adventue cads ae pinted with multiple sets of chaacteistics, each adventue cad is only one cad. Fo example, a playe who has dawn o discaded an adventue cad has dawn o discaded one cad, not two. 4654 715.2c Although adventurer cards are printed with multiple sets of characteristics, each adventurer card is only one card. For example, a player who has drawn or discarded an adventurer card has drawn or discarded one card, not two.
4655 4655
4656 715.3. As a playe casts an adventue cad, the playe chooses whethe they cast the cad nomally o as an Adventue. 4656 715.3. As a player casts an adventurer card, the player chooses whether they cast the card normally or as an Adventure.
4657 4657
4658 715.3a When casting an adventue cad as an Adventue, only the altenative chaacteistics ae evaluated to see if it can be cast. 4658 715.3a When casting an adventurer card as an Adventure, only the alternative characteristics are evaluated to see if it can be cast.
4659 4659
4660 715.3b While on the stack as an Adventue, the spell has only its altenative chaacteistics. 4660 715.3b While on the stack as an Adventure, the spell has only its alternative characteristics.
4661 4661
4662 715.3c If an Adventue spell is copied, the copy is also an Adventue. It has the altenative chaacteistics of the spell and not the nomal chaacteistics of the cad that epesents the Adventue spell. Any ule o effect that efes to a spell cast as an Adventue efes to the copy as well. 4662 715.3c If an Adventure spell is copied, the copy is also an Adventure. It has the alternative characteristics of the spell and not the normal characteristics of the card that represents the Adventure spell. Any rule or effect that refers to a spell cast as an Adventure refers to the copy as well.
4663 4663
4664 715.3d Instead of putting a spell that was cast as an Adventue into its owne’s gaveyad as it esolves, its contolle exiles it. Fo as long as that cad emains exiled, that playe may cast it. It can’t be cast as an Adventue this way, although othe effects that allow a playe to cast it may allow a playe to cast it as an Adventue. 4664 715.3d Instead of putting a spell that was cast as an Adventure into its owner’s graveyard as it resolves, its controller exiles it. For as long as that card remains exiled, that player may cast it. It can’t be cast as an Adventure this way, although other effects that allow a player to cast it may allow a player to cast it as an Adventure.
4665 4665
4666 715.4. In evey zone except the stack, and while on the stack not as an Adventue, an adventue cad has only its nomal chaacteistics. 4666 715.4. In every zone except the stack, and while on the stack not as an Adventure, an adventurer card has only its normal characteristics.
4667 4667
4668 715.5. If an effect instucts a playe to choose a cad name and the playe wants to choose an adventue cad’s altenative name, the playe may do so. 4668 715.5. If an effect instructs a player to choose a card name and the player wants to choose an adventurer card’s alternative name, the player may do so.
4669 4669
4670 716. Contolling Anothe Playe 4670 716. Controlling Another Player
4671 4671
4672 716.1. Some cads allow a playe to contol anothe playe duing that playe’s next tun. This effect applies to the next tun that the affected playe actually takes. The affected playe is contolled duing the entie tun; the effect doesn’t end until the beginning of the next tun. 4672 716.1. Some cards allow a player to control another player during that player’s next turn. This effect applies to the next turn that the affected player actually takes. The affected player is controlled during the entire turn; the effect doesn’t end until the beginning of the next turn.
4673 4673
4674 716.1a Multiple playe-contolling effects that affect the same playe ovewite each othe. The last one to be ceated is the one that woks. 4674 716.1a Multiple player-controlling effects that affect the same player overwrite each other. The last one to be created is the one that works.
4675 4675
4676 716.1b If a tun is skipped, any pending playe-contolling effects wait until the playe who would be affected actually takes a tun. 4676 716.1b If a turn is skipped, any pending player-controlling effects wait until the player who would be affected actually takes a turn.
4677 4677
4678 716.2. One cad (Wod of Command) allows a playe to contol anothe playe fo a limited duation. 4678 716.2. One card (Word of Command) allows a player to control another player for a limited duration.
4679 4679
4680 716.3. Only contol of the playe changes. All objects ae contolled by thei nomal contolles. A playe who’s being contolled duing thei tun is still the active playe. 4680 716.3. Only control of the player changes. All objects are controlled by their normal controllers. A player who’s being controlled during their turn is still the active player.
4681 4681
4682 716.4. If infomation about an object in the game would be visible to the playe being contolled, it’s visible to both that playe and the contolle of the playe. If infomation about cads outside the game would be visible to the playe being contolled, it’s visible only to that playe, not the contolle of the playe. 4682 716.4. If information about an object in the game would be visible to the player being controlled, it’s visible to both that player and the controller of the player. If information about cards outside the game would be visible to the player being controlled, it’s visible only to that player, not the controller of the player.
4683 Example: The contolle of a playe can see that playe’s hand and the face of any face-down ceatues they contol. 4683 Example: The controller of a player can see that player’s hand and the face of any face-down creatures they control.
4684 4684
4685 716.5. While contolling anothe playe, a playe makes all choices and decisions the contolled playe is allowed to make o is told to make by the ules o by any objects. This includes choices and decisions about what to play, and choices and decisions called fo by spells and abilities. 4685 716.5. While controlling another player, a player makes all choices and decisions the controlled player is allowed to make or is told to make by the rules or by any objects. This includes choices and decisions about what to play, and choices and decisions called for by spells and abilities.
4686 Example: The contolle of anothe playe decides which spells that playe casts and what those spells taget, and makes any equied decisions when those spells esolve. 4686 Example: The controller of another player decides which spells that player casts and what those spells target, and makes any required decisions when those spells resolve.
4687 Example: The contolle of anothe playe decides which of that playe’s ceatues attack, which playe o planeswalke each one attacks, what the damage assignment ode of the ceatues that block them is (if any of the attacking ceatues ae blocked by multiple ceatues), and how those attacking ceatues assign thei combat damage. 4687 Example: The controller of another player decides which of that player’s creatures attack, which player or planeswalker each one attacks, what the damage assignment order of the creatures that block them is (if any of the attacking creatures are blocked by multiple creatures), and how those attacking creatures assign their combat damage.
4688 4688
4689 716.5a The contolle of anothe playe can use only that playe’s esouces (cads, mana, and so on) to pay costs fo that playe. 4689 716.5a The controller of another player can use only that player’s resources (cards, mana, and so on) to pay costs for that player.
4690 Example: If the contolle of a playe decides that the contolled playe will cast a spell with an additional cost of discading cads, the cads ae discaded fom the contolled playe’s hand. 4690 Example: If the controller of a player decides that the controlled player will cast a spell with an additional cost of discarding cards, the cards are discarded from the controlled player’s hand.
4691 4691
4692 716.5b The contolle of anothe playe can’t make choices o decisions fo that playe that aen’t called fo by the ules o by any objects. The contolle also can’t make any choices o decisions fo the playe that would be called fo by the tounament ules. 4692 716.5b The controller of another player can’t make choices or decisions for that player that aren’t called for by the rules or by any objects. The controller also can’t make any choices or decisions for the player that would be called for by the tournament rules.
4693 Example: The playe who’s being contolled still decides if they will leave to visit the estoom, tade a cad to someone else, agee to an intentional daw, o call a judge about an eo o infaction. 4693 Example: The player who’s being controlled still decides if they will leave to visit the restroom, trade a card to someone else, agree to an intentional draw, or call a judge about an error or infraction.
4694 4694
4695 716.6. The contolle of anothe playe can’t make that playe concede. A playe may concede the game at any time, even if they ae contolled by anothe playe. See ule 104.3a. 4695 716.6. The controller of another player can’t make that player concede. A player may concede the game at any time, even if they are controlled by another player. See rule 104.3a.
4696 4696
4697 716.7. The effect that gives contol of a playe to anothe playe may estict the actions the contolled playe is allowed to take o specify actions that the contolled playe must take. 4697 716.7. The effect that gives control of a player to another player may restrict the actions the controlled player is allowed to take or specify actions that the controlled player must take.
4698 4698
4699 716.8. A playe who contols anothe playe also continues to make thei own choices and decisions. 4699 716.8. A player who controls another player also continues to make their own choices and decisions.
4700 4700
4701 716.9. A playe may gain contol of themselves. That playe will make thei own decisions and choices as nomal. 4701 716.9. A player may gain control of themselves. That player will make their own decisions and choices as normal.
4702 4702
4703 717. Ending Tuns and Phases 4703 717. Ending Turns and Phases
4704 4704
4705 717.1. Some cads end the tun. When an effect ends the tun, follow these steps in ode, as they diffe fom the nomal pocess fo esolving spells and abilities (see ule 608, “Resolving Spells and Abilities”). 4705 717.1. Some cards end the turn. When an effect ends the turn, follow these steps in order, as they differ from the normal process for resolving spells and abilities (see rule 608, “Resolving Spells and Abilities”).
4706 4706
4707 717.1a If thee ae any tiggeed abilities that tiggeed befoe this pocess began but haven’t been put onto the stack yet, those abilities cease to exist. They won’t be put onto the stack. This ule does not apply to abilities that tigge duing this pocess (see ule 717.1f). 4707 717.1a If there are any triggered abilities that triggered before this process began but haven’t been put onto the stack yet, those abilities cease to exist. They won’t be put onto the stack. This rule does not apply to abilities that trigger during this process (see rule 717.1f).
4708 4708
4709 717.1b Exile evey object on the stack, including the object that’s esolving. All objects not on the battlefield o in the command zone that aen’t epesented by cads will cease to exist the next time state-based actions ae checked (see ule 704, “State-Based Actions”). 4709 717.1b Exile every object on the stack, including the object that’s resolving. All objects not on the battlefield or in the command zone that aren’t represented by cards will cease to exist the next time state-based actions are checked (see rule 704, “State-Based Actions”).
4710 4710
4711 717.1c Check state-based actions. No playe gets pioity, and no tiggeed abilities ae put onto the stack. 4711 717.1c Check state-based actions. No player gets priority, and no triggered abilities are put onto the stack.
4712 4712
4713 717.1d The cuent phase and/o step ends. If this happens duing combat, emove all ceatues and planeswalkes fom combat. The game skips staight to the cleanup step; skip any phases o steps between this phase o step and the cleanup step. If an effect ends the tun duing the cleanup step, a new cleanup step begins. 4713 717.1d The current phase and/or step ends. If this happens during combat, remove all creatures and planeswalkers from combat. The game skips straight to the cleanup step; skip any phases or steps between this phase or step and the cleanup step. If an effect ends the turn during the cleanup step, a new cleanup step begins.
4714 4714
4715 717.1e Even though the tun ends, “at the beginning of the end step” tiggeed abilities don’t tigge because the end step is skipped. 4715 717.1e Even though the turn ends, “at the beginning of the end step” triggered abilities don’t trigger because the end step is skipped.
4716 4716
4717 717.1f No playe gets pioity duing this pocess, so tiggeed abilities ae not put onto the stack. If any tiggeed abilities have tiggeed since this pocess began, those abilities ae put onto the stack duing the cleanup step, then the active playe gets pioity and playes can cast spells and activate abilities. Then thee will be anothe cleanup step befoe the tun finally ends. If no tiggeed abilities have tiggeed duing this pocess, no playe gets pioity duing the cleanup step. See ule 514, “Cleanup Step.” 4717 717.1f No player gets priority during this process, so triggered abilities are not put onto the stack. If any triggered abilities have triggered since this process began, those abilities are put onto the stack during the cleanup step, then the active player gets priority and players can cast spells and activate abilities. Then there will be another cleanup step before the turn finally ends. If no triggered abilities have triggered during this process, no player gets priority during the cleanup step. See rule 514, “Cleanup Step.”
4718 4718
4719 717.2. One cad (Mandate of Peace) ends the combat phase. When an effect ends the combat phase, follow these steps in ode, as they diffe fom the nomal pocess fo esolving spells and abilities (see ule 608, “Resolving Spells and Abilities”). 4719 717.2. One card (Mandate of Peace) ends the combat phase. When an effect ends the combat phase, follow these steps in order, as they differ from the normal process for resolving spells and abilities (see rule 608, “Resolving Spells and Abilities”).
4720 4720
4721 717.2a If thee ae any tiggeed abilities that tiggeed befoe this pocess began but haven’t been put onto the stack yet, those abilities cease to exist. They won’t be put onto the stack. This ule does not apply to abilities that tigge duing this pocess (see ule 717.2f). 4721 717.2a If there are any triggered abilities that triggered before this process began but haven’t been put onto the stack yet, those abilities cease to exist. They won’t be put onto the stack. This rule does not apply to abilities that trigger during this process (see rule 717.2f).
4722 4722
4723 717.2b Exile evey object on the stack, including the object that’s esolving. All objects not on the battlefield o in the command zone that aen’t epesented by cads will cease to exist the next time state-based actions ae checked (see ule 704, “State-Based Actions”). 4723 717.2b Exile every object on the stack, including the object that’s resolving. All objects not on the battlefield or in the command zone that aren’t represented by cards will cease to exist the next time state-based actions are checked (see rule 704, “State-Based Actions”).
4724 4724
4725 717.2c Check state-based actions. No playe gets pioity, and no tiggeed abilities ae put onto the stack. 4725 717.2c Check state-based actions. No player gets priority, and no triggered abilities are put onto the stack.
4726 4726
4727 717.2d The cuent combat phase ends. Remove all ceatues and planeswalkes fom combat. Effects that last “until end of combat” expie. The game skips staight to the next phase, usually the postcombat main phase; skip any steps between this step and that phase. 4727 717.2d The current combat phase ends. Remove all creatures and planeswalkers from combat. Effects that last “until end of combat” expire. The game skips straight to the next phase, usually the postcombat main phase; skip any steps between this step and that phase.
4728 4728
4729 717.2e Even though the combat phase ends, “at end of combat” tiggeed abilities don’t tigge because the end of combat step is skipped. 4729 717.2e Even though the combat phase ends, “at end of combat” triggered abilities don’t trigger because the end of combat step is skipped.
4730 4730
4731 717.2f No playe gets pioity duing this pocess, so tiggeed abilities ae not put onto the stack. If any tiggeed abilities have tiggeed since this pocess began, those abilities ae put onto the stack duing the following phase, then the active playe gets pioity and playes can cast spells and activate abilities. 4731 717.2f No player gets priority during this process, so triggered abilities are not put onto the stack. If any triggered abilities have triggered since this process began, those abilities are put onto the stack during the following phase, then the active player gets priority and players can cast spells and activate abilities.
4732 4732
4733 717.2g If an effect attempts to end the combat phase at any time that’s not a combat phase, nothing happens. 4733 717.2g If an effect attempts to end the combat phase at any time that’s not a combat phase, nothing happens.
4734 4734
4735 718. The Monach 4735 718. The Monarch
4736 4736
4737 718.1. The monach is a designation a playe can have. Thee is no monach in a game until an effect instucts a playe to become the monach. 4737 718.1. The monarch is a designation a player can have. There is no monarch in a game until an effect instructs a player to become the monarch.
4738 4738
4739 718.2. Thee ae two inheent tiggeed abilities associated with being the monach. These tiggeed abilities have no souce and ae contolled by the playe who was the monach at the time the abilities tiggeed. This is an exception to ule 113.8. The full texts of these abilities ae “At the beginning of the monach’s end step, that playe daws a cad” and “Wheneve a ceatue deals combat damage to the monach, its contolle becomes the monach.” 4739 718.2. There are two inherent triggered abilities associated with being the monarch. These triggered abilities have no source and are controlled by the player who was the monarch at the time the abilities triggered. This is an exception to rule 113.8. The full texts of these abilities are “At the beginning of the monarch’s end step, that player draws a card” and “Whenever a creature deals combat damage to the monarch, its controller becomes the monarch.”
4740 4740
4741 718.3. Only one playe can be the monach at a time. As a playe becomes the monach, the cuent monach ceases to be the monach. 4741 718.3. Only one player can be the monarch at a time. As a player becomes the monarch, the current monarch ceases to be the monarch.
4742 4742
4743 718.4. If the monach leaves the game, the active playe becomes the monach at the same time as that playe leaves the game. If the active playe is leaving the game o if thee is no active playe, the next playe in tun ode becomes the monach. 4743 718.4. If the monarch leaves the game, the active player becomes the monarch at the same time as that player leaves the game. If the active player is leaving the game or if there is no active player, the next player in turn order becomes the monarch.
4744 4744
4745 719. Restating the Game 4745 719. Restarting the Game
4746 4746
4747 719.1. One cad (Kan Libeated) estats the game. A game that is estated immediately ends. No playes in that game win, lose, o daw that game. All playes in that game when it ended then stat a new game following the pocedues set foth in ule 103, “Stating the Game,” with the following exception: 4747 719.1. One card (Karn Liberated) restarts the game. A game that is restarted immediately ends. No players in that game win, lose, or draw that game. All players in that game when it ended then start a new game following the procedures set forth in rule 103, “Starting the Game,” with the following exception:
4748 4748
4749 719.1a The stating playe in the new game is the playe who contolled the spell o ability that estated the game. 4749 719.1a The starting player in the new game is the player who controlled the spell or ability that restarted the game.
4750 4750
4751 719.2. All Magic cads involved in the game that was estated when it ended, including phased-out pemanents and nontaditional Magic cads, ae involved in the new game, even if those cads wee not oiginally involved in the estated game. Owneship of cads in the new game doesn’t change, egadless of thei location when the new game begins. 4751 719.2. All Magic cards involved in the game that was restarted when it ended, including phased-out permanents and nontraditional Magic cards, are involved in the new game, even if those cards were not originally involved in the restarted game. Ownership of cards in the new game doesn’t change, regardless of their location when the new game begins.
4752 Example: A playe casts Living Wish, binging a ceatue cad into the game fom outside the game. Then that game is estated. The ceatue cad will be pat of that playe’s libay when the new game begins. 4752 Example: A player casts Living Wish, bringing a creature card into the game from outside the game. Then that game is restarted. The creature card will be part of that player’s library when the new game begins.
4753 4753
4754 719.3. Because each playe daws seven cads when the new game begins, any playe with fewe than seven cads in thei libay will lose the game when state-based actions ae checked duing the upkeep step of the fist tun, egadless of any mulligans that playe takes. (See ule 704, “State-Based Actions.”) 4754 719.3. Because each player draws seven cards when the new game begins, any player with fewer than seven cards in their library will lose the game when state-based actions are checked during the upkeep step of the first turn, regardless of any mulligans that player takes. (See rule 704, “State-Based Actions.”)
4755 4755
4756 719.4. The effect that estats the game finishes esolving just befoe the fist tun’s untap step. If the spell o ability that geneated that effect has additional instuctions, those instuctions ae followed at this time. No playe has pioity, and any tiggeed abilities that tigge as a esult will go on the stack the next time a playe eceives pioity, usually duing the fist tun’s upkeep step. 4756 719.4. The effect that restarts the game finishes resolving just before the first turn’s untap step. If the spell or ability that generated that effect has additional instructions, those instructions are followed at this time. No player has priority, and any triggered abilities that trigger as a result will go on the stack the next time a player receives priority, usually during the first turn’s upkeep step.
4757 4757
4758 719.5. Effects may exempt cetain cads fom the pocedue that estats the game. These cads ae not in thei owne’s deck as the new game begins. 4758 719.5. Effects may exempt certain cards from the procedure that restarts the game. These cards are not in their owner’s deck as the new game begins.
4759 4759
4760 719.5a In a Commande game, a commande that has been exempted fom the pocedue that estats the game won’t begin the new game in the command zone. Howeve, it emains that deck’s commande fo the new game. See ule 903, “Commande.” 4760 719.5a In a Commander game, a commander that has been exempted from the procedure that restarts the game won’t begin the new game in the command zone. However, it remains that deck’s commander for the new game. See rule 903, “Commander.”
4761 4761
4762 719.6. If a Magic subgame (see ule 720) is estated, the main game is unaffected. Main-game effects that efe to the winne o lose of the subgame now efe to the winne o lose of the estated subgame. 4762 719.6. If a Magic subgame (see rule 720) is restarted, the main game is unaffected. Main-game effects that refer to the winner or loser of the subgame now refer to the winner or loser of the restarted subgame.
4763 4763
4764 719.7. If a multiplaye game using the limited ange of influence option (see ule 801) is estated, all playes in the game ae involved, egadless of the ange of influence of the playe who contols the ability that estated the game. 4764 719.7. If a multiplayer game using the limited range of influence option (see rule 801) is restarted, all players in the game are involved, regardless of the range of influence of the player who controls the ability that restarted the game.
4765 4765
4766 720. Subgames 4766 720. Subgames
4767 4767
4768 720.1. One cad (Shahazad) allows playes to play a Magic subgame. 4768 720.1. One card (Shahrazad) allows players to play a Magic subgame.
4769 4769
4770 720.1a A “subgame” is a completely sepaate Magic game ceated by an effect. Essentially, it’s a game within a game. The “main game” is the game in which the spell o ability that ceated the subgame was cast o activated. The main game is tempoaily discontinued while the subgame is in pogess. It esumes when the subgame ends. 4770 720.1a A “subgame” is a completely separate Magic game created by an effect. Essentially, it’s a game within a game. The “main game” is the game in which the spell or ability that created the subgame was cast or activated. The main game is temporarily discontinued while the subgame is in progress. It resumes when the subgame ends.
4771 4771
4772 720.1b No effects o definitions ceated in eithe the main game o the subgame have any meaning in the othe, except as defined by the effect that ceated the subgame. Fo example, the effect may say that something happens in the main game to the winne o lose of the subgame. 4772 720.1b No effects or definitions created in either the main game or the subgame have any meaning in the other, except as defined by the effect that created the subgame. For example, the effect may say that something happens in the main game to the winner or loser of the subgame.
4773 4773
4774 720.2. As the subgame stats, an entiely new set of game zones is ceated. Each playe takes all the cads in thei main-game libay, moves them to thei subgame libay, and shuffles them. No othe cads in a main-game zone ae moved to thei coesponding subgame zone, except as specified in ules 720.2a–d. Randomly detemine which playe goes fist. The subgame poceeds like a nomal game, following all othe ules in ule 103, “Stating the Game.” 4774 720.2. As the subgame starts, an entirely new set of game zones is created. Each player takes all the cards in their main-game library, moves them to their subgame library, and shuffles them. No other cards in a main-game zone are moved to their corresponding subgame zone, except as specified in rules 720.2a–d. Randomly determine which player goes first. The subgame proceeds like a normal game, following all other rules in rule 103, “Starting the Game.”
4775 4775
4776 720.2a As a subgame of a Planechase game stats, each playe moves thei plana deck fom the main-game command zone to the subgame command zone and shuffles it. (Face-up plane and phenomenon cads emain in the main-game command zone.) 4776 720.2a As a subgame of a Planechase game starts, each player moves their planar deck from the main-game command zone to the subgame command zone and shuffles it. (Face-up plane and phenomenon cards remain in the main-game command zone.)
4777 4777
4778 720.2b As a subgame of a Vanguad game stats, each playe moves thei vanguad cad fom the main-game command zone to the subgame command zone. 4778 720.2b As a subgame of a Vanguard game starts, each player moves their vanguard card from the main-game command zone to the subgame command zone.
4779 4779
4780 720.2c As a subgame of a Commande game stats, each playe moves thei commande fom the main-game command zone (if it’s thee) to the subgame command zone. 4780 720.2c As a subgame of a Commander game starts, each player moves their commander from the main-game command zone (if it’s there) to the subgame command zone.
4781 4781
4782 720.2d As a subgame of an Achenemy game stats, the achenemy moves thei scheme deck fom the main-game command zone to the subgame command zone and shuffles it. (Face-up scheme cads emain in the main-game command zone.) 4782 720.2d As a subgame of an Archenemy game starts, the archenemy moves their scheme deck from the main-game command zone to the subgame command zone and shuffles it. (Face-up scheme cards remain in the main-game command zone.)
4783 4783
4784 720.3. Because each playe daws seven cads when a game begins, any playe with fewe than seven cads in thei deck will lose the subgame when state-based actions ae checked duing the upkeep step of the fist tun, egadless of any mulligans that playe takes. (See ule 704, “State-Based Actions.”) 4784 720.3. Because each player draws seven cards when a game begins, any player with fewer than seven cards in their deck will lose the subgame when state-based actions are checked during the upkeep step of the first turn, regardless of any mulligans that player takes. (See rule 704, “State-Based Actions.”)
4785 4785
4786 720.4. All objects in the main game and all cads outside the main game ae consideed outside the subgame (except those specifically bought into the subgame). All playes not cuently in the subgame ae consideed outside the subgame. 4786 720.4. All objects in the main game and all cards outside the main game are considered outside the subgame (except those specifically brought into the subgame). All players not currently in the subgame are considered outside the subgame.
4787 4787
4788 720.4a Some effects can bing cads into a game fom outside of it. If a cad is bought into a subgame fom a main game, abilities in the main game that tigge on objects leaving a main-game zone will tigge, but they won’t be put onto the stack until the main game esumes. 4788 720.4a Some effects can bring cards into a game from outside of it. If a card is brought into a subgame from a main game, abilities in the main game that trigger on objects leaving a main-game zone will trigger, but they won’t be put onto the stack until the main game resumes.
4789 4789
4790 720.4b A playe’s main-game countes aen’t consideed pat of the subgame, although the playe will still have them when the main game esumes. Similaly, any countes a playe gets duing a subgame will cease to exist when the subgame ends. 4790 720.4b A player’s main-game counters aren’t considered part of the subgame, although the player will still have them when the main game resumes. Similarly, any counters a player gets during a subgame will cease to exist when the subgame ends.
4791 4791
4792 720.5. At the end of a subgame, each playe takes all cads they own that ae in the subgame othe than those in the subgame command zone, puts them into thei main-game libay, then shuffles them. This includes cads in the subgame’s exile zone. Except as specified in ules 720.5a–d, all othe objects in the subgame cease to exist, as do the zones ceated fo the subgame. The main game continues fom the point at which it was discontinued: Fist, the spell o ability that ceated the subgame finishes esolving, even if it was ceated by a spell cad that’s no longe on the stack. Then, if any main-game abilities tiggeed while the subgame was in pogess due to cads being emoved fom the main game, those abilities ae put onto the stack. 4792 720.5. At the end of a subgame, each player takes all cards they own that are in the subgame other than those in the subgame command zone, puts them into their main-game library, then shuffles them. This includes cards in the subgame’s exile zone. Except as specified in rules 720.5a–d, all other objects in the subgame cease to exist, as do the zones created for the subgame. The main game continues from the point at which it was discontinued: First, the spell or ability that created the subgame finishes resolving, even if it was created by a spell card that’s no longer on the stack. Then, if any main-game abilities triggered while the subgame was in progress due to cards being removed from the main game, those abilities are put onto the stack.
4793 Example: If a cad was bought into the subgame eithe fom the main game o fom outside the main game, that cad will be put into its owne’s main-game libay when the subgame ends. 4793 Example: If a card was brought into the subgame either from the main game or from outside the main game, that card will be put into its owner’s main-game library when the subgame ends.
4794 4794
4795 720.5a At the end of a subgame of a Planechase game, each face-up plane cad o phenomenon cad is tuned face down and put on the bottom of its owne’s plana deck. Then each playe moves thei plana deck fom the subgame command zone to the main-game command zone and shuffles it. 4795 720.5a At the end of a subgame of a Planechase game, each face-up plane card or phenomenon card is turned face down and put on the bottom of its owner’s planar deck. Then each player moves their planar deck from the subgame command zone to the main-game command zone and shuffles it.
4796 4796
4797 720.5b At the end of a subgame of a Vanguad game, each playe moves thei vanguad cad fom the subgame command zone to the main-game command zone. This is an exception to ule 311.2. 4797 720.5b At the end of a subgame of a Vanguard game, each player moves their vanguard card from the subgame command zone to the main-game command zone. This is an exception to rule 311.2.
4798 4798
4799 720.5c At the end of a subgame of a Commande game, each playe moves thei commande fom the subgame command zone (if it’s thee) to the main-game command zone. 4799 720.5c At the end of a subgame of a Commander game, each player moves their commander from the subgame command zone (if it’s there) to the main-game command zone.
4800 4800
4801 720.5d At the end of a subgame of an Achenemy game, any face-up scheme cads in the subgame command zone ae tuned face down and put on the bottom of thei owne’s scheme deck. Then the achenemy moves thei scheme deck fom the subgame command zone to the main-game command zone and shuffles it. 4801 720.5d At the end of a subgame of an Archenemy game, any face-up scheme cards in the subgame command zone are turned face down and put on the bottom of their owner’s scheme deck. Then the archenemy moves their scheme deck from the subgame command zone to the main-game command zone and shuffles it.
4802 4802
4803 720.6. A subgame can be ceated within a subgame. The existing subgame becomes the main game in elation to the new subgame. 4803 720.6. A subgame can be created within a subgame. The existing subgame becomes the main game in relation to the new subgame.
4804 4804
4805 721. Taking Shotcuts 4805 721. Taking Shortcuts
4806 4806
4807 721.1. When playing a game, playes typically make use of mutually undestood shotcuts athe than explicitly identifying each game choice (eithe taking an action o passing pioity) a playe makes. 4807 721.1. When playing a game, players typically make use of mutually understood shortcuts rather than explicitly identifying each game choice (either taking an action or passing priority) a player makes.
4808 4808
4809 721.1a The ules fo taking shotcuts ae lagely infomal. As long as each playe in the game undestands the intent of each othe playe, any shotcut system they use is acceptable. 4809 721.1a The rules for taking shortcuts are largely informal. As long as each player in the game understands the intent of each other player, any shortcut system they use is acceptable.
4810 4810
4811 721.1b Occasionally the game gets into a state in which a set of actions could be epeated indefinitely (thus ceating a “loop”). In that case, the shotcut ules can be used to detemine how many times those actions ae epeated without having to actually pefom them, and how the loop is boken. 4811 721.1b Occasionally the game gets into a state in which a set of actions could be repeated indefinitely (thus creating a “loop”). In that case, the shortcut rules can be used to determine how many times those actions are repeated without having to actually perform them, and how the loop is broken.
4812 4812
4813 721.1c Tounaments use a modified vesion of the ules govening shotcuts and loops. These ules ae coveed in the Magic: The Gatheing Tounament Rules (found at WPN.Wizads.com/en/esouces/ules-documents). Wheneve the Tounament Rules contadict these ules duing a tounament, the Tounament Rules take pecedence. 4813 721.1c Tournaments use a modified version of the rules governing shortcuts and loops. These rules are covered in the Magic: The Gathering Tournament Rules (found at WPN.Wizards.com/en/resources/rules-documents). Whenever the Tournament Rules contradict these rules during a tournament, the Tournament Rules take precedence.
4814 4814
4815 721.2. Taking a shotcut follows the following pocedue. 4815 721.2. Taking a shortcut follows the following procedure.
4816 4816
4817 721.2a At any point in the game, the playe with pioity may suggest a shotcut by descibing a sequence of game choices, fo all playes, that may be legally taken based on the cuent game state and the pedictable esults of the sequence of choices. This sequence may be a non-epetitive seies of choices, a loop that epeats a specified numbe of times, multiple loops, o nested loops, and may even coss multiple tuns. It can’t include conditional actions, whee the outcome of a game event detemines the next action a playe takes. The ending point of this sequence must be a place whee a playe has pioity, though it need not be the playe poposing the shotcut. 4817 721.2a At any point in the game, the player with priority may suggest a shortcut by describing a sequence of game choices, for all players, that may be legally taken based on the current game state and the predictable results of the sequence of choices. This sequence may be a non-repetitive series of choices, a loop that repeats a specified number of times, multiple loops, or nested loops, and may even cross multiple turns. It can’t include conditional actions, where the outcome of a game event determines the next action a player takes. The ending point of this sequence must be a place where a player has priority, though it need not be the player proposing the shortcut.
4818 Example: A playe contols a ceatue enchanted by Pesence of Gond, which gants the ceatue the ability “{T}: Ceate a 1/1 geen Elf Waio ceatue token,” and anothe playe contols Intude Alam, which eads, in pat, “Wheneve a ceatue entes the battlefield, untap all ceatues.” When the playe has pioity, they may suggest “I’ll ceate a million tokens,” indicating the sequence of activating the ceatue’s ability, all playes passing pioity, letting the ceatue’s ability esolve and ceate a token (which causes Intude Alam’s ability to tigge), Intude Alam’s contolle putting that tiggeed ability on the stack, all playes passing pioity, Intude Alam’s tiggeed ability esolving, all playes passing pioity until the playe poposing the shotcut has pioity, and epeating that sequence 999,999 moe times, ending just afte the last token-ceating ability esolves. 4818 Example: A player controls a creature enchanted by Presence of Gond, which grants the creature the ability “{T}: Create a 1/1 green Elf Warrior creature token,” and another player controls Intruder Alarm, which reads, in part, “Whenever a creature enters the battlefield, untap all creatures.” When the player has priority, they may suggest “I’ll create a million tokens,” indicating the sequence of activating the creature’s ability, all players passing priority, letting the creature’s ability resolve and create a token (which causes Intruder Alarm’s ability to trigger), Intruder Alarm’s controller putting that triggered ability on the stack, all players passing priority, Intruder Alarm’s triggered ability resolving, all players passing priority until the player proposing the shortcut has priority, and repeating that sequence 999,999 more times, ending just after the last token-creating ability resolves.
4819 4819
4820 721.2b Each othe playe, in tun ode stating afte the playe who suggested the shotcut, may eithe accept the poposed sequence, o shoten it by naming a place whee they will make a game choice that’s diffeent than what’s been poposed. (The playe doesn’t need to specify at this time what the new choice will be.) This place becomes the new ending point of the poposed sequence. 4820 721.2b Each other player, in turn order starting after the player who suggested the shortcut, may either accept the proposed sequence, or shorten it by naming a place where they will make a game choice that’s different than what’s been proposed. (The player doesn’t need to specify at this time what the new choice will be.) This place becomes the new ending point of the proposed sequence.
4821 Example: The active playe daws a cad duing he daw step, then says, “Go.” The nonactive playe is holding Into the Fay (an instant that says “Taget ceatue attacks this tun if able”) and says, “I’d like to cast a spell duing you beginning of combat step.” The cuent poposed shotcut is that all playes pass pioity at all oppotunities duing the tun until the nonactive playe has pioity duing the beginning of combat step. 4821 Example: The active player draws a card during her draw step, then says, “Go.” The nonactive player is holding Into the Fray (an instant that says “Target creature attacks this turn if able”) and says, “I’d like to cast a spell during your beginning of combat step.” The current proposed shortcut is that all players pass priority at all opportunities during the turn until the nonactive player has priority during the beginning of combat step.
4822 4822
4823 721.2c Once the last playe has eithe accepted o shotened the shotcut poposal, the shotcut is taken. The game advances to the last poposed ending point, with all game choices contained in the shotcut poposal having been taken. If the shotcut was shotened fom the oiginal poposal, the playe who now has pioity must make a diffeent game choice than what was oiginally poposed fo that playe. 4823 721.2c Once the last player has either accepted or shortened the shortcut proposal, the shortcut is taken. The game advances to the last proposed ending point, with all game choices contained in the shortcut proposal having been taken. If the shortcut was shortened from the original proposal, the player who now has priority must make a different game choice than what was originally proposed for that player.
4824 4824
4825 721.3. Sometimes a loop can be fagmented, meaning that each playe involved in the loop pefoms an independent action that esults in the same game state being eached multiple times. If that happens, the active playe (o, if the active playe is not involved in the loop, the fist playe in tun ode who is involved) must then make a diffeent game choice so the loop does not continue. 4825 721.3. Sometimes a loop can be fragmented, meaning that each player involved in the loop performs an independent action that results in the same game state being reached multiple times. If that happens, the active player (or, if the active player is not involved in the loop, the first player in turn order who is involved) must then make a different game choice so the loop does not continue.
4826 Example: In a two-playe game, the active playe contols a ceatue with the ability “{0}: [This ceatue] gains flying,” the nonactive playe contols a pemanent with the ability “{0}: Taget ceatue loses flying,” and nothing in the game caes how many times an ability has been activated. Say the active playe activates his ceatue’s ability, it esolves, then the nonactive playe activates he pemanent’s ability tageting that ceatue, and it esolves. This etuns the game to a game state it was at befoe. The active playe must make a diffeent game choice (in othe wods, anything othe than activating that ceatue’s ability again). The ceatue doesn’t have flying. Note that the nonactive playe could have pevented the fagmented loop simply by not activating he pemanent’s ability, in which case the ceatue would have had flying. The nonactive playe always has the final choice and is theefoe able to detemine whethe the ceatue has flying. 4826 Example: In a two-player game, the active player controls a creature with the ability “{0}: [This creature] gains flying,” the nonactive player controls a permanent with the ability “{0}: Target creature loses flying,” and nothing in the game cares how many times an ability has been activated. Say the active player activates his creature’s ability, it resolves, then the nonactive player activates her permanent’s ability targeting that creature, and it resolves. This returns the game to a game state it was at before. The active player must make a different game choice (in other words, anything other than activating that creature’s ability again). The creature doesn’t have flying. Note that the nonactive player could have prevented the fragmented loop simply by not activating her permanent’s ability, in which case the creature would have had flying. The nonactive player always has the final choice and is therefore able to determine whether the creature has flying.
4827 4827
4828 721.4. If a loop contains only mandatoy actions, the game is a daw. (See ules 104.4b and 104.4f.) 4828 721.4. If a loop contains only mandatory actions, the game is a draw. (See rules 104.4b and 104.4f.)
4829 4829
4830 721.5. No playe can be foced to pefom an action that would end a loop othe than actions called fo by objects involved in the loop. 4830 721.5. No player can be forced to perform an action that would end a loop other than actions called for by objects involved in the loop.
4831 Example: A playe contols Seal of Cleansing, an enchantment that eads, “Sacifice Seal of Cleansing: Destoy taget atifact o enchantment.” A mandatoy loop that involves an atifact begins. The playe is not foced to sacifice Seal of Cleansing to destoy the atifact and end the loop. 4831 Example: A player controls Seal of Cleansing, an enchantment that reads, “Sacrifice Seal of Cleansing: Destroy target artifact or enchantment.” A mandatory loop that involves an artifact begins. The player is not forced to sacrifice Seal of Cleansing to destroy the artifact and end the loop.
4832 4832
4833 721.6. If a loop contains an effect that says “[A] unless [B],” whee [A] and [B] ae each actions, no playe can be foced to pefom [B] to beak the loop. If no playe chooses to pefom [B], the loop will continue as though [A] wee mandatoy. 4833 721.6. If a loop contains an effect that says “[A] unless [B],” where [A] and [B] are each actions, no player can be forced to perform [B] to break the loop. If no player chooses to perform [B], the loop will continue as though [A] were mandatory.
4834 4834
4835 722. Handling Illegal Actions 4835 722. Handling Illegal Actions
4836 4836
4837 722.1. If a playe takes an illegal action o stats to take an action but can’t legally complete it, the entie action is evesed and any payments aleady made ae canceled. No abilities tigge and no effects apply as a esult of an undone action. If the action was casting a spell, the spell etuns to the zone it came fom. Each playe may also evese any legal mana abilities that playe activated while making the illegal play, unless mana fom those abilities o fom any tiggeed mana abilities they caused to tigge was spent on anothe mana ability that wasn’t evesed. Playes may not evese actions that moved cads to a libay, moved cads fom a libay to any zone othe than the stack, caused a libay to be shuffled, o caused cads fom a libay to be evealed. 4837 722.1. If a player takes an illegal action or starts to take an action but can’t legally complete it, the entire action is reversed and any payments already made are canceled. No abilities trigger and no effects apply as a result of an undone action. If the action was casting a spell, the spell returns to the zone it came from. Each player may also reverse any legal mana abilities that player activated while making the illegal play, unless mana from those abilities or from any triggered mana abilities they caused to trigger was spent on another mana ability that wasn’t reversed. Players may not reverse actions that moved cards to a library, moved cards from a library to any zone other than the stack, caused a library to be shuffled, or caused cards from a library to be revealed.
4838 4838
4839 722.2. When evesing illegal spells and abilities, the playe who had pioity etains it and may take anothe action o pass. The playe may edo the evesed action in a legal way o take any othe action allowed by the ules. 4839 722.2. When reversing illegal spells and abilities, the player who had priority retains it and may take another action or pass. The player may redo the reversed action in a legal way or take any other action allowed by the rules.
4840 4840
4841 8. Multiplaye Rules 4841 8. Multiplayer Rules
4842 4842
4843 800. Geneal 4843 800. General
4844 4844
4845 800.1. A multiplaye game is a game that begins with moe than two playes. This section contains additional optional ules that can be used fo multiplaye play. 4845 800.1. A multiplayer game is a game that begins with more than two players. This section contains additional optional rules that can be used for multiplayer play.
4846 4846
4847 800.2. These ules consist of a seies of options that can be added to a multiplaye game and a numbe of vaiant styles of multiplaye play. A single game may use multiple options but only one vaiant. 4847 800.2. These rules consist of a series of options that can be added to a multiplayer game and a number of variant styles of multiplayer play. A single game may use multiple options but only one variant.
4848 4848
4849 800.3. Many multiplaye Magic tounaments have additional ules not included hee, including ules fo deck constuction. See the most cuent Magic: The Gatheing Tounament Rules fo moe infomation. They can be found at WPN.Wizads.com/en/esouces/ules-documents. 4849 800.3. Many multiplayer Magic tournaments have additional rules not included here, including rules for deck construction. See the most current Magic: The Gathering Tournament Rules for more information. They can be found at WPN.Wizards.com/en/resources/rules-documents.
4850 4850
4851 800.4. Unlike two-playe games, multiplaye games can continue afte one o moe playes have left the game. 4851 800.4. Unlike two-player games, multiplayer games can continue after one or more players have left the game.
4852 4852
4853 800.4a When a playe leaves the game, all objects (see ule 109) owned by that playe leave the game and any effects which give that playe contol of any objects o playes end. Then, if that playe contolled any objects on the stack not epesented by cads, those objects cease to exist. Then, if thee ae any objects still contolled by that playe, those objects ae exiled. This is not a state-based action. It happens as soon as the playe leaves the game. If the playe who left the game had pioity at the time they left, pioity passes to the next playe in tun ode who’s still in the game. 4853 800.4a When a player leaves the game, all objects (see rule 109) owned by that player leave the game and any effects which give that player control of any objects or players end. Then, if that player controlled any objects on the stack not represented by cards, those objects cease to exist. Then, if there are any objects still controlled by that player, those objects are exiled. This is not a state-based action. It happens as soon as the player leaves the game. If the player who left the game had priority at the time they left, priority passes to the next player in turn order who’s still in the game.
4854 Example: Alex casts Mind Contol, an Aua that eads, “You contol enchanted ceatue,” on Bianca’s Assault Giffin. If Alex leaves the game, so does Mind Contol, and Assault Giffin evets to Bianca’s contol. If, instead, Bianca leaves the game, so does Assault Giffin, and Mind Contol is put into Alex’s gaveyad. 4854 Example: Alex casts Mind Control, an Aura that reads, “You control enchanted creature,” on Bianca’s Assault Griffin. If Alex leaves the game, so does Mind Control, and Assault Griffin reverts to Bianca’s control. If, instead, Bianca leaves the game, so does Assault Griffin, and Mind Control is put into Alex’s graveyard.
4855 Example: Alex casts Act of Teason, which eads, in pat, “Gain contol of taget ceatue until end of tun,” tageting Bianca’s Runeclaw Beas. If Alex leaves the game, Act of Teason’s change-of-contol effect ends and Runeclaw Beas evets to Bianca’s contol. 4855 Example: Alex casts Act of Treason, which reads, in part, “Gain control of target creature until end of turn,” targeting Bianca’s Runeclaw Bears. If Alex leaves the game, Act of Treason’s change-of-control effect ends and Runeclaw Bears reverts to Bianca’s control.
4856 Example: Alex casts Bibey, which eads, “Seach taget opponent’s libay fo a ceatue cad and put that cad onto the battlefield unde you contol. Then that playe shuffles thei libay,” tageting Bianca. Alex puts Sea Angel onto the battlefield fom Bianca’s libay. If Bianca leaves the game, Sea Angel also leaves the game. If, instead, Alex leaves the game, Sea Angel is exiled. 4856 Example: Alex casts Bribery, which reads, “Search target opponent’s library for a creature card and put that card onto the battlefield under your control. Then that player shuffles their library,” targeting Bianca. Alex puts Serra Angel onto the battlefield from Bianca’s library. If Bianca leaves the game, Serra Angel also leaves the game. If, instead, Alex leaves the game, Serra Angel is exiled.
4857 Example: Alex contols Genesis Chambe, which eads, “Wheneve a nontoken ceatue entes the battlefield, if Genesis Chambe is untapped, that ceatue’s contolle ceates a 1/1 cololess My atifact ceatue token.” If Alex leaves the game, all such My tokens that enteed the battlefield unde Alex’s contol leave the game, and all such My tokens that enteed the battlefield unde any othe playe’s contol emain in the game. 4857 Example: Alex controls Genesis Chamber, which reads, “Whenever a nontoken creature enters the battlefield, if Genesis Chamber is untapped, that creature’s controller creates a 1/1 colorless Myr artifact creature token.” If Alex leaves the game, all such Myr tokens that entered the battlefield under Alex’s control leave the game, and all such Myr tokens that entered the battlefield under any other player’s control remain in the game.
4858 4858
4859 800.4b If an object would change to the contol of a playe who has left the game, it doesn’t. If a token would be ceated unde the contol of a playe who has left the game, no token is ceated. If an object would be put onto the battlefield o onto the stack unde the contol of a playe who has left the game, that object emains in its cuent zone. If a playe would be contolled by a playe who has left the game, they aen’t. 4859 800.4b If an object would change to the control of a player who has left the game, it doesn’t. If a token would be created under the control of a player who has left the game, no token is created. If an object would be put onto the battlefield or onto the stack under the control of a player who has left the game, that object remains in its current zone. If a player would be controlled by a player who has left the game, they aren’t.
4860 4860
4861 800.4c If an effect that gives a playe still in the game contol of an object ends, thee is no othe effect giving contol of that object to anothe playe in the game, and the playe who contolled that object by default has left the game, the object is exiled. This is not a state-based action. It happens as soon as the contol-changing effect ends. 4861 800.4c If an effect that gives a player still in the game control of an object ends, there is no other effect giving control of that object to another player in the game, and the player who controlled that object by default has left the game, the object is exiled. This is not a state-based action. It happens as soon as the control-changing effect ends.
4862 4862
4863 800.4d If an object that would be owned by a playe who has left the game would be ceated in any zone, it isn’t ceated. If a tiggeed ability that would be contolled by a playe who has left the game would be put onto the stack, it isn’t put on the stack. 4863 800.4d If an object that would be owned by a player who has left the game would be created in any zone, it isn’t created. If a triggered ability that would be controlled by a player who has left the game would be put onto the stack, it isn’t put on the stack.
4864 Example: Astal Slide is an enchantment that eads, “Wheneve a playe cycles a cad, you may exile taget ceatue. If you do, etun that ceatue to the battlefield unde its owne’s contol at the beginning of the next end step.” Duing Alex’s tun, Bianca uses Astal Slide’s ability to exile Alex’s Hypnotic Specte. Befoe the end of that tun, Bianca leaves the game. At the beginning of the end step, the delayed tiggeed ability geneated by Astal Slide that would etun Hypnotic Specte to the battlefield tigges, but it isn’t put on the stack. Hypnotic Specte neve etuns to the battlefield. 4864 Example: Astral Slide is an enchantment that reads, “Whenever a player cycles a card, you may exile target creature. If you do, return that creature to the battlefield under its owner’s control at the beginning of the next end step.” During Alex’s turn, Bianca uses Astral Slide’s ability to exile Alex’s Hypnotic Specter. Before the end of that turn, Bianca leaves the game. At the beginning of the end step, the delayed triggered ability generated by Astral Slide that would return Hypnotic Specter to the battlefield triggers, but it isn’t put on the stack. Hypnotic Specter never returns to the battlefield.
4865 4865
4866 800.4e If combat damage would be assigned to a playe who has left the game, that damage isn’t assigned. 4866 800.4e If combat damage would be assigned to a player who has left the game, that damage isn’t assigned.
4867 4867
4868 800.4f If an object equies a playe who has left the game to make a choice, the contolle of the object chooses anothe playe to make that choice. If the oiginal choice was to be made by an opponent of the contolle of the object, that playe chooses anothe opponent if possible. 4868 800.4f If an object requires a player who has left the game to make a choice, the controller of the object chooses another player to make that choice. If the original choice was to be made by an opponent of the controller of the object, that player chooses another opponent if possible.
4869 4869
4870 800.4g If a ule equies a playe who has left the game to make a choice, the next playe in tun ode makes that choice. 4870 800.4g If a rule requires a player who has left the game to make a choice, the next player in turn order makes that choice.
4871 4871
4872 800.4h If an effect equies infomation about a specific playe, the effect uses the cuent infomation about that playe if they ae still in the game; othewise, the effect uses the last known infomation about that playe befoe they left the game. If an effect equies infomation fom the game about actions playes have taken, the effect can find actions that wee taken by a playe who has left the game. 4872 800.4h If an effect requires information about a specific player, the effect uses the current information about that player if they are still in the game; otherwise, the effect uses the last known information about that player before they left the game. If an effect requires information from the game about actions players have taken, the effect can find actions that were taken by a player who has left the game.
4873 4873
4874 800.4i If a playe leaves the game duing thei tun, that tun continues to its completion without an active playe. If the active playe would eceive pioity, instead the next playe in tun ode eceives pioity, o the top object on the stack esolves, o the phase o step ends, whicheve is appopiate. 4874 800.4i If a player leaves the game during their turn, that turn continues to its completion without an active player. If the active player would receive priority, instead the next player in turn order receives priority, or the top object on the stack resolves, or the phase or step ends, whichever is appropriate.
4875 4875
4876 800.4j If a playe who has left the game would begin a tun, that tun doesn’t begin. 4876 800.4j If a player who has left the game would begin a turn, that turn doesn’t begin.
4877 4877
4878 800.4k When a playe leaves the game, any continuous effects with duations that last until that playe’s next tun o until a specific point in that tun will last until that tun would have begun. They neithe expie immediately no last indefinitely. 4878 800.4k When a player leaves the game, any continuous effects with durations that last until that player’s next turn or until a specific point in that turn will last until that turn would have begun. They neither expire immediately nor last indefinitely.
4879 4879
4880 800.4m When a playe leaves the game, objects that playe owns in the ante zone do not leave the game. This is an exception to ule 800.4a. See ule 407, “Ante.” 4880 800.4m When a player leaves the game, objects that player owns in the ante zone do not leave the game. This is an exception to rule 800.4a. See rule 407, “Ante.”
4881 4881
4882 800.4n In a Planechase game, if the playe designated as the plana contolle would leave the game, instead the next playe in tun ode that wouldn’t leave the game becomes the plana contolle, then the old plana contolle leaves the game. See ule 309.5. 4882 800.4n In a Planechase game, if the player designated as the planar controller would leave the game, instead the next player in turn order that wouldn’t leave the game becomes the planar controller, then the old planar controller leaves the game. See rule 309.5.
4883 4883
4884 800.5. Unless a chosen vaiant o option pescibes othewise, seating ode is detemined by any mutually ageeable method. Fo example, playes could agee to emain whee they wee befoe the game began, oll dice to detemine seating ode, and so on. 4884 800.5. Unless a chosen variant or option prescribes otherwise, seating order is determined by any mutually agreeable method. For example, players could agree to remain where they were before the game began, roll dice to determine seating order, and so on.
4885 4885
4886 800.6. In a multiplaye game, the fist mulligan a playe takes doesn’t count towad the numbe of cads that playe will put on the bottom of thei libay o the numbe of mulligans that playe may take. Subsequent mulligans ae counted towad these numbes as nomal. 4886 800.6. In a multiplayer game, the first mulligan a player takes doesn’t count toward the number of cards that player will put on the bottom of their library or the number of mulligans that player may take. Subsequent mulligans are counted toward these numbers as normal.
4887 4887
4888 800.7. In a multiplaye game othe than a Two-Headed Giant game, the stating playe doesn’t skip the daw step of thei fist tun. In a Two-Headed Giant game, the team who plays fist skips the daw step of thei fist tun. See ule 103.7. 4888 800.7. In a multiplayer game other than a Two-Headed Giant game, the starting player doesn’t skip the draw step of their first turn. In a Two-Headed Giant game, the team who plays first skips the draw step of their first turn. See rule 103.7.
4889 4889
4890 801. Limited Range of Influence Option 4890 801. Limited Range of Influence Option
4891 4891
4892 801.1. Limited ange of influence is an option that can be applied to most multiplaye games. It’s always used in the Empeo vaiant (see ule 809), and it’s often used fo games involving five o moe playes. 4892 801.1. Limited range of influence is an option that can be applied to most multiplayer games. It’s always used in the Emperor variant (see rule 809), and it’s often used for games involving five or more players.
4893 4893
4894 801.2. A playe’s ange of influence is the maximum distance fom that playe, measued in playe seats, that the playe can affect. Playes within that many seats of the playe ae within that playe’s ange of influence. Objects contolled by playes within a playe’s ange of influence ae also within that playe’s ange of influence. Range of influence coves spells, abilities, effects, damage dealing, attacking, making choices, and winning the game. 4894 801.2. A player’s range of influence is the maximum distance from that player, measured in player seats, that the player can affect. Players within that many seats of the player are within that player’s range of influence. Objects controlled by players within a player’s range of influence are also within that player’s range of influence. Range of influence covers spells, abilities, effects, damage dealing, attacking, making choices, and winning the game.
4895 4895
4896 801.2a The most commonly chosen limited anges of influence ae 1 seat and 2 seats. Diffeent playes may have diffeent anges of influence. 4896 801.2a The most commonly chosen limited ranges of influence are 1 seat and 2 seats. Different players may have different ranges of influence.
4897 Example: A ange of influence of 1 means that only you and the playes seated diectly next to you ae within you ange of influence. 4897 Example: A range of influence of 1 means that only you and the players seated directly next to you are within your range of influence.
4898 Example: A ange of influence of 2 means that you and the two playes to you left and the two playes to you ight ae within you ange of influence. 4898 Example: A range of influence of 2 means that you and the two players to your left and the two players to your right are within your range of influence.
4899 4899
4900 801.2b A playe is always within thei own ange of influence. 4900 801.2b A player is always within their own range of influence.
4901 4901
4902 801.2c The paticula playes within each playe’s ange of influence ae detemined as each tun begins. 4902 801.2c The particular players within each player’s range of influence are determined as each turn begins.
4903 Example: In a game with a ange of influence of 1, Alex is seated to the left of Rob, and Caissa is seated to the ight of Rob. Caissa is not in Alex’s ange of influence. If Rob leaves the game, Caissa will ente Alex’s ange of influence at the stat of the next tun. 4903 Example: In a game with a range of influence of 1, Alex is seated to the left of Rob, and Carissa is seated to the right of Rob. Carissa is not in Alex’s range of influence. If Rob leaves the game, Carissa will enter Alex’s range of influence at the start of the next turn.
4904 4904
4905 801.2d An object is within a playe’s ange of influence if it’s contolled by that playe o by anothe playe within that many seats of that playe. 4905 801.2d An object is within a player’s range of influence if it’s controlled by that player or by another player within that many seats of that player.
4906 4906
4907 801.3. Ceatues can attack only opponents within thei contolle’s ange of influence o planeswalkes contolled by those opponents. If no opponents ae within a playe’s ange of influence, ceatues that playe contols can’t attack. 4907 801.3. Creatures can attack only opponents within their controller’s range of influence or planeswalkers controlled by those opponents. If no opponents are within a player’s range of influence, creatures that player controls can’t attack.
4908 4908
4909 801.4. Objects and playes outside a playe’s ange of influence can’t be the tagets of spells o abilities that playe contols. 4909 801.4. Objects and players outside a player’s range of influence can’t be the targets of spells or abilities that player controls.
4910 4910
4911 801.5. Some cads equie playes to make choices. These cads wok diffeently when the limited ange of influence option is used. 4911 801.5. Some cards require players to make choices. These cards work differently when the limited range of influence option is used.
4912 4912
4913 801.5a If a playe is asked to choose an object o playe, they must choose one within thei ange of influence. 4913 801.5a If a player is asked to choose an object or player, they must choose one within their range of influence.
4914 Example: In a game with a ange of influence of 1, Alex is seated to the left of Rob. Alex activates the ability of Cuombajj Witches, which eads, “{T}: Cuombajj Witches deals 1 damage to any taget and 1 damage to any taget of an opponent’s choice,” tageting Rob and choosing Rob as the opponent who picks the othe taget. Rob must choose a taget that’s in both his ange of influence and in the ange of influence of the contolle of Cuombajj Witches. He must theefoe choose himself, Alex, o a ceatue contolled by eithe himself o Alex. 4914 Example: In a game with a range of influence of 1, Alex is seated to the left of Rob. Alex activates the ability of Cuombajj Witches, which reads, “{T}: Cuombajj Witches deals 1 damage to any target and 1 damage to any target of an opponent’s choice,” targeting Rob and choosing Rob as the opponent who picks the other target. Rob must choose a target that’s in both his range of influence and in the range of influence of the controller of Cuombajj Witches. He must therefore choose himself, Alex, or a creature controlled by either himself or Alex.
4915 4915
4916 801.5b If a playe is asked to choose between one o moe options (and not between one o moe objects o playes), they can choose between those options even if those options efe to objects o playes outside the playe’s ange of influence. 4916 801.5b If a player is asked to choose between one or more options (and not between one or more objects or players), they can choose between those options even if those options refer to objects or players outside the player’s range of influence.
4917 Example: Alex, who has a ange of influence of 2, is seated to the left of Rob, and Caissa, who has a ange of influence of 1, is seated to the ight of Rob. Alex casts a spell that eads, “An opponent chooses one — You daw two cads; o each ceatue you contol gets +2/+2 until end of tun,” and chooses Caissa to make that choice. Caissa can choose the mode even though Alex is out of he ange. 4917 Example: Alex, who has a range of influence of 2, is seated to the left of Rob, and Carissa, who has a range of influence of 1, is seated to the right of Rob. Alex casts a spell that reads, “An opponent chooses one — You draw two cards; or each creature you control gets +2/+2 until end of turn,” and chooses Carissa to make that choice. Carissa can choose the mode even though Alex is out of her range.
4918 4918
4919 801.5c If an effect equies a choice and thee’s no playe who can make that choice within its contolle’s ange of influence, the closest appopiate playe to its contolle’s left makes that choice. 4919 801.5c If an effect requires a choice and there’s no player who can make that choice within its controller’s range of influence, the closest appropriate player to its controller’s left makes that choice.
4920 Example: In an Empeo game in which all playes have ange of influence 1, an empeo casts Fact o Fiction, which eads, “Reveal the top five cads of you libay. An opponent sepaates those cads into two piles. Put one pile into you hand and the othe into you gaveyad.” Since no opponent is within the empeo’s ange of influence, the neaest opponent to the empeo’s left sepaates the cads into piles. 4920 Example: In an Emperor game in which all players have range of influence 1, an emperor casts Fact or Fiction, which reads, “Reveal the top five cards of your library. An opponent separates those cards into two piles. Put one pile into your hand and the other into your graveyard.” Since no opponent is within the emperor’s range of influence, the nearest opponent to the emperor’s left separates the cards into piles.
4921 4921
4922 801.6. A playe can’t activate the activated abilities of an object outside of thei ange of influence. 4922 801.6. A player can’t activate the activated abilities of an object outside of their range of influence.
4923 4923
4924 801.7. A tiggeed ability doesn’t tigge unless its tigge event happens entiely within the ange of influence of its souce’s contolle. 4924 801.7. A triggered ability doesn’t trigger unless its trigger event happens entirely within the range of influence of its source’s controller.
4925 Example: In a game in which all playes have ange of influence 1, Alex is seated to the left of Rob. Rob contols two Auas attached to Alex’s Runeclaw Bea: One with the tigge condition “Wheneve enchanted ceatue becomes blocked,” and one with the tigge condition “Wheneve enchanted ceatue becomes blocked by a ceatue.” Alex’s Runeclaw Bea attacks the playe to Alex’s left and becomes blocked. The ability of Rob’s fist Aua tigges because the entie event (Runeclaw Bea becomes blocked) happens within Rob’s ange of influence. The ability of Rob’s second Aua doesn’t tigge, howeve, because that event includes the blocking ceatue, which is out of Rob’s ange. 4925 Example: In a game in which all players have range of influence 1, Alex is seated to the left of Rob. Rob controls two Auras attached to Alex’s Runeclaw Bear: One with the trigger condition “Whenever enchanted creature becomes blocked,” and one with the trigger condition “Whenever enchanted creature becomes blocked by a creature.” Alex’s Runeclaw Bear attacks the player to Alex’s left and becomes blocked. The ability of Rob’s first Aura triggers because the entire event (Runeclaw Bear becomes blocked) happens within Rob’s range of influence. The ability of Rob’s second Aura doesn’t trigger, however, because that event includes the blocking creature, which is out of Rob’s range.
4926 4926
4927 801.7a If a tigge event includes an object moving out of o into a playe’s ange of influence, use the game state befoe o afte the event as appopiate to detemine whethe the tiggeed ability will tigge. See ules 603.6 and 603.10. 4927 801.7a If a trigger event includes an object moving out of or into a player’s range of influence, use the game state before or after the event as appropriate to determine whether the triggered ability will trigger. See rules 603.6 and 603.10.
4928 Example: Caissa and Alex ae outside each othe’s ange of influence. Caissa contols a Runeclaw Bea owned by Alex and they each contol an Extacto Demon, a ceatue which eads, in pat, “Wheneve anothe ceatue leaves the battlefield, you may have taget playe put the top two cads of thei libay into thei gaveyad.” The Runeclaw Bea is destoyed and is put into Alex’s gaveyad. The ability of Alex’s Extacto Demon doesn’t tigge because the leaves-the-battlefield event was outside Alex’s ange of influence. The ability of Caissa’s Extacto Demon does tigge, even though the ceatue is going to a gaveyad outside he ange, because the leaves-the-battlefield event was within he ange. 4928 Example: Carissa and Alex are outside each other’s range of influence. Carissa controls a Runeclaw Bear owned by Alex and they each control an Extractor Demon, a creature which reads, in part, “Whenever another creature leaves the battlefield, you may have target player put the top two cards of their library into their graveyard.” The Runeclaw Bear is destroyed and is put into Alex’s graveyard. The ability of Alex’s Extractor Demon doesn’t trigger because the leaves-the-battlefield event was outside Alex’s range of influence. The ability of Carissa’s Extractor Demon does trigger, even though the creature is going to a graveyard outside her range, because the leaves-the-battlefield event was within her range.
4929 4929
4930 801.8. An Aua can’t enchant an object o playe outside its contolle’s ange of influence. If an Aua is attached to an illegal object o playe, the Aua is put into its owne’s gaveyad as a state-based action. See ule 704. 4930 801.8. An Aura can’t enchant an object or player outside its controller’s range of influence. If an Aura is attached to an illegal object or player, the Aura is put into its owner’s graveyard as a state-based action. See rule 704.
4931 4931
4932 801.9. An Equipment can’t equip an object outside its contolle’s ange of influence, and a Fotification can’t fotify an object outside its contolle’s ange of influence. If an Equipment o Fotification is attached to an illegal pemanent, it becomes unattached fom that pemanent but emains on the battlefield. This is a state-based action. See ule 704. 4932 801.9. An Equipment can’t equip an object outside its controller’s range of influence, and a Fortification can’t fortify an object outside its controller’s range of influence. If an Equipment or Fortification is attached to an illegal permanent, it becomes unattached from that permanent but remains on the battlefield. This is a state-based action. See rule 704.
4933 4933
4934 801.10. Spells and abilities can’t affect objects o playes outside thei contolle’s ange of influence. The pats of the effect that attempt to affect an out-of-ange object o playe will do nothing. The est of the effect will wok nomally. 4934 801.10. Spells and abilities can’t affect objects or players outside their controller’s range of influence. The parts of the effect that attempt to affect an out-of-range object or player will do nothing. The rest of the effect will work normally.
4935 Example: In a six-playe game in which each playe has ange of influence 1, Alex casts Pyoclasm, which eads, “Pyoclasm deals 2 damage to each ceatue.” Pyoclasm deals 2 damage to each ceatue contolled by Alex, the playe to Alex’s left, and the playe to Alex’s ight. No othe ceatues ae dealt damage. 4935 Example: In a six-player game in which each player has range of influence 1, Alex casts Pyroclasm, which reads, “Pyroclasm deals 2 damage to each creature.” Pyroclasm deals 2 damage to each creature controlled by Alex, the player to Alex’s left, and the player to Alex’s right. No other creatures are dealt damage.
4936 4936
4937 801.11. If a spell o ability equies infomation fom the game, it gets only infomation fom within its contolle’s ange of influence. It doesn’t see objects o events outside its contolle’s ange of influence. 4937 801.11. If a spell or ability requires information from the game, it gets only information from within its controller’s range of influence. It doesn’t see objects or events outside its controller’s range of influence.
4938 Example: In a six-playe game whee each playe has ange of influence 1, Alex contols Coat of Ams, which eads, “Each ceatue gets +1/+1 fo each othe ceatue on the battlefield that shaes at least one ceatue type with it.” Coat of Ams will boost Alex’s ceatues based only on what ceatues ae contolled by Alex, the playe to Alex’s left, and the playe to Alex’s ight. It won’t take othe ceatues into account. 4938 Example: In a six-player game where each player has range of influence 1, Alex controls Coat of Arms, which reads, “Each creature gets +1/+1 for each other creature on the battlefield that shares at least one creature type with it.” Coat of Arms will boost Alex’s creatures based only on what creatures are controlled by Alex, the player to Alex’s left, and the player to Alex’s right. It won’t take other creatures into account.
4939 Example: In the same game, Rob is sitting to the ight of Alex. Coat of Ams will boost Rob’s ceatues based on what ceatues ae contolled by playes within Alex’s ange of influence, including the playe sitting to Alex’s left, who’s out of Rob’s ange of influence. 4939 Example: In the same game, Rob is sitting to the right of Alex. Coat of Arms will boost Rob’s creatures based on what creatures are controlled by players within Alex’s range of influence, including the player sitting to Alex’s left, who’s out of Rob’s range of influence.
4940 4940
4941 801.12. The “wold ule” (see ule 704.5k) applies to a pemanent only if othe wold pemanents ae within its contolle’s ange of influence. 4941 801.12. The “world rule” (see rule 704.5k) applies to a permanent only if other world permanents are within its controller’s range of influence.
4942 4942
4943 801.13. Replacement and pevention effects watch fo a paticula event to happen and then completely o patially eplace that event. The limited ange of influence option can cause the modified event to contain instuctions that can’t be caied out, in which case the playe simply ignoes the impossible instuctions. See ule 614, “Replacement Effects,” and ule 615, “Pevention Effects.” 4943 801.13. Replacement and prevention effects watch for a particular event to happen and then completely or partially replace that event. The limited range of influence option can cause the modified event to contain instructions that can’t be carried out, in which case the player simply ignores the impossible instructions. See rule 614, “Replacement Effects,” and rule 615, “Prevention Effects.”
4944 4944
4945 801.13a If a eplacement effect ties to cause a spell o ability to affect an object o playe outside its contolle’s ange of influence, that potion of the event does nothing. 4945 801.13a If a replacement effect tries to cause a spell or ability to affect an object or player outside its controller’s range of influence, that portion of the event does nothing.
4946 Example: Alex casts Lava Axe (“Lava Axe deals 5 damage to taget playe o planeswalke.”) tageting Rob. In esponse, Rob casts Captain’s Maneuve (“The next X damage that would be dealt to taget ceatue, planeswalke, o playe this tun is dealt to anothe taget ceatue, planeswalke, o playe instead.”) with X equal to 3, tageting Caissa. Caissa isn’t in Alex’s ange of influence. When Lava Axe esolves, it deals 2 damage to Rob and no damage to Caissa. 4946 Example: Alex casts Lava Axe (“Lava Axe deals 5 damage to target player or planeswalker.”) targeting Rob. In response, Rob casts Captain’s Maneuver (“The next X damage that would be dealt to target creature, planeswalker, or player this turn is dealt to another target creature, planeswalker, or player instead.”) with X equal to 3, targeting Carissa. Carissa isn’t in Alex’s range of influence. When Lava Axe resolves, it deals 2 damage to Rob and no damage to Carissa.
4947 4947
4948 801.13b If a spell o ability ceates an effect that pevents damage that would be dealt by a souce, it can affect only souces within the spell o ability’s contolle’s ange of influence. If a spell o ability ceates an effect that pevents damage that would be dealt to a pemanent o playe, it can affect only pemanents and playes within the spell o ability’s contolle’s ange of influence. If a spell o ability ceates an effect that pevents damage, but neithe the souce no the would-be ecipient of the damage is specified, it pevents damage only if both the souce and ecipient of that damage ae within the spell o ability’s contolle’s ange of influence. 4948 801.13b If a spell or ability creates an effect that prevents damage that would be dealt by a source, it can affect only sources within the spell or ability’s controller’s range of influence. If a spell or ability creates an effect that prevents damage that would be dealt to a permanent or player, it can affect only permanents and players within the spell or ability’s controller’s range of influence. If a spell or ability creates an effect that prevents damage, but neither the source nor the would-be recipient of the damage is specified, it prevents damage only if both the source and recipient of that damage are within the spell or ability’s controller’s range of influence.
4949 Example: Rob is within Alex’s ange of influence, but Caissa is not. Alex contols an enchantment that says, “Pevent all damage that would be dealt by ceatues.” Caissa attacks Rob with a ceatue. The ceatue deals combat damage to Rob. 4949 Example: Rob is within Alex’s range of influence, but Carissa is not. Alex controls an enchantment that says, “Prevent all damage that would be dealt by creatures.” Carissa attacks Rob with a creature. The creature deals combat damage to Rob.
4950 Example: Rob is within Alex’s ange of influence, but Caissa is not. Caissa casts Lightning Blast (“Lightning Blast deals 4 damage to any taget.”) tageting Rob. In esponse, Alex casts Mending Hands (“Pevent the next 4 damage that would be dealt to any taget this tun.”) tageting Rob. The damage to Rob is pevented. 4950 Example: Rob is within Alex’s range of influence, but Carissa is not. Carissa casts Lightning Blast (“Lightning Blast deals 4 damage to any target.”) targeting Rob. In response, Alex casts Mending Hands (“Prevent the next 4 damage that would be dealt to any target this turn.”) targeting Rob. The damage to Rob is prevented.
4951 Example: Rob is within Alex’s ange of influence, but Caissa is not. Caissa attacks Rob with a ceatue, and Rob blocks with a ceatue. Alex casts Fog (“Pevent all combat damage that would be dealt this tun.”) Caissa and Rob’s ceatues deal combat damage to each othe. 4951 Example: Rob is within Alex’s range of influence, but Carissa is not. Carissa attacks Rob with a creature, and Rob blocks with a creature. Alex casts Fog (“Prevent all combat damage that would be dealt this turn.”) Carissa and Rob’s creatures deal combat damage to each other.
4952 4952
4953 801.14. If an effect states that a playe wins the game, all of that playe’s opponents within that playe’s ange of influence lose the game instead. 4953 801.14. If an effect states that a player wins the game, all of that player’s opponents within that player’s range of influence lose the game instead.
4954 4954
4955 801.15. If the effect of a spell o ability states that the game is a daw, the game is a daw fo that spell o ability’s contolle and all playes within that playe’s ange of influence. They leave the game. All emaining playes continue to play the game. 4955 801.15. If the effect of a spell or ability states that the game is a draw, the game is a draw for that spell or ability’s controller and all players within that player’s range of influence. They leave the game. All remaining players continue to play the game.
4956 4956
4957 801.16. If the game somehow entes a “loop” of mandatoy actions, epeating a sequence of events with no way to stop, the game is a daw fo each playe who contols an object that’s involved in that loop, as well as fo each playe within the ange of influence of any of those playes. They leave the game. All emaining playes continue to play the game. 4957 801.16. If the game somehow enters a “loop” of mandatory actions, repeating a sequence of events with no way to stop, the game is a draw for each player who controls an object that’s involved in that loop, as well as for each player within the range of influence of any of those players. They leave the game. All remaining players continue to play the game.
4958 4958
4959 801.17. Effects that estat the game (see ule 719) ae exempt fom the limited ange of influence option. All playes in the game will be involved in the new game. 4959 801.17. Effects that restart the game (see rule 719) are exempt from the limited range of influence option. All players in the game will be involved in the new game.
4960 4960
4961 801.18. In multiplaye Planechase games othe than Gand Melee games, plane cads and phenomenon cads ae exempt fom the limited ange of influence option. Thei abilities, and the effects of those abilities, affect all applicable objects and playes in the game. See ule 901, “Planechase.” 4961 801.18. In multiplayer Planechase games other than Grand Melee games, plane cards and phenomenon cards are exempt from the limited range of influence option. Their abilities, and the effects of those abilities, affect all applicable objects and players in the game. See rule 901, “Planechase.”
4962 4962
4963 802. Attack Multiple Playes Option 4963 802. Attack Multiple Players Option
4964 4964
4965 802.1. Some multiplaye games allow the active playe to attack multiple othe playes. If this option is used, a playe can also choose to attack only one playe duing a paticula combat. 4965 802.1. Some multiplayer games allow the active player to attack multiple other players. If this option is used, a player can also choose to attack only one player during a particular combat.
4966 4966
4967 802.2. As the combat phase stats, the attacking playe doesn’t choose an opponent to become the defending playe. Instead, all the attacking playe’s opponents ae defending playes duing the combat phase. 4967 802.2. As the combat phase starts, the attacking player doesn’t choose an opponent to become the defending player. Instead, all the attacking player’s opponents are defending players during the combat phase.
4968 4968
4969 802.2a Any ule, object, o effect that efes to a “defending playe” efes to one specific defending playe, not to all of the defending playes. If an ability of an attacking ceatue efes to a defending playe, o a spell o ability efes to both an attacking ceatue and a defending playe, then unless othewise specified, the defending playe it’s efeing to is the playe that ceatue is attacking, o the contolle of the planeswalke that ceatue is attacking. If that ceatue is no longe attacking, the defending playe it’s efeing to is the playe that ceatue was attacking befoe it was emoved fom combat o the contolle of the planeswalke that ceatue was attacking befoe it was emoved fom combat. If a spell o ability could apply to multiple attacking ceatues, the appopiate defending playe is individually detemined fo each of those attacking ceatues. If thee ae multiple defending playes that could be chosen, the contolle of the spell o ability chooses one. 4969 802.2a Any rule, object, or effect that refers to a “defending player” refers to one specific defending player, not to all of the defending players. If an ability of an attacking creature refers to a defending player, or a spell or ability refers to both an attacking creature and a defending player, then unless otherwise specified, the defending player it’s referring to is the player that creature is attacking, or the controller of the planeswalker that creature is attacking. If that creature is no longer attacking, the defending player it’s referring to is the player that creature was attacking before it was removed from combat or the controller of the planeswalker that creature was attacking before it was removed from combat. If a spell or ability could apply to multiple attacking creatures, the appropriate defending player is individually determined for each of those attacking creatures. If there are multiple defending players that could be chosen, the controller of the spell or ability chooses one.
4970 Example: Rob attacks Alex with Runeclaw Bea and attacks Caissa with a ceatue with mountainwalk. Whethe the ceatue with mountainwalk can be blocked depends only on whethe Caissa contols a Mountain. 4970 Example: Rob attacks Alex with Runeclaw Bear and attacks Carissa with a creature with mountainwalk. Whether the creature with mountainwalk can be blocked depends only on whether Carissa controls a Mountain.
4971 4971
4972 802.3. As the attacking playe declaes each attacking ceatue, they choose a defending playe o a planeswalke contolled by a defending playe fo it to attack. See ule 508, “Declae Attackes Step.” 4972 802.3. As the attacking player declares each attacking creature, they choose a defending player or a planeswalker controlled by a defending player for it to attack. See rule 508, “Declare Attackers Step.”
4973 4973
4974 802.3a Restictions and equiements that don’t apply to attacking a specific playe ae evaluated based on the entie goup of attacking ceatues. Restictions and equiements that apply to attacking a specific playe apply only to ceatues attacking that playe. The entie goup of attacking ceatues must still be legal. See ule 508.1. 4974 802.3a Restrictions and requirements that don’t apply to attacking a specific player are evaluated based on the entire group of attacking creatures. Restrictions and requirements that apply to attacking a specific player apply only to creatures attacking that player. The entire group of attacking creatures must still be legal. See rule 508.1.
4975 4975
4976 802.3b Ceatues in a band can’t attack diffeent playes. See ule 702.21, “Banding.” 4976 802.3b Creatures in a band can’t attack different players. See rule 702.21, “Banding.”
4977 4977
4978 802.4. If moe than one playe is being attacked o contols a planeswalke that’s being attacked, each defending playe in APNAP ode declaes blockes as the declae blockes step begins. (See ule 101.4 and ule 509, “Declae Blockes Step.”) The fist defending playe declaes all thei blocks, then the second defending playe, and so on. 4978 802.4. If more than one player is being attacked or controls a planeswalker that’s being attacked, each defending player in APNAP order declares blockers as the declare blockers step begins. (See rule 101.4 and rule 509, “Declare Blockers Step.”) The first defending player declares all their blocks, then the second defending player, and so on.
4979 4979
4980 802.4a A defending playe can block only with ceatues they contol. Those ceatues can block only ceatues attacking that playe o a planeswalke that playe contols. 4980 802.4a A defending player can block only with creatures they control. Those creatures can block only creatures attacking that player or a planeswalker that player controls.
4981 4981
4982 802.4b When detemining whethe a defending playe’s blocks ae legal, ignoe any ceatues attacking othe playes and any blocking ceatues contolled by othe playes. 4982 802.4b When determining whether a defending player’s blocks are legal, ignore any creatures attacking other players and any blocking creatures controlled by other players.
4983 4983
4984 802.5. Afte blockes have been declaed, if any ceatues ae blocking multiple ceatues, each defending playe in APNAP ode announces the damage assignment ode among the attacking ceatues fo each blocking ceatue they contol. See ule 510, “Combat Damage Step.” 4984 802.5. After blockers have been declared, if any creatures are blocking multiple creatures, each defending player in APNAP order announces the damage assignment order among the attacking creatures for each blocking creature they control. See rule 510, “Combat Damage Step.”
4985 4985
4986 802.6. Combat damage is assigned in APNAP ode. Othe than that, the combat damage step poceeds just as in a two-playe game. See ule 510, “Combat Damage Step.” 4986 802.6. Combat damage is assigned in APNAP order. Other than that, the combat damage step proceeds just as in a two-player game. See rule 510, “Combat Damage Step.”
4987 4987
4988 803. Attack Left and Attack Right Options 4988 803. Attack Left and Attack Right Options
4989 4989
4990 803.1. Some multiplaye games use the optional attack left o attack ight ules. 4990 803.1. Some multiplayer games use the optional attack left or attack right rules.
4991 4991
4992 803.1a If the attack left option is used, a playe can attack only an opponent seated immediately to thei left. If a playe’s neaest opponent to the left is moe than one seat away, the playe can’t attack. 4992 803.1a If the attack left option is used, a player can attack only an opponent seated immediately to their left. If a player’s nearest opponent to the left is more than one seat away, the player can’t attack.
4993 4993
4994 803.1b If the attack ight option is used, a playe can attack only an opponent seated immediately to thei ight. If a playe’s neaest opponent to the ight is moe than one seat away, the playe can’t attack. 4994 803.1b If the attack right option is used, a player can attack only an opponent seated immediately to their right. If a player’s nearest opponent to the right is more than one seat away, the player can’t attack.
4995 4995
4996 804. Deploy Ceatues Option 4996 804. Deploy Creatures Option
4997 4997
4998 804.1. The Empeo vaiant always uses the deploy ceatues option, and it can be used in othe vaiants that allow playes to compete in teams. Multiplaye fomats in which playes compete as individuals usually don’t use this option. 4998 804.1. The Emperor variant always uses the deploy creatures option, and it can be used in other variants that allow players to compete in teams. Multiplayer formats in which players compete as individuals usually don’t use this option.
4999 4999
5000 804.2. Each ceatue has the ability “{T}: Taget teammate gains contol of this ceatue. Activate this ability only any time you could cast a socey.” 5000 804.2. Each creature has the ability “{T}: Target teammate gains control of this creature. Activate this ability only any time you could cast a sorcery.”
5001 5001
5002 805. Shaed Team Tuns Option 5002 805. Shared Team Turns Option
5003 5003
5004 805.1. Some multiplaye games between teams use the shaed team tuns option. It’s always used in the Two-Headed Giant vaiant (see ule 810) and the Achenemy casual vaiant (see ule 904). It can be used only if the membes of each team ae sitting in adjacent seats. 5004 805.1. Some multiplayer games between teams use the shared team turns option. It’s always used in the Two-Headed Giant variant (see rule 810) and the Archenemy casual variant (see rule 904). It can be used only if the members of each team are sitting in adjacent seats.
5005 5005
5006 805.2. Within each team, the playe seated in the ightmost seat fom that team’s pespective is the pimay playe. If the playes on a team can’t agee on a choice, such as which ceatues attack o what ode tiggeed abilities ae put on the stack, the pimay playe makes that choice. 5006 805.2. Within each team, the player seated in the rightmost seat from that team’s perspective is the primary player. If the players on a team can’t agree on a choice, such as which creatures attack or what order triggered abilities are put on the stack, the primary player makes that choice.
5007 5007
5008 805.3. The methods descibed in ule 103.2 ae used to detemine which team will take the fist tun. The team detemined this way is the stating team. 5008 805.3. The methods described in rule 103.2 are used to determine which team will take the first turn. The team determined this way is the starting team.
5009 5009
5010 805.3a The pocess fo handling mulligans is alteed accodingly. Fist, each playe on the stating team, in whateve ode that team likes, declaes whethe that playe will take a mulligan. Then the playes on each othe team in tun ode do the same. Teammates may consult while making thei decisions. Then all mulligans ae taken at the same time. Teammates may consult while choosing which cads, if any, to put on the bottom of thei libay. A playe may take a mulligan even afte a teammate has decided to keep thei opening hand. See ule 103.4. 5010 805.3a The process for handling mulligans is altered accordingly. First, each player on the starting team, in whatever order that team likes, declares whether that player will take a mulligan. Then the players on each other team in turn order do the same. Teammates may consult while making their decisions. Then all mulligans are taken at the same time. Teammates may consult while choosing which cards, if any, to put on the bottom of their library. A player may take a mulligan even after a teammate has decided to keep their opening hand. See rule 103.4.
5011 5011
5012 805.3b The pocess fo handling cads that allow a playe to begin the game with them on the battlefield is alteed accodingly. Fist, each playe on the stating team, in whateve ode that team likes, may put any o all such cads onto the battlefield fom that playe’s opening hand. Teammates may consult while making thei decisions. Then each playe on each othe team in tun ode does the same. 5012 805.3b The process for handling cards that allow a player to begin the game with them on the battlefield is altered accordingly. First, each player on the starting team, in whatever order that team likes, may put any or all such cards onto the battlefield from that player’s opening hand. Teammates may consult while making their decisions. Then each player on each other team in turn order does the same.
5013 5013
5014 805.4. Each team takes tuns athe than each playe. 5014 805.4. Each team takes turns rather than each player.
5015 5015
5016 805.4a The team whose tun it is is the active team. Each othe team is a nonactive team. 5016 805.4a The team whose turn it is is the active team. Each other team is a nonactive team.
5017 5017
5018 805.4b Each playe on a team daws a cad duing that team’s daw step. 5018 805.4b Each player on a team draws a card during that team’s draw step.
5019 5019
5020 805.4c Each playe on a team may play a land duing each of that team’s tuns. 5020 805.4c Each player on a team may play a land during each of that team’s turns.
5021 5021
5022 805.5. Teams have pioity, not individual playes. 5022 805.5. Teams have priority, not individual players.
5023 5023
5024 805.5a A playe may cast a spell, activate an ability, o take a special action when thei team has pioity. 5024 805.5a A player may cast a spell, activate an ability, or take a special action when their team has priority.
5025 5025
5026 805.5b If a team has pioity and no playe on that team wishes to do anything, that team passes. If all teams pass in succession (that is, if all teams pass without any playe taking any actions in between passing), the top object on the stack esolves, then the active team eceives pioity. If the stack is empty when all teams pass in succession, the phase o step ends and the next one begins. 5026 805.5b If a team has priority and no player on that team wishes to do anything, that team passes. If all teams pass in succession (that is, if all teams pass without any player taking any actions in between passing), the top object on the stack resolves, then the active team receives priority. If the stack is empty when all teams pass in succession, the phase or step ends and the next one begins.
5027 5027
5028 805.6. The Active Playe, Nonactive Playe ode ule (see ule 101.4) is modified if the shaed team tuns option is used. If multiple teams would make choices and/o take actions at the same time, fist the active team makes any choices equied, then each nonactive team in tun ode makes any choices equied. If multiple playes would make choices and/o take actions at the same time, fist each playe on the active team makes any choices equied in whateve ode they like, then the playes on each nonactive team in tun ode do the same. Once all choices have been made, the actions happen simultaneously. 5028 805.6. The Active Player, Nonactive Player order rule (see rule 101.4) is modified if the shared team turns option is used. If multiple teams would make choices and/or take actions at the same time, first the active team makes any choices required, then each nonactive team in turn order makes any choices required. If multiple players would make choices and/or take actions at the same time, first each player on the active team makes any choices required in whatever order they like, then the players on each nonactive team in turn order do the same. Once all choices have been made, the actions happen simultaneously.
5029 5029
5030 805.6a If an effect instucts moe than one playe to daw cads in a game that’s using the shaed team tuns option, fist each playe on the active team, in whateve ode that team likes, pefoms that playe’s daws, then each playe on each nonactive team in tun ode does the same. 5030 805.6a If an effect instructs more than one player to draw cards in a game that’s using the shared team turns option, first each player on the active team, in whatever order that team likes, performs that player’s draws, then each player on each nonactive team in turn order does the same.
5031 5031
5032 805.7. If multiple tiggeed abilities have tiggeed since the last time a team eceived pioity, the membes of the active team put all tiggeed abilities any of them contols on the stack in any ode they choose, then the membes of each nonactive team in tun ode do the same. 5032 805.7. If multiple triggered abilities have triggered since the last time a team received priority, the members of the active team put all triggered abilities any of them controls on the stack in any order they choose, then the members of each nonactive team in turn order do the same.
5033 5033
5034 805.8. If an effect gives a playe an exta tun o adds a phase o step to that playe’s tun, that playe’s team takes the exta tun, phase, o step. If an effect causes a playe to skip a step, phase, o tun, that playe’s team does so. If a single effect causes moe than one playe on the same team to add o skip the same step, phase, o tun, that team adds o skips only that step, phase, o tun. If an effect causes a playe to contol anothe playe, the fist playe contols the affected playe’s team. 5034 805.8. If an effect gives a player an extra turn or adds a phase or step to that player’s turn, that player’s team takes the extra turn, phase, or step. If an effect causes a player to skip a step, phase, or turn, that player’s team does so. If a single effect causes more than one player on the same team to add or skip the same step, phase, or turn, that team adds or skips only that step, phase, or turn. If an effect causes a player to control another player, the first player controls the affected player’s team.
5035 5035
5036 805.9. Any ability that efes to the “active playe” efes to one specific active playe, not to all of the active playes. The ability’s contolle chooses which one the ability efes to at the time its effect is applied. 5036 805.9. Any ability that refers to the “active player” refers to one specific active player, not to all of the active players. The ability’s controller chooses which one the ability refers to at the time its effect is applied.
5037 5037
5038 805.10. The shaed team tuns option uses diffeent combat ules than othe multiplaye options. 5038 805.10. The shared team turns option uses different combat rules than other multiplayer options.
5039 5039
5040 805.10a Each team’s ceatues attack the othe team as a goup. Duing the combat phase, the active team is the attacking team and each playe on the active team is an attacking playe. Likewise, the nonactive team is the defending team and each playe on the nonactive team is a defending playe. 5040 805.10a Each team’s creatures attack the other team as a group. During the combat phase, the active team is the attacking team and each player on the active team is an attacking player. Likewise, the nonactive team is the defending team and each player on the nonactive team is a defending player.
5041 5041
5042 805.10b As the declae attackes step begins, the active team declaes attackes. Fo each attacking ceatue, the attacking team announces which defending playe o planeswalke that ceatue is attacking. The active team has one combined attack, and that set of attacking ceatues must be legal as a whole. See ule 508.1. 5042 805.10b As the declare attackers step begins, the active team declares attackers. For each attacking creature, the attacking team announces which defending player or planeswalker that creature is attacking. The active team has one combined attack, and that set of attacking creatures must be legal as a whole. See rule 508.1.
5043 5043
5044 805.10c Any ule, object, o effect that efes to an “attacking playe” efes to one specific attacking playe, not to all attacking playes. If an ability of a blocking ceatue efes to an attacking playe, o a spell o ability efes to both a blocking ceatue and an attacking playe, then unless othewise specified, the attacking playe it’s efeing to is the playe who contols the attacking ceatue that blocking ceatue is blocking. If a spell o ability could apply to multiple blocking ceatues, the appopiate attacking playe is individually detemined fo each of those blocking ceatues. If thee ae multiple attacking playes that could be chosen, the contolle of the spell o ability chooses one. 5044 805.10c Any rule, object, or effect that refers to an “attacking player” refers to one specific attacking player, not to all attacking players. If an ability of a blocking creature refers to an attacking player, or a spell or ability refers to both a blocking creature and an attacking player, then unless otherwise specified, the attacking player it’s referring to is the player who controls the attacking creature that blocking creature is blocking. If a spell or ability could apply to multiple blocking creatures, the appropriate attacking player is individually determined for each of those blocking creatures. If there are multiple attacking players that could be chosen, the controller of the spell or ability chooses one.
5045 5045
5046 805.10d As the declae blockes step begins, the defending team declaes blockes. Ceatues contolled by the defending playes can block ceatues attacking any playe on the defending team o attacking a planeswalke contolled by one of those playes. The defending team has one combined block, and that set of blocking ceatues must be legal as a whole. See ule 509.1. 5046 805.10d As the declare blockers step begins, the defending team declares blockers. Creatures controlled by the defending players can block creatures attacking any player on the defending team or attacking a planeswalker controlled by one of those players. The defending team has one combined block, and that set of blocking creatures must be legal as a whole. See rule 509.1.
5047 5047
5048 805.10e Any ule, object, o effect that efes to a “defending playe” efes to one specific defending playe, not to all of the defending playes. If an ability of an attacking ceatue efes to a defending playe, o a spell o ability efes to both an attacking ceatue and a defending playe, then unless othewise specified, the defending playe it’s efeing to is the playe that ceatue is attacking, o the contolle of the planeswalke that ceatue is attacking. If that ceatue is no longe attacking, the defending playe it’s efeing to is the playe that ceatue was attacking befoe it was emoved fom combat o the contolle of the planeswalke that ceatue was attacking befoe it was emoved fom combat. If a spell o ability could apply to multiple attacking ceatues, the appopiate defending playe is individually detemined fo each of those attacking ceatues. If thee ae multiple defending playes that could be chosen, the contolle of the spell o ability chooses one. 5048 805.10e Any rule, object, or effect that refers to a “defending player” refers to one specific defending player, not to all of the defending players. If an ability of an attacking creature refers to a defending player, or a spell or ability refers to both an attacking creature and a defending player, then unless otherwise specified, the defending player it’s referring to is the player that creature is attacking, or the controller of the planeswalker that creature is attacking. If that creature is no longer attacking, the defending player it’s referring to is the player that creature was attacking before it was removed from combat or the controller of the planeswalker that creature was attacking before it was removed from combat. If a spell or ability could apply to multiple attacking creatures, the appropriate defending player is individually determined for each of those attacking creatures. If there are multiple defending players that could be chosen, the controller of the spell or ability chooses one.
5049 5049
5050 805.10f Once blockes have been declaed, fo each attacking ceatue that’s become blocked by multiple ceatues, the active team announces the damage assignment ode among the blocking ceatues. Then, fo each ceatue that’s blocking multiple ceatues, the defending team announces the damage assignment ode among the attacking ceatues. 5050 805.10f Once blockers have been declared, for each attacking creature that’s become blocked by multiple creatures, the active team announces the damage assignment order among the blocking creatures. Then, for each creature that’s blocking multiple creatures, the defending team announces the damage assignment order among the attacking creatures.
5051 5051
5052 805.10g As the combat damage step begins, the active team announces how each attacking ceatue will assign its combat damage. Then the defending team announces how each blocking ceatue will assign its combat damage. See ule 510.1. 5052 805.10g As the combat damage step begins, the active team announces how each attacking creature will assign its combat damage. Then the defending team announces how each blocking creature will assign its combat damage. See rule 510.1.
5053 5053
5054 806. Fee-fo-All Vaiant 5054 806. Free-for-All Variant
5055 5055
5056 806.1. In Fee-fo-All multiplaye games, a goup of playes compete as individuals against each othe. 5056 806.1. In Free-for-All multiplayer games, a group of players compete as individuals against each other.
5057 5057
5058 806.2. Any multiplaye options used ae detemined befoe play begins. The Fee-fo-All vaiant uses the following default options. 5058 806.2. Any multiplayer options used are determined before play begins. The Free-for-All variant uses the following default options.
5059 5059
5060 806.2a The limited ange of influence option usually isn’t used in Fee-fo-All games. If it is, each playe has the same ange of influence, which is detemined befoe play begins. See ule 801, “Limited Range of Influence Option.” 5060 806.2a The limited range of influence option usually isn’t used in Free-for-All games. If it is, each player has the same range of influence, which is determined before play begins. See rule 801, “Limited Range of Influence Option.”
5061 5061
5062 806.2b Exactly one of the attack left, attack ight, and attack multiple playes options must be used. See ule 803, “Attack Left and Attack Right Options,” and ule 802, “Attack Multiple Playes Option.” 5062 806.2b Exactly one of the attack left, attack right, and attack multiple players options must be used. See rule 803, “Attack Left and Attack Right Options,” and rule 802, “Attack Multiple Players Option.”
5063 5063
5064 806.2c The deploy ceatues option isn’t used in the Fee-fo-All vaiant. 5064 806.2c The deploy creatures option isn’t used in the Free-for-All variant.
5065 5065
5066 806.3. The playes ae andomly seated aound the table. 5066 806.3. The players are randomly seated around the table.
5067 5067
5068 807. Gand Melee Vaiant 5068 807. Grand Melee Variant
5069 5069
5070 807.1. The Gand Melee vaiant is a modification of the Fee-fo-All vaiant, in which a goup of playes compete against each othe as individuals. Gand Melee is nomally used only in games begun with ten o moe playes. 5070 807.1. The Grand Melee variant is a modification of the Free-for-All variant, in which a group of players compete against each other as individuals. Grand Melee is normally used only in games begun with ten or more players.
5071 5071
5072 807.2. Any multiplaye options used ae decided befoe play begins. The Gand Melee vaiant uses the following default options. 5072 807.2. Any multiplayer options used are decided before play begins. The Grand Melee variant uses the following default options.
5073 5073
5074 807.2a Each playe has a ange of influence of 1 (see ule 801). 5074 807.2a Each player has a range of influence of 1 (see rule 801).
5075 5075
5076 807.2b The attack left option is used (see ule 803). 5076 807.2b The attack left option is used (see rule 803).
5077 5077
5078 807.2c The attack multiple playes and deploy ceatues options aen’t used in the Gand Melee vaiant. 5078 807.2c The attack multiple players and deploy creatures options aren’t used in the Grand Melee variant.
5079 5079
5080 807.3. The playes ae seated at andom. 5080 807.3. The players are seated at random.
5081 5081
5082 807.4. The Gand Melee vaiant allows multiple playes to take tuns at the same time. Moving tun makes keep tack of which playes ae cuently taking tuns. Each tun make epesents an active playe’s tun. 5082 807.4. The Grand Melee variant allows multiple players to take turns at the same time. Moving turn markers keep track of which players are currently taking turns. Each turn marker represents an active player’s turn.
5083 5083
5084 807.4a Thee is one tun make fo each full fou playes in the game. 5084 807.4a There is one turn marker for each full four players in the game.
5085 Example: A Gand Melee game with sixteen playes has fou tun makes. A game with fifteen playes has thee tun makes. 5085 Example: A Grand Melee game with sixteen players has four turn markers. A game with fifteen players has three turn markers.
5086 5086
5087 807.4b The stating playe in the game gets the fist tun make. The playe fou seats to that playe’s left (the fifth playe) takes the second tun make, and so on until all the tun makes have been handed out. Each tun make is assigned a numbe in this way. Then all playes with tun makes stat thei tuns at the same time. 5087 807.4b The starting player in the game gets the first turn marker. The player four seats to that player’s left (the fifth player) takes the second turn marker, and so on until all the turn markers have been handed out. Each turn marker is assigned a number in this way. Then all players with turn markers start their turns at the same time.
5088 5088
5089 807.4c Afte a playe ends thei tun, that playe passes the tun make to the playe on thei left. If a playe with a tun make leaves the game duing thei tun, the playe to thei left takes the tun make afte that tun ends. If a playe with a tun make leaves the game befoe thei tun begins, the playe to thei left takes the tun make immediately. 5089 807.4c After a player ends their turn, that player passes the turn marker to the player on their left. If a player with a turn marker leaves the game during their turn, the player to their left takes the turn marker after that turn ends. If a player with a turn marker leaves the game before their turn begins, the player to their left takes the turn marker immediately.
5090 5090
5091 807.4d A playe who eceives a tun make can’t begin thei tun if any playe in the thee seats to thei left has a tun make. If this is the case, that playe waits until the playe fou seats to thei left takes the othe tun make. 5091 807.4d A player who receives a turn marker can’t begin their turn if any player in the three seats to their left has a turn marker. If this is the case, that player waits until the player four seats to their left takes the other turn marker.
5092 5092
5093 807.4e If a playe leaves the game and that playe leaving the game would educe the numbe of tun makes in the game, the tun make immediately to the depated playe’s ight is designated fo emoval. If moe than one playe leaves the game simultaneously, those playes leaving the game would educe the numbe of tun makes in the game, and thee ae multiple tun makes that could be emoved, the make with the lowest numbe is designated fo emoval. A tun make may be designated fo emoval multiple times. 5093 807.4e If a player leaves the game and that player leaving the game would reduce the number of turn markers in the game, the turn marker immediately to the departed player’s right is designated for removal. If more than one player leaves the game simultaneously, those players leaving the game would reduce the number of turn markers in the game, and there are multiple turn markers that could be removed, the marker with the lowest number is designated for removal. A turn marker may be designated for removal multiple times.
5094 5094
5095 807.4f Fo the puposes of detemining if one o moe playes leaving the game would educe the numbe of tun makes in the game (see ule 807.4e), disegad tun makes aleady designated fo emoval. 5095 807.4f For the purposes of determining if one or more players leaving the game would reduce the number of turn markers in the game (see rule 807.4e), disregard turn markers already designated for removal.
5096 5096
5097 807.4g If a playe who’s taking a tun has a tun make that’s been designated fo emoval, that tun make is emoved athe than being passed afte that tun ends. If a playe who’s not taking a tun has a tun make that’s been designated fo emoval, that tun make is emoved immediately. If a emoved tun make had been designated fo emoval multiple times, the tun make to its ight becomes designated fo emoval that many times minus one. 5097 807.4g If a player who’s taking a turn has a turn marker that’s been designated for removal, that turn marker is removed rather than being passed after that turn ends. If a player who’s not taking a turn has a turn marker that’s been designated for removal, that turn marker is removed immediately. If a removed turn marker had been designated for removal multiple times, the turn marker to its right becomes designated for removal that many times minus one.
5098 5098
5099 807.4h If one o moe consecutively seated playes leave the game, the playes that wee on eithe side of those seats don’t ente one anothe’s ange of influence until the next tun begins. 5099 807.4h If one or more consecutively seated players leave the game, the players that were on either side of those seats don’t enter one another’s range of influence until the next turn begins.
5100 5100
5101 807.4i If an effect causes a playe with a tun make to take an exta tun afte the cuent one, that playe keeps the tun make and stats thei next tun afte the cuent tun ends, unless anothe tun make is too close on eithe side at that time. If a tun make is within thee seats on the playe’s left, the exta tun waits to begin until the playe fou seats to thei left takes the othe tun make. If a tun make is within thee seats on the playe’s ight, the playe passes the tun make to thei left when the tun ends athe than keeping it, and the playe will take the exta tun immediately befoe thei next tun. 5101 807.4i If an effect causes a player with a turn marker to take an extra turn after the current one, that player keeps the turn marker and starts their next turn after the current turn ends, unless another turn marker is too close on either side at that time. If a turn marker is within three seats on the player’s left, the extra turn waits to begin until the player four seats to their left takes the other turn marker. If a turn marker is within three seats on the player’s right, the player passes the turn marker to their left when the turn ends rather than keeping it, and the player will take the extra turn immediately before their next turn.
5102 5102
5103 807.4j If an effect would cause a playe to take an exta tun afte the cuent tun, but that playe wouldn’t have a tun make at the stat of that tun, that playe will take the exta tun immediately befoe thei next tun instead. 5103 807.4j If an effect would cause a player to take an extra turn after the current turn, but that player wouldn’t have a turn marker at the start of that turn, that player will take the extra turn immediately before their next turn instead.
5104 Example: Duing Alex’s tun, he casts Time Walk, which causes him to take an exta tun afte this one. Duing the same tun, the playe to Alex’s left leaves the game, which causes the numbe of tun makes to be educed. Afte Alex’s cuent tun ends, his tun make is emoved. He won’t take the exta tun fom Time Walk until just befoe his nomal tun the next time he eceives a tun make. 5104 Example: During Alex’s turn, he casts Time Walk, which causes him to take an extra turn after this one. During the same turn, the player to Alex’s left leaves the game, which causes the number of turn markers to be reduced. After Alex’s current turn ends, his turn marker is removed. He won’t take the extra turn from Time Walk until just before his normal turn the next time he receives a turn marker.
5105 5105
5106 807.5. Rathe than having a single stack, Gand Melee games contain multiple stacks. Each tun make epesents its own stack. 5106 807.5. Rather than having a single stack, Grand Melee games contain multiple stacks. Each turn marker represents its own stack.
5107 5107
5108 807.5a A playe gets pioity fo a paticula tun make’s stack only if the tun make is within thei ange of influence o an object on that stack is contolled by a playe within thei ange of influence. 5108 807.5a A player gets priority for a particular turn marker’s stack only if the turn marker is within their range of influence or an object on that stack is controlled by a player within their range of influence.
5109 5109
5110 807.5b If a playe has pioity fo multiple stacks and casts a spell, activates an ability, o a tiggeed ability they contol tigges, the playe must specify which one of those stacks the spell o ability is put on. If an object on one of those stacks caused the tiggeed ability to tigge, the playe must put it on that stack. If a esolving spell o ability on one of those stacks causes a playe to cast a spell o ceate a copy of a spell, the new spell must be put on the same stack. If a spell o ability tagets an object on one of those stacks, it must be put on the same stack as its taget; it can’t taget objects on multiple stacks. 5110 807.5b If a player has priority for multiple stacks and casts a spell, activates an ability, or a triggered ability they control triggers, the player must specify which one of those stacks the spell or ability is put on. If an object on one of those stacks caused the triggered ability to trigger, the player must put it on that stack. If a resolving spell or ability on one of those stacks causes a player to cast a spell or create a copy of a spell, the new spell must be put on the same stack. If a spell or ability targets an object on one of those stacks, it must be put on the same stack as its target; it can’t target objects on multiple stacks.
5111 5111
5112 808. Team vs. Team Vaiant 5112 808. Team vs. Team Variant
5113 5113
5114 808.1. Team vs. Team games ae played with two o moe teams. Each team may have any numbe of playes on it. 5114 808.1. Team vs. Team games are played with two or more teams. Each team may have any number of players on it.
5115 5115
5116 808.2. Each team sits togethe on one side of the table. Each team decides the ode in which its playes sit. 5116 808.2. Each team sits together on one side of the table. Each team decides the order in which its players sit.
5117 5117
5118 808.3. Any multiplaye options used ae detemined befoe play begins. The Team vs. Team vaiant uses the following default options. 5118 808.3. Any multiplayer options used are determined before play begins. The Team vs. Team variant uses the following default options.
5119 5119
5120 808.3a The attack multiple playes option is used (see ule 802). 5120 808.3a The attack multiple players option is used (see rule 802).
5121 5121
5122 808.3b The deploy ceatues options and limited ange of influence options usually aen’t used in the Team vs. Team vaiant. 5122 808.3b The deploy creatures options and limited range of influence options usually aren’t used in the Team vs. Team variant.
5123 5123
5124 808.4. To detemine which playe goes fist, andomly choose a team. If that team has an odd numbe of playes, the playe in its cente seat goes fist. If that team has an even numbe of playes, the playe to the left of its midpoint goes fist. Tun ode goes to the playes’ left. 5124 808.4. To determine which player goes first, randomly choose a team. If that team has an odd number of players, the player in its center seat goes first. If that team has an even number of players, the player to the left of its midpoint goes first. Turn order goes to the players’ left.
5125 5125
5126 808.5. In the Team vs. Team vaiant, a team’s esouces (cads in hand, mana, and so on) ae not shaed. Teammates may eview each othe’s hands and discuss stategies at any time. Teammates can’t manipulate each othe’s cads o pemanents. 5126 808.5. In the Team vs. Team variant, a team’s resources (cards in hand, mana, and so on) are not shared. Teammates may review each other’s hands and discuss strategies at any time. Teammates can’t manipulate each other’s cards or permanents.
5127 5127
5128 809. Empeo Vaiant 5128 809. Emperor Variant
5129 5129
5130 809.1. The Empeo vaiant involves two o moe teams of thee playes each. 5130 809.1. The Emperor variant involves two or more teams of three players each.
5131 5131
5132 809.2. Each team sits togethe on one side of the table. Each team decides the ode in which it’s seated. Each team has one empeo, who sits in the middle of the team. The emaining playes on the team ae geneals whose job is to potect the empeo. 5132 809.2. Each team sits together on one side of the table. Each team decides the order in which it’s seated. Each team has one emperor, who sits in the middle of the team. The remaining players on the team are generals whose job is to protect the emperor.
5133 5133
5134 809.3. The Empeo vaiant uses the following default options. 5134 809.3. The Emperor variant uses the following default options.
5135 5135
5136 809.3a The ange of influence is limited to 2 fo empeos and 1 fo geneals. See ule 801, “Limited Range of Influence Option.” 5136 809.3a The range of influence is limited to 2 for emperors and 1 for generals. See rule 801, “Limited Range of Influence Option.”
5137 5137
5138 809.3b Empeo games use the deploy ceatues option (see ule 804). 5138 809.3b Emperor games use the deploy creatures option (see rule 804).
5139 5139
5140 809.3c A playe can attack only an opponent seated immediately next to them. 5140 809.3c A player can attack only an opponent seated immediately next to them.
5141 Example: At the stat of an Empeo game, neithe empeo can attack any opponents, even though both of the opposing geneals ae within thei spell ange. 5141 Example: At the start of an Emperor game, neither emperor can attack any opponents, even though both of the opposing generals are within their spell range.
5142 5142
5143 809.4. Randomly detemine which empeo goes fist. Tun ode goes to the playes’ left. 5143 809.4. Randomly determine which emperor goes first. Turn order goes to the players’ left.
5144 5144
5145 809.5. The Empeo vaiant includes the following specifications fo winning and losing the game. All othe ules fo ending the game also apply. (See ule 104.) 5145 809.5. The Emperor variant includes the following specifications for winning and losing the game. All other rules for ending the game also apply. (See rule 104.)
5146 5146
5147 809.5a A team wins the game if its empeo wins. 5147 809.5a A team wins the game if its emperor wins.
5148 5148
5149 809.5b A team loses the game if its empeo loses. 5149 809.5b A team loses the game if its emperor loses.
5150 5150
5151 809.5c The game is a daw fo a team if the game is a daw fo its empeo. 5151 809.5c The game is a draw for a team if the game is a draw for its emperor.
5152 5152
5153 809.6. The Empeo vaiant can also be played with any numbe of equally sized teams. If the teams have moe than thee playes, the ange of influence of each playe should be adjusted. 5153 809.6. The Emperor variant can also be played with any number of equally sized teams. If the teams have more than three players, the range of influence of each player should be adjusted.
5154 5154
5155 809.6a Each geneal’s ange of influence should be the minimum numbe that allows one geneal fom an opposing team to begin the game within thei ange of influence. Each empeo’s ange of influence should be the minimum numbe that allows two geneals fom opposing teams to begin the game within thei ange of influence. Playes should be seated such that no empeo begins the game within the ange of influence of anothe empeo. 5155 809.6a Each general’s range of influence should be the minimum number that allows one general from an opposing team to begin the game within their range of influence. Each emperor’s range of influence should be the minimum number that allows two generals from opposing teams to begin the game within their range of influence. Players should be seated such that no emperor begins the game within the range of influence of another emperor.
5156 Example: In an Empeo game between two teams of fou playes each, the playe configuation (eithe clockwise o counteclockwise aound the table) should be: Team A geneal 1, Team A empeo, Team A geneal 2, Team A geneal 3, Team B geneal 1, Team B empeo, Team B geneal 2, Team B geneal 3. Each empeo has ange of influence 3. Each geneal 2 has ange of influence 2. Each geneal 1 and geneal 3 has ange of influence 1. 5156 Example: In an Emperor game between two teams of four players each, the player configuration (either clockwise or counterclockwise around the table) should be: Team A general 1, Team A emperor, Team A general 2, Team A general 3, Team B general 1, Team B emperor, Team B general 2, Team B general 3. Each emperor has range of influence 3. Each general 2 has range of influence 2. Each general 1 and general 3 has range of influence 1.
5157 5157
5158 809.7. In the Empeo vaiant, a team’s esouces (cads in hand, mana, and so on) ae not shaed. Teammates may eview each othe’s hands and discuss stategies at any time. Teammates can’t manipulate each othe’s cads o pemanents. 5158 809.7. In the Emperor variant, a team’s resources (cards in hand, mana, and so on) are not shared. Teammates may review each other’s hands and discuss strategies at any time. Teammates can’t manipulate each other’s cards or permanents.
5159 5159
5160 810. Two-Headed Giant Vaiant 5160 810. Two-Headed Giant Variant
5161 5161
5162 810.1. Two-Headed Giant games ae played with two teams of two playes each. 5162 810.1. Two-Headed Giant games are played with two teams of two players each.
5163 5163
5164 810.2. The Two-Headed Giant vaiant uses the shaed team tuns option. (See ule 805.) 5164 810.2. The Two-Headed Giant variant uses the shared team turns option. (See rule 805.)
5165 5165
5166 810.3. Each team sits togethe on one side of the table. Each team decides the ode in which its playes sit. 5166 810.3. Each team sits together on one side of the table. Each team decides the order in which its players sit.
5167 5167
5168 810.4. Each team has a shaed life total, which stats at 30 life. 5168 810.4. Each team has a shared life total, which starts at 30 life.
5169 5169
5170 810.5. With the exception of life total and poison countes, a team’s esouces (cads in hand, mana, and so on) ae not shaed in the Two-Headed Giant vaiant. Teammates may eview each othe’s hands and discuss stategies at any time. Teammates can’t manipulate each othe’s cads o pemanents. 5170 810.5. With the exception of life total and poison counters, a team’s resources (cards in hand, mana, and so on) are not shared in the Two-Headed Giant variant. Teammates may review each other’s hands and discuss strategies at any time. Teammates can’t manipulate each other’s cards or permanents.
5171 5171
5172 810.6. The team who plays fist skips the daw step of its fist tun. 5172 810.6. The team who plays first skips the draw step of its first turn.
5173 5173
5174 810.7. The Two-Headed Giant vaiant uses the combat ules fo the shaed team tuns option (see ule 805.10). This is a change fom pevious ules. 5174 810.7. The Two-Headed Giant variant uses the combat rules for the shared team turns option (see rule 805.10). This is a change from previous rules.
5175 5175
5176 810.8. The Two-Headed Giant vaiant uses the nomal ules fo winning o losing the game (see ule 104), with the following additions and specifications. 5176 810.8. The Two-Headed Giant variant uses the normal rules for winning or losing the game (see rule 104), with the following additions and specifications.
5177 5177
5178 810.8a Playes win and lose the game only as a team, not as individuals. If eithe playe on a team loses the game, the team loses the game. If eithe playe on a team wins the game, the entie team wins the game. If an effect says that a playe can’t win the game, that playe’s team can’t win the game. If an effect says that a playe can’t lose the game, that playe’s team can’t lose the game. 5178 810.8a Players win and lose the game only as a team, not as individuals. If either player on a team loses the game, the team loses the game. If either player on a team wins the game, the entire team wins the game. If an effect says that a player can’t win the game, that player’s team can’t win the game. If an effect says that a player can’t lose the game, that player’s team can’t lose the game.
5179 Example: In a Two-Headed Giant game, a playe contols Tanscendence, which eads, in pat, “You don’t lose the game fo having 0 o less life.” If that playe’s team’s life total is 0 o less, that team doesn’t lose the game. 5179 Example: In a Two-Headed Giant game, a player controls Transcendence, which reads, in part, “You don’t lose the game for having 0 or less life.” If that player’s team’s life total is 0 or less, that team doesn’t lose the game.
5180 Example: In a Two-Headed Giant game, a playe attempts to daw a cad while thee ae no cads in that playe’s libay. That playe loses the game, so that playe’s entie team loses the game. 5180 Example: In a Two-Headed Giant game, a player attempts to draw a card while there are no cards in that player’s library. That player loses the game, so that player’s entire team loses the game.
5181 Example: In a Two-Headed Giant game, a playe contols Platinum Angel, which eads, “You can’t lose the game and you opponents can’t win the game.” Neithe that playe no thei teammate can lose the game while Platinum Angel is on the battlefield, and neithe playe on the opposing team can win the game. 5181 Example: In a Two-Headed Giant game, a player controls Platinum Angel, which reads, “You can’t lose the game and your opponents can’t win the game.” Neither that player nor their teammate can lose the game while Platinum Angel is on the battlefield, and neither player on the opposing team can win the game.
5182 5182
5183 810.8b If a playe concedes, thei team leaves the game immediately. That team loses the game. 5183 810.8b If a player concedes, their team leaves the game immediately. That team loses the game.
5184 5184
5185 810.8c If a team’s life total is 0 o less, the team loses the game. (This is a state-based action. See ule 704.) 5185 810.8c If a team’s life total is 0 or less, the team loses the game. (This is a state-based action. See rule 704.)
5186 5186
5187 810.8d If a team has fifteen o moe poison countes, that team loses the game. (This is a state-based action. See ule 704.) 5187 810.8d If a team has fifteen or more poison counters, that team loses the game. (This is a state-based action. See rule 704.)
5188 5188
5189 810.9. Damage, loss of life, and gaining life happen to each playe individually. The esult is applied to the team’s shaed life total. 5189 810.9. Damage, loss of life, and gaining life happen to each player individually. The result is applied to the team’s shared life total.
5190 Example: In a Two-Headed Giant game, a playe casts Flame Rift, which eads, “Flame Rift deals 4 damage to each playe.” Each team is dealt a total of 8 damage. 5190 Example: In a Two-Headed Giant game, a player casts Flame Rift, which reads, “Flame Rift deals 4 damage to each player.” Each team is dealt a total of 8 damage.
5191 5191
5192 810.9a If a cost o effect needs to know the value of an individual playe’s life total, that cost o effect uses the team’s life total instead. 5192 810.9a If a cost or effect needs to know the value of an individual player’s life total, that cost or effect uses the team’s life total instead.
5193 Example: In a Two-Headed Giant game, a playe on a team that has 17 life is tageted by Beacon of Immotality, which eads, in pat, “Double taget playe’s life total.” That playe gains 17 life, so the team winds up at 34 life. 5193 Example: In a Two-Headed Giant game, a player on a team that has 17 life is targeted by Beacon of Immortality, which reads, in part, “Double target player’s life total.” That player gains 17 life, so the team winds up at 34 life.
5194 Example: In a Two-Headed Giant game, a playe contols Test of Enduance, an enchantment that eads, “At the beginning of you upkeep, if you have 50 o moe life, you win the game.” At the beginning of that playe’s upkeep, the playe’s team wins the game if thei team’s life total is 50 o moe. 5194 Example: In a Two-Headed Giant game, a player controls Test of Endurance, an enchantment that reads, “At the beginning of your upkeep, if you have 50 or more life, you win the game.” At the beginning of that player’s upkeep, the player’s team wins the game if their team’s life total is 50 or more.
5195 Example: In a Two-Headed Giant game, a playe on a team that has 11 life contols Luking Evil, an enchantment that eads, “Pay half you life, ounded up: Luking Evil becomes a 4/4 Hoo ceatue with flying.” To activate the ability, that playe must pay 6 life. The team winds up at 5 life. 5195 Example: In a Two-Headed Giant game, a player on a team that has 11 life controls Lurking Evil, an enchantment that reads, “Pay half your life, rounded up: Lurking Evil becomes a 4/4 Horror creature with flying.” To activate the ability, that player must pay 6 life. The team winds up at 5 life.
5196 5196
5197 810.9b If a cost o effect allows both membes of a team to pay life simultaneously, the total amount of life they pay may not exceed thei team’s life total. (Playes can always pay 0 life.) 5197 810.9b If a cost or effect allows both members of a team to pay life simultaneously, the total amount of life they pay may not exceed their team’s life total. (Players can always pay 0 life.)
5198 5198
5199 810.9c If an effect sets a single playe’s life total to a specific numbe, the playe gains o loses the necessay amount of life to end up with the new total. The team’s life total is adjusted by the amount of life that playe gained o lost. 5199 810.9c If an effect sets a single player’s life total to a specific number, the player gains or loses the necessary amount of life to end up with the new total. The team’s life total is adjusted by the amount of life that player gained or lost.
5200 Example: In a Two-Headed Giant game, a playe on a team that has 25 life is tageted by an ability that eads, “Taget playe’s life total becomes 10.” That playe’s life total is consideed to be 25, so that playe loses 15 life. The team winds up at 10 life. 5200 Example: In a Two-Headed Giant game, a player on a team that has 25 life is targeted by an ability that reads, “Target player’s life total becomes 10.” That player’s life total is considered to be 25, so that player loses 15 life. The team winds up at 10 life.
5201 5201
5202 810.9d If an effect would set the life total of each playe on a team to a numbe, that team chooses one of its membes. On that team, only that playe is affected. 5202 810.9d If an effect would set the life total of each player on a team to a number, that team chooses one of its members. On that team, only that player is affected.
5203 Example: In a Two-Headed Giant game, one team has 7 life and the othe team has 13 life. A playe casts Repay in Kind, which eads, “Each playe’s life total becomes the lowest life total among all playes.” Each team chooses one of its membes to be affected. The esult is that the chosen playe on the team that has 13 life loses 6 life, so that team’s life total winds up at 7. 5203 Example: In a Two-Headed Giant game, one team has 7 life and the other team has 13 life. A player casts Repay in Kind, which reads, “Each player’s life total becomes the lowest life total among all players.” Each team chooses one of its members to be affected. The result is that the chosen player on the team that has 13 life loses 6 life, so that team’s life total winds up at 7.
5204 5204
5205 810.9e A playe can’t exchange life totals with thei teammate. If an effect would cause that to occu, the exchange won’t happen. 5205 810.9e A player can’t exchange life totals with their teammate. If an effect would cause that to occur, the exchange won’t happen.
5206 5206
5207 810.9f If an effect instucts a playe to edistibute any numbe of playes’ life totals, that playe may not affect moe than one membe of each team this way. 5207 810.9f If an effect instructs a player to redistribute any number of players’ life totals, that player may not affect more than one member of each team this way.
5208 5208
5209 810.9g If an effect says that a playe can’t gain life, no playe on that playe’s team can gain life. 5209 810.9g If an effect says that a player can’t gain life, no player on that player’s team can gain life.
5210 5210
5211 810.9h If an effect says that a playe can’t lose life, no playe on that playe’s team can lose life o pay any amount of life othe than 0. 5211 810.9h If an effect says that a player can’t lose life, no player on that player’s team can lose life or pay any amount of life other than 0.
5212 5212
5213 810.10. Effects that cause playes to get poison countes happen to each playe individually. The poison countes ae shaed by the team. 5213 810.10. Effects that cause players to get poison counters happen to each player individually. The poison counters are shared by the team.
5214 5214
5215 810.10a If an effect needs to know how many poison countes an individual playe has, that effect uses the numbe of poison countes that playe’s team has. If an effect needs to know how many poison countes a playe’s opponents have, that effect uses the numbe of poison countes opposing teams have. 5215 810.10a If an effect needs to know how many poison counters an individual player has, that effect uses the number of poison counters that player’s team has. If an effect needs to know how many poison counters a player’s opponents have, that effect uses the number of poison counters opposing teams have.
5216 5216
5217 810.10b If an effect says that a playe loses poison countes, that playe’s team loses that many poison countes. 5217 810.10b If an effect says that a player loses poison counters, that player’s team loses that many poison counters.
5218 5218
5219 810.10c If an effect says that a playe can’t get poison countes, no playe on that playe’s team can get poison countes. 5219 810.10c If an effect says that a player can’t get poison counters, no player on that player’s team can get poison counters.
5220 5220
5221 810.10d If a ule o effect needs to know what kinds of countes an individual playe has, that effect uses the kinds of countes that playe has and the kinds of countes that playe’s team has. A playe is “poisoned” if that playe’s team has one o moe poison countes. 5221 810.10d If a rule or effect needs to know what kinds of counters an individual player has, that effect uses the kinds of counters that player has and the kinds of counters that player’s team has. A player is “poisoned” if that player’s team has one or more poison counters.
5222 5222
5223 810.11. The Two-Headed Giant vaiant can also be played with equally sized teams of moe than two playes. Fo each playe a team has beyond the second, that team’s stating life total is inceased by 15 and the numbe of poison countes equied fo the team to lose is inceased by five. (These vaiants ae called Thee-Headed Giant, Fou-Headed Giant, and so on.) 5223 810.11. The Two-Headed Giant variant can also be played with equally sized teams of more than two players. For each player a team has beyond the second, that team’s starting life total is increased by 15 and the number of poison counters required for the team to lose is increased by five. (These variants are called Three-Headed Giant, Four-Headed Giant, and so on.)
5224 5224
5225 811. Altenating Teams Vaiant 5225 811. Alternating Teams Variant
5226 5226
5227 811.1. Altenating Teams games ae played with two o moe teams of equal size. 5227 811.1. Alternating Teams games are played with two or more teams of equal size.
5228 5228
5229 811.2. Any multiplaye options used ae detemined befoe play begins. The Altenating Teams vaiant uses the following default options. 5229 811.2. Any multiplayer options used are determined before play begins. The Alternating Teams variant uses the following default options.
5230 5230
5231 811.2a The ecommended ange of influence is 2. See ule 801, “Limited Range of Influence Option.” 5231 811.2a The recommended range of influence is 2. See rule 801, “Limited Range of Influence Option.”
5232 5232
5233 811.2b Exactly one of the attack left, attack ight, and attack multiple playes options must be used. See ule 803, “Attack Left and Attack Right Options,” and ule 802, “Attack Multiple Playes Option.” 5233 811.2b Exactly one of the attack left, attack right, and attack multiple players options must be used. See rule 803, “Attack Left and Attack Right Options,” and rule 802, “Attack Multiple Players Option.”
5234 5234
5235 811.2c The deploy ceatues option isn’t nomally used in the Altenating Teams vaiant. 5235 811.2c The deploy creatures option isn’t normally used in the Alternating Teams variant.
5236 5236
5237 811.3. At the stat of the game, playes ae seated so that no one is next to a teammate and each team is equally spaced out. 5237 811.3. At the start of the game, players are seated so that no one is next to a teammate and each team is equally spaced out.
5238 Example: In an Altenating Teams game with thee teams, A, B, and C, the seating aound the table at the stat of the game is A1, B1, C1, A2, B2, C2, A3, B3, C3, and so on. 5238 Example: In an Alternating Teams game with three teams, A, B, and C, the seating around the table at the start of the game is A1, B1, C1, A2, B2, C2, A3, B3, C3, and so on.
5239 5239
5240 811.4. A playe can’t attack opponents who aen’t seated next to them. 5240 811.4. A player can’t attack opponents who aren’t seated next to them.
5241 5241
5242 811.5. In the Altenating Teams vaiant, a team’s esouces (cads in hand, mana, and so on) ae not shaed. Teammates can’t eview each othe’s hands unless they ae sitting next to each othe. Teammates may discuss stategies at any time. Teammates can’t manipulate each othe’s cads o pemanents. 5242 811.5. In the Alternating Teams variant, a team’s resources (cards in hand, mana, and so on) are not shared. Teammates can’t review each other’s hands unless they are sitting next to each other. Teammates may discuss strategies at any time. Teammates can’t manipulate each other’s cards or permanents.
5243 5243
5244 5244
5245 9. Casual Vaiants 5245 9. Casual Variants
5246 5246
5247 900. Geneal 5247 900. General
5248 5248
5249 900.1. This section contains additional optional ules that can be used fo cetain casual game vaiants. It is by no means compehensive. 5249 900.1. This section contains additional optional rules that can be used for certain casual game variants. It is by no means comprehensive.
5250 5250
5251 900.2. The casual vaiants detailed hee use supplemental zones, ules, cads, and othe game implements not used in taditional Magic games. 5251 900.2. The casual variants detailed here use supplemental zones, rules, cards, and other game implements not used in traditional Magic games.
5252 5252
5253 901. Planechase 5253 901. Planechase
5254 5254
5255 901.1. In the Planechase vaiant, plane cads and phenomenon cads add additional abilities and andomness to the game. The Planechase vaiant uses all the nomal ules fo a Magic game, with the following additions. 5255 901.1. In the Planechase variant, plane cards and phenomenon cards add additional abilities and randomness to the game. The Planechase variant uses all the normal rules for a Magic game, with the following additions.
5256 5256
5257 901.2. A Planechase game may be a two-playe game o a multiplaye game. The default multiplaye setup is the Fee-fo-All vaiant with the attack multiple playes option and without the limited ange of influence option. See ule 806, “Fee-fo-All Vaiant.” 5257 901.2. A Planechase game may be a two-player game or a multiplayer game. The default multiplayer setup is the Free-for-All variant with the attack multiple players option and without the limited range of influence option. See rule 806, “Free-for-All Variant.”
5258 5258
5259 901.3. In addition to the nomal game mateials, each playe needs a plana deck of at least ten plane and/o phenomenon cads and the game needs one plana die. No moe than two cads in a plana deck can be phenomenon cads. Each cad in a plana deck must have a diffeent English name. (See ule 309, “Planes,” and ule 310, “Phenomena.”) 5259 901.3. In addition to the normal game materials, each player needs a planar deck of at least ten plane and/or phenomenon cards and the game needs one planar die. No more than two cards in a planar deck can be phenomenon cards. Each card in a planar deck must have a different English name. (See rule 309, “Planes,” and rule 310, “Phenomena.”)
5260 5260
5261 901.3a A plana die is a six-sided die. One face has the Planeswalke symbol {PW}. One face has the chaos symbol {CHAOS}. The othe faces ae blank. 5261 901.3a A planar die is a six-sided die. One face has the Planeswalker symbol {PW}. One face has the chaos symbol {CHAOS}. The other faces are blank.
5262 5262
5263 901.4. At the stat of the game, each playe shuffles thei plana deck so that the cads ae in a andom ode. Each deck is placed face down next to its owne’s libay. All plane and phenomenon cads emain in the command zone thoughout the game, both while they’e pat of a plana deck and while they’e face up. 5263 901.4. At the start of the game, each player shuffles their planar deck so that the cards are in a random order. Each deck is placed face down next to its owner’s library. All plane and phenomenon cards remain in the command zone throughout the game, both while they’re part of a planar deck and while they’re face up.
5264 5264
5265 901.5. Once all playes have kept thei opening hands and used the abilities of cads that allow them to take an action with those cads fom thei opening hands, the stating playe moves the top cad of thei plana deck off that plana deck and tuns it face up. If it’s a phenomenon cad, the playe puts that cad on the bottom of thei plana deck and epeats this pocess until a plane cad is tuned face up. (See ule 103.6.) No abilities of any cad tuned face up this way tigge duing this pocess. The face-up plane cad becomes the stating plane. 5265 901.5. Once all players have kept their opening hands and used the abilities of cards that allow them to take an action with those cards from their opening hands, the starting player moves the top card of their planar deck off that planar deck and turns it face up. If it’s a phenomenon card, the player puts that card on the bottom of their planar deck and repeats this process until a plane card is turned face up. (See rule 103.6.) No abilities of any card turned face up this way trigger during this process. The face-up plane card becomes the starting plane.
5266 5266
5267 901.6. The owne of a plane o phenomenon cad is the playe who stated the game with it in thei plana deck. The contolle of a face-up plane o phenomenon cad is the playe designated as the plana contolle. Nomally, the plana contolle is whoeve the active playe is. Howeve, if the cuent plana contolle would leave the game, instead the next playe in tun ode that wouldn’t leave the game becomes the plana contolle, then the old plana contolle leaves the game. The new plana contolle etains that designation until they leave the game o a diffeent playe becomes the active playe, whicheve comes fist. 5267 901.6. The owner of a plane or phenomenon card is the player who started the game with it in their planar deck. The controller of a face-up plane or phenomenon card is the player designated as the planar controller. Normally, the planar controller is whoever the active player is. However, if the current planar controller would leave the game, instead the next player in turn order that wouldn’t leave the game becomes the planar controller, then the old planar controller leaves the game. The new planar controller retains that designation until they leave the game or a different player becomes the active player, whichever comes first.
5268 5268
5269 901.7. Any abilities of a face-up plane cad o phenomenon cad in the command zone function fom that zone. The cad’s static abilities affect the game, its tiggeed abilities may tigge, and its activated abilities may be activated. 5269 901.7. Any abilities of a face-up plane card or phenomenon card in the command zone function from that zone. The card’s static abilities affect the game, its triggered abilities may trigger, and its activated abilities may be activated.
5270 5270
5271 901.7a A face-up plane cad o phenomenon cad that’s tuned face down becomes a new object. 5271 901.7a A face-up plane card or phenomenon card that’s turned face down becomes a new object.
5272 5272
5273 901.8. Planechase games have an inheent tiggeed ability known as the “planeswalking ability.” The full text of this ability is “Wheneve you oll {PW}, planeswalk.” (See ule 701.23, “Planeswalk.”) This ability has no souce and is contolled by the playe whose plana die oll caused it to tigge. This is an exception to ule 113.8. 5273 901.8. Planechase games have an inherent triggered ability known as the “planeswalking ability.” The full text of this ability is “Whenever you roll {PW}, planeswalk.” (See rule 701.23, “Planeswalk.”) This ability has no source and is controlled by the player whose planar die roll caused it to trigger. This is an exception to rule 113.8.
5274 5274
5275 901.9. Any time the active playe has pioity and the stack is empty, but only duing a main phase of thei tun, that playe may oll the plana die. Taking this action costs a playe an amount of mana equal to the numbe of times they have peviously taken this action on that tun. This is a special action and doesn’t use the stack. Note that this numbe won’t be equal to the numbe of times the playe has olled the plana die that tun if an effect has caused the playe to oll the plana die that tun. (See ule 116.2g.) 5275 901.9. Any time the active player has priority and the stack is empty, but only during a main phase of their turn, that player may roll the planar die. Taking this action costs a player an amount of mana equal to the number of times they have previously taken this action on that turn. This is a special action and doesn’t use the stack. Note that this number won’t be equal to the number of times the player has rolled the planar die that turn if an effect has caused the player to roll the planar die that turn. (See rule 116.2g.)
5276 5276
5277 901.9a If the die oll is a blank face, nothing happens. The active playe gets pioity. 5277 901.9a If the die roll is a blank face, nothing happens. The active player gets priority.
5278 5278
5279 901.9b If the die oll is the chaos symbol {CHAOS}, any ability of a face-up plane that stats “When you oll {CHAOS}” tigges and is put on the stack. The active playe gets pioity. 5279 901.9b If the die roll is the chaos symbol {CHAOS}, any ability of a face-up plane that starts “When you roll {CHAOS}” triggers and is put on the stack. The active player gets priority.
5280 5280
5281 901.9c If the die oll is the Planeswalke symbol {PW}, the “planeswalking ability” tigges and is put on the stack. The active playe gets pioity. (See ule 901.8.) 5281 901.9c If the die roll is the Planeswalker symbol {PW}, the “planeswalking ability” triggers and is put on the stack. The active player gets priority. (See rule 901.8.)
5282 5282
5283 901.10. When a playe leaves the game, all objects owned by that playe except abilities fom phenomena leave the game. (See ule 800.4a.) If that includes a face-up plane cad o phenomenon cad, the plana contolle tuns the top cad of thei plana deck face up. This is not a state-based action. It happens as soon as the playe leaves the game. 5283 901.10. When a player leaves the game, all objects owned by that player except abilities from phenomena leave the game. (See rule 800.4a.) If that includes a face-up plane card or phenomenon card, the planar controller turns the top card of their planar deck face up. This is not a state-based action. It happens as soon as the player leaves the game.
5284 5284
5285 901.10a If a plane leaves the game while a “planeswalking ability” is on the stack, that ability ceases to exist. 5285 901.10a If a plane leaves the game while a “planeswalking ability” is on the stack, that ability ceases to exist.
5286 5286
5287 901.10b Abilities fom phenomena owned by a playe who left the game emain on the stack contolled by the new plana contolle. 5287 901.10b Abilities from phenomena owned by a player who left the game remain on the stack controlled by the new planar controller.
5288 5288
5289 901.11. Afte the game has stated, if a playe moves the top cad of thei plana deck off that plana deck and tuns it face up, that playe has “planeswalked.” Continuous effects with duations that last until a playe planeswalks end. Abilities that tigge when a playe planeswalks tigge. See ule 701.23. 5289 901.11. After the game has started, if a player moves the top card of their planar deck off that planar deck and turns it face up, that player has “planeswalked.” Continuous effects with durations that last until a player planeswalks end. Abilities that trigger when a player planeswalks trigger. See rule 701.23.
5290 5290
5291 901.11a A playe may planeswalk as the esult of the “planeswalking ability” (see ule 901.8), because the owne of a face-up plane cad o phenomenon cad leaves the game (see ule 901.10), o because a phenomenon’s tiggeed ability leaves the stack (see ule 704.5x). Abilities may also instuct a playe to planeswalk. 5291 901.11a A player may planeswalk as the result of the “planeswalking ability” (see rule 901.8), because the owner of a face-up plane card or phenomenon card leaves the game (see rule 901.10), or because a phenomenon’s triggered ability leaves the stack (see rule 704.5x). Abilities may also instruct a player to planeswalk.
5292 5292
5293 901.11b The plane cad that’s tuned face up is the plane the playe planeswalks to. The plane cad o phenomenon cad that’s tuned face down, o that leaves the game, is the plane o phenomenon the playe planeswalks away fom. 5293 901.11b The plane card that’s turned face up is the plane the player planeswalks to. The plane card or phenomenon card that’s turned face down, or that leaves the game, is the plane or phenomenon the player planeswalks away from.
5294 5294
5295 901.11c If a playe planeswalks when thee is moe than one face-up plane cad, that playe planeswalks away fom all such planes. 5295 901.11c If a player planeswalks when there is more than one face-up plane card, that player planeswalks away from all such planes.
5296 5296
5297 901.12. A Two-Headed Giant Planechase game uses all the ules fo the Two-Headed Giant multiplaye vaiant and all the ules fo the Planechase casual vaiant, with the following additions. 5297 901.12. A Two-Headed Giant Planechase game uses all the rules for the Two-Headed Giant multiplayer variant and all the rules for the Planechase casual variant, with the following additions.
5298 5298
5299 901.12a Each playe has thei own plana deck. 5299 901.12a Each player has their own planar deck.
5300 5300
5301 901.12b The plana contolle is nomally the pimay playe of the active team. Howeve, if the cuent plana contolle’s team would leave the game, instead the pimay playe of the next team in tun ode that wouldn’t leave the game becomes the plana contolle, then the old plana contolle’s team leaves the game. The new plana contolle etains that designation until they leave the game o a diffeent team becomes the active team, whicheve comes fist. 5301 901.12b The planar controller is normally the primary player of the active team. However, if the current planar controller’s team would leave the game, instead the primary player of the next team in turn order that wouldn’t leave the game becomes the planar controller, then the old planar controller’s team leaves the game. The new planar controller retains that designation until they leave the game or a different team becomes the active team, whichever comes first.
5302 5302
5303 901.12c Even though the face-up plane o phenomenon is contolled by just one playe, any ability of that plane o phenomenon that efes to “you” applies to both membes of the plana contolle’s team. 5303 901.12c Even though the face-up plane or phenomenon is controlled by just one player, any ability of that plane or phenomenon that refers to “you” applies to both members of the planar controller’s team.
5304 5304
5305 901.12d Since each membe of the active team is an active playe, each of them may oll the plana die. Each playe’s cost to oll the plana die is based on the numbe of times that paticula playe has aleady olled the plana die that tun. 5305 901.12d Since each member of the active team is an active player, each of them may roll the planar die. Each player’s cost to roll the planar die is based on the number of times that particular player has already rolled the planar die that turn.
5306 5306
5307 901.13. In multiplaye fomats othe than Gand Melee, plane cads and phenomenon cads ae exempt fom the limited ange of influence option. Thei abilities, and the effects of those abilities, affect all applicable objects and playes in the game. (See ule 801, “Limited Range of Influence Option.”) 5307 901.13. In multiplayer formats other than Grand Melee, plane cards and phenomenon cards are exempt from the limited range of influence option. Their abilities, and the effects of those abilities, affect all applicable objects and players in the game. (See rule 801, “Limited Range of Influence Option.”)
5308 5308
5309 901.14. In Gand Melee Planechase games, multiple plane cads o phenomenon cads may be face up at the same time. 5309 901.14. In Grand Melee Planechase games, multiple plane cards or phenomenon cards may be face up at the same time.
5310 5310
5311 901.14a Befoe the fist tun of the game of the game, each playe who will stat the game with a tun make sets a stating plane (see ule 901.5). Each of them is a plana contolle. 5311 901.14a Before the first turn of the game of the game, each player who will start the game with a turn marker sets a starting plane (see rule 901.5). Each of them is a planar controller.
5312 5312
5313 901.14b If a playe would leave the game and that playe leaving the game would educe the numbe of tun makes in the game, that playe fist ceases to be a plana contolle (but no othe playe becomes a plana contolle), then that playe leaves the game. Each face-up plane cad o phenomenon cad that playe contolled is put on the bottom of its owne’s plana deck. No playe is consideed to have planeswalked. 5313 901.14b If a player would leave the game and that player leaving the game would reduce the number of turn markers in the game, that player first ceases to be a planar controller (but no other player becomes a planar controller), then that player leaves the game. Each face-up plane card or phenomenon card that player controlled is put on the bottom of its owner’s planar deck. No player is considered to have planeswalked.
5314 5314
5315 901.15. Single Plana Deck Option 5315 901.15. Single Planar Deck Option
5316 5316
5317 901.15a As an altenative option, a Planechase game may be played with just a single communal plana deck. In that case, the numbe of cads in the plana deck must be at least foty o at least ten times the numbe of playes in the game, whicheve is smalle. The plana deck can’t contain moe phenomenon cads than twice the numbe of playes in the game. Each cad in the plana deck must have a diffeent English name. 5317 901.15a As an alternative option, a Planechase game may be played with just a single communal planar deck. In that case, the number of cards in the planar deck must be at least forty or at least ten times the number of players in the game, whichever is smaller. The planar deck can’t contain more phenomenon cards than twice the number of players in the game. Each card in the planar deck must have a different English name.
5318 5318
5319 901.15b In a Planechase game using the single plana deck option, the plana contolle is consideed to be the owne of all cads in the plana deck. 5319 901.15b In a Planechase game using the single planar deck option, the planar controller is considered to be the owner of all cards in the planar deck.
5320 5320
5321 901.15c If any ule o ability efes to a playe’s plana deck, the communal plana deck is used. 5321 901.15c If any rule or ability refers to a player’s planar deck, the communal planar deck is used.
5322 5322
5323 902. Vanguad 5323 902. Vanguard
5324 5324
5325 902.1. In the Vanguad vaiant, a vanguad cad allows each playe to play the ole of a famous chaacte. Each playe will have one face-up vanguad cad whose abilities and othe chaacteistics affect the game. The Vanguad vaiant uses all the nomal ules fo a Magic game, with the following additions. 5325 902.1. In the Vanguard variant, a vanguard card allows each player to play the role of a famous character. Each player will have one face-up vanguard card whose abilities and other characteristics affect the game. The Vanguard variant uses all the normal rules for a Magic game, with the following additions.
5326 5326
5327 902.2. A Vanguad game may be a two-playe game o a multiplaye game. 5327 902.2. A Vanguard game may be a two-player game or a multiplayer game.
5328 5328
5329 902.3. In addition to the nomal game mateials, each playe needs a vanguad cad. Each vanguad cad is placed face up next to its owne’s libay befoe the game begins. All vanguad cads emain in the command zone thoughout the game. 5329 902.3. In addition to the normal game materials, each player needs a vanguard card. Each vanguard card is placed face up next to its owner’s library before the game begins. All vanguard cards remain in the command zone throughout the game.
5330 5330
5331 902.4. Each playe’s stating life total is 20 plus o minus the life modifie of thei vanguad cad. 5331 902.4. Each player’s starting life total is 20 plus or minus the life modifier of their vanguard card.
5332 Example: The life modifie of a playe’s vanguad cad is -3. That playe’s stating life total is 17. 5332 Example: The life modifier of a player’s vanguard card is -3. That player’s starting life total is 17.
5333 5333
5334 902.5. Each playe’s stating hand size is seven cads, as modified by the hand modifie of thei vanguad cad. 5334 902.5. Each player’s starting hand size is seven cards, as modified by the hand modifier of their vanguard card.
5335 5335
5336 902.5a If a playe takes a mulligan in a Vanguad game, just like in a nomal game, that playe shuffles thei hand back into thei libay, then daws a new hand equal to thei stating hand size. (In a multiplaye game, a playe’s fist mulligan is fo the same numbe of cads as they had befoe.) See ule 103.4. 5336 902.5a If a player takes a mulligan in a Vanguard game, just like in a normal game, that player shuffles their hand back into their library, then draws a new hand equal to their starting hand size. (In a multiplayer game, a player’s first mulligan is for the same number of cards as they had before.) See rule 103.4.
5337 Example: The hand modifie of a playe’s vanguad cad is +2. That playe stats the game with a hand of 9 cads. If the playe takes a mulligan thee times befoe keeping, they daw a new hand of nine cads and put thee of those on the bottom of thei libay. 5337 Example: The hand modifier of a player’s vanguard card is +2. That player starts the game with a hand of 9 cards. If the player takes a mulligan three times before keeping, they draw a new hand of nine cards and put three of those on the bottom of their library.
5338 5338
5339 902.5b A playe’s maximum hand size is seven, as modified by the hand modifie of thei vanguad cad. 5339 902.5b A player’s maximum hand size is seven, as modified by the hand modifier of their vanguard card.
5340 Example: The hand modifie of a playe’s vanguad cad is -1. That playe’s maximum hand size is six. If that playe has moe than six cads in thei hand as thei cleanup step begins, they will discad all but six of them. 5340 Example: The hand modifier of a player’s vanguard card is -1. That player’s maximum hand size is six. If that player has more than six cards in their hand as their cleanup step begins, they will discard all but six of them.
5341 5341
5342 902.6. The owne of a vanguad cad is the playe who stated the game with it in the command zone. The contolle of a face-up vanguad cad is its owne. 5342 902.6. The owner of a vanguard card is the player who started the game with it in the command zone. The controller of a face-up vanguard card is its owner.
5343 5343
5344 902.7. Any abilities of a face-up vanguad cad in the command zone function fom that zone. The cad’s static abilities affect the game, its tiggeed abilities may tigge, and its activated abilities may be activated. 5344 902.7. Any abilities of a face-up vanguard card in the command zone function from that zone. The card’s static abilities affect the game, its triggered abilities may trigger, and its activated abilities may be activated.
5345 5345
5346 903. Commande 5346 903. Commander
5347 5347
5348 903.1. In the Commande vaiant, each deck is led by a legenday ceatue designated as that deck’s commande. The Commande vaiant was ceated and populaized by fans; an independent ules committee maintains additional esouces at MTGCommande.net. The Commande vaiant uses all the nomal ules fo a Magic game, with the following additions. 5348 903.1. In the Commander variant, each deck is led by a legendary creature designated as that deck’s commander. The Commander variant was created and popularized by fans; an independent rules committee maintains additional resources at MTGCommander.net. The Commander variant uses all the normal rules for a Magic game, with the following additions.
5349 5349
5350 903.2. A Commande game may be a two-playe game o a multiplaye game. The default multiplaye setup is the Fee-fo-All vaiant with the attack multiple playes option and without the limited ange of influence option. See ule 806, “Fee-fo-All Vaiant.” 5350 903.2. A Commander game may be a two-player game or a multiplayer game. The default multiplayer setup is the Free-for-All variant with the attack multiple players option and without the limited range of influence option. See rule 806, “Free-for-All Variant.”
5351 5351
5352 903.3. Each deck has a legenday ceatue cad designated as its commande. This designation is not a chaacteistic of the object epesented by the cad; athe, it is an attibute of the cad itself. The cad etains this designation even when it changes zones. 5352 903.3. Each deck has a legendary creature card designated as its commander. This designation is not a characteristic of the object represented by the card; rather, it is an attribute of the card itself. The card retains this designation even when it changes zones.
5353 Example: A commande that’s been tuned face down (due to Ixidon’s effect, fo example) is still a commande. A commande that’s copying anothe cad (due to Cytoshape’s effect, fo example) is still a commande. A pemanent that’s copying a commande (such as a Body Double, fo example, copying a commande in a playe’s gaveyad) is not a commande. 5353 Example: A commander that’s been turned face down (due to Ixidron’s effect, for example) is still a commander. A commander that’s copying another card (due to Cytoshape’s effect, for example) is still a commander. A permanent that’s copying a commander (such as a Body Double, for example, copying a commander in a player’s graveyard) is not a commander.
5354 5354
5355 903.3a Some planeswalke cads have an ability that states the cad can be you commande. This ability modifies the ules fo deck constuction, and it functions befoe the game begins. See also ule 113.6m. 5355 903.3a Some planeswalker cards have an ability that states the card can be your commander. This ability modifies the rules for deck construction, and it functions before the game begins. See also rule 113.6m.
5356 5356
5357 903.3b If a playe’s commande is a meld cad and it’s melded with the othe membe of its meld pai, the esulting melded pemanent is that playe’s commande. 5357 903.3b If a player’s commander is a meld card and it’s melded with the other member of its meld pair, the resulting melded permanent is that player’s commander.
5358 5358
5359 903.4. The Commande vaiant uses colo identity to detemine what cads can be in a deck with a cetain commande. The colo identity of a cad is the colo o colos of any mana symbols in that cad’s mana cost o ules text, plus any colos defined by its chaacteistic-defining abilities (see ule 604.3) o colo indicato (see ule 204). 5359 903.4. The Commander variant uses color identity to determine what cards can be in a deck with a certain commander. The color identity of a card is the color or colors of any mana symbols in that card’s mana cost or rules text, plus any colors defined by its characteristic-defining abilities (see rule 604.3) or color indicator (see rule 204).
5360 Example: Bosh, Ion Golem is a legenday atifact ceatue with mana cost {8} and the ability “{3}{R}, Sacifice an atifact: Bosh, Ion Golem deals damage equal to the sacificed atifact’s conveted mana cost to any taget.” Bosh’s colo identity is ed. 5360 Example: Bosh, Iron Golem is a legendary artifact creature with mana cost {8} and the ability “{3}{R}, Sacrifice an artifact: Bosh, Iron Golem deals damage equal to the sacrificed artifact’s converted mana cost to any target.” Bosh’s color identity is red.
5361 5361
5362 903.4a Colo identity is established befoe the game begins. 5362 903.4a Color identity is established before the game begins.
5363 5363
5364 903.4b Reminde text is ignoed when detemining a cad’s colo identity. See ule 207.2. 5364 903.4b Reminder text is ignored when determining a card’s color identity. See rule 207.2.
5365 5365
5366 903.4c The back face of a double-faced cad (see ule 711) is included when detemining a cad’s colo identity. This is an exception to ule 711.4a. 5366 903.4c The back face of a double-faced card (see rule 711) is included when determining a card’s color identity. This is an exception to rule 711.4a.
5367 Example: Civilized Schola is the font face of a double-faced cad with mana cost {2}{U}. Homicidal Bute is the back face of that double-faced cad and has a ed colo indicato. The cad’s colo identity is blue and ed. 5367 Example: Civilized Scholar is the front face of a double-faced card with mana cost {2}{U}. Homicidal Brute is the back face of that double-faced card and has a red color indicator. The card’s color identity is blue and red.
5368 5368
5369 903.5. Each Commande deck is subject to the following deck constuction ules. 5369 903.5. Each Commander deck is subject to the following deck construction rules.
5370 5370
5371 903.5a Each deck must contain exactly 100 cads, including its commande. 5371 903.5a Each deck must contain exactly 100 cards, including its commander.
5372 5372
5373 903.5b Othe than basic lands, each cad in a Commande deck must have a diffeent English name. 5373 903.5b Other than basic lands, each card in a Commander deck must have a different English name.
5374 5374
5375 903.5c A cad can be included in a Commande deck only if evey colo in its colo identity is also found in the colo identity of the deck’s commande. 5375 903.5c A card can be included in a Commander deck only if every color in its color identity is also found in the color identity of the deck’s commander.
5376 Example: Wot, the Raidmothe is a legenday ceatue with mana cost {4}{R/G}{R/G}. Wot’s colo identity is ed and geen. Each cad in a Wot Commande deck must be only ed, only geen, both ed and geen, o have no colo. Each mana symbol in the mana cost o ules text of a cad in this deck must be only ed, only geen, both ed and geen, o have no colo. 5376 Example: Wort, the Raidmother is a legendary creature with mana cost {4}{R/G}{R/G}. Wort’s color identity is red and green. Each card in a Wort Commander deck must be only red, only green, both red and green, or have no color. Each mana symbol in the mana cost or rules text of a card in this deck must be only red, only green, both red and green, or have no color.
5377 5377
5378 903.5d A cad with a basic land type may be included in a Commande deck only if each colo of mana it could poduce is included in the commande’s colo identity. 5378 903.5d A card with a basic land type may be included in a Commander deck only if each color of mana it could produce is included in the commander’s color identity.
5379 Example: Wot, the Raidmothe’s colo identity is ed and geen. A Wot Commande deck may include land cads with the basic land types Mountain and/o Foest. It can’t include any land cads with the basic land types Plains, Island, o Swamp. 5379 Example: Wort, the Raidmother’s color identity is red and green. A Wort Commander deck may include land cards with the basic land types Mountain and/or Forest. It can’t include any land cards with the basic land types Plains, Island, or Swamp.
5380 5380
5381 903.6. At the stat of the game, each playe puts thei commande fom thei deck face up into the command zone. Then each playe shuffles the emaining 99 cads of thei deck so that the cads ae in a andom ode. Those cads become the playe’s libay. 5381 903.6. At the start of the game, each player puts their commander from their deck face up into the command zone. Then each player shuffles the remaining 99 cards of their deck so that the cards are in a random order. Those cards become the player’s library.
5382 5382
5383 903.7. Once the stating playe has been detemined, each playe sets thei life total to 40 and daws a hand of seven cads. 5383 903.7. Once the starting player has been determined, each player sets their life total to 40 and draws a hand of seven cards.
5384 5384
5385 903.8. A playe may cast a commande they own fom the command zone. A commande cast fom the command zone costs an additional {2} fo each pevious time the playe casting it has cast it fom the command zone that game. This additional cost is infomally known as the “commande tax.” 5385 903.8. A player may cast a commander they own from the command zone. A commander cast from the command zone costs an additional {2} for each previous time the player casting it has cast it from the command zone that game. This additional cost is informally known as the “commander tax.”
5386 5386
5387 903.9. If a commande would be exiled fom anywhee o put into its owne’s hand, gaveyad, o libay fom anywhee, its owne may put it into the command zone instead. This eplacement effect may apply moe than once to the same event. This is an exception to ule 614.5. 5387 903.9. If a commander would be exiled from anywhere or put into its owner’s hand, graveyard, or library from anywhere, its owner may put it into the command zone instead. This replacement effect may apply more than once to the same event. This is an exception to rule 614.5.
5388 5388
5389 903.9a If a commande is a melded pemanent and its owne chooses to put it into the command zone this way, that pemanent and the cad epesenting it that isn’t a commande ae put into the appopiate zone, and the cad that epesents it and is a commande is put into the command zone. 5389 903.9a If a commander is a melded permanent and its owner chooses to put it into the command zone this way, that permanent and the card representing it that isn’t a commander are put into the appropriate zone, and the card that represents it and is a commander is put into the command zone.
5390 5390
5391 903.10. The Commande vaiant includes the following specification fo winning and losing the game. All othe ules fo ending the game also apply. (See ule 104.) 5391 903.10. The Commander variant includes the following specification for winning and losing the game. All other rules for ending the game also apply. (See rule 104.)
5392 5392
5393 903.10a A playe that’s been dealt 21 o moe combat damage by the same commande ove the couse of the game loses the game. (This is a state-based action. See ule 704.) 5393 903.10a A player that’s been dealt 21 or more combat damage by the same commander over the course of the game loses the game. (This is a state-based action. See rule 704.)
5394 5394
5395 903.11. Bawl Option 5395 903.11. Brawl Option
5396 5396
5397 903.11a Bawl is an option fo a diffeent style of Commande game. Bawl games use the nomal ules fo the Commande vaiant with the following modifications. 5397 903.11a Brawl is an option for a different style of Commander game. Brawl games use the normal rules for the Commander variant with the following modifications.
5398 5398
5399 903.11b Bawl decks ae usually constucted using cads fom the Standad fomat. 5399 903.11b Brawl decks are usually constructed using cards from the Standard format.
5400 5400
5401 903.11c A playe designates eithe a legenday planeswalke o a legenday ceatue as thei commande. 5401 903.11c A player designates either a legendary planeswalker or a legendary creature as their commander.
5402 5402
5403 903.11d A playe’s deck must contain exactly 60 cads, including its commande. 5403 903.11d A player’s deck must contain exactly 60 cards, including its commander.
5404 5404
5405 903.11e If a playe’s commande has no colos in its colo identity, that playe’s deck may contain any numbe of basic lands of one basic land type of thei choice. This is an exception to ule 903.5d. 5405 903.11e If a player’s commander has no colors in its color identity, that player’s deck may contain any number of basic lands of one basic land type of their choice. This is an exception to rule 903.5d.
5406 5406
5407 903.11f In a two-playe Bawl game, each playe’s stating life total is 25. In a multiplaye Bawl game, each playe’s stating life total is 30. 5407 903.11f In a two-player Brawl game, each player’s starting life total is 25. In a multiplayer Brawl game, each player’s starting life total is 30.
5408 5408
5409 903.11g In any Bawl game, the fist mulligan a playe takes doesn’t count towad the numbe of cads that playe will put on the bottom of thei libay o the numbe of mulligans that playe may take. Subsequent mulligans ae counted towad these numbes as nomal. 5409 903.11g In any Brawl game, the first mulligan a player takes doesn’t count toward the number of cards that player will put on the bottom of their library or the number of mulligans that player may take. Subsequent mulligans are counted toward these numbers as normal.
5410 5410
5411 903.11h Bawl games do not use the state-based action descibed in ule 704.5v, which causes a playe to lose the game if they’ve been dealt 21 o moe combat damage by a commande. 5411 903.11h Brawl games do not use the state-based action described in rule 704.5v, which causes a player to lose the game if they’ve been dealt 21 or more combat damage by a commander.
5412 5412
5413 904. Achenemy 5413 904. Archenemy
5414 5414
5415 904.1. In the Achenemy vaiant, a team of playes faces off against a single opponent stengthened with poweful scheme cads. The Achenemy vaiant uses all the nomal ules fo a Magic game, with the following additions. 5415 904.1. In the Archenemy variant, a team of players faces off against a single opponent strengthened with powerful scheme cards. The Archenemy variant uses all the normal rules for a Magic game, with the following additions.
5416 5416
5417 904.2. The default setup fo an Achenemy game is the Team vs. Team multiplaye vaiant (see ule 808) involving exactly two teams. The attack multiple playes option (see ule 802) and the shaed team tuns option (see ule 805) ae used; no othe multiplaye options ae used. 5417 904.2. The default setup for an Archenemy game is the Team vs. Team multiplayer variant (see rule 808) involving exactly two teams. The attack multiple players option (see rule 802) and the shared team turns option (see rule 805) are used; no other multiplayer options are used.
5418 5418
5419 904.2a One of the teams consists of exactly one playe, who is designated the achenemy. 5419 904.2a One of the teams consists of exactly one player, who is designated the archenemy.
5420 5420
5421 904.2b The othe team consists of any numbe of playes. 5421 904.2b The other team consists of any number of players.
5422 5422
5423 904.3. In addition to the nomal game mateials, the achenemy needs a scheme deck of at least twenty scheme cads. A scheme deck may contain no moe than two of any cad with a paticula English name. (See ule 312, “Schemes.”) 5423 904.3. In addition to the normal game materials, the archenemy needs a scheme deck of at least twenty scheme cards. A scheme deck may contain no more than two of any card with a particular English name. (See rule 312, “Schemes.”)
5424 5424
5425 904.4. At the stat of the game, the achenemy shuffles thei scheme deck so that the cads ae in a andom ode. The scheme deck is placed face down next to the achenemy’s libay. All scheme cads emain in the command zone thoughout the game, both while they’e pat of a scheme deck and while they’e face up. 5425 904.4. At the start of the game, the archenemy shuffles their scheme deck so that the cards are in a random order. The scheme deck is placed face down next to the archenemy’s library. All scheme cards remain in the command zone throughout the game, both while they’re part of a scheme deck and while they’re face up.
5426 5426
5427 904.5. The achenemy’s stating life total is 40. Each othe playe’s stating life total is 20. 5427 904.5. The archenemy’s starting life total is 40. Each other player’s starting life total is 20.
5428 5428
5429 904.6. Rathe than a andomly detemined playe, the achenemy takes the fist tun of the game. 5429 904.6. Rather than a randomly determined player, the archenemy takes the first turn of the game.
5430 5430
5431 904.7. The owne of a scheme cad is the playe who stated the game with it in the command zone. The contolle of a face-up scheme cad is its owne. 5431 904.7. The owner of a scheme card is the player who started the game with it in the command zone. The controller of a face-up scheme card is its owner.
5432 5432
5433 904.8. Any abilities of a face-up scheme cad in the command zone function fom that zone. The cad’s static abilities affect the game, its tiggeed abilities may tigge, and its activated abilities may be activated. 5433 904.8. Any abilities of a face-up scheme card in the command zone function from that zone. The card’s static abilities affect the game, its triggered abilities may trigger, and its activated abilities may be activated.
5434 5434
5435 904.9. Immediately afte the achenemy’s pecombat main phase begins duing each of thei tuns, that playe moves the top cad of thei scheme deck off that scheme deck and tuns it face up. This is called “setting that scheme in motion.” (See ule 701.24.) This tun-based action doesn’t use the stack. Abilities of that scheme cad that tigge “When you set this scheme in motion” tigge. 5435 904.9. Immediately after the archenemy’s precombat main phase begins during each of their turns, that player moves the top card of their scheme deck off that scheme deck and turns it face up. This is called “setting that scheme in motion.” (See rule 701.24.) This turn-based action doesn’t use the stack. Abilities of that scheme card that trigger “When you set this scheme in motion” trigger.
5436 5436
5437 904.10. If a non-ongoing scheme cad is face up in the command zone, and no tiggeed abilities of any scheme ae on the stack o waiting to be put on the stack, that scheme cad is tuned face down and put on the bottom of its owne’s scheme deck the next time a playe would eceive pioity. (This is a state-based action. See ule 704.) 5437 904.10. If a non-ongoing scheme card is face up in the command zone, and no triggered abilities of any scheme are on the stack or waiting to be put on the stack, that scheme card is turned face down and put on the bottom of its owner’s scheme deck the next time a player would receive priority. (This is a state-based action. See rule 704.)
5438 5438
5439 904.11. Once an ongoing scheme cad is set in motion, it emains face up in the command zone until an ability causes it to be abandoned (see ule 701.25). 5439 904.11. Once an ongoing scheme card is set in motion, it remains face up in the command zone until an ability causes it to be abandoned (see rule 701.25).
5440 5440
5441 904.12. Supevillain Rumble Option 5441 904.12. Supervillain Rumble Option
5442 5442
5443 904.12a As an altenative option, playes may play a Fee-fo-All game in which each playe has thei own scheme deck. The attack multiple playes option (see ule 802) is used; no othe multiplaye options ae used. 5443 904.12a As an alternative option, players may play a Free-for-All game in which each player has their own scheme deck. The attack multiple players option (see rule 802) is used; no other multiplayer options are used.
5444 5444
5445 904.12b Each playe in this game is an achenemy. 5445 904.12b Each player in this game is an archenemy.
5446 5446
5447 904.12c As in a nomal Fee-fo-All game, the stating playe is andomly detemined. All othe ules that apply to the achenemy in an Achenemy game apply to each playe in a Supevillain Rumble game. 5447 904.12c As in a normal Free-for-All game, the starting player is randomly determined. All other rules that apply to the archenemy in an Archenemy game apply to each player in a Supervillain Rumble game.
5448 5448
5449 905. Conspiacy Daft 5449 905. Conspiracy Draft
5450 5450
5451 905.1. The Conspiacy Daft vaiant consists of a daft (a style of limited play whee playes choose cads fom sealed booste packs to build thei decks) followed by a multiplaye game. The Conspiacy Daft vaiant uses Magic: The Gatheing—Conspiacy™ and/o Conspiacy: Take the Cown™ booste packs by default. 5451 905.1. The Conspiracy Draft variant consists of a draft (a style of limited play where players choose cards from sealed booster packs to build their decks) followed by a multiplayer game. The Conspiracy Draft variant uses Magic: The Gathering—Conspiracy™ and/or Conspiracy: Take the Crown™ booster packs by default.
5452 5452
5453 905.1a A daft typically consists of thee daft ounds. In each daft ound, each playe opens a booste pack, dafts one cad by placing that cad in a face-down pile in font of the playe, then passes the emaining cads to the next playe. Each playe then dafts a cad fom the booste pack passed to them and passes the emaining cads. This pocedue continues until all cads in that daft ound have been dafted. 5453 905.1a A draft typically consists of three draft rounds. In each draft round, each player opens a booster pack, drafts one card by placing that card in a face-down pile in front of the player, then passes the remaining cards to the next player. Each player then drafts a card from the booster pack passed to them and passes the remaining cards. This procedure continues until all cards in that draft round have been drafted.
5454 5454
5455 905.1b In the fist and thid daft ounds, booste packs ae passed to each playe’s left. In the second daft ound, booste packs ae passed to each playe’s ight. 5455 905.1b In the first and third draft rounds, booster packs are passed to each player’s left. In the second draft round, booster packs are passed to each player’s right.
5456 5456
5457 905.1c Duing the daft, a playe can look only at cads in the booste pack they ae cuently dafting fom, cads they have aleady dafted, cads that ae cuently evealed as descibed in ule 905.2b, and cads that have been dafted face up as descibed in ule 905.2c. A playe may not eveal dafted cads to othe playes unless an ability instucts them to. 5457 905.1c During the draft, a player can look only at cards in the booster pack they are currently drafting from, cards they have already drafted, cards that are currently revealed as described in rule 905.2b, and cards that have been drafted face up as described in rule 905.2c. A player may not reveal drafted cards to other players unless an ability instructs them to.
5458 5458
5459 905.1d Afte the daft and all actions that may be taken duing o afte the daft, all the cads a playe has dafted become that playe’s cad pool. The playe builds thei deck fom only these cads and any numbe of basic land cads. See ules 100.2b and 100.4b. 5459 905.1d After the draft and all actions that may be taken during or after the draft, all the cards a player has drafted become that player’s card pool. The player builds their deck from only these cards and any number of basic land cards. See rules 100.2b and 100.4b.
5460 5460
5461 905.2. Some cads have abilities that function duing the daft. 5461 905.2. Some cards have abilities that function during the draft.
5462 5462
5463 905.2a Duing a daft, thee is no active playe o system of pioity. If multiple playes wish to take an action at the same time duing the daft and can’t agee on an ode, those actions ae taken in a andom ode. 5463 905.2a During a draft, there is no active player or system of priority. If multiple players wish to take an action at the same time during the draft and can’t agree on an order, those actions are taken in a random order.
5464 5464
5465 905.2b Some cads instuct playes to eveal them as they’e dafted and then note some infomation, such as a numbe o colo. This infomation can be efeed to by othe abilities duing the game. Any playe can look at this infomation at any time duing the daft o game. Afte the infomation is noted, the dafted cad is tuned face down and added to the playe’s dafted cads pile. 5465 905.2b Some cards instruct players to reveal them as they’re drafted and then note some information, such as a number or color. This information can be referred to by other abilities during the game. Any player can look at this information at any time during the draft or game. After the information is noted, the drafted card is turned face down and added to the player’s drafted cards pile.
5466 5466
5467 905.2c Some cads instuct playes to daft them face up. Each such cad emains face up until the daft is complete, an effect instucts the peson who dafted it to tun it face down, o the cad leaves that playe’s dafted cads pile. While the cad is face up, all playes may look at it. 5467 905.2c Some cards instruct players to draft them face up. Each such card remains face up until the draft is complete, an effect instructs the person who drafted it to turn it face down, or the card leaves that player’s drafted cards pile. While the card is face up, all players may look at it.
5468 5468
5469 905.3. A Conspiacy Daft game is a multiplaye game. The default multiplaye setup is the Fee-fo-All vaiant with the attack multiple playes option and without the limited ange of influence option. See ule 806, “Fee-fo-All Vaiant.” 5469 905.3. A Conspiracy Draft game is a multiplayer game. The default multiplayer setup is the Free-for-All variant with the attack multiple players option and without the limited range of influence option. See rule 806, “Free-for-All Variant.”
5470 5470
5471 905.4. At the stat of the game, befoe decks ae shuffled, each playe may put any numbe of conspiacy cads fom thei sideboad into the command zone. 5471 905.4. At the start of the game, before decks are shuffled, each player may put any number of conspiracy cards from their sideboard into the command zone.
5472 5472
5473 905.4a Conspiacy cads with hidden agenda ae put into the command zone face down. Any time a playe has pioity, they may tun a face-down conspiacy cad they contol face up. See ule 702.105, “Hidden Agenda.” 5473 905.4a Conspiracy cards with hidden agenda are put into the command zone face down. Any time a player has priority, they may turn a face-down conspiracy card they control face up. See rule 702.105, “Hidden Agenda.”
5474 5474
5475 905.5. The owne of a conspiacy cad is the playe who put it into the command zone at the stat of the game. The contolle of a conspiacy cad is its owne. 5475 905.5. The owner of a conspiracy card is the player who put it into the command zone at the start of the game. The controller of a conspiracy card is its owner.
5476 5476
5477 905.6. Once the stating playe has been detemined, each playe sets thei life total to 20 and daws a hand of seven cads. 5477 905.6. Once the starting player has been determined, each player sets their life total to 20 and draws a hand of seven cards.
5478 5478
5479 Glossay 5479 Glossary
5480 5480
5481 Abandon 5481 Abandon
5482 To tun a face-up ongoing scheme cad face down and put it on the bottom of its owne’s scheme deck. See ule 701.25, “Abandon.” 5482 To turn a face-up ongoing scheme card face down and put it on the bottom of its owner’s scheme deck. See rule 701.25, “Abandon.”
5483 5483
5484 Ability 5484 Ability
5485 1. Text on an object that explains what that object does o can do. 5485 1. Text on an object that explains what that object does or can do.
5486 2. An activated o tiggeed ability on the stack. This kind of ability is an object. 5486 2. An activated or triggered ability on the stack. This kind of ability is an object.
5487 See ule 113, “Abilities,” and section 6, “Spells, Abilities, and Effects.” 5487 See rule 113, “Abilities,” and section 6, “Spells, Abilities, and Effects.”
5488 5488
5489 Ability Wod 5489 Ability Word
5490 An italicized wod with no ules meaning that ties togethe abilities on diffeent cads that have simila functionality. See ule 207.2c. 5490 An italicized word with no rules meaning that ties together abilities on different cards that have similar functionality. See rule 207.2c.
5491 5491
5492 Absob 5492 Absorb
5493 A keywod ability that pevents damage. See ule 702.63, “Absob.” 5493 A keyword ability that prevents damage. See rule 702.63, “Absorb.”
5494 5494
5495 Activate 5495 Activate
5496 To put an activated ability onto the stack and pay its costs, so that it will eventually esolve and have its effect. See ule 602, “Activating Activated Abilities.” 5496 To put an activated ability onto the stack and pay its costs, so that it will eventually resolve and have its effect. See rule 602, “Activating Activated Abilities.”
5497 5497
5498 Activated Ability 5498 Activated Ability
5499 A kind of ability. Activated abilities ae witten as “[Cost]: [Effect.] [Activation instuctions (if any).]” See ule 113, “Abilities,” and ule 602, “Activating Activated Abilities.” 5499 A kind of ability. Activated abilities are written as “[Cost]: [Effect.] [Activation instructions (if any).]” See rule 113, “Abilities,” and rule 602, “Activating Activated Abilities.”
5500 5500
5501 Activation Cost 5501 Activation Cost
5502 Eveything that appeas befoe the colon in an activated ability’s text. It must be paid to activate the ability. See ule 118, “Costs,” and ule 602, “Activating Activated Abilities.” 5502 Everything that appears before the colon in an activated ability’s text. It must be paid to activate the ability. See rule 118, “Costs,” and rule 602, “Activating Activated Abilities.”
5503 5503
5504 Active Playe 5504 Active Player
5505 The playe whose tun it is. See ule 102.1. 5505 The player whose turn it is. See rule 102.1.
5506 5506
5507 Active Playe, Nonactive Playe Ode 5507 Active Player, Nonactive Player Order
5508 A system that detemines the ode by which playes make choices if multiple playes ae instucted to make choices at the same time. See ule 101.4. This ule is modified fo games using the shaed team tuns option; see ule 805.6. 5508 A system that determines the order by which players make choices if multiple players are instructed to make choices at the same time. See rule 101.4. This rule is modified for games using the shared team turns option; see rule 805.6.
5509 5509
5510 Active Team 5510 Active Team
5511 The team whose tun it is in a game using the shaed team tuns option. See ule 805.4a. 5511 The team whose turn it is in a game using the shared team turns option. See rule 805.4a.
5512 5512
5513 Adapt 5513 Adapt
5514 A keywod action that puts +1/+1 countes on a ceatue that doesn’t have any yet. See ule 701.42, “Adapt.” 5514 A keyword action that puts +1/+1 counters on a creature that doesn’t have any yet. See rule 701.42, “Adapt.”
5515 5515
5516 Additional Cost 5516 Additional Cost
5517 A cost a spell may have that its contolle may pay (o, in some cases, must pay) in addition to its mana cost to cast that spell. See ule 118, “Costs,” and ule 601, “Casting Spells.” 5517 A cost a spell may have that its controller may pay (or, in some cases, must pay) in addition to its mana cost to cast that spell. See rule 118, “Costs,” and rule 601, “Casting Spells.”
5518 5518
5519 Adventue Cad 5519 Adventurer Card
5520 Cads with a two-pat cad fame (one pat of which is inset on the left) on a single cad. See ule 715, “Adventue Cads.” 5520 Cards with a two-part card frame (one part of which is inset on the left) on a single card. See rule 715, “Adventurer Cards.”
5521 5521
5522 Affinity 5522 Affinity
5523 A keywod ability that educes how much mana you need to spend to cast a spell. See ule 702.40, “Affinity.” 5523 A keyword ability that reduces how much mana you need to spend to cast a spell. See rule 702.40, “Affinity.”
5524 5524
5525 Afflict 5525 Afflict
5526 A keywod ability that makes the defending playe lose life fo blocking. See ule 702.129, “Afflict.” 5526 A keyword ability that makes the defending player lose life for blocking. See rule 702.129, “Afflict.”
5527 5527
5528 Aftelife 5528 Afterlife
5529 A keywod ability that leaves behind Spiit ceatue tokens when cetain ceatues die. See ule 702.134, “Aftelife.” 5529 A keyword ability that leaves behind Spirit creature tokens when certain creatures die. See rule 702.134, “Afterlife.”
5530 5530
5531 Aftemath 5531 Aftermath
5532 A keywod ability that lets a playe cast one half of a split cad only fom thei gaveyad. See ule 702.126, “Aftemath.” 5532 A keyword ability that lets a player cast one half of a split card only from their graveyard. See rule 702.126, “Aftermath.”
5533 5533
5534 Altenating Teams Vaiant 5534 Alternating Teams Variant
5535 A multiplaye vaiant played among two o moe teams of equal size. See ule 811, “Altenating Teams Vaiant.” 5535 A multiplayer variant played among two or more teams of equal size. See rule 811, “Alternating Teams Variant.”
5536 5536
5537 Altenative Cost 5537 Alternative Cost
5538 A cost a spell may have that its contolle can pay athe than paying its mana cost. See ule 118, “Costs,” and ule 601, “Casting Spells.” 5538 A cost a spell may have that its controller can pay rather than paying its mana cost. See rule 118, “Costs,” and rule 601, “Casting Spells.”
5539 5539
5540 Amass 5540 Amass
5541 A keywod action than gives you a Zombie Amy ceatue token o gows an Amy you aleady have. See ule 701.43, “Amass.” 5541 A keyword action than gives you a Zombie Army creature token or grows an Army you already have. See rule 701.43, “Amass.”
5542 5542
5543 Amplify 5543 Amplify
5544 A keywod ability than can have a ceatue ente the battlefield with +1/+1 countes on it. See ule 702.37, “Amplify.” 5544 A keyword ability than can have a creature enter the battlefield with +1/+1 counters on it. See rule 702.37, “Amplify.”
5545 5545
5546 Ancho Wod 5546 Anchor Word
5547 A wod that pecedes one of two abilities a pemanent may ente the battlefield with. See ule 614.12b. 5547 A word that precedes one of two abilities a permanent may enter the battlefield with. See rule 614.12b.
5548 5548
5549 Annihilato 5549 Annihilator
5550 A keywod ability that can make a ceatue paticulaly butal when it attacks. See ule 702.85, “Annihilato.” 5550 A keyword ability that can make a creature particularly brutal when it attacks. See rule 702.85, “Annihilator.”
5551 5551
5552 Ante 5552 Ante
5553 1. A zone used only when playing “fo keeps.” 5553 1. A zone used only when playing “for keeps.”
5554 2. To put a cad into the ante zone. 5554 2. To put a card into the ante zone.
5555 See ule 407, “Ante.” 5555 See rule 407, “Ante.”
5556 5556
5557 Any Taget 5557 Any Target
5558 A spell o ability may equie “any taget.” “Any taget” is the same as “taget ceatue, playe, o planeswalke.” See ule 115.4. 5558 A spell or ability may require “any target.” “Any target” is the same as “target creature, player, or planeswalker.” See rule 115.4.
5559 5559
5560 APNAP Ode 5560 APNAP Order
5561 See Active Playe, Nonactive Playe Ode. 5561 See Active Player, Nonactive Player Order.
5562 5562
5563 Achenemy 5563 Archenemy
5564 1. A casual vaiant in which a team of playes faces off against a single opponent stengthened with poweful scheme cads. See ule 904, “Achenemy.” 5564 1. A casual variant in which a team of players faces off against a single opponent strengthened with powerful scheme cards. See rule 904, “Archenemy.”
5565 2. A playe in an Achenemy game who is playing with a scheme deck. 5565 2. A player in an Archenemy game who is playing with a scheme deck.
5566 5566
5567 Atifact 5567 Artifact
5568 A cad type. An atifact is a pemanent. See ule 301, “Atifacts.” 5568 A card type. An artifact is a permanent. See rule 301, “Artifacts.”
5569 5569
5570 Atifact Ceatue 5570 Artifact Creature
5571 A combination of atifact and ceatue that’s subject to the ules fo both. See ule 301, “Atifacts,” and ule 302, “Ceatues.” 5571 A combination of artifact and creature that’s subject to the rules for both. See rule 301, “Artifacts,” and rule 302, “Creatures.”
5572 5572
5573 Atifact Land 5573 Artifact Land
5574 A combination of atifact and land that’s subject to the ules fo both. Atifact lands can only be played as lands, not cast as spells. See ule 301, “Atifacts,” and ule 305, “Lands.” 5574 A combination of artifact and land that’s subject to the rules for both. Artifact lands can only be played as lands, not cast as spells. See rule 301, “Artifacts,” and rule 305, “Lands.”
5575 5575
5576 Atifact Type 5576 Artifact Type
5577 A subtype that’s coelated to the atifact cad type. See ule 301, “Atifacts.” See ule 205.3g fo the list of atifact types. 5577 A subtype that’s correlated to the artifact card type. See rule 301, “Artifacts.” See rule 205.3g for the list of artifact types.
5578 5578
5579 As Though 5579 As Though
5580 Text used to indicate that the game, fo some specific pupose, teats a condition as tue even though it’s not. See ule 609.4. 5580 Text used to indicate that the game, for some specific purpose, treats a condition as true even though it’s not. See rule 609.4.
5581 5581
5582 Ascend 5582 Ascend
5583 A keywod causing a playe to get the designation of the city’s blessing once they contol ten pemanents. See ule 702.130, “Ascend.” 5583 A keyword causing a player to get the designation of the city’s blessing once they control ten permanents. See rule 702.130, “Ascend.”
5584 5584
5585 Assemble 5585 Assemble
5586 Assemble is a keywod action in the Unstable set that puts Contaptions onto the battlefield. Cads and mechanics fom the Unstable set aen’t included in these ules. 5586 Assemble is a keyword action in the Unstable set that puts Contraptions onto the battlefield. Cards and mechanics from the Unstable set aren’t included in these rules.
5587 5587
5588 Assign Combat Damage 5588 Assign Combat Damage
5589 To detemine how an attacking o blocking ceatue will deal its combat damage. See ule 510, “Combat Damage Step.” 5589 To determine how an attacking or blocking creature will deal its combat damage. See rule 510, “Combat Damage Step.”
5590 5590
5591 Assist 5591 Assist
5592 A keywod ability that lets anothe playe help you pay fo a spell. See ule 702.131, “Assist.” 5592 A keyword ability that lets another player help you pay for a spell. See rule 702.131, “Assist.”
5593 5593
5594 At End of Tun (Obsolete) 5594 At End of Turn (Obsolete)
5595 A tigge condition pinted on abilities that tiggeed at the beginning of the end step (which is not the last thing to happen in the tun). Cads that wee pinted with that text have eceived eata in the Oacle cad efeence to say “at the beginning of the end step” o “at the beginning of the next end step.” See ule 513, “End Step.” 5595 A trigger condition printed on abilities that triggered at the beginning of the end step (which is not the last thing to happen in the turn). Cards that were printed with that text have received errata in the Oracle card reference to say “at the beginning of the end step” or “at the beginning of the next end step.” See rule 513, “End Step.”
5596 5596
5597 Attach 5597 Attach
5598 To move an Aua, Equipment, o Fotification onto anothe object o playe. See ule 701.3, “Attach.” 5598 To move an Aura, Equipment, or Fortification onto another object or player. See rule 701.3, “Attach.”
5599 5599
5600 Attack 5600 Attack
5601 To send a ceatue into combat offensively. A ceatue can attack a playe o a planeswalke. See ule 508, “Declae Attackes Step.” 5601 To send a creature into combat offensively. A creature can attack a player or a planeswalker. See rule 508, “Declare Attackers Step.”
5602 5602
5603 Attack Alone 5603 Attack Alone
5604 A ceatue “attacks alone” if it’s the only ceatue declaed as an attacke duing the declae attackes step. A ceatue “is attacking alone” if it’s attacking but no othe ceatues ae. See ule 506.5. 5604 A creature “attacks alone” if it’s the only creature declared as an attacker during the declare attackers step. A creature “is attacking alone” if it’s attacking but no other creatures are. See rule 506.5.
5605 5605
5606 Attack Left Option 5606 Attack Left Option
5607 An option that may be used in cetain multiplaye vaiants. See ule 803, “Attack Left and Attack Right Options.” 5607 An option that may be used in certain multiplayer variants. See rule 803, “Attack Left and Attack Right Options.”
5608 5608
5609 Attack Multiple Playes Option 5609 Attack Multiple Players Option
5610 An option that may be used in cetain multiplaye vaiants. See ule 802, “Attack Multiple Playes Option.” 5610 An option that may be used in certain multiplayer variants. See rule 802, “Attack Multiple Players Option.”
5611 5611
5612 Attack Right Option 5612 Attack Right Option
5613 An option that may be used in cetain multiplaye vaiants. See ule 803, “Attack Left and Attack Right Options.” 5613 An option that may be used in certain multiplayer variants. See rule 803, “Attack Left and Attack Right Options.”
5614 5614
5615 Attacking Ceatue 5615 Attacking Creature
5616 A ceatue that has eithe been declaed as pat of a legal attack duing the combat phase (once all costs to attack, if any, have been paid), o a ceatue that has been put onto the battlefield attacking. It emains an attacking ceatue until it’s emoved fom combat o the combat phase ends, whicheve comes fist. See ule 508, “Declae Attackes Step.” 5616 A creature that has either been declared as part of a legal attack during the combat phase (once all costs to attack, if any, have been paid), or a creature that has been put onto the battlefield attacking. It remains an attacking creature until it’s removed from combat or the combat phase ends, whichever comes first. See rule 508, “Declare Attackers Step.”
5617 5617
5618 Attacking Team 5618 Attacking Team
5619 The team who can attack duing the combat phase of a multiplaye game using the shaed team tuns option. See ule 805, “Shaed Team Tuns Option.” 5619 The team who can attack during the combat phase of a multiplayer game using the shared team turns option. See rule 805, “Shared Team Turns Option.”
5620 5620
5621 Attacks and Isn’t Blocked 5621 Attacks and Isn’t Blocked
5622 An ability that tigges when a ceatue “attacks and isn’t blocked” tigges when the ceatue becomes an unblocked attacking ceatue. See ule 509.1h. 5622 An ability that triggers when a creature “attacks and isn’t blocked” triggers when the creature becomes an unblocked attacking creature. See rule 509.1h.
5623 5623
5624 Aua 5624 Aura
5625 An enchantment subtype. Aua spells taget objects o playes, and Aua pemanents ae attached to objects o playes. See ule 303, “Enchantments,” and ule 702.5, “Enchant.” 5625 An enchantment subtype. Aura spells target objects or players, and Aura permanents are attached to objects or players. See rule 303, “Enchantments,” and rule 702.5, “Enchant.”
5626 5626
5627 Aua Swap 5627 Aura Swap
5628 A keywod ability that lets you exchange an Aua on the battlefield with one in you hand. See ule 702.64, “Aua Swap.” 5628 A keyword ability that lets you exchange an Aura on the battlefield with one in your hand. See rule 702.64, “Aura Swap.”
5629 5629
5630 Awaken 5630 Awaken
5631 A keywod ability that lets you tun a land you contol into a ceatue. See ule 702.112, “Awaken.” 5631 A keyword ability that lets you turn a land you control into a creature. See rule 702.112, “Awaken.”
5632 5632
5633 Banding, “Bands with Othe” 5633 Banding, “Bands with Other”
5634 Banding is a keywod ability that modifies the ules fo declaing attackes and assigning combat damage. “Bands with othe” is a specialized vesion of the ability. See ule 702.21, “Banding.” 5634 Banding is a keyword ability that modifies the rules for declaring attackers and assigning combat damage. “Bands with other” is a specialized version of the ability. See rule 702.21, “Banding.”
5635 5635
5636 Base Powe, Base Toughness 5636 Base Power, Base Toughness
5637 Effects that change the base powe and/o base toughness of a ceatue set one o both of those values to a specific numbe. See ule 613, “Inteaction of Continuous Effects.” 5637 Effects that change the base power and/or base toughness of a creature set one or both of those values to a specific number. See rule 613, “Interaction of Continuous Effects.”
5638 5638
5639 Basic 5639 Basic
5640 A supetype that’s nomally elevant on lands. Any land with this supetype is a basic land. See ule 205.4, “Supetypes.” 5640 A supertype that’s normally relevant on lands. Any land with this supertype is a basic land. See rule 205.4, “Supertypes.”
5641 5641
5642 Basic Landcycling 5642 Basic Landcycling
5643 See Typecycling. 5643 See Typecycling.
5644 5644
5645 Basic Land Type 5645 Basic Land Type
5646 Thee ae five “basic land types”: Plains, Island, Swamp, Mountain, and Foest. Each one has a mana ability associated with it. See ule 305, “Lands.” 5646 There are five “basic land types”: Plains, Island, Swamp, Mountain, and Forest. Each one has a mana ability associated with it. See rule 305, “Lands.”
5647 5647
5648 Battle Cy 5648 Battle Cry
5649 A keywod ability that makes othe attacking ceatues bette in combat. See ule 702.90, “Battle Cy.” 5649 A keyword ability that makes other attacking creatures better in combat. See rule 702.90, “Battle Cry.”
5650 5650
5651 Battlefield 5651 Battlefield
5652 A zone. The battlefield is the zone in which pemanents exist. It used to be known as the “in-play” zone. See ule 403, “Battlefield.” 5652 A zone. The battlefield is the zone in which permanents exist. It used to be known as the “in-play” zone. See rule 403, “Battlefield.”
5653 5653
5654 Becomes 5654 Becomes
5655 A wod used in some tigge events to indicate a change in status o chaacteistics. See ule 603.2d. 5655 A word used in some trigger events to indicate a change in status or characteristics. See rule 603.2d.
5656 5656
5657 Beginning of Combat Step 5657 Beginning of Combat Step
5658 Pat of the tun. This step is the fist step of the combat phase. See ule 507, “Beginning of Combat Step.” 5658 Part of the turn. This step is the first step of the combat phase. See rule 507, “Beginning of Combat Step.”
5659 5659
5660 Beginning Phase 5660 Beginning Phase
5661 Pat of the tun. This phase is the fist phase of the tun. See ule 501, “Beginning Phase.” 5661 Part of the turn. This phase is the first phase of the turn. See rule 501, “Beginning Phase.”
5662 5662
5663 Bestow 5663 Bestow
5664 A keywod ability that lets a ceatue cad be cast as an Aua. See ule 702.102, “Bestow.” 5664 A keyword ability that lets a creature card be cast as an Aura. See rule 702.102, “Bestow.”
5665 5665
5666 Block 5666 Block
5667 To send a ceatue into combat defensively. A ceatue can block an attacking ceatue. See ule 509, “Declae Blockes Step.” 5667 To send a creature into combat defensively. A creature can block an attacking creature. See rule 509, “Declare Blockers Step.”
5668 5668
5669 Block Alone 5669 Block Alone
5670 A ceatue “blocks alone” if it’s the only ceatue declaed as a blocke duing the declae blockes step. A ceatue “is blocking alone” if it’s blocking but no othe ceatues ae. See ule 506.5. 5670 A creature “blocks alone” if it’s the only creature declared as a blocker during the declare blockers step. A creature “is blocking alone” if it’s blocking but no other creatures are. See rule 506.5.
5671 5671
5672 Blocked Ceatue 5672 Blocked Creature
5673 An attacking ceatue that anothe ceatue blocks o that an effect causes to become blocked. It emains a blocked ceatue until it’s emoved fom combat, an effect says that it becomes unblocked, o the combat phase ends, whicheve comes fist. See ule 509, “Declae Blockes Step.” 5673 An attacking creature that another creature blocks or that an effect causes to become blocked. It remains a blocked creature until it’s removed from combat, an effect says that it becomes unblocked, or the combat phase ends, whichever comes first. See rule 509, “Declare Blockers Step.”
5674 5674
5675 Blocking Ceatue 5675 Blocking Creature
5676 A ceatue that has eithe been declaed as pat of a legal block duing the combat phase (once all costs to block, if any, have been paid), o a ceatue that has been put onto the battlefield blocking. It emains a blocking ceatue until it’s emoved fom combat o the combat phase ends, whicheve comes fist. See ule 509, “Declae Blockes Step.” 5676 A creature that has either been declared as part of a legal block during the combat phase (once all costs to block, if any, have been paid), or a creature that has been put onto the battlefield blocking. It remains a blocking creature until it’s removed from combat or the combat phase ends, whichever comes first. See rule 509, “Declare Blockers Step.”
5677 5677
5678 Bloodthist 5678 Bloodthirst
5679 A keywod ability that can have a ceatue ente the battlefield with +1/+1 countes on it. See ule 702.53, “Bloodthist.” 5679 A keyword ability that can have a creature enter the battlefield with +1/+1 counters on it. See rule 702.53, “Bloodthirst.”
5680 5680
5681 Bolste 5681 Bolster
5682 A keywod action that puts +1/+1 countes on the weakest ceatue a playe contols. See ule 701.32, “Bolste.” 5682 A keyword action that puts +1/+1 counters on the weakest creature a player controls. See rule 701.32, “Bolster.”
5683 5683
5684 Booste Pack 5684 Booster Pack
5685 A goup of unopened Magic cads fom a paticula expansion. Booste packs ae used in Limited fomats. See ule 100.2b. 5685 A group of unopened Magic cards from a particular expansion. Booster packs are used in Limited formats. See rule 100.2b.
5686 5686
5687 Bawl 5687 Brawl
5688 An option fo the Commande casual vaiant. See ule 903.11, “Bawl Option.” 5688 An option for the Commander casual variant. See rule 903.11, “Brawl Option.”
5689 5689
5690 Buy (Obsolete) 5690 Bury (Obsolete)
5691 A tem that meant “put [a pemanent] into its owne’s gaveyad.” In geneal, cads that wee pinted with the tem “buy” have eceived eata in the Oacle cad efeence to ead, “Destoy [a pemanent]. It can’t be egeneated,” o “Sacifice [a pemanent].” 5691 A term that meant “put [a permanent] into its owner’s graveyard.” In general, cards that were printed with the term “bury” have received errata in the Oracle card reference to read, “Destroy [a permanent]. It can’t be regenerated,” or “Sacrifice [a permanent].”
5692 5692
5693 Bushido 5693 Bushido
5694 A keywod ability that can make a ceatue bette in combat. See ule 702.44, “Bushido.” 5694 A keyword ability that can make a creature better in combat. See rule 702.44, “Bushido.”
5695 5695
5696 Buyback 5696 Buyback
5697 A keywod ability of instants and soceies that can let the spell etun to its owne’s hand as it esolves. See ule 702.26, “Buyback.” 5697 A keyword ability of instants and sorceries that can let the spell return to its owner’s hand as it resolves. See rule 702.26, “Buyback.”
5698 5698
5699 Cad 5699 Card
5700 The standad component of the game. Magic cads may be taditional o nontaditional. Tokens aen’t consideed cads. In the text of spells o abilities, the tem “cad” is used only to efe to a cad that’s not on the battlefield o on the stack, such as a ceatue cad in a playe’s hand. See ule 108, “Cads.” 5700 The standard component of the game. Magic cards may be traditional or nontraditional. Tokens aren’t considered cards. In the text of spells or abilities, the term “card” is used only to refer to a card that’s not on the battlefield or on the stack, such as a creature card in a player’s hand. See rule 108, “Cards.”
5701 5701
5702 Cad Pool 5702 Card Pool
5703 In a Limited fomat, the cads a playe may use, in addition to basic land cads, to build thei deck. 5703 In a Limited format, the cards a player may use, in addition to basic land cards, to build their deck.
5704 5704
5705 Cad Type 5705 Card Type
5706 A chaacteistic. Except fo abilities on the stack, each object has a cad type, even if that object isn’t a cad. Each cad type has its own ules. See ule 205, “Type Line,” and section 3, “Cad Types.” 5706 A characteristic. Except for abilities on the stack, each object has a card type, even if that object isn’t a card. Each card type has its own rules. See rule 205, “Type Line,” and section 3, “Card Types.”
5707 5707
5708 Cascade 5708 Cascade
5709 A keywod ability that may let a playe cast a andom exta spell fo no cost. See ule 702.84, “Cascade.” 5709 A keyword ability that may let a player cast a random extra spell for no cost. See rule 702.84, “Cascade.”
5710 5710
5711 Cast 5711 Cast
5712 To take a cad fom whee it is (usually the hand), put it on the stack, and pay its costs, so that it will eventually esolve and have its effect. See ule 601, “Casting Spells.” 5712 To take a card from where it is (usually the hand), put it on the stack, and pay its costs, so that it will eventually resolve and have its effect. See rule 601, “Casting Spells.”
5713 5713
5714 Caste (Obsolete) 5714 Caster (Obsolete)
5715 An obsolete tem that efeed to the playe who cast a spell. In geneal, cads that wee pinted with the tem “caste” have eceived eata in the Oacle cad efeence to say “contolle.” 5715 An obsolete term that referred to the player who cast a spell. In general, cards that were printed with the term “caster” have received errata in the Oracle card reference to say “controller.”
5716 5716
5717 Casting Cost (Obsolete) 5717 Casting Cost (Obsolete)
5718 An obsolete tem fo mana cost. Cads pinted with this text have eceived eata in the Oacle cad efeence. 5718 An obsolete term for mana cost. Cards printed with this text have received errata in the Oracle card reference.
5719 5719
5720 Champion, Championed 5720 Champion, Championed
5721 “Champion” is a keywod ability that lets one ceatue tempoaily eplace anothe. A pemanent is “championed” by anothe pemanent if the latte exiles the fome as the diect esult of a champion ability. See ule 702.71, “Champion.” 5721 “Champion” is a keyword ability that lets one creature temporarily replace another. A permanent is “championed” by another permanent if the latter exiles the former as the direct result of a champion ability. See rule 702.71, “Champion.”
5722 5722
5723 Change a Taget 5723 Change a Target
5724 To choose a new, legal taget fo a spell o ability. See ule 115.7. 5724 To choose a new, legal target for a spell or ability. See rule 115.7.
5725 5725
5726 Changeling 5726 Changeling
5727 A chaacteistic-defining ability that gants the object it’s on evey ceatue type. See ule 702.72, “Changeling.” 5727 A characteristic-defining ability that grants the object it’s on every creature type. See rule 702.72, “Changeling.”
5728 5728
5729 Chaos Ability 5729 Chaos Ability
5730 An ability of a plane cad that tigges “Wheneve you oll {CHAOS}” on the plana die in the Planechase casual vaiant. See ule 309.7. 5730 An ability of a plane card that triggers “Whenever you roll {CHAOS}” on the planar die in the Planechase casual variant. See rule 309.7.
5731 5731
5732 Chaos Symbol 5732 Chaos Symbol
5733 The chaos symbol {CHAOS} appeas on the plana die and in some tiggeed abilities of plane cads in the Planechase casual vaiant. See ule 107.12. 5733 The chaos symbol {CHAOS} appears on the planar die and in some triggered abilities of plane cards in the Planechase casual variant. See rule 107.12.
5734 5734
5735 Chaacteistics 5735 Characteristics
5736 Infomation that defines an object. See ule 109.3. 5736 Information that defines an object. See rule 109.3.
5737 5737
5738 Chaacteistic-Defining Ability 5738 Characteristic-Defining Ability
5739 A kind of static ability that conveys infomation about an object’s chaacteistics that would nomally be found elsewhee on that object (such as in its mana cost, type line, o powe/toughness box). See ule 604.3. 5739 A kind of static ability that conveys information about an object’s characteristics that would normally be found elsewhere on that object (such as in its mana cost, type line, or power/toughness box). See rule 604.3.
5740 5740
5741 Checklist Cad 5741 Checklist Card
5742 A game supplement with a Magic cad back that can be used to epesent a double-faced cad o meld cad. See ule 713, “Checklist Cads.” 5742 A game supplement with a Magic card back that can be used to represent a double-faced card or meld card. See rule 713, “Checklist Cards.”
5743 5743
5744 Ciphe 5744 Cipher
5745 A keywod ability that allows you to encode a cad on a ceatue and cast that cad wheneve that ceatue deals combat damage to a playe. See ule 702.98, “Ciphe.” 5745 A keyword ability that allows you to encode a card on a creature and cast that card whenever that creature deals combat damage to a player. See rule 702.98, “Cipher.”
5746 5746
5747 City’s Blessing 5747 City’s Blessing
5748 A designation a playe can have. The ascend keywod causes a playe to get this designation once they contol ten pemanents. See ule 702.130, “Ascend.” 5748 A designation a player can have. The ascend keyword causes a player to get this designation once they control ten permanents. See rule 702.130, “Ascend.”
5749 5749
5750 Clash 5750 Clash
5751 To have a mini-contest involving the top cads of playes’ libaies. See ule 701.22, “Clash.” 5751 To have a mini-contest involving the top cards of players’ libraries. See rule 701.22, “Clash.”
5752 5752
5753 Cleanup Step 5753 Cleanup Step
5754 Pat of the tun. This step is the second and final step of the ending phase. See ule 514, “Cleanup Step.” 5754 Part of the turn. This step is the second and final step of the ending phase. See rule 514, “Cleanup Step.”
5755 5755
5756 Collecto Numbe 5756 Collector Number
5757 A numbe pinted on most cads that has no effect on game play. See ule 212, “Infomation Below the Text Box.” 5757 A number printed on most cards that has no effect on game play. See rule 212, “Information Below the Text Box.”
5758 5758
5759 Colo 5759 Color
5760 1. A chaacteistic of an object. See ule 105, “Colos,” and ule 202, “Mana Cost and Colo.” 5760 1. A characteristic of an object. See rule 105, “Colors,” and rule 202, “Mana Cost and Color.”
5761 2. An attibute mana may have. See ule 106, “Mana.” 5761 2. An attribute mana may have. See rule 106, “Mana.”
5762 5762
5763 Cololess 5763 Colorless
5764 1. An object with no colo is cololess. Cololess is not a colo. See ule 105, “Colos,” and ule 202, “Mana Cost and Colo.” 5764 1. An object with no color is colorless. Colorless is not a color. See rule 105, “Colors,” and rule 202, “Mana Cost and Color.”
5765 2. A type of mana. See ule 106, “Mana,” and ule 107.4c. 5765 2. A type of mana. See rule 106, “Mana,” and rule 107.4c.
5766 5766
5767 Colo Identity 5767 Color Identity
5768 A set of colos that detemines what cads may be included in a deck fo the Commande casual vaiant. See ule 903.4. 5768 A set of colors that determines what cards may be included in a deck for the Commander casual variant. See rule 903.4.
5769 5769
5770 Colo Indicato 5770 Color Indicator
5771 A chaacteistic of an object. See ule 105, “Colos,” and ule 204, “Colo Indicato.” 5771 A characteristic of an object. See rule 105, “Colors,” and rule 204, “Color Indicator.”
5772 5772
5773 Combat Damage 5773 Combat Damage
5774 Damage dealt duing the combat damage step by attacking ceatues and blocking ceatues as a consequence of combat. See ule 510, “Combat Damage Step.” 5774 Damage dealt during the combat damage step by attacking creatures and blocking creatures as a consequence of combat. See rule 510, “Combat Damage Step.”
5775 5775
5776 Combat Damage Step 5776 Combat Damage Step
5777 Pat of the tun. This step is the fouth step of the combat phase. See ule 510, “Combat Damage Step.” 5777 Part of the turn. This step is the fourth step of the combat phase. See rule 510, “Combat Damage Step.”
5778 5778
5779 Combat Phase 5779 Combat Phase
5780 Pat of the tun. This phase is the thid phase of the tun. See ule 506, “Combat Phase.” 5780 Part of the turn. This phase is the third phase of the turn. See rule 506, “Combat Phase.”
5781 5781
5782 Command 5782 Command
5783 A zone fo cetain specialized objects that have an oveaching effect on the game, yet ae not pemanents and cannot be destoyed. See ule 408, “Command.” 5783 A zone for certain specialized objects that have an overarching effect on the game, yet are not permanents and cannot be destroyed. See rule 408, “Command.”
5784 5784
5785 Commande 5785 Commander
5786 1. A casual vaiant in which each deck is led by a legenday ceatue. See ule 903, “Commande.” 5786 1. A casual variant in which each deck is led by a legendary creature. See rule 903, “Commander.”
5787 2. A designation given to one legenday ceatue cad in each playe’s deck in the Commande casual vaiant. 5787 2. A designation given to one legendary creature card in each player’s deck in the Commander casual variant.
5788 5788
5789 Commande Ninjutsu 5789 Commander Ninjutsu
5790 A vaiant of the ninjutsu ability. See ule 702.48, “Ninjutsu.” 5790 A variant of the ninjutsu ability. See rule 702.48, “Ninjutsu.”
5791 5791
5792 Commande Tax 5792 Commander Tax
5793 Infomal tem fo the additional cost to cast a commande based on the numbe of times a playe has cast it peviously this game. See ule 903.8. 5793 Informal term for the additional cost to cast a commander based on the number of times a player has cast it previously this game. See rule 903.8.
5794 5794
5795 Concede 5795 Concede
5796 To quit the game. Conceding a game immediately causes that playe to leave that game and lose that game. See ule 104, “Ending the Game.” 5796 To quit the game. Conceding a game immediately causes that player to leave that game and lose that game. See rule 104, “Ending the Game.”
5797 5797
5798 Conspiacy 5798 Conspiracy
5799 A cad type used in Limited fomats such as Conspiacy Daft. A conspiacy cad is not a pemanent. See ule 313, “Conspiacies.” 5799 A card type used in Limited formats such as Conspiracy Draft. A conspiracy card is not a permanent. See rule 313, “Conspiracies.”
5800 5800
5801 Conspiacy Daft 5801 Conspiracy Draft
5802 A casual vaiant in which playes paticipate in a booste daft and then play multiplaye games. See ule 905, “Conspiacy Daft.” 5802 A casual variant in which players participate in a booster draft and then play multiplayer games. See rule 905, “Conspiracy Draft.”
5803 5803
5804 Conspie 5804 Conspire
5805 A keywod ability that ceates a copy of a spell. See ule 702.77, “Conspie.” 5805 A keyword ability that creates a copy of a spell. See rule 702.77, “Conspire.”
5806 5806
5807 Constucted 5807 Constructed
5808 A way of playing in which each playe ceates thei own deck ahead of time. See ule 100.2a. 5808 A way of playing in which each player creates their own deck ahead of time. See rule 100.2a.
5809 5809
5810 Continuous Effect 5810 Continuous Effect
5811 An effect that modifies chaacteistics of objects, modifies contol of objects, o affects playes o the ules of the game, fo a fixed o indefinite peiod. See ule 611, “Continuous Effects.” 5811 An effect that modifies characteristics of objects, modifies control of objects, or affects players or the rules of the game, for a fixed or indefinite period. See rule 611, “Continuous Effects.”
5812 5812
5813 Continuous Atifact (Obsolete) 5813 Continuous Artifact (Obsolete)
5814 An obsolete tem that appeaed on the type line of atifacts without activated abilities. Cads pinted with this text have eceived eata in the Oacle cad efeence to simply say “Atifact.” 5814 An obsolete term that appeared on the type line of artifacts without activated abilities. Cards printed with this text have received errata in the Oracle card reference to simply say “Artifact.”
5815 5815
5816 Contol, Contolle 5816 Control, Controller
5817 “Contol” is the system that detemines who gets to use an object in the game. An object’s “contolle” is the playe who cuently contols it. See ule 108.4. 5817 “Control” is the system that determines who gets to use an object in the game. An object’s “controller” is the player who currently controls it. See rule 108.4.
5818 5818
5819 Contol Anothe Playe 5819 Control Another Player
5820 To make all choices and decisions that playe is allowed to make, o is told to make, by ules o by any objects. See ule 716, “Contolling Anothe Playe.” 5820 To make all choices and decisions that player is allowed to make, or is told to make, by rules or by any objects. See rule 716, “Controlling Another Player.”
5821 5821
5822 Conveted Mana Cost 5822 Converted Mana Cost
5823 The total amount of mana in a mana cost, egadless of colo. See ule 202.3. 5823 The total amount of mana in a mana cost, regardless of color. See rule 202.3.
5824 5824
5825 Convoke 5825 Convoke
5826 A keywod ability that lets you tap ceatues athe than pay mana to cast a spell. See ule 702.50, “Convoke.” 5826 A keyword ability that lets you tap creatures rather than pay mana to cast a spell. See rule 702.50, “Convoke.”
5827 5827
5828 Copiable Values 5828 Copiable Values
5829 Values of an object’s chaacteistics that ae checked by copy effects. See ules 706.2 and 706.3. 5829 Values of an object’s characteristics that are checked by copy effects. See rules 706.2 and 706.3.
5830 5830
5831 Copy 5831 Copy
5832 1. To ceate a new object whose copiable values have been set to those of anothe object. 5832 1. To create a new object whose copiable values have been set to those of another object.
5833 2. An object whose copiable values have been set to those of anothe object. 5833 2. An object whose copiable values have been set to those of another object.
5834 See ule 706, “Copying Objects.” 5834 See rule 706, “Copying Objects.”
5835 5835
5836 Cost 5836 Cost
5837 An action o payment necessay to take anothe action o to stop anothe action fom taking place. See ule 118, “Costs.” 5837 An action or payment necessary to take another action or to stop another action from taking place. See rule 118, “Costs.”
5838 5838
5839 Counte 5839 Counter
5840 1. To cancel a spell o ability so it doesn’t esolve and none of its effects occu. See ule 701.5, “Counte.” 5840 1. To cancel a spell or ability so it doesn’t resolve and none of its effects occur. See rule 701.5, “Counter.”
5841 2. A make placed on an object o playe that modifies its chaacteistics o inteacts with a ule o ability. See ule 122, “Countes.” 5841 2. A marker placed on an object or player that modifies its characteristics or interacts with a rule or ability. See rule 122, “Counters.”
5842 5842
5843 Counts As (Obsolete) 5843 Counts As (Obsolete)
5844 Some olde cads wee pinted with text stating that the cad “counts as” something. Cads pinted with this text have eceived eata in the Oacle cad efeence to state that the cad actually is that thing. 5844 Some older cards were printed with text stating that the card “counts as” something. Cards printed with this text have received errata in the Oracle card reference to state that the card actually is that thing.
5845 5845
5846 Ceate 5846 Create
5847 To ceate a token is to put a token onto the battlefield. See ule 701.6, “Ceate.” 5847 To create a token is to put a token onto the battlefield. See rule 701.6, “Create.”
5848 5848
5849 Ceatue 5849 Creature
5850 A cad type. A ceatue is a pemanent. See ule 302, “Ceatues.” 5850 A card type. A creature is a permanent. See rule 302, “Creatures.”
5851 5851
5852 Ceatue Type 5852 Creature Type
5853 A subtype that’s coelated to the ceatue cad type and the tibal cad type. See ule 302, “Ceatues,” and ule 308, “Tibals.” See ule 205.3m fo the list of ceatue types. 5853 A subtype that’s correlated to the creature card type and the tribal card type. See rule 302, “Creatures,” and rule 308, “Tribals.” See rule 205.3m for the list of creature types.
5854 5854
5855 Cew 5855 Crew
5856 A keywod ability that lets you tap ceatues to tun a Vehicle into an atifact ceatue. See ule 301, “Atifacts,” and ule 702.121, “Cew.” 5856 A keyword ability that lets you tap creatures to turn a Vehicle into an artifact creature. See rule 301, “Artifacts,” and rule 702.121, “Crew.”
5857 5857
5858 Cumulative Upkeep 5858 Cumulative Upkeep
5859 A keywod ability that imposes an inceasing cost to keep a pemanent on the battlefield. See ule 702.23, “Cumulative Upkeep.” 5859 A keyword ability that imposes an increasing cost to keep a permanent on the battlefield. See rule 702.23, “Cumulative Upkeep.”
5860 5860
5861 Cycling 5861 Cycling
5862 A keywod ability that lets a cad be discaded and eplaced with a new cad. See ule 702.28, “Cycling.” 5862 A keyword ability that lets a card be discarded and replaced with a new card. See rule 702.28, “Cycling.”
5863 5863
5864 Damage 5864 Damage
5865 Objects can deal “damage” to ceatues, planeswalkes, and playes. This is geneally detimental to the object o playe that eceives that damage. See ule 120, “Damage.” 5865 Objects can deal “damage” to creatures, planeswalkers, and players. This is generally detrimental to the object or player that receives that damage. See rule 120, “Damage.”
5866 5866
5867 Damage Assignment Ode 5867 Damage Assignment Order
5868 The ode, announced duing the declae blockes step, that an attacking ceatue will assign its combat damage among the multiple ceatues blocking it, o that a blocking ceatue will assign its combat damage among the multiple ceatues it’s blocking. See ules 509.2 and 509.3. 5868 The order, announced during the declare blockers step, that an attacking creature will assign its combat damage among the multiple creatures blocking it, or that a blocking creature will assign its combat damage among the multiple creatures it’s blocking. See rules 509.2 and 509.3.
5869 5869
5870 Dash 5870 Dash
5871 A keywod ability that allows ceatues to be especially aggessive. See ule 702.108, “Dash.” 5871 A keyword ability that allows creatures to be especially aggressive. See rule 702.108, “Dash.”
5872 5872
5873 Deal 5873 Deal
5874 See Damage. 5874 See Damage.
5875 5875
5876 Deathtouch 5876 Deathtouch
5877 A keywod ability that causes damage dealt by an object to be especially effective. See ule 702.2, “Deathtouch.” 5877 A keyword ability that causes damage dealt by an object to be especially effective. See rule 702.2, “Deathtouch.”
5878 5878
5879 Deck 5879 Deck
5880 The collection of cads a playe stats the game with; it becomes that playe’s libay. See ule 100, “Geneal,” and ule 103, “Stating the Game.” 5880 The collection of cards a player starts the game with; it becomes that player’s library. See rule 100, “General,” and rule 103, “Starting the Game.”
5881 5881
5882 Declae Attackes 5882 Declare Attackers
5883 To choose a set of ceatues that will attack, declae whethe each ceatue is attacking the defending playe o a planeswalke that playe contols, and pay any costs equied to allow those ceatues to attack. See ule 508.1. 5883 To choose a set of creatures that will attack, declare whether each creature is attacking the defending player or a planeswalker that player controls, and pay any costs required to allow those creatures to attack. See rule 508.1.
5884 5884
5885 Declae Attackes Step 5885 Declare Attackers Step
5886 Pat of the tun. This step is the second step of the combat phase. See ule 508, “Declae Attackes Step.” 5886 Part of the turn. This step is the second step of the combat phase. See rule 508, “Declare Attackers Step.”
5887 5887
5888 Declae Blockes 5888 Declare Blockers
5889 To choose a set of ceatues that will block, declae which attacking ceatue each ceatue is blocking, and pay any costs equied to allow those ceatues to block. See ule 509.1. 5889 To choose a set of creatures that will block, declare which attacking creature each creature is blocking, and pay any costs required to allow those creatures to block. See rule 509.1.
5890 5890
5891 Declae Blockes Step 5891 Declare Blockers Step
5892 Pat of the tun. This step is the thid step of the combat phase. See ule 509, “Declae Blockes Step.” 5892 Part of the turn. This step is the third step of the combat phase. See rule 509, “Declare Blockers Step.”
5893 5893
5894 Defende 5894 Defender
5895 A keywod ability that pohibits a ceatue fom attacking. See ule 702.3, “Defende.” 5895 A keyword ability that prohibits a creature from attacking. See rule 702.3, “Defender.”
5896 5896
5897 Defending Playe 5897 Defending Player
5898 The playe who can be attacked, and whose planeswalkes can be attacked, duing the combat phase. See ule 506.2. In cetain multiplaye games, thee may be moe than one defending playe; see ule 802, “Attack Multiple Playes Option,” and ule 805.10. 5898 The player who can be attacked, and whose planeswalkers can be attacked, during the combat phase. See rule 506.2. In certain multiplayer games, there may be more than one defending player; see rule 802, “Attack Multiple Players Option,” and rule 805.10.
5899 5899
5900 Defending Team 5900 Defending Team
5901 The team who can be attacked, and whose planeswalkes can be attacked, duing the combat phase of a multiplaye game using the shaed team tuns option. See ule 805, “Shaed Team Tuns Option.” 5901 The team who can be attacked, and whose planeswalkers can be attacked, during the combat phase of a multiplayer game using the shared team turns option. See rule 805, “Shared Team Turns Option.”
5902 5902
5903 Delayed Tiggeed Ability 5903 Delayed Triggered Ability
5904 An ability ceated by effects geneated when some spells o abilities esolve, o when some eplacement effects ae applied, that does something late on athe than at that time. See ule 603.7. 5904 An ability created by effects generated when some spells or abilities resolve, or when some replacement effects are applied, that does something later on rather than at that time. See rule 603.7.
5905 5905
5906 Delve 5906 Delve
5907 A keywod ability that lets you exile cads fom you gaveyad athe than pay geneic mana to cast a spell. See ule 702.65, “Delve.” 5907 A keyword ability that lets you exile cards from your graveyard rather than pay generic mana to cast a spell. See rule 702.65, “Delve.”
5908 5908
5909 Dependency 5909 Dependency
5910 A system that may be used to detemine in which ode continuous effects in the same laye o sublaye ae applied. See ule 613.7. See also Timestamp Ode. 5910 A system that may be used to determine in which order continuous effects in the same layer or sublayer are applied. See rule 613.7. See also Timestamp Order.
5911 5911
5912 Deploy Ceatues Option 5912 Deploy Creatures Option
5913 An option that may be used in cetain multiplaye vaiants to pass contol of ceatues between teammates. See ule 804, “Deploy Ceatues Option.” 5913 An option that may be used in certain multiplayer variants to pass control of creatures between teammates. See rule 804, “Deploy Creatures Option.”
5914 5914
5915 Destoy 5915 Destroy
5916 To move a pemanent fom the battlefield to its owne’s gaveyad. See ule 701.7, “Destoy.” 5916 To move a permanent from the battlefield to its owner’s graveyard. See rule 701.7, “Destroy.”
5917 5917
5918 Detain 5918 Detain
5919 A keywod action that tempoaily stops a pemanent fom attacking, blocking, o having its activated abilities activated. See ule 701.28, “Detain.” 5919 A keyword action that temporarily stops a permanent from attacking, blocking, or having its activated abilities activated. See rule 701.28, “Detain.”
5920 5920
5921 Dethone 5921 Dethrone
5922 A keywod ability that puts a +1/+1 counte on a ceatue when it attacks the playe with the most life. See ule 702.104, “Dethone.” 5922 A keyword ability that puts a +1/+1 counter on a creature when it attacks the player with the most life. See rule 702.104, “Dethrone.”
5923 5923
5924 Devoid 5924 Devoid
5925 A chaacteistic-defining ability that makes an object cololess. See ule 702.113, “Devoid.” 5925 A characteristic-defining ability that makes an object colorless. See rule 702.113, “Devoid.”
5926 5926
5927 Devotion 5927 Devotion
5928 A numeical value a playe has, equal to the numbe of mana symbols of a cetain colo among the mana costs of pemanents that playe contols. See ule 700.5. 5928 A numerical value a player has, equal to the number of mana symbols of a certain color among the mana costs of permanents that player controls. See rule 700.5.
5929 5929
5930 Devou 5930 Devour
5931 A keywod ability that can have a ceatue ente the battlefield with +1/+1 countes on it. See ule 702.81, “Devou.” 5931 A keyword ability that can have a creature enter the battlefield with +1/+1 counters on it. See rule 702.81, “Devour.”
5932 5932
5933 Dies 5933 Dies
5934 A ceatue o planeswalke “dies” if it is put into a gaveyad fom the battlefield. See ule 700.4. 5934 A creature or planeswalker “dies” if it is put into a graveyard from the battlefield. See rule 700.4.
5935 5935
5936 Discad 5936 Discard
5937 To move a cad fom its owne’s hand to that playe’s gaveyad. See ule 701.8, “Discad.” 5937 To move a card from its owner’s hand to that player’s graveyard. See rule 701.8, “Discard.”
5938 5938
5939 Double Agenda 5939 Double Agenda
5940 A vaiant of the hidden agenda ability. See ule 702.105, “Hidden Agenda.” 5940 A variant of the hidden agenda ability. See rule 702.105, “Hidden Agenda.”
5941 5941
5942 Double Stike 5942 Double Strike
5943 A keywod ability that lets a ceatue deal its combat damage twice. See ule 702.4, “Double Stike.” 5943 A keyword ability that lets a creature deal its combat damage twice. See rule 702.4, “Double Strike.”
5944 5944
5945 Double-Faced Cads 5945 Double-Faced Cards
5946 Cads with two faces, one on each side of the cad, and no Magic cad back. See ule 711, “Double-Faced Cads.” 5946 Cards with two faces, one on each side of the card, and no Magic card back. See rule 711, “Double-Faced Cards.”
5947 5947
5948 Daft 5948 Draft
5949 1. A Limited fomat in which playes choose cads one at a time fom booste packs, then constuct a deck solely fom the chosen cads and basic land cads. 5949 1. A Limited format in which players choose cards one at a time from booster packs, then construct a deck solely from the chosen cards and basic land cards.
5950 2. To choose a cad duing a daft and put it into you cad pool. 5950 2. To choose a card during a draft and put it into your card pool.
5951 5951
5952 Daft Round 5952 Draft Round
5953 Pat of a daft in which each playe opens an unopened booste pack and the cads in those booste packs ae dafted. See ules 905.1a and 905.1b. 5953 Part of a draft in which each player opens an unopened booster pack and the cards in those booster packs are drafted. See rules 905.1a and 905.1b.
5954 5954
5955 Daw 5955 Draw
5956 1. To put the top cad of a playe’s libay into thei hand as a tun-based action o as the esult of an effect that uses the wod “daw.” See ule 121, “Dawing a Cad.” 5956 1. To put the top card of a player’s library into their hand as a turn-based action or as the result of an effect that uses the word “draw.” See rule 121, “Drawing a Card.”
5957 2. The esult of a game in which neithe playe wins o loses. See ule 104.4. 5957 2. The result of a game in which neither player wins or loses. See rule 104.4.
5958 5958
5959 Daw Step 5959 Draw Step
5960 Pat of the tun. This step is the thid and final step of the beginning phase. See ule 504, “Daw Step.” 5960 Part of the turn. This step is the third and final step of the beginning phase. See rule 504, “Draw Step.”
5961 5961
5962 Dedge 5962 Dredge
5963 A keywod ability that lets a playe etun a cad fom thei gaveyad to thei hand. See ule 702.51, “Dedge.” 5963 A keyword ability that lets a player return a card from their graveyard to their hand. See rule 702.51, “Dredge.”
5964 5964
5965 Duing (Obsolete) 5965 During (Obsolete)
5966 Some olde cads used the phase “duing [phase], [action].” These abilities wee called “phase abilities.” In geneal, cads that wee pinted with phase abilities have eceived eata in the Oacle cad efeence so they have abilities that tigge at the beginning of a step o phase. “Duing” still appeas in cuent cad text, but only in its nomal English sense and not as game teminology. 5966 Some older cards used the phrase “during [phase], [action].” These abilities were called “phase abilities.” In general, cards that were printed with phase abilities have received errata in the Oracle card reference so they have abilities that trigger at the beginning of a step or phase. “During” still appears in current card text, but only in its normal English sense and not as game terminology.
5967 5967
5968 Echo 5968 Echo
5969 A keywod ability that imposes a cost to keep a pemanent on the battlefield. See ule 702.29, “Echo.” 5969 A keyword ability that imposes a cost to keep a permanent on the battlefield. See rule 702.29, “Echo.”
5970 5970
5971 EDH (Obsolete) 5971 EDH (Obsolete)
5972 An olde name fo the Commande casual vaiant. See ule 903, “Commande.” 5972 An older name for the Commander casual variant. See rule 903, “Commander.”
5973 5973
5974 Effect 5974 Effect
5975 Something that happens in the game as a esult of a spell o ability. See ule 609, “Effects.” 5975 Something that happens in the game as a result of a spell or ability. See rule 609, “Effects.”
5976 5976
5977 Embalm 5977 Embalm
5978 A keywod ability that lets a playe exile a ceatue cad fom thei gaveyad to ceate a mummified token vesion of that cad. See ule 702.127, “Embalm.” 5978 A keyword ability that lets a player exile a creature card from their graveyard to create a mummified token version of that card. See rule 702.127, “Embalm.”
5979 5979
5980 Emblem 5980 Emblem
5981 An emblem is a make used to epesent an object that has one o moe abilities, but no othe chaacteistics. See ule 114, “Emblems.” 5981 An emblem is a marker used to represent an object that has one or more abilities, but no other characteristics. See rule 114, “Emblems.”
5982 5982
5983 Emege 5983 Emerge
5984 A keywod ability that lets a playe cast a spell fo less by sacificing a ceatue. See ule 702.118, “Emege.” 5984 A keyword ability that lets a player cast a spell for less by sacrificing a creature. See rule 702.118, “Emerge.”
5985 5985
5986 Empeo 5986 Emperor
5987 The middle playe on each team in an Empeo game. See ule 809, “Empeo Vaiant.” 5987 The middle player on each team in an Emperor game. See rule 809, “Emperor Variant.”
5988 5988
5989 Empeo Vaiant 5989 Emperor Variant
5990 A multiplaye vaiant played among thee-playe teams. See ule 809, “Empeo Vaiant.” 5990 A multiplayer variant played among three-player teams. See rule 809, “Emperor Variant.”
5991 5991
5992 Enchant 5992 Enchant
5993 A keywod ability that defines what an Aua spell can taget and what an Aua pemanent can be attached to. See ule 303, “Enchantments,” and ule 702.5, “Enchant.” 5993 A keyword ability that defines what an Aura spell can target and what an Aura permanent can be attached to. See rule 303, “Enchantments,” and rule 702.5, “Enchant.”
5994 5994
5995 Enchantment 5995 Enchantment
5996 A cad type. An enchantment is a pemanent. See ule 303, “Enchantments.” See also Aua. 5996 A card type. An enchantment is a permanent. See rule 303, “Enchantments.” See also Aura.
5997 5997
5998 Enchantment Type 5998 Enchantment Type
5999 A subtype that’s coelated to the enchantment cad type. See ule 303, “Enchantments.” See ule 205.3h fo the list of enchantment types. 5999 A subtype that’s correlated to the enchantment card type. See rule 303, “Enchantments.” See rule 205.3h for the list of enchantment types.
6000 6000
6001 Encoded 6001 Encoded
6002 A tem that descibes the elationship between a pemanent and a cad exiled by a ciphe ability. See ule 702.98, “Ciphe.” 6002 A term that describes the relationship between a permanent and a card exiled by a cipher ability. See rule 702.98, “Cipher.”
6003 6003
6004 Encounte 6004 Encounter
6005 To move a phenomenon cad off the top of a plana deck and tun it face up. See ule 310, “Phenomena.” 6005 To move a phenomenon card off the top of a planar deck and turn it face up. See rule 310, “Phenomena.”
6006 6006
6007 End of Combat Step 6007 End of Combat Step
6008 Pat of the tun. This step is the fifth and final step of the combat phase. See ule 511, “End of Combat Step.” 6008 Part of the turn. This step is the fifth and final step of the combat phase. See rule 511, “End of Combat Step.”
6009 6009
6010 End Step 6010 End Step
6011 Pat of the tun. This step is the fist step of the ending phase. See ule 513, “End Step.” 6011 Part of the turn. This step is the first step of the ending phase. See rule 513, “End Step.”
6012 6012
6013 End the Combat Phase 6013 End the Combat Phase
6014 To “end the combat phase” as the esult of an effect is to pefom an expedited pocess that skips eveything else that would happen that phase. See ule 717, “Ending Tuns and Phases.” 6014 To “end the combat phase” as the result of an effect is to perform an expedited process that skips everything else that would happen that phase. See rule 717, “Ending Turns and Phases.”
6015 6015
6016 End the Tun 6016 End the Turn
6017 To “end the tun” as the esult of an effect is to pefom an expedited pocess that skips nealy eveything else that would happen that tun. See ule 717, “Ending Tuns and Phases.” 6017 To “end the turn” as the result of an effect is to perform an expedited process that skips nearly everything else that would happen that turn. See rule 717, “Ending Turns and Phases.”
6018 6018
6019 Ending Phase 6019 Ending Phase
6020 Pat of the tun. This phase is the fifth and final phase of the tun. See ule 512, “Ending Phase.” 6020 Part of the turn. This phase is the fifth and final phase of the turn. See rule 512, “Ending Phase.”
6021 6021
6022 Enegy Symbol 6022 Energy Symbol
6023 The enegy symbol {E} epesents one enegy counte. To pay {E}, a playe emoves one enegy counte fom themselves. 6023 The energy symbol {E} represents one energy counter. To pay {E}, a player removes one energy counter from themselves.
6024 6024
6025 Entes the Battlefield 6025 Enters the Battlefield
6026 A nontoken pemanent “entes the battlefield” when it’s moved onto the battlefield fom anothe zone. A token “entes the battlefield” when it’s ceated. See ules 403.3, 603.6a, 603.6d, and 614.12. 6026 A nontoken permanent “enters the battlefield” when it’s moved onto the battlefield from another zone. A token “enters the battlefield” when it’s created. See rules 403.3, 603.6a, 603.6d, and 614.12.
6027 6027
6028 Entwine 6028 Entwine
6029 A keywod ability that lets a playe choose all modes fo a spell athe than just the numbe specified. See ule 702.41, “Entwine.” 6029 A keyword ability that lets a player choose all modes for a spell rather than just the number specified. See rule 702.41, “Entwine.”
6030 6030
6031 Epic 6031 Epic
6032 A keywod ability that lets a playe copy a spell at the beginning of each of thei upkeeps at the expense of casting any othe spells fo the est of the game. See ule 702.49, “Epic.” 6032 A keyword ability that lets a player copy a spell at the beginning of each of their upkeeps at the expense of casting any other spells for the rest of the game. See rule 702.49, “Epic.”
6033 6033
6034 Equip 6034 Equip
6035 A keywod ability that lets a playe attach an Equipment to a ceatue they contol. See ule 301, “Atifacts,” and ule 702.6, “Equip.” 6035 A keyword ability that lets a player attach an Equipment to a creature they control. See rule 301, “Artifacts,” and rule 702.6, “Equip.”
6036 6036
6037 Equipment 6037 Equipment
6038 An atifact subtype. Equipment can be attached to ceatues. See ule 301, “Atifacts,” and ule 702.6, “Equip.” 6038 An artifact subtype. Equipment can be attached to creatures. See rule 301, “Artifacts,” and rule 702.6, “Equip.”
6039 6039
6040 Escalate 6040 Escalate
6041 A keywod ability on some modal spells that adds a cost fo choosing additional modes. See ule 702.119, “Escalate.” 6041 A keyword ability on some modal spells that adds a cost for choosing additional modes. See rule 702.119, “Escalate.”
6042 6042
6043 Etenalize 6043 Eternalize
6044 A keywod ability that lets a playe exile a ceatue cad fom thei gaveyad to ceate an etenalized token vesion of that cad. See ule 702.128, “Etenalize.” 6044 A keyword ability that lets a player exile a creature card from their graveyard to create an eternalized token version of that card. See rule 702.128, “Eternalize.”
6045 6045
6046 Evasion Ability 6046 Evasion Ability
6047 An ability that esticts what ceatues can block an attacking ceatue. See ules 509.1b–c. 6047 An ability that restricts what creatures can block an attacking creature. See rules 509.1b–c.
6048 6048
6049 Event 6049 Event
6050 Anything that happens in a game. See ule 700.1. 6050 Anything that happens in a game. See rule 700.1.
6051 6051
6052 Evoke 6052 Evoke
6053 A keywod ability that causes a pemanent to be sacificed when it entes the battlefield. See ule 702.73, “Evoke.” 6053 A keyword ability that causes a permanent to be sacrificed when it enters the battlefield. See rule 702.73, “Evoke.”
6054 6054
6055 Evolve 6055 Evolve
6056 A keywod ability that lets you put a +1/+1 counte on a ceatue when a lage ceatue entes the battlefield unde you contol. See ule 702.99, “Evolve.” 6056 A keyword ability that lets you put a +1/+1 counter on a creature when a larger creature enters the battlefield under your control. See rule 702.99, “Evolve.”
6057 6057
6058 Exalted 6058 Exalted
6059 A keywod ability that can make a ceatue bette in combat. See ule 702.82, “Exalted.” 6059 A keyword ability that can make a creature better in combat. See rule 702.82, “Exalted.”
6060 6060
6061 Exchange 6061 Exchange
6062 To swap two things, such as objects, sets of objects, o life totals. See ule 701.10, “Exchange.” 6062 To swap two things, such as objects, sets of objects, or life totals. See rule 701.10, “Exchange.”
6063 6063
6064 Exet 6064 Exert
6065 A keywod action that stops a pemanent fom untapping duing the next uptap step of the playe who exeted it. See ule 701.38, “Exet.” 6065 A keyword action that stops a permanent from untapping during the next uptap step of the player who exerted it. See rule 701.38, “Exert.”
6066 6066
6067 Exile 6067 Exile
6068 1. A zone. Exile is essentially a holding aea fo cads. It used to be known as the “emoved-fom-the-game” zone. 6068 1. A zone. Exile is essentially a holding area for cards. It used to be known as the “removed-from-the-game” zone.
6069 2. To put an object into the exile zone fom whateve zone it’s cuently in. An “exiled” cad is one that’s been put into the exile zone. 6069 2. To put an object into the exile zone from whatever zone it’s currently in. An “exiled” card is one that’s been put into the exile zone.
6070 See ule 406, “Exile.” 6070 See rule 406, “Exile.”
6071 6071
6072 Expansion Symbol 6072 Expansion Symbol
6073 A cad’s expansion symbol is a small icon nomally pinted below the ight edge of the illustation that has no effect on game play. See ule 206, “Expansion Symbol.” 6073 A card’s expansion symbol is a small icon normally printed below the right edge of the illustration that has no effect on game play. See rule 206, “Expansion Symbol.”
6074 6074
6075 Exploit 6075 Exploit
6076 A keywod ability that lets you sacifice a ceatue fo a benefit. See ule 702.109, “Exploit.” 6076 A keyword ability that lets you sacrifice a creature for a benefit. See rule 702.109, “Exploit.”
6077 6077
6078 Exploe 6078 Explore
6079 A keywod action that causes a playe to eveal the top cad of thei libay and then to take diffeent actions depending on whethe a land cad is evealed this way. See ule 701.39, “Exploe.” 6079 A keyword action that causes a player to reveal the top card of their library and then to take different actions depending on whether a land card is revealed this way. See rule 701.39, “Explore.”
6080 6080
6081 Extot 6081 Extort
6082 A keywod ability that lets you gain life and have opponents lose life wheneve you cast a spell. See ule 702.100, “Extot.” 6082 A keyword ability that lets you gain life and have opponents lose life whenever you cast a spell. See rule 702.100, “Extort.”
6083 6083
6084 Exta Tun 6084 Extra Turn
6085 A tun ceated by an effect of a spell o ability. See ule 500.7. Fo ules about exta tuns in a multiplaye game using the shaed team tuns option, see 805.8. Fo ules about exta tuns in a Gand Melee game, see ule 807.4. 6085 A turn created by an effect of a spell or ability. See rule 500.7. For rules about extra turns in a multiplayer game using the shared team turns option, see 805.8. For rules about extra turns in a Grand Melee game, see rule 807.4.
6086 6086
6087 Fabicate 6087 Fabricate
6088 A keywod ability that lets you choose whethe to ceate Sevo tokens o put +1/+1 countes on a ceatue. See ule 702.122, “Fabicate.” 6088 A keyword ability that lets you choose whether to create Servo tokens or put +1/+1 counters on a creature. See rule 702.122, “Fabricate.”
6089 6089
6090 Face Down 6090 Face Down
6091 1. A cad is “face down” if it’s physically positioned so the cad back is showing. Cads in some zones ae nomally kept face down. See section 4, “Zones.” 6091 1. A card is “face down” if it’s physically positioned so the card back is showing. Cards in some zones are normally kept face down. See section 4, “Zones.”
6092 2. A status a pemanent may have. See ule 110.5 and ule 702.36, “Moph.” 6092 2. A status a permanent may have. See rule 110.5 and rule 702.36, “Morph.”
6093 3. Face-down spells have additional ules. See ule 707, “Face-Down Spells and Pemanents,” and ule 702.36, “Moph.” 6093 3. Face-down spells have additional rules. See rule 707, “Face-Down Spells and Permanents,” and rule 702.36, “Morph.”
6094 6094
6095 Face Up 6095 Face Up
6096 1. A cad is “face up” if it’s physically positioned so the cad font is showing. Cads in some zones ae nomally kept face up. See section 4, “Zones.” 6096 1. A card is “face up” if it’s physically positioned so the card front is showing. Cards in some zones are normally kept face up. See section 4, “Zones.”
6097 2. A default status a pemanent may have. See ule 110.5 and ule 702.36, “Moph.” 6097 2. A default status a permanent may have. See rule 110.5 and rule 702.36, “Morph.”
6098 6098
6099 Fading 6099 Fading
6100 A keywod ability that limits how long a pemanent emains on the battlefield. See ule 702.31, “Fading.” 6100 A keyword ability that limits how long a permanent remains on the battlefield. See rule 702.31, “Fading.”
6101 6101
6102 Fateseal 6102 Fateseal
6103 To manipulate some of the cads on top of an opponent’s libay. See ule 701.21, “Fateseal.” 6103 To manipulate some of the cards on top of an opponent’s library. See rule 701.21, “Fateseal.”
6104 6104
6105 Fea 6105 Fear
6106 A keywod ability that esticts how a ceatue may be blocked. See ule 702.35, “Fea.” 6106 A keyword ability that restricts how a creature may be blocked. See rule 702.35, “Fear.”
6107 6107
6108 Fight 6108 Fight
6109 When two ceatues fight, each deals damage equal to its powe to the othe. See ule 701.12, “Fight.” 6109 When two creatures fight, each deals damage equal to its power to the other. See rule 701.12, “Fight.”
6110 6110
6111 Fist Stike 6111 First Strike
6112 A keywod ability that lets a ceatue deal its combat damage befoe othe ceatues. See ule 702.7, “Fist Stike.” 6112 A keyword ability that lets a creature deal its combat damage before other creatures. See rule 702.7, “First Strike.”
6113 6113
6114 Flanking 6114 Flanking
6115 A keywod ability that can make a ceatue bette in combat. See ule 702.24, “Flanking.” 6115 A keyword ability that can make a creature better in combat. See rule 702.24, “Flanking.”
6116 6116
6117 Flash 6117 Flash
6118 A keywod ability that lets a playe play a cad any time they could cast an instant. See ule 702.8, “Flash.” 6118 A keyword ability that lets a player play a card any time they could cast an instant. See rule 702.8, “Flash.”
6119 6119
6120 Flashback 6120 Flashback
6121 A keywod ability that lets a playe cast a cad fom thei gaveyad. See ule 702.33, “Flashback.” 6121 A keyword ability that lets a player cast a card from their graveyard. See rule 702.33, “Flashback.”
6122 6122
6123 Flavo Text 6123 Flavor Text
6124 Text in italics (but not in paentheses) in the text box of a cad that has no effect on play. See ule 207.2. 6124 Text in italics (but not in parentheses) in the text box of a card that has no effect on play. See rule 207.2.
6125 6125
6126 Flip Cads 6126 Flip Cards
6127 Cads with a two-pat cad fame (one pat of which is pinted upside down) on a single cad. See ule 709, “Flip Cads.” 6127 Cards with a two-part card frame (one part of which is printed upside down) on a single card. See rule 709, “Flip Cards.”
6128 6128
6129 Flipped 6129 Flipped
6130 A status a pemanent may have. See ule 110.5 and ule 709, “Flip Cads.” See also Unflipped. 6130 A status a permanent may have. See rule 110.5 and rule 709, “Flip Cards.” See also Unflipped.
6131 6131
6132 Flipping a Coin 6132 Flipping a Coin
6133 A method of andomization with two possible outcomes of equal likelihood. See ule 705, “Flipping a Coin.” 6133 A method of randomization with two possible outcomes of equal likelihood. See rule 705, “Flipping a Coin.”
6134 6134
6135 Flying 6135 Flying
6136 A keywod ability that esticts how a ceatue may be blocked. See ule 702.9, “Flying.” 6136 A keyword ability that restricts how a creature may be blocked. See rule 702.9, “Flying.”
6137 6137
6138 Food Token 6138 Food Token
6139 A Food token is a cololess atifact token with “{2}, {T}, Sacifice this atifact: You gain 3 life.” Fo moe infomation about pedefined tokens, see ule 111.10. 6139 A Food token is a colorless artifact token with “{2}, {T}, Sacrifice this artifact: You gain 3 life.” For more information about predefined tokens, see rule 111.10.
6140 6140
6141 Foecast 6141 Forecast
6142 A keywod ability that allows an activated ability to be activated fom a playe’s hand. See ule 702.56, “Foecast.” 6142 A keyword ability that allows an activated ability to be activated from a player’s hand. See rule 702.56, “Forecast.”
6143 6143
6144 Foest 6144 Forest
6145 One of the five basic land types. Any land with this subtype has the ability “{T}: Add {G}.” See ule 305.6. 6145 One of the five basic land types. Any land with this subtype has the ability “{T}: Add {G}.” See rule 305.6.
6146 6146
6147 Foestcycling 6147 Forestcycling
6148 See Typecycling. 6148 See Typecycling.
6149 6149
6150 Foestwalk 6150 Forestwalk
6151 See Landwalk. 6151 See Landwalk.
6152 6152
6153 Fotification 6153 Fortification
6154 An atifact subtype. Fotifications can be attached to lands. See ule 301, “Atifacts,” and ule 702.66, “Fotify.” 6154 An artifact subtype. Fortifications can be attached to lands. See rule 301, “Artifacts,” and rule 702.66, “Fortify.”
6155 6155
6156 Fotify 6156 Fortify
6157 A keywod ability that lets a playe attach a Fotification to a land they contol. See ule 301, “Atifacts,” and ule 702.66, “Fotify.” 6157 A keyword ability that lets a player attach a Fortification to a land they control. See rule 301, “Artifacts,” and rule 702.66, “Fortify.”
6158 6158
6159 Fenzy 6159 Frenzy
6160 A keywod ability that can make a ceatue bette in combat. See ule 702.67, “Fenzy.” 6160 A keyword ability that can make a creature better in combat. See rule 702.67, “Frenzy.”
6161 6161
6162 Fee-fo-All 6162 Free-for-All
6163 A multiplaye vaiant in which a goup of playes compete as individuals against each othe. See ule 806, “Fee-fo-All Vaiant.” 6163 A multiplayer variant in which a group of players compete as individuals against each other. See rule 806, “Free-for-All Variant.”
6164 6164
6165 Fuse 6165 Fuse
6166 A keywod ability that allows a playe to cast both halves of a split cad. See ule 702.101, “Fuse.” 6166 A keyword ability that allows a player to cast both halves of a split card. See rule 702.101, “Fuse.”
6167 6167
6168 Fused Split Spell 6168 Fused Split Spell
6169 A split cad on the stack that has been cast using the fuse ability o a copy of such a cad. See ule 702.101, “Fuse.” 6169 A split card on the stack that has been cast using the fuse ability or a copy of such a card. See rule 702.101, “Fuse.”
6170 6170
6171 Geneal 6171 General
6172 Any playe in the Empeo multiplaye vaiant who isn’t an empeo. See ule 809, “Empeo Vaiant.” 6172 Any player in the Emperor multiplayer variant who isn’t an emperor. See rule 809, “Emperor Variant.”
6173 6173
6174 Geneic Mana 6174 Generic Mana
6175 Mana in a cost epesented by numeical symbols (such as {1}) o vaiable symbols (such as {X}) that can be paid with mana of any type. See ule 107.4. 6175 Mana in a cost represented by numerical symbols (such as {1}) or variable symbols (such as {X}) that can be paid with mana of any type. See rule 107.4.
6176 6176
6177 Global Enchantment (Obsolete) 6177 Global Enchantment (Obsolete)
6178 An obsolete tem fo a non-Aua enchantment. Cads pinted with this text have eceived eata in the Oacle cad efeence. 6178 An obsolete term for a non-Aura enchantment. Cards printed with this text have received errata in the Oracle card reference.
6179 6179
6180 Goad 6180 Goad
6181 A keywod action that foces a ceatue to attack and to attack anothe playe if able. See ule 701.37, “Goad.” 6181 A keyword action that forces a creature to attack and to attack another player if able. See rule 701.37, “Goad.”
6182 6182
6183 Gaft 6183 Graft
6184 A keywod ability that has a pemanent ente the battlefield with +1/+1 countes on it and can move those countes to othe ceatues. See ule 702.57, “Gaft.” 6184 A keyword ability that has a permanent enter the battlefield with +1/+1 counters on it and can move those counters to other creatures. See rule 702.57, “Graft.”
6185 6185
6186 Gand Melee 6186 Grand Melee
6187 A multiplaye vaiant in which a lage goup of playes (usually ten o moe) compete as individuals against each othe. See ule 807, “Gand Melee Vaiant.” 6187 A multiplayer variant in which a large group of players (usually ten or more) compete as individuals against each other. See rule 807, “Grand Melee Variant.”
6188 6188
6189 Gavestom 6189 Gravestorm
6190 A keywod ability that ceates copies of a spell. See ule 702.68, “Gavestom.” 6190 A keyword ability that creates copies of a spell. See rule 702.68, “Gravestorm.”
6191 6191
6192 Gaveyad 6192 Graveyard
6193 1. A zone. A playe’s gaveyad is thei discad pile. 6193 1. A zone. A player’s graveyard is their discard pile.
6194 2. All the cads in a playe’s gaveyad. 6194 2. All the cards in a player’s graveyard.
6195 See ule 404, “Gaveyad.” 6195 See rule 404, “Graveyard.”
6196 6196
6197 Hand 6197 Hand
6198 1. A zone. A playe’s hand is whee that playe holds cads they have dawn but not played yet. 6198 1. A zone. A player’s hand is where that player holds cards they have drawn but not played yet.
6199 2. All the cads in a playe’s hand. 6199 2. All the cards in a player’s hand.
6200 See ule 402, “Hand.” 6200 See rule 402, “Hand.”
6201 6201
6202 Hand Modifie 6202 Hand Modifier
6203 A chaacteistic that only vanguads have. See ule 210, “Hand Modifie.” 6203 A characteristic that only vanguards have. See rule 210, “Hand Modifier.”
6204 6204
6205 Haste 6205 Haste
6206 A keywod ability that lets a ceatue ignoe the “summoning sickness” ule. See ule 702.10, “Haste,” and ule 302.6. 6206 A keyword ability that lets a creature ignore the “summoning sickness” rule. See rule 702.10, “Haste,” and rule 302.6.
6207 6207
6208 Haunt 6208 Haunt
6209 A keywod ability that exiles cads. A cad exiled this way “haunts” a ceatue tageted by the haunt ability. See ule 702.54, “Haunt.” 6209 A keyword ability that exiles cards. A card exiled this way “haunts” a creature targeted by the haunt ability. See rule 702.54, “Haunt.”
6210 6210
6211 Hexpoof 6211 Hexproof
6212 A keywod ability that pecludes a pemanent o playe fom being tageted by an opponent. See ule 702.11, “Hexpoof.” 6212 A keyword ability that precludes a permanent or player from being targeted by an opponent. See rule 702.11, “Hexproof.”
6213 6213
6214 Hidden Agenda 6214 Hidden Agenda
6215 A keywod ability that allows a conspiacy cad to be put into the command zone face down. See ule 702.105, “Hidden Agenda.” 6215 A keyword ability that allows a conspiracy card to be put into the command zone face down. See rule 702.105, “Hidden Agenda.”
6216 6216
6217 Hidden Zone 6217 Hidden Zone
6218 A zone in which not all playes can be expected to see the cads’ faces. See ule 400.2. See also Public Zone. 6218 A zone in which not all players can be expected to see the cards’ faces. See rule 400.2. See also Public Zone.
6219 6219
6220 Hideaway 6220 Hideaway
6221 A keywod ability that lets a playe stoe a secet cad. See ule 702.74, “Hideaway.” 6221 A keyword ability that lets a player store a secret card. See rule 702.74, “Hideaway.”
6222 6222
6223 Histoic 6223 Historic
6224 An object is histoic if it has the legenday supetype, the atifact cad type, o the Saga subtype. See ule 700.6. 6224 An object is historic if it has the legendary supertype, the artifact card type, or the Saga subtype. See rule 700.6.
6225 6225
6226 Hosemanship 6226 Horsemanship
6227 A keywod ability that esticts how a ceatue may be blocked. See ule 702.30, “Hosemanship.” 6227 A keyword ability that restricts how a creature may be blocked. See rule 702.30, “Horsemanship.”
6228 6228
6229 Hybid Cad 6229 Hybrid Card
6230 A cad with one o moe hybid mana symbols in its mana cost. See ule 202.2f. 6230 A card with one or more hybrid mana symbols in its mana cost. See rule 202.2f.
6231 6231
6232 Hybid Mana Symbols 6232 Hybrid Mana Symbols
6233 A mana symbol that epesents a cost that can be paid in one of two ways. See ule 107.4. 6233 A mana symbol that represents a cost that can be paid in one of two ways. See rule 107.4.
6234 6234
6235 If 6235 If
6236 See Intevening “If” Clause. 6236 See Intervening “If” Clause.
6237 6237
6238 Illegal Action 6238 Illegal Action
6239 An action that violates the ules of the game and/o equiements o estictions ceated by effects. See ule 722, “Handling Illegal Actions.” 6239 An action that violates the rules of the game and/or requirements or restrictions created by effects. See rule 722, “Handling Illegal Actions.”
6240 6240
6241 Illegal Taget 6241 Illegal Target
6242 A taget that no longe exists o no longe meets the specifications stated by the spell o ability that’s tageting it. See ule 608.2b. 6242 A target that no longer exists or no longer meets the specifications stated by the spell or ability that’s targeting it. See rule 608.2b.
6243 6243
6244 Illustation 6244 Illustration
6245 A pictue pinted on the uppe half of a cad that has no effect on game play. See ule 203, “Illustation.” 6245 A picture printed on the upper half of a card that has no effect on game play. See rule 203, “Illustration.”
6246 6246
6247 Illustation Cedit 6247 Illustration Credit
6248 Infomation pinted diectly below the text box that has no effect on game play. See ule 212, “Infomation Below the Text Box.” 6248 Information printed directly below the text box that has no effect on game play. See rule 212, “Information Below the Text Box.”
6249 6249
6250 Impint 6250 Imprint
6251 “Impint” used to be a keywod ability. It is now an ability wod and has no ules meaning. All cads pinted with the impint keywod have eceived eata in the Oacle cad efeence. 6251 “Imprint” used to be a keyword ability. It is now an ability word and has no rules meaning. All cards printed with the imprint keyword have received errata in the Oracle card reference.
6252 6252
6253 Impovise 6253 Improvise
6254 A keywod ability that lets you tap atifacts athe than pay mana to cast a spell. See ule 702.125, “Impovise.” 6254 A keyword ability that lets you tap artifacts rather than pay mana to cast a spell. See rule 702.125, “Improvise.”
6255 6255
6256 In Play (Obsolete) 6256 In Play (Obsolete)
6257 An obsolete tem fo the battlefield. Cads that wee pinted with text that contain the phases “in play,” “fom play,” “into play,” o the like ae efeing to the battlefield and have eceived eata in the Oacle cad efeence. See Battlefield. 6257 An obsolete term for the battlefield. Cards that were printed with text that contain the phrases “in play,” “from play,” “into play,” or the like are referring to the battlefield and have received errata in the Oracle card reference. See Battlefield.
6258 6258
6259 In Response To 6259 In Response To
6260 An instant spell that’s been cast, o an activated ability that’s been activated, while anothe spell o ability is on the stack has been cast o activated “in esponse to” the ealie spell o ability. See ule 117.7. 6260 An instant spell that’s been cast, or an activated ability that’s been activated, while another spell or ability is on the stack has been cast or activated “in response to” the earlier spell or ability. See rule 117.7.
6261 6261
6262 Independent 6262 Independent
6263 See Dependency. 6263 See Dependency.
6264 6264
6265 Indestuctible 6265 Indestructible
6266 A keywod ability that pecludes a pemanent fom being destoyed. See ule 702.12. 6266 A keyword ability that precludes a permanent from being destroyed. See rule 702.12.
6267 6267
6268 Infect 6268 Infect
6269 A keywod ability that affects how an object deals damage to ceatues and playes. See ule 702.89, “Infect.” 6269 A keyword ability that affects how an object deals damage to creatures and players. See rule 702.89, “Infect.”
6270 6270
6271 Ingest 6271 Ingest
6272 A keywod ability that can exile the top cad of a playe’s libay. See ule 702.114, “Ingest.” 6272 A keyword ability that can exile the top card of a player’s library. See rule 702.114, “Ingest.”
6273 6273
6274 Instant 6274 Instant
6275 A cad type. An instant is not a pemanent. See ule 304, “Instants.” 6275 A card type. An instant is not a permanent. See rule 304, “Instants.”
6276 6276
6277 Instead 6277 Instead
6278 Effects that use the wod “instead” ae eplacement effects. The wod “instead” indicates what an event will be eplaced with. See ule 614, “Replacement Effects.” 6278 Effects that use the word “instead” are replacement effects. The word “instead” indicates what an event will be replaced with. See rule 614, “Replacement Effects.”
6279 6279
6280 Inteupt (Obsolete) 6280 Interrupt (Obsolete)
6281 An obsolete cad type. All cads pinted with this cad type ae now instants. All abilities that, as pinted, said a playe could “play as an inteupt” can now be activated like any othe activated abilities (unless they’e mana abilities, in which case they follow those ules instead). All elevant cads have been given eata in the Oacle cad efeence. 6281 An obsolete card type. All cards printed with this card type are now instants. All abilities that, as printed, said a player could “play as an interrupt” can now be activated like any other activated abilities (unless they’re mana abilities, in which case they follow those rules instead). All relevant cards have been given errata in the Oracle card reference.
6282 6282
6283 Intevening “If” Clause 6283 Intervening “If” Clause
6284 A specially woded condition checked as a tiggeed ability would tigge and again as it would esolve. See ule 603.4 6284 A specially worded condition checked as a triggered ability would trigger and again as it would resolve. See rule 603.4
6285 6285
6286 Intimidate 6286 Intimidate
6287 A keywod ability that esticts how a ceatue may be blocked. See ule 702.13, “Intimidate.” 6287 A keyword ability that restricts how a creature may be blocked. See rule 702.13, “Intimidate.”
6288 6288
6289 Investigate 6289 Investigate
6290 A keywod action that ceates a Clue atifact token. See ule 701.35, “Investigate.” 6290 A keyword action that creates a Clue artifact token. See rule 701.35, “Investigate.”
6291 6291
6292 Island 6292 Island
6293 One of the five basic land types. Any land with this subtype has the ability “{T}: Add {U}.” See ule 305.6. 6293 One of the five basic land types. Any land with this subtype has the ability “{T}: Add {U}.” See rule 305.6.
6294 6294
6295 Islandcycling 6295 Islandcycling
6296 See Typecycling. 6296 See Typecycling.
6297 6297
6298 Islandhome (Obsolete) 6298 Islandhome (Obsolete)
6299 An obsolete keywod ability that meant “This ceatue can’t attack unless defending playe contols an Island” and “When you contol no Islands, sacifice this ceatue.” Cads pinted with this ability have been given eata in the Oacle cad efeence. 6299 An obsolete keyword ability that meant “This creature can’t attack unless defending player controls an Island” and “When you control no Islands, sacrifice this creature.” Cards printed with this ability have been given errata in the Oracle card reference.
6300 6300
6301 Islandwalk 6301 Islandwalk
6302 See Landwalk. 6302 See Landwalk.
6303 6303
6304 Jump-Stat 6304 Jump-Start
6305 A keywod ability that lets a playe cast a cad fom thei gaveyad by discading a cad. See ule 702.132, “Jump-Stat.” 6305 A keyword ability that lets a player cast a card from their graveyard by discarding a card. See rule 702.132, “Jump-Start.”
6306 6306
6307 Keywod Ability 6307 Keyword Ability
6308 A game tem, such as “flying” o “haste,” used as shothand fo a longe ability o goup of abilities. See ule 702, “Keywod Abilities.” 6308 A game term, such as “flying” or “haste,” used as shorthand for a longer ability or group of abilities. See rule 702, “Keyword Abilities.”
6309 6309
6310 Keywod Action 6310 Keyword Action
6311 A veb, such as “destoy” o “cast,” used as a game tem athe than as its nomal English meaning. See ule 701, “Keywod Actions.” 6311 A verb, such as “destroy” or “cast,” used as a game term rather than as its normal English meaning. See rule 701, “Keyword Actions.”
6312 6312
6313 Kicke, Kicked 6313 Kicker, Kicked
6314 Kicke is a keywod ability that epesents an optional additional cost. A spell has been kicked if its contolle declaed the intention to pay any o all of its kicke costs. See ule 702.32, “Kicke.” 6314 Kicker is a keyword ability that represents an optional additional cost. A spell has been kicked if its controller declared the intention to pay any or all of its kicker costs. See rule 702.32, “Kicker.”
6315 6315
6316 Land 6316 Land
6317 A cad type. A land is a pemanent. See ule 305, “Lands.” 6317 A card type. A land is a permanent. See rule 305, “Lands.”
6318 6318
6319 Land Type 6319 Land Type
6320 A subtype that’s coelated to the land cad type. See ule 305, “Lands.” See ule 205.3i fo the list of land types. 6320 A subtype that’s correlated to the land card type. See rule 305, “Lands.” See rule 205.3i for the list of land types.
6321 6321
6322 Landwalk 6322 Landwalk
6323 A geneic tem fo a goup of keywod abilities that estict whethe a ceatue may be blocked. See ule 702.14, “Landwalk.” 6323 A generic term for a group of keyword abilities that restrict whether a creature may be blocked. See rule 702.14, “Landwalk.”
6324 6324
6325 Last Known Infomation 6325 Last Known Information
6326 Infomation about an object that’s no longe in the zone it’s expected to be in, o infomation about a playe that’s no longe in the game. This infomation captues that object’s last existence in that zone o that playe’s last existence in the game. See ules 113.7a, 608.2b, 608.2g, and 800.4h. 6326 Information about an object that’s no longer in the zone it’s expected to be in, or information about a player that’s no longer in the game. This information captures that object’s last existence in that zone or that player’s last existence in the game. See rules 113.7a, 608.2b, 608.2g, and 800.4h.
6327 6327
6328 Laye 6328 Layer
6329 A system used to detemine in which ode continuous effects ae applied. See ule 613, “Inteaction of Continuous Effects.” See also Dependency, Timestamp Ode. 6329 A system used to determine in which order continuous effects are applied. See rule 613, “Interaction of Continuous Effects.” See also Dependency, Timestamp Order.
6330 6330
6331 Leaves the Battlefield 6331 Leaves the Battlefield
6332 A pemanent “leaves the battlefield” when it’s moved fom the battlefield to anothe zone, o (if it’s phased in) when it leaves the game because its owne leaves the game. See ules 603.6c and 603.10. 6332 A permanent “leaves the battlefield” when it’s moved from the battlefield to another zone, or (if it’s phased in) when it leaves the game because its owner leaves the game. See rules 603.6c and 603.10.
6333 6333
6334 Legal Text 6334 Legal Text
6335 Infomation pinted diectly below the text box that has no effect on game play. See ule 212, “Infomation Below the Text Box.” 6335 Information printed directly below the text box that has no effect on game play. See rule 212, “Information Below the Text Box.”
6336 6336
6337 Legend (Obsolete) 6337 Legend (Obsolete)
6338 An obsolete ceatue type. Cads pinted with this subtype have been given eata in the Oacle cad efeence so they have the legenday supetype instead. See Legenday. 6338 An obsolete creature type. Cards printed with this subtype have been given errata in the Oracle card reference so they have the legendary supertype instead. See Legendary.
6339 6339
6340 Legenday 6340 Legendary
6341 A supetype that’s nomally elevant on pemanents. See ule 205.4, “Supetypes.” See also Legend Rule. 6341 A supertype that’s normally relevant on permanents. See rule 205.4, “Supertypes.” See also Legend Rule.
6342 6342
6343 Legend Rule 6343 Legend Rule
6344 A state-based action that causes a playe who contols two o moe legenday pemanents with the same name to put all but one into thei ownes’ gaveyads. See ule 704.5j. 6344 A state-based action that causes a player who controls two or more legendary permanents with the same name to put all but one into their owners’ graveyards. See rule 704.5j.
6345 6345
6346 Lethal Damage 6346 Lethal Damage
6347 An amount of damage geate than o equal to a ceatue’s toughness. See ules 120.6, 510.1, and 704.5g. 6347 An amount of damage greater than or equal to a creature’s toughness. See rules 120.6, 510.1, and 704.5g.
6348 6348
6349 Level Symbol 6349 Level Symbol
6350 A symbol that epesents a keywod ability indicating abilities, powe, and toughness a levele cad may have. See ule 107.8 and ule 710, “Levele Cads.” 6350 A symbol that represents a keyword ability indicating abilities, power, and toughness a leveler card may have. See rule 107.8 and rule 710, “Leveler Cards.”
6351 6351
6352 Level Up 6352 Level Up
6353 A keywod ability that can put level countes on a ceatue. See ule 702.86, “Level Up.” 6353 A keyword ability that can put level counters on a creature. See rule 702.86, “Level Up.”
6354 6354
6355 Levele Cads 6355 Leveler Cards
6356 Cads with stiated text boxes and thee powe/toughness boxes. See ule 710, “Levele Cads.” 6356 Cards with striated text boxes and three power/toughness boxes. See rule 710, “Leveler Cards.”
6357 6357
6358 Libay 6358 Library
6359 1. A zone. A playe’s libay is whee that playe daws cads fom. 6359 1. A zone. A player’s library is where that player draws cards from.
6360 2. All the cads in a playe’s libay. 6360 2. All the cards in a player’s library.
6361 See ule 401, “Libay.” 6361 See rule 401, “Library.”
6362 6362
6363 Life, Life Total 6363 Life, Life Total
6364 Each playe has an amount of “life,” epesented by that playe’s “life total.” Life may be gained o lost. See ule 119, “Life.” 6364 Each player has an amount of “life,” represented by that player’s “life total.” Life may be gained or lost. See rule 119, “Life.”
6365 6365
6366 Life Modifie 6366 Life Modifier
6367 A chaacteistic that only vanguads have. See ule 211, “Life Modifie.” 6367 A characteristic that only vanguards have. See rule 211, “Life Modifier.”
6368 6368
6369 Lifelink 6369 Lifelink
6370 A keywod ability that causes a playe to gain life. See ule 702.15, “Lifelink.” 6370 A keyword ability that causes a player to gain life. See rule 702.15, “Lifelink.”
6371 6371
6372 Limited 6372 Limited
6373 A way of playing in which each playe gets a quantity of unopened Magic poduct and ceates thei own deck on the spot. See ule 100.2. 6373 A way of playing in which each player gets a quantity of unopened Magic product and creates their own deck on the spot. See rule 100.2.
6374 6374
6375 Limited Range of Influence 6375 Limited Range of Influence
6376 An optional ule used in some multiplaye games that limits what a playe can affect. See ule 801, “Limited Range of Influence Option.” 6376 An optional rule used in some multiplayer games that limits what a player can affect. See rule 801, “Limited Range of Influence Option.”
6377 6377
6378 Linked Abilities 6378 Linked Abilities
6379 Two abilities pinted on the same object such that one of them causes actions to be taken o objects to be affected and the othe one diectly efes to those actions o objects. See ule 607, “Linked Abilities.” 6379 Two abilities printed on the same object such that one of them causes actions to be taken or objects to be affected and the other one directly refers to those actions or objects. See rule 607, “Linked Abilities.”
6380 6380
6381 Living Weapon 6381 Living Weapon
6382 A keywod ability that ceates a ceatue token and then attaches the Equipment with the ability to that token. See ule 702.91, “Living Weapon.” 6382 A keyword ability that creates a creature token and then attaches the Equipment with the ability to that token. See rule 702.91, “Living Weapon.”
6383 6383
6384 Local Enchantment (Obsolete) 6384 Local Enchantment (Obsolete)
6385 An obsolete tem fo an Aua. Cads pinted with this text have eceived eata in the Oacle cad efeence. 6385 An obsolete term for an Aura. Cards printed with this text have received errata in the Oracle card reference.
6386 6386
6387 London Mulligan 6387 London Mulligan
6388 Infomal tem fo the cuent system of mulligan ules. See ule 103.4. 6388 Informal term for the current system of mulligan rules. See rule 103.4.
6389 6389
6390 Loop 6390 Loop
6391 A set of actions that could be epeated indefinitely. See ule 721, “Taking Shotcuts.” 6391 A set of actions that could be repeated indefinitely. See rule 721, “Taking Shortcuts.”
6392 6392
6393 Lose the Game 6393 Lose the Game
6394 Thee ae seveal ways to lose the game. See ule 104, “Ending the Game,” ule 810.8 (fo additional ules fo Two-Headed Giant games), ule 809.5 (fo additional ules fo Empeo games), and ule 903.10 (fo an additional ule fo Commande games). 6394 There are several ways to lose the game. See rule 104, “Ending the Game,” rule 810.8 (for additional rules for Two-Headed Giant games), rule 809.5 (for additional rules for Emperor games), and rule 903.10 (for an additional rule for Commander games).
6395 6395
6396 Loyalty 6396 Loyalty
6397 1. Pat of a cad that only planeswalkes have. A planeswalke cad’s loyalty is pinted in its lowe ight cone. See ule 209, “Loyalty.” 6397 1. Part of a card that only planeswalkers have. A planeswalker card’s loyalty is printed in its lower right corner. See rule 209, “Loyalty.”
6398 2. A chaacteistic that only planeswalkes have. See ule 306.5. 6398 2. A characteristic that only planeswalkers have. See rule 306.5.
6399 6399
6400 Loyalty Ability 6400 Loyalty Ability
6401 An activated ability with a loyalty symbol in its cost. See ule 606, “Loyalty Abilities.” 6401 An activated ability with a loyalty symbol in its cost. See rule 606, “Loyalty Abilities.”
6402 6402
6403 Madness 6403 Madness
6404 A keywod ability that lets a playe cast a cad they discad. See ule 702.34, “Madness.” 6404 A keyword ability that lets a player cast a card they discard. See rule 702.34, “Madness.”
6405 6405
6406 Main Game 6406 Main Game
6407 The game in which a spell (o ability) that ceated a subgame was cast (o activated). See ule 720, “Subgames.” 6407 The game in which a spell (or ability) that created a subgame was cast (or activated). See rule 720, “Subgames.”
6408 6408
6409 Main Phase 6409 Main Phase
6410 Pat of the tun. The fist, o pecombat, main phase is the second phase of the tun. The second, o postcombat, main phase is the fouth phase of the tun. See ule 505, “Main Phase.” 6410 Part of the turn. The first, or precombat, main phase is the second phase of the turn. The second, or postcombat, main phase is the fourth phase of the turn. See rule 505, “Main Phase.”
6411 6411
6412 Mana 6412 Mana
6413 The pimay esouce in the game. It is spent to pay costs, usually when casting spells and activating abilities. See ule 106, “Mana,” ule 107.4, and ule 202, “Mana Cost and Colo.” 6413 The primary resource in the game. It is spent to pay costs, usually when casting spells and activating abilities. See rule 106, “Mana,” rule 107.4, and rule 202, “Mana Cost and Color.”
6414 6414
6415 Mana Ability 6415 Mana Ability
6416 An activated o tiggeed ability that could ceate mana and doesn’t use the stack. See ule 605, “Mana Abilities.” 6416 An activated or triggered ability that could create mana and doesn’t use the stack. See rule 605, “Mana Abilities.”
6417 6417
6418 Mana Bun (Obsolete) 6418 Mana Burn (Obsolete)
6419 Olde vesions of the ules stated that unspent mana caused a playe to lose life; this was called “mana bun.” That ule no longe exists. 6419 Older versions of the rules stated that unspent mana caused a player to lose life; this was called “mana burn.” That rule no longer exists.
6420 6420
6421 Mana Cost 6421 Mana Cost
6422 A chaacteistic, and pat of a cad. A cad’s mana cost is indicated by the mana symbols pinted in its uppe ight cone. See ule 107.4 and ule 202, “Mana Cost and Colo.” 6422 A characteristic, and part of a card. A card’s mana cost is indicated by the mana symbols printed in its upper right corner. See rule 107.4 and rule 202, “Mana Cost and Color.”
6423 6423
6424 Mana Pool 6424 Mana Pool
6425 Whee mana ceated by an effect is tempoaily stoed. See ule 106.4. 6425 Where mana created by an effect is temporarily stored. See rule 106.4.
6426 6426
6427 Mana Souce (Obsolete) 6427 Mana Source (Obsolete)
6428 An obsolete cad type. All cads pinted with this cad type ae now instants. All abilities that, as pinted, said a playe could “play as a mana souce” ae now mana abilities. All elevant cads have been given eata in the Oacle cad efeence. 6428 An obsolete card type. All cards printed with this card type are now instants. All abilities that, as printed, said a player could “play as a mana source” are now mana abilities. All relevant cards have been given errata in the Oracle card reference.
6429 6429
6430 Mana Symbol 6430 Mana Symbol
6431 An icon that epesents mana o a mana cost. See ule 107.4. 6431 An icon that represents mana or a mana cost. See rule 107.4.
6432 6432
6433 Manifest 6433 Manifest
6434 A keywod action that puts a cad onto the battlefield face down as a 2/2 ceatue. See ule 701.33, “Manifest,” and ule 707, “Face-Down Spells and Pemanents.” 6434 A keyword action that puts a card onto the battlefield face down as a 2/2 creature. See rule 701.33, “Manifest,” and rule 707, “Face-Down Spells and Permanents.”
6435 6435
6436 Match 6436 Match
6437 A multiplaye game o a two-playe seies of games (usually best-two-of-thee) played in a tounament. See ule 100.6. 6437 A multiplayer game or a two-player series of games (usually best-two-of-three) played in a tournament. See rule 100.6.
6438 6438
6439 Maximum Hand Size 6439 Maximum Hand Size
6440 The numbe of cads in hand a playe must discad down to duing thei cleanup step. See ule 402.2 and 514.1. 6440 The number of cards in hand a player must discard down to during their cleanup step. See rule 402.2 and 514.1.
6441 6441
6442 Megamoph 6442 Megamorph
6443 A vaiant of the moph ability that puts a +1/+1 counte on the ceatue as it tuns face up. See ule 702.36, “Moph.” 6443 A variant of the morph ability that puts a +1/+1 counter on the creature as it turns face up. See rule 702.36, “Morph.”
6444 6444
6445 Meld 6445 Meld
6446 To tun two membes of a meld pai so thei back faces ae up and combined into one ovesized Magic cad. See ule 701.36, “Meld.” 6446 To turn two members of a meld pair so their back faces are up and combined into one oversized Magic card. See rule 701.36, “Meld.”
6447 6447
6448 Meld Cads 6448 Meld Cards
6449 Cads with a Magic cad face on one side and half of an ovesized Magic cad face on the othe. See ule 712, “Meld Cads.” 6449 Cards with a Magic card face on one side and half of an oversized Magic card face on the other. See rule 712, “Meld Cards.”
6450 6450
6451 Melee 6451 Melee
6452 A keywod ability that impoves an attacking ceatue based on the numbe of opponents you attacked. See ule 702.120, “Melee.” 6452 A keyword ability that improves an attacking creature based on the number of opponents you attacked. See rule 702.120, “Melee.”
6453 6453
6454 Menace 6454 Menace
6455 An evasion ability that makes ceatues unblockable by a single ceatue. See ule 702.110, “Menace.” 6455 An evasion ability that makes creatures unblockable by a single creature. See rule 702.110, “Menace.”
6456 6456
6457 Mento 6457 Mentor
6458 A keywod ability that lets you bigge ceatues powe up you smalle ceatues when they attack togethe. See ule 702.133, “Mento.” 6458 A keyword ability that lets your bigger creatures power up your smaller creatures when they attack together. See rule 702.133, “Mentor.”
6459 6459
6460 Miacle 6460 Miracle
6461 A keywod ability that lets you cast a spell fo a educed cost if it’s the fist cad you daw in a tun. See ule 702.93, “Miacle.” 6461 A keyword ability that lets you cast a spell for a reduced cost if it’s the first card you draw in a turn. See rule 702.93, “Miracle.”
6462 6462
6463 Modal, Mode 6463 Modal, Mode
6464 A spell o ability is “modal” if it has two o moe options in a bulleted list peceded by instuctions fo a playe to choose a numbe of those options, such as “Choose one —.” See ule 700.2. 6464 A spell or ability is “modal” if it has two or more options in a bulleted list preceded by instructions for a player to choose a number of those options, such as “Choose one —.” See rule 700.2.
6465 6465
6466 Modula 6466 Modular
6467 A keywod ability that has a pemanent ente the battlefield with +1/+1 countes on it and can move those countes to othe atifact ceatues. See ule 702.42, “Modula.” 6467 A keyword ability that has a permanent enter the battlefield with +1/+1 counters on it and can move those counters to other artifact creatures. See rule 702.42, “Modular.”
6468 6468
6469 Monach 6469 Monarch
6470 A designation a playe can have. Some effects instuct a playe to become the monach. The monach daws a cad at the beginning of thei end step. Dealing combat damage to the monach steals the title fom that playe. See ule 718, “The Monach.” 6470 A designation a player can have. Some effects instruct a player to become the monarch. The monarch draws a card at the beginning of their end step. Dealing combat damage to the monarch steals the title from that player. See rule 718, “The Monarch.”
6471 6471
6472 Mono Atifact (Obsolete) 6472 Mono Artifact (Obsolete)
6473 An obsolete tem that appeaed on the type line of atifacts with activated abilities that caused the atifact to become tapped as a cost. Cads pinted with this text have eceived eata in the Oacle cad efeence to simply say “Atifact,” and those abilities now include the tap symbol in thei costs. 6473 An obsolete term that appeared on the type line of artifacts with activated abilities that caused the artifact to become tapped as a cost. Cards printed with this text have received errata in the Oracle card reference to simply say “Artifact,” and those abilities now include the tap symbol in their costs.
6474 6474
6475 Monocoloed 6475 Monocolored
6476 An object with exactly one colo is monocoloed. Cololess objects aen’t monocoloed. See ule 105, “Colos,” and ule 202, “Mana Cost and Colo.” 6476 An object with exactly one color is monocolored. Colorless objects aren’t monocolored. See rule 105, “Colors,” and rule 202, “Mana Cost and Color.”
6477 6477
6478 Monocoloed Hybid Mana Symbols 6478 Monocolored Hybrid Mana Symbols
6479 See Hybid Mana Symbols. 6479 See Hybrid Mana Symbols.
6480 6480
6481 Monstosity 6481 Monstrosity
6482 A keywod action that puts +1/+1 countes on a ceatue and makes it become monstous. See ule 701.30, “Monstosity.” 6482 A keyword action that puts +1/+1 counters on a creature and makes it become monstrous. See rule 701.30, “Monstrosity.”
6483 6483
6484 Monstous 6484 Monstrous
6485 A designation given to a ceatue whose ability including a monstosity instuction has esolved. See ule 701.30, “Monstosity.” 6485 A designation given to a creature whose ability including a monstrosity instruction has resolved. See rule 701.30, “Monstrosity.”
6486 6486
6487 Moph 6487 Morph
6488 A keywod ability that lets a cad be cast face down as a 2/2 ceatue. See ule 702.36, “Moph,” and ule 707, “Face-Down Spells and Pemanents.” 6488 A keyword ability that lets a card be cast face down as a 2/2 creature. See rule 702.36, “Morph,” and rule 707, “Face-Down Spells and Permanents.”
6489 6489
6490 Mountain 6490 Mountain
6491 One of the five basic land types. Any land with this subtype has the ability “{T}: Add {R}.” See ule 305.6. 6491 One of the five basic land types. Any land with this subtype has the ability “{T}: Add {R}.” See rule 305.6.
6492 6492
6493 Mountaincycling 6493 Mountaincycling
6494 See Typecycling. 6494 See Typecycling.
6495 6495
6496 Mountainwalk 6496 Mountainwalk
6497 See Landwalk. 6497 See Landwalk.
6498 6498
6499 Move 6499 Move
6500 To emove a counte fom one object and put it on a diffeent object. See ule 122.5. 6500 To remove a counter from one object and put it on a different object. See rule 122.5.
6501 Some olde cads used “move” with espect to Auas; those cads have eceived eata in the Oacle cad efeence and now use the wod “attach.” 6501 Some older cards used “move” with respect to Auras; those cards have received errata in the Oracle card reference and now use the word “attach.”
6502 6502
6503 Mulligan 6503 Mulligan
6504 To take a mulligan is to eject a pospective opening hand in favo of a new one. See ule 103.4. 6504 To take a mulligan is to reject a prospective opening hand in favor of a new one. See rule 103.4.
6505 6505
6506 Multicoloed 6506 Multicolored
6507 An object with two o moe colos is multicoloed. Multicoloed is not a colo. See ule 105, “Colos,” and ule 202, “Mana Cost and Colo.” 6507 An object with two or more colors is multicolored. Multicolored is not a color. See rule 105, “Colors,” and rule 202, “Mana Cost and Color.”
6508 6508
6509 Multikicke 6509 Multikicker
6510 Multikicke is a vaiant of the kicke keywod ability. It epesents an optional additional cost that may be paid any numbe of times. See ule 702.32, “Kicke.” See also Kicke. 6510 Multikicker is a variant of the kicker keyword ability. It represents an optional additional cost that may be paid any number of times. See rule 702.32, “Kicker.” See also Kicker.
6511 6511
6512 Multiplaye Game 6512 Multiplayer Game
6513 A game that begins with moe than two playes. See section 8, “Multiplaye Rules.” 6513 A game that begins with more than two players. See section 8, “Multiplayer Rules.”
6514 6514
6515 Myiad 6515 Myriad
6516 Myiad is a tiggeed ability that effectively lets a ceatue attack in all possible diections. See ule 702.115, “Myiad.” 6516 Myriad is a triggered ability that effectively lets a creature attack in all possible directions. See rule 702.115, “Myriad.”
6517 6517
6518 Name 6518 Name
6519 A chaacteistic, and pat of a cad. A cad’s name is pinted in its uppe left cone. See ule 201, “Name.” 6519 A characteristic, and part of a card. A card’s name is printed in its upper left corner. See rule 201, “Name.”
6520 6520
6521 Ninjutsu 6521 Ninjutsu
6522 A keywod ability that lets a ceatue suddenly ente combat. See ule 702.48, “Ninjutsu.” 6522 A keyword ability that lets a creature suddenly enter combat. See rule 702.48, “Ninjutsu.”
6523 6523
6524 Nonbasic Land 6524 Nonbasic Land
6525 Any land that doesn’t have the supetype “basic.” See ule 205.4, “Supetypes.” 6525 Any land that doesn’t have the supertype “basic.” See rule 205.4, “Supertypes.”
6526 6526
6527 Nontaditional Magic Cad 6527 Nontraditional Magic Card
6528 An ovesized Magic cad that has a Magic cad back but not a “Deckmaste” back. See ule 108.2. 6528 An oversized Magic card that has a Magic card back but not a “Deckmaster” back. See rule 108.2.
6529 6529
6530 Object 6530 Object
6531 An ability on the stack, a cad, a copy of a cad, a token, a spell, o a pemanent. See ule 109, “Objects.” 6531 An ability on the stack, a card, a copy of a card, a token, a spell, or a permanent. See rule 109, “Objects.”
6532 6532
6533 Offeing 6533 Offering
6534 A keywod ability that modifies when you can cast a spell and how much mana you need to spend to do it. See ule 702.47, “Offeing.” 6534 A keyword ability that modifies when you can cast a spell and how much mana you need to spend to do it. See rule 702.47, “Offering.”
6535 6535
6536 One-Shot Effect 6536 One-Shot Effect
6537 An effect that does something just once and doesn’t have a duation. See ule 610, “One-Shot Effects.” See also Continuous Effects. 6537 An effect that does something just once and doesn’t have a duration. See rule 610, “One-Shot Effects.” See also Continuous Effects.
6538 6538
6539 Ongoing 6539 Ongoing
6540 A supetype that appeas only on scheme cads. See ule 205.4, “Supetypes.” 6540 A supertype that appears only on scheme cards. See rule 205.4, “Supertypes.”
6541 6541
6542 Opening Hand 6542 Opening Hand
6543 The hand of cads a playe stats the game with, once the playe has decided not to take any futhe mulligans. See ule 103.4. 6543 The hand of cards a player starts the game with, once the player has decided not to take any further mulligans. See rule 103.4.
6544 6544
6545 Opponent 6545 Opponent
6546 Someone a playe is playing against. See ules 102.2 and 102.3. 6546 Someone a player is playing against. See rules 102.2 and 102.3.
6547 6547
6548 Option 6548 Option
6549 An additional ule o set of ules that can be used in a multiplaye game. See ule 800.2. 6549 An additional rule or set of rules that can be used in a multiplayer game. See rule 800.2.
6550 6550
6551 Oacle 6551 Oracle
6552 The efeence that contains the up-to-date wodings (in English) fo all tounament-legal cads. A cad’s Oacle text can be found using the Gathee cad database at Gathee.Wizads.com. See ule 108.1. 6552 The reference that contains the up-to-date wordings (in English) for all tournament-legal cards. A card’s Oracle text can be found using the Gatherer card database at Gatherer.Wizards.com. See rule 108.1.
6553 6553
6554 Outlast 6554 Outlast
6555 A keywod ability that allows a ceatue to gow lage ove time. See ule 702.106, “Outlast.” 6555 A keyword ability that allows a creature to grow larger over time. See rule 702.106, “Outlast.”
6556 6556
6557 Outside the Game 6557 Outside the Game
6558 An object is “outside the game” if it isn’t in any of the game’s zones. See ule 400.10. 6558 An object is “outside the game” if it isn’t in any of the game’s zones. See rule 400.10.
6559 6559
6560 Oveload 6560 Overload
6561 A keywod ability that allows a spell to affect eithe a single taget o many objects. See ule 702.95, “Oveload.” 6561 A keyword ability that allows a spell to affect either a single target or many objects. See rule 702.95, “Overload.”
6562 6562
6563 Owne 6563 Owner
6564 The playe who (fo puposes of the game) a cad, pemanent, token, o spell belongs to. See ules 108.3, 110.2, 111.2, and 112.2. 6564 The player who (for purposes of the game) a card, permanent, token, or spell belongs to. See rules 108.3, 110.2, 111.2, and 112.2.
6565 6565
6566 Paied 6566 Paired
6567 A tem that descibes a ceatue that’s been affected by a soulbond ability. See ule 702.94, “Soulbond.” 6567 A term that describes a creature that’s been affected by a soulbond ability. See rule 702.94, “Soulbond.”
6568 6568
6569 Pais Mulligan 6569 Paris Mulligan
6570 Infomal tem fo a pevious system of taking a mulligan. Using the Pais mulligan, a playe who took a mulligan shuffled thei hand into thei libay and dew one fewe cad. Fo cuent mulligan ules, see ule 103.4. 6570 Informal term for a previous system of taking a mulligan. Using the Paris mulligan, a player who took a mulligan shuffled their hand into their library and drew one fewer card. For current mulligan rules, see rule 103.4.
6571 6571
6572 Patne, “Patne with [name]” 6572 Partner, “Partner with [name]”
6573 A keywod ability that lets two legenday ceatues o planeswalkes be you commande in the Commande vaiant athe than one. “Patne with [name]” is a specialized vesion of the ability that woks even outside of the Commande vaiant to help two cads each the battlefield togethe. See ule 702.123, “Patne,” and ule 903, “Commande.” 6573 A keyword ability that lets two legendary creatures or planeswalkers be your commander in the Commander variant rather than one. “Partner with [name]” is a specialized version of the ability that works even outside of the Commander variant to help two cards reach the battlefield together. See rule 702.123, “Partner,” and rule 903, “Commander.”
6574 6574
6575 Pass 6575 Pass
6576 To decline to take any action (such as casting a spell o activating an ability) when you have pioity. See ule 117, “Timing and Pioity.” 6576 To decline to take any action (such as casting a spell or activating an ability) when you have priority. See rule 117, “Timing and Priority.”
6577 6577
6578 Pass in Succession 6578 Pass in Succession
6579 All playes “pass in succession” if each playe in the game (stating with any one of them) opts not to take an action upon eceiving pioity. See ule 117, “Timing and Pioity.” 6579 All players “pass in succession” if each player in the game (starting with any one of them) opts not to take an action upon receiving priority. See rule 117, “Timing and Priority.”
6580 6580
6581 Pay 6581 Pay
6582 To pefom the actions equied by a cost. This often means, but is not esticted to, spending esouces such as mana o life. See ule 118, “Costs.” 6582 To perform the actions required by a cost. This often means, but is not restricted to, spending resources such as mana or life. See rule 118, “Costs.”
6583 6583
6584 Pemanent 6584 Permanent
6585 A cad o token on the battlefield. See ule 110, “Pemanents.” 6585 A card or token on the battlefield. See rule 110, “Permanents.”
6586 6586
6587 Pemanent Cad 6587 Permanent Card
6588 A cad that could be put onto the battlefield. See ule 110.4a. 6588 A card that could be put onto the battlefield. See rule 110.4a.
6589 6589
6590 Pemanent Spell 6590 Permanent Spell
6591 A spell that will ente the battlefield as a pemanent as pat of its esolution. See ule 110.4b. 6591 A spell that will enter the battlefield as a permanent as part of its resolution. See rule 110.4b.
6592 6592
6593 Pemanently (Obsolete) 6593 Permanently (Obsolete)
6594 An obsolete tem used to indicate that a continuous effect has no duation and thus lasts until the end of the game. Cads pinted with this tem have eceived eata in the Oacle cad efeence to delete it. 6594 An obsolete term used to indicate that a continuous effect has no duration and thus lasts until the end of the game. Cards printed with this term have received errata in the Oracle card reference to delete it.
6595 6595
6596 Pesist 6596 Persist
6597 A keywod ability that can etun a ceatue fom the gaveyad to the battlefield. See ule 702.78, “Pesist.” 6597 A keyword ability that can return a creature from the graveyard to the battlefield. See rule 702.78, “Persist.”
6598 6598
6599 Phase 6599 Phase
6600 1. A subsection of a tun. See section 5, “Tun Stuctue.” 6600 1. A subsection of a turn. See section 5, “Turn Structure.”
6601 2. A pemanent “phases in” when its status changes fom phased out to phased in. A pemanent “phases out” when its status changes fom phased in to phased out. See ule 702.25, “Phasing.” 6601 2. A permanent “phases in” when its status changes from phased out to phased in. A permanent “phases out” when its status changes from phased in to phased out. See rule 702.25, “Phasing.”
6602 6602
6603 Phased In, Phased Out 6603 Phased In, Phased Out
6604 A status a pemanent may have. Phased-in is the default status. Phased-out pemanents ae teated as though they do not exist. See ule 110.5 and ule 702.25, “Phasing.” (“Phased-out” was a zone in olde vesions of the ules.) 6604 A status a permanent may have. Phased-in is the default status. Phased-out permanents are treated as though they do not exist. See rule 110.5 and rule 702.25, “Phasing.” (“Phased-out” was a zone in older versions of the rules.)
6605 6605
6606 Phasing 6606 Phasing
6607 A keywod ability that causes a pemanent to sometimes be teated as though it does not exist. See ule 702.25, “Phasing.” 6607 A keyword ability that causes a permanent to sometimes be treated as though it does not exist. See rule 702.25, “Phasing.”
6608 6608
6609 Phenomenon 6609 Phenomenon
6610 A cad type seen only on nontaditional Magic cads in the Planechase casual vaiant. A phenomenon cad is not a pemanent. See ule 310, “Phenomena.” 6610 A card type seen only on nontraditional Magic cards in the Planechase casual variant. A phenomenon card is not a permanent. See rule 310, “Phenomena.”
6611 6611
6612 Phyexian Mana Symbol 6612 Phyrexian Mana Symbol
6613 A mana symbol that epesents a cost that can be paid eithe by spending coloed mana o by paying life. See ule 107.4. 6613 A mana symbol that represents a cost that can be paid either by spending colored mana or by paying life. See rule 107.4.
6614 6614
6615 Phyexian Symbol 6615 Phyrexian Symbol
6616 A symbol used in ules text to epesent any of the five Phyexian mana symbols. See ule 107.4g. 6616 A symbol used in rules text to represent any of the five Phyrexian mana symbols. See rule 107.4g.
6617 6617
6618 Pile 6618 Pile
6619 A tempoay gouping of cads. See ule 700.3. 6619 A temporary grouping of cards. See rule 700.3.
6620 6620
6621 Placed 6621 Placed
6622 (Obsolete) Some spells and abilities peviously efeed to a counte being “placed” on a pemanent. These cads have eceived eata in the Oacle cad efeence to use the tem “put” instead. Due to a ules change, these cads continue to function as they did befoe. See ule 122, “Countes.” 6622 (Obsolete) Some spells and abilities previously referred to a counter being “placed” on a permanent. These cards have received errata in the Oracle card reference to use the term “put” instead. Due to a rules change, these cards continue to function as they did before. See rule 122, “Counters.”
6623 6623
6624 Plains 6624 Plains
6625 One of the five basic land types. Any land with this subtype has the ability “{T}: Add {W}.” See ule 305.6. 6625 One of the five basic land types. Any land with this subtype has the ability “{T}: Add {W}.” See rule 305.6.
6626 6626
6627 Plainscycling 6627 Plainscycling
6628 See Typecycling. 6628 See Typecycling.
6629 6629
6630 Plainswalk 6630 Plainswalk
6631 See Landwalk. 6631 See Landwalk.
6632 6632
6633 Plana Deck 6633 Planar Deck
6634 A deck of at least ten plane cads needed to play the Planechase casual vaiant. See ule 901.3. 6634 A deck of at least ten plane cards needed to play the Planechase casual variant. See rule 901.3.
6635 6635
6636 Plana Die 6636 Planar Die
6637 A specialized six-sided die needed to play the Planechase casual vaiant. See ule 901.3. 6637 A specialized six-sided die needed to play the Planechase casual variant. See rule 901.3.
6638 6638
6639 Plane 6639 Plane
6640 A cad type seen only on nontaditional Magic cads in the Planechase casual vaiant. A plane cad is not a pemanent. See ule 309, “Planes.” 6640 A card type seen only on nontraditional Magic cards in the Planechase casual variant. A plane card is not a permanent. See rule 309, “Planes.”
6641 6641
6642 Planechase 6642 Planechase
6643 A casual vaiant in which plane cads and phenomenon cads add additional abilities and andomness to the game. See ule 901, “Planechase.” 6643 A casual variant in which plane cards and phenomenon cards add additional abilities and randomness to the game. See rule 901, “Planechase.”
6644 6644
6645 Planeswalk 6645 Planeswalk
6646 To put each face-up plane cad o phenomenon cad on the bottom of its owne’s plana deck face down, then move the top cad of you plana deck off that plana deck and tun it face up in a Planechase game. See ule 701.23, “Planeswalk.” 6646 To put each face-up plane card or phenomenon card on the bottom of its owner’s planar deck face down, then move the top card of your planar deck off that planar deck and turn it face up in a Planechase game. See rule 701.23, “Planeswalk.”
6647 6647
6648 Planeswalke 6648 Planeswalker
6649 A cad type. A planeswalke is a pemanent. See ule 306, “Planeswalkes.” 6649 A card type. A planeswalker is a permanent. See rule 306, “Planeswalkers.”
6650 6650
6651 Planeswalke Symbol 6651 Planeswalker Symbol
6652 The Planeswalke symbol {PW} appeas on the plana die in the Planechase casual vaiant. See ule 107.11. 6652 The Planeswalker symbol {PW} appears on the planar die in the Planechase casual variant. See rule 107.11.
6653 6653
6654 Planeswalke Type 6654 Planeswalker Type
6655 A subtype that’s coelated to the planeswalke cad type. See ule 306, “Planeswalkes.” See ule 205.3j fo the list of planeswalke types. 6655 A subtype that’s correlated to the planeswalker card type. See rule 306, “Planeswalkers.” See rule 205.3j for the list of planeswalker types.
6656 6656
6657 Planeswalke Uniqueness Rule (Obsolete) 6657 Planeswalker Uniqueness Rule (Obsolete)
6658 Olde vesions of the ules stated that a playe who contolled two o moe planeswalkes with the same planeswalke type would put all but one of those planeswalkes into thei ownes’ gaveyads. This ule was called the “planeswalke uniqueness ule” and no longe exists. 6658 Older versions of the rules stated that a player who controlled two or more planeswalkers with the same planeswalker type would put all but one of those planeswalkers into their owners’ graveyards. This rule was called the “planeswalker uniqueness rule” and no longer exists.
6659 6659
6660 Play 6660 Play
6661 1. To play a land is to put a land onto the battlefield as a special action. See ule 116, “Special Actions,” and ule 305, “Lands.” 6661 1. To play a land is to put a land onto the battlefield as a special action. See rule 116, “Special Actions,” and rule 305, “Lands.”
6662 2. To play a cad is to play that cad as a land o cast that cad as a spell, whicheve is appopiate. See ule 601, “Casting Spells.” 6662 2. To play a card is to play that card as a land or cast that card as a spell, whichever is appropriate. See rule 601, “Casting Spells.”
6663 3. (Obsolete) Casting a spell used to be known as playing a spell. Cads with that text have eceived eata in the Oacle cad efeence. See Cast. 6663 3. (Obsolete) Casting a spell used to be known as playing a spell. Cards with that text have received errata in the Oracle card reference. See Cast.
6664 4. (Obsolete) Activating an activated ability used to be known as playing an activated ability. Cads with that text have eceived eata in the Oacle cad efeence. See Activate. 6664 4. (Obsolete) Activating an activated ability used to be known as playing an activated ability. Cards with that text have received errata in the Oracle card reference. See Activate.
6665 5. (Obsolete) The battlefield used to be known as the in-play zone. Cads that wee pinted with text that contains the phases “in play,” “fom play,” “into play,” o the like ae efeing to the battlefield and have eceived eata in the Oacle cad efeence. See Battlefield. 6665 5. (Obsolete) The battlefield used to be known as the in-play zone. Cards that were printed with text that contains the phrases “in play,” “from play,” “into play,” or the like are referring to the battlefield and have received errata in the Oracle card reference. See Battlefield.
6666 6666
6667 Playe 6667 Player
6668 One of the people in the game. See ule 102, “Playes.” 6668 One of the people in the game. See rule 102, “Players.”
6669 6669
6670 Poison Counte 6670 Poison Counter
6671 A counte that may be given to a playe. See ule 122, “Countes,” and ule 704.5c. 6671 A counter that may be given to a player. See rule 122, “Counters,” and rule 704.5c.
6672 6672
6673 Poisoned 6673 Poisoned
6674 Having one o moe poison countes. See ule 122, “Countes.” 6674 Having one or more poison counters. See rule 122, “Counters.”
6675 6675
6676 Poisonous 6676 Poisonous
6677 A keywod ability that causes a playe to get poison countes. See ule 702.69, “Poisonous.” 6677 A keyword ability that causes a player to get poison counters. See rule 702.69, “Poisonous.”
6678 6678
6679 Poly Atifact (Obsolete) 6679 Poly Artifact (Obsolete)
6680 An obsolete tem that appeaed on the type line of atifacts with activated abilities that didn’t cause the atifact to be tapped as a cost. Cads pinted with this text have eceived eata in the Oacle cad efeence to simply say “Atifact.” 6680 An obsolete term that appeared on the type line of artifacts with activated abilities that didn’t cause the artifact to be tapped as a cost. Cards printed with this text have received errata in the Oracle card reference to simply say “Artifact.”
6681 6681
6682 Populate 6682 Populate
6683 A keywod action that ceates a copy of a ceatue token you contol. See ule 701.29, “Populate.” 6683 A keyword action that creates a copy of a creature token you control. See rule 701.29, “Populate.”
6684 6684
6685 Postcombat Main Phase 6685 Postcombat Main Phase
6686 A main phase that occus afte a combat phase. See Main Phase. 6686 A main phase that occurs after a combat phase. See Main Phase.
6687 6687
6688 Powe 6688 Power
6689 1. Pat of a cad that only ceatues have. A ceatue cad’s powe is pinted befoe the slash in its lowe ight cone. See ule 208, “Powe/Toughness.” 6689 1. Part of a card that only creatures have. A creature card’s power is printed before the slash in its lower right corner. See rule 208, “Power/Toughness.”
6690 2. A chaacteistic that only ceatues have. See ule 302.4. 6690 2. A characteristic that only creatures have. See rule 302.4.
6691 6691
6692 Pecombat Main Phase 6692 Precombat Main Phase
6693 The fist main phase of a tun. See Main Phase. 6693 The first main phase of a turn. See Main Phase.
6694 6694
6695 Pevent 6695 Prevent
6696 A wod used by pevention effects to indicate what damage will not be dealt. See ule 615, “Pevention Effects.” 6696 A word used by prevention effects to indicate what damage will not be dealt. See rule 615, “Prevention Effects.”
6697 6697
6698 Pevention Effect 6698 Prevention Effect
6699 A kind of continuous effect that watches fo a damage event that would happen and completely o patially pevents the damage that would be dealt. See ule 615, “Pevention Effects.” 6699 A kind of continuous effect that watches for a damage event that would happen and completely or partially prevents the damage that would be dealt. See rule 615, “Prevention Effects.”
6700 6700
6701 Pioity 6701 Priority
6702 Which playe can take actions at any given time is detemined by a system of “pioity.” See ule 117, “Timing and Pioity.” 6702 Which player can take actions at any given time is determined by a system of “priority.” See rule 117, “Timing and Priority.”
6703 6703
6704 Polifeate 6704 Proliferate
6705 To give an additional counte to any numbe of playes and/o pemanents of each kind they aleady have. See ule 701.26, “Polifeate.” 6705 To give an additional counter to any number of players and/or permanents of each kind they already have. See rule 701.26, “Proliferate.”
6706 6706
6707 Potection 6707 Protection
6708 A keywod ability that povides a ange of benefits against objects with a specific quality. See ule 702.16, “Potection.” 6708 A keyword ability that provides a range of benefits against objects with a specific quality. See rule 702.16, “Protection.”
6709 6709
6710 Povoke 6710 Provoke
6711 A keywod ability that can foce a ceatue to block. See ule 702.38, “Povoke.” 6711 A keyword ability that can force a creature to block. See rule 702.38, “Provoke.”
6712 6712
6713 Powess 6713 Prowess
6714 A keywod ability that causes a ceatue to get +1/+1 wheneve its contolle casts a nonceatue spell. See ule 702.107, “Powess.” 6714 A keyword ability that causes a creature to get +1/+1 whenever its controller casts a noncreature spell. See rule 702.107, “Prowess.”
6715 6715
6716 Powl 6716 Prowl
6717 A keywod ability that may allow a spell to be cast fo an altenative cost. See ule 702.75, “Powl.” 6717 A keyword ability that may allow a spell to be cast for an alternative cost. See rule 702.75, “Prowl.”
6718 6718
6719 Public Zone 6719 Public Zone
6720 A zone in which all playes can be expected to see the cads’ faces. See ule 400.2. See also Hidden Zone. 6720 A zone in which all players can be expected to see the cards’ faces. See rule 400.2. See also Hidden Zone.
6721 6721
6722 Rampage 6722 Rampage
6723 A keywod ability that can make a ceatue bette in combat. See ule 702.22, “Rampage.” 6723 A keyword ability that can make a creature better in combat. See rule 702.22, “Rampage.”
6724 6724
6725 Range of Influence 6725 Range of Influence
6726 See Limited Range of Influence. 6726 See Limited Range of Influence.
6727 6727
6728 Reach 6728 Reach
6729 A keywod ability that allows a ceatue to block an attacking ceatue with flying. See ule 702.17, “Reach.” See also Flying. 6729 A keyword ability that allows a creature to block an attacking creature with flying. See rule 702.17, “Reach.” See also Flying.
6730 6730
6731 Rebound 6731 Rebound
6732 A keywod ability that allows an instant o socey spell to be cast a second time. See ule 702.87, “Rebound.” 6732 A keyword ability that allows an instant or sorcery spell to be cast a second time. See rule 702.87, “Rebound.”
6733 6733
6734 Recove 6734 Recover
6735 A keywod ability that lets a playe etun a cad fom thei gaveyad to thei hand. See ule 702.58, “Recove.” 6735 A keyword ability that lets a player return a card from their graveyard to their hand. See rule 702.58, “Recover.”
6736 6736
6737 Rediect (Obsolete) 6737 Redirect (Obsolete)
6738 Some olde cads wee pinted with the tem “ediect” to indicate a ediection effect. Such cads have eceived eata in the Oacle cad efeence so they explicitly state that damage that would be dealt to one object o playe is dealt “instead” to anothe. See Rediection Effect. 6738 Some older cards were printed with the term “redirect” to indicate a redirection effect. Such cards have received errata in the Oracle card reference so they explicitly state that damage that would be dealt to one object or player is dealt “instead” to another. See Redirection Effect.
6739 6739
6740 Rediection Effect 6740 Redirection Effect
6741 A kind of eplacement effect that causes damage that would be dealt to one ceatue, planeswalke, o playe to be dealt instead to anothe ceatue, planeswalke, o playe. See ule 614.9. 6741 A kind of replacement effect that causes damage that would be dealt to one creature, planeswalker, or player to be dealt instead to another creature, planeswalker, or player. See rule 614.9.
6742 6742
6743 Reflexive Tiggeed Ability 6743 Reflexive Triggered Ability
6744 An ability that tigges based on actions taken ealie duing a spell o ability’s esolution. See ule 603.12. 6744 An ability that triggers based on actions taken earlier during a spell or ability’s resolution. See rule 603.12.
6745 6745
6746 Regeneate 6746 Regenerate
6747 To eplace a pemanent’s destuction with an altenate sequence of events. See ule 701.14, “Regeneate.” 6747 To replace a permanent’s destruction with an alternate sequence of events. See rule 701.14, “Regenerate.”
6748 6748
6749 Reinfoce 6749 Reinforce
6750 A keywod ability that lets a playe put +1/+1 countes on a ceatue. See ule 702.76, “Reinfoce.” 6750 A keyword ability that lets a player put +1/+1 counters on a creature. See rule 702.76, “Reinforce.”
6751 6751
6752 Reminde Text 6752 Reminder Text
6753 Paenthetical text in italics in the text box of a cad that summaizes a ule that applies to that cad, but is not actually ules text and has no effect on play. See ule 207.2. 6753 Parenthetical text in italics in the text box of a card that summarizes a rule that applies to that card, but is not actually rules text and has no effect on play. See rule 207.2.
6754 6754
6755 Removed fom Combat 6755 Removed from Combat
6756 Cetain events can cause an attacking o blocking ceatue, o a planeswalke that’s being attacked, to be “emoved fom combat.” A pemanent that’s emoved fom combat has no futhe involvement in that combat phase. See ule 506.4. 6756 Certain events can cause an attacking or blocking creature, or a planeswalker that’s being attacked, to be “removed from combat.” A permanent that’s removed from combat has no further involvement in that combat phase. See rule 506.4.
6757 6757
6758 Remove fom the Game, Removed, Removed-fom-the-Game Zone (Obsolete) 6758 Remove from the Game, Removed, Removed-from-the-Game Zone (Obsolete)
6759 “Remove [something] fom the game” is an obsolete tem fo “exile [something].” “The emoved cad” is an obsolete tem fo “the exiled cad.” The emoved-fom-the-game zone is an obsolete tem fo the exile zone. Cads with that text have eceived eata in the Oacle cad efeence. See Exile. 6759 “Remove [something] from the game” is an obsolete term for “exile [something].” “The removed card” is an obsolete term for “the exiled card.” The removed-from-the-game zone is an obsolete term for the exile zone. Cards with that text have received errata in the Oracle card reference. See Exile.
6760 6760
6761 Renown 6761 Renown
6762 A keywod ability that makes a ceatue stonge afte it deals combat damage to a playe. See ule 702.111, “Renown.” 6762 A keyword ability that makes a creature stronger after it deals combat damage to a player. See rule 702.111, “Renown.”
6763 6763
6764 Renowned 6764 Renowned
6765 A designation given to a pemanent as a esult of the enown ability. See ule 702.111, “Renown.” 6765 A designation given to a permanent as a result of the renown ability. See rule 702.111, “Renown.”
6766 6766
6767 Replacement Effect 6767 Replacement Effect
6768 A kind of continuous effect that watches fo a paticula event that would happen and completely o patially eplaces that event with a diffeent event. See ule 614, “Replacement Effects.” 6768 A kind of continuous effect that watches for a particular event that would happen and completely or partially replaces that event with a different event. See rule 614, “Replacement Effects.”
6769 6769
6770 Replicate 6770 Replicate
6771 A keywod ability that ceates copies of a spell. See ule 702.55, “Replicate.” 6771 A keyword ability that creates copies of a spell. See rule 702.55, “Replicate.”
6772 6772
6773 Requiement 6773 Requirement
6774 An effect that foces one o moe ceatues to attack o block. See ules 508.1d and 509.1c. 6774 An effect that forces one or more creatures to attack or block. See rules 508.1d and 509.1c.
6775 6775
6776 Resolve 6776 Resolve
6777 When the spell o ability on top of the stack “esolves,” its instuctions ae followed and it has its effect. See ule 608, “Resolving Spells and Abilities.” 6777 When the spell or ability on top of the stack “resolves,” its instructions are followed and it has its effect. See rule 608, “Resolving Spells and Abilities.”
6778 6778
6779 Restat the Game 6779 Restart the Game
6780 To immediately end the cuent game and estat it. See ule 104, “Ending the Game.” 6780 To immediately end the current game and restart it. See rule 104, “Ending the Game.”
6781 6781
6782 Respond 6782 Respond
6783 To cast an instant spell o activate an ability while anothe spell o ability is aleady on the stack. See ule 117.7. 6783 To cast an instant spell or activate an ability while another spell or ability is already on the stack. See rule 117.7.
6784 6784
6785 Restiction 6785 Restriction
6786 An effect that pecludes one o moe ceatues fom attacking o blocking. See ules 508.1c and 509.1b. 6786 An effect that precludes one or more creatures from attacking or blocking. See rules 508.1c and 509.1b.
6787 6787
6788 Retace 6788 Retrace
6789 A keywod ability that lets a playe cast a cad fom thei gaveyad. See ule 702.80, “Retace.” 6789 A keyword ability that lets a player cast a card from their graveyard. See rule 702.80, “Retrace.”
6790 6790
6791 Reveal 6791 Reveal
6792 To show a cad to all playes fo a bief time. See ule 701.15, “Reveal.” 6792 To show a card to all players for a brief time. See rule 701.15, “Reveal.”
6793 6793
6794 Riot 6794 Riot
6795 A keywod ability that lets a playe choose whethe cetain ceatues ente the battlefield with haste o with a +1/+1 counte. See ule 702.135, “Riot.” 6795 A keyword ability that lets a player choose whether certain creatures enter the battlefield with haste or with a +1/+1 counter. See rule 702.135, “Riot.”
6796 6796
6797 Ripple 6797 Ripple
6798 A keywod ability that may let a playe cast exta cads fom thei libay fo no cost. See ule 702.59, “Ripple.” 6798 A keyword ability that may let a player cast extra cards from their library for no cost. See rule 702.59, “Ripple.”
6799 6799
6800 Rules Text 6800 Rules Text
6801 A chaacteistic that defines a cad’s abilities. See ule 207.1. 6801 A characteristic that defines a card’s abilities. See rule 207.1.
6802 6802
6803 Sacifice 6803 Sacrifice
6804 To move a pemanent you contol to its owne’s gaveyad. See ule 701.16, “Sacifice.” 6804 To move a permanent you control to its owner’s graveyard. See rule 701.16, “Sacrifice.”
6805 6805
6806 Saga 6806 Saga
6807 An enchantment subtype. Sagas have a numbe of chapte abilities that take effect ove a numbe of tuns to tell a stoy. See ule 714, “Saga Cads.” 6807 An enchantment subtype. Sagas have a number of chapter abilities that take effect over a number of turns to tell a story. See rule 714, “Saga Cards.”
6808 6808
6809 Scavenge 6809 Scavenge
6810 A keywod ability that allows you to exile a ceatue cad fom you gaveyad to put +1/+1 countes on a ceatue. See ule 702.96, “Scavenge.” 6810 A keyword ability that allows you to exile a creature card from your graveyard to put +1/+1 counters on a creature. See rule 702.96, “Scavenge.”
6811 6811
6812 Scheme 6812 Scheme
6813 A cad type seen only on nontaditional Magic cads in the Achenemy casual vaiant. A scheme cad is not a pemanent. See ule 312, “Schemes.” 6813 A card type seen only on nontraditional Magic cards in the Archenemy casual variant. A scheme card is not a permanent. See rule 312, “Schemes.”
6814 6814
6815 Scy 6815 Scry
6816 To manipulate some of the cads on top of you libay. See ule 701.17, “Scy.” 6816 To manipulate some of the cards on top of your library. See rule 701.17, “Scry.”
6817 6817
6818 Seach 6818 Search
6819 To look at all cads in a stated zone and possibly find a cad that matches a given desciption. See ule 701.18, “Seach.” 6819 To look at all cards in a stated zone and possibly find a card that matches a given description. See rule 701.18, “Search.”
6820 6820
6821 Set Aside (Obsolete) 6821 Set Aside (Obsolete)
6822 “Set [something] aside” is an obsolete tem fo “exile [something].” Cads with that text have eceived eata in the Oacle cad efeence. See Exile. 6822 “Set [something] aside” is an obsolete term for “exile [something].” Cards with that text have received errata in the Oracle card reference. See Exile.
6823 6823
6824 Set in Motion 6824 Set in Motion
6825 To move a scheme cad off the top of you scheme deck and tun it face up. See ule 701.24, “Set in Motion.” 6825 To move a scheme card off the top of your scheme deck and turn it face up. See rule 701.24, “Set in Motion.”
6826 6826
6827 Shadow 6827 Shadow
6828 A keywod ability that esticts how a ceatue may be blocked and which ceatues it can block. See ule 702.27, “Shadow.” 6828 A keyword ability that restricts how a creature may be blocked and which creatures it can block. See rule 702.27, “Shadow.”
6829 6829
6830 Shaed Life Total 6830 Shared Life Total
6831 In the Two-Headed Giant multiplaye vaiant, each team has a “shaed life total” athe than each playe having an individual life total. See ule 810, “Two-Headed Giant Vaiant.” 6831 In the Two-Headed Giant multiplayer variant, each team has a “shared life total” rather than each player having an individual life total. See rule 810, “Two-Headed Giant Variant.”
6832 6832
6833 Shaed Team Tuns Option 6833 Shared Team Turns Option
6834 An option that may be used in cetain multiplaye vaiants, such as Two-Headed Giant and Achenemy. See ule 805, “Shaed Team Tuns Option.” 6834 An option that may be used in certain multiplayer variants, such as Two-Headed Giant and Archenemy. See rule 805, “Shared Team Turns Option.”
6835 6835
6836 Shotcut 6836 Shortcut
6837 A mutually undestood way fo the game to advance fowad a numbe of game choices (eithe taking an action o passing pioity) without playes needing to explicitly identify each such choice. See ule 721, “Taking Shotcuts.” 6837 A mutually understood way for the game to advance forward a number of game choices (either taking an action or passing priority) without players needing to explicitly identify each such choice. See rule 721, “Taking Shortcuts.”
6838 6838
6839 Shoud 6839 Shroud
6840 A keywod ability that pecludes a pemanent o playe fom being tageted. See ule 702.18, “Shoud.” 6840 A keyword ability that precludes a permanent or player from being targeted. See rule 702.18, “Shroud.”
6841 6841
6842 Shuffle 6842 Shuffle
6843 To andomize the cads in a deck (befoe a game) o libay (duing a game). See ule 103.1. 6843 To randomize the cards in a deck (before a game) or library (during a game). See rule 103.1.
6844 6844
6845 Sideboad 6845 Sideboard
6846 Exta cads that may be used to modify a deck between games of a match. See ules 100.4. 6846 Extra cards that may be used to modify a deck between games of a match. See rules 100.4.
6847 6847
6848 Silve-Bodeed 6848 Silver-Bordered
6849 Cads in cetain sets and cetain pomotional cads ae pinted with a silve bode. Silve-bodeed cads ae intended fo casual play and may have featues and text that aen’t coveed by these ules. 6849 Cards in certain sets and certain promotional cards are printed with a silver border. Silver-bordered cards are intended for casual play and may have features and text that aren’t covered by these rules.
6850 6850
6851 Skip 6851 Skip
6852 Effects that use the wod “skip” ae eplacement effects. The wod “skip” indicates what events, steps, phases, o tuns will be eplaced with nothing. See ule 614, “Replacement Effects.” 6852 Effects that use the word “skip” are replacement effects. The word “skip” indicates what events, steps, phases, or turns will be replaced with nothing. See rule 614, “Replacement Effects.”
6853 6853
6854 Skulk 6854 Skulk
6855 A keywod ability that esticts how a ceatue may be blocked. See ule 702.117, “Skulk.” 6855 A keyword ability that restricts how a creature may be blocked. See rule 702.117, “Skulk.”
6856 6856
6857 Slivecycling 6857 Slivercycling
6858 See Typecycling. 6858 See Typecycling.
6859 6859
6860 Snow 6860 Snow
6861 A supetype that’s nomally elevant on pemanents. See ule 205.4, “Supetypes.” 6861 A supertype that’s normally relevant on permanents. See rule 205.4, “Supertypes.”
6862 6862
6863 Snow Mana Symbol 6863 Snow Mana Symbol
6864 The snow mana symbol {S} epesents a cost that can be paid with one mana poduced by a snow pemanent. See ule 107.4h. 6864 The snow mana symbol {S} represents a cost that can be paid with one mana produced by a snow permanent. See rule 107.4h.
6865 6865
6866 Snow-Coveed (Obsolete) 6866 Snow-Covered (Obsolete)
6867 Some olde cads wee pinted with the tem “snow-coveed” in thei ules text. Except when efeencing cad names, such cads have eceived eata in the Oacle cad efeence to efeence the supetype “snow” instead. See Snow. 6867 Some older cards were printed with the term “snow-covered” in their rules text. Except when referencing card names, such cards have received errata in the Oracle card reference to reference the supertype “snow” instead. See Snow.
6868 6868
6869 Socey 6869 Sorcery
6870 A cad type. A socey is not a pemanent. See ule 307, “Soceies.” 6870 A card type. A sorcery is not a permanent. See rule 307, “Sorceries.”
6871 6871
6872 Soulbond 6872 Soulbond
6873 A keywod ability that makes ceatues bette by paiing them togethe. See ule 702.94, “Soulbond.” 6873 A keyword ability that makes creatures better by pairing them together. See rule 702.94, “Soulbond.”
6874 6874
6875 Soulshift 6875 Soulshift
6876 A keywod ability that lets a playe etun a cad fom thei gaveyad to thei hand. See ule 702.45, “Soulshift.” 6876 A keyword ability that lets a player return a card from their graveyard to their hand. See rule 702.45, “Soulshift.”
6877 6877
6878 Souce of an Ability 6878 Source of an Ability
6879 The object that geneated that ability. See ule 113.7. 6879 The object that generated that ability. See rule 113.7.
6880 6880
6881 Souce of Damage 6881 Source of Damage
6882 The object that dealt that damage. See ule 609.7. 6882 The object that dealt that damage. See rule 609.7.
6883 6883
6884 Special Action 6884 Special Action
6885 An action a playe may take that doesn’t use the stack. See ule 116, “Special Actions.” 6885 An action a player may take that doesn’t use the stack. See rule 116, “Special Actions.”
6886 6886
6887 Spectacle 6887 Spectacle
6888 A keywod ability that allows cetain spells to be cast fo an altenative cost if an opponent has lost life. See ule 702.136, “Spectacle.” 6888 A keyword ability that allows certain spells to be cast for an alternative cost if an opponent has lost life. See rule 702.136, “Spectacle.”
6889 6889
6890 Spell 6890 Spell
6891 A cad on the stack. Also a copy (of eithe a cad o anothe spell) on the stack. See ule 112, “Spells.” 6891 A card on the stack. Also a copy (of either a card or another spell) on the stack. See rule 112, “Spells.”
6892 6892
6893 Spell Ability 6893 Spell Ability
6894 A kind of ability. Spell abilities ae abilities that ae followed as instuctions while an instant o socey spell is esolving. See ule 113.3a. 6894 A kind of ability. Spell abilities are abilities that are followed as instructions while an instant or sorcery spell is resolving. See rule 113.3a.
6895 6895
6896 Spell Type 6896 Spell Type
6897 A subtype that’s coelated to the instant cad type and the socey cad type. See ule 304, “Instants,” and ule 307, “Soceies.” See ule 205.3k fo the list of spell types. 6897 A subtype that’s correlated to the instant card type and the sorcery card type. See rule 304, “Instants,” and rule 307, “Sorceries.” See rule 205.3k for the list of spell types.
6898 6898
6899 Splice 6899 Splice
6900 A keywod ability that lets a playe add a cad’s ules text onto anothe spell. See ule 702.46, “Splice.” 6900 A keyword ability that lets a player add a card’s rules text onto another spell. See rule 702.46, “Splice.”
6901 6901
6902 Split Cads 6902 Split Cards
6903 Cads with two cad faces on a single cad. See ule 708, “Split Cads.” 6903 Cards with two card faces on a single card. See rule 708, “Split Cards.”
6904 6904
6905 Split Second 6905 Split Second
6906 A keywod ability that makes it nealy impossible fo a playe to espond to a spell. See ule 702.60, “Split Second.” 6906 A keyword ability that makes it nearly impossible for a player to respond to a spell. See rule 702.60, “Split Second.”
6907 6907
6908 Stack 6908 Stack
6909 A zone. The stack is the zone in which spells, activated abilities, and tiggeed abilities wait to esolve. See ule 405, “Stack.” 6909 A zone. The stack is the zone in which spells, activated abilities, and triggered abilities wait to resolve. See rule 405, “Stack.”
6910 6910
6911 Stating Hand Size 6911 Starting Hand Size
6912 The numbe of cads a playe daws as a game begins. In most games, each playe’s stating hand size is seven. See ule 103.4. 6912 The number of cards a player draws as a game begins. In most games, each player’s starting hand size is seven. See rule 103.4.
6913 6913
6914 Stating Life Total 6914 Starting Life Total
6915 The amount of life a playe has as a game begins. In most games, each playe’s stating life total is 20. See ule 103.3. 6915 The amount of life a player has as a game begins. In most games, each player’s starting life total is 20. See rule 103.3.
6916 6916
6917 Stating Playe 6917 Starting Player
6918 The playe chosen to take the fist tun of a game. See ule 103.2. 6918 The player chosen to take the first turn of a game. See rule 103.2.
6919 6919
6920 Stating Team 6920 Starting Team
6921 The team chosen to take the fist tun of a game using the shaed team tuns option. See ule 103.2. 6921 The team chosen to take the first turn of a game using the shared team turns option. See rule 103.2.
6922 6922
6923 State-Based Actions 6923 State-Based Actions
6924 Game actions that happen automatically wheneve cetain conditions ae met. See ule 704, “State-Based Actions.” 6924 Game actions that happen automatically whenever certain conditions are met. See rule 704, “State-Based Actions.”
6925 6925
6926 State Tigge 6926 State Trigger
6927 A tiggeed ability that tigges when a game state is tue athe than tiggeing when an event occus. See ule 603.8. 6927 A triggered ability that triggers when a game state is true rather than triggering when an event occurs. See rule 603.8.
6928 6928
6929 Static Ability 6929 Static Ability
6930 A kind of ability. Static abilities do something all the time athe than being activated o tiggeed. See ule 113, “Abilities,” and ule 604, “Handling Static Abilities.” 6930 A kind of ability. Static abilities do something all the time rather than being activated or triggered. See rule 113, “Abilities,” and rule 604, “Handling Static Abilities.”
6931 6931
6932 Status 6932 Status
6933 The physical state of a pemanent. See ule 110.5. 6933 The physical state of a permanent. See rule 110.5.
6934 6934
6935 Step 6935 Step
6936 A subsection of a phase. See section 5, “Tun Stuctue.” 6936 A subsection of a phase. See section 5, “Turn Structure.”
6937 6937
6938 Stom 6938 Storm
6939 A keywod ability that ceates copies of a spell. See ule 702.39, “Stom.” 6939 A keyword ability that creates copies of a spell. See rule 702.39, “Storm.”
6940 6940
6941 Subgame 6941 Subgame
6942 A completely sepaate Magic game ceated by an effect. See ule 720, “Subgames.” 6942 A completely separate Magic game created by an effect. See rule 720, “Subgames.”
6943 6943
6944 Subtype 6944 Subtype
6945 A chaacteistic that appeas afte the cad type and a long dash on a cad’s type line. See ule 205.3, “Subtypes.” 6945 A characteristic that appears after the card type and a long dash on a card’s type line. See rule 205.3, “Subtypes.”
6946 6946
6947 Successfully Cast (Obsolete) 6947 Successfully Cast (Obsolete)
6948 A tem that was pinted on some olde cads. In geneal, cads that efeed to a spell being “successfully cast” have eceived eata in the Oacle cad efeence to simply efe to a spell being “cast.” 6948 A term that was printed on some older cards. In general, cards that referred to a spell being “successfully cast” have received errata in the Oracle card reference to simply refer to a spell being “cast.”
6949 6949
6950 Summon (Obsolete) 6950 Summon (Obsolete)
6951 Olde ceatue cads wee pinted with “Summon [ceatue type]” on thei type lines. All such cads have eceived eata in the Oacle cad efeence to say “Ceatue — [ceatue type].” (Many of these cads’ ceatue types have also been updated.) See Ceatue. 6951 Older creature cards were printed with “Summon [creature type]” on their type lines. All such cards have received errata in the Oracle card reference to say “Creature — [creature type].” (Many of these cards’ creature types have also been updated.) See Creature.
6952 6952
6953 Summoning Sickness Rule 6953 Summoning Sickness Rule
6954 Infomal tem fo a playe’s inability to attack with a ceatue o to activate its abilities that include the tap symbol o the untap symbol unless the ceatue has been unde that playe’s contol since the beginning of that playe’s most ecent tun. See ule 302.6. See also Haste. 6954 Informal term for a player’s inability to attack with a creature or to activate its abilities that include the tap symbol or the untap symbol unless the creature has been under that player’s control since the beginning of that player’s most recent turn. See rule 302.6. See also Haste.
6955 6955
6956 Sunbust 6956 Sunburst
6957 A keywod ability that can have a pemanent ente the battlefield with +1/+1 countes o chage countes on it. See ule 702.43, “Sunbust.” 6957 A keyword ability that can have a permanent enter the battlefield with +1/+1 counters or charge counters on it. See rule 702.43, “Sunburst.”
6958 6958
6959 Supetype 6959 Supertype
6960 A chaacteistic that appeas befoe the cad type on a cad’s type line. Most cads don’t have a supetype. See ule 205.4, “Supetypes.” 6960 A characteristic that appears before the card type on a card’s type line. Most cards don’t have a supertype. See rule 205.4, “Supertypes.”
6961 6961
6962 Supevillain Rumble 6962 Supervillain Rumble
6963 A Fee-fo-All game in which each playe is an achenemy. See ule 806, “Fee-fo-All,” and ule 904, “Achenemy.” 6963 A Free-for-All game in which each player is an archenemy. See rule 806, “Free-for-All,” and rule 904, “Archenemy.”
6964 6964
6965 Suppot 6965 Support
6966 A keywod action that lets you put +1/+1 countes on ceatues. See ule 701.34, “Suppot.” 6966 A keyword action that lets you put +1/+1 counters on creatures. See rule 701.34, “Support.”
6967 6967
6968 Suge 6968 Surge
6969 A keywod ability that povides an altenative cost to cast a cad if you o one of you teammates has cast anothe spell in the same tun. See ule 702.116, “Suge.” 6969 A keyword ability that provides an alternative cost to cast a card if you or one of your teammates has cast another spell in the same turn. See rule 702.116, “Surge.”
6970 6970
6971 Suveil 6971 Surveil
6972 To manipulate some of the cads on top of you libay, sending some of them to you gaveyad and eaanging the est. See ule 701.41, “Suveil.” 6972 To manipulate some of the cards on top of your library, sending some of them to your graveyard and rearranging the rest. See rule 701.41, “Surveil.”
6973 6973
6974 Suspend 6974 Suspend
6975 A keywod ability that povides an altenative way to play a cad. See ule 702.61, “Suspend.” A cad is “suspended” if it’s in the exile zone, has suspend, and has a time counte on it. 6975 A keyword ability that provides an alternative way to play a card. See rule 702.61, “Suspend.” A card is “suspended” if it’s in the exile zone, has suspend, and has a time counter on it.
6976 6976
6977 Swamp 6977 Swamp
6978 One of the five basic land types. Any land with this subtype has the ability “{T}: Add {B}.” See ule 305.6. 6978 One of the five basic land types. Any land with this subtype has the ability “{T}: Add {B}.” See rule 305.6.
6979 6979
6980 Swampcycling 6980 Swampcycling
6981 See Typecycling. 6981 See Typecycling.
6982 6982
6983 Swampwalk 6983 Swampwalk
6984 See Landwalk. 6984 See Landwalk.
6985 6985
6986 Tap 6986 Tap
6987 To tun a pemanent sideways fom an upight position. See ule 701.20, “Tap and Untap.” 6987 To turn a permanent sideways from an upright position. See rule 701.20, “Tap and Untap.”
6988 6988
6989 Tapped 6989 Tapped
6990 A status a pemanent may have. See ule 110.5 and ule 701.20, “Tap and Untap.” See also Untapped. 6990 A status a permanent may have. See rule 110.5 and rule 701.20, “Tap and Untap.” See also Untapped.
6991 6991
6992 Tap Symbol 6992 Tap Symbol
6993 The tap symbol {T} in an activation cost means “Tap this pemanent.” See ule 107.5. 6993 The tap symbol {T} in an activation cost means “Tap this permanent.” See rule 107.5.
6994 6994
6995 Taget 6995 Target
6996 A peselected object o playe a spell o ability will affect. See ule 115, “Tagets.” 6996 A preselected object or player a spell or ability will affect. See rule 115, “Targets.”
6997 6997
6998 Team 6998 Team
6999 A goup of playes who shae a common victoy condition in a multiplaye game. See ule 808, “Team vs. Team Vaiant,” ule 809, “Empeo Vaiant,” ule 810, “Two-Headed Giant Vaiant,” and ule 811, “Altenating Teams Vaiant.” 6999 A group of players who share a common victory condition in a multiplayer game. See rule 808, “Team vs. Team Variant,” rule 809, “Emperor Variant,” rule 810, “Two-Headed Giant Variant,” and rule 811, “Alternating Teams Variant.”
7000 7000
7001 Teammate 7001 Teammate
7002 In a multiplaye game between teams, a playe’s teammates ae the othe playes on thei team. See ule 102.3. 7002 In a multiplayer game between teams, a player’s teammates are the other players on their team. See rule 102.3.
7003 7003
7004 Team vs. Team Vaiant 7004 Team vs. Team Variant
7005 A multiplaye vaiant played among two o moe teams, each of which sits togethe. See ule 808, “Team vs. Team Vaiant.” 7005 A multiplayer variant played among two or more teams, each of which sits together. See rule 808, “Team vs. Team Variant.”
7006 7006
7007 Text Box 7007 Text Box
7008 Pat of a cad. The text box is pinted on the lowe half of the cad and contains the cad’s ules text, eminde text, and flavo text. See ule 207, “Text Box.” 7008 Part of a card. The text box is printed on the lower half of the card and contains the card’s rules text, reminder text, and flavor text. See rule 207, “Text Box.”
7009 7009
7010 Text-Changing Effect 7010 Text-Changing Effect
7011 A continuous effect that changes the text that appeas in an object’s text box and/o type line. See ule 612, “Text-Changing Effects.” 7011 A continuous effect that changes the text that appears in an object’s text box and/or type line. See rule 612, “Text-Changing Effects.”
7012 7012
7013 Theshold 7013 Threshold
7014 “Theshold” used to be a keywod ability. It is now an ability wod and has no ules meaning. All cads pinted with the theshold keywod have eceived eata in the Oacle cad efeence. 7014 “Threshold” used to be a keyword ability. It is now an ability word and has no rules meaning. All cards printed with the threshold keyword have received errata in the Oracle card reference.
7015 7015
7016 Timestamp Ode 7016 Timestamp Order
7017 A system used to detemine in which ode continuous effects in the same laye o sublaye ae applied. See ule 613.6. See also Dependency. 7017 A system used to determine in which order continuous effects in the same layer or sublayer are applied. See rule 613.6. See also Dependency.
7018 7018
7019 Token 7019 Token
7020 A make used to epesent any pemanent that isn’t epesented by a cad. See ule 111, “Tokens.” 7020 A marker used to represent any permanent that isn’t represented by a card. See rule 111, “Tokens.”
7021 7021
7022 Tombstone Icon 7022 Tombstone Icon
7023 An icon that appeas in the uppe left of some Odyssey block cads that has no effect on game play. See ule 107.9. 7023 An icon that appears in the upper left of some Odyssey block cards that has no effect on game play. See rule 107.9.
7024 7024
7025 Total Casting Cost (Obsolete) 7025 Total Casting Cost (Obsolete)
7026 An obsolete tem fo conveted mana cost. Cads pinted with this text have eceived eata in the Oacle cad efeence. 7026 An obsolete term for converted mana cost. Cards printed with this text have received errata in the Oracle card reference.
7027 7027
7028 Total Cost 7028 Total Cost
7029 What a playe actually has to pay, in pactical tems, to cast a spell o activated ability: the mana cost, activation cost, o altenative cost, plus all cost inceases (including additional costs) and minus all cost eductions. See ule 601.2f. 7029 What a player actually has to pay, in practical terms, to cast a spell or activated ability: the mana cost, activation cost, or alternative cost, plus all cost increases (including additional costs) and minus all cost reductions. See rule 601.2f.
7030 7030
7031 Totem Amo 7031 Totem Armor
7032 A keywod ability that allows an Aua to potect the pemanent it’s enchanting. See ule 702.88, “Totem Amo.” 7032 A keyword ability that allows an Aura to protect the permanent it’s enchanting. See rule 702.88, “Totem Armor.”
7033 7033
7034 Toughness 7034 Toughness
7035 1. Pat of a cad that only ceatues have. A ceatue cad’s toughness is pinted afte the slash in its lowe ight cone. See ule 208, “Powe/Toughness.” 7035 1. Part of a card that only creatures have. A creature card’s toughness is printed after the slash in its lower right corner. See rule 208, “Power/Toughness.”
7036 2. A chaacteistic that only ceatues have. See ule 302.4. 7036 2. A characteristic that only creatures have. See rule 302.4.
7037 7037
7038 Tounament 7038 Tournament
7039 An oganized play activity whee playes compete against othe playes. See ule 100.6. 7039 An organized play activity where players compete against other players. See rule 100.6.
7040 7040
7041 Tounament Rules 7041 Tournament Rules
7042 Additional ules that apply to games played in a sanctioned tounament. See ule 100.6. 7042 Additional rules that apply to games played in a sanctioned tournament. See rule 100.6.
7043 7043
7044 Taditional Magic Cad 7044 Traditional Magic Card
7045 A Magic cad that measues appoximately 2.5 inches (6.3 centimetes) by 3.5 inches (8.8 centimetes). See ule 108.2. 7045 A Magic card that measures approximately 2.5 inches (6.3 centimeters) by 3.5 inches (8.8 centimeters). See rule 108.2.
7046 7046
7047 Tample 7047 Trample
7048 A keywod ability that modifies how a ceatue assigns combat damage. See ule 702.19, “Tample.” 7048 A keyword ability that modifies how a creature assigns combat damage. See rule 702.19, “Trample.”
7049 7049
7050 Tansfigue 7050 Transfigure
7051 A keywod ability that lets a playe seach thei libay fo a eplacement ceatue cad. See ule 702.70, “Tansfigue.” 7051 A keyword ability that lets a player search their library for a replacement creature card. See rule 702.70, “Transfigure.”
7052 7052
7053 Tansfom 7053 Transform
7054 To tun a double-faced cad so its othe face is up. See ule 701.27, “Tansfom.” 7054 To turn a double-faced card so its other face is up. See rule 701.27, “Transform.”
7055 7055
7056 Tansmute 7056 Transmute
7057 A keywod ability that lets a playe seach thei libay fo a eplacement cad. See ule 702.52, “Tansmute.” 7057 A keyword ability that lets a player search their library for a replacement card. See rule 702.52, “Transmute.”
7058 7058
7059 Teasue Token 7059 Treasure Token
7060 A Teasue token is a cololess atifact token with “{T}, Sacifice this atifact: Add one mana of any colo.” Fo moe infomation about pedefined tokens, see ule 111.10. 7060 A Treasure token is a colorless artifact token with “{T}, Sacrifice this artifact: Add one mana of any color.” For more information about predefined tokens, see rule 111.10.
7061 7061
7062 Tibal 7062 Tribal
7063 A cad type. Whethe o not a tibal is a pemanent depends on its othe cad type. See ule 308, “Tibals.” 7063 A card type. Whether or not a tribal is a permanent depends on its other card type. See rule 308, “Tribals.”
7064 7064
7065 Tibute 7065 Tribute
7066 A keywod ability that allows an opponent to choose between a ceatue enteing the battlefield with +1/+1 countes o an additional ability. See ule 702.103, “Tibute.” 7066 A keyword ability that allows an opponent to choose between a creature entering the battlefield with +1/+1 counters or an additional ability. See rule 702.103, “Tribute.”
7067 7067
7068 Tigge 7068 Trigger
7069 Wheneve a game event o game state matches a tiggeed ability’s tigge event, that ability automatically “tigges.” That means its contolle puts it on the stack the next time a playe would eceive pioity. See ule 603, “Handling Tiggeed Abilities.” 7069 Whenever a game event or game state matches a triggered ability’s trigger event, that ability automatically “triggers.” That means its controller puts it on the stack the next time a player would receive priority. See rule 603, “Handling Triggered Abilities.”
7070 7070
7071 Tigge Condition 7071 Trigger Condition
7072 The fist pat of a tiggeed ability, consisting of “when,” “wheneve,” o “at” followed by a tigge event. See ule 603, “Handling Tiggeed Abilities.” 7072 The first part of a triggered ability, consisting of “when,” “whenever,” or “at” followed by a trigger event. See rule 603, “Handling Triggered Abilities.”
7073 7073
7074 Tiggeed Ability 7074 Triggered Ability
7075 A kind of ability. Tiggeed abilities begin with the wod “when,” “wheneve,” o “at.” They’e witten as “[Tigge condition], [effect].” See ule 113, “Abilities,” and ule 603, “Handling Tiggeed Abilities.” 7075 A kind of ability. Triggered abilities begin with the word “when,” “whenever,” or “at.” They’re written as “[Trigger condition], [effect].” See rule 113, “Abilities,” and rule 603, “Handling Triggered Abilities.”
7076 7076
7077 Tigge Event 7077 Trigger Event
7078 The event that a tiggeed ability looks fo. Wheneve the tigge event occus, the tiggeed ability tigges. See ule 603, “Handling Tiggeed Abilities.” 7078 The event that a triggered ability looks for. Whenever the trigger event occurs, the triggered ability triggers. See rule 603, “Handling Triggered Abilities.”
7079 7079
7080 Tun-Based Actions 7080 Turn-Based Actions
7081 Game actions that happen automatically when cetain steps o phases begin, o when each step o phase ends. See ule 703, “Tun-Based Actions.” 7081 Game actions that happen automatically when certain steps or phases begin, or when each step or phase ends. See rule 703, “Turn-Based Actions.”
7082 7082
7083 Tun Makes 7083 Turn Markers
7084 Makes used to keep tack of which playes ae taking tuns in a Gand Melee game. See ule 807.4. 7084 Markers used to keep track of which players are taking turns in a Grand Melee game. See rule 807.4.
7085 7085
7086 Two-Headed Giant Vaiant 7086 Two-Headed Giant Variant
7087 A multiplaye vaiant played among two-playe teams that each have a shaed life total and take a simultaneous tun. See ule 810, “Two-Headed Giant Vaiant.” 7087 A multiplayer variant played among two-player teams that each have a shared life total and take a simultaneous turn. See rule 810, “Two-Headed Giant Variant.”
7088 7088
7089 Type 7089 Type
7090 1. An object’s cad type o, moe boadly, its cad type, subtype, and/o supetype. See ule 205, “Type Line,” and section 3, “Cad Types.” 7090 1. An object’s card type or, more broadly, its card type, subtype, and/or supertype. See rule 205, “Type Line,” and section 3, “Card Types.”
7091 2. An attibute mana has. See ule 106, “Mana.” 7091 2. An attribute mana has. See rule 106, “Mana.”
7092 7092
7093 Type Icon 7093 Type Icon
7094 An icon that appeas in the uppe left of some Futue Sight cads that has no effect on game play. See ule 107.10. 7094 An icon that appears in the upper left of some Future Sight cards that has no effect on game play. See rule 107.10.
7095 7095
7096 Type Line 7096 Type Line
7097 Pat of a cad. The type line is pinted diectly below the illustation and contains the cad’s cad type(s), subtype(s), and/o supetype(s). See ule 205, “Type Line.” 7097 Part of a card. The type line is printed directly below the illustration and contains the card’s card type(s), subtype(s), and/or supertype(s). See rule 205, “Type Line.”
7098 7098
7099 Type-Changing Effect 7099 Type-Changing Effect
7100 An effect that changes an object’s cad type, subtype, and/o supetype. See ules 205.1a–b, 305.7, and 613.1d. 7100 An effect that changes an object’s card type, subtype, and/or supertype. See rules 205.1a–b, 305.7, and 613.1d.
7101 7101
7102 Typecycling 7102 Typecycling
7103 A vaiant of the cycling ability. See ule 702.28, “Cycling.” 7103 A variant of the cycling ability. See rule 702.28, “Cycling.”
7104 7104
7105 Unattach 7105 Unattach
7106 To move an Equipment away fom the ceatue it’s attached to so that the Equipment is on the battlefield but is not equipping anything. See ule 701.3d. 7106 To move an Equipment away from the creature it’s attached to so that the Equipment is on the battlefield but is not equipping anything. See rule 701.3d.
7107 7107
7108 Unblockable (Obsolete) 7108 Unblockable (Obsolete)
7109 A tem that meant “can’t be blocked.” Cads that used this tem have eceived eata in the Oacle cad efeence. 7109 A term that meant “can’t be blocked.” Cards that used this term have received errata in the Oracle card reference.
7110 7110
7111 Unblocked Ceatue 7111 Unblocked Creature
7112 An attacking ceatue once no ceatue has been declaed as a blocke fo it, unless an effect has caused it to become blocked. It emains an unblocked ceatue until it’s emoved fom combat o the combat phase ends, whicheve comes fist. See ule 509, “Declae Blockes Step.” 7112 An attacking creature once no creature has been declared as a blocker for it, unless an effect has caused it to become blocked. It remains an unblocked creature until it’s removed from combat or the combat phase ends, whichever comes first. See rule 509, “Declare Blockers Step.”
7113 7113
7114 Undaunted 7114 Undaunted
7115 A keywod ability that educes the cost of a spell based on the numbe of opponents you have. See ule 702.124, “Undaunted.” 7115 A keyword ability that reduces the cost of a spell based on the number of opponents you have. See rule 702.124, “Undaunted.”
7116 7116
7117 Undying 7117 Undying
7118 A keywod ability that can etun a ceatue fom the gaveyad to the battlefield. See ule 702.92, “Undying.” 7118 A keyword ability that can return a creature from the graveyard to the battlefield. See rule 702.92, “Undying.”
7119 7119
7120 Uneath 7120 Unearth
7121 A keywod ability that lets a playe etun a ceatue cad fom thei gaveyad to the battlefield. See ule 702.83, “Uneath.” 7121 A keyword ability that lets a player return a creature card from their graveyard to the battlefield. See rule 702.83, “Unearth.”
7122 7122
7123 Unflipped 7123 Unflipped
7124 A default status a pemanent may have. See ule 110.5 and ule 709, “Flip Cads.” See also Flipped. 7124 A default status a permanent may have. See rule 110.5 and rule 709, “Flip Cards.” See also Flipped.
7125 7125
7126 Unleash 7126 Unleash
7127 A keywod ability that allows a ceatue to ente the battlefield with a +1/+1 counte on it and stops it fom blocking if it has a +1/+1 counte on it. See ule 702.97, “Unleash.” 7127 A keyword ability that allows a creature to enter the battlefield with a +1/+1 counter on it and stops it from blocking if it has a +1/+1 counter on it. See rule 702.97, “Unleash.”
7128 7128
7129 Unless 7129 Unless
7130 A wod used to indicate a cetain style of cost. See ule 118.12a. 7130 A word used to indicate a certain style of cost. See rule 118.12a.
7131 7131
7132 Untap 7132 Untap
7133 To otate a pemanent back to the upight position fom a sideways position. See ule 701.20, “Tap and Untap.” 7133 To rotate a permanent back to the upright position from a sideways position. See rule 701.20, “Tap and Untap.”
7134 7134
7135 Untap Step 7135 Untap Step
7136 Pat of the tun. This step is the fist step of the beginning phase. See ule 502, “Untap Step.” 7136 Part of the turn. This step is the first step of the beginning phase. See rule 502, “Untap Step.”
7137 7137
7138 Untap Symbol 7138 Untap Symbol
7139 The untap symbol {Q} in an activation cost means “Untap this pemanent.” See ule 107.6. 7139 The untap symbol {Q} in an activation cost means “Untap this permanent.” See rule 107.6.
7140 7140
7141 Untapped 7141 Untapped
7142 A default status a pemanent may have. See ule 110.5 and ule 701.20, “Tap and Untap.” See also Tapped. 7142 A default status a permanent may have. See rule 110.5 and rule 701.20, “Tap and Untap.” See also Tapped.
7143 7143
7144 Upkeep Step 7144 Upkeep Step
7145 Pat of the tun. This step is the second step of the beginning phase. See ule 503, “Upkeep Step.” 7145 Part of the turn. This step is the second step of the beginning phase. See rule 503, “Upkeep Step.”
7146 7146
7147 Vancouve Mulligan 7147 Vancouver Mulligan
7148 Infomal tem fo a pevious system of taking a mulligan. Using the Vancouve mulligan, a playe who took a mulligan shuffled thei hand into thei libay and dew one fewe cad. Afte choosing to not mulligan, a playe who took a mulligan looked at the top cad of thei libay and could put it on the bottom of thei libay. Fo cuent mulligan ules, see ule 103.4. 7148 Informal term for a previous system of taking a mulligan. Using the Vancouver mulligan, a player who took a mulligan shuffled their hand into their library and drew one fewer card. After choosing to not mulligan, a player who took a mulligan looked at the top card of their library and could put it on the bottom of their library. For current mulligan rules, see rule 103.4.
7149 7149
7150 Vanguad 7150 Vanguard
7151 1. A casual vaiant in which each playe plays the ole of a famous chaacte. See ule 902, “Vanguad.” 7151 1. A casual variant in which each player plays the role of a famous character. See rule 902, “Vanguard.”
7152 2. A cad type seen only on nontaditional Magic cads in the Vanguad casual vaiant. A vanguad cad is not a pemanent. See ule 311, “Vanguads.” 7152 2. A card type seen only on nontraditional Magic cards in the Vanguard casual variant. A vanguard card is not a permanent. See rule 311, “Vanguards.”
7153 7153
7154 Vanishing 7154 Vanishing
7155 A keywod ability that limits how long a pemanent emains on the battlefield. See ule 702.62, “Vanishing.” 7155 A keyword ability that limits how long a permanent remains on the battlefield. See rule 702.62, “Vanishing.”
7156 7156
7157 Vaiant 7157 Variant
7158 An additional set of ules that detemines the style of a multiplaye game. See ule 800.2. 7158 An additional set of rules that determines the style of a multiplayer game. See rule 800.2.
7159 7159
7160 Vehicle 7160 Vehicle
7161 An atifact subtype. Vehicles can become atifact ceatues. See ule 301, “Atifacts,” and ule 702.121, “Cew.” 7161 An artifact subtype. Vehicles can become artifact creatures. See rule 301, “Artifacts,” and rule 702.121, “Crew.”
7162 7162
7163 Vigilance 7163 Vigilance
7164 A keywod ability that lets a ceatue attack without tapping. See ule 702.20, “Vigilance.” 7164 A keyword ability that lets a creature attack without tapping. See rule 702.20, “Vigilance.”
7165 7165
7166 Vote 7166 Vote
7167 Some cads instuct playes to vote fom among given options. See ule 701.31, “Vote.” 7167 Some cards instruct players to vote from among given options. See rule 701.31, “Vote.”
7168 7168
7169 Wall 7169 Wall
7170 A ceatue type with no paticula ules meaning. Olde cads with the Wall ceatue type but without defende had an unwitten ability that pecluded them fom attacking. Those cads have eceived eata in the Oacle cad efeence to have defende. Some olde cads that efeenced the Wall ceatue type have also eceived eata. See Defende. 7170 A creature type with no particular rules meaning. Older cards with the Wall creature type but without defender had an unwritten ability that precluded them from attacking. Those cards have received errata in the Oracle card reference to have defender. Some older cards that referenced the Wall creature type have also received errata. See Defender.
7171 7171
7172 Win the Game 7172 Win the Game
7173 Thee ae seveal ways to win the game. See ule 104, “Ending the Game,” and ules 810.8 (fo additional ules fo Two-Headed Giant games) and ule 809.5 (fo additional ules fo Empeo games). 7173 There are several ways to win the game. See rule 104, “Ending the Game,” and rules 810.8 (for additional rules for Two-Headed Giant games) and rule 809.5 (for additional rules for Emperor games).
7174 7174
7175 Withe 7175 Wither
7176 A keywod ability that affects how an object deals damage to a ceatue. See ule 702.79, “Withe.” 7176 A keyword ability that affects how an object deals damage to a creature. See rule 702.79, “Wither.”
7177 7177
7178 Wizadcycling 7178 Wizardcycling
7179 See Typecycling. 7179 See Typecycling.
7180 7180
7181 Wold 7181 World
7182 A supetype that’s nomally elevant on enchantments. See ule 205.4, “Supetypes.” See also Wold Rule. 7182 A supertype that’s normally relevant on enchantments. See rule 205.4, “Supertypes.” See also World Rule.
7183 7183
7184 Wold Rule 7184 World Rule
7185 A state-based action that causes all pemanents with the wold supetype except the one that has had the wold supetype fo the shotest amount of time ae put into thei ownes’ gaveyads. See ule 704.5k. 7185 A state-based action that causes all permanents with the world supertype except the one that has had the world supertype for the shortest amount of time are put into their owners’ graveyards. See rule 704.5k.
7186 7186
7187 X 7187 X
7188 A placeholde fo a numbe that needs to be detemined. See ule 107.3. 7188 A placeholder for a number that needs to be determined. See rule 107.3.
7189 7189
7190 Y 7190 Y
7191 See X. 7191 See X.
7192 7192
7193 You, You 7193 You, Your
7194 Wods that efe to an object’s contolle, its would-be contolle (if a playe is attempting to cast o activate it), o its owne (if it has no contolle). See ule 109.5. 7194 Words that refer to an object’s controller, its would-be controller (if a player is attempting to cast or activate it), or its owner (if it has no controller). See rule 109.5.
7195 7195
7196 Zone 7196 Zone
7197 A place whee objects can be duing a game. See section 4, “Zones.” 7197 A place where objects can be during a game. See section 4, “Zones.”
7198 7198
7199 Zone-Change Tigges 7199 Zone-Change Triggers
7200 Tigge events that involve objects changing zones. See ule 603.6. 7200 Trigger events that involve objects changing zones. See rule 603.6.
7201 7201
7202 7202
7203 Cedits 7203 Credits
7204 7204
7205 Magic: The Gatheing Oiginal Game Design: Richad Gafield 7205 Magic: The Gathering Original Game Design: Richard Garfield
7206 Compehensive Rules Design and Development: Paul Baclay, Mak L. Gottlieb, Beth Mousund, Bill Rose, and Matt Tabak, with contibutions fom Chalie Cátinò, John Cate, Elaine Chase, Lauie Chees, Stephen D’Angelo, Dave DeLaney, Bady Dommemuth, Mike Donais, Skaff Elias, Mike Elliott, Richad Gafield, Dan Gay, Robet Gutschea, Collin Jackson, William Jockusch, Jeff Jodan, Yonemua Kaou, Russell Linnemann, Jim Lin, Steve Lod, Sheldon Meney, Michael Phoenix, Mak Rosewate, David Sachs, Lee Shape, Eli Shiffin, Heny Sten, Donald X. Vaccaino, Thijs van Ommen, Ingo Wanke, Tom Wylie, and Byan Zembuski 7206 Comprehensive Rules Design and Development: Paul Barclay, Mark L. Gottlieb, Beth Moursund, Bill Rose, and Matt Tabak, with contributions from Charlie Cátinò, John Carter, Elaine Chase, Laurie Cheers, Stephen D’Angelo, Dave DeLaney, Brady Dommermuth, Mike Donais, Skaff Elias, Mike Elliott, Richard Garfield, Dan Gray, Robert Gutschera, Collin Jackson, William Jockusch, Jeff Jordan, Yonemura Kaoru, Russell Linnemann, Jim Lin, Steve Lord, Sheldon Menery, Michael Phoenix, Mark Rosewater, David Sachs, Lee Sharpe, Eli Shiffrin, Henry Stern, Donald X. Vaccarino, Thijs van Ommen, Ingo Warnke, Tom Wylie, and Bryan Zembruski
7207 Editing: Del Laugel (lead), Ia Humphey, Gegg Luben, Nat Moes, Matt Tabak, and Hans Ziegle 7207 Editing: Del Laugel (lead), Ira Humphrey, Gregg Luben, Nat Moes, Matt Tabak, and Hans Ziegler
7208 Magic Rules Management: Eli Shiffin 7208 Magic Rules Management: Eli Shiffrin
7209 7209
7210 The Magic: The Gatheing game was designed by Richad Gafield, with contibutions fom Chalie Cátinò, Skaff Elias, Don Felice, Tom Fontaine, Jim Lin, Joel Mick, Chis Page, Dave Pettey, Bay “Bit” Reich, Bill Rose, and Elliott Segal. The mana symbols wee designed by Chistophe Rush. 7210 The Magic: The Gathering game was designed by Richard Garfield, with contributions from Charlie Cátinò, Skaff Elias, Don Felice, Tom Fontaine, Jim Lin, Joel Mick, Chris Page, Dave Pettey, Barry “Bit” Reich, Bill Rose, and Elliott Segal. The mana symbols were designed by Christopher Rush.
7211 7211
7212 Thanks to all ou poject team membes and the many othes too numeous to mention who have contibuted to this poduct. 7212 Thanks to all our project team members and the many others too numerous to mention who have contributed to this product.
7213 7213
7214 7214
7215 7215
7216 7216
7217 7217
7218 7218
7219 7219
7220 7220
7221 7221
7222 7222
7223 7223
7224 7224
7225 These ules ae effective as of Octobe 4, 2019. 7225 These rules are effective as of October 4, 2019.
7226 7226
7227 Published by Wizads of the Coast LLC, PO Box 707, Renton, WA 98057-0707, USA. Wizads of the Coast, Magic: The Gatheing, Magic, Oacle, Aabian Nights, Antiquities, Homelands, Exodus, Odyssey, Miodin, Kamigawa, Ravnica: City of Guilds, Time Spial, Futue Sight, Lowyn, Shadowmoo, Zendika, Scas of Miodin, Innistad, Retun to Ravnica, Khans of Taki, Magic Oigins, Shadows ove Innistad, Elditch Moon, Magic: The Gatheing—Conspiacy, Conspiacy: Take the Cown, Ixalan, Rivals of Ixalan, Unglued, Unstable, Dominaia, and Planeswalke Decks ae tademaks of Wizads of the Coast LLC in the USA and othe counties. Unhinged is a tademak of Hon Abbot Ltd. and is used with pemission. ©2019 Wizads. U.S. Pat. No. RE 37,957. 7227 Published by Wizards of the Coast LLC, PO Box 707, Renton, WA 98057-0707, USA. Wizards of the Coast, Magic: The Gathering, Magic, Oracle, Arabian Nights, Antiquities, Homelands, Exodus, Odyssey, Mirrodin, Kamigawa, Ravnica: City of Guilds, Time Spiral, Future Sight, Lorwyn, Shadowmoor, Zendikar, Scars of Mirrodin, Innistrad, Return to Ravnica, Khans of Tarkir, Magic Origins, Shadows over Innistrad, Eldritch Moon, Magic: The Gathering—Conspiracy, Conspiracy: Take the Crown, Ixalan, Rivals of Ixalan, Unglued, Unstable, Dominaria, and Planeswalker Decks are trademarks of Wizards of the Coast LLC in the USA and other countries. Unhinged is a trademark of Horn Abbot Ltd. and is used with permission. ©2019 Wizards. U.S. Pat. No. RE 37,957.
7228 7228
7229 7229